ssw_ibm_i_74 - Documentation Index

Table of Contents

• IBM i 7.4 문서화
• IBM i 제품 정보
  • 개요 및 새로운 사항
  • PDF 파일 및 매뉴얼
  • 정보 FAQ
  • 정보 갱신
  • 사이트 맵
  • 사용자 메모
    • PDF file for Memorandum to Users
    • About IBM i Memo to Users
      • Who should read this memorandum
      • Additional incompatibility information
      • What's new
      • Installing IBM i 7.4 over IBM i 7.2
      • Discontinued support for certain software and hardware
      • PTF numbers in this memorandum
      • Memorandums for previous releases
      • Prerequisite and related information
      • How to send your comments
    • Read this first
      • Current customers - read before you install
      • Required PTFs before you upgrade to IBM 7.4
      • Upgrade planning
      • Minimum partition memory required for IBM i 7.4
      • IBM i 7.4 is not supported on POWER7 systems
      • Plan for your Operations Console installation or upgrade
    • IBM i operating system
      • Programming Considerations
        • Output file(OUTFILE) changes
        • Command Output cautions
        • Security audit record changes
        • Programs that use customized versions of IBM-supplied commands
        • Changes to system printer files and other IBM-supplied objects
        • Changes to CL commands sending messages to *EXT
      • Removal of support of adapters and configurations in release IBM i 7.4
      • IBM i command changes
        • ADDTCPIFC and CHGTCPIFC command changes
        • ADDUSRSNMP command changes
        • APYJRNCHGX command
        • CHGASPACT and CHGCLURCY command authority changes
        • CHGCTLAPPC and CRTCTLAPPC command changes
        • CHGCTLASC and CRTCTLASC command changes
        • CHGCTLHOST and CRTCTLHOST command changes
        • CHGDEVDSP and CRTDEVDSP command changes
        • CHGDEVHOST and CRTDEVHOST command changes
        • CHGDEVPRT and CRTDEVPRT command changes
        • CHGSNMPA command changes
        • CRTLINETH and CHGLINETH command changes
        • CHGNETA command changes
        • RTVCFGSRC command changes and output
        • STRTRPMGR command default change
        • TRCCNN command changes
        • VRYCFG command changes
        • Removal of commands requiring native adapters
        • Removal of commands and support for DDI, Token-Ring, Wireless, Frame Relay, SDLC, TDLC, and X.25 protocols
        • Removal of IP over SNA commands
        • Removal of commands for Network Interfaces
        • Connection Type parameter changes to Save-Restore commands
        • CHGSMTPA KEEPUNTIL now has two retention time parameters for successful and unsuccessful final status
      • Database changes
        • New SQL reserved words and schema names
        • SQE MAXTMPSTG query processing
        • HASH scalar function change
        • QSYS2.PARSE_STATEMENT table function returns warnings
        • QSYS2.ASP_INFO view change
        • SQE_NATIVE_ACCESS QAQQINI control is deprecated
        • SQL precompiler changes
        • QSYS2 SQL catalog files no longer restored with restore commands
        • OBJECT_STATISTICS() table function changes for *USRPRF objects
        • SYSDISKSTAT extended to return each disk path
        • Calls to SQLSetConnectAttr API may now return -1 with Message ID SQ99999
        • Queries that compare a numeric value with blanks or an empty string will fail with SQLSTATE/SQLCODE ‘22023’/-302 or '53045'/-678
        • Change to authority required for registering Query Governor exit programs
        • QSYS2.PTF_INFO and SYSTOOLS.GROUP_PTF_DETAILS view changes
        • SQLGetData increased buffer length
        • Behavior change for SQL GENERATED ALWAYS AS (USER or SESSION USER)
        • DATA_QUEUE_ENTRIES() table function key length enforcement
        • System Limits removal of old rows
        • Change to implementation of some shared common table expressions for SQL queries
        • New database monitor field indicating shared common table expressions for SQL queries
        • RESTRICT ON DROP clause is no longer ignored, and will cause an error
        • Generate SQL will now produce SQL table names for VIEW and MQT definitions
        • Change in LISTAGG error
        • QSYS2.SYSTEM_STATUS table function, QSYS2.SYSTEM_STATUS_INFO view, and QSYS2.SYSTEM_STATUS_INFO_BASIC view changes
      • Security Related Changes
        • Security audit record changes
        • CHGRDBDIRE command authority requirements change
        • SM (Systems Management Change) audit journal entry change
        • *JOBCTL special authority is required to view Java jobs
        • CHGDEVTAP UNLOAD change now allowed while device is varied on
      • Exit point and QPWDVLDPGM system value behavior changes
      • Support for the QDFTJRN data area removed
      • Integrated web application server changes
      • Integrated web services server changes
      • Create Index (CRTINX) MI change
      • Changes to instructions that materialize the Wait time-out pending interrupt
      • Modify Space Attributes (MODS) MI change
      • Java Changes
        • Default Java file.encoding and default charset changed to UTF-8
        • Native JDBC driver can fail with SQL0191 (Mixed data or UTF-8 data not properly formed)
      • Default PASE CCSID and Locale Changed to UTF-8
      • PASE environment variable change
      • Secure sockets layer (SSL) and Transport Layer Security (TLS) changes
        • TLS enabled and default cipher specification lists have changed for System TLS
        • System TLS support for SSLv2 has been removed
        • TLSv1.3 protocol has been enabled for System TLS
        • TLSv1.1 and TLSv1.0 protocols have been disabled for System TLS
        • TLS default signature algorithm certificate list has changed for System TLS
        • TLSv1.3 enablement may require changes to GSKit client to prevent GSK_WOULD_BLOCK or EWOULDBLOCK advisory condition
      • QMAXACTLVL system value
      • Mitigating Spectre and Meltdown vulnerabilities in new and existing programs
      • Percent of Permanent Addresses Used Calculation
      • ILE RPG Runtime Changes
        • XML-SAX with "ccsid=1200" or "ccsid=13488", when the default UCS-2 CCSID for the module is a different CCSID
      • Service Monitor autostart job entry removed from QUSRWRK subsystem description
      • Updated EBCDIC Unicode maps for CCSIDs 1377 and 1388
    • Options
      • IBM Navigator for i
        • QIBM_NAV_ALL_FUNCTION Function Usage ID now shipped with default of *DENIED
        • Access to lazy-load tables through NEWNAV in QNEWNAVSRV
      • Integrated Server Support (5770-SS1 Option 29)
    • Licensed programs
      • IBM Db2 Mirror for i (5770-DBM)
        • Db2 Mirror Object Replication Capability Extended to User Indexes, User Spaces, and Data Queues
        • Db2 Mirror security changes
          • Changes to authority required for QSYS2.COMPARE_RESYNC_STATUS() table function
          • QMRDBAPI service program default public authority changed from *USE to *EXCLUDE
          • Setup tools default public authority changed to *EXCLUDE
          • Replication Criteria List (RCL) default public authority changed to *EXCLUDE
          • Compare services now require *ALLOBJ special authority
          • QSYS2.EVALUATE_PENDING_REPLICATION_CRITERIA default public authority changed to *EXCLUDE
        • Db2 Mirror resume processing change
      • Collaboration software (formerly Lotus) supported on IBM i 7.4
      • IBM WebSphere Application Server 8.5 (5733-W85) and 9.0 (5733-W90)
      • IBM Db2 Web Query for i (5733-WQX) changes
      • IBM Developer Kit for Java (5770-JV1)
      • Backup Recovery and Media Services (5770-BR1)
        • Check Parameters and Data Areas used in BRMS
      • IBM Content Manager OnDemand for i (5770-RD1)
        • Document command changes
        • PDF Indexer requirements
      • IBM Rational Development Studio for i (5770-WDS)
        • ILE COBOL Reserved words
        • An RPG file defined with USAGE(*UPDATE) is no longer opened delete-capable
        • %TIMESTAMP now returns a timestamp with microsecond precision
      • IBM i Access for Windows (5770-XE1)
      • IBM i Access Client Solutions (5733-XJ1)
        • Open Source Package Management Interface Proxy Support
      • IBM Universal Manageability Enablement (5770-UME) changes
  • 주의사항
  • 이 제품의 내게 필요한 옵션 기능
• 가용성
  • 가용성 로드맵
    • IBM i 7.3의 새로운 사항
    • 가용성 로드맵에 대한 PDF 파일
    • 가용성 개념
    • 가용성 값 예측
    • 필요한 가용성 레벨 결정
    • 계획되지 않은 가동 중단 예방
      • 디스크 장애 대비
      • 전원 꺼짐 대비
      • 효과적인 시스템 관리 사례 사용
      • 시스템을 위한 공간 준비
    • 계획되지 않은 가동 중단 단축
      • 시스템 재시작에 걸리는 시간 단축
      • 비계획 가동 중단 후 최신 변경사항 회복
      • 비계획 가동 중단 후 유실된 데이터 회복
      • 독립 디스크 풀의 연결변환에 걸리는 시간 단축
    • 계획된 가동 중단 단축
      • 백업 단축 창
        • 온라인 백업 수행
        • 2차 사본으로부터 백업
        • 더 적은 데이터를 백업
      • 소프트웨어 유지보수 및 업그레이드 창 단축
      • 하드웨어 유지보수 및 업그레이드 창 단축
    • 고가용성
    • 가용성 로드맵에 대한 관련 정보
  • 단일 시스템 가용성
  • 고가용성
    • High availability overview
      • What's new for IBM i 7.4
      • PDF file for High availability overview
      • Benefits of high availability
        • Planned outages
        • Unplanned outages
        • Disaster recovery
        • Backup window reduction
        • Load balancing
      • High availability criteria
        • Budget
        • Uptime requirements
        • Outage coverage
        • Recovery time objective (RTO)
        • Recovery point objective (RPO)
        • Resilience requirements
        • Automated failover and switchover
        • Distance requirements
        • Number of backup systems
        • Access to a secondary copy of the data
        • System performance
      • Components of high availability
        • Application resilience
        • Levels of application resiliency
        • Data resilience
        • Environment resilience
        • Simplicity
      • IBM PowerHA SystemMirror for i overview
        • Comparison of PowerHA data resiliency technologies
          • Switched logical unit
          • Geographic mirroring
          • Metro Mirror
          • Global Mirror
          • DS8000 Full System HyperSwap
          • DS8000 HyperSwap with independent auxiliary storage pools (IASPs)
            • Use Case scenario's
              • HyperSwap + LUN switch environment
              • HyperSwap + Affinity environment
              • Adding FlashCopy
          • FlashCopy
        • HA Technologies combined
          • DS8000 HyperSwap and Global Mirror
        • High availability management
          • IBM PowerHA SystemMirror for i interfaces
            • PowerHA graphical interface
            • PowerHA commands
            • PowerHA APIs
          • Option 41 (HA Switchable Resources)
          • Advanced node failure detection
          • High availability function in the base operating system
      • Related information for High availability overview
    • High availability technologies
      • What's new for IBM i 7.4
      • PDF file for High availability technologies
      • IBM i Cluster technology
        • Cluster concepts
          • Cluster node
          • Cluster resource group (CRG)
            • Application CRG
            • Data CRG
            • Device CRG
            • Peer CRG
            • Recovery domain
            • Cluster resource group exit programs
          • Cluster version
          • Device domain
          • Cluster jobs
          • Container cluster resource group
        • Base cluster functions
          • Heartbeat monitoring
          • Reliable message function
        • Cluster events
          • Switchover
          • Failover
            • Cluster message queue
            • Failover message queue
          • Cluster partition
          • Merge
            • Example: Merge
          • Rejoin
            • Example: Rejoin
      • Advanced node failure detection
      • Cluster administrative domain
      • PowerHA data replication technologies
        • Geographic mirroring
        • Metro Mirror
        • Global Mirror
        • Switched logical units
        • FlashCopy
        • DS8000 Full System HyperSwap
        • DS8000 HyperSwap with independent auxiliary storage pools (IASPs)
      • High availability management
        • IBM PowerHA SystemMirror for i interfaces
          • PowerHA graphical interface
          • PowerHA commands
          • PowerHA APIs
        • IBM PowerHA SystemMirror for i version support
        • Option 41 (HA Switchable Resources)
        • High availability function in the base operating system
      • Related information for High availability technologies
      • Resource Monitoring and Control (RMC)
    • Implementing high availability
      • What's new for IBM i 7.4
      • PDF file for Implementing high availability
      • Installing IBM PowerHA SystemMirror for i licensed program
      • Uninstalling IBM PowerHA SystemMirror for i licensed program
      • Planning your high availability solution
        • Cluster applications
          • Identifying resilient applications
          • IBM i architecture for cluster-enabled applications
          • Writing a highly available cluster application
            • Making application programs resilient
            • Restarting highly available cluster applications
            • Calling a cluster resource group exit program
          • Application CRG considerations
            • Managing application CRG takeover of IP addresses
              • Enabling application switchover across subnets with IPv4
              • Enabling application switchover across subnets with IPv6
            • Example: Application cluster resource group failover actions
            • Example: Application exit program
        • Planning clusters
          • Hardware requirements for clusters
          • Software requirements for clusters
          • Communications requirements for clusters
            • Dedicate a network for clusters
            • Tips: Cluster communications
            • Performance planning for clusters
              • Tunable cluster communications parameters
              • Changing cluster resource services settings
            • Planning multiple-release clusters
          • Performance planning for clusters
          • Planning advanced node failure detection
            • Hardware requirements for the advanced node failure detection
            • Software requirements for the advanced node failure detection
          • Planning checklist for clusters
        • Planning environment resiliency
          • Planning for a cluster administrative domain
          • Planning monitored resources entries (MRE)
        • Planning data resiliency
          • Determine which data should be made resilient
          • Determine site configuration
          • PowerHA supported storage servers
          • Supported external storage communication methods
            • Data Storage command-line interface (DSCLI)
            • Storage Area Network (SAN) volume controller (SVC) usage
            • Copy Services Management (CSM) Storage Controller
          • Planning geographic mirroring
            • Hardware requirements for geographic mirroring
            • Software requirements for geographic mirroring
            • Communications requirements for geographic mirroring
            • Journal planning for geographic mirroring
            • Backup planning for geographic mirroring
            • Performance planning for geographic mirroring
          • Planning switched logical units (LUNs)
            • Hardware requirements for switched logical units
            • Software requirements for switched logical units
            • Communications requirement for Switched logical units
          • Planning the FlashCopy feature
            • Hardware requirements for the FlashCopy feature
            • Software requirements for the FlashCopy feature
            • Communications requirements for the FlashCopy feature
          • Planning Metro Mirror
            • Hardware requirements for Metro Mirror
            • Software requirements for Metro Mirror
            • Communications requirement for Metro Mirror
            • Journal planning for Metro Mirror
            • Backup planning for Metro Mirror
            • Performance planning for Metro Mirror
          • Planning Global Mirror
            • Hardware requirements for Global Mirror
            • Software requirements for Global Mirror
            • Communications requirement for Global Mirror
            • Journal planning for Global Mirror
            • Backup planning for Global Mirror
            • Performance planning for Global Mirror
          • Planning for DS8000 Full System HyperSwap
            • Hardware requirements for DS8000 Full System HyperSwap
            • Software requirements for DS8000 Full System HyperSwap
            • Communications requirements for DS8000 Full System HyperSwap
            • Performance requirements for DS8000 Full System HyperSwap
          • Planning DS8000 HyperSwap with independent auxiliary storage pools (IASPs)
            • Hardware requirements for DS8000 HyperSwap with independent auxiliary storage pools (IASPs)
            • Software requirements for DS8000 HyperSwap with independent auxiliary storage pools (IASPs)
            • Communications requirements for DS8000 HyperSwap with independent auxiliary storage pools (IASPs)
            • Journal planning for DS8000 HyperSwap with independent auxiliary storage pools (IASPs)
            • Backup planning for DS8000 HyperSwap with independent auxiliary storage pools (IASPs)
            • Performance requirements for DS8000 HyperSwap with independent auxiliary storage pools (IASPs)
        • Security planning for high availability
          • Distributing cluster-wide information
          • Considerations for using clusters with firewalls
          • Maintaining user profiles on all nodes
        • Planning for PowerHA policies
          • PowerHA policies for cluster administrative domain resources
          • QCST_CRG_CANCEL_FAILOVER PowerHA policy
          • The PowerHA QHA_COMM_STRICT_CERT_CHECK high availability policy
      • Implementing PowerHA
        • Configuring high availability infrastructure
          • Setting up TCP/IP for high availability
            • Setting TCP/IP configuration attributes
            • Starting the INETD server
          • Configuring clusters
            • Creating a cluster
              • Enabling nodes to be added to a cluster
              • Adding nodes
              • Starting nodes
              • Adding a node to a device domain
              • Creating cluster resource groups (CRGs)
                • Creating application CRGs
                • Creating data CRGs
                • Creating device CRGs
                • Creating peer CRGs
              • Starting a CRG
          • Specifying message queues
          • Performing switchovers
          • Configuring nodes
            • Starting nodes
            • Enabling nodes to be added to a cluster
            • Adding nodes
            • Adding a node to a device domain
          • Configuring advanced node failure detection
            • Configuring advanced node failure detection on hardware management console (HMC) with CIM server
            • Configuring advanced node failure detection on hardware management console (HMC) with REST server
            • Configuring advanced node failure detection in a Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) on an Integrated Virtualization Manager (IVM) managed server
          • Configuring Cluster Resource Groups
            • Starting a CRG
            • Creating cluster resource groups (CRGs)
              • Creating application CRGs
              • Creating data CRGs
              • Creating device CRGs
              • Creating peer CRGs
          • Configuring a Cluster Resource Group container
            • Create a cluster resource group (CRG) container
          • Scenarios: Configuring high availability
            • Scenario: Geographic mirroring
            • Scenario: Metro Mirror
            • Scenario: Global Mirror
        • Configuring cluster administrative domains
          • Creating a cluster administrative domain
          • Adding a node to the cluster administrative domain
          • Starting a cluster administrative domain
          • Synchronization of monitored resource
          • Adding monitored resource entries
        • Configuring independent disk pools
          • Creating an independent disk pool
          • Starting mirrored protection
          • Stopping mirrored protection
          • Adding a disk unit or a disk pool
          • Evaluating the current configuration
          • Making an independent disk pool highly available
        • Configuring copy descriptions
          • Adding an ASP copy description
          • Adding a SVC copy description
        • Starting copy sessions
          • Starting an ASP session
          • Starting a CSM session
          • Starting a SVC session
        • Adding an high availability policy
        • Configuring geographic mirroring
        • Configuring Metro Mirror
        • Configuring Global Mirror
        • Configuring switched logical units (LUNs)
        • Configuring a FlashCopy session
        • Configuring DS8000 Full System HyperSwap
          • Defining HyperSwap Affinity
        • Configuring DS8000 HyperSwap with independent auxiliary storage pools (IASPs)
          • Configuring LUN level switching in the HyperSwap enviroment on IBM i
      • Managing PowerHA
        • Scenarios: Managing high availability solutions
          • Scenarios: Performing backups in a high-availability environment
            • Scenario: Performing backups in geographic mirroring environment
            • Scenario: Performing a FlashCopy function
          • Scenario: Upgrading operating system in a high-availability environment
            • Example: Upgrading operating system
        • Managing clusters
          • Adjusting the PowerHA version
          • Adjusting the cluster version of a cluster
          • Deleting a cluster
          • Displaying cluster configuration
          • Saving and restoring cluster configuration
          • Monitoring cluster status
          • Specifying message queues
          • Cluster deconfiguration checklist
          • Managing nodes
            • Displaying node properties
            • Stopping nodes
            • Removing nodes
            • Removing a node from a device domain
          • Add a cluster monitor to a node
          • Removing a cluster monitor
          • Managing cluster resource groups (CRGs)
            • Displaying CRG status
            • Stopping a CRG
            • Deleting a CRG
            • Changing the recovery domain for a CRG
              • Creating site names and data port IP addresses
          • Managing a cluster resource group (CRG) container
            • Starting a cluster resource group (CRG) container
            • Ending a cluster resource group (CRG) container
            • Deleting a cluster resource group (CRG) container
            • Displaying a cluster resource group (CRG) container
            • Adding nodes and configuration objects using the Configure CRG Container command
            • Adding a cluster node to the recovery domain of a CRG container
            • Adding a CRG to a CRG container
            • Removing nodes and configuration objects using the Configure CRG Container command
            • Removing a CGR from a CRG container
            • Removing a cluster node from the recovery domain of a CRG container
            • Changing the primary node of a cluster resource group (CRG) container using the Change CRG Container (CHGCRGCNR) command
            • Changing the current recovery domain of a cluster resource group (CRG) container
          • Managing failover outage events
          • Managing cluster administrative domains
            • Displaying cluster administrative domains
            • Stopping a cluster administrative domain
            • Deleting a cluster administrative domain
            • Changing the properties of a cluster administrative domain
            • Managing monitored resource entries
              • Working with monitored resource entry status
              • Removing monitored resource entries
              • Listing monitored resource entries
              • Selecting attributes to monitor
                • Attributes that can be monitored
              • Displaying monitored resource entry messages
        • Managing independent disk pools
          • Make a disk pool unavailable
          • Quiescing an independent disk pool
          • Resuming an independent disk pool
        • Managing copy descriptions
          • Displaying an ASP copy description
          • Displaying a SVC copy description
          • Changing an ASP copy description
          • Changing a SVC copy description
          • Removing an ASP copy description
          • Removing a SVC copy description
        • PowerHA configuration description types
          • Adding an HA configuration description
          • Displaying an HA configuration description
          • Changing an HA configuration description
          • Removing an HA configuration description
        • Managing PowerHA policies
          • Work with PowerHA policies
          • Displaying a PowerHA policy
          • Changing a PowerHA policy
          • Saving PowerHA policies
          • Restoring PowerHA policies
          • Removing PowerHA policies
        • Managing geographic mirroring
          • Suspending geographic mirroring
          • Resuming geographic mirroring
          • Detaching mirror copy
          • Reattaching mirror copy
          • Deconfiguring geographic mirroring
          • Changing geographic mirroring properties
        • Managing Metro Mirror
          • Suspending Metro Mirror
          • Resuming Metro Mirror sessions
          • Detaching Metro Mirror copy
          • Reattaching Metro Mirror
          • Ending Metro Mirror
          • Displaying or changing Metro Mirror properties
        • Managing Global Mirror
          • Suspending Global Mirror
          • Resuming Global Mirror
          • Detaching Global Mirror copy
          • Reattaching Global Mirror
          • Ending Global Mirror
          • Changing Global Mirror session properties
        • Managing switched logical units (LUNs)
          • Making switched logical units (LUNs) available and unavailable
        • Managing the FlashCopy technology
          • Updating a FlashCopy session
          • Reattaching a FlashCopy session
          • Detaching a FlashCopy session
          • Deleting a FlashCopy session
          • Restoring data from a FlashCopy session
          • Changing FlashCopy properties
        • Managing DS8000 Full System HyperSwap
          • Displaying HyperSwap Status
          • Perform a Planned HyperSwap
          • Suspend HyperSwap Replication
          • Resume HyperSwap Replication
          • Recovering from an unplanned HyperSwap Failover
        • Managing DS8000 HyperSwap with independent auxiliary storage pools (IASPs)
          • Displaying HyperSwap Status
          • HyperSwap planned switchover of SYSBAS
          • HyperSwap planned switchover of independent auxiliary storage pool (IASP)
          • HyperSwap planned switchover with HyperSwap and LUN switching
          • CRG Planned switchover with HyperSwap and LUN switching
          • HyperSwap failover with HyperSwap and LUN switching
            • Two primary case
          • CRG Failover HyperSwap and LUN switching
          • Live partition mobility switch with HyperSwap and affinity
          • DS8000 HyperSwap IASP with FlashCopy
      • Troubleshooting your high availability solution
        • Troubleshooting clusters
          • Determine if a cluster problem exists
          • Gathering recovery information for a cluster
          • Common cluster problems
          • Partition errors
            • Determining primary and secondary cluster partitions
            • Changing partitioned nodes to failed
            • Partitioned cluster administrative domains
            • Tips: Cluster partitions
          • Cluster recovery
            • Recovering from cluster job failures
            • Recovering a damaged cluster object
            • Recovering a cluster after a complete system loss
            • Recovering a cluster after a disaster
            • Restoring a cluster from backup tapes
        • Troubleshooting geographic mirroring
          • Geographic mirroring messages
        • Troubleshooting Metro Mirror, Global Mirror, and FlashCopy
        • Troubleshooting HyperSwap
    • Related information for Implementing high availability
  • Maximum capacities
    • What's new for IBM i 7.4
    • PDF file for Maximum capacities
    • Cluster limits
    • Communications limits
    • Database and SQL limits
    • File system limits
    • Journal limits
    • Save and restore limits
    • Security limits
    • Work management limits
    • Miscellaneous limits
    • Related information for Maximum capacities
  • Db2 Mirror
    • Db2 Mirror용 PDF 파일
    • 소개 및 구조
      • 기술 개요
      • Db2 Mirror의 장점
      • 애플리케이션 구조
      • 데이터 센터 구조
    • Db2 Mirror 개념
      • 구조
      • RDMA over Converged Ethernet
      • 네트워크 중복성 그룹
      • 복제 상태
      • 복제 가능 오브젝트
      • 복제 범주 리스트
      • 독립적 보조 기억장치 풀
      • 재해 복구
      • 사용자 인터페이스
      • 용어 및 정의
    • 애플리케이션 고려사항
      • 데이터베이스 복제를 위한 애플리케이션 고려사항
      • 애플리케이션 가용성을 위한 JTOpen JDBC 드라이버 지원
      • 작업 큐 및 작업 스케줄 항목
      • 복제된 데이터베이스 파일에서 데이터 쿼리
      • 데이터베이스 트리거 고려사항
      • Db2 Mirror 종료점
      • 복제 상태가 BLOCKED인 경우 애플리케이션 동작
      • XA 분산 트랜잭션 환경
      • IBM MQ 및 Db2 Mirror
    • 계획 및 설정
      • 설정 프로세스 개요
      • 계획 고려사항
        • 소프트웨어 요구사항
        • 하드웨어 요구사항
        • 하드웨어 관리 콘솔(HMC) 요구사항
        • 기억장치 요구사항
        • 네트워크
        • 종료점
        • 보안 및 감사
        • NTP를 사용한 시간 동기화
        • 클러스터링
        • 독립적 보조 기억장치 풀
        • 관계형 데이터베이스 디렉토리 항목
        • 오브젝트 복제 고려사항
        • 계획 체크리스트
      • 복제 전 구성
      • GUI 설정 마법사를 사용하여 Db2 Mirror 설정
        • 소스 및 사본 노드 구성
          • HMC 정보
          • 노드 정보
          • 복제 방법
          • 클러스터 정보
          • 시간 서버
        • 네트워크 중복성 그룹 구성
        • 기억장치 구성
          • 기억장치 서버 구성
            • IBM System Storage DS8000 구성
            • IBM Spectrum Virtualize 구성
          • *SYSBAS 호스트 구성
          • IASP 호스트 구성
        • 복제 범주 리스트 구성
        • 유효성 검증 및 복제
        • 설정이 완료된 후
      • Db2 Mirror에 IFS IASP 추가
      • 복제 후 구성
      • 재해 복구 환경의 구성
      • 문제점 해결 안내서 설정
      • 추가 설정 주제
        • Db2 Mirror GUI 소개
        • 클러스터 모니터를 위한 디지털 인증
        • DS 명령행 인터페이스(DS CLI) 설치
        • IBM Spectrum Virtualize 기억장치에 액세스하기 위한 SSH 키 파일 작성
        • i용 IBM Administration Runtime Expert를 사용하는 Db2 Mirror를 위한 사용자 정의 플러그인
        • 수동 기억장치 복제 고려사항
        • 명령을 사용하여 Db2 Mirror 설정
        • db2mtool 명령 참조
          • db2mtool 명령의 매개변수
          • db2mtool 명령에 대한 로그 파일
          • db2mtool 명령에 대한 조치 매개변수
            • 구성 파일 조치
            • 복제 조치
            • 클러스터 조치
        • db2mtool 명령에서 사용되는 JSON 파일
          • clone_info JSON 파일
          • meta_data JSON 파일
    • Db2 Mirror 관리 및 모니터링
      • Db2 Mirror 환경 이해
        • 복제 상태
          • 복제 세부사항 정보
        • 오브젝트 복제 세부사항
          • 항상 복제되는 오브젝트
            • 권한부여 리스트
            • 사용자 프로파일
            • 함수 사용 정보
            • 보안 속성 정보
          • 복제 가능 오브젝트
            • 데이터베이스 오브젝트
              • 데이터베이스 파일 및 SQL 테이블
              • 트리거
              • SQL 함수 및 프로시저
              • SQL 글로벌 변수
              • SQL 패키지
              • SQL 스키마
              • SQL 순서
              • SQL 사용자 정의 유형
              • SQL XML 스키마 저장소 오브젝트
            • 라이브러리
            • 저널
            • 데이터 영역
            • 데이터 큐
            • 작업 설명
            • 작업 큐
            • 출력 큐 및 스풀 파일
              • 스풀 파일 복제
            • 프로그램 및 서비스 프로그램
            • 환경 변수
            • 시스템 값
          • 복제된 오브젝트에 영향을 미치는 조치
            • 작성 조치
            • 삭제 조치
            • 변경 조치
            • 이동 및 이름 변경 조치
            • 감사 조치
            • 권한 조치
            • 잠금 조치
            • 복원 조치
            • 저널링 조치
          • 데이터베이스 오브젝트 복제 세부사항
          • 복제 상태가 BLOCKED인 경우 특정 오브젝트 유형의 동작
            • 차단된 동안 변경이 허용되는 오브젝트 유형
            • Db2 Mirror 재개 시 변경사항 처리
        • ACS의 예제로부터 삽입
      • 계획된 가동 중단 관리
        • SYSBAS 복제 일시중단
        • SYSBAS 복제 재개
        • 노드가 일시중단된 상태로 유지되는 경우
        • 재동기화
        • IASP에 대한 일시중단 및 재개 의미
        • 1차 및 2차 역할 스와핑
        • 시스템 관리를 위한 우수 사례
      • 계획되지 않은 가동 중단 관리
        • 클러스터 모니터
        • 쿼럼 노드
        • 자동 인수
        • 자동 재개
        • TRACKING 상태로 강제실행
        • 영구적인 일시중단
        • 장기 가동 중단 후 재개
        • 재복제 프로세스
          • SYSBAS 재복제
          • 데이터베이스 IASP 재복제
      • Db2 Mirror 환경 관리
        • Db2 Mirror의 PTF
        • 복제 범주 리스트 관리
          • RCL에 규칙 추가
          • 지연 중인 규칙 그룹
          • 차후 오브젝트에 대한 규칙 추가
          • 복제에서 오브젝트 제거
          • 규칙 추가 및 제거의 고려사항
          • 복제 규칙 보기
          • 시스템 정의 규칙
          • 시스템 값과 환경 변수 규칙
        • 오브젝트 추적 리스트 관리
          • 재동기화 처리
          • 재동기화 우수 사례
          • 재동기화 문제점 해결
        • Db2 Mirror 등록정보
        • IASP 관리
          • 데이터베이스 IASP 관리
          • IFS IASP 관리
        • NRG 관리
          • 연결 관리
          • 실패 관리
          • NRG 구성 저장 및 복원
          • Db2 Mirror GUI를 사용하여 NRG 관리
      • Db2 Mirror 환경 모니터링
        • 복제 상태 모니터링
        • NRG 상태 모니터링
        • NTP 시간 동기화 모니터링
        • Db2 Mirror 작업
        • 메세지에 대한 모니터링
        • 종료점을 사용하는 모니터링
        • 비교 툴
      • 백업 및 복구
        • 백업
        • 회복
          • 복제 기준 리스트 데이터 복원
        • ObjectConnect
      • 재해 복구 고려사항
        • PowerHA를 사용한 재해 복구
          • 4 노드 Db2 Mirror / PowerHA 구성
          • 4 노드 Db2 Mirror / PowerHA 구성 관리
    • Db2 Mirror 서비스
      • 통신 서비스
        • ADD_NRG_LINK 프로시저
        • CHANGE_NRG 프로시저
        • CHANGE_NRG_LINK 프로시저
        • NRG_INFO 보기
        • NRG_LINK_INFO 보기
        • RDMA_CONNECTION_INFO 보기
        • RDMA_LINK_INFO 보기
        • REMOVE_NRG_LINK 프로시저
      • 제품 서비스
        • ADD_MIRROR_IASP 프로시저
        • CHANGE_MIRROR 프로시저
        • MIRROR_CLUSTER_INFO 보기
        • MIRROR_INFO 보기
        • REMOVE_MIRROR_IASP 프로시저
        • SET_DEFAULT_INCLUSION_STATE 프로시저
        • SET_MIRROR_CLUSTER 프로시저
        • SETUP_MIRROR 프로시저
        • SWAP_MIRROR_ROLES 프로시저
        • TERMINATE_MIRROR 프로시저
      • 복제 서비스
        • ADD_REPLICATION_CRITERIA 프로시저
        • CHECK_REPLICATION_CRITERIA 스칼라 함수
        • EVALUATE_PENDING_REPLICATION_CRITERIA 테이블 기능
        • INSPECT_REPLICATION_CRITERIA 테이블 기능
        • PROCESS_PENDING_REPLICATION_CRITERIA 프로시저
        • REMOVE_REPLICATION_CRITERIA 프로시저
        • REPLICATION_CRITERIA_INFO 보기
        • VALIDATE_PENDING_REPLICATION_CRITERIA 테이블 기능
        • 추가 복제 예제
          • 지연 중인 복제 기준 예
      • 재동기화 서비스
        • CHANGE_RESYNC_ENTRIES 프로시저
        • COMPARE_RESYNC_STATUS 테이블 기능
        • RESYNC_STATUS 보기
        • SET_RESYNC_PRIORITIES 프로시저
      • 서비스 가능성 서비스
        • MIRROR_COMPARE_LIBRARY 프로시저
        • MIRROR_COMPARE_NODE 프로시저
        • MIRROR_COMPARE_OBJECT 테이블 기능
        • MIRROR_DISPLAY_JOURNAL 테이블 기능
        • MIRROR_FLIGHT_RECORDER_INFO 보기
        • SET_MIRROR_FLIGHT_RECORDER_ALL_LEVELS 프로시저
        • SET_MIRROR_FLIGHT_RECORDER_INFO 프로시저
• Basic system operations
  • PDF file for Basic system operations
  • Overview of basic system operations
    • Using system interfaces
    • Working with devices
    • Working with printer output
      • Managing printer output
      • Starting printers
      • Starting a printer from System i Navigator
    • Working with storage
    • Working with the control panel
      • Control panel concepts
        • Types of control panels
          • Physical control panel
          • Remote control panel
          • Virtual control panel
        • Control panel functions
        • Control panel buttons, lights, and indicators
      • Setting up your control panel
      • Accessing control panel functions
      • Instructions and descriptions for control panel functions
        • Normal control panel functions
        • Extended control panel functions
        • Low-level debug panel functions 57 through 70
      • Using remote control panel APIs
        • System power and test APIs
          • Turning on the system
          • Performing panel lamp test
          • Clearing panel lamp test
          • Powering off the system
        • IPL-related APIs
          • Setting IPL mode to Manual
          • Setting IPL mode to Normal
          • Setting IPL mode to Auto
          • Setting IPL mode to Secure
          • Setting IPL type to A
          • Setting IPL type to B
          • Setting IPL type to C
          • Setting IPL type to D
          • Starting an IPL
          • Setting IPL speed to Fast
          • Setting IPL speed to Slow
          • Setting IPL speed to system default
        • Other system function APIs
          • Starting dedicated service tools on the primary or alternate console
          • Starting a main storage dump
          • Disabling continuously powered main storage
        • APIs that check the system status
          • Is CPM present?
          • Is CPM enabled?
          • Is the key inserted?
          • Is the system turned on?
          • Is the attention light lit?
          • Is SPCN present?
          • Getting the IPL mode
          • Getting the IPL type
          • Getting the IPL speed
          • Getting type and model information
          • Getting the SPCN system reference code
          • Getting all system reference codes 1 - 9
  • Starting and stopping the system
    • Starting the system
      • Starting the system without making configuration changes (unattended IPL)
      • Changing the system during IPL (attended IPL)
        • Attended IPL displays
          • Setting major system options
          • Defining or changing the system at IPL
          • Editing access paths during attended IPL
          • Editing check pending constraints during attended IPL
      • Changing your system IPL from the control panel
        • IPL type
        • Operating mode of an IPL
        • Changing operating modes and IPL types
        • Changing system values during IPL
      • Changing the IPL startup program
        • Source for CL startup program
        • Startup program to set the (QSTRUPPGM) system value
      • Scheduling a system shutdown and restart
        • Displaying the power-on and power-off schedule
        • Changing power-on and power-off schedule defaults
        • Changing the power-on and power-off schedule for a single event
        • Solving problems with the automatic power schedule
      • Causes of abnormal IPLs
    • Signing on to the system
      • Signing on to the system using System i Navigator
      • Signing on to the system using the character-based interface
      • Changing your password
        • Changing the system password
        • Bypassing the system password
    • Stopping the system
      • Turning off the system immediately
      • Using the Power button
    • System values that control IPL
  • IBM i concepts
    • Messages
    • IBM i commands
    • Security and user authority
      • Authority to access objects
      • Security levels
      • User profiles
      • Authorization lists
    • Files and file systems
    • IBM i restricted state
    • Jobs
    • Subsystems, job queues, and memory pools
    • Objects
    • Logs and journals
    • Software fixes
  • Printing the system configuration list
  • Analyzing and reporting system problems
  • Related information for basic system operations
• 사용자 시스템에 연결
  • 연결 선택
    • IBM i에 연결: IBM Navigator for i
    • IBM i에 연결: Linux, Mac 및 Windows 클라이언트
    • IBM i에 연결: 모빌 및 웹 클라이언트
    • IBM i에 연결: 인터페이스
    • IBM i에 연결: 콘솔
  • IBM i Access
    • IBM i Access Client Solutions
      • What's new
      • PDF file for IBM i Access Client Solutions
      • Overview of IBM i Access Client Solutions
      • Getting started with IBM i Access Client Solutions
      • License information
      • Getting product updates
      • IBM i Access Client Solutions console connections
      • Related information for IBM i Access Client Solutions
      • Setting up the IBM i platform
        • Required and optional programs to install
        • Configuring TCP/IP on IBM i platform
        • Configuring IBM i NetServer on IBM i
        • Host server administration
          • Identify IBM i host servers and associated programs.
            • Host servers by function
            • File server
            • File server programs
            • Database server
              • Database server programs
              • SQL packages
                • SQL package names
                • Cleanup SQL packages
              • Statement naming conventions
              • Rules and restrictions when using DRDA
            • Data queue server
            • Network print server
            • Central server
            • Remote command and distributed program call server
            • Signon server
            • Server Port Mapper
            • Extended Dynamic Remote SQL server (QXDAEDRSQL)
            • DRDA/DDM server
          • Use IBM i host servers
            • Establish client/server communications
              • Host Servers port numbers
                • Port numbers for host servers and server mapper
              • Start host servers
                • Server daemons
                • Example: STRHOSTSVR
              • End host servers
                • Example: ENDHOSTSVR
            • IBM i Subsystems
              • Subsystems used for server Jobs
              • Use of autostart jobs
              • Use of prestart jobs
            • IBM i system values
            • Identify and display IBM i server jobs
              • Use IBM Navigator for i to identify server jobs
                • IBM i job names
                • Display using WRKACTJOB
                • Display using the history log
                • Display server job for a user
          • Use server exit programs
            • Register exit programs
            • Write exit programs
            • Exit program parameters
              • File server
              • Database server
              • Data queue server
              • Network print server
              • Central server
              • Remote command and distributed program call server
              • Signon server
            • Examples: Exit programs
              • Examples: Creating exit programs with RPG
              • Examples: Create exit programs with CL commands
              • Examples: Create QIBM_QZDA_INIT exit programs with CL commands
              • Examples: Create QIBM_QZDA_INIT exit programs with ILE C
      • Console Advanced Topics
        • Console planning considerations
          • Planning considerations for your backup console
        • Console hardware requirements
        • Planning considerations for your Operations Console installation or upgrade
        • Preparation for your network environment
        • Security of your Operations Console configuration
        • Scenario: Understanding your configuration
          • Scenario: Consoles for multiple systems or partitions
        • Managing Operations Console
          • Takeover or recovery of an Operations Console connection
            • Takeover details
            • Recovery details
            • Enabling console takeover
            • Scenario: Takeover and recovery
              • Scenario: LAN connected devices only with takeover enabled
          • Management of multiple consoles
            • Multiple PC consoles on a network
          • Changing from one console type to another
            • Switching from one console type to another when the current console is not operational
          • Managing your local console on a network
            • Starting the system using a manual IPL
            • Using the operations console service functions
            • Using the OPSCONSOLE macro
            • Changing the value of the display console status screen option
            • Changing the value of the Console F18 takeover option
            • Configuring a service host name (interface name)
            • Deallocating or moving the LAN adapter card from use by Operations Console
            • Changing network values for Operations Console (LAN)
        • Troubleshooting Operations Console connection
          • Troubleshooting connection problems
            • Local console connection problems
              • Network connection errors
          • Troubleshooting system reference code data
            • System reference code A6nn500x
            • System reference code A6005001, A6005004, and A6005007
            • System reference code A6005008
            • System reference code A6005082
            • System reference code A9002000
            • IPL step C6004031 takes longer than expected
          • Troubleshooting other Operations Console problems
            • System requests do not work
            • Unable to sign on because of a lost or expired password or disabled user ID
    • IBM i Access Client 솔루션: Application Packages
      • Windows Application Package
        • What's new
        • PDF file for Windows Application Package: Installation and setup
        • Getting started with Windows Application Package
        • Setting up Windows
          • Preparing an installation image to install on multiple systems
            • Using command programs
            • Methods to tailor an installation package
              • Changing the default options for the log files
              • Public properties
              • Defining the level of user interface throughout the installation
              • Modifying the installation by using setup.ini
            • Windows Installer Policies
          • Installing Windows Application Package on Windows
          • Using command line parameters to change the installation behavior
          • Installing Updates
          • Installing or removing individual features
          • Uninstalling Windows Application Package from Windows
        • 관리
          • 새로운 사항
          • Windows 애플리케이션 패키지: 관리에 대한 PDF 파일
          • ODBC 관리
            • IBM i Access ODBC 드라이버 개요
            • IBM i Access ODBC 드라이버에 대해 시스템 설정
              • RDB 디렉토리에 로컬 시스템 추가
              • ODBC 데이터 소스 지정
              • ODBC를 통해 독립적 ASP 사용
            • IBM i Access ODBC 보안
              • 보안되지 않는 일반 ODBC 전략
              • ODBC 프로그램 보안 전략
              • ODBC 보안에 대한 관련 정보
            • ODBC 문제 해결
              • ODBC 진단 및 성능 분석 툴
                • 클라이언트측 ODBC 진단 및 성능 분석 툴
                • 서버측 ODBC 진단 및 성능 분석 툴
                • ODBC 추적(SQL.LOG) 수집
              • IBM i Access ODBC 오류 메세지
              • IBM i 연결 문제 해결
                • 서버 상태 검사
                • 서브시스템 실행 여부 확인
                • 사전시작 작업의 실행 여부 확인
                • TCP/IP 추가 고려사항
              • 일반 ODBC 오류
                • SQL 오류
                  • SQL0104 - &1 토큰이 유효하지 않습니다. 유효한 토큰: &2
                  • SQL0113 - &1 이름이 허용되지 않음
                  • SQL0114 - 관계형 데이터베이스 &1이(가) 현재 &2 서버와 동일하지 않음
                  • SQL0204 - MYSYSCONF를 찾을 수 없음
                  • SQL0208 - 결과 테이블에 ORDER BY 열이 없음
                  • SQL0900 - 애플리케이션 프로세스가 연결 상태가 아님
                  • SQL0901 - SQL 시스템 오류
                  • SQL5001 - 열 규정 또는 테이블 &2이(가) 정의되지 않음
                  • SQL5016 - 오브젝트명 &1이(가) 명명 규칙에 유효하지 않음
                  • SQL7008 - &2의 &1이(가) 조작에 유효하지 않음(이유 코드 3)
                • 저장 프로시저 오류
                  • SQL0444 - &B에서 외부 프로그램 &A을(를) 찾을 수 없음(i용 DB2 SQL)
                  • OUTPUT 및 INPUT_OUTPUT 매개변수에 대한 데이터가 리턴되지 않음
                  • SQL0501 - CRSR000x 커서가 열리지 않음
                • 올바르지 않은 ODBC 출력 및 예측할 수 없는 오류
              • IBM 지원을 위한 정보 수집
          • 정책 및 애플리케이션 관리를 사용하여 사용자 제한
            • IBM i Access 정책 개요
            • 정책의 유형 및 범위
            • 정책 사용을 위한 시스템 설정
              • IBM i Access Client 솔루션 정책 사용을 위해 시스템 구성
              • 정책을 위한 클라이언트 PC 구성
              • 정책 파일 작성
                • Microsoft System Policy Editor
                • IBM i Access 정책 템플리트 작성
                • 정책 파일 작성 및 갱신
            • IBM i Access 정책 리스트
              • 기능별 정책
                • 기능별 정책: .NET 데이터 제공자
                  • .NET 데이터 제공자 정책: .NET 데이터 제공자 사용 방지
                • 기능별 정책: ActiveX 자동화 오브젝트
                  • ActiveX 정책: 데이터 큐 자동화 오브젝트 방지
                • 기능별 정책: 통신
                  • 통신 정책: 디폴트 사용자 모드
                  • 통신 정책: TCP/IP 주소 조회 모드
                  • 통신 정책: 포트 조회 모드
                  • 통신 정책: 보안 소켓 요구
                  • 통신 정책: 활성 환경 변경 방지
                  • 통신 정책: 환경 리스트 변경 방지
                  • 통신 정책: 미리 정의되지 않은 시스템에 대한 연결 방지
                  • 통신 정책: 지정되지 않은 환경 사용 방지
                  • 통신 정책: 시간종료 값
                • 기능별 정책: 라이센스 관리
                  • 라이센스 정책: IBM i Access 라이센스가 해제되기 전의 지연 시간
                • 기능별 정책: 자국어 지원
                  • 자국어 지원 정책: ANSI 코드 페이지
                  • 자국어 지원 정책: OEM 코드 페이지
                  • 자국어 지원 정책: EBCDIC 코드 페이지
                  • 언어 정책: BiDi 변환
                • 기능별 정책: ODBC
                  • ODBC 정책: 명명된 데이터 소스 사용 방지
                  • ODBC 정책: 프로그램 생성 데이터 소스 사용 방지
                • 기능별 정책: OLE DB
                  • OLE DB 제공자 정책: OLE DB 제공자 사용 방지
                • 기능별 정책: 암호
                  • 암호 정책: IBM i 암호 만기 전 사용자에게 경고
                  • 암호 정책: IBM i Access 암호 변경 방지
                • 기능별 정책: PC 명령
                  • PC 명령 정책: Cwblogon.exe 사용 방지
                  • PC 명령 정책: Cwbcfg.exe 사용 방지
                  • PC 명령 정책: Cwbback.exe 사용 방지
                  • PC 명령 정책: Cwbrest.exe 사용 방지
                  • PC 명령 정책: Cwbenv.exe 사용 방지
              • 템플리트별 정책
                • Caecfg.adm 소개
                • Caerestr.adm: IBM i Access 런타임 제한사항
                • Config.adm: IBM i Access 지정 연결
                • SYSNAME.adm: 시스템별 정책
          • SSL(Secure Sockets Layer) 관리
        • Programming
          • PDF file for Windows Application Package: Programming
          • C/C++ APIs
            • C/C++ APIs overview
              • API groups, header files, import libraries, and DLLs
              • Programmer's Toolkit
                • Install the Programmer's Toolkit
                • Launch the Programmer's Toolkit
              • IBM i name formats for connection APIs
              • OEM, ANSI, and Unicode considerations
                • Use a single API type
                • Use mixed API types
                • Write a generic Windows Application Package application
              • Return codes and error messages
                • Return codes that correspond to operating system errors
                • Return codes
                  • Global return codes
                  • Specific return codes
                    • Security return codes
                    • Communications return codes
                    • Configuration return codes
                    • Automation Object return codes
                    • WINSOCK return codes
                    • SSL return codes
                • Component-specific return codes
                  • Administration APIs return code
                  • Communications APIs return codes
                  • Database APIs return codes
                  • Data Queues APIs return codes
                  • National Language Support APIs return codes
                  • System Object APIs return codes
                  • Remote Command/Distributed Program Call APIs return codes
                  • Security APIs return codes
                  • Serviceability APIs return codes
                  • System Object Access APIs return codes
            • Administration APIs
              • Administration APIs list
                • cwbAD_GetClientVersion
                • cwbAD_GetProductFixLevel
                • cwbAD_IsComponentInstalled
              • Example: Administration APIs
            • Communications and Security APIs
              • System object attributes
                • System object attributes list
              • Communications and security: Create and delete APIs
                • cwbCO_CreateSystem
                • cwbCO_CreateSystemLike
                • cwbCO_DeleteSystem
              • Communications and security: Connect and disconnect APIs
                • cwbCO_Connect
                • cwbCO_Disconnect
                • cwbCO_GetConnectTimeout
                • cwbCO_GetPersistenceMode
                • cwbCO_IsConnected
                • cwbCO_SetConnectTimeout
                • cwbCO_SetPersistenceMode
                • cwbCO_Verify
              • Communication and security: Security validation and data APIs
                • cwbCO_ChangePassword
                • cwbCO_GetDefaultUserMode
                • cwbCO_GetFailedSignons
                • cwbCO_GetPasswordExpireDate
                • cwbCO_GetPrevSignonDate
                • cwbCO_GetPromptMode
                • cwbCO_GetSignonDate
                • cwbCO_GetUserIDEx
                • cwbCO_GetValidateMode
                • cwbCO_GetWindowHandle
                • cwbCO_HasSignedOn
                • cwbCO_SetDefaultUserMode
                • cwbCO_SetPassword
                • cwbCO_SetPromptMode
                • cwbCO_SetUserIDEx
                • cwbCO_SetWindowHandle
                • cwbCO_SetValidateMode
                • cwbCO_Signon
                • cwbCO_VerifyUserIDPassword
              • Communications and security: Get and set attribute APIs
                • cwbCO_CanModifyDefaultUserMode
                • cwbCO_CanModifyIPAddress
                • cwbCO_CanModifyIPAddressLookupMode
                • cwbCO_CanModifyPersistenceMode
                • cwbCO_CanModifyPortLookupMode
                • cwbCO_CanModifyUseSecureSockets
                • cwbCO_GetDescription
                • cwbCO_GetHostCCSID
                • cwbCO_GetHostVersionEx
                • cwbCO_GetIPAddress
                • cwbCO_GetIPAddressLookupMode
                • cwbCO_GetPortLookupMode
                • cwbCO_GetSystemName
                • cwbCO_IsSecureSockets
                • cwbCO_SetIPAddress
                • cwbCO_SetIPAddressLookupMode
                • cwbCO_SetPortLookupMode
                • cwbCO_UseSecureSockets
              • Defines for cwbCO_Service
              • Differences between cwbCO_Signon and cwbCO_VerifyUserIDPassword
              • Similarities between cwbCO_Signon and cwbCO_VerifyUserIDPassword
              • Communications: Create and delete APIs
                • cwbCO_CreateSysListHandle
                • cwbCO_CreateSysListHandleEnv
                • cwbCO_DeleteSysListHandle
                • cwbCO_GetNextSysName
                • cwbCO_GetSysListSize
              • Communications: System information APIs
                • cwbCO_GetActiveConversations
                • cwbCO_GetConnectedSysName
                • cwbCO_GetDefaultSysName
                • cwbCO_IsSystemConfigured
                • cwbCO_IsSystemConfiguredEnv
                • cwbCO_IsSystemConnected
              • Communications: Configured environments information
                • cwbCO_GetActiveEnvironment
                • cwbCO_GetEnvironmentName
                • cwbCO_GetNumberOfEnvironments
              • Communications: Environment and connection information
                • cwbCO_CanConnectNewSystem
                • cwbCO_CanModifyEnvironmentList
                • cwbCO_CanModifySystemList
                • cwbCO_CanModifySystemListEnv
                • cwbCO_CanSetActiveEnvironment
              • Example: Using communications APIs
            • IBM i Data Queues APIs
              • Data queues
              • Ordering data queue messages
              • Work with data queues
              • Typical use of data queues
              • Data Queues: Create, delete, and open APIs
                • cwbDQ_CreateEx
                • cwbDQ_DeleteEx
                • cwbDQ_OpenEx
              • Data Queues: Accessing data queues APIs
                • cwbDQ_AsyncRead
                • cwbDQ_Cancel
                • cwbDQ_CheckData
                • cwbDQ_Clear
                • cwbDQ_Close
                • cwbDQ_GetLibName
                • cwbDQ_GetQueueAttr
                • cwbDQ_GetQueueName
                • cwbDQ_GetSysName
                • cwbDQ_Peek
                • cwbDQ_Read
                • cwbDQ_Write
              • Data Queues: Attributes APIs
                • cwbDQ_CreateAttr
                • cwbDQ_DeleteAttr
                • cwbDQ_GetAuthority
                • cwbDQ_GetDesc
                • cwbDQ_GetForceToStorage
                • cwbDQ_GetKeySize
                • cwbDQ_GetMaxRecLen
                • cwbDQ_GetOrder
                • cwbDQ_GetSenderID
                • cwbDQ_SetAuthority
                • cwbDQ_SetDesc
                • cwbDQ_SetForceToStorage
                • cwbDQ_SetKeySize
                • cwbDQ_SetMaxRecLen
                • cwbDQ_SetOrder
                • cwbDQ_SetSenderID
              • Data Queues: Read and write APIs
                • cwbDQ_CreateData
                • cwbDQ_DeleteData
                • cwbDQ_GetConvert
                • cwbDQ_GetData
                • cwbDQ_GetDataAddr
                • cwbDQ_GetDataLen
                • cwbDQ_GetKey
                • cwbDQ_GetKeyLen
                • cwbDQ_GetRetDataLen
                • cwbDQ_GetRetKey
                • cwbDQ_GetRetKeyLen
                • cwbDQ_GetSearchOrder
                • cwbDQ_GetSenderInfo
                • cwbDQ_SetConvert
                • cwbDQ_SetData
                • cwbDQ_SetDataAddr
                • cwbDQ_SetKey
                • cwbDQ_SetSearchOrder
              • Example: Using Data Queues APIs
            • Data transformation and National Language Support (NLS) APIs
              • Data transformation APIs
                • Data transformation API list
                  • cwbDT_ASCII11ToBin4
                  • cwbDT_ASCII6ToBin2
                  • cwbDT_ASCIIPackedToPacked
                  • cwbDT_ASCIIToHex
                  • cwbDT_ASCIIToPacked
                  • cwbDT_ASCIIToZoned
                  • cwbDT_ASCIIZonedToZoned
                  • cwbDT_Bin2ToASCII6
                  • cwbDT_Bin2ToBin2
                  • cwbDT_Bin4ToASCII11
                  • cwbDT_Bin4ToBin4
                  • cwbDT_EBCDICToEBCDIC
                  • cwbDT_HexToASCII
                  • cwbDT_PackedToASCII
                  • cwbDT_PackedToASCIIPacked
                  • cwbDT_PackedToPacked
                  • cwbDT_ZonedToASCII
                  • cwbDT_ZonedToASCIIZoned
                  • cwbDT_ZonedToZoned
                • Example: Using data transformation APIs
              • National Language Support (NLS) APIs
                • Coded character sets
                • General NLS APIs list
                  • cwbNL_FindFirstLang
                  • cwbNL_FindNextLang
                  • cwbNL_GetLang
                  • cwbNL_GetLangName
                  • cwbNL_GetLangPath
                  • cwbNL_SaveLang
                • Conversion NLS APIs list
                  • cwbNL_CCSIDToCodePage
                  • cwbNL_CodePageToCCSID
                  • cwbNL_Convert
                  • cwbNL_ConvertCodePages
                  • cwbNL_ConvertCodePagesEx
                  • cwbNL_CreateConverter
                  • cwbNL_CreateConverterEx
                  • cwbNL_DeleteConverter
                  • cwbNL_GetCodePage
                  • cwbNL_GetANSICodePage
                  • cwbNL_GetHostCCSID
                • Dialog-box NLS API list
                  • cwbNL_CalcControlGrowthXY
                  • cwbNL_CalcDialogGrowthXY
                  • cwbNL_GrowControlXY
                  • cwbNL_GrowDialogXY
                  • cwbNL_LoadDialogStrings
                  • cwbNL_LoadMenu
                  • cwbNL_LoadMenuStrings
                  • cwbNL_SizeDialog
                • Example: NLS APIs
            • System Objects APIs
              • System objects attributes
                • Advanced Function Printing
                • Align Page
                • Allow Direct Print
                • Authority
                • Authority to Check
                • Automatically End Writer
                • Back Margin Offset Across
                • Back Margin Offset Down
                • Backside Overlay Library Name
                • Backside Overlay Name
                • Back Overlay offset across
                • Back Overlay Offset Down
                • Characters per Inch
                • Code Page
                • Coded Font Name
                • Coded Font Library Name
                • Copies
                • Copies left to Produce
                • Current page
                • Data Format
                • Data Queue Library Name
                • Data Queue Name
                • Date File Opened
                • User Specified DBCS Data
                • DBCS Extension Characters
                • DBCS Character Rotation
                • DBCS Characters per Inch
                • DBCS SO/SI Spacing
                • Defer Write
                • Degree of Page Rotation
                • Delete File After Sending
                • Destination Option
                • Destination Type
                • Device Class
                • Device Model
                • Device Type
                • Display any File
                • Drawer for Separators
                • Ending Page
                • File Separators
                • Fold Records
                • Font Identifier
                • Form Feed
                • Form Type
                • Form Type Message Option
                • Front Margin Offset Across
                • Front Margin Offset Down
                • Front Overlay Library Name
                • Front Overlay Name
                • Front Overlay Offset Across
                • Front Overlay Offset Down
                • Graphic Character Set
                • Hardware Justification
                • Hold Spool File
                • Initialize the writer
                • Internet Address
                • Job Name
                • Job Number
                • Job Separators
                • Job User
                • Last Page Printed
                • Length of Page
                • Library Name
                • Lines Per Inch
                • Manufacturer Type and Model
                • Maximum Spooled Output Records
                • Measurement Method
                • Message Help
                • Message ID
                • Message Queue Library Name
                • Message Queue
                • Message Reply
                • Message Text
                • Message Type
                • Message Severity
                • Number of Bytes to Read/Write
                • Number of Files
                • Number of Writers Started to Queue
                • Object Extended Attribute
                • Open time commands
                • Operator Controlled
                • Order of Files On Queue
                • Output Priority
                • Output Queue Library Name
                • Output Queue Name
                • Output Queue Status
                • Overflow Line Number
                • Pages Per Side
                • Pel Density
                • Point Size
                • Print Fidelity
                • Print on Both Sides
                • Print Quality
                • Print Sequence
                • Print Text
                • Printer
                • Printer Device Type
                • Printer File Library Name
                • Printer File Name
                • Printer Queue
                • Record Length
                • Remote System
                • Replace Unprintable Characters
                • Replacement Character
                • Resource library name
                • Resource name
                • Resource object type
                • Restart Printing
                • Save Spooled File
                • Seek Offset
                • Seek Origin
                • Send Priority
                • Separator page
                • Source Drawer
                • Spool SCS
                • Spool the Data
                • Spooled File Name
                • Spooled File Number
                • Spooled File Status
                • Spooled Output Schedule
                • Starting Page
                • Text Description
                • Time File Opened
                • Total Pages
                • Transform SCS to ASCII
                • Unit of Measure
                • User Comment
                • User Data
                • User defined data
                • User defined object library
                • User defined object name
                • User defined object type
                • User defined option(s)
                • User driver program
                • User driver program library
                • User driver program name
                • User ID
                • User ID Address
                • User transform program library
                • User transform program name
                • VM/MVS Class
                • When to Automatically End Writer
                • When to End Writer
                • When to Hold File
                • Width of Page
                • Workstation Customizing Object Name
                • Workstation Customizing Object Library
                • Writer Job Name
                • Writer Job Number
                • Writer Job Status
                • Writer Job User Name
                • Writer Starting Page
                • Network Print Server Object Attributes
                  • NPS Attribute Default Value
                  • NPS Attribute High Limit
                  • NPS Attribute ID
                  • NPS Attribute Low Limit
                  • NPS Attribute Possible Value
                  • NPS Attribute Text Description
                  • NPS Attribute Type
                  • NPS CCSID
                  • NPS Object
                  • NPS Object Action
                  • NPS Level
              • List APIs
                • cwbOBJ_CloseList
                • cwbOBJ_CreateListHandle
                • cwbOBJ_DeleteListHandle
                • cwbOBJ_GetListSize
                • cwbOBJ_OpenList
                • cwbOBJ_ResetListAttrsToRetrieve
                • cwbOBJ_ResetListFilter
                • cwbOBJ_SetListAttrsToRetrieve
                • cwbOBJ_SetListFilter
                • cwbOBJ_SetListFilterWithSplF
              • Object APIs
                • cwbOBJ_CopyObjHandle
                • cwbOBJ_DeleteObjHandle
                • cwbOBJ_GetObjAttr
                • cwbOBJ_GetObjAttrs
                • cwbOBJ_GetObjHandle
                • cwbOBJ_GetObjHandleFromID
                • cwbOBJ_GetObjID
                • cwbOBJ_RefreshObj
                • cwbOBJ_SetObjAttrs
              • Parameter object APIs
                • cwbOBJ_CopyParmObjHandle
                • cwbOBJ_CreateParmObjHandle
                • cwbOBJ_DeleteParmObjHandle
                • cwbOBJ_GetParameter
                • cwbOBJ_SetParameter
              • Writer job APIs
                • cwbOBJ_EndWriter
                • cwbOBJ_StartWriter
              • Output queues APIs
                • cwbOBJ_HoldOutputQueue
                • cwbOBJ_PurgeOutputQueue
                • cwbOBJ_ReleaseOutputQueue
              • AFP resource APIs
                • cwbOBJ_CloseResource
                • cwbOBJ_CreateResourceHandle
                • cwbOBJ_DisplayResource
                • cwbOBJ_OpenResource
                • cwbOBJ_OpenResourceForSplF
                • cwbOBJ_ReadResource
                • cwbOBJ_SeekResource
              • APIs for new spooled files
                • cwbOBJ_CloseNewSplF
                • cwbOBJ_CloseNewSplFAndGetHandle
                • cwbOBJ_CreateNewSplF
                • cwbOBJ_GetSplFHandleFromNewSplF
                • cwbOBJ_WriteNewSplF
              • APIs for reading spooled files
                • cwbOBJ_CloseSplF
                • cwbOBJ_OpenSplF
                • cwbOBJ_ReadSplF
                • cwbOBJ_SeekSplF
              • APIs for manipulating spooled files
                • cwbOBJ_CallExitPgmForSplF
                • cwbOBJ_CreateSplFHandle
                • cwbOBJ_CreateSplFHandleEx
                • cwbOBJ_DeleteSplF
                • cwbOBJ_DisplaySplF
                • cwbOBJ_HoldSplF
                • cwbOBJ_IsViewerAvailable
                • cwbOBJ_MoveSplF
                • cwbOBJ_ReleaseSplF
                • cwbOBJ_SendNetSplF
                • cwbOBJ_SendTCPSplF
              • APIs for handling spooled file messages
                • cwbOBJ_AnswerSplFMsg
                • cwbOBJ_GetSplFMsgAttr
              • APIs for analyzing spooled file data
                • cwbOBJ_AnalyzeSplFData
              • Server program APIs
                • cwbOBJ_DropConnections
                • cwbOBJ_GetNPServerAttr
                • cwbOBJ_SetConnectionsToKeep
              • Example: Using system objects APIs
            • Remote Command/Distributed Program Call APIs
              • Typical use of Remote Command/Distributed Program Call APIs
              • Remote Command/Distributed Program Call: Access remote command APIs list
                • cwbRC_GetClientCCSID
                • cwbRC_GetHostCCSID
                • cwbRC_StartSysEx
                • cwbRC_StopSys
              • Remote Command/Distributed Program Call: Run APIs list
                • cwbRC_RunCmd
              • Remote Command/Distributed Program Call: Access programs APIs list
                • cwbRC_AddParm
                • cwbRC_CallPgm
                • cwbRC_CreatePgm
                • cwbRC_DeletePgm
                • cwbRC_GetLibName
                • cwbRC_GetParm
                • cwbRC_GetParmCount
                • cwbRC_GetPgmName
                • cwbRC_SetLibName
                • cwbRC_SetParm
                • cwbRC_SetPgmName
              • Example: Using Remote Command/Distributed Program Call APIs
            • Serviceability APIs
              • History log and trace files
              • Error handles
              • Typical use of Serviceability APIs
              • Serviceability APIs list: Writing to history log
                • cwbSV_CreateMessageTextHandle
                • cwbSV_DeleteMessageTextHandle
                • cwbSV_LogMessageText
                • cwbSV_SetMessageClass
                • cwbSV_SetMessageComponent
                • cwbSV_SetMessageProduct
              • Serviceability APIs list: Writing trace data
                • cwbSV_CreateTraceDataHandle
                • cwbSV_DeleteTraceDataHandle
                • cwbSV_LogTraceData
                • cwbSV_SetTraceComponent
                • cwbSV_SetTraceProduct
              • Serviceability API list: Writing trace points
                • cwbSV_CreateTraceAPIHandle
                • cwbSV_CreateTraceSPIHandle
                • cwbSV_DeleteTraceAPIHandle
                • cwbSV_DeleteTraceSPIHandle
                • cwbSV_LogAPIEntry
                • cwbSV_LogAPIExit
                • cwbSV_LogSPIEntry
                • cwbSV_LogSPIExit
                • cwbSV_SetAPIComponent
                • cwbSV_SetAPIProduct
                • cwbSV_SetSPIComponent
                • cwbSV_SetSPIProduct
              • Serviceability API list: Reading service files
                • cwbSV_ClearServiceFile
                • cwbSV_CloseServiceFile
                • cwbSV_CreateServiceRecHandle
                • cwbSV_DeleteServiceRecHandle
                • cwbSV_GetComponent
                • cwbSV_GetDateStamp
                • cwbSV_GetMaxRecordSize
                • cwbSV_GetMessageText
                • cwbSV_GetProduct
                • cwbSV_GetRecordCount
                • cwbSV_GetServiceFileName
                • cwbSV_GetServiceType
                • cwbSV_GetTimeStamp
                • cwbSV_GetTraceData
                • cwbSV_GetTraceAPIData
                • cwbSV_GetTraceAPIID
                • cwbSV_GetTraceAPIType
                • cwbSV_GetTraceSPIData
                • cwbSV_GetTraceSPIID
                • cwbSV_GetTraceSPIType
                • cwbSV_OpenServiceFile
                • cwbSV_ReadNewestRecord
                • cwbSV_ReadNextRecord
                • cwbSV_ReadOldestRecord
                • cwbSV_ReadPrevRecord
              • Serviceability API list: Retrieving message text
                • cwbSV_CreateErrHandle
                • cwbSV_DeleteErrHandle
                • cwbSV_GetErrClass
                • cwbSV_GetErrClassIndexed
                • cwbSV_GetErrCount
                • cwbSV_GetErrFileName
                • cwbSV_GetErrFileNameIndexed
                • cwbSV_GetErrLibName
                • cwbSV_GetErrLibNameIndexed
                • cwbSV_GetErrSubstText
                • cwbSV_GetErrSubstTextIndexed
                • cwbSV_GetErrText
                • cwbSV_GetErrTextIndexed
              • Example: Using Serviceability APIs
            • System Object Access (SOA) APIs
              • SOA objects
              • System object views
              • Typical use of System Object Access APIs
                • Display a customized list of system objects
                  • Sample program: Display a customized list of system objects
                • Display the Properties view for a system object
                  • Sample program: Display the Properties view of an object
                • Access and update data for system objects
                  • Sample program: Access and update data for system objects
              • System Object Access programming considerations
                • About System Object Access errors
                • System Object Access application profiles
                • Manage IBM i communications sessions for application programs
              • System Object Access APIs List
                • CWBSO_CloseList
                • CWBSO_CopyObjHandle
                • CWBSO_CreateErrorHandle
                • CWBSO_CreateListHandle
                • CWBSO_CreateListHandleEx
                • CWBSO_CreateObjHandle
                • CWBSO_CreateParmObjHandle
                • CWBSO_DeleteErrorHandle
                • CWBSO_DeleteListHandle
                • CWBSO_DeleteObjHandle
                • CWBSO_DeleteParmObjHandle
                • CWBSO_DisallowListActions
                • CWBSO_DisallowListFilter
                • CWBSO_DisplayErrMsg
                • CWBSO_DisplayList
                • CWBSO_DisplayObjAttr
                • CWBSO_GetErrMsgText
                • CWBSO_GetListSize
                • CWBSO_GetObjAttr
                • CWBSO_GetObjHandle
                • CWBSO_OpenList
                • CWBSO_ReadListProfile
                • CWBSO_RefreshObj
                • CWBSO_ResetParmObj
                • CWBSO_SetListFilter
                • CWBSO_SetListProfile
                • CWBSO_SetListSortFields
                • CWBSO_SetListTitle
                • CWBSO_SetObjAttr
                • CWBSO_SetParameter
                • CWBSO_WaitForObj
                • CWBSO_WriteListProfile
                • SOA attribute special values
                  • Job attributes
                  • Message attributes
                  • Printer attributes
                  • Printer output attributes
                  • TCP/IP interfaces attributes
                  • Ethernet lines attributes
                  • Token-ring lines attributes
                  • Hardware resources attributes
                  • Software products attributes
                  • TCP/IP routes attributes
                  • Users and groups attributes
                  • Libraries in QSYS attributes
          • Database programming
            • .NET provider
            • OLE DB provider
            • IBM i Access ODBC
              • IBM i Access ODBC driver-specific details
                • ODBC 3.x API notes
                  • SQL Statement Considerations
                • Connection string keywords
                • Version and release changes in the ODBC driver behavior
                • ODBC API restrictions and unsupported functions
                • Signon dialog behavior
                • ODBC data types and how they correspond to Db2 for i database types
                • Working with the XML data type
                • Large objects (LOBs) considerations
                  • Example: Use the BLOB data type
                • Connection and statement attributes
                • Connection pooling
                • SQLPrepare and SQLNativeSQL escape sequences and scalar functions
                • Distributed transaction support
                • Cursor behavior notes
                • Extended dynamic disabled error
                • SQLTables Description
                • Handle long-running queries
                • Isolation level considerations
              • ODBC performance
                • Performance-tuning ODBC
                  • Introduction to server performance
                  • Introduction to client/server performance
                  • Performance architecture of the ODBC driver
                    • Select a stringent level of commitment control
                    • Fine-tune record-blocking
                    • Use Extended Dynamic SQL
                • Performance considerations of common end-user tools
                  • Examples: Common tool behaviors that degrade ODBC performance
                    • Example: Query tool A
                    • Example: Query tool B
                    • Example: Query tool C
                • SQL performance
                  • SQL performance general considerations
                  • Database design
                    • Normalization
                    • Table size
                    • Use indexes
                    • Match attributes of join fields
                  • Optimizer
                    • Cost estimation
                    • Optimizer decision-making rules
                • ODBC support for multiple row statements
                • Catalog functions
                • Exit programs
                  • Examples: User exit programs
                    • Example: ILE C/400 user exit program for exit point QIBM_QZDA_INIT
                    • Example: CL user exit program for exit point QIBM_QZDA_INIT
                    • Example: ILE C/400 Program for exit point QIBM_QZDA_SQL1
                    • Example: ILE C/400 program for exit point QIBM_QZDA_ROI1
                  • Exit program parameter formats
                    • Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_SQL2 format ZDAQ0200
                    • Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_INIT format ZDAI0100
                    • Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_NDB1 format ZDAD0100
                    • Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_NDB1 format ZDAD0200
                    • Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_SQL1 format ZDAQ0100
                    • Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_ROI1 format ZDAR0100
                    • Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_ROI1 format ZDAR0200
                • SQL and External procedures
                  • Procedure result sets
                  • Examples: Stored procedures
                    • Example: Run CL commands that use SQL stored procedures and ODBC
                    • Example: Stored procedure calls from Visual Basic with return values
                    • Example: Call an IBM i stored procedure by using Visual Basic
                    • Example: Call CL command using SQL CALL statement
                    • Tips: Run and call IBM i procedures
            • IBM i Access database APIs
          • ActiveX programming
      • Linux, macOS, and PASE Application Packages
        • PDF file for the Application Package
        • Prerequisites for using the Application Package
        • Getting started with the Application Package
        • Security
        • IBM i Access ODBC
          • ODBC language considerations
          • ODBC usage restrictions
          • Configure an ODBC data source
          • Troubleshoot ODBC
            • ODBC problem isolation
            • Error messages
        • IBM i Access Client Solutions - Application Package utilities
          • CWBMEDIC - Service information collection tool
          • CWBNLTBL - Download conversion tables
          • CWBPING - Test the connection to the server
          • CWBTRC - Trace Application Package
    • IBM i Access for Web
      • What's new
      • PDF file for IBM i Access for Web
      • License information
      • Planning
        • IBM i Access for Web offerings
          • Web application
          • Portal application (Standard)
          • Portal application (IBM)
        • Security considerations
          • Single sign-on considerations
        • Checklist: Planning, installing, and configuring
        • Prerequisites for installing IBM i Access for Web
          • Hardware requirements
            • Tune performance
          • IBM i software requirements
            • PTF requirements
          • Web browser requirements
            • Browser considerations
          • Upgrade considerations
      • Installing IBM i Access for Web
      • Installing IBM i Access for Web PTFs
      • IBM i Access for Web in a Web application server environment
        • Configuring IBM i Access for Web
          • Examples for configuring a new Web application server environment
            • Configuring an integrated Web application server Instance
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server V8.5 for IBM i
            • WebSphere Application Server V8.5 for IBM i with Single sign-on
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server - Express V8.5 for IBM i
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V8.5 for IBM i
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server V8.0 for IBM i
            • WebSphere Application Server V8.0 for IBM i with Single sign-on
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server - Express V8.0 for IBM i
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V8.0 for IBM i
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server V7.0 for IBM i
            • WebSphere Application Server V7.0 for IBM i with Single sign-on
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server - Express V7.0 for IBM i
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V7.0 for IBM i
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server V6.1 for IBM i
            • WebSphere Application Server V6.1 for i5/OS with Single sign-on
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server - Express V6.1 for i5/OS
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V6.1 for i5/OS
          • Examples for configuring an existing Web application server environment
            • Configuring integrated Web application server
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server V8.5 for IBM i
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server - Express V8.5 for IBM i
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V8.5 for IBM i
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server V8.0 for IBM i
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server - Express V8.0 for IBM i
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V8.0 for IBM i
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server V7.0 for IBM i
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server - Express V7.0 for IBM i
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V7.0 for IBM i
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server V6.1 for i5/OS
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server - Express V6.1 for i5/OS
            • Configuring WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V6.1 for i5/OS
          • New Web application server considerations
        • Customizing IBM i Access for Web
          • Policies
          • Default page content
            • Home page
              • Customized content
              • Special tags
              • Style sheets
            • Main page
              • Customized content
            • Page template
              • Customized content
              • Special tags
              • Style sheets
            • Login template
              • Customized content
              • Special tags
              • Style sheets
        • IBM i Access for Web functions
          • 5250
          • Command
          • Customize
          • Database
            • Database considerations
            • Database restrictions
          • Download
          • File
            • File considerations
            • File restrictions
          • Jobs
          • Mail
          • Messages
          • My folder
          • My home page
          • Other
          • Print
            • Print considerations
            • Print restrictions
        • URL interfaces
        • Automating tasks
        • NLS considerations
        • Saving and restoring IBM i Access for Web
      • IBM i Access for Web in a portal environment
        • Portal application (Standard)
          • Portal concepts
            • Cross-site scripting
          • Configuring IBM i Access for Web
            • Examples for configuring a new portal environment
              • Configuring IBM WebSphere Portal V8.0
              • Configuring IBM WebSphere Portal V7.0
            • Examples for configuring an existing portal environment
              • Configuring IBM WebSphere Portal V8.0
              • Configuring IBM WebSphere Portal V7.0
          • Customizing IBM i Access for Web
            • Creating pages
            • Customizing portlets
            • Portal roles
          • IBM i Access for Web functions
            • 5250
            • Command
            • Database
              • Database considerations
              • Database restrictions
            • Files
              • File considerations
              • File restrictions
            • Other
            • Print
          • NLS considerations
          • Saving and restoring System i Access for Web
        • Portal application (IBM)
          • Portal concepts
            • Cooperative portlets
            • Cross-site scripting
          • Configuring IBM i Access for Web
            • Examples for configuring a new portal environment
              • Configuring IBM WebSphere Portal V8.0
              • Configuring IBM WebSphere Portal V7.0
              • Configuring IBM WebSphere Portal V6.1
            • Examples for configuring an existing portal environment
              • Configuring IBM WebSphere Portal V8.0
              • Configuring IBM WebSphere Portal V7.0
              • Configuring IBM WebSphere Portal V6.1
          • Customizing IBM i Access for Web
            • Creating pages
            • Customizing portlets
            • Portal roles
          • IBM i Access for Web functions
            • 5250
            • Command
            • Database
              • Database considerations
              • Database restrictions
            • Files
              • File considerations
              • File restrictions
            • IFrame
            • Other
            • Print
          • NLS considerations
          • Saving and restoring IBM i Access for Web in a portal environment
      • Deleting IBM i Access for Web
      • Removing IBM i Access for Web from an unsupported environment
      • Related information
  • IBM Navigator for i
    • What's new for IBM Navigator for i
    • PDF file for IBM Navigator for i
    • Working with IBM Navigator for i
    • Related information for IBM Navigator for i
    • Application Administration
      • PDF file for Application Administration
      • Application Administration concepts
        • Application registration
          • Application registration on Local Settings
          • Application registration on Central Settings
        • System i Navigator plug-ins and Application Administration
        • Access settings for a function
          • How access to a function is determined
        • Administration system
          • How clients initially discover their administration system
        • Advanced settings in Central Settings
          • How advanced settings are obtained for a user
          • Mandated and suggested values
        • Management Central and Application Administration
        • When changes take effect
        • Application Administration as a security tool
      • Installing Application Administration in IBM i Access Client Solutions - Windows Application Package
      • Planning your Application Administration strategy
        • Planning for Application Administration
        • Planning for the administration system and Central Settings
      • Setting up Application Administration
        • Setting up Application Administration for Local Settings
        • Setting up the administration system for Central Settings
      • Managing Application Administration
        • Registering applications for Application Administration (Local Settings)
        • Registering applications on the administration system (Central Settings)
        • Working with a function's access setting
        • Working with user or group access settings in System i Navigator
        • Working with Central Settings
      • Scenarios: Application Administration
        • Scenario: Setting up Application Administration
        • Scenario: Setting up an administration system for Central Settings in System i Navigator
• 데이터베이스
  • 데이터베이스에 대한 PDF 파일
  • Database overview
    • PDF file for Database overview
    • DB2 for IBM i
    • Terminology: SQL versus traditional file access
    • Getting started with System i Navigator
      • Starting System i Navigator
      • Creating a schema
      • Editing the list of schemas displayed
      • Creating and using a table
        • Defining additional columns on a table
        • Creating the supplier table
        • Copying column definitions
        • Viewing the contents of a table
        • Changing information in a table
        • Deleting information from a table
        • Copying and moving a table
          • Copying a table
          • Moving a table
      • Creating and using a view
        • Creating a view over a single table
      • Deleting database objects
    • System i Navigator database tasks
      • Database objects creation tasks
      • Database objects operation tasks
      • Database performance optimization tasks
      • Mapping your database
      • Querying your database by running SQL scripts
        • Stopping SQL scripts
        • Viewing the job log
        • Generating SQL for existing objects
        • Building SQL statements with SQL Assist
        • Starting IBM i Debugger
      • Managing check pending constraints
      • Importing and exporting data
    • Getting started with SQL
      • Creating a schema
      • Creating and using a table
        • Using the LABEL ON statement
        • Inserting information into a table
        • Getting information from a single table
        • Getting information from multiple tables
        • Changing information in a table
        • Deleting information from a table
      • Creating and using a view
        • Creating a view on a single table
        • Creating a view that combines data from multiple tables
  • 데이터베이스 정보 파인더
  • 관리
    • IBM i 7.3의 새로운 사항
    • 데이터베이스 관리를 위한 PDF 파일
    • 데이터베이스 관리
      • 클라이언트 인터페이스를 사용하여 데이터 액세스
        • Java를 사용하여 데이터 액세스
        • Domino를 사용하여 데이터 액세스
        • ODBC로 데이터 액세스
        • IBM i PASE를 사용하여 데이터 액세스
        • Windows용 IBM i Access OLE DB 제공자를 사용하여 데이터 액세스
        • IBM i Access for Windows .Net Provider를 사용하여 데이터 액세스
        • Net.Data를 사용하여 데이터 액세스
        • Linux 파티션을 사용하여 데이터 액세스
        • 분산 관계형 데이터베이스 (DRDA)를 사용하여 데이터 액세스
      • 데이터베이스 오브젝트 변경 및 관리
      • 데이터베이스 오브젝트 작성
      • 데이터 무결성 보장
      • 시스템 간 데이터 가져오기 및 내보내기
      • 다중 데이터베이스에 대한 작업
      • 시스템 기간의 시간 테이블로 작업
        • 시스템 기간의 시간 테이블
          • 행 시작 열
          • 행 끝 열
          • 트랜잭션 시작 ID
          • SYSTEM_TIME 기간
        • 이력 테이블
        • 시스템 기간의 시간 테이블 작성
          • 추가 시스템 기간의 시간 테이블 CREATE TABLE 예
        • 시스템 기간의 시간 테이블에 데이터 삽입
        • 시스템 기간의 시간 테이블에서 데이터 갱신
        • 시스템 기간의 시간 테이블에서 데이터 삭제
        • 감사 정보 추적에 시스템 기간의 시간 테이블 사용
        • 시스템 기간의 시간 테이블 시간소인 값 상충
        • 시스템 기간의 시간 데이터 쿼리
          • 쿼리에서 시간 기준 지정
            • 예: 쿼리 시 시간 기준
          • CURRENT TEMPORAL SYSTEM_TIME 특수 레지스터를 사용하여 시간 기준 지정
            • 예: CURRENT TEMPORAL SYSTEM_TIME 특수 레지스터를 사용하여 지정된 시간 기준
          • 보기에 대한 시간 기준 지정
            • 예: 보기의 시간 기준
        • 시스템 기간의 시간 테이블의 데이터를 삽입, 갱신 또는 삭제하는 경우의 제한사항
        • 시스템 기간의 시간 테이블을 포함하는 기본 입출력 고려사항
        • 이력 테이블 유지보수
        • 시스템 기간의 시간 테이블 파티셔닝
        • 시스템 기간의 시간 테이블이 있는 행 및 열 액세스 제어
        • 시스템 기간의 시간 테이블 저장 및 복원
        • 시스템 기간의 시간 테이블 정보에 대한 카탈로그 사용
        • 시간 테이블 제한사항
      • 트리거 및 제한조건에 대한 작업
      • DB2 프로그램 작성
    • 데이터베이스 백업 및 회복
    • 분산 데이터베이스 관리
    • 쿼리 및 보고서
    • 보안
      • SQL 분석 및 조정을 위한 권한 옵션
    • 행 및 열 액세스 제어(RCAC)
      • 개요
      • 권한 및 마스크
      • SQL문
      • 보안 함수
      • 보안 트리거
      • 관리자 권한
      • 권한 및 마스크 사용의 모범 사례
        • 권한 및 마스크 작성
          • 모든 사용자를 포함하는 하나의 권한
          • 그룹 프로파일을 포함하는 하나의 권한
          • 종속 테이블을 포함하는 하나의 권한
          • UDF를 포함하는 하나의 권한
          • 각 사용자를 위한 권한
          • 다중 권한의 속성
          • 규정되지 않은 오브젝트명
        • 종속 오브젝트
          • 소유권
          • 스키마
          • 스키마 권한
          • 안전한 UDF
          • ALWCPYDTA 및 격리 레벨
          • 오브젝트 복원
        • 추가 조작
          • 권한 및 마스크에 애플리케이션 프로파일 추가
          • 재생 기억장치
          • 쿼리 보고서
          • MQT
          • 시간 테이블
          • 그룹 프로파일 및 QIBM_DB_SECADM
          • 파일 복사(CPYF) 매개변수
          • i용 OmniFind Text Search Server for DB2
        • Multi-Formatted 논리 파일에 RCAC 사용
        • 마스크된 데이터의 전파
    • CQE(Classic Query Engine) 및 SQE(SQL Query Engine)
      • 기본 열기와 SQL 쿼리의 차이(RCAC 포함)
      • 결과 세트 순서화
  • Commitment control
    • PDF file for Commitment control
    • Commitment control concepts
      • How commitment control works
      • How commit and rollback operations work
        • Commit operation
        • Rollback operation
      • Commitment definition
        • Scope for a commitment definition
        • Commitment definition names
        • Example: Jobs and commitment definitions
      • How commitment control works with objects
        • Types of committable resources
        • Local and remote committable resources
        • Access intent of a committable resource
        • The commit protocol of a committable resource
        • Journaled files and commitment control
        • Sequence of journal entries under commitment control
        • Commit cycle identifier
        • Record locking
      • Commitment control and independent disk pools
        • Independent disk pool considerations for commitment definitions
        • Considerations for XA transactions
      • Considerations and restrictions for commitment control
      • Commitment control for batch applications
      • Two-phase commitment control
        • Roles in commit processing
        • States of the transaction for two-phase commitment control
        • Commitment definitions for two-phase commitment control
          • Commitment definition for two-phase commit: Allow vote read-only
          • Commitment definition for two-phase commit: Not wait for outcome
          • Commitment definition for two-phase commit: Indicate OK to leave out
          • Commitment definition for two-phase commit: Not select a last agent
          • Vote reliable effect on flow of commit processing
      • XA transaction support for commitment control
      • SQL server mode and thread-scoped transactions for commitment control
    • Starting commitment control
      • Commit notify object
      • Commit lock level
    • Ending commitment control
    • System-initiated end of commitment control
      • Commitment control during activation group end
      • Implicit commit and rollback operations
      • Commitment control during normal routing step end
      • Commitment control during abnormal system or job end
      • Updates to the notify object
      • Commitment control recovery during initial program load after abnormal end
    • Managing transactions and commitment control
      • Displaying commitment control information
        • Displaying locked objects for a transaction
        • Displaying jobs associated with a transaction
        • Displaying resource status of a transaction
        • Displaying transaction properties
      • Optimizing performance for commitment control
        • Minimizing locks
        • Managing transaction size
        • Soft commit
    • Scenarios and examples: Commitment control
      • Scenario: Commitment control
      • Practice problem for commitment control
        • Logic flow for practice problem
        • Steps associated with the logic flow for the practice program
      • Example: Using a transaction logging file to start an application
      • Example: Using a notify object to start an application
        • Example: Unique notify object for each program
        • Example: Single notify object for all programs
      • Example: Using a standard processing program to start an application
        • Example: Code for a standard processing program
          • Processing flow
        • Example: Code for a standard commit processing program
        • Example: Using a standard processing program to decide whether to restart the application
    • Troubleshooting transactions and commitment control
      • Commitment control errors
        • Error conditions
        • Nonerror conditions
        • Error messages to monitor during commitment control
        • Monitoring for errors after a CALL command
        • Failure of normal commit or rollback processing
      • Detecting deadlocks
      • Recovering transactions after communications failure
      • When to force commit and rollback operations and when to cancel resynchronization
      • Ending a long-running rollback
      • Finding large or old transactions
    • Related information
  • Performance and query optimization
    • What's new for IBM i 7.4
    • Print PDF
    • Query engine overview
      • SQE and CQE engines
      • Query dispatcher
      • Statistics manager
      • Global Statistics Cache
      • Plan cache
    • Data access methods
      • Permanent objects & access methods
        • Table
          • Table scan
          • Table probe
        • Radix index
          • Radix index scan
          • Radix index probe
        • Encoded vector index
          • Encoded vector index RRN probe
          • EVI probe
          • EVI index-only access
          • EVI symbol table scan
          • EVI symbol table probe
      • Temporary objects & access methods
        • Temporary hash table
          • Hash table scan
          • Hash table probe
        • Temporary sorted list
          • Sorted list scan
          • Sorted list probe
        • Temporary distinct sorted list
          • Sorted list scan
        • Temporary list
          • List scan
        • Temporary values list
          • Values list scan
        • Temporary row number list
          • Row number list scan
          • Row number list probe
        • Temporary bitmap
          • Bitmap scan
          • Bitmap probe
        • Temporary index
          • Temporary index scan
          • Temporary index probe
        • Temporary buffer
          • Buffer scan
        • Queue
          • Enqueue
          • Dequeue
        • Array unnest temporary table
          • Array unnest temporary table scan
        • Temporary Indexed List
          • Temporary Indexed List scan and Index Merge
        • Window
          • Window scan
      • Objects processed in parallel
      • Spreading data automatically
    • Processing queries: Overview
      • Query optimizer
      • Query optimization tips
      • Access plan validation
      • Single table optimization
      • Solid State Drives
      • Memory preference controls
      • Join optimization
        • Nested loop join
        • Join optimization
        • Join order optimization
        • Full outer join
        • Join cost & index selection
        • Transitive closure predicates
        • LPG
        • CQE Join performance tips
        • Multiple join types
        • Join performance problems
        • Join performance tips
      • Distinct optimization
      • Grouping optimization
        • Hash grouping
        • Index grouping
        • Whole table COUNT(*) grouping
        • Eliminate grouping columns
        • Add grouping columns
        • Index skip key processing
        • Read trigger considerations
        • Grouping set optimization
      • Ordering optimization
      • View implementation
        • View composite
        • View materialization
      • MQT optimization
        • MQT supported function
        • Using MQTs
        • MQT examples
        • MQT matching
        • Determining MQT usage
        • MQT recommendations
      • Recursive query optimization
        • Example
        • Multiple initialization & iterative fullselects
        • Predicate pushing
        • SEARCH considerations
        • CYCLE considerations
        • SMP & recursive queries
      • System-period temporal tables
      • Adaptive Query Processing
        • How AQP works
        • AQP example
        • AQP join order
        • Database Monitor additions
      • Row and column access control
        • Indexing strategy and RCAC
        • Materialized query tables and RCAC
    • Tools
      • Health Center
        • Navigator view
        • SQL procedures
          • Health_Database_Overview
          • Health_Activity
          • Health_Design_Limits
          • Health_Size_Limits
          • Health_Environmental_Limits
          • Reset_Environmental_Limits
      • Database Monitor
        • Start
        • End
        • Performance rows
        • Examples
          • Application with table scans
          • Queries with table scans
          • Table scan detail
          • Additional examples
      • Navigator monitors
        • Start
        • Analyze data
        • Compare data
        • View statements
        • Import
      • Index advisor
        • Index advice and OR predicates
        • Index advice for Encoded Vector Index RRN Probe Plans
        • Display information
          • System table
        • Column descriptions
        • Database monitor view
        • Condense advice
      • Visual Explain
        • Start
        • Information available
        • Adaptive Query Processing in VE
      • SQL Plan Cache
        • Show Statements
        • Column descriptions
        • Properties
        • Creating snapshots
        • Event monitor
        • SQL stored procedures
        • Clear SQL plan cache procedure
      • Verify performance
      • View debug messages
      • Print SQL Information
      • Tool comparison
      • SQL Error Logging Facility (SELF)
      • Change query attributes
        • QAQQINI
          • CHGQRYA
          • Create
          • QAQQINI override support
          • File format
          • Update
          • Authority requirements
          • System-supplied triggers
          • Query options
          • SQL_XML_DATA_CCSID option
      • Query Supervisor
        • Using Query Supervisor to monitor query resource usage
        • Query Supervisor configuration and operation
        • Managing Query Supervisor activity
        • Using DETECTION_FREQUENCY to protect system resources
        • Writing a Query Supervisor Exit Program
        • Query Supervisor example exit programs
          • Exit program to send message to QSYSOPR
            • ILE RPG exit program to send message to QSYSOPR
            • C exit program to send message to QSYSOPR
            • CL exit program to send message to QSYSOPR
          • Exit program to end query
            • ILE RPG exit program to end query
            • C exit program to end query
            • CL exit program to end query
          • Exit program to dump plan cache information for query
            • ILE RPG exit program to dump plan cache information for query
            • C exit program to dump plan cache information for query
            • CL exit program to dump plan cache information for query
          • Exit program to log information using a data queue
            • ILE RPG exit program to log information using a data queue
            • C exit program to log information using a data queue
            • SQL procedure used to log information using a data queue
      • Predictive Query Governor
        • How to use
        • Cancel a query
        • Control the reply
        • Test performance
        • Time limit examples
        • Test temporary storage use
        • Storage limit examples
      • Parallel processing
        • System-wide
        • Job level
      • Statistics manager
        • Automatic collection
        • Automatic refresh
        • View requests
        • Indexes and column statistics
        • Background collection
        • View column statistics
        • Manual collection and refresh
        • APIs
      • Display MQT columns
      • Check pending constraints
      • Limiting temporary storage and CPU used by queries
    • Creating an index strategy
      • Binary radix indexes
        • Derived key index
        • Sparse indexes
          • Optimization
          • Matching algorithm
          • Sparse index examples
        • Specify PAGESIZE
        • Index maintenance
      • Encoded vector indexes
        • How the EVI works
        • When to create
        • Maintenance
        • Recommendations
      • Compare radix & EVIs
      • Indexes & the optimizer
        • Index not used
        • Display indexes for a table
        • Determine unnecessary indexes
        • Reset usage counts
        • View index builds
        • Manage index rebuilds
      • Indexing strategy
        • Reactive approach
        • Proactive approach
      • Coding for effective indexes
        • Avoid numeric conversions
        • Avoid arithmetic expressions
        • Avoid character string padding
        • LIKE considerations
        • Derived indexes
        • Sparse indexes
      • Indexes with sort sequence
        • Selection, joins, or grouping
        • Ordering
      • Index examples
        • Equal selection, no sort sequence
        • Equal selection, unique-weight sort sequence
        • Equal selection, shared-weight sort sequence
        • Greater than selection, unique-weight sort sequence
        • Join selection, unique-weight sort sequence
        • Join selection, shared-weight sort sequence
        • Order, no sort sequence
        • Order, unique-weight sort sequence
        • Order, shared-weight sort sequence
        • Order, ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE), unique-weight sort sequence
        • Group, no sort sequence
        • Group, unique-weight sort sequence
        • Group, shared-weight sort sequence
        • Order & group on same columns, unique-weight sort sequence
        • Order & group on same columns, ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE), unique-weight sort sequence
        • Order & group on same columns, shared-weight sort sequence
        • Order & group on same columns, ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE), shared-weight sort sequence
        • Order & group on different columns, unique-weight sort sequence
        • Order & group on different columns, ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE), unique-weight sort sequence
        • Order & group on different columns, ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE), shared-weight sort sequence
        • Sparse index examples
    • Application design tips
      • Live data
      • Reduce open operations
      • Retain cursor positions
        • Non-ILE program calls
        • ILE program calls
        • General rules
    • Programming techniques
      • Use the OPTIMIZE clause
      • Use FETCH FOR n ROWS
        • Improve SQL blocking performance
      • Use INSERT n ROWS
      • Control database manager blocking
      • Optimize columns selected
      • PREPARE considerations
      • REFRESH(*FORWARD) considerations
      • Improve concurrency
      • Use SELECTIVITY to supply missing information
    • Performance considerations
      • Long object names
      • Precompile options
      • ALWCPYDTA
      • VARCHAR and VARGRAPHIC
      • Field procedures
        • Examples
    • Db2 for i Services
      • Application Services
        • DELIMIT_NAME scalar function
        • OVERRIDE_QAQQINI procedure
        • OVERRIDE_TABLE procedure
        • PARSE_STATEMENT table function
        • SELFCODES global variable
        • SQL_ERROR_LOG view
        • VALIDATE_SELF scalar function
        • WLM_SET_CLIENT_INFO procedure
      • Performance Services
        • ACT_ON_INDEX_ADVICE procedure
        • ACTIVE_QUERY_INFO table function
        • ADD_QUERY_THRESHOLD procedure
        • DATABASE_MONITOR_INFO view
        • HARVEST_INDEX_ADVICE procedure
        • MTI_INFO table function
        • QUERY_SUPERVISOR view
        • REMOVE_INDEXES procedure
        • REMOVE_QUERY_THRESHOLD procedure
        • RESET_TABLE_INDEX_STATISTICS procedure
      • Plan Cache Services
        • CHANGE_PLAN_CACHE_SIZE procedure
        • CLEAR_PLAN_CACHE procedure
        • DUMP_PLAN_CACHE procedure
        • DUMP_PLAN_CACHE_PROPERTIES procedure
        • DUMP_PLAN_CACHE_TOPN procedure
        • DUMP_SNAP_SHOT_PROPERTIES procedure
        • END_ALL_PLAN_CACHE_EVENT_MONITORS procedure
        • END_PLAN_CACHE_EVENT_MONITOR procedure
        • IMPORT_PC_EVENT_MONITOR procedure
        • IMPORT_PC_SNAPSHOT procedure
        • REMOVE_PC_EVENT_MONITOR procedure
        • REMOVE_PC_SNAPSHOT procedure
        • REMOVE_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR procedure
        • START_PLAN_CACHE_EVENT_MONITOR procedure
      • Utility Services
        • ANALYZE_CATALOG table function
        • CANCEL_SQL procedure
        • CHECK_SYSCST procedure
        • CHECK_SYSROUTINE procedure
        • COMPARE_FILE table function
        • DUMP_SQL_CURSORS procedure
        • END_IDLE_SQE_THREADS procedure
        • EXTRACT_STATEMENTS procedure
        • FIND_AND_CANCEL_QSQSRVR_SQL procedure
        • FIND_QSQSRVR_JOBS procedure
        • GENERATE_SQL procedure
        • GENERATE_SQL_OBJECTS procedure
        • RELATED_OBJECTS table function
        • RESTART_IDENTITY procedure
        • SWAP_DYNUSRPRF procedure
        • SYSFILES view
        • VALIDATE_DATA, VALIDATE_DATA_FILE, and VALIDATE_DATA_LIBRARY table functions
    • IBM i Services
      • Application Services
        • ACTIVATION_GROUP_INFO table function
        • ADD_USER_INDEX_ENTRY and ADD_USER_INDEX_ENTRY_BINARY procedures
        • BINDING_DIRECTORY_INFO view
        • BOUND_MODULE_INFO view
        • BOUND_SRVPGM_INFO view
        • CHANGE_USER_SPACE and CHANGE_USER_SPACE_BINARY procedures
        • CHANGE_USER_SPACE_ATTRIBUTES procedure
        • CLEAR_DATA_QUEUE procedure
        • COMMAND_INFO view
        • CREATE_USER_INDEX procedure
        • CREATE_USER_SPACE procedure
        • DATA_AREA_INFO table function
        • DATA_AREA_INFO view
        • DATA_QUEUE_ENTRIES table function
        • DATA_QUEUE_INFO view
        • DB_TRANSACTION_INFO view
        • ENVIRONMENT_VARIABLE_INFO view
        • EXIT_POINT_INFO view
        • EXIT_PROGRAM_INFO view
        • LPRINTF procedure
        • PROGRAM_EXPORT_IMPORT_INFO view
        • PROGRAM_INFO view
        • QCMDEXC procedure
        • QCMDEXC scalar function
        • RECEIVE_DATA_QUEUE table function
        • REMOVE_USER_INDEX_ENTRY and REMOVE_USER_INDEX_ENTRY_BINARY table functions
        • SEND_DATA_QUEUE, SEND_DATA_QUEUE_BINARY, and SEND_DATA_QUEUE_UTF8 procedures
        • SERVICES_INFO table
        • SET_PASE_SHELL_INFO procedure
        • SPLIT table function
        • STACK_INFO table function
        • USER_INDEX_ENTRIES table function
        • USER_INDEX_INFO view
        • USER_SPACE table function
        • USER_SPACE_INFO view
        • WATCH_DETAIL table function
        • WATCH_INFO view
      • Backup, Recovery, and Media Services (BRMS) Services
      • Communication Services
        • ACTIVE_DB_CONNECTIONS table function
        • ADD_TIME_SERVER procedure
        • CHANGE_OBJECTCONNECT procedure
        • DNS_LOOKUP table function
        • ENV_SYS_INFO view
        • HTTP_SERVER_INFO view
        • NETSTAT_INFO view
        • NETSTAT_INTERFACE_INFO view
        • NETSTAT_JOB_INFO view
        • NETSTAT_ROUTE_INFO view
        • OBJECTCONNECT_INFO view
        • REMOVE_TIME_SERVER procedure
        • SERVER_SBS_CONFIGURATION view
        • SERVER_SBS_ROUTING view
        • SET_SERVER_SBS_ROUTING procedure
        • TCPIP_INFO view
        • TIME_PROTOCOL_INFO view
      • Configuration Services
        • HARDWARE_RESOURCE_INFO table function
        • HARDWARE_RESOURCE_INFO view
      • IFS Services
        • IFS_JOB_INFO table function
        • IFS_OBJECT_LOCK_INFO table function
        • IFS_OBJECT_PRIVILEGES table function
        • IFS_OBJECT_REFERENCES_INFO table function
        • IFS_OBJECT_STATISTICS table function
        • IFS_READ, IFS_READ_BINARY, and IFS_READ_UTF8 table functions
        • IFS_WRITE, IFS_WRITE_BINARY, and IFS_WRITE_UTF8 procedures
        • SERVER_SHARE_INFO view
      • Java Services
        • JVM_INFO view
        • SET_JVM procedure
      • Journal Services
        • ASSOCIATE_JOURNAL_RECEIVER table function
        • Audit journal entry services
          • AUDIT JOURNAL table function common information
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_AD table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_AF table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_CA table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_CD table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_CO table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_CP table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_DO table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_DS table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_EV table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_GR table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_IM table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_JS table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_M0 table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_M6 table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_M7 table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_M8 table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_M9 table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_OM table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_OW table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_PG table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_PW table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_SK table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_SM table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_ST table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_SV table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_ZC table function
          • AUDIT_JOURNAL_ZR table function
        • DISPLAY_JOURNAL table function
        • JOURNAL_INFO view
        • JOURNAL_RECEIVER_INFO view
        • JOURNALED_OBJECTS view
        • REMOTE_JOURNAL_INFO view
      • Librarian Services
        • JOURNAL_INHERIT_RULES view
        • LIBRARY_INFO table function
        • LIBRARY_LIST_INFO view
        • OBJECT_STATISTICS table function
      • Message Handling Services
        • HISTORY_LOG_INFO table function
        • JOBLOG_INFO table function
        • MESSAGE_FILE_DATA view
        • MESSAGE_QUEUE_INFO table function
        • MESSAGE_QUEUE_INFO view
        • REPLY_LIST_INFO view
        • SEND_MESSAGE procedure
      • Performance Services
        • COLLECTION_SERVICES_INFO view
      • PowerHA Services
      • Product Services
        • LICENSE_EXPIRATION_CHECK procedure
        • LICENSE_INFO view
        • SOFTWARE_PRODUCT_INFO view
      • PTF Services
        • ELECTRONIC_SERVICE_AGENT_INFO view
        • FIRMWARE_CURRENCY view
        • GROUP_PTF_CURRENCY view
        • GROUP_PTF_DETAILS view
        • GROUP_PTF_INFO view
        • PTF_INFO view
      • Security Services
        • AUTHORITY_COLLECTION views
        • AUTHORIZATION_LIST_INFO view
        • AUTHORIZATION_LIST_USER_INFO view
        • CERTIFICATE_INFO table function
        • CHANGE_USER_PROFILE table function
        • DRDA_AUTHENTICATION_ENTRY_INFO view
        • FUNCTION_INFO view
        • FUNCTION_USAGE view
        • GROUP_PROFILE_ENTRIES view
        • OBJECT_OWNERSHIP view
        • OBJECT_PRIVILEGES table function
        • OBJECT_PRIVILEGES view
        • SECURITY_INFO view
        • SET_COLUMN_ATTRIBUTE procedure
        • SQL_CHECK_AUTHORITY scalar function
        • SQL_CHECK_FUNCTION_USAGE scalar function
        • SQL_CHECK_SPECIAL_AUTHORITY scalar function
        • USER_INFO view
        • USER_INFO_BASIC view
      • Spool Services
        • DELETE_OLD_SPOOLED_FILES procedure
        • GENERATE_PDF scalar function
        • OUTPUT_QUEUE_ENTRIES table function
        • OUTPUT_QUEUE_ENTRIES view
        • OUTPUT_QUEUE_ENTRIES_BASIC view
        • OUTPUT_QUEUE_INFO view
        • SPOOLED_FILE_DATA table function
        • SPOOLED_FILE_INFO table function
      • Storage Services
        • ADD_DEVICE_LOCKING_POLICY procedure
        • ASP_INFO view
        • ASP_JOB_INFO view
        • ASP_VARY_INFO view
        • CHANGE_DEVICE_LOCKING_POLICY procedure
        • CHANGE_DISK_PATHS procedure
        • CREATE_LOCKING_POLICY procedure
        • DELETE_LOCKING_POLICY procedure
        • FACTORY_RESET_DEVICE procedure
        • LOCKING_POLICY_INFO view
        • MEDIA_LIBRARY_INFO view
        • NVME_INFO view
        • REMOVE_DEVICE_LOCKING_POLICY procedure
        • SYSDISKSTAT table function
        • SYSDISKSTAT view
        • SYSTMPSTG view
        • UNLOCK_DEVICE procedure
        • USER_STORAGE view
      • System Health Services
        • System limit alerts
        • SYSLIMTBL table
        • SYSLIMITS view
        • SYSLIMITS_BASIC view
        • PROCESS_SYSTEM_LIMITS_ALERTS procedure
        • QIBM_SYSTEM_LIMITS global variables
      • Work Management Services
        • ACTIVE_JOB_INFO table function
        • ADD_TRACKED_JOB_QUEUE procedure
          • Submitted Job Tracker
        • AUTOSTART_JOB_INFO view
        • CLEAR_TRACKED_JOB_INFO procedure
        • COMMUNICATIONS_ENTRY_INFO view
        • GET_JOB_INFO table function
        • JOB_DESCRIPTION_INFO view
        • JOB_INFO table function
        • JOB_LOCK_INFO table function
        • JOB_QUEUE_INFO view
        • MEMORY_POOL table function
        • MEMORY_POOL_INFO view
        • OBJECT_LOCK_INFO view
        • OPEN_FILES table function
        • PRESTART_JOB_INFO view
        • PRESTART_JOB_STATISTICS table function
        • RECORD_LOCK_INFO view
        • REMOVE_TRACKED_JOB_QUEUE procedure
        • ROUTING_ENTRY_INFO view
        • SCHEDULED_JOB_INFO view
        • SUBSYSTEM_INFO view
        • SUBSYSTEM_POOL_INFO view
        • SYSTEM_ACTIVITY_INFO table function
        • SYSTEM_STATUS table function
        • SYSTEM_STATUS_INFO view
        • SYSTEM_STATUS_INFO_BASIC view
        • SYSTEM_VALUE_INFO view
        • TRACKED_JOB_INFO table function
        • TRACKED_JOB_QUEUES view
        • WORKLOAD_GROUP_INFO view
        • WORKSTATION_INFO view
    • SYSTOOLS
      • Using SYSTOOLS
      • HTTP function overview
        • BASE64DECODE scalar function
        • BASE64ENCODE scalar function
        • HTTPBLOB and HTTPCLOB scalar functions
        • HTTPBLOBVERBOSE and HTTPCLOBVERBOSE table functions
        • HTTPDELETEBLOB and HTTPDELETECLOB scalar functions
        • HTTPDELETEBLOBVERBOSE and HTTPDELETECLOBVERBOSE table functions
        • HTTPGETBLOB and HTTPGETCLOB scalar functions
        • HTTPGETBLOBVERBOSE and HTTPGETCLOBVERBOSE table functions
        • HTTPHEAD scalar function
        • HTTPPOSTBLOB and HTTPPOSTCLOB scalar functions
        • HTTPPOSTBLOBVERBOSE and HTTPPOSTCLOBVERBOSE table functions
        • HTTPPUTBLOB and HTTPPUTCLOB scalar functions
        • HTTPPUTBLOBVERBOSE and HTTPPUTCLOBVERBOSE table functions
        • URLDECODE scalar function
        • URLENCODE scalar function
    • Database monitor formats
      • SQL table
      • SQL view
        • 1000 - SQL Information
        • 3000 - Table Scan
        • 3001 - Index Used
        • 3002 - Index Created
        • 3003 - Query Sort
        • 3004 - Temp Table
        • 3005 - Table Locked
        • 3006 - Access Plan Rebuilt
        • 3007 - Optimizer Timed Out
        • 3008 - Subquery Processing
        • 3010 - Host Variable, ODP Implementation
        • 3011 - Array Host Variables
        • 3012 - Global Variables
        • 3014 - Generic QQ Information
        • 3015 - Statistics Information
        • 3018 - STRDBMON/ENDDBMON
        • 3019 - Rows retrieved
        • 3020 - Index advised (SQE)
        • 3021 - Bitmap Created
        • 3022 - Bitmap Merge
        • 3023 - Temp Hash Table Created
        • 3025 - Distinct Processing
        • 3026 - Set operation
        • 3027 - Subquery Merge
        • 3028 - Grouping
        • 3030 - Materialized query tables
        • 3031 - Recursive common table expressions
    • Messages reference
      • Performance information
      • Open data paths
      • PRTSQLINF
  • 프로그래밍
    • Database programming
      • What's new for IBM i 7.4
      • PDF file for Database programming
      • Database file concepts
        • Db2 for i
        • Interfaces to Db2 for i
          • Traditional system interface
          • SQL
          • System i Navigator
          • IBM Query for i
        • Database files
        • How database files are described
          • Externally and program-described data
          • Dictionary-described data
          • Record format description
          • Access path description
          • Naming conventions for a database file
        • Database data protection and monitoring
        • Database file sizes
          • Example: Database file sizes
      • Setting up database files
        • Creating and describing database files
          • Creating a library
          • Setting up source files
            • Why source files are used
            • Creating a source file
              • Creating a source file using the Create Source Physical File (CRTSRCPF) command
              • Creating a source file with DDS
              • Creating a source file without DDS
              • IBM-supplied source files
              • Source file attributes
          • Describing database files
            • Describing database files using DDS
              • Example: Describing a physical file using DDS
              • Example: Describing a logical file using DDS
              • Additional DDS field definition functions
              • Using existing field descriptions and field reference files to describe a database file
              • Using a data dictionary for field reference in a database file
              • Sharing existing record format descriptions in a database file
                • Record format relationships between physical and logical files
                • Record format sharing limitation with physical and logical files
            • Specifying database file and member attributes
              • Specifying the file name and member name (FILE and MBR) parameters
              • Specifying the physical file data members (DTAMBRS) parameter
              • Specifying the source file and source member (SRCFILE and SRCMBR) parameters
              • Specifying the file type (FILETYPE) parameter
              • Specifying the maximum number of members (MAXMBRS) parameter
              • Specifying the preferred storage unit (UNIT) parameter
              • Specifying the force write ratio (FRCRATIO) parameter
              • Specifying the force keyed access path (FRCACCPTH) parameter
              • Specifying the record format level check (LVLCHK) parameter
              • Specifying the access path maintenance (MAINT) parameter
                • MAINT parameter comparison
                • MAINT parameter tips
              • Specifying the access path recovery (RECOVER) parameter
              • Specifying the share open data path (SHARE) parameter
              • Specifying the maximum file and record wait time (WAITFILE and WAITRCD) parameters
              • Specifying the authority (AUT) parameter
              • Specifying the system (SYSTEM) parameter
              • Specifying the text description (TEXT) parameter
              • Specifying the coded character set identifier (CCSID) parameter
              • Specifying the sort sequence (SRTSEQ) parameter
              • Specifying the language identifier (LANGID) parameter
          • Setting up physical files
            • Creating a physical file
            • Specifying physical file and member attributes
              • Expiration date
              • Size of a physical file member
              • Storage allocation
              • Method of allocating storage
              • Record length
              • Deleted records
              • Physical file capabilities
              • Source type
            • Implicit physical file journaling
        • Setting up logical files
          • Creating a logical file
            • Creating a logical file with more than one record format
              • Controlling how records are retrieved in a logical file with multiple formats
              • Controlling how records are added to a logical file with multiple formats
            • Defining logical file members
          • Describing logical file record formats
            • Describing field use for logical files
              • Describing field use for logical files: Both
              • Describing field use for logical files: Input only
              • Describing field use for logical files: Neither
            • Deriving new fields from existing fields
              • Concatenated fields
              • Substring fields
              • Renamed fields
              • Translated fields
            • Describing floating-point fields in logical files
          • Describing access paths for logical files
            • Selecting and omitting records for logical files
              • Access path select/omit
              • Dynamic select/omit
              • Selecting and omitting logical file records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
            • Sharing existing access paths between logical files
              • Example: Implicitly shared access paths
          • Setting up a join logical file
            • Example 1: Joining two physical files
              • Reading a join logical file
              • Case 1: Matching records in primary and secondary files
              • Case 2A: A record missing in the secondary file (JDFTVAL keyword not specified)
              • Case 2B: A record missing in the secondary file (JDFTVAL keyword specified)
              • Case 3: Secondary file has more than one match for a record in the primary file
              • Case 4: An extra record in the secondary file
              • Case 5: Random access
            • Example 2: Using more than one field to join files
            • Example 3: Reading duplicate records in the secondary file
            • Example 4: Using join fields whose attributes are different
            • Example 5: Describing fields that never appear in the record format
            • Example 6: Specifying key fields in a join logical file
            • Example 7: Joining three or more physical files
            • Example 8: Joining a physical file to itself
            • Example 9: Using defaults for missing records from secondary files
            • Example 10: A complex join logical file
            • Join logical file considerations
              • Performance considerations
              • Data integrity considerations
              • Summary of rules
                • Requirements
                • Join fields
                • Fields in join logical files
        • Describing access paths for database files
          • Using arrival sequence access paths for database files
          • Using keyed sequence access paths for database files
            • Arranging key fields in an alternative collating sequence
            • Arranging key fields with the SRTSEQ parameter
            • Arranging key fields in ascending or descending sequence
            • Using more than one key field
            • Preventing duplicate key values
            • Arranging duplicate keys
          • Using existing access path specifications
          • Using binary floating-point fields in database file access paths
        • Securing database files
          • Granting file and data authority
            • Authorizing a user or group using System i Navigator
            • Types of object authority
            • Types of data authority
          • Specifying public authority
            • Defining public authority using System i Navigator
            • Setting a default public authority using System i Navigator
          • Using database file capabilities to control I/O operations
          • Limiting access to specific fields in a database file
          • Using logical files to secure data
          • Using permissions and masks to secure data
      • Processing database files
        • Database file processing: Runtime considerations
          • File and member name
          • File processing options
            • Specifying the type of processing
            • Specifying the initial file position
            • Reusing deleted records
            • Ignoring the keyed sequence access path
            • Delaying end-of-file processing
            • Specifying the record length
            • Ignoring record formats
            • Determining whether duplicate keys exist
          • Data recovery and integrity
            • Protecting your files with journaling and commitment control
            • Writing data and access paths to auxiliary storage
            • Checking changes to the record format description
            • Checking the expiration date of a physical file member
            • Preventing the job from changing data in a file
          • Locking shared data
            • Locking records
            • Locking files
            • Locking members
            • Locking record format data
            • Database lock considerations
            • Displaying locked rows using System i Navigator
            • Displaying locked records using the Display Record Locks (DSPRCDLCK) command
          • Sharing database files in the same job or activation group
            • Open considerations for files shared in a job or an activation group
            • Input/output considerations for files shared in a job or an activation group
            • Close considerations for files shared in a job or an activation group
              • Example 1: A single set of files with similar processing options
              • Example 2: Multiple sets of files with similar processing options
              • Example 3: A single set of files with different processing options
          • Sequential-only processing of database files
            • Open considerations for sequential-only processing
            • Input/output considerations for sequential-only processing
            • Close considerations for sequential-only processing
          • Summary of runtime considerations for processing database files
          • Storage pool paging option effect on database performance
        • Opening a database file
          • Opening a database file member
          • Using Open Database File (OPNDBF) command
          • Using Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
            • Creating queries
              • Creating an open query file using an existing record format
              • Creating an open query file using a different record format
            • Dynamically selecting records
              • Example 1: Dynamically selecting records
              • Example 2: Dynamically selecting records
              • Example 3: Dynamically selecting records
              • Example 4: Dynamically selecting records
              • Example 5: Dynamically selecting records
              • Example 6: Dynamically selecting records
              • Example 7: Dynamically selecting records
              • Example 8: Dynamically selecting records
              • Example 9: Dynamically selecting records
              • Example 10: Dynamically selecting records
              • Example 11: Dynamically selecting records
            • Arranging records
              • Specifying dynamic keyed sequence access paths
                • Example 1: Specifying dynamic keyed sequence access paths
                • Example 2: Specifying dynamic keyed sequence access paths
                • Example 3: Specifying dynamic keyed sequence access paths
                • Example 4: Specifying dynamic keyed sequence access paths
              • Specifying key fields from different physical files
              • Unique-key processing
                • Example 1: Unique-key processing
                • Example 2: Unique-key processing
              • Random processing
              • Considerations for arranging records
            • Formatting records
              • Defining fields mapped from existing fields
                • Example 1: Defining fields mapped from existing fields
                • Example 2: Defining fields mapped from existing fields
                • Example 3: Defining fields mapped from existing fields
              • Considerations for specifying record formats
            • Grouping records
              • Summarizing data from database file records (grouping)
                • Example: Summarizing data from database file records (grouping)
              • Final total-only processing
                • Example 1: Final total-only processing
                • Example 2: Final total-only processing
                • Example 3: Final total-only processing
              • Grouping field references
            • Joining records
              • Dynamically joining database files
                • Example 1: Dynamically joining database files
                • Example 2: Dynamically joining database files
                • Example 3: Dynamically joining database files
              • Handling missing records in secondary join files
            • Optimizing performance
              • Controlling how the system runs the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                • Example 1: Controlling how the system runs the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                • Example 2: Controlling how the system runs the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
              • Runtime messages for the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
              • Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command: Performance considerations
              • Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command: Performance considerations for sort sequence tables
                • Grouping, joining, and selection: Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command performance
                • Ordering: Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command performance
              • Performance comparisons with other database functions
            • Handling errors
              • Typical errors when using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
              • Handling divide-by-zero errors
            • Usage notes for the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
              • Command elements
                • Field names
                • Expressions
                • Built-in functions
                • Restricted built-in functions
              • Data type considerations
                • Comparing date, time, and timestamp using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                • Performing date, time, and timestamp arithmetic using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                  • Durations
                  • Rules for date, time, and timestamp arithmetic
                  • Subtracting dates
                  • Incrementing and decrementing dates
                  • Subtracting times
                  • Incrementing and decrementing times
                  • Subtracting timestamps
                  • Incrementing and decrementing timestamps
                • BLOB, CLOB, DBCLOB, and XML considerations
                • DATALINK considerations
              • DDM file considerations
              • Input and output considerations
                • Using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command for more than just input
                • Field usage attribute
              • Open data path considerations
                • Files shared in a job
                • Checking if the record format description changed
                • Copying from an open query file
                  • Example 1: Copying from an open query file
                  • Example 2: Copying from an open query file
                  • Example 3: Copying from an open query file
                  • Example 4: Copying from an open query file
              • Override considerations
              • Program considerations
                • Considerations for writing a high-level language program
                • CL program coding with the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
        • Basic database file operations in programs
          • Setting a position in the file
          • Reading database records
            • Reading database records using an arrival sequence access path
              • Reading next operation
              • Reading previous operation
              • Reading first operation
              • Reading last operation
              • Reading same operation
              • Reading by relative record number operation
            • Reading database records using a keyed sequence access path
              • Reading next operation
              • Reading previous operation
              • Reading first operation
              • Reading last operation
              • Reading same operation
              • Reading by key operation
              • Reading by relative record number operation
              • Reading when logical file shares an access path with more keys operation
            • Waiting for more records when end of file is reached
            • Releasing locked records
          • Updating database records
          • Adding database records
            • Identifying which record format to add in a file with multiple formats
            • Using the force-end-of-data operation
          • Deleting database records
        • Closing a database file
        • Monitoring database file errors in a program
          • System handling of error messages
          • Effect of error messages on file positioning
          • Determining which messages you want to monitor
      • Managing database files
        • Basic operations for managing database files
          • Copying a file
          • Moving a file
        • Managing database members
          • Member operations common to all database files
            • Adding members
            • Changing member attributes
            • Renaming members
            • Removing members
          • Physical file member operations
            • Initializing data in a physical file member
            • Clearing data from a physical file member
            • Reorganizing a physical file member
              • Reorganizing a table using System i Navigator
              • Reorganizing a physical file member using the Reorganize Physical File Member (RGZPFM) command
                • Example: Reorganizing a physical file member
              • Usage notes: Reorganizing a physical file member
              • Reorganization options
              • Suspending or canceling a reorganize operation
            • Displaying records in a physical file member
        • Using database attribute and cross-reference information
          • Displaying information about database files
            • Displaying attributes of a file using System i Navigator
            • Displaying attributes of a file using the Display File Description (DSPFD) command
            • Displaying the description of the fields in a file
            • Displaying the relationships between files on the system
            • Displaying the files used by programs
            • Displaying the system cross-reference files
          • Writing the output from a command directly to a database file
            • Example: A command output file
            • Output files for the Display File Description (DSPFD) command
            • Output files for the Display Journal (DSPJRN) command
            • Output files for the Display Problems (DSPPRB) command
        • Changing database file descriptions and attributes
          • Effects of changing fields in a file description
          • Changing a physical file description and attributes
            • Example 1: Changing a physical file description and attributes
            • Example 2: Changing a physical file description and attributes
          • Changing a logical file description and attributes
        • Recovering and restoring your database
          • Recovering data in a database file
            • Managing journals
              • Journals
              • Working with journals
                • Creating a journal using System i Navigator
                • Creating a journal receiver using System i Navigator
                • Values for new journals and journal receivers
                • Adding a remote journal using System i Navigator
                • Removing a remote journal using System i Navigator
                • Activating a remote journal using System i Navigator
                • Deactivating a remote journal using System i Navigator
                • Displaying journal information for a table using System i Navigator
                • Swapping journal receivers using System i Navigator
                • Starting or ending journaling for libraries
                • Starting or ending journaling for tables (files) using System i Navigator
            • Ensuring data integrity with commitment control
              • Transactions
              • Benefits of using commitment control
              • Usage notes: Commitment control
          • Reducing time in access path recovery
            • Saving access paths
            • Restoring access paths
            • Journaling access paths
            • System-managed access-path protection
            • Rebuilding access paths
              • Controlling when access paths are rebuilt
              • Designing files to reduce access path rebuilding time
              • Other methods to avoid rebuilding access paths
          • Database recovery process after an abnormal system end
            • Database file recovery during the IPL
            • Database file recovery after the IPL
            • Effects of the storage pool paging option on database recovery
            • Database file recovery options table
          • Reclaim database cross reference files
          • Database save and restore
          • Database considerations for save and restore
        • Using source files
          • Working with source files
            • Using the source entry utility
            • Using device source files
            • Copying source file data
              • Copying to and from source files using the Copy Source File (CPYSRCF) command
              • Copying to and from source files using the Copy File (CPYF) command
              • Source sequence numbers used in copies
            • Loading and unloading data from systems other than IBM i
            • Using source files in a program
          • Creating an object using a source file
            • Creating an object from source statements in a batch job
            • Determining which source file member was used to create an object
          • Managing a source file
            • Changing source file attributes
            • Reorganizing source file member data
            • Determining when a source statement was changed
            • Using source files for documentation
        • Controlling the integrity of your database with constraints
          • Setting up constraints for your database
          • Removing unique, primary key, or check constraints
          • Working with a group of constraints
            • Details: Working with a group of constraints
            • Working with constraints that are in check pending status
              • Displaying records that put a constraint in check pending status
              • Processing constraints that are in check pending status
          • Unique constraints
          • Primary key constraints
          • Check constraints
        • Ensuring data integrity with referential constraints
          • Adding referential constraints
            • Before you add referential constraints
            • Defining the parent file in a referential constraint
            • Defining the dependent file in a referential constraint
            • Specifying referential constraint rules
              • Details: Specifying referential constraint delete rules
              • Details: Specifying referential constraint update rules
              • Details: Specifying referential constraint rules—journaling requirements
            • Details: Adding referential constraints
            • Details: Avoiding constraint cycles
          • Verifying referential constraints
          • Enabling or disabling referential constraints
          • Removing referential constraints
            • Details: Removing a constraint with the CST parameter
            • Details: Removing a constraint with the TYPE parameter
          • Details: Ensuring data integrity with referential constraints
          • Example: Ensuring data integrity with referential constraints
          • Referential integrity terms
          • Referential integrity enforcement
            • Foreign key enforcement
            • Parent key enforcement
              • Enforcement of delete rules
              • Enforcement of update rules
          • Constraint states
          • Check pending status in referential constraints
            • Dependent file restrictions in check pending
            • Parent file restrictions in check pending
          • Referential integrity and CL commands
        • Triggering automatic events in your database
          • Uses for triggers
          • Benefits of using triggers in your business
          • Creating trigger programs
            • Adding triggers using System i Navigator
            • How trigger programs work
            • Other important information about working with trigger programs
              • Recommendations for trigger programs
              • Precautions to take when coding trigger programs
                • Functions to use with care in trigger programs
                • Commands, statements, and operations that you cannot use in trigger programs
              • Monitoring the use of trigger programs
              • Trigger and application programs that are under commitment control
              • Trigger and application programs that are not under commitment control
              • Trigger program error messages
            • Example: Trigger program
            • Trigger buffer sections
              • Trigger buffer field descriptions
          • Adding triggers
          • Displaying triggers
          • Removing triggers
          • Enabling or disabling physical file triggers
          • Triggers and their relationship to CL commands
          • Triggers and their relationship to referential integrity
        • Database distribution
      • Double-byte character set considerations
        • DBCS field data types
        • DBCS field mapping considerations
        • DBCS field concatenation
        • DBCS field substring operations
        • Comparing DBCS fields in a logical file
        • Using DBCS fields in the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
          • Using the wildcard function with DBCS fields
          • Comparing DBCS fields through the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
          • Using concatenation with DBCS fields
          • Using sort sequence with DBCS fields
      • Related information
    • Distributed database programming
      • What's new for IBM i 7.4
      • PDF file for Distributed database programming
      • DRDA and DDM overview
        • DRDA overview
          • Distributed relational database processing
            • Remote unit of work
            • Distributed unit of work
            • Distributed request
              • Three-Part Names
              • Aliases
            • Other distributed relational database terms and concepts
          • Distributed Relational Database Architecture support
          • DRDA and CDRA support
          • Application requester driver programs
          • Distributed relational database on IBM i
          • Example: Spiffy Corporation distributed relational database
            • Spiffy organization and system profile
            • Business processes of the Spiffy Corporation Automobile Service
            • Distributed relational database administration for the Spiffy Corporation
        • DDM overview
          • System compatibility
          • Overview of DDM functions
          • Basic DDM concepts
          • Parts of DDM
            • Parts of DDM: Source DDM
            • Parts of DDM: Target DDM
            • Parts of DDM: DDM file
              • DDM file creation using SNA
              • DDM file creation using TCP/IP
              • DDM file creation using RDB directory entry information
                • Effect of job description on ASP group selection
              • Example: Using the basic concepts of DDM in an APPC network
              • Example: Using the basic concepts of DDM in an APPN network
          • Additional DDM concepts
            • IBM i as the client system for DDM
              • Integrated Language Environment and DDM
              • Client system actions dependent on type of server system
            • IBM i as the server system for DDM
            • DDM-related jobs and DDM conversations
          • Examples: Accessing multiple remote files with DDM
            • Example: Accessing files on multiple systems with DDM
            • Example: Processing multiple requests for remote files with DDM
      • Planning and design
        • Planning and design for DRDA
          • Identifying your needs and expectations for a distributed relational database
            • Data needs for distributed relational databases
            • Distributed relational database capabilities
            • Goals and directions for a distributed relational database
          • Designing the application, network, and data for a distributed relational database
            • Tips: Designing distributed relational database applications
            • Network considerations for a distributed relational database
            • Data considerations for a distributed relational database
          • Developing a management strategy for a distributed relational database
            • General operations for a distributed relational database
            • Security considerations for a distributed relational database
            • Accounting for a distributed relational database
            • Problem analysis for a distributed relational database
            • Backup and recovery for a distributed relational database
        • Planning and design for DDM
          • Communications requirements for DDM in an APPC network
          • Configuring a communications network in a TCP/IP network
          • Security requirements for DDM
          • File requirements for DDM
          • Program modification requirements for DDM
            • DDM architecture-related restrictions
            • IBM i client and server restrictions and considerations for DDM
            • Non-IBM i target restrictions and considerations for DDM
      • Initial setup
        • IBM i work management
          • Setting up your work management environment
          • APPC subsystems
          • TCP/IP subsystems
        • User databases on independent auxiliary storage pools
        • Using the relational database directory
          • Working with the relational database directory
            • Adding an entry for SNA usage
            • Adding an entry for TCP/IP usage
            • Adding an entry for Db2 Mirror usage
            • Specifying a relational database alias name
            • Adding an entry for an application requester driver
            • Using the WRKRDBDIRE command
            • The *LOCAL directory entry
            • Directory entries for user databases on independent auxiliary storage pools
          • Example: Setting up a relational database directory
        • Setting up security
        • Setting up the TCP/IP server
        • Setting up SQL packages for interactive SQL
        • Setting up DDM files
        • Loading data into tables in a distributed relational database
          • Loading new data into the tables of a distributed relational database
            • Loading data into a table using SQL
            • Manipulating data in tables and files using the IBM i query management function
            • Entering data, update tables, and make inquiries using data file utility
          • Moving data from one system to another
            • Creating a user-written application program
            • Querying a database using interactive SQL
            • Querying remote systems using Db2 for i query management function
            • Copying files to and from tape
            • Moving data between systems using copy file commands
            • Transferring data over network using network file commands
            • Moving a table using object save and restore commands
          • Moving a database to IBM i from a system other than IBM i
            • Moving data from another IBM system
            • Moving data from a non-IBM system
      • Security
        • Elements of distributed relational database security
          • Elements of security in an APPC network
            • APPN configuration lists
            • Conversation level security
            • DRDA server security in an APPC network
          • Elements of security in a TCP/IP network
            • Client security in a TCP/IP network
            • Server security in a TCP/IP network
            • Connection security protocols
            • Secure Sockets Layer
              • Required programs
              • IBM i requirements
            • Internet Protocol Security Architecture
            • Considerations for certain passwords being sent as clear text
            • Ports and port restrictions
        • DRDA and DDM server access control using user exit programs
          • Server access control exit program parameter list
          • Example: DRDA and DDM server access control using user exit program
        • DRDA and DDM server access control using function usage ID
        • Object-related security
        • DRDA: Authority to distributed relational database objects
        • DRDA: Programs that run under adopted authority for a distributed relational database
        • Protection strategies in a distributed relational database
      • Application development
        • Application development for DRDA
          • Programming considerations for a distributed relational database application
            • Naming of distributed relational database objects
              • System (*SYS) naming convention
              • SQL (*SQL) naming convention
              • Default collection name
            • Connecting to a distributed relational database
              • Remote unit of work
                • Activation group states
                  • Connectable and connected state
                  • Unconnectable and connected state
                  • Connectable and unconnected state
              • Distributed unit of work
                • Activation group states
                  • Initial state of an activation group
                • Connection states
                • Activation group connection states
                • When a connection is ended
                • Run with both RUW and DUW connection management
              • Implicit connection management for the default activation group
              • Implicit connection management for nondefault activation groups
              • Explicit connection management
            • SQL specific to distributed relational database and SQL CALL
              • Distributed relational database statements
              • SQL CALL statement (stored procedures)
                • Db2 for i CALL considerations
              • Db2 for i coexistence
            • Ending DRDA units of work
            • Stored procedures, user-defined functions, and commitment control
            • Coded character set identifier
              • IBM i support
            • Other DRDA data conversion
          • Preparing distributed relational database programs
            • Precompiling programs with SQL statements
              • Listing
              • Temporary source file member
              • SQL package creation
              • Precompiler commands
            • Compiling an application program
            • Binding an application
            • Testing and debugging
              • Program references
          • Working with SQL packages
            • Using the Create SQL Package (CRTSQLPKG) command
            • Managing an SQL package
              • Displaying information about an SQL package
              • Deleting an SQL package using the Delete SQL Package (DLTSQLPKG) command
              • Modifying package authorizations
              • Using the SQL DROP PACKAGE statement
        • Application development for DDM
          • DDM files and SQL
          • Using language, utility, and application support for DDM
            • Programming language considerations for DDM
              • DDM considerations for all languages
                • HLL program input and output operations with IBM i DDM
              • Commitment control support for DDM
                • Using DDM files with commitment control
              • ILE RPG considerations for DDM
              • ILE COBOL considerations for DDM
                • Direct file support with ILE COBOL
              • PL/I considerations for DDM
              • CL command considerations for DDM
              • ILE C considerations for DDM
            • Utility considerations for DDM
              • System/38-compatible database tools
                • System/38-compatible data file utility (DFU/38)
                • System/38-compatible query utility (Query/38)
                • Non-IBM i or non-System/38 Query/38 example
                • Query/38 output considerations for DDM
                • Query/38 command considerations for DDM
                • Query/38 optimization for DDM
                • Existing Query/38 application considerations for DDM
              • Data file utility for IBM i
              • IBM i database query
              • Sort utility
            • IBM i Access Family considerations for DDM
              • IBM i Access Family transfer function considerations
              • IBM i Access Family copy command considerations
            • Hierarchical file system API support for DDM
          • Using CL and DDS with DDM
            • DDM-specific CL commands
              • Change DDM File (CHGDDMF) command
              • Create DDM File (CRTDDMF) command
              • Display DDM Files (DSPDDMF) command
              • Reclaim DDM Conversations (RCLDDMCNV) command
              • Submit Remote Command (SBMRMTCMD) command
                • IBM i and System/38 server systems on the SBMRMTCMD command
                • Restrictions for the SBMRMTCMD command
                • Examples: SBMRMTCMD command
                • Additional considerations: SBMRMTCMD command
              • Work with DDM Files (WRKDDMF) command
            • DDM-related CL command considerations
              • File management handling of DDM files
              • Allocate Object (ALCOBJ) command
                • Member names and IBM i target servers on the ALCOBJ command
                • Lock multiple DDM files with the ALCOBJ command
                • ALCOBJ command completion time with DDM
              • Change Job (CHGJOB) command
              • Change Logical File (CHGLF) command
              • Change Physical File (CHGPF) command
              • Change Source Physical File (CHGSRCPF) command
              • Clear Physical File Member (CLRPFM) command
              • Copy commands with DDM
              • Create Data Area (CRTDTAARA) command
              • Create Data Queue (CRTDTAQ) command
              • Create Logical File (CRTLF) command
              • Create Physical File (CRTPF) command
              • Create Source Physical File (CRTSRCPF) command
              • Deallocate Object (DLCOBJ) command
                • Member names and IBM i target servers on the DLCOBJ command
                • Unlock multiple DDM files on the DLCOBJ command
              • Delete File (DLTF) command
              • Display File Description (DSPFD) command
              • Display File Field Description (DSPFFD) command
              • Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
              • Override with Database File (OVRDBF) command
              • Reclaim Resources (RCLRSC) command
              • Rename Object (RNMOBJ) command
              • Work with Job (WRKJOB) command
              • Work with Object Lock (WRKOBJLCK) command
            • DDM-related CL parameter considerations
              • DDMACC parameter considerations
              • DDMCNV parameter considerations
              • OUTFILE parameter considerations for DDM
            • DDM-related CL command lists
              • Object-oriented commands with DDM
              • Target IBM i-required file management commands
              • Member-related commands with DDM
              • Commands not supporting DDM
              • Source file commands
              • DDM-related CL command summary charts
            • Data description specifications considerations for DDM
              • IBM i target considerations for DDM
              • Non-IBM i target considerations for DDM
              • DDM-related DDS keywords and information
            • DDM user profile authority
          • DDM commands and parameters
            • Subsets of DDM architecture supported by IBM i DDM
              • Supported DDM file models
                • Alternate Index File (ALTINDF)
                • Direct file (DIRFIL)
                • Directory file (DIRECTORY)
                • Keyed file (KEYFIL)
                • Sequential file (SEQFIL)
                • Stream file (STRFIL)
              • Supported DDM access methods
            • DDM commands and objects
              • CHGCD (Change Current Directory) Level 2.0
              • CHGEOF (Change End of File) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
              • CHGFAT (Change File Attribute) Level 2.0
              • CLOSE (Close File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
              • CLRFIL (Clear File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
              • CLSDRC (Close Directory) Level 2.0
              • CPYFIL (Copy File) Level 2.0
              • CRTAIF (Create Alternate Index File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
              • CRTDIRF (Create Direct File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
              • CRTDRC (Create Directory) Level 2.0
              • CRTKEYF (Create Keyed File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
              • CRTSEQF (Create Sequential File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
              • CRTSTRF (Create Stream File) Level 2.0
              • DCLFIL (Declare File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
              • DELDCL (Delete Declared Name) Level 1.0
              • DELDRC (Delete Directory) Level 2.0
              • DELFIL (Delete File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
              • DELREC (Delete Record) Level 1.0
              • EXCSAT (Exchange Server Attributes) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
              • FILAL and FILATTRL (File Attribute List) Level 1.0, Level 2.0, and Level 3.0
              • FRCBFF (Force Buffer) Level 2.0
              • GETDRCEN (Get Directory Entries) Level 2.0
              • GETREC (Get Record at Cursor) Level 1.0
              • GETSTR (Get Substream) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
              • INSRECEF (Insert at EOF) Level 1.0
              • INSRECKY (Insert Record by Key Value) Level 1.0
              • INSRECNB (Insert Record at Number) Level 1.0
              • LCKFIL (Lock File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
              • LCKSTR (Lock Substream) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
              • LODRECF (Load Record File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
              • LODSTRF (Load Stream File) Level 2.0
              • LSTFAT (List File Attributes) Level 1.0, Level 2.0, and Level 3.0
              • MODREC (Modify Record with Update Intent) Level 1.0
              • OPEN (Open File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
              • OPNDRC (Open Directory) Level 2.0
              • PUTSTR (Put Substream) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
              • QRYCD (Query Current Directory) Level 2.0
              • QRYSPC (Query Space) Level 2.0
              • RNMDRC (Rename Directory) Level 2.0
              • RNMFIL (Rename File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
              • SBMSYSCMD (Submit server Command) Level 4.0
              • SETBOF (Set Cursor to Beginning of File) Level 1.0
              • SETEOF (Set Cursor to End of File) Level 1.0
              • SETFRS (Set Cursor to First Record) Level 1.0
              • SETKEY (Set Cursor by Key) Level 1.0
              • SETKEYFR (Set Cursor to First Record in Key Sequence) Level 1.0
              • SETKEYLM (Set Key Limits) Level 1.0
              • SETKEYLS (Set Cursor to Last Record in Key Sequence) Level 1.0
              • SETKEYNX (Set Cursor to Next Record in Key Sequence) Level 1.0
              • SETKEYPR (Set Cursor to Previous Record in Key Sequence) Level 1.0
              • SETLST (Set Cursor to Last Record) Level 1.0
              • SETMNS (Set Cursor Minus) Level 1.0
              • SETNBR (Set Cursor to Record Number) Level 1.0
              • SETNXT (Set Cursor to Next Number) Level 1.0
              • SETNXTKE (Set Cursor to Next Record in Key Sequence with a Key Equal to Value Specified) Level 1.0
              • SETPLS (Set Cursor Plus) Level 1.0
              • SETPRV (Set Cursor to Previous Record) Level 1.0
              • SETUPDKY (Set Update Intent by Key Value) Level 1.0
              • SETUPDNB (Set Update Intent by Record Number) Level 1.0
              • ULDRECF (Unload Record File) Level 1.0
              • ULDSTRF (Unload Stream File) Level 2.0
              • UNLFIL (Unlock File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
              • UNLIMPLK (Unlock Implicit Record Lock) Level 1.0
              • UNLSTR (Unlock Substreams) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
            • User profile authority
          • IBM i-to-CICS considerations with DDM
            • IBM i languages, utilities, and licensed programs
              • Create DDM File (CRTDDMF) considerations
              • IBM i CL considerations
                • Allocate Object (ALCOBJ)
                • Clear Physical File Member (CLRPFM)
                • Copy File (CPYF)
                • CPYTOTAP, CPYFRMTAP and CPYSPLF commands
                • Deallocate Object (DLCOBJ)
                • DSPFD and DSPFFD commands
                • Display Physical File Member (DSPPFM)
                • Open Database File (OPNDBF)
                • Override with Database File (OVRDBF)
                • Receive Network File (RCVNETF)
            • Language considerations for IBM i and CICS
              • PL/I considerations
                • PL/I open file requests
                • PL/I input/output requests
              • ILE COBOL considerations
                • ILE COBOL SELECT clause
                • ILE COBOL statements
              • ILE C considerations
              • ILE RPG considerations
                • File description specifications
                • ILE RPG input/output operations
          • Using DDM on IBM i versus other IBM systems
            • IBM i and System/36 DDM differences
            • IBM i and System/38 DDM differences
      • Administration
        • Monitoring relational database activity
          • Working with jobs in a distributed relational database
          • Working with user jobs in a distributed relational database
          • Working with active jobs in a distributed relational database
          • Working with commitment definitions in a distributed relational database
          • Tracking request information with the job log of a distributed relational database
          • Locating distributed relational database jobs
        • Operating remote systems
        • Displaying objects used by programs
          • Example: Displaying program reference
        • Dropping a collection from a distributed relational database
        • Job accounting in a distributed relational database
        • Managing the TCP/IP server
          • TCP/IP server terminology
          • Establishing a connection over TCP/IP
          • The listener program
          • Start TCP/IP Server (STRTCPSVR) CL command
            • Listener restrictions
            • Examples: Starting TCP/IP Server
          • End TCP/IP Server (ENDTCPSVR) CL command
            • End TCP/IP server restrictions
            • Example: Ending TCP/IP server
          • Starting the listener in System i Navigator
          • The server jobs
            • Subsystem descriptions and prestart job entries with DDM
            • Prestart jobs
              • Monitoring prestart jobs
              • Managing prestart jobs
              • Removing prestart job entries
              • Routing entries
          • Configuring the server job subsystem
          • Identifying server jobs
            • IBM i job names
            • Displaying server jobs
              • Displaying active jobs using the WRKACTJOB command
              • Displaying active user jobs using the WRKUSRJOB command
            • Displaying the history log
        • Auditing the relational database directory
        • Operating considerations for DDM
          • Accessing files with DDM
            • Types of files supported by IBM i DDM
            • Existence of DDM file and remote file
            • Rules for specifying server system file names for DDM
              • Target IBM i file names for DDM
              • Target non-IBM i file names for DDM
              • Using location-specific file names for commonly named files for DDM
            • Examples: Accessing IBM i DDM remote files (IBM i-to-IBM i)
            • Example: Accessing System/36 DDM remote files (IBM i-to-IBM i)
          • Accessing members with DDM
            • Example: Accessing DDM remote members (IBM i only)
            • Example: DDM file that opens a specific member
          • Working with access methods for DDM
            • Access intents
            • Key field updates
            • Deleted records
            • Blocked record processing
            • Variable-length records
          • Other DDM-related functions involving remote files
            • Performing file management functions on remote systems
            • Locking files and members for DDM
              • Allocate Object (ALCOBJ) and Deallocate Object (DLCOBJ) commands
              • Work with Job (WRKJOB) and Work with Object Locks (WRKOBJLCK) commands
            • Controlling DDM conversations
              • Display DDMCNV values (WRKJOB command)
              • Change DDMCNV values (CHGJOB) command
              • Reclaim DDM resources (RCLRSC and RCLDDMCNV commands)
            • Displaying DDM remote file information
            • Displaying DDM remote file records
            • Coded character set identifier with DDM
            • Use of object distribution
            • Use of object distribution with DDM
          • Canceling distributed data management work
            • End Job (ENDJOB) command
            • End Request (ENDRQS) command
          • System/36 client and server considerations for DDM
            • DDM-related differences between IBM i and System/36 files
            • System/36 client to IBM i server considerations for DDM
            • IBM i client to System/36 server considerations for DDM
            • Override considerations to System/36 for DDM
          • Personal computer client to IBM i server considerations for DDM
      • Data availability and protection
        • Recovery support for a distributed relational database
          • Data recovery after disk failures for distributed relational databases
            • Auxiliary storage pools
            • Checksum protection in a distributed relational database
            • Mirrored protection for a distributed relational database
          • Journal management for distributed relational databases
            • Index recovery
            • Designing tables to reduce index rebuilding time
            • System-managed access-path protection
          • Transaction recovery through commitment control
          • Save and restore processing for a distributed relational database
            • Saving and restoring indexes in the distributed relational database environment
            • Saving and restoring security information in the distributed relational database environment
            • Saving and restoring SQL packages in the distributed relational database environment
            • Saving and restoring relational database directories
        • Network redundancy considerations for a distributed relational database
        • Data redundancy in your distributed relational database network
      • Performance
        • Improving distributed relational database performance through the network
        • Improving distributed relational database performance through the system
        • Performance considerations for DRDA
          • Factors that affect blocking for DRDA
          • Factors that affect the size of DRDA query blocks
        • Performance considerations for DDM
          • Batch file processing with DDM
          • Interactive file processing with DDM
          • DDM conversation length considerations
      • Examples: Application programming
        • DRDA examples
          • Example: Program definitions
          • DRDA example: ILE RPG program
          • DRDA example: COBOL program
          • DRDA example: C program using embedded SQL
          • DRDA example: Java program
          • Example: Program output
        • DDM examples
          • Communications setup for DDM examples and tasks
          • DDM example 1: Simple inquiry application
          • DDM example 2: ORDERENT application
            • DDM example 2: Central system ORDERENT files
            • DDM example 2: Description of ORDERENT program
            • DDM example 2: Remote system ORDERENT files
            • DDM example 2: Transferring a program to a server system
              • DDM example 2: Pass-through method
              • DDM example 2: SBMRMTCMD command method
            • DDM example 2: Copying a file
          • DDM example 3: Accessing multiple IBM i files
          • DDM example 4: Accessing a file on System/36
      • User FAQs
        • Connecting to a distributed relational database
        • IBM i system value QCCSID
        • CCSID conversion considerations for DB2 for z/OS and DB2 Server for VM database managers
        • Why am I getting an SQL5048N message when I attempt to connect from DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows?
        • Do IBM i files have to be journaled?
        • When will query data be blocked for better performance?
        • How do you interpret an SQLCODE and the associated tokens reported in an SQL0969N error message?
        • How can the host variable type in WHERE clauses affect performance?
        • Can I use a library list for resolving unqualified table and view names?
        • How can unlike clients override package options such as NLSS sort sequences, system naming and separate date/time formats?
        • Why are no rows returned when I perform a query?
        • What level of DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows is required to interact with DB2 for IBM i?
        • How can I get scrollable cursor support enabled from DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows to the IBM i platform?
        • Other tips for interoperating in unlike environments
      • Troubleshooting
        • IBM i problem handling overview
        • System and communications problems
        • DRDA application problems
          • Resolving incorrect output problems
          • Resolving loop, wait, or performance problems
          • Listings
            • Precompiler listing
            • CRTSQLPKG listing
          • SQLCODEs and SQLSTATEs
            • Distributed relational database SQLCODEs and SQLSTATEs
        • Finding first-failure data capture data
        • Getting data to report a failure
          • Printing a job log
          • Finding job logs from TCP/IP server prestart jobs
          • Printing the product activity log
          • Job tracing
            • Trace job
            • Start trace
          • Communications trace
            • Standard communications trace
              • Finding your line, controller, and device descriptions
          • TCP/IP communications trace
            • TCP/IP communication trace formatting
        • Starting a service job to diagnose application server problems
          • Service jobs for APPC servers
          • Creating your own transaction program name and setting QCNTSRVC
            • Setting QCNTSRVC as a transaction program name on a Db2 for i application requester
            • Creating your own transaction program name for debugging a Db2 for i application server job
            • Setting QCNTSRVC as a transaction program name on a DB2 for VM client
            • Setting QCNTSRVC as a transaction program name on a DB2 for z/OS client
            • Setting QCNTSRVC as a transaction program name on a DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows client
          • Service jobs for TCP/IP servers
          • QRWOPTIONS data area
            • Example: CL command to create the data area
        • Working with distributed relational database users
          • Copy screen
          • Messages
            • Message types
            • Distributed relational database messages
          • Handling program start request failures for APPC
          • Handling connection request failures for TCP/IP
            • Server is not started or the port ID is not valid
            • DRDA connection authorization failure
            • System not available
            • Connection failures specific to interactive SQL
            • Not enough prestart jobs at server
      • Related information
        • IBM i information
        • Distributed relational database library
        • Other IBM distributed relational database platform libraries
        • Architecture books
    • Embedded SQL programming
      • What's new for IBM i 7.4
      • PDF file for Embedded SQL programming
      • Common concepts and rules for using embedded SQL
        • Writing applications that use SQL
        • Using host variables in SQL statements
          • Assignment rules for host variables in SQL statements
          • Indicator variables in applications that use SQL
            • Indicator variables used with host structures
            • Indicator variables used to assign special values
        • Handling SQL error return codes using the SQLCA
        • Using the SQL diagnostics area
          • Updating applications to use the SQL diagnostics area
          • IBM i programming model
          • Additional notes on using the SQL diagnostics area
          • Example: SQL routine exception
          • Example: Logging items from the SQL diagnostics area
        • Handling exception conditions with the WHENEVER statement
      • Coding SQL statements in C and C++ applications
        • Defining the SQL communication area in C and C++ applications that use SQL
        • Defining SQL descriptor areas in C and C++ applications that use SQL
        • Embedding SQL statements in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          • Comments in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          • Continuation for SQL statements in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          • Including code in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          • Margins in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          • Names in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          • NULLs and NULs in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          • Statement labels in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          • Preprocessor sequence for C and C++ applications that use SQL
          • Trigraphs in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          • WHENEVER statement in C and C++ applications that use SQL
        • Using host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          • Declaring host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            • Numeric host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            • Character host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            • Graphic host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            • Binary host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            • LOB host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            • XML host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            • ROWID host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            • Result set locator host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
        • Using host structures in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          • Host structure declarations in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          • Host structure indicator array in C and C++ applications that use SQL
        • Using arrays of host structures in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          • Host structure array in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          • Host structure array indicator structure in C and C++ applications that use SQL
        • Using pointer data types in C and C++ applications that use SQL
        • Using typedef in C and C++ applications that use SQL
        • Using ILE C compiler external file descriptions in C and C++ applications that use SQL
        • Determining equivalent SQL and C or C++ data types
          • Notes on C and C++ variable declaration and usage
        • Using indicator variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
      • Coding SQL statements in COBOL applications
        • Defining the SQL communication area in COBOL applications that use SQL
        • Defining SQL descriptor areas in COBOL applications that use SQL
        • Embedding SQL statements in COBOL applications that use SQL
          • Comments in COBOL applications that use SQL
          • Continuation for SQL statements in COBOL applications that use SQL
          • Including code in COBOL applications that use SQL
          • Margins in COBOL applications that use SQL
          • Sequence numbers in COBOL applications that use SQL
          • Names in COBOL applications that use SQL
          • COBOL compile-time options in COBOL applications that use SQL
          • Statement labels in COBOL applications that use SQL
          • WHENEVER statement in COBOL applications that use SQL
          • Multiple source COBOL programs and the SQL COBOL precompiler
        • Using host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
          • Declaring host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
            • Numeric host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
            • Floating-point host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
            • Character host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
            • Graphic host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
            • Binary host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
            • LOB host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
            • XML host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
            • Datetime host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
            • ROWID host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
            • Result set locator host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
        • Using host structures in COBOL applications that use SQL
          • Host structure in COBOL applications that use SQL
          • Host structure indicator array in COBOL applications that use SQL
          • Using host structure arrays in COBOL applications that use SQL
          • Host structure array in COBOL applications that use SQL
          • Host array indicator structure in COBOL applications that use SQL
        • Using external file descriptions in COBOL applications that use SQL
          • Using external file descriptions for host structure arrays in COBOL applications that use SQL
        • Determining equivalent SQL and COBOL data types
          • Notes on COBOL variable declaration and usage
        • Using indicator variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
      • Coding SQL statements in PL/I applications
        • Defining the SQL communication area in PL/I applications that use SQL
        • Defining SQL descriptor areas in PL/I applications that use SQL
        • Embedding SQL statements in PL/I applications that use SQL
          • Example: Embedding SQL statements in PL/I applications that use SQL
          • Comments in PL/I applications that use SQL
          • Continuation for SQL statements in PL/I applications that use SQL
          • Including code in PL/I applications that use SQL
          • Margins in PL/I applications that use SQL
          • Names in PL/I applications that use SQL
          • Statement labels in PL/I applications that use SQL
          • WHENEVER statement in PL/I applications that use SQL
        • Using host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
          • Declaring host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
            • Numeric-host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
            • Character-host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
            • Binary host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
            • LOB host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
            • ROWID host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
        • Using host structures in PL/I applications that use SQL
          • Host structures in PL/I applications that use SQL
          • Host structure indicator arrays in PL/I applications that use SQL
        • Using host structure arrays in PL/I applications that use SQL
          • Host structure array in PL/I applications that use SQL
            • Host structure array indicator in PL/I applications that use SQL
        • Using external file descriptions in PL/I applications that use SQL
        • Determining equivalent SQL and PL/I data types
        • Using indicator variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
        • Differences in PL/I because of structure parameter passing techniques
      • Coding SQL statements in RPG/400 applications
        • Defining the SQL communication area in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
        • Defining SQL descriptor areas in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
        • Embedding SQL statements in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          • Example: Embedding SQL statements in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          • Comments in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          • Continuation for SQL statements in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          • Including code in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          • Sequence numbers in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          • Names in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          • Statement labels in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          • WHENEVER statement in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
        • Using host variables in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          • Declaring host variables in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
        • Using host structures in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
        • Using host structure arrays in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
        • Using external file descriptions in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          • External file description considerations for host structure arrays in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
        • Determining equivalent SQL and RPG/400 data types
          • Assignment rules in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
        • Using indicator variables in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          • Example: Using indicator variables in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
        • Differences in RPG/400 because of structure parameter passing techniques
        • Correctly ending a called RPG/400 program that uses SQL
      • Coding SQL statements in ILE RPG applications
        • Defining the SQL communication area in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
        • Defining SQL descriptor areas in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
        • Embedding SQL statements in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          • Comments in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          • Continuation for SQL statements in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          • Including code in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          • Using directives in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          • Sequence numbers in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          • Names in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          • Statement labels in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          • WHENEVER statement in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
        • Using host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          • Declaring host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            • Declaring binary host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            • Declaring LOB host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
              • LOB host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
              • LOB locators in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
              • LOB file reference variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            • Declaring XML host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            • Declaring ROWID variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            • Declaring result set locator variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
        • Using host structures in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
        • Using host structure arrays in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
        • Using external file descriptions in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          • External file description considerations for host structure arrays in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
        • Determining equivalent SQL and ILE RPG data types
          • Notes on ILE RPG variable declaration and usage
        • Using indicator variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          • Example: Using indicator variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
        • Example: SQLDA for a multiple row-area fetch in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
        • Example: Dynamic SQL in an ILE RPG application that uses SQL
      • Coding SQL statements in REXX applications
        • Using the SQL communication area in REXX applications
        • Using SQL descriptor areas in REXX applications
        • Embedding SQL statements in REXX applications
          • Comments in REXX applications that use SQL
          • Continuation of SQL statements in REXX applications that use SQL
          • Including code in REXX applications that use SQL
          • Margins in REXX applications that use SQL
          • Names in REXX applications that use SQL
          • Nulls in REXX applications that use SQL
          • Statement labels in REXX applications that use SQL
          • Handling errors and warnings in REXX applications that use SQL
        • Using host variables in REXX applications that use SQL
          • Determining data types of input host variables in REXX applications that use SQL
          • The format of output host variables in REXX applications that use SQL
          • Avoiding REXX conversion in REXX applications that use SQL
        • Using indicator variables in REXX applications that use SQL
      • Preparing and running a program with SQL statements
        • Basic processes of the SQL precompiler
          • Input to the SQL precompiler
          • Source file CCSIDs in the SQL precompiler
          • Output from the SQL precompiler
            • Listing
            • Temporary source file members created by the SQL precompiler
            • Sample SQL precompiler output
        • Non-ILE SQL precompiler commands
          • Compiling a non-ILE application program that uses SQL
        • ILE SQL precompiler commands
          • Compiling an ILE application program that uses SQL
        • Setting compiler options using the precompiler commands
        • Interpreting compile errors in applications that use SQL
        • Binding an application that uses SQL
          • Program references in applications that use SQL
        • Displaying SQL precompiler options
        • Running a program with embedded SQL
          • Running a program with embedded SQL: DDM considerations
          • Running a program with embedded SQL: Override considerations
          • Running a program with embedded SQL: SQL return codes
      • Example programs: Using Db2 for i statements
        • Example: SQL statements in ILE C and C++ programs
        • Example: SQL statements in COBOL and ILE COBOL programs
        • Example: SQL statements in PL/I programs
        • Example: SQL statements in RPG/400 programs
        • Example: SQL statements in ILE RPG programs
        • Example: SQL statements in REXX programs
        • Report produced by example programs that use SQL
      • CL command descriptions for host language precompilers
        • Create SQL COBOL Program command
        • Create SQL ILE COBOL Object command
        • Create SQL ILE C Object command
        • Create SQL ILE C++ Object command
        • Create SQL PL/I Program command
        • Create SQL RPG Program command
        • Create SQL ILE RPG Object command
      • Related information
    • SQL programming
      • What's new for IBM i 7.4
      • PDF file for SQL programming
      • Introduction to Db2 for i Structured Query Language
        • SQL concepts
          • SQL relational database and system terminology
          • SQL and system naming conventions
          • Types of SQL statements
          • SQL communication area
          • SQL diagnostics area
        • SQL objects
          • Schemas
          • Journals and journal receivers
          • Catalogs
          • Tables, rows, and columns
          • Aliases
          • Views
          • Indexes
          • Constraints
          • Triggers
          • Stored procedures
          • Sequences
          • Global variables
          • User-defined functions
          • User-defined types
          • XSR objects
          • SQL packages
        • Application program objects
          • User source file
          • Output source file member
          • Program
          • SQL package
          • Module
          • Service program
      • Data definition language
        • Creating a schema
        • Creating a table
          • Adding and removing constraints
          • Referential integrity and tables
            • Adding and removing referential constraints
            • Example: Adding referential constraints
          • Example: Removing constraints
          • Check pending
        • Creating a table using LIKE
        • Creating a table using AS
        • Creating and altering a materialized query table
        • Creating a system-period temporal table
        • Declaring a global temporary table
        • Creating a table with remote server data
        • Creating a row change timestamp column
        • Creating auditing columns
        • Creating and altering an identity column
        • Using ROWID
        • Creating and using sequences
          • Comparison of identity columns and sequences
        • Defining field procedures
          • Field definition for field procedures
          • Specifying the field procedure
          • When field procedures are invoked
          • Parameter list for execution of field procedures
            • The field procedure parameter value list (FPPVL)
            • Parameter value descriptors for field procedures
            • Field-definition (function code 8)
            • Field-encoding (function code 0)
            • Field-decoding (function code 4)
            • Example field procedure program
          • General guidelines for writing field procedures
            • Index considerations
            • Thread considerations
            • Debug considerations
          • Guidelines for writing field procedures that mask data
            • Example field procedure program that masks data
        • Creating descriptive labels using the LABEL ON statement
        • Describing an SQL object using COMMENT ON
        • Changing a table definition
          • Adding a column
          • Changing a column
          • Allowable conversions of data types
          • Deleting a column
          • Order of operations for the ALTER TABLE statement
          • Using CREATE OR REPLACE TABLE
        • Creating and using ALIAS names
        • Creating and using views
          • WITH CHECK OPTION on a view
            • WITH CASCADED CHECK OPTION
            • WITH LOCAL CHECK OPTION
            • Example: Cascaded check option
        • Creating indexes
        • Creating and using global variables
        • Replacing existing objects
        • Catalogs in database design
          • Getting catalog information about a table
          • Getting catalog information about a column
        • Dropping a database object
      • Data manipulation language
        • Retrieving data using the SELECT statement
          • Basic SELECT statement
          • Specifying a search condition using the WHERE clause
            • Expressions in the WHERE clause
            • Comparison operators
            • NOT keyword
          • GROUP BY clause
          • HAVING clause
          • ORDER BY clause
          • Static SELECT statements
          • Handling null values
          • Special registers in SQL statements
          • Casting data types
          • Date, time, and timestamp data types
            • Specifying current date and time values
            • Date/time arithmetic
          • Row change expressions
          • Handling duplicate rows
          • Defining complex search conditions
            • Special considerations for LIKE
            • Multiple search conditions within a WHERE clause
          • Using OLAP specifications
          • Joining data from more than one table
            • Inner join
              • Inner join using the JOIN syntax
              • Inner join using the WHERE clause
              • Joining data with the USING clause
            • Left outer join
            • Right outer join
            • Exception join
            • Cross join
            • Full outer join
            • Multiple join types in one statement
          • Using table expressions
          • Using recursive queries
          • Using the UNION keyword to combine subselects
            • Specifying the UNION ALL keyword
          • Using the EXCEPT keyword
          • Using the INTERSECT keyword
          • Data retrieval errors
          • Selecting data from a remote database
        • Inserting rows using the INSERT statement
          • Inserting rows using the VALUES clause
          • Inserting rows using a select-statement
          • Inserting multiple rows using the blocked INSERT statement
          • Inserting data into tables with referential constraints
          • Inserting values into an identity column
          • Selecting inserted values
          • Inserting data from a remote database
        • Changing data in a table using the UPDATE statement
          • Updating a table using a scalar-subselect
          • Updating a table with rows from another table
          • Updating tables with referential constraints
            • Examples: UPDATE rules
          • Updating an identity column
          • Updating data as it is retrieved from a table
        • Removing rows from a table using the DELETE statement
          • Removing rows from tables with referential constraints
            • Example: DELETE rules
        • Removing rows from a table using the TRUNCATE statement
        • Merging data
        • Overriding system generation of column values
        • Using subqueries
          • Subqueries in SELECT statements
            • Subqueries and search conditions
            • Usage notes on subqueries
            • Including subqueries in the WHERE or HAVING clause
          • Correlated subqueries
            • Correlated names and references
            • Example: Correlated subquery in a WHERE clause
            • Example: Correlated subquery in a HAVING clause
            • Example: Correlated subquery in a select-list
            • Example: Correlated subquery in an UPDATE statement
            • Example: Correlated subquery in a DELETE statement
      • Sort sequences and normalization in SQL
        • Sort sequence used with ORDER BY and row selection
          • Sort sequence and ORDER BY
          • Sort sequence and row selection
        • Sort sequence and views
        • Sort sequence and the CREATE INDEX statement
        • Sort sequence and constraints
        • ICU sort sequence
        • Normalization
      • Data protection
        • Security for SQL objects
          • Authorization ID
          • Views
          • Column masks and row permissions
          • Auditing
        • Data integrity
          • Concurrency
          • Journaling
          • Commitment control
          • Savepoints
          • Atomic operations
          • Constraints
            • Adding and using check constraints
          • Save and restore functions
          • Damage tolerance
          • Index recovery
          • Catalog integrity
          • User auxiliary storage pool
          • Independent auxiliary storage pool
      • Routines
        • Stored procedures
          • Defining an external procedure
          • Defining an SQL procedure
          • Defining a procedure with default parameters
          • Calling a stored procedure
            • Using the CALL statement where procedure definition exists
            • Using the embedded CALL statement where no procedure definition exists
            • Using the embedded CALL statement with an SQLDA
            • Using the dynamic CALL statement where no CREATE PROCEDURE exists
            • Examples: CALL statements
              • Example 1: ILE C and PL/I procedures called from an ILE C program
              • Example 2: A REXX procedure called from an ILE C program
          • Returning result sets from stored procedures
            • Example 1: Calling a stored procedure that returns a single result set
            • Example 2: Calling a stored procedure that returns a result set from a nested procedure
          • Writing a program or SQL procedure to receive the result sets from a stored procedure
          • Parameter passing conventions for stored procedures and user-defined functions
          • Indicator variables and stored procedures
          • Returning a completion status to the calling program
          • Passing parameters from Db2 to external procedures
            • Parameter style SQL
            • Parameter style GENERAL
            • Parameter style GENERAL WITH NULLS
            • Parameter style DB2GENERAL
            • Parameter style Java
        • Dynamic compound statement
        • Using user-defined functions
          • UDF concepts
          • Writing UDFs as SQL functions
            • Example: SQL scalar UDFs
            • Example: SQL table UDFs
          • Writing UDFs as external functions
            • Registering UDFs
              • Example: Exponentiation
              • Example: String search
              • Example: BLOB string search
              • Example: String search over a user-defined type (UDT)
              • Example: AVG over a user-defined type (UDT)
              • Example: Counting
              • Example: Table function returning document IDs
            • Passing arguments from Db2 to external functions
              • Parameter style SQL
              • Parameter style GENERAL
              • Parameter style GENERAL WITH NULLS
              • Parameter style DB2GENERAL
              • Parameter style Java
            • Table function considerations
            • Error processing for UDFs
            • Threads considerations
            • Parallel processing
            • Fenced or unfenced considerations
            • Save and restore considerations
          • Defining UDFs with default parameters
          • Examples: UDF code
            • Example: Square of a number UDF
            • Example: Counter
            • Example: Weather table function
          • Using UDFs in SQL statements
            • Using parameter markers or the NULL values as function arguments
            • Using qualified function references
            • Using unqualified function references
            • Invoking UDFs with named arguments
            • Summary of function references
        • Triggers
          • SQL triggers
            • BEFORE SQL triggers
            • AFTER SQL triggers
            • Multiple event SQL triggers
            • INSTEAD OF SQL triggers
            • Handlers in SQL triggers
            • SQL trigger transition tables
          • External triggers
        • Varying length parameter lists for external procedures and functions
        • Using the INCLUDE statement
        • Array support in SQL procedures and functions
        • Debugging an SQL routine
        • Obfuscating an SQL routine or SQL trigger
        • Managing SQL and external routine objects
        • Improving performance of procedures and functions
          • Improving implementation of procedures and functions
          • Redesigning routines for performance
      • Processing special data types
        • Large objects
          • Large object data types
          • Large object locators
          • Example: Using a locator to work with a CLOB value
            • Example: LOBLOC in C
            • Example: LOBLOC in COBOL
          • Indicator variables and LOB locators
          • LOB file reference variables
          • Example: Extracting CLOB data to a file
            • Example: LOBFILE in C
            • Example: LOBFILE in COBOL
          • Example: Inserting data into a CLOB column
          • Displaying the layout of LOB columns
          • Journal entry layout of LOB columns
        • User-defined distinct types
          • Defining a UDT
            • Example: Money
            • Example: Resumé
          • Defining tables with UDTs
            • Example: Sales
            • Example: Application forms
          • Manipulating UDTs
          • Examples: Using UDTs
            • Example: Comparisons between UDTs and constants
            • Example: Casting between UDTs
            • Example: Comparisons involving UDTs
            • Example: Sourced UDFs involving UDTs
            • Example: Assignments involving UDTs
            • Example: Assignments in dynamic SQL
            • Example: Assignments involving different UDTs
            • Example: Using UDTs in UNION
        • Examples: Using UDTs, UDFs, and LOBs
          • Example: Defining the UDT and UDFs
          • Example: Using the LOB function to populate the database
          • Example: Using UDFs to query instances of UDTs
          • Example: Using LOB locators to manipulate UDT instances
        • Using DataLinks
          • Linking control levels in DataLinks
            • NO LINK CONTROL
            • FILE LINK CONTROL with FS permissions
            • FILE LINK CONTROL with DB permissions
          • Working with DataLinks
      • HTTP functions overview
      • Working with JSON data
        • JSON concepts
        • Using JSON_TABLE
        • Generating JSON data
      • Using SQL in different environments
        • Using a cursor
          • Types of cursors
          • Examples: Using a cursor
            • Step 1: Defining the cursor
            • Step 2: Opening the cursor
            • Step 3: Specifying what to do when the end of data is reached
            • Step 4: Retrieving a row using a cursor
            • Step 5a: Updating the current row
            • Step 5b: Deleting the current row
            • Step 6: Closing the cursor
          • Example: Using the OFFSET clause with a cursor
          • Using the multiple-row FETCH statement
            • Multiple-row FETCH using a host structure array
            • Multiple-row FETCH using a row storage area
          • Unit of work and open cursors
        • Dynamic SQL applications
          • Running dynamic SQL statements
          • CCSID of dynamic SQL statements
          • Processing non-SELECT statements
            • Using the PREPARE and EXECUTE statements
          • Processing SELECT statements and using a descriptor
            • Fixed-list SELECT statements
            • Varying-list SELECT statements
            • SQL descriptor areas
            • SQLDA format
            • Example: A SELECT statement for allocating storage for SQLDA
            • Example: A SELECT statement using an allocated SQL descriptor
            • Parameter markers
        • Using interactive SQL
          • Starting interactive SQL
          • Using the statement entry function
          • Prompting
            • Syntax checking
            • Statement processing mode
            • Subqueries
            • CREATE TABLE prompting
            • Entering DBCS data
          • Using the list selection function
            • Example: Using the list selection function
          • Session services description
          • Exiting interactive SQL
          • Using an existing SQL session
          • Recovering an SQL session
          • Accessing remote databases with interactive SQL
        • Using the SQL statement processor
          • Execution of statements after errors occur
          • Commitment control in the SQL statement processor
          • Source listing for the SQL statement processor
        • Using the RUNSQL CL command
      • Distributed relational database function and SQL
        • Db2 for i distributed relational database support
        • Db2 for i distributed relational database example program
        • SQL package support
          • Valid SQL statements in an SQL package
          • Considerations for creating an SQL package
            • CRTSQLPKG authorization
            • Creating a package on a database other than Db2 for i
            • Target release (TGTRLS) parameter
            • SQL statement size
            • Statements that do not require a package
            • Package object type
            • ILE programs and service programs
            • Package creation connection
            • Unit of work
            • Creating packages locally
            • Labels
            • Consistency token
            • SQL and recursion
        • CCSID considerations for SQL
        • Connection management and activation groups
          • Source code for PGM1
          • Source code for PGM2
          • Source code for PGM3
          • Multiple connections to the same relational database
          • Implicit connection management for the default activation group
          • Implicit connection management for nondefault activation groups
        • Distributed support
          • Determining the connection type
          • Connect and commitment control restrictions
          • Determining the connection status
          • Distributed unit of work connection considerations
          • Ending connections
        • Distributed unit of work
          • Managing distributed unit of work connections
          • Checking the connection status
          • Cursors and prepared statements
        • DRDA stored procedure considerations
      • WebSphere MQ with Db2
        • WebSphere MQ messages
          • WebSphere MQ message handling
            • Db2 MQ services
            • Db2 MQ policies
        • Db2 MQ functions
          • Db2 MQ dependencies
        • Db2 MQ tables
        • Db2 MQ CCSID conversion
        • Websphere MQ transactions
        • Basic messaging with WebSphere MQ
        • Sending messages with WebSphere MQ
        • Retrieving messages with WebSphere MQ
        • Application to application connectivity with WebSphere MQ
      • Db2 for i sample tables
        • Sample tables
          • Department table (DEPARTMENT)
            • DEPARTMENT
          • Employee table (EMPLOYEE)
            • EMPLOYEE
          • Employee photo table (EMP_PHOTO)
            • EMP_PHOTO
          • Employee resumé table (EMP_RESUME)
            • EMP_RESUME
          • Employee to project activity table (EMPPROJACT)
            • EMPPROJACT
          • Project table (PROJECT)
            • PROJECT
          • Project activity table (PROJACT)
            • PROJACT
          • Activity table (ACT)
            • ACT
          • Class schedule table (CL_SCHED)
            • CL_SCHED
          • In-tray table (IN_TRAY)
            • IN_TRAY
          • Organization table (ORG)
            • ORG
          • Staff table (STAFF)
            • STAFF
          • Sales table (SALES)
            • SALES
        • Sample XML tables
          • Product table (PRODUCT)
            • PRODUCT
          • Purchase order table (PURCHASEORDER)
            • PURCHASEORDER
          • Customer table (CUSTOMER)
            • CUSTOMER
          • Catalog table (CATALOG)
            • CATALOG
          • Suppliers table (SUPPLIERS)
            • SUPPLIERS
          • Inventory table (INVENTORY)
            • INVENTORY
          • Product Supplier table (PRODUCTSUPPLIER)
            • PRODUCTSUPPLIER
        • Db2 for i CL command descriptions
    • SQL XML programming
      • What's new for IBM i 7.2
      • How to read the syntax diagrams
      • PDF file for SQL XML programming
      • SQL statements and SQL/XML functions
        • XML input and output overview
        • Comparison of XML and relational models
        • Tutorial for XML
          • Exercise 1: Creating a table that can store XML data
          • Exercise 2: Inserting XML documents into XML typed columns
          • Exercise 3: Updating XML documents stored in an XML column
          • Exercise 4: Validating XML documents against XML schemas
          • Exercise 5: Transforming with XSLT stylesheets
        • Inserting XML data
          • Addition of XML columns to existing tables
          • Insertion into XML columns
          • XML parsing
        • SQL/XML publishing functions
          • Example: Construct an XML document with values from a single table
          • Example: Construct an XML document with values from multiple tables
          • Example: Construct an XML document with values from table rows that contain null elements
          • Transforming with XSLT stylesheets
          • Example: Using XSLT as a formatting engine
          • Example: Using XSLT for data exchange
          • Example: Using XSLT to remove namespaces
          • Important considerations for transforming XML documents
          • Special character handling
          • XML serialization
          • Differences in an XML document after storage and retrieval
          • Data types for archiving XML documents
        • Using XMLTABLE to reference XML content as a relational table
          • Using XMLTABLE to handle missing elements
          • Using XMLTABLE to subset result data
          • Using XMLTABLE to handle multiple values
          • Using XMLTABLE with namespaces
          • Numbering result rows for XMLTABLE
        • Updating XML data
          • Deletion of XML data from tables
        • XML schema repository
        • Application programming language support
          • XML column inserts and updates in CLI applications
          • XML data retrieval in CLI applications
          • Declaring XML host variables in embedded SQL applications
            • Example: Referencing XML host variables in embedded SQL applications
            • Recommendations for developing embedded SQL applications with XML
            • Identifying XML values in an SQLDA
          • Java
            • XML data in JDBC applications
              • XML column updates in JDBC applications
              • XML data retrieval in JDBC applications
              • Invocation of routines with XML parameters in Java applications
            • XML data in SQLJ applications
              • XML column updates in SQLJ applications
              • XML data retrieval in SQLJ applications
          • Routines
            • XML support in SQL procedures
              • Effect of commits and rollbacks on XML parameter and variable values in SQL procedures
            • XML data type support in external routines
              • Example: XML support in Java (JDBC) procedure
              • Example: XML support in C procedure
        • XML data encoding
          • Encoding considerations when storing or passing XML data
            • Input of XML data
            • Retrieval of XML data
            • Routine parameters
            • JDBC and SQLJ applications
          • Effects of XML encoding and serialization on data conversion
            • Input internally encoded
            • Input externally encoded
            • Retrieval with implicit serialization
            • Retrieval with explicit serialization
          • Encoding names to CCSIDs
          • CCSIDs to encoding names
      • Annotated XML schema decomposition
        • Decomposing XML documents
        • Registering and enabling XML schemas
        • Sources for annotated XML schema decomposition
        • Decomposition annotations
          • Scope
          • Annotations as attributes
          • Annotations as structured child elements
          • Global annotations
          • Summary
          • db2-xdb:defaultSQLSchema
          • db2-xdb:rowSet
          • db2-xdb:table
          • db2-xdb:column
          • db2-xdb:locationPath
          • db2-xdb:expression
          • db2-xdb:condition
          • db2-xdb:contentHandling
          • db2-xdb:normalization
          • db2-xdb:order
          • db2-xdb:truncate
          • db2-xdb:rowSetMapping
          • db2-xdb:rowSetOperationOrder
          • Keywords
        • CDATA sections
        • NULL values and empty strings
        • Checklist
        • Examples of mappings
          • Derived complex types
          • Example: Mapping to an XML column
          • Example: Single value to a table and row
          • Example: Single value to a table and multiple rows
          • Example: Single value to multiple tables
          • Example: Multiple values to a single table
          • Example: Multiple values from different contexts
          • XML schema to SQL types compatibility
          • Limits and restrictions
          • Schema for XML decomposition annotations
      • XML data model
        • Sequences and items
        • Atomic values
        • Nodes
          • Document nodes
          • Element nodes
          • Attribute nodes
          • Text nodes
          • Processing instruction nodes
          • Comment nodes
        • Data model generation
        • XML values in SQL
      • Overview of XPath
        • Case sensitivity in DB2 XPath
        • Whitespace in DB2 XPath
        • Comments in DB2 XPath
        • Character set
        • Default collation
        • XML namespaces and qualified names in DB2 XPath
        • XPath type system
          • Overview of the type system
          • Constructor functions for built-in data types
          • Generic data types
            • xs:anyType
            • xs:anySimpleType
            • xs:anyAtomicType
          • Data types for untyped data
            • xs:untyped
            • xs:untypedAtomic
          • xs:string
          • Numeric data types
            • xs:decimal
            • xs:double
            • xs:integer
            • Range limits for numeric types
          • xs:boolean
          • Date and time data types
            • xs:date
            • xs:time
            • xs:dateTime
            • xs:duration
            • xs:dayTimeDuration
            • xs:yearMonthDuration
          • Casts between XML schema data types
        • XPath prologs and expressions
          • Prologs
            • Namespace declarations
            • Default namespace declarations
          • Expression evaluation and processing
            • Atomization
            • Type promotion
            • Subtype substitution
          • Primary expressions
            • Literals
              • Predefined entity references
              • Character references
            • Variable references in DB2 XPath
            • Parenthesized expression
            • Context item expressions
            • Function calls
          • Path expressions
            • Axis steps
              • Axes
              • Node tests
              • Predicates
            • Abbreviated syntax for path expressions
          • Filter expressions
          • Arithmetic expressions
          • Comparison expressions
            • General comparisons
          • Logical expressions
          • Regular expressions
        • Descriptions of XPath functions
          • fn:abs function
          • fn:adjust-date-to-timezone function
          • fn:adjust-dateTime-to-timezone function
          • fn:adjust-time-to-timezone function
          • fn:boolean function
          • fn:compare function
          • fn:concat function
          • fn:contains function
          • fn:count function
          • fn:current-date function
          • fn:current-dateTime function
          • db2-fn:current-local-date function
          • db2-fn:current-local-dateTime function
          • db2-fn:current-local-time function
          • fn:current-time function
          • fn:data function
          • fn:dateTime function
          • fn:day-from-date function
          • fn:day-from-dateTime function
          • fn:days-from-duration function
          • fn:distinct-values function
          • fn:exists function
          • fn:hours-from-dateTime function
          • fn:hours-from-duration function
          • fn:hours-from-time function
          • fn:implicit-timezone function
          • fn:last function
          • fn:local-name function
          • db2-fn:local-timezone function
          • fn:lower-case function
          • fn:matches function
          • fn:max function
          • fn:min function
          • fn:minutes-from-dateTime function
          • fn:minutes-from-duration function
          • fn:minutes-from-time function
          • fn:month-from-date function
          • fn:month-from-dateTime function
          • fn:months-from-duration function
          • fn:name function
          • fn:normalize-space function
          • fn:not function
          • fn:position function
          • fn:replace function
          • fn:round function
          • fn:seconds-from-dateTime function
          • fn:seconds-from-duration function
          • fn:seconds-from-time function
          • fn:starts-with function
          • fn:string function
          • fn:string-length function
          • fn:substring function
          • fn:sum function
          • fn:timezone-from-date function
          • fn:timezone-from-dateTime function
          • fn:timezone-from-time function
          • fn:tokenize function
          • fn:translate function
          • fn:upper-case function
          • fn:year-from-date function
          • fn:year-from-dateTime function
          • fn:years-from-duration function
  • 참조서
    • 데이터베이스 정보 파인더
    • Db2 Multisystem
      • PDF file for DB2 Multisystem
      • DB2 Multisystem overview
        • Benefits of using DB2 Multisystem
        • DB2 Multisystem: Basic terms and concepts
      • Node groups with DB2 Multisystem: Overview
        • How node groups work with DB2 Multisystem
        • Tasks to complete before using the node group commands with DB2 Multisystem
        • Create Node Group command
        • Display Node Group command
        • Change Node Group Attributes command
        • Delete Node Group command
      • Distributed files with DB2 Multisystem
        • Create Physical File command and SQL CREATE TABLE statement
          • Restrictions when creating or working with distributed files with DB2 Multisystem
        • System activities after the distributed file is created
          • How CL commands work with distributed files
            • CL commands: Allowable to run against a distributed file with DB2 Multisystem
            • CL commands: Affecting only local pieces of a distributed file with DB2 Multisystem
            • CL commands: Affecting all the pieces of a distributed file with DB2 Multisystem
              • Journaling considerations with DB2 Multisystem
              • Copy File command with distributed files with DB2 Multisystem
        • Partitioning with DB2 Multisystem
          • Planning for partitioning with DB2 Multisystem
          • Choosing partitioning keys with DB2 Multisystem
        • Customizing data distribution with DB2 Multisystem
      • Partitioned tables
        • Creation of partitioned tables
        • Modification of existing tables
          • From a nonpartitioned table to a partitioned table
          • Modification of existing partitioned tables
            • Restrictions when altering a column's data type
          • From a partitioned table to a nonpartitioned table
        • Indexes with partitioned tables
        • Query performance and optimization
          • Queries using SQL Query Engine
            • Check constraint optimization
            • SQL Query Engine: Index usage
          • Queries using Classic Query Engine
            • Materialization
            • CQE query optimization considerations
            • Classic Query Engine: Index usage
        • Save and restore considerations
        • Journaling a partitioned table
        • Traditional system interface considerations
        • Restrictions for a partitioned table
      • Scalar functions available with DB2 Multisystem
        • PARTITION with DB2 Multisystem
          • Examples of PARTITION with DB2 Multisystem
        • HASH with DB2 Multisystem
          • Example of HASH with DB2 Multisystem
        • NODENAME with DB2 Multisystem
          • Examples of NODENAME with DB2 Multisystem
        • NODENUMBER with DB2 Multisystem
          • Example of NODENUMBER with DB2 Multisystem
        • Special registers with DB2 Multisystem
          • Relative record numbering function with DB2 Multisystem
      • Performance and scalability with DB2 Multisystem
        • Why you should use DB2 Multisystem
          • Performance enhancement tip with DB2 Multisystem
        • How DB2 Multisystem helps you expand your database system
          • Redistribution issues for adding systems to a network
      • Query design for performance with DB2 Multisystem
        • Optimization with DB2 Multisystem: Overview
        • Implementation and optimization of a single file query with DB2 Multisystem
        • Implementation and optimization of record ordering with DB2 Multisystem
        • Implementation and optimization of the UNION and DISTINCT clauses with DB2 Multisystem
        • Processing of the DSTDTA and ALWCPYDTA parameters with DB2 Multisystem
        • Implementation and optimization of join operations with DB2 Multisystem
          • Collocated join with DB2 Multisystem
          • Directed join with DB2 Multisystem
          • Repartitioned join with DB2 Multisystem
          • Broadcast join with DB2 Multisystem
          • Join optimization with DB2 Multisystem
            • Partitioning keys over join fields with DB2 Multisystem
        • Implementation and optimization of grouping with DB2 Multisystem
          • One-step grouping with DB2 Multisystem
          • Two-step grouping with DB2 Multisystem
          • Grouping and joins with DB2 Multisystem
        • Subquery support with DB2 Multisystem
        • Access plans with DB2 Multisystem
        • Reusable open data paths with DB2 Multisystem
        • Temporary result writer with DB2 Multisystem
          • Temporary result writer job: Advantages with DB2 Multisystem
          • Temporary result writer job: Disadvantages with DB2 Multisystem
          • Control of the temporary result writer with DB2 Multisystem
        • Optimizer messages with DB2 Multisystem
        • Changes to the Change Query Attributes command with DB2 Multisystem
          • Asynchronous job usage parameter with DB2 Multisystem
          • Apply remote parameter with DB2 Multisystem
        • Summary of performance considerations
      • Related information
    • DB2 Web Query
      • Highlights
    • SQL call level interface
      • What's new for IBM i 7.4
      • PDF file for SQL call level interface
      • Getting started with Db2 for i CLI
        • Differences between Db2 for i CLI and embedded SQL
        • Advantages of using Db2 for i CLI instead of embedded SQL
        • Deciding between Db2 for i CLI, dynamic SQL, and static SQL
      • Writing a Db2 for i CLI application
        • Initialization and termination tasks in a Db2 for i CLI application
          • Example: Initialization and connection in a Db2 for i CLI application
        • Transaction processing task in a Db2 for i CLI application
          • Allocating statement handles in a Db2 for i CLI application
          • Preparing and processing tasks in a Db2 for i CLI application
          • Processing results in a Db2 for i CLI application
            • Processing SELECT statements in a Db2 for i CLI application
            • Processing UPDATE, DELETE, MERGE, and INSERT statements in a Db2 for i CLI application
            • Processing other SQL statements in a Db2 for i CLI application
          • Freeing statement handles in a Db2 for i CLI application
          • Committing or rolling back in a Db2 for i CLI application
            • When to call SQLTransact() in a Db2 for i CLI application
            • Effects of calling SQLTransact() in a Db2 for i CLI application
        • Diagnostics in a Db2 for i CLI application
          • Return codes from a Db2 for i CLI application
          • Db2 for i CLI SQLSTATE values
        • Data types and data conversion in Db2 for i CLI functions
          • Other C data types in Db2 for i CLI functions
          • Data conversion in Db2 for i CLI functions
        • Working with the XML data type
        • Working with Extended Timestamp Precision
        • Working with string arguments in Db2 for i CLI functions
          • Length of string arguments in Db2 for i CLI functions
          • String truncation in Db2 for i CLI functions
          • Interpretation of strings in Db2 for i CLI functions
      • Db2 for i CLI functions
        • Categories of Db2 for i CLI functions
        • SQLAllocConnect - Allocate connection handle
        • SQLAllocEnv - Allocate environment handle
        • SQLAllocHandle - Allocate handle
        • SQLAllocStmt - Allocate a statement handle
        • SQLBindCol - Bind a column to an application variable
        • SQLBindFileToCol - Bind LOB file reference to LOB column
        • SQLBindFileToParam - Bind LOB file reference to LOB parameter
        • SQLBindParam - Bind a buffer to a parameter marker
        • SQLBindParameter - Bind a parameter marker to a buffer
        • SQLCancel - Cancel statement
        • SQLCloseCursor - Close cursor statement
        • SQLColAttribute - Return a column attribute
        • SQLColAttributes - Obtain column attributes
        • SQLColumnPrivileges - Get privileges associated with the columns of a table
        • SQLColumns - Get column information for a table
        • SQLConnect - Connect to a data source
        • SQLCopyDesc - Copy description statement
        • SQLDataSources - Get list of data sources
        • SQLDescribeCol - Describe column attributes
        • SQLDescribeParam - Return description of a parameter marker
        • SQLDisconnect - Disconnect from a data source
        • SQLDriverConnect - Connect to a data source
        • SQLEndTran - Commit or roll back a transaction
        • SQLError - Retrieve error information
        • SQLExecDirect - Execute a statement directly
        • SQLExecute - Execute a statement
        • SQLExtendedFetch - Fetch array of rows
        • SQLFetch - Fetch next row
        • SQLFetchScroll - Fetch from a scrollable cursor
        • SQLForeignKeys - Get the list of foreign key columns
        • SQLFreeConnect - Free connection handle
        • SQLFreeEnv - Free environment handle
        • SQLFreeHandle - Free a handle
        • SQLFreeStmt - Free (or reset) a statement handle
        • SQLGetCol - Retrieve one column of a row of the result set
        • SQLGetConnectAttr - Get the value of a connection attribute
        • SQLGetConnectOption - Return current setting of a connect option
        • SQLGetCursorName - Get cursor name
        • SQLGetData - Get data from a column
        • SQLGetDescField - Get descriptor field
        • SQLGetDescRec - Get descriptor record
        • SQLGetDiagField - Return diagnostic information (extensible)
        • SQLGetDiagRec - Return diagnostic information (concise)
        • SQLGetEnvAttr - Return current setting of an environment attribute
        • SQLGetFunctions - Get functions
        • SQLGetInfo - Get general information
        • SQLGetLength - Retrieve length of a string value
        • SQLGetPosition - Return starting position of string
        • SQLGetStmtAttr - Get the value of a statement attribute
        • SQLGetStmtOption - Return current setting of a statement option
        • SQLGetSubString - Retrieve portion of a string value
        • SQLGetTypeInfo - Get data type information
        • SQLLanguages - Get SQL dialect or conformance information
        • SQLMoreResults - Determine whether there are more result sets
        • SQLNativeSql - Get native SQL text
        • SQLNextResult - Process the next result set
        • SQLNumParams - Get number of parameters in an SQL statement
        • SQLNumResultCols - Get number of result columns
        • SQLParamData - Get next parameter for which a data value is needed
        • SQLParamOptions - Specify an input array for a parameter
        • SQLPrepare - Prepare a statement
        • SQLPrimaryKeys - Get primary key columns of a table
        • SQLProcedureColumns - Get input/output parameter information for a procedure
        • SQLProcedures - Get list of procedure names
        • SQLPutData - Pass data value for a parameter
        • SQLReleaseEnv - Release all environment resources
        • SQLRowCount - Get row count
        • SQLSetConnectAttr - Set a connection attribute
        • SQLSetConnectOption - Set connection option
        • SQLSetCursorName - Set cursor name
        • SQLSetDescField - Set a descriptor field
        • SQLSetDescRec - Set a descriptor record
        • SQLSetEnvAttr - Set environment attribute
        • SQLSetParam - Set parameter
        • SQLSetStmtAttr - Set a statement attribute
        • SQLSetStmtOption - Set statement option
        • SQLSpecialColumns - Get special (row identifier) columns
        • SQLStatistics - Get index and statistics information for a base table
        • SQLTablePrivileges - Get privileges associated with a table
        • SQLTables - Get table information
        • SQLTransact - Commit or roll back a transaction
      • Db2 for i CLI include file
      • Running Db2 for i CLI in server mode
        • Starting Db2 for i CLI in SQL server mode
        • Restrictions for running Db2 for i CLI in server mode
      • Unicode in Db2 for i CLI
      • Examples: Db2 for i CLI applications
        • Example: Embedded SQL and the equivalent Db2 for i CLI function calls
        • Example: Using the CLI XA transaction connection attributes
        • Example: Interactive SQL and the equivalent Db2 for i CLI function calls
    • SQL 복제
    • SQL messages and codes
      • What's new for IBM i 7.4
      • PDF file for SQL messages and codes
      • SQLCODE and SQLSTATE concepts
      • Listing of SQLSTATE class codes
      • Listing of SQLSTATE values
      • SQL message concepts
      • Listing of SQL messages
      • SQL message finder
    • SQL reference
      • About SQL reference
        • Standards compliance
        • Assumptions relating to examples of SQL statements
        • How to read the syntax diagrams
        • Conventions used in this book
        • SQL accessibility
      • PDF file for SQL reference
      • What's new for IBM i 7.4
      • Concepts
        • Relational database
        • Structured Query Language
        • Schemas
        • Tables
          • Keys
          • Constraints
            • Unique constraints
            • Referential constraints
            • Check constraints
          • Indexes
          • Triggers
        • Views
        • User-defined types
        • Aliases
        • Packages and access plans
        • Routines
        • Sequences
        • Authorization, privileges and object ownership
        • Catalog
        • Application processes, concurrency, and recovery
          • Locking, commit, and rollback
          • Unit of work
          • Rolling back work
          • Threads
        • Isolation level
          • Repeatable read
          • Read stability
          • Cursor stability
          • Uncommitted read
          • No commit
          • Comparison of isolation levels
        • Storage Structures
        • Character conversion
          • Character sets and code pages
          • Coded character sets and CCSIDs
          • Default CCSID
        • Collating sequence
        • Distributed relational database
          • Application servers
          • CONNECT (type 1) and CONNECT (type 2)
          • Remote unit of work
          • Application-directed distributed unit of work
          • Data representation considerations
      • Language elements
        • Characters
        • Tokens
        • Identifiers
          • SQL identifiers
          • System identifiers
          • Host identifiers
        • Naming conventions
          • SQL path
          • Qualification of unqualified object names
            • Unqualified alias, constraint, external program, index, mask, nodegroup, package, permission, sequence, table, trigger, view, and XSR object names
            • Unqualified function, procedure, specific name, type, and variables
          • SQL names and system names: special considerations
        • Aliases
        • Authorization IDs and authorization names
        • Procedure resolution
        • Data types
          • Nulls
          • Numbers
            • Subnormal numbers and underflow
          • Character strings
          • Character encoding schemes
          • Graphic strings
          • Graphic encoding schemes
          • Binary strings
          • Large objects
            • Limitations on use of strings
          • Datetime values
            • Date
            • Time
            • Timestamp
            • Datetime variables
            • String representations of datetime values
              • Date strings
              • Time strings
              • Timestamp strings
          • XML Values
          • DataLink values
          • Row ID values
          • User-defined types
        • Promotion of data types
        • Casting between data types
        • Assignments and comparisons
          • Numeric assignments
          • String assignments
            • Binary string assignments
            • Character and graphic string assignments
          • Datetime assignments
          • XML assignments
          • DataLink assignments
          • Row ID assignments
          • Distinct type assignments
          • Array type assignments
          • Assignments to LOB locators
          • Numeric comparisons
          • String comparisons
          • Datetime comparisons
          • XML comparisons
          • DataLink comparisons
          • Row ID comparisons
          • Distinct type comparisons
          • Array type comparisons
        • Rules for result data types
        • Conversion rules for operations that combine strings
        • Constants
          • Integer constants
          • Decimal constants
          • Floating-point constants
          • Decimal floating-point constants
          • Character-string constants
          • Graphic-string constants
          • Binary-string constants
          • Datetime constants
          • Decimal point
          • Delimiters
        • Special registers
          • CURRENT CLIENT_ACCTNG
          • CURRENT CLIENT_APPLNAME
          • CURRENT CLIENT_PROGRAMID
          • CURRENT CLIENT_USERID
          • CURRENT CLIENT_WRKSTNNAME
          • CURRENT DATE
          • CURRENT DEBUG MODE
          • CURRENT DECFLOAT ROUNDING MODE
          • CURRENT DEGREE
          • CURRENT IMPLICIT XMLPARSE OPTION
          • CURRENT PATH
          • CURRENT SCHEMA
          • CURRENT SERVER
          • CURRENT TEMPORAL SYSTEM_TIME
          • CURRENT TIME
          • CURRENT TIMESTAMP
          • CURRENT USER
          • CURRENT TIMEZONE
          • SESSION_USER
          • SYSTEM_USER
          • USER
        • Column names
          • Qualified column names
          • Correlation names
          • Column name qualifiers to avoid ambiguity
            • Table designators
            • Avoiding undefined or ambiguous references
          • Column name qualifiers in correlated references
          • Unqualified column names in correlated references
        • Variables
          • Global variables
          • References to host variables
          • Variables in dynamic SQL
          • References to LOB or XML variables
            • References to LOB or XML locator variables
            • References to LOB or XML file reference variables
          • References to XML variables
          • Host structures
          • Host structure arrays
        • Functions
          • Types of functions
          • Function invocation
          • Function resolution
          • Determining the best fit
          • Best fit considerations
        • Expressions
          • Without operators
          • With arithmetic operators
            • Two integer operands
            • Integer and decimal operands
            • Two decimal operands
            • Decimal arithmetic in SQL
            • Floating-point operands
            • Decimal floating-point operands
            • General arithmetic operation rules for DECFLOAT
            • Distinct type operands
          • With the concatenation operator
          • Scalar fullselect
          • Datetime operands and durations
          • Datetime arithmetic in SQL
            • Date arithmetic
            • Time arithmetic
            • Timestamp arithmetic
          • Precedence of operations
          • ARRAY constructor
          • ARRAY element specification
          • CASE expression
          • CAST specification
          • OLAP specifications
          • ROW CHANGE expression
          • Sequence reference
          • TRY_CAST specification
          • XMLCAST specification
        • Predicates
          • Basic predicate
          • Quantified predicate
          • BETWEEN predicate
          • DISTINCT predicate
          • EXISTS predicate
          • IN predicate
          • IS JSON predicate
          • JSON_EXISTS predicate
            • sql-json-path-expression
          • LIKE predicate
          • NULL predicate
          • REGEXP_LIKE predicate
          • Trigger event predicates
        • Search conditions
      • Built-in global variables
        • CLIENT_HOST
        • CLIENT_IPADDR
        • CLIENT_PORT
        • JOB_NAME
        • PACKAGE_NAME
        • PACKAGE_SCHEMA
        • PACKAGE_VERSION
        • PROCESS_ID
        • REPLICATION_OVERRIDE
        • ROUTINE_SCHEMA
        • ROUTINE_SPECIFIC_NAME
        • ROUTINE_TYPE
        • SERVER_MODE_JOB_NAME
        • THREAD_ID
      • Built-in functions
        • Aggregate functions
          • ARRAY_AGG
          • AVG
          • CORR or CORRELATION
          • COUNT
          • COUNT_BIG
          • COVARIANCE or COVAR
          • COVAR_SAMP or COVARIANCE_SAMP
          • GROUPING
          • JSON_ARRAYAGG
          • JSON_OBJECTAGG
          • LISTAGG
          • MAX
          • MEDIAN
          • MIN
          • PERCENTILE_CONT
          • PERCENTILE_DISC
          • Regression functions
          • STDDEV_POP or STDDEV
          • STDDEV_SAMP
          • SUM
          • VAR_POP or VARIANCE or VAR
          • VAR_SAMP or VARIANCE_SAMP
          • XMLAGG
          • XMLGROUP
        • Scalar functions
          • ABS or ABSVAL
          • ACOS
          • ADD_MONTHS
          • ANTILOG
          • ARRAY_MAX_CARDINALITY
          • ARRAY_TRIM
          • ASCII
          • ASIN
          • ATAN
          • ATANH
          • ATAN2
          • BASE64_DECODE
          • BASE64_ENCODE
          • BIGINT
          • BINARY
          • BITAND, BITANDNOT, BITOR, BITXOR, and BITNOT
          • BIT_LENGTH
          • BLOB
          • BSON_TO_JSON
          • CARDINALITY
          • CEILING or CEIL
          • CHAR
          • CHARACTER_LENGTH or CHAR_LENGTH
          • CHR
          • CLOB
          • COALESCE
          • COMPARE_DECFLOAT
          • CONCAT
          • CONTAINS
          • COS
          • COSH
          • COT
          • CURDATE
          • CURTIME
          • DATABASE
          • DATAPARTITIONNAME
          • DATAPARTITIONNUM
          • DATE
          • DAY
          • DAYNAME
          • DAYOFMONTH
          • DAYOFWEEK
          • DAYOFWEEK_ISO
          • DAYOFYEAR
          • DAYS
          • DBCLOB
          • DBPARTITIONNAME
          • DBPARTITIONNUM
          • DECFLOAT
          • DECFLOAT_FORMAT
          • DECFLOAT_SORTKEY
          • DECIMAL or DEC
          • DECRYPT_BIT, DECRYPT_BINARY, DECRYPT_CHAR and DECRYPT_DB
          • DEGREES
          • DIFFERENCE
          • DIGITS
          • DLCOMMENT
          • DLLINKTYPE
          • DLURLCOMPLETE
          • DLURLPATH
          • DLURLPATHONLY
          • DLURLSCHEME
          • DLURLSERVER
          • DLVALUE
          • DOUBLE_PRECISION or DOUBLE
          • ENCRYPT_AES
          • ENCRYPT_RC2 or ENCRPYT
          • ENCRYPT_TDES
          • EXP
          • EXTRACT
          • FIRST_DAY
          • FLOAT
          • FLOOR
          • GENERATE_UNIQUE
          • GET_BLOB_FROM_FILE
          • GET_CLOB_FROM_FILE
          • GET_DBCLOB_FROM_FILE
          • GET_XML_FILE
          • GETHINT
          • GRAPHIC
          • GREATEST
          • HASH_MD5, HASH_SHA1, HASH_SHA256, and HASH_SHA512
          • HASH_ROW
          • HASH_VALUES
          • HASHED_VALUE
          • HEX
          • HEXTORAW
          • HOUR
          • HTTP_DELETE
          • HTTP_GET
          • HTTP_PATCH
          • HTTP_POST
          • HTTP_PUT
          • IDENTITY_VAL_LOCAL
          • IFNULL
          • INSERT
          • INSTR
          • INTEGER or INT
          • INTERPRET
          • JSON_ARRAY
          • JSON_OBJECT
          • JSON_QUERY
          • JSON_TO_BSON
          • JSON_UPDATE
          • JSON_VALUE
          • JULIAN_DAY
          • LAND
          • LAST_DAY
          • LCASE
          • LEAST
          • LEFT
          • LENGTH
          • LN
          • LNOT
          • LOCATE
          • LOCATE_IN_STRING
          • LOG10
          • LOR
          • LOWER
          • LPAD
          • LTRIM
          • MAX
          • MAX_CARDINALITY
          • MICROSECOND
          • MIDNIGHT_SECONDS
          • MIN
          • MINUTE
          • MOD
          • MONTH
          • MONTHNAME
          • MONTHS_BETWEEN
          • MQREAD
          • MQREADCLOB
          • MQRECEIVE
          • MQRECEIVECLOB
          • MQSEND
          • MULTIPLY_ALT
          • NEXT_DAY
          • NORMALIZE_DECFLOAT
          • NOW
          • NULLIF
          • NVL
          • OCTET_LENGTH
          • OVERLAY
          • PI
          • POSITION
          • POSSTR
          • POWER or POW
          • QUANTIZE
          • QUARTER
          • RADIANS
          • RAISE_ERROR
          • RANDOM or RAND
          • REAL
          • REGEXP_COUNT
          • REGEXP_INSTR
          • REGEXP_REPLACE
          • REGEXP_SUBSTR
          • REPEAT
          • REPLACE
          • RID
          • RIGHT
          • ROUND
          • ROUND_TIMESTAMP
          • ROWID
          • RPAD
          • RRN
          • RTRIM
          • SCORE
          • SECOND
          • SIGN
          • SIN
          • SINH
          • SMALLINT
          • SOUNDEX
          • SPACE
          • SQRT
          • STRIP
          • STRLEFT
          • STRPOS
          • STRRIGHT
          • SUBSTR
          • SUBSTRING
          • TABLE_NAME
          • TABLE_SCHEMA
          • TAN
          • TANH
          • TIME
          • TIMESTAMP
          • TIMESTAMP_FORMAT
          • TIMESTAMP_ISO
          • TIMESTAMPDIFF
          • TIMESTAMPDIFF_BIG
          • TO_CHAR
          • TO_CLOB
          • TO_DATE
          • TO_NUMBER
          • TO_TIMESTAMP
          • TOTALORDER
          • TRANSLATE
          • TRIM
          • TRIM_ARRAY
          • TRUNCATE or TRUNC
          • TRUNC_TIMESTAMP
          • UCASE
          • UPPER
          • URL_DECODE
          • URL_ENCODE
          • VALUE
          • VARBINARY
          • VARBINARY_FORMAT
          • VARCHAR
          • VARCHAR_BIT_FORMAT
          • VARCHAR_FORMAT
          • VARCHAR_FORMAT_BINARY
          • VARGRAPHIC
          • VERIFY_GROUP_FOR_USER
          • WEEK
          • WEEK_ISO
          • WRAP
          • XMLATTRIBUTES
          • XMLCOMMENT
          • XMLCONCAT
          • XMLDOCUMENT
          • XMLELEMENT
          • XMLFOREST
          • XMLNAMESPACES
          • XMLPARSE
          • XMLPI
          • XMLROW
          • XMLSERIALIZE
          • XMLTEXT
          • XMLVALIDATE
          • XOR
          • XSLTRANSFORM
          • YEAR
          • ZONED
        • Table functions
          • BASE_TABLE
          • HTTP_DELETE_VERBOSE
          • HTTP_GET_VERBOSE
          • HTTP_PATCH_VERBOSE
          • HTTP_POST_VERBOSE
          • HTTP_PUT_VERBOSE
          • JSON_TABLE
          • MQREADALL
          • MQREADALLCLOB
          • MQRECEIVEALL
          • MQRECEIVEALLCLOB
          • XMLTABLE
      • Procedures
        • CREATE_WRAPPED
        • XDBDECOMPXML
        • XSR_ADDSCHEMADOC
        • XSR_COMPLETE
        • XSR_REGISTER
        • XSR_REMOVE
      • Queries
        • Authorization
        • subselect
          • select-clause
            • Select list notation
            • Applying the select list
            • Null attributes of result columns
            • Names of result columns
            • Data types of result columns
          • from-clause
            • table-reference
            • joined-table
          • Hierarchical queries
            • hierarchical-query-clause
            • pseudo columns
            • CONNECT_BY_ROOT
            • PRIOR
            • SYS_CONNECT_BY_PATH
          • where-clause
          • group-by-clause
          • having-clause
          • order-by-clause
          • offset-clause
          • fetch-clause
          • Examples of a subselect
        • fullselect
          • Examples of a fullselect
        • select-statement
          • common-table-expression
            • Recursion example: bill of materials
          • update-clause
          • read-only-clause
          • optimize-clause
          • isolation-clause
          • concurrent-access-resolution-clause
          • Examples of a select-statement
      • Statements
        • How SQL statements are invoked
          • Embedding a statement in an application program
          • Dynamic preparation and execution
          • Static invocation of a select-statement
          • Dynamic invocation of a select-statement
          • Interactive invocation
        • SQL diagnostic information
        • Detecting and processing error and warning conditions in host language applications
        • SQL comments
        • ALLOCATE CURSOR
        • ALLOCATE DESCRIPTOR
        • ALTER FUNCTION (external scalar)
        • ALTER FUNCTION (external table)
        • ALTER FUNCTION (SQL scalar)
        • ALTER FUNCTION (SQL table)
        • ALTER MASK
        • ALTER PERMISSION
        • ALTER PROCEDURE (external)
        • ALTER PROCEDURE (SQL)
        • ALTER SEQUENCE
        • ALTER TABLE
        • ALTER TRIGGER
        • ASSOCIATE LOCATORS
        • BEGIN DECLARE SECTION
        • CALL
        • CLOSE
        • COMMENT
        • COMMIT
        • compound (dynamic)
        • CONNECT (type 1)
        • CONNECT (type 2)
        • CREATE ALIAS
        • CREATE FUNCTION
        • CREATE FUNCTION (external scalar)
        • CREATE FUNCTION (external table)
        • CREATE FUNCTION (sourced)
        • CREATE FUNCTION (SQL scalar)
        • CREATE FUNCTION (SQL table)
        • CREATE INDEX
        • CREATE MASK
        • CREATE PERMISSION
        • CREATE PROCEDURE
        • CREATE PROCEDURE (external)
        • CREATE PROCEDURE (SQL)
        • CREATE SCHEMA
        • CREATE SEQUENCE
        • CREATE TABLE
        • CREATE TRIGGER
        • CREATE TYPE
        • CREATE TYPE (array)
        • CREATE TYPE (distinct)
        • CREATE VARIABLE
        • CREATE VIEW
        • DEALLOCATE DESCRIPTOR
        • DECLARE CURSOR
        • DECLARE GLOBAL TEMPORARY TABLE
        • DECLARE PROCEDURE
        • DECLARE STATEMENT
        • DECLARE VARIABLE
        • DELETE
        • DESCRIBE
        • DESCRIBE CURSOR
        • DESCRIBE INPUT
        • DESCRIBE PROCEDURE
        • DESCRIBE TABLE
        • DISCONNECT
        • DROP
        • END DECLARE SECTION
        • EXECUTE
        • EXECUTE IMMEDIATE
        • FETCH
        • FREE LOCATOR
        • GET DESCRIPTOR
        • GET DIAGNOSTICS
        • GRANT (function or procedure privileges)
        • GRANT (package privileges)
        • GRANT (schema privileges)
        • GRANT (sequence privileges)
        • GRANT (table or view privileges)
        • GRANT (type privileges)
        • GRANT (variable privileges)
        • GRANT (XML schema privileges)
        • HOLD LOCATOR
        • INCLUDE
        • INSERT
        • LABEL
        • LOCK TABLE
        • MERGE
        • OPEN
        • PREPARE
        • REFRESH TABLE
        • RELEASE (connection)
        • RELEASE SAVEPOINT
        • RENAME
        • REVOKE (function or procedure privileges)
        • REVOKE (package privileges)
        • REVOKE (schema privileges)
        • REVOKE (sequence privileges)
        • REVOKE (table or view privileges)
        • REVOKE (type privileges)
        • REVOKE (variable privileges)
        • REVOKE (XML schema privileges)
        • ROLLBACK
        • SAVEPOINT
        • SELECT
        • SELECT INTO
        • SET CONNECTION
        • SET CURRENT DEBUG MODE
        • SET CURRENT DECFLOAT ROUNDING MODE
        • SET CURRENT DEGREE
        • SET CURRENT IMPLICIT XMLPARSE OPTION
        • SET CURRENT TEMPORAL SYSTEM_TIME
        • SET DESCRIPTOR
        • SET ENCRYPTION PASSWORD
        • SET OPTION
        • SET PATH
        • SET RESULT SETS
        • SET SCHEMA
        • SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION
        • SET TRANSACTION
        • SET variable
        • SIGNAL
        • TAG
        • TRANSFER OWNERSHIP
        • TRUNCATE
        • UPDATE
        • VALUES
        • VALUES INTO
        • WHENEVER
      • SQL procedural language (SQL PL)
        • SQL control statements
        • References to SQL parameters and SQL variables
        • References to SQL condition names
        • References to SQL cursor names
        • References to SQL labels
        • Summary of ′name′ scoping in nested compound statements
        • SQL-procedure-statement
        • assignment-statement
        • CALL statement
        • CASE statement
        • compound-statement
        • FOR statement
        • GET DIAGNOSTICS statement
        • GOTO statement
        • IF statement
        • INCLUDE statement
        • ITERATE statement
        • LEAVE statement
        • LOOP statement
        • PIPE statement
        • REPEAT statement
        • RESIGNAL statement
        • RETURN statement
        • SIGNAL statement
        • WHILE statement
      • SQL limits
      • Characteristics of SQL statements
        • Actions allowed on SQL statements
        • SQL statement data access classification for routines
        • Considerations for using distributed relational database
          • CONNECT (type 1) and CONNECT (type 2) differences
      • SQLCA (SQL communication area)
        • Field descriptions
        • INCLUDE SQLCA declarations
      • SQLDA (SQL descriptor area)
        • Field descriptions in an SQLDA header
        • Field descriptions in an occurrence of SQLVAR
        • SQLTYPE and SQLLEN
        • CCSID values in SQLDATA or SQLNAME
        • Unrecognized and unsupported SQLTYPES
        • INCLUDE SQLDA declarations
      • CCSID values
      • Db2 for i catalog views
        • IBM i catalog tables and views
          • SYSCATALOGS
          • SYSCHKCST
          • SYSCOLAUTH
          • SYSCOLUMNS
          • SYSCOLUMNS2
          • SYSCOLUMNS2_SESSION
          • SYSCOLUMNSTAT
          • SYSCONTROLS
          • SYSCONTROLSDEP
          • SYSCST
          • SYSCSTCOL
          • SYSCSTDEP
          • SYSDUMMY1
          • SYSFIELDS
          • SYSFILES
          • SYSFUNCS
          • SYSHISTORYTABLES
          • SYSINDEXES
          • SYSINDEXSTAT
          • SYSJARCONTENTS
          • SYSJAROBJECTS
          • SYSKEYCST
          • SYSKEYS
          • SYSMQTSTAT
          • SYSPACKAGE
          • SYSPACKAGEAUTH
          • SYSPACKAGESTAT
          • SYSPACKAGESTMTSTAT
          • SYSPARMS
          • SYSPARTITIONDISK
          • SYSPARTITIONINDEXDISK
          • SYSPARTITIONINDEXES
          • SYSPARTITIONINDEXSTAT
          • SYSPARTITIONMQTS
          • SYSPARTITIONSTAT
          • SYSPERIODS
          • SYSPROCS
          • SYSPROGRAMSTAT
          • SYSPROGRAMSTMTSTAT
          • SYSREFCST
          • SYSROUTINEAUTH
          • SYSROUTINEDEP
          • SYSROUTINES
          • SYSSCHEMAAUTH
          • SYSSCHEMAS
          • SYSSEQUENCEAUTH
          • SYSSEQUENCES
          • SYSTABAUTH
          • SYSTABLEDEP
          • SYSTABLEINDEXSTAT
          • SYSTABLES
          • SYSTABLESTAT
          • SYSTRIGCOL
          • SYSTRIGDEP
          • SYSTRIGGERS
          • SYSTRIGUPD
          • SYSTYPES
          • SYSUDTAUTH
          • SYSVARIABLEAUTH
          • SYSVARIABLEDEP
          • SYSVARIABLES
          • SYSVIEWDEP
          • SYSVIEWS
          • SYSXSROBJECTAUTH
          • XSRANNOTATIONINFO
          • XSROBJECTCOMPONENTS
          • XSROBJECTHIERARCHIES
          • XSROBJECTS
        • ODBC and JDBC catalog views
          • SQLCOLPRIVILEGES
          • SQLCOLUMNS
          • SQLFOREIGNKEYS
          • SQLFUNCTIONCOLS
          • SQLFUNCTIONS
          • SQLPRIMARYKEYS
          • SQLPROCEDURECOLS
          • SQLPROCEDURES
          • SQLSCHEMAS
          • SQLSPECIALCOLUMNS
          • SQLSTATISTICS
          • SQLTABLEPRIVILEGES
          • SQLTABLES
          • SQLTYPEINFO
          • SQLUDTS
        • ANS and ISO catalog views
          • AUTHORIZATIONS
          • CHARACTER_SETS
          • CHECK_CONSTRAINTS
          • COLUMN_PRIVILEGES
          • COLUMNS
          • INFORMATION_SCHEMA_CATALOG_NAME
          • PARAMETERS
          • REFERENTIAL_CONSTRAINTS
          • ROUTINES
          • ROUTINE_PRIVILEGES
          • SCHEMATA
          • SEQUENCES
          • SQL_FEATURES
          • SQL_LANGUAGES
          • SQL_SIZING
          • TABLE_CONSTRAINTS
          • TABLE_PRIVILEGES
          • TABLES
          • UDT_PRIVILEGES
          • USAGE_PRIVILEGES
          • USER_DEFINED_TYPES
          • VARIABLE_PRIVILEGES
          • VIEWS
      • Text search argument syntax
        • Examples: Simple text search
        • Advanced text search operators
        • Example: Using the CONTAINS function and SCORE function
        • XML text search
          • XML text search grammar
          • Examples: XPath text search
        • Text search language options
      • Terminology differences
      • Reserved schema names and reserved words
        • Reserved schema names
        • Reserved words
      • Related information
  • Troubleshooting
    • PDF file for Database troubleshooting
    • Before you call service
    • IBM i database FAQ
    • Monitoring database file errors
  • 데이터베이스 관련 정보
• e-business 및 웹 서비스 제공
  • 애플리케이션 서버
  • B2B 및 B2C
  • 협업
  • 인터넷에 연결
  • 개발 툴
  • e-business 인에이블러
    • DB2 XML Extender 관리 및 프로그래밍
    • IBM i용 Content Manager OnDemand 7.4
    • OmniFind Text Search Server
      • What's new for IBM i 7.3
      • PDF file
      • Introduction
        • Overview
        • System requirements
      • Key concepts
        • Create and update index
        • Triggers
        • Document formats
        • Data types
        • Score and Synonyms
        • Linguistic processing
          • Languages
          • Chinese, Japanese, and Korean
        • Server alias name
      • Install and configure
        • Install
        • Start text search
        • Create an index
        • Update an index
        • Search an index
        • Document truncation
      • Stored procedures
        • SYSTS_START
        • SYSTS_STOP
        • SYSTS_CREATE
        • SYSTS_ALTER
        • SYSTS_DROP
        • SYSTS_UPDATE
        • SYSTS_SHUTDOWN
      • Search an index
        • CONTAINS
        • SCORE
        • Search syntax
          • Simple examples
          • Advanced search operators
          • Searching for special characters
          • CONTAINS and SCORE example
        • XML search
          • Namespaces
          • Using namespaces
          • Example
          • Query grammar
      • Administer OmniFind
        • Start OmniFind
        • Stop OmniFind
        • Save and restore
          • Index structure
          • Index with data
        • Problem determination
        • View logs
        • Administration tools
          • Configuration tool
          • SYSTS_REMOVE
          • SYSTS_REPRIMEINDEX
          • SYSTS_CLEAR_INDEX
          • SYSTS_VALIDITYCHECK
          • QDBTS_ROWS_STATUS
          • Synonym dictionaries
            • Add a synonym dictionary
            • Remove a synonym dictionary
          • Find orphaned and missing indexes
          • Advanced administration
        • ServerInstance tool
        • Health Checker
        • Independent ASP
        • High Availability
        • Performance analysis
        • Transaction considerations
        • Using IBM Navigator for i
          • Work with servers
          • Work with indexes
            • View index builds
        • Use System i Navigator
          • Work with servers
          • Work with indexes
            • View index builds
      • Administration tables
        • SYSTEXTDEFAULTS
        • SYSTEXTINDEXES
        • SYSTEXTCOLUMNS
        • SYSTEXTSERVERS
        • SYSTEXTCONFIGURATION
        • SYSTEXTSERVERHISTORY
        • SYSTS_CREATE
      • Extensions to Index and Search Non-DB2 Data
        • Overview
        • Create Collection
        • Add Object Set for Spool File Data
        • Removing Object Set for Spool File Data
        • Add Object Set for a Stream File
        • Removing Object Set for Stream File Data
        • Adding an Object Set for Multiple Members Source Physical File
        • Removing an Object Set for Multiple Members Source Physical File
        • Removing an Object Set
        • Updating the Collection
        • Repopulate the Collection
        • Search Collection
        • Query Object Sets
        • Retrieve Status of Indexes Objects
        • Objects Not Indexed
        • Retrieve Status of Collection
        • Dropping a Text Search Collection
        • Altering a Text Search Collection
        • IASP Considerations
        • Backup and Restore Considerations
      • Messages and codes
        • OmniFind messages
        • SQLCODE -0196
        • SQLCODE -5003
        • SQLCODE -20423
        • SQLCODE -20424
        • SQLCODE -20425
        • SQLCODE -20426
        • SQLCODE -20427
        • CPF32fa
        • CPF32fb
        • CPI321E
    • Rational Host Integration Solution
    • IBM MQ
  • 퍼베이시브 컴퓨팅
  • 프로그래밍
  • 보안
  • HTTP Server
    • What's new for IBM i 7.4
    • PDF file for IBM HTTP Server for i
    • Installing HTTP Server
      • Compatibility considerations
      • Verify the prerequisites
      • Install HTTP Server on your server
      • Verify the HTTP Server installation
    • Overview of IBM Web Administration for i
      • Web browser requirements
      • User profile requirements
      • Starting Web Administration for i
      • User interface conventions
      • Configuring SSL for ADMIN wizard
    • HTTP Server Concepts
      • Context, directives, and the server area
      • Content negotiation
      • Virtual hosts
      • Proxy server types
      • Supported file systems for Web content
      • Server Name Indication(SNI)
      • Logging
        • Log formats
        • Web Log Monitor
      • Security
        • Security tips
        • User profiles and required authorities
        • Validation lists
        • Kerberos
      • Performance
        • File compression
        • Fast Response Cache Accelerator (FRCA)
        • Real time server statistics
        • Web Performance Advisor
      • Extending HTTP Server functionality
        • CGI
        • Apache modules
        • Service-side includes
      • High availability
        • Highly available HTTP Server
        • High availability CGI programs
      • Web Publishing with the PUT Method
      • WebDAV
    • Scenarios
      • Setting up HTTP Server
      • Adding a new directory
      • Adding user directories
      • Adding cookie tracking
      • Adding virtual hosts
      • Adding password protection
      • Adding dynamic content with server-side includes
      • Adding Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protection
      • Enabling single signon for HTTP Server
      • Monitoring Web server activity with logs
    • Tasks
      • Getting started
      • HTTP Server tasks
        • Setting up additional MIME types
        • Setting up content and language negotiation
        • Setting up customized error messages
        • Setting up directory indexing and directory listing
        • Setting up environment variables
        • Setting up highly available HTTP server
        • Setting up welcome or index page
        • Manually editing HTTP Server
        • Managing HTTP Servers
        • Managing addresses and ports
        • Managing backup files
        • Managing directories
        • Managing HTTP Server performance
      • Compression tasks
        • Setting up input decompression
        • Setting up output compression
      • FRCA tasks
        • Setting up Fast Response Cache Accelerator (FRCA)
      • Log tasks
        • Setting up logs
      • Proxy tasks
        • Setting up forward proxy
        • Setting up reverse proxy
        • Set up proxy chaining
      • Security tasks
        • Setting up password protection
        • Setting up to secure against denial of service
      • WebDAV tasks
        • Setting up WebDAV
      • Web tasks
        • Integrated Web Application Server
        • Integrated Web services for i
        • Web Performance Advisor
        • Install WebSphere Application Server
      • Virtual host tasks
        • Setting up virtual hosts
      • CGI tasks
        • Setting up CGI jobs
        • Setting up persistent CGI jobs
      • Apache module tasks
        • Setting up Apache modules
    • Programming
      • API
        • Apache module APIs
        • CGI APIs
        • HTTP Server configuration APIs
      • CGI programming
        • The CGI Process
        • CGI Data Conversions
        • Writing high availability CGI programs
        • Writing persistent CGI programs
        • CGI programs and activation groups
        • Running CGI Programs in PASE
        • Setting up CGI programs
      • Apache module programming
        • Setting up third party modules
      • Handlers
      • Server-side scripting languages
        • Net.Data
        • Node.js
        • PHP
        • Python
      • Running Java Web applications
    • Troubleshooting
      • Troubleshooting Web Administration for i
      • Troubleshooting HTTP Server
      • Troubleshooting CGI programs
    • Reference information
      • Directives
      • Log file format tokens
      • Regular expression notation
      • CL commands
      • Environment variables
      • Server-side include commands
      • Time formats
      • ap_expr expression parser
    • Related information
    • Legal
• 파일 및 파일 시스템
  • 데이터베이스 파일 관리
    • IBM i 7.3의 새로운 사항
    • 데이터베이스 파일 관리를 위한 PDF 파일
    • 데이터베이스 파일 관리 개요
      • 파일 유형
    • 데이터베이스 파일에 대한 작업
      • 파일 자원 할당
        • 파일 자원 할당: 개요
        • 할당해야 할 파일 자원
        • 시스템의 자원 할당 방법
      • 파일 복사
        • 파일 복사: 개요
          • 파일 복사: 명령
          • 파일 복사: 지원되는 기능
          • 파일 복사: 기본 기능
            • 파일 유형 및 복사
            • 레코드 순서 및 복사
            • 파일 복사 완료 메세지 재송신
            • 복사 오류에 대한 모니터링
            • 시작 파일에서 제로 레코드에 대한 모니터링
            • 중복 종료 파일 멤버 작성
            • 쿼리 파일에서 복사 명령이 CCSID 지원
            • 소스 파일 복사 명령이 CCSID 지원
            • 복사 명령에서 널값 지원
        • 실제 파일 또는 논리 파일 복사
        • 종료 파일 작성(CRTFILE 매개변수)
          • 파일 복사 또는 쿼리 파일에서 복사 명령에 CRTFILE(*YES) 지정
          • 종료 파일의 권한, 사용자 프로파일 및 파일 기능
        • 레코드 추가, 대체 및 갱신(MBROPT 매개변수)
          • 파일 복사 시 *REPLACE 지정
          • 파일 복사 시 *ADD 지정
          • 파일 복사 시 *UPDADD 지정
          • 트리거 프로그램을 사용하는 파일로 레코드 복사
        • 복사할 레코드 선택
          • 지정된 레코드의 형식명을 사용하는 레코드 선택(RCDFMT 매개변수)
          • 상대 레코드 번호를 사용하여 레코드 선택(FROMRCD 및 TORCD 매개변수)
          • 레코드 키를 사용하여 레코드 선택(FROMKEY 및 TOKEY 매개변수)
            • 복사 조작에 의한 키 스트링 비교
            • 예: build-key 함수
            • 예: FROMKEY 및 TOKEY 사용
            • 레코드 키에 사용된 가변 길이 필드(FROMKEY 및 TOKEY)
            • 레코드 키에 사용된 날짜, 시간 및 시간소인 필드(FROMKEY 및 TOKEY)
            • 레코드 키에 사용된 널(null) 허용 필드(FROMKEY 및 TOKEY)
            • 레코드 키에 사용된 여러 가지 CCSID(FROMKEY 및 TOKEY)
            • 레코드 키에 사용된 DBCS 그래픽 필드(FROMKEY 및 TOKEY)
          • 지정된 레코드 수 선택(NBRRCDS 매개변수)
          • 문자 내용에 따른 레코드 선택(INCCHAR 매개변수)
            • INCCHAR 매개변수에 사용된 가변 길이 필드
            • INCCHAR 매개변수에 사용된 널(null) 허용 필드
            • INCCHAR 매개변수에 사용된 여러 가지 CCSID
            • INCCHAR 매개변수에 사용된 DBCS 그래픽 필드
          • 필드 값에 따른 레코드 선택(INCREL 매개변수)
            • INCREL 매개변수에 가변 길이 필드 사용
            • INCREL 매개변수에 날짜, 시간 및 시간소인 필드 사용
            • INCREL 매개변수에 사용된 널(null) 허용 필드
            • INCREL 매개변수에 사용된 여러 가지 CCSID
            • INCREL 매개변수에 사용된 DBCS 그래픽 필드
          • 삭제된 레코드 복사(COMPRESS 매개변수)
            • COMPRESS(*NO) 매개변수 및 파일 복사 명령의 요구사항
            • COMPRESS(*NO) 매개변수 및 파일 복사 명령의 제한사항
            • COMPRESS(*NO) 매개변수 및 파일 복사 명령의 세부사항
        • 레코드 인쇄(PRINT, OUTFMT 및 TOFILE(*PRINT) 매개변수)
          • 형식화되지 않은 인쇄 리스트 작성
        • 복사할 멤버 선택
          • 파일 멤버 복사: 개요
          • 허용되는 복사 작업과 매개변수
          • 파일 내의 모든 멤버 복사
          • 파일 내의 특정 멤버만 복사
          • 복사 조작에 대한 멤버명 지정
          • 데이터베이스 파일 대체 및 테이프 파일 대체 명령에 대한 특수 고려사항
          • 복사 기능에서 멤버를 종료 파일에 추가하는 방법
        • 서로 다른 데이터베이스 레코드 형식간의 복사(FMTOPT 매개변수)
          • 서로 다른 필드 유형 및 속성에 대한 데이터 지정
            • 가변 길이 필드를 고정 길이 필드에 맵핑
            • 고정 길이 필드를 가변 길이에 맵핑
            • FMTOPT(*MAP) 또는 FMTOPT(*NOCHK)를 사용하는 날짜, 시간 및 시간소인 필드
            • FMTOPT(*MAP) 또는 FMTOPT(*NOCHK)를 사용하는 널(null) 허용 필드
            • FMTOPT(*MAP) 또는 FMTOPT(*NOCHK)를 사용하는 CCSID
            • FMTOPT(*MAP) 또는 FMTOPT(*NOCHK)를 사용하는 DBCS 그래픽 필드
          • 범용 코드화 문자 세트(UCS-2) 그래픽 필드 변환
            • UCS-2 그래픽 필드 제한사항
          • 범용 코드화 문자 세트 변환 형식 변환(UTF-8 문자 및 UTF-16 그래픽)
          • System/370 부동 소수점 및 널 필드 변환
            • System/370 부동 소수점 및 널 필드 변환 중의 오류
          • 파일 복사 동안 변환 규칙
        • 소스 파일 순번 및 날짜 필드 추가 또는 변경(SRCOPT 및 SRCSEQ 매개변수)
          • 장치 소스 파일을 데이터베이스 소스 파일에 복사
          • 데이터베이스 소스 파일을 장치 소스 파일에 복사
          • 데이터베이스 소스 파일을 데이터베이스 소스 파일에 복사
        • 복합 오브젝트 복사
          • 사용자 정의 기능이 있는 파일 복사
          • 사용자 정의 유형이 있는 파일 복사
          • 데이터 링크가 있는 파일 복사
          • 큰 오브젝트가 있는 파일 복사
          • ID 열 또는 ROWID 속성이 있는 파일 복사
        • 서로 다른 시스템 간의 복사
          • 가져오기 파일에서 복사 명령을 사용하여 서로 다른 시스템 간 복사
            • CPYFRMIMPF 명령에 대한 주
            • CPYFRMIMPF 명령에 대한 제한사항
            • 시작 파일이 데이터베이스 파일 또는 DDM 파일인 경우 IBM i 플랫폼으로 데이터 가져오기
            • 가져오기 파일이 스트림 파일인 경우 IBM i 플랫폼으로 데이터 가져오기
            • 가져오기 파일에서 복사 명령으로 사용할 병렬 데이터 로더 지원
            • 가져오기 파일의 데이터 처리
            • 구분된 가져오기 파일에 대한 주(CPYFRMIMPF 명령)
            • 고정 형식의 가져오기 파일
            • CPYFRMIMPF 명령의 성능 향상
          • 가져오기 파일에 복사 명령을 사용하여 서로 다른 시스템 간 복사
            • 가져오기 파일에 복사 명령에 대한 주
            • 가져오기 파일에 복사 명령에 대한 제한사항
            • 구분된 가져오기 파일에 대한 주(CPYTOIMPF 명령)
            • 고정 형식의 가져오기 파일에 데이터 복사(CPYTOIMPF 명령)
      • 열린 파일
        • 열린 파일 범위
        • 임시 파일 설명을 사용하여 파일 열기
        • 파일 설명 변경 감지
        • 열린 파일에 대한 정보 표시
        • 열기 및 I/O 피드백 영역에 대한 파일 상태 모니터
      • 공유 파일
        • 작업에서 공유하는 파일의 열기 고려사항
        • 작업에서 공유하는 파일의 I/O 고려사항
        • 작업에서 공유하는 파일의 닫기 고려사항
      • 대체
        • 개요: 대체
          • 대체 사용의 이점
          • 대체 명령 요약
          • 일부 명령에서의 대체 효과
          • 멀티스레드 작업에서 대체 사용
        • 대체 애플리케이션
          • 파일 속성 대체
          • 파일명 대체
          • 파일명 및 파일 속성 대체
          • 열린 파일 범위 대체
          • 시스템의 대체 처리 방법
            • 대체 우선순위 처리
            • 시나리오: 시스템의 대체 처리 방법
            • 프로세스 대체: 일반 원칙
          • 시나리오: 대체에서의 나감 영향
          • 시나리오: 대체에서의 TFRCTL 영향
          • 시나리오: 동일한 호출 레벨의 동일한 파일로 대체
          • CL 프로그램 대체
          • 대체에 대해 파일 보안 설정
          • 프린터 파일에 대한 총칭 대체 사용
            • 예: *PRTF를 OVRPRTF에 적용
            • 예: 복수 호출 레벨로부터 *PRTF를 OVRPRTF에 적용
          • 프로그램 컴파일 시 대체 애플리케이션
        • 대체 삭제
        • 대체 표시
          • 예: 특정 활성 그룹에 대한 모든 대체 표시
          • 예: 하나의 파일에 대한 병합된 파일 대체 표시
          • 예: 하나의 파일에 대한 모든 파일 대체 표시
          • 예: 모든 파일에 대한 병합된 파일 대체 표시
          • 예: WRKJOB을 사용하여 대체 표시
          • 예: 대체 표시
          • 대체 표시에 대한 추가 정보
        • 파일 재지정
          • 파일 재지정에 대한 계획
          • 파일 재지정에 대한 추가 정보
          • 재지정 파일에 대한 디폴트 조치
    • 성능
      • 키순 액세스 경로 방지
      • 보다 적은 수의 매개변수 지정
      • 레코드 형식 레벨 ID 검사
      • 파일 복사 시 오류 방지
        • 복사 중 회복 가능한 오류 제한
        • 파일 복사 시 날짜, 시간 및 시간소인 오류 방지
          • 오브젝트 복사 명령 사용 시의 맵핑 고려사항
        • 파일 복사 시 위치 오류 방지
        • 파일 복사 시 할당 오류 방지
          • 파일 복사 시 할당 오류 원인
        • 제한조건 관계로 인한 복사 오류 방지
        • 검사 지연 상태에 있지 않은 파일의 복사 조작
        • 검사 지연 상태에 있는 파일의 복사 조작
        • 파일 권한과 관련된 복사 오류 방지
    • 보안
      • 오브젝트 권한
        • 오브젝트 조작 권한
        • 오브젝트 존재 권한
        • 오브젝트 관리 권한
        • 오브젝트 참조 권한
        • 오브젝트 변경 권한
      • 데이터 권한
      • 파일 조작에 필요한 권한
      • 파일 작성 시 파일 및 데이터 액세스 제한
    • 데이터베이스 파일 관리 문제점 해결
      • 시스템의 파일 오류 감지 및 처리
      • 시스템에 의한 파일의 메세지 및 메세지 모니터
      • 시스템에 의한 파일의 주/부 리턴 코드
      • 파일 시스템 오류에서 회복
        • 시스템에 의한 오류의 정상 완료
        • 시스템에서 예외가 있는 완료 오류
        • 영구 시스템 또는 파일 오류
        • I/O 조작상의 영구 장치 또는 세션 오류
        • 열기 또는 확보 조작 상의 장치 또는 세션 오류
        • I/O 조작상의 회복가능한 장치 또는 세션 오류
    • 참조
      • 2바이트 문자 세트 지원
        • 2바이트 문자 세트의 원리
          • DBCS 코드 체계
          • 시프트 제어 2바이트 문자
          • 유효하지 않은 2바이트 코드 및 정의되지 않은 2바이트 코드
          • 2바이트 데이터 사용
            • 2바이트 데이터를 사용할 수 있는 경우
            • 2바이트 데이터를 사용할 수 없는 경우
          • 2바이트 문자 크기
        • 2바이트 문자 처리
          • 기본 2바이트 문자
          • 확장 2바이트 문자
          • 2바이트 확장 문자가 처리되지 않을 때 발생사항
        • DBCS 장치 파일 지원
          • DBCS 파일 정의
          • DBCS 파일을 표시하는 경우
          • DBCS 파일 표시 방법
          • 올바르게 표시되지 않은 DBCS 파일
            • DBCS 처리가 가능하도록 프린터 파일 설정
        • DBCS 표시 화면 지원
          • 시프트 제어 2바이트 문자 삽입
          • 표시된 확장 2바이트 문자 수
          • 표시 화면의 DBCS 입력 필드 수
          • 영숫자 워크스테이션에서 2바이트 데이터 표시 효과
        • DBCS 파일의 복사 조작
          • 스풀 DBCS 파일의 복사 조작
          • 스풀되지 않은 DBCS 파일의 복사 조작
        • DBCS용 애플리케이션 프로그램 고려사항
          • 2바이트 데이터를 처리하는 애플리케이션 프로그램 설계
          • 영숫자 애플리케이션 프로그램을 DBCS 애플리케이션 프로그램으로 변경
        • DBCS 폰트 테이블
          • DBCS 폰트 테이블의 명령
          • DBCS 폰트 테이블 존재 여부 확인
          • DBCS 폰트 테이블을 테이프 또는 디스켓에 복사
            • DBCS 테이블을 테이프 또는 디스켓에 복사하는 시기
            • DBCS 테이블을 테이프 또는 디스켓에 복사하는 방법
          • 테이프 또는 디스켓에서 DBCS 폰트 테이블 복사
            • 테이프 또는 디스켓에서 DBCS 테이블을 복사하는 방법
          • DBCS 폰트 테이블 삭제
            • DBCS 폰트 테이블을 삭제하는 시기
            • DBCS 폰트 테이블을 삭제하는 방법
          • DBCS 폰트 테이블에 대한 문자 생성 유틸리티 시작
          • 사용자 정의 2바이트 문자 복사
        • DBCS 폰트 파일
        • DBCS 정렬표
          • DBCS 정렬표에 대한 명령
          • 시스템에서 DBCS 정렬 테이블 사용
          • DBCS 정렬표 존재 여부 확인
          • 테이프 또는 디스켓에 DBCS 정렬표 저장
          • 테이프 또는 디스켓에서 DBCS 정렬표 복원
          • 일본어 DBCS 마스터 정렬표를 데이터 파일에 복사
            • 일본어 DBCS 마스터 정렬 테이블을 데이터 파일에 복사하는 시기
            • 일본어 DBCS 마스터 정렬 테이블을 데이터 파일에 복사하는 방법
          • 데이터 파일에서 일본어 DBCS 마스터 정렬표 복사
            • 데이터 파일에서 일본어 DBCS 마스터 정렬 테이블을 복사하는 시기
            • 데이터 파일에서 일본어 DBCS 마스터 정렬 테이블을 복사하는 방법
          • DBCS 정렬표 삭제
            • DBCS 정렬 테이블을 삭제하는 시기
            • DBCS 정렬 테이블을 삭제하는 방법
        • DBCS 변환 사전
          • DBCS용 시스템 제공 사전(일본어에만 적용됨)
          • DBCS용 사용자 작성 사전
          • DBCS 변환 사전에 대한 명령
            • DBCS 변환 사전 작성
            • DBCS 변환 사전 편집
              • DBCS 변환 사전에 대한 요구사항
              • DBCS 변환 사전 조작
              • DBCS 변환 사전 편집 시 사용된 표시장치
                • DBCS 변환 사전에 대한 작업 화면
                • DBCS 변환 사전에 대한 관련 단어 편집 화면
              • DBCS 변환 사전에 대한 편집 조작의 예
                • DBCS 변환 사전 편집 시작
                • DBCS 변환 사전에 첫번째 항목 추가
                • DBCS 변환 사전에 관련 단어 이동
                • DBCS 변환 사전의 항목 삭제
                • DBCS 변환 사전의 편집 프로세스 종료
              • DBCS 변환 사전 편집에 대한 제안사항
          • DBCS 변환 사전 표시 및 인쇄
          • DBCS 변환 사전 삭제
        • DBCS 변환(일본어에서만 적용됨)
          • DBCS 변환을 사용할 수 있는 경우
          • DBCS 변환 작업 방법
          • DBCS 변환 사용
          • DBCS 변환 수행
            • DBCS 변환의 예
              • 2바이트 가나(Kana)를 2바이트 간지(kanji)로 변환
              • 여러 개의 영숫자 항목을 동시에 DBCS로 변환
              • 영숫자 공백을 DBCS 공백으로 변환
              • 영숫자 항목 또는 변환 코드를 DBCS로 변경
              • DBCS 변환 사전에 단어를 입력하기 위해 DBCS 변환 사용
            • DBCS 변환 사용 시 고려사항
      • 피드백 영역 배치
        • 열기 피드백 영역
          • 장치 정의 리스트
          • 볼륨 레이블 필드
        • I/O 피드백 영역
          • 공통 I/O 피드백 영역
          • ICF 및 화면 파일에 대한 I/O 피드백 영역
          • 프린터 파일에 대한 I/O 피드백 영역
          • 데이터베이스 파일에 대한 I/O 피드백 영역
          • 속성 피드백 영역 얻기
    • 관련 정보
  • Integrated file system
    • What's new for IBM i 7.4
    • PDF file for Integrated file system
    • Overview of the integrated file system
      • What the integrated file system is
      • Why use the integrated file system
    • Integrated file system concepts
      • Directory
        • Current directory
        • Home directory
        • Provided directories
        • *TYPE2 directories
      • Link
        • Hard link
        • Symbolic link
      • Path name
      • Stream file
      • Name continuity
      • Extended attributes
      • Scanning support
        • Examples: Scanning for viruses and files being opened
        • Related system values
        • Scanning occurrences
          • Object change
          • Signature change
          • Different CCSID
          • During save operation
          • Object integrity check
    • File systems
      • File system comparison
      • "root" (/) file system
        • Case-sensitivity in the "root" (/) file system
        • Path names in the "root" (/) file system
        • Links in the "root" (/) file system
        • Use of integrated file system commands in the "root" (/) file system
        • Use of integrated file system APIs in the "root" (/) file system
        • Object changes journaling in the "root" (/) file system
        • UDP and TCP devices in the "root" (/) file system
      • Open systems file system (QOpenSys)
        • Case sensitivity in the QOpenSys file system
        • Path names in the QOpenSys file system
        • Links in the QOpenSys file system
        • Use of integrated file system commands and displays in the QOpenSys file system
        • Use of integrated file system APIs in the QOpenSys file system
        • Object changes journaling in the QOpenSys file system
      • User-defined file systems (UDFSs)
        • Temporary user-defined file systems
        • Case sensitivity in an integrated file system user-defined file system
        • Path names in an integrated file system user-defined file system
        • Links in an integrated file system user-defined file system
        • Use of integrated file system commands in a user-defined file system
        • Use of integrated file system APIs in a user-defined file system
        • Graphical user interface for a user-defined file system
        • Creating an integrated file system user-defined file system
        • Deleting an integrated file system user-defined file system
        • Displaying an integrated file system user-defined file system
        • Mounting an integrated file system user-defined file system
        • Unmounting an integrated file system user-defined file system
        • Saving and restoring an integrated file system user-defined file system
        • Object changes journaling in a user-defined file system
        • User-defined file system and independent auxiliary storage pools
      • Library file system (QSYS.LIB)
        • QPWFSERVER authorization list in the QSYS.LIB file system
        • File-handling restrictions in the QSYS.LIB file system
        • Support for user spaces in the QSYS.LIB file system
        • Support for save files in the QSYS.LIB file system
        • Case-sensitivity in the QSYS.LIB file system
        • Path names in the QSYS.LIB file system
        • Links in the QSYS.LIB file system
        • Use of integrated file system commands and displays in the QSYS.LIB file system
        • Use of integrated file system APIs in the QSYS.LIB file system
      • Independent ASP QSYS.LIB
        • QPWFSERVER authorization list in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
        • File handling restrictions in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
        • Support for user spaces in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
        • Support for save files in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
        • Case-sensitivity in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
        • Path names in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
        • Links in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
        • Use of integrated file system commands and displays in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
        • Use of integrated file system APIs in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
      • Document library services file system (QDLS)
        • Integrated file system and HFS in the QDLS file system
        • User enrollment in the QDLS file system
        • Case sensitivity in the QDLS file system
        • Path names in the QDLS file system
        • Links in the QDLS file system
        • Use of integrated file system commands and displays in the QDLS file system
        • Use of integrated file system APIs in the QDLS file system
      • Optical file system (QOPT)
        • Integrated file system and HFS in the QOPT file system
        • Case-sensitivity in the QOPT file system
        • Path names in the QOPT file system
        • Links in the QOPT file system
        • Use of integrated file system commands and displays in the QOPT file system
        • Use of integrated file system APIs in the QOPT file system
      • IBM i NetClient file system (QNTC)
        • Authorities and ownership in the QNTC file system
        • Case sensitivity in the QNTC file system
        • Path names in the QNTC file system
        • Links in the QNTC file system
        • Use of integrated file system commands and displays in the QNTC file system
        • Use of integrated file system APIs in the QNTC file system
        • QNTC environment variables
        • Creating directories in the QNTC file system
          • Use of integrated file system APIs in the Network File System
        • Enabling QNTC file system for Network Authentication Service
      • IBM i file server file system (QFileSvr.400)
        • Case-sensitivity in the QFileSvr.400 file system
        • Path names in the QFileSvr.400 file system
        • Communications in the QFileSvr.400 file system
        • Security and object authority in the QFileSvr.400 file system
        • Securing QFileSvr.400 file system connections
        • Links in the QFileSvr.400 file system
        • Use of integrated file system commands and displays in the QFileSvr.400 file system
        • Use of integrated file system APIs in the QFileSvr.400 file system
      • Network File System (NFS)
        • Characteristics of the Network File System
        • Variations of servers and clients in the Network File System
        • Links in the Network File System
        • Use of integrated file system commands in the Network File System
        • Use of integrated file system APIs in the Network File System
        • Comparison of Network File System version 4 to Prior Versions
        • Setting up a network for RPCSEC-GSS
        • Identity mapping
    • Accessing the integrated file system
      • Accessing using menus and displays
      • Accessing using CL commands
        • Path name rules for CL commands and displays
        • Working with output of the RTVDIRINF and PRTDIRINF commands
          • Accessing the data of RTVDIRINF
          • Using the data of RTVDIRINF
          • Collecting and analyzing folder attributes with IBM Navigator for i
      • Accessing using APIs
      • Accessing using IBM i (SQL) services
      • Accessing using a PC
      • Accessing using IBM Navigator for i
      • Accessing using IBM i NetServer
      • Accessing using File Transfer Protocol
    • Integrated file system conversion
      • Converting directories from *TYPE1 to *TYPE2
        • Overview of *TYPE1 to *TYPE2 conversion
        • Directory conversion considerations
          • Conversion status determination
          • User profiles creation
          • Objects renamed
            • Combined characters
            • Surrogate characters
          • User profile considerations
            • Changing maximum storage for a user profile
            • Changing the owner of a directory
          • Auxiliary storage requirements
          • Tips: Symbolic link
          • Tips: Independent ASP
          • Tips: Saving and restoring
          • Tips: Reclaiming integrated file system objects
          • Integrated file system scanning
      • Converting names to support additional characters
        • Overview of automatic name conversion
        • Name conversion considerations
          • Conversion status determination
          • Objects renamed
          • User profile considerations
          • Tips: Symbolic link
          • Tips: Independent ASP
          • Tips: Saving and restoring
          • Tips: Reclaiming integrated file system objects
    • Journaling objects
      • Journaling overview
        • Journal management
        • Objects you should journal
        • Journaled integrated file system objects
        • Journaled operations
        • Special considerations for journal entries
        • Considerations for multiple hard links and journaling
      • Starting journaling
      • Changing journaling
      • Ending journaling
    • Reclaim operation of the "root" (/), QOpenSys, and user-defined file systems
      • Reclaim Object Links (RCLLNK) and Reclaim Storage (RCLSTG) commands comparison
      • Reclaim Object Links (RCLLNK) command
      • Re-creation of integrated file system provided objects
      • Examples: Reclaim Object Links (RCLLNK) command
        • Example: Correcting problems for an object
        • Example: Correcting problems that exist in a directory subtree
        • Example: Finding all damaged objects in the "root" (/), QOpenSys, and mounted user-defined file systems
        • Example: Deleting all damaged objects in the "root" (/), QOpenSys, and mounted user-defined file systems
        • Example: Running multiple RCLLNK commands to quickly reclaim all objects in the "root" (/), QOpenSys, and mounted user-defined file systems
    • Programming support
      • Copying data between stream files and database files
        • Copying data using CL commands
        • Copying data using APIs
        • Copying data using data-transfer functions
          • Transferring data from a database file to a stream file
          • Transferring data from a stream file to a database file
          • Transferring data into a newly created database file definition and file
          • Creating a format description file
      • Copying data between stream files and save files
      • Performing operations using APIs
        • ILE C functions
        • Large file support
        • Path name rules for APIs
        • File descriptor
        • Security
      • Socket support
      • Naming and international support
      • Data conversion
      • Example: Integrated file system C functions
    • Working with files and folders using IBM Navigator for i
      • Creating a folder
      • Removing a file or folder
      • Moving files or folders to another file system
      • Setting permissions
      • Setting up file text conversion
      • Sending a file or folder to another system
      • Changing options for sending a file or folder
      • Creating a file share
      • Changing a file share
      • Removing a file share
      • Creating a new user-defined file system
      • Mounting a user-defined file system
      • Unmounting a user-defined file system
      • Working with dynamically mounted file systems
      • Setting whether objects should be scanned or not
      • Checking in objects
      • Checking out objects
      • Downloading a file or folder
      • Uploading a file
      • Navigate directly to an integrated file system folder
      • Save integrated file system folder as a favorite
    • Transport-independent remote procedure call
      • Network selection APIs
      • Name-to-address translation APIs
      • eXternal Data Representation (XDR) APIs
      • Authentication APIs
      • Transport-independent RPC (TI-RPC) APIs
        • TI-RPC simplified APIs
        • TI-RPC top-level APIs
        • TI-RPC intermediate-level APIs
        • TI-RPC expert-level APIs
        • Other TI-RPC APIs
    • Related information for integrated file system
  • Spooled files
    • What's new for IBM i 7.2
    • PDF file for Spooled files
    • Spooling concepts
      • Output spooling
        • Output queues and spooled files
        • Default system output queues
        • Spooling writers
        • Spooling writer commands
      • Input spooling
        • Job input commands
        • Inline data files
        • Considerations for opening inline data files
    • Spooled files and output queues
      • Spooling overview
      • Spooled file
      • Output queue
      • Multiple output queues
      • Output queue recovery
      • Spooled file cleanup
      • Default output queues
      • Order of spooled files on an output queue
      • Data queue support
        • Record type 01 data queue entry format
        • Record type 02 data queue entry format
        • Record type 03 data queue entry format
      • Spooled file names
      • Spooled file security
      • Output queue security
      • QPRTJOB job
      • Spooled file subsystem
      • Spooled file library
      • Spooled files in independent ASPs
      • Controlling the method of sending spooled files from list panels
    • Managing spooled files
      • Displaying a list of spooled files
      • Displaying the contents of a spooled file
      • Displaying messages associated with a spooled file
      • Holding a spooled file
      • Releasing a spooled file
      • Moving a spooled file
      • Deleting spooled files
      • Converting a spooled file to PDF
      • Exporting a spooled file to your PC
      • Copying a spooled file to a physical file
      • Sending a spooled file to another user or system
      • Changing attributes of a spooled file
      • Restarting the printing of a spooled file
      • Suspending one spooled file and printing another
      • Enabling spooled file notification message
      • Controlling the number of spooled files
      • Deleting expired spooled files
      • Reclaiming spooled file storage
      • Saving and restoring spooled files
      • Controlling printing by spooled file size
  • 테이프 파일
    • 테이프 파일에 대한 PDF 파일
    • 테이프 파일 개요
    • 개념
      • 테이프 데이터 파일
      • 테이프 장치 파일
      • 레코드, 블록 및 형식
      • 테이프 레이블링
    • 테이프 파일 사용
      • 테이프 초기화
      • 테이프에 파일로 데이터 저장
        • 테이프에서 파일 확장
      • 테이프 장치에서 데이터 액세스
        • 장치 설명 설정
        • 각 매체 라이브러리 장치의 장치 설명 설정
        • 테이프 장치 파일 설정
          • 테이프 장치 파일 작성
          • 테이프 장치 파일 매개변수 지정
    • 고급 언어 프로그램의 테이프 장치 파일
      • 테이프 장치 파일의 열기 처리
      • 테이프의 입력/출력 처리
        • 읽기 및 쓰기 고려사항
        • 읽기 고려사항
        • 강제 데이터 끝 고려사항
        • 강제 볼륨 끝 고려사항
      • 테이프에 대한 닫기 처리
      • 사용자 레이블 처리
        • 매개변수 1
        • 매개변수 2
        • 매개변수 3
    • 대체 사용
      • 파일 속성 대체
      • 고급 언어 프로그램에서 파일 이름 대체
      • 대체 표시
      • 대체 삭제
      • 파일 경로 재지정
        • 동일한 파일 유형으로 파일 대체
        • 다른 파일 유형으로 파일 대체
        • 대체를 무시하거나 제한하는 명령 인식
    • 레코드 형식
      • 예제: *D 레코드 형식
      • 예제: *DB 레코드 형식
      • 예제: *F 레코드 형식
      • 예제: *FB 레코드 형식
      • 예제: *V 레코드 형식
      • 예제: *VB 레코드 형식
      • 예제: *VS 레코드 형식
      • 예제: *VBS 레코드 형식
      • 예제: *U 레코드 형식
    • 참조서
      • 테이프 파일 CL 명령
        • 테이프 구성 설명 명령
        • 테이프 장치 파일 명령
        • 테이프 지원 명령
        • 가상 테이프 지원 명령
      • 피드백 영역 배치
        • 열기 피드백 영역
          • 장치 정의 리스트
          • 볼륨 레이블 필드
            • IBM 표준 볼륨 레이블(VOL1)
            • IBM 표준 데이터 세트 레이블 1(HDR1/EOV1/EOF1)
            • IBM 표준 데이터 세트 레이블 2(HDR2/EOV2/EOF2)
            • IBM 표준 사용자 레이블(UHL1-UHL8 또는 UTL1-UTL8)
            • 기타 IBM 표준 레이블
            • ISO/ANSI 표준 볼륨 레이블(VOL1)
            • ISO/ANSI 표준 데이터 세트 레이블 1(HDR1/EOV1/EOF1)
            • ISO/ANSI 표준 데이터 세트 레이블 2 (HDR2/EOV2/EOF2)
            • ISO/ANSI 표준 사용자 레이블(UHL 및 UTL)
            • 기타 ISO/ANSI 레이블
        • I/O 피드백 영역
          • 공통 I/O 피드백 영역
    • 테이프 파일 문제해결
    • 테이프 파일 관련 정보
• IBM i 및 관련 소프트웨어
  • IBM i client partition considerations
    • PDF file for IBM i client partition considerations
    • Setting up IBM i client logical partitions
    • Backing up and restoring IBM i partitions on a blade server
    • Considerations and limitations for IBM i client partitions managed by the Integrated Virtualization Manager
      • CL commands
      • IBM Universal Manageability Enablement for i
  • Installing, upgrading, or deleting IBM i and related software
    • What's new for IBM i 7.4
    • PDF file for Installing, upgrading, or deleting IBM i and related software
    • Fast path for software installation, upgrade, and deletion tasks
    • Concepts for software installation
      • Software installation process
      • Types of software installation devices
      • Contents of a software order
        • Software licensing documents
        • Media distribution set
        • Individual product documentation
      • Skipping a release
      • Performance data collection
      • Mixed-release environment
      • Software upgrade or replacement
        • Releases supported and system model information for IBM i upgrades
        • Installation and IBM-supplied objects
        • Compressed objects and storage space
        • Files that the system deletes during installation
      • Globalization and IBM i software installation
        • Considerations for changing a primary language
        • Considerations for installing additional secondary languages
    • Checklist: IBM i software upgrade or replacement readiness
    • Upgrading or replacing IBM i and related software
      • Preparing to upgrade or replace IBM i software
        • Verifying the contents of your software order
          • Identifying and reviewing information resources
          • Verifying the correct optical distribution media
          • Verifying license keys for keyed products
        • Preparing the system for IBM i software upgrade or replacement
          • Reviewing software PTF (fix) requirements
            • Finding the latest PSP information
            • Analyzing fixes you currently have on your system
            • Permanently applying program temporary fixes (PTFs)
            • Adding fix support for currently installed licensed programs
          • Working with critical system values before you install software
            • Recording and printing all system values before you install software
            • Changing certain system values (QSYSLIBL, QUSRLIBL, QALWOBJRST, or QVFYOBJRST)
            • Optionally changing the scan control system value
            • Setting the Year offset value
          • Verifying the integrity of user-modified system objects
            • Verifying user profiles and checking cross-reference files
            • Checking the QSECOFR user profile
            • Ensuring that the IBM-supplied product libraries are in the system ASP
          • Ensuring two-phase commit integrity
          • Minimizing software installation time
          • Gathering performance data for benchmark
            • Gathering performance data with Collection Services
            • Analyzing performance data
        • Performing initial upgrade or replacement tasks
          • Choosing a software installation method and device
          • Preparing for globalization
          • Preparing the upgrade device and media
            • Preparing to upgrade or replace software using an image catalog
              • Determining storage requirements for image catalog installation
              • Freeing up space on the load-source disk unit for an image catalog
              • Preparing an optical image catalog to install software
              • Preparing a tape image catalog to install software
            • Preparing to upgrade or replace software using optical container media
            • Preparing to upgrade or replace software with virtual optical storage using the Network File System
              • Requirements for virtual optical storage within a Network File System network
              • Setting up the server to share virtual optical image files with the client system for installation and upgrade
              • Configure a service tools server for DST for the virtual optical device to use
              • Setting up the virtual optical device on the client system for installing IBM i
              • Using images on the client systemi
          • Required: Creating a custom list of software to install
            • Preselecting the licensed programs to install
            • Adding additional licensed programs to the installation list
          • Required: Accepting software agreements
          • Ensuring the system meets disk storage requirements for upgrades
            • Determining storage space required for a software upgrade
            • Cleaning up disk storage space
              • Deleting licensed programs during cleanup
              • Cleaning up user profiles
          • Required: Allocating additional space for Licensed Internal Code
          • Choosing disk configuration
          • Estimating upgrade or replacement time
          • Preparing your console for software installation
        • Saving the system
        • Optional: Running the IBM Pre-Upgrade Verification tool
      • Upgrading or replacing software using automatic installation
        • Before you begin automatic installation
        • Replacing software using the automatic installation method
        • Verifying completion of automatic installation
      • Upgrading or replacing software using manual installation
        • Before you begin manual installation
        • Replacing the Licensed Internal Code
        • Replacing the IBM i operating system
        • Replacing the licensed programs
        • Verifying completion of manual installation
      • Checklist: Completing the IBM i upgrade or replacement
    • Replacing Licensed Internal Code and IBM i of the same version and release
      • Checklist: IBM i software replacement
      • Obtaining a record of PTFs applied
      • Permanently applying LIC PTFs for a replacement of the same release
      • Determining storage space required for a replacement of the same release
      • Replacing software of the same release using manual installation
      • Installing PTFs for the Licensed Internal Code and the operating system
      • Checklist: Completing the replacement of the same IBM i release
    • Checklist: IBM i software installation readiness
    • Installing IBM i and related software on a new system or logical partition
      • Preparing to install the IBM i release
        • Verifying the contents of your software order
          • Identifying and reviewing information resources
          • Verifying the correct optical distribution media
          • Verifying license keys for keyed products
        • Performing initial installation tasks
          • Ensuring you have the latest information
          • Determining disk storage space required for a new installation
          • Estimating installation time
          • Preparing your console for software installation
          • Preparing the installation device and media
      • Installing the IBM i release
        • Installing Licensed Internal Code on a new logical partition
          • Before you begin to install Licensed Internal Code on a logical partition
          • Installing Licensed Internal Code on the new logical partition
        • Installing software on a new system or logical partition (without IBM i installed)
          • Before you begin to install software on a new system or logical partition
          • Installing IBM i on a new system or logical partition
        • Installing software on a new system (with IBM i installed)
          • Before you begin to install software on a new system
          • Performing the initial program load (IPL)
      • Installing additional licensed programs
        • Before you begin to install additional licensed programs
        • Using the Work with Licensed Programs menu to install IBM licensed programs
        • Using the Restore Licensed Programs command to install IBM or non-IBM licensed programs
      • Installing a secondary language
        • Before you begin to install a secondary language
        • Installing secondary languages for IBM licensed programs
        • Installing secondary languages for non-IBM licensed programs
      • Checklist: Completing the IBM i installation
    • Changing the primary language of your system or logical partition
      • Before you begin to change the primary language
      • Changing the primary language
      • Installing the licensed programs after changing the primary language
    • Deleting software related to IBM i
      • Determining what unused parts of products to delete
      • Considerations for deleting licensed programs
      • Deleting licensed programs
    • Troubleshooting software installation problems
      • Where to begin recovery
      • Image catalog recovery
      • Operations Console recovery
      • Starting point for automatic installation recovery
      • Licensed Internal Code recovery
      • Operating system recovery
      • Licensed programs, PTFs, and secondary language recovery
      • Starting the automatic installation process again
      • Starting the manual installation process again
      • Initialize System (INZSYS) recovery
      • Disk configuration warning and error messages
      • Starting from a power-off condition
      • Reference codes for IBM i software installation
        • Common reference codes for IBM i software installation
        • IBM i installation recovery after using reference codes
    • IBM i software reference
      • Licensed program releases and sizes
      • Estimates for IBM i software installation time
        • Common methods of estimating IBM i installation time
        • Conditions that affect IBM i installation time
        • IBM i installation processes
        • Checklist: Estimating IBM i installation time
          • Times for installing licensed programs
          • Data protection mechanisms
      • Interactive calculation of total licensed program installation time
      • Installation devices and media
        • Optical media
        • Tape or tape libraries
        • Non-IBM tape device
        • Virtual optical storage using the Network File System
        • Image catalog for a virtual device
        • Using an alternate installation device
          • Alternate installation device: Overview
          • Setting up an alternate installation device
          • Disabling an alternate installation device
          • Verifying and selecting an alternate installation device during a manual installation
      • IBM i release interoperability
      • Installation notes about the IBM i release
      • Media labels and their contents
      • Feature codes for language version
      • Blank displays
      • System password
      • Installed status values
      • Options on the Prepare for Install menu
      • Options on Work with Licensed Programs menu
        • Manual installation Option 1. Install all
        • Automatic installation options
        • Options for displaying, installing, deleting, and saving from a list
          • Option 10. Display installed licensed programs
          • Option 11. Install licensed programs
          • Option 12. Delete licensed programs
          • Option 13. Save licensed programs
        • Options for secondary languages
          • Option 20. Display secondary languages
          • Option 21. Install secondary languages
          • Option 22. Delete secondary languages
        • Completion status
        • Commands related to the Work with Licensed Programs menu
  • Related information for Installing, upgrading, or deleting IBM i and related software
  • IBM i 및 관련 소프트웨어 유지보수 및 관리
    • IBM i 7.3의 새로운 사항
    • IBM i 및 관련 소프트웨어 유지보수 및 관리에 대한 PDF 파일
    • 소프트웨어 수정사항 사용
      • 수정사항 개념 및 용어
        • 수정사항 유형
          • 단일 수정사항
          • 누적 PTF 패키지
          • 그룹
          • 서비스 팩
        • 겉표지
          • 샘플 수정사항 겉표지와 필드 설명
        • 저장 파일
        • 상태 정보
          • IBM Navigator for i를 사용하여 상태 설명 확인
          • 명령 인터페이스를 사용하여 상태 설명 확인
          • 주문 상태
        • 수정사항에 대한 정보를 찾는 위치
          • 요약 리스트
          • 상호 참조 요약 리스트
          • 예방 서비스 계획 정보
            • 예방 서비스 계획 정보 확보
            • PSP 정보의 컨텐츠
          • APAR
      • 수정사항 관리 전략 계획
      • 사용할 인터페이스 판별
      • 수정사항 주문
        • 인터넷을 사용하여 수정사항 주문
        • SNDPTFORD 명령을 사용하여 수정사항 주문
        • PTF 그룹 자동 주문
      • 수정사항 설치
        • 1단계: 수정사항 설치 전에 수정사항 겉표지 검토
        • 2단계: 수정사항을 설치할 시스템 준비
          • 수정사항 설치 전에 기억장치 영역 판별
        • 3단계: 수정사항 설치 시나리오 선택
          • 누적 PTF 패키지 설치
          • 저장 파일로 수신한 수정사항 설치
          • 매체에서 수정사항 설치
          • IBM Navigator for i를 사용하여 복수 시스템에 수정사항 분배
            • 수정사항 송신 및 설치
            • 수정사항 비교 및 갱신
          • System i Navigator의 중앙 관리 기능
            • 매체에서 수정사항 복사
            • 소프트웨어 제품에 대한 수정사항 지원 추가
          • 논리 파티션이 있는 시스템에 수정사항 설치
          • 하드웨어 관리 콘솔에서 관리되는 시스템에 수정사항 설치
          • 이미지 카탈로그에서 IBM i 수정사항 설치
        • 4단계: 수정사항 설치 완료
        • 5단계: 수정사항 설치 확인
        • 수정사항 설치를 위한 확장 프로시저
          • 사용자 정의 수정사항 패키지 빌드
          • 가상 이미지 수정사항 패키지 빌드
          • 수정사항 로드
          • 수정사항 적용
            • 수정사항 적용 취소
            • 무인 IPL 중 수정사항 적용
            • 유인 IPL 중 수정사항 적용
            • IPL 없이 수정사항 적용
            • 다음 무인 IPL 시 수정사항 적용
            • IPL 없이 라이센스가 있는 내부 코드 수정사항 적용
      • 시스템에서 수정사항 정보 표시
        • IBM Navigator for i를 사용하여 수정사항 상태 표시
        • 문자 기반 인터페이스를 사용하여 PTF 정보 표시
        • 수정사항 등록정보 표시
        • 수정사항 레벨 표시
        • PTF 적용 정보 표시
      • 수정사항 겉표지에 대한 작업
        • 수정사항 겉표지 주문
        • 매체에서 수정사항 겉표지 복사
        • 수정사항 겉표지 표시 및 인쇄
      • 수정사항 클린업
      • 소프트웨어 수정사항 제거
        • 라이센스가 있는 프로그램 수정사항 제거
        • IBM i 수정사항 제거
        • 라이센스가 있는 내부 코드 수정사항 제거
      • 수정사항 감사
    • 소프트웨어 계약 및 라이센스에 대한 작업
      • IBM i Application Server 라이센스 부여
      • 사용자 자격을 제공하는 IBM 시스템 모델의 IBM i 라이센스 부여
      • 소프트웨어 계약 및 라이센스 부여 개념
        • 소프트웨어 계약
        • 소프트웨어 라이센스 키
      • 소프트웨어 라이센스 부여 계획
        • 키 세트에 없는 제품에 대한 사용 한계 판별
        • 프로세서별로 가격이 책정된 제품에 대한 사용 한계 판별
        • 작업부하 그룹을 사용하여 사용 한계 설정
          • 시나리오: 작업부하 그룹을 사용하여 소프트웨어 라이센스 부여
          • 작업부하 그룹으로 소프트웨어 라이센스 부여 설정
          • 작업부하 그룹 라이센스가 있는 프로그램 정보 검색
          • 작업부하 그룹 및 라이센스가 있는 프로그램 정보 감사
      • 소프트웨어 계약 및 라이센스 키 관리
        • 소프트웨어 계약 승인
        • 소프트웨어 계약 표시 또는 인쇄
        • 소유권 전송을 위한 소프트웨어 계약 준비
        • 소프트웨어 라이센스 정보 표시 및 변경
          • 라이센스 키 정보 추가
          • 사용 한계 설정
        • 소프트웨어 라이센스 키 분배
    • 소프트웨어 명세 관리
    • 소프트웨어 제품 빌드 및 관리
      • 사용자 고유의 소프트웨어 제품 패키징 및 송신
      • 중앙 관리를 사용하여 설치된 제품에 대한 수정사항 생성
      • 소유 제품에 대한 소프트웨어 계약 생성
      • 자체 제품에 대한 라이센스 키 생성
    • IBM i 및 관련 소프트웨어 유지보수 및 관리에 대한 관련 정보
  • Distributing software
    • PDF file for Distributing software
    • Planning to distribute software
    • Distributing software using System i Navigator
      • Sending IBM software products using System i Navigator
      • Packaging and sending your own software products using System i Navigator
    • Distributing software using central site distribution
      • Central site distribution concepts
        • Overview of tasks to distribute software using central site distribution
        • Central site distribution of software license information
        • Types of distribution media for central site distribution
        • Installation profiles for central site distribution
        • Benefits of using automatic installation and installation profiles to install distribution media
        • Installation methods for the target systems
        • Licensed program compression and decompression for central site distribution
        • Distribution of primary languages and secondary languages
        • Distribution of program temporary fixes (PTFs)
      • Checklist: Preparing to distribute software by using central site distribution
        • Preparing software license information for central site distribution
        • Distributing software license information using System i Navigator or paper
        • Optional: Writing a user-defined installation program for the target systems
        • Optional: Preparing the central system for virtual optical images
        • Optional: Preparing the central system for virtual tape images
      • Checklist: Creating central site distribution media
        • Duplicating and distributing tape or DVD distribution media
        • Optional: Duplicating virtual images to physical media
        • Optional: Duplicating DVD media to virtual images
        • Optional: Distributing virtual images
      • Checklist: Installing central site distribution media on the target system
        • Optional: Preparing the target system for virtual images
        • Installation tasks for the target systems
        • Optional tasks to complete after installation
    • Distributing additional licensed programs or fixes by using the Network File System
    • Distributing software reference
      • Central site distribution media contents
      • Determining licensed programs installed in a secondary language
      • Cover sheet for central site distribution media
    • Troubleshooting software distribution
    • Related information for Distributing software
  • Data migrations
    • What's new for IBM i 7.4
    • PDF file for Data migrations
    • Data migration concepts
    • Planning the IBM i migration
      • Planning your hardware for data migration
      • Planning your software for IBM i data migration
      • Planning for your IBM i console connection
      • Recording an IBM i data migration plan
    • Performing the migration
      • Preparing for the migration with IBM i 7.4 on the source system
      • Completing the migration with IBM i 7.4 on the source system
      • Preparing for the migration from a IBM i model that does not support IBM i 7.4
      • Completing the migration from a IBM i model that does not support IBM i 7.4
      • Fixing hardware resource names after a data migration
    • Scenarios: Data migration
    • Troubleshooting the data migration
    • Related information for IBM i data migration
• 네크워킹
  • i용 IBM HTTP Server
  • 네트워크 계획 작업용지
  • 네트워크 시나리오
  • 네트워크 통신
    • Getting started with IBM i communications
      • PDF file for Getting started with IBM i communications
      • Networking concepts
        • Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking
        • Advanced Program-to-Program Communication
        • Dependent logical unit requester
        • High-Performance Routing
        • Systems Network Architecture
        • TCP/IP
      • Configuring your IBM i server for communications
        • Creating a line description
      • Optimizing communications performance
        • Improving wide area network performance
          • Adjusting WAN protocols for optimum communications performance
          • Adjusting the WAN line speed for optimum communications performance
          • WAN configuration considerations for IOAs
        • Improving local area network performance
          • Adjusting LANs for optimum communications performance
          • Adjusting LAN lines for optimum communications performance
        • Improving data path performance
          • Considerations for subsystem configuration for error recovery performance
          • Communications performance considerations for interactive jobs
          • Communications performance considerations for batch jobs
          • Considerations for mixing interactive and batch jobs on a WAN line
          • Configuring Enterprise Extender communications for the IBM i system
          • Migrating from AnyNet to Enterprise Extender
            • Migrating a system that can start AnyNet connections
            • Migrating a system that cannot start AnyNet connections
          • Subsystems
      • Communications applications
        • User-written APPC applications
        • Distributed data management
        • Application programming interface performance considerations
          • Performance considerations for intersystem communications function
          • Performance considerations for Common Programming Interface Communications
      • Communicating with a host system
        • Matching IBM i system parameters for a host system
          • Matching IBM i system line description parameters for a host system
          • Matching IBM i system controller description parameters for a host system
          • Matching IBM i system device description parameters for a host system
          • Matching IBM i system mode and class-of-service description parameters for a host system
        • Configuring dependent logical unit requester
          • Configuring the host controller description
          • Configuring the device descriptions
          • Example: Enterprise Extender Configuration between IBM i and Host (VTAM)
      • Communicating with a remote IBM i server
        • Matching IBM i system line description parameters for a remote IBM i system
        • Matching IBM i system controller description parameters for a remote IBM i system
        • Matching IBM i system device description parameters for a remote IBM i system
        • Examples: Connecting one IBM i server to another IBM i server
          • Example: IBM i server to IBM i server using Enterprise Extender (HPRIP)
      • Common networking standards
        • Local area network standards
          • Ethernet networks
        • Wide area network standards
          • Asynchronous communications
          • Binary synchronous communications
      • Troubleshooting communications problems
        • Displaying message queues to solve communication problems
        • Displaying the Product Activity Log to solve communication problems
        • Displaying the Print Error Log to solve communication problems
          • Job logs and communication problems
        • Using communications trace to solve communication problems
          • Communications trace and communication problems
          • Trace CPI Communications (TRCCPIC) command
        • Using the system problem log to solve communication problems
        • Using the status information to solve communication problems
        • Using reason codes to solve communication problems
        • Considerations for system tuning during error recovery
        • Using error messages to aid in error recovery
      • Reference information
        • Example details: IBM i server to IBM i server connection using Enterprise Extender (HPRIP)
    • APPC, APPN, and HPR
      • PDF file for APPC, APPN, and HPR
      • Planning APPN and HPR network
        • Considerations in selecting APPC networking protocol
        • Considerations in designing an APPN and HPR network
      • Configuring APPC, APPN, and HPR
        • Manual configuration for APPN and HPR
          • Changing network attributes
          • Creating controller descriptions for APPC connections
            • Configure Enterprise Extender to perform switched line disconnect
          • Creating device descriptions for APPC connections
          • Creating APPN location lists
          • Creating mode descriptions
          • Creating class-of-service descriptions
        • Configuring Branch Extender support
        • Configuration considerations used to optimize error recovery performance
          • Considerations for the ONLINE parameter that can affect error recovery
          • Considerations for communications-related system values
          • Considerations for network attributes that can affect APPC error recovery
          • Considerations for line configuration settings that can affect error recovery
            • Considerations for the automatic deletion of APPC device descriptions
            • Link-level timers and retries
          • Considerations for controller configuration descriptions that can affect error recovery
            • Considerations for automatic delete device (AUTODLTDEV) parameter for error recovery
            • Considerations for the INLCNN parameter that can affect error recovery
            • Considerations for the MINSWTSTS parameter that can affect error recovery
            • APPC controller recovery summary
            • Considerations for disconnect timer (DSCTMR) parameter for error recovery
          • Considerations for modes that can affect error recovery
          • Considerations for jobs that can affect error recovery
            • Considerations for the CMNRCYLMT parameter that can affect error recovery
            • Considerations for prestart job entries that can affect APPC error recovery
            • Considerations for job logs that can affect communications error recovery
            • The Change System Job (CHGSYSJOB) command
        • Configuring APPC with VTAM
      • Examples: APPC, APPN, and HPR configuration
        • Examples: APPN configuration
          • Example: Two systems as end nodes using APPN
            • Configuring system A (New York) as an end node
            • Configuring system B (Los Angeles) as an end node
          • Example: Three systems using APPN
            • Configuring system A (New York)
            • Configuring system B (Los Angeles)
            • Configuring system C (Chicago)
          • Example: Two APPN networks with different network IDs linked together
            • Configuring system A (New York)
            • Configuring system B (Detroit)
            • Configuring system NN1 (Chicago)
            • Configuring NN2 (Minneapolis)
      • Optimizing APPN and HPR communication performance
        • Performance considerations for APPN and HPR
        • Communications optimization using high-performance routing
        • Communications optimization using APPN virtual controllers
        • Configuration parameters for fine-tuning APPC performance
          • Maximum length request/response unit size (MAXLENRU) parameter
          • Maximum frame size (MAXFRAME) parameter
          • Pacing (INPACING, OUTPACING, MAXINPACING) parameters
          • Transmission priority (TMSPTY) parameter
          • Wait time (QACRETRY and QACINTERVL) data areas
      • APPC, APPN, and HPR security
        • Session-level security for APPN and HPR
        • Protecting your system in an APPN and HPR environment
          • APPN filtering support
          • Creating a session endpoint filter
          • Class of service routing
      • Troubleshooting APPN and HPR
        • Solving remote communication problems using STRPASTHR
        • Solving communication problems using DSPAPPNINF
        • Solving communication problems using WRKAPPNSTS
        • Solving communications problems using communications trace
        • Solving communication problems using session activity
        • Systems Network Architecture sense codes
        • APPN error log data
          • Standard APPN diagnostic data
          • APPN session setup states
          • Optional APPN diagnostic data
            • Search-sent elements
            • Regular Route Selection control vector (RSCV) 46
            • Regular Route Selection control vector (RSCV) 0E
            • Single hop route failure element
            • Ineligible destination network nodes elements
            • Destination node list
            • User class-of-service with inactive transmission groups RSCV
            • Any class-of-service with active transmission groups RSCV
    • Ethernet
      • What's new for IBM i 7.4
      • PDF file for Ethernet
      • Ethernet support
        • Ethernet terminology
        • Ethernet capabilities
          • Line speed
          • Duplex mode
          • Ethernet input/output adapters
          • Auto-negotiation
          • Auto-sensing
        • Establishment of a physical connection to your network
        • Hardware requirements for Ethernet
        • LAN IOA addresses
        • Ethernet frame format
        • Types of Ethernet frames sent
        • Maximum Ethernet frame sizes
        • Maximum LAN frame sizes
      • Configuring Ethernet support
        • Configuring TCP/IP over Ethernet
          • Selecting a LAN IOA and creating the Ethernet line description
      • Managing Ethernet support
        • Using existing line descriptions with IBM Navigator for i
          • Changing your line description
          • Assigning your line description to a TCP/IP interface
        • Enabling objects to accept connections
          • Varying on configuration objects
          • Starting the TCP/IP interface
        • Viewing the LAN IOA address
        • Configuration object commands
        • Tuning Ethernet performance
          • Adjusting your LAN-frame size
          • Remote bridges dropping frames
          • Improvement of Gigabit and 10 Gigabit Ethernet performance
      • Troubleshooting Ethernet
        • Viewing QSYSOPR or other message queues
        • Troubleshooting LANs
        • Physical network problems
      • Ethernet Link Aggregation
        • Preparing to Create an Aggregate Line Description
        • Create an Aggregate Line Description
        • Managing an Aggregate Line Description
      • Ethernet Layer-2 Bridging
        • Preparing for Ethernet Layer-2 Bridging
        • Suggested Practices for Ethernet Layer-2 Bridging
        • Configuring Ethernet Layer-2 Bridging
        • Common Ethernet Layer-2 Bridging Errors
        • Managing Ethernet Layer-2 Bridging
      • Related information for Ethernet
    • OptiConnect
      • PDF file for OptiConnect
      • OptiConnect concepts
        • OptiConnect connectivity advantages
        • OptiConnect and IBM i clustering
        • OptiConnect software capabilities
        • How OptiConnect works
        • Virtual OptiConnect
        • OptiConnect software
          • OptiConnect components
          • QSOC subsystem
          • OptiConnect job descriptions
      • Installing OptiConnect
        • Software requirements
        • Hardware requirements
        • Installing OptiConnect software
        • Verifying OptiConnect software installation
        • Activating logical partitions for Virtual OptiConnect
      • Configuring OptiConnect
        • Configuring fast path routing
        • Configuring extended function path routing
        • Customizing OptiConnect
          • Routing SNADS over OptiConnect
          • Initial library list
          • Changing QUSER access authority
          • QYYCDTSU job description
          • QYYCMGR job description
          • OptiConnect performance factors
        • Advanced OptiConnect customization
          • Routing SQL over OptiConnect
          • Routing remote journals over OptiConnect
          • Using the mode table
          • Reloading the mode table
          • Journaling OptiConnect transactions
          • Submitting remote jobs
        • Configuring TCP/IP over OptiConnect
          • Features
          • Defining the OptiConnect TCP/IP interface
          • Configuring the TCP/IP interfaces for OptiConnect
          • OptiConnect and IP forwarding
          • Proxy ARP with OptiConnect
          • Starting the OptiConnect IP interface
          • Ending the OptiConnect IP interface
      • Managing OptiConnect
        • Starting OptiConnect
        • Ending OptiConnect
        • Considerations for starting and ending OptiConnect
        • Getting information about OptiConnect activity
          • Working with active jobs
          • Working with OptiConnect activity
          • Working with hardware resources
          • Displaying hardware resources
      • Troubleshooting OptiConnect
        • Basic troubleshooting procedure
        • Re-establishing system connections when OptiConnect is installed
        • OptiConnect error messages
        • OptiConnect cluster diagnostics
      • Related information
    • 관련 정보
  • 네트워킹 보안
  • TCP/IP setup
    • PDF file for TCP/IP setup
    • Internet Protocol version 6
      • IPv6 overview
      • IPv6 concepts
        • IPv6 address formats
        • IPv6 address types
        • Neighbor discovery
        • Stateless address autoconfiguration
        • Address autoconfiguration with DHCPv6
      • Comparison of IPv4 and IPv6
      • Available IPv6 functions
      • Scenario: Creating an IPv6 local area network
        • Starting the IPv6 stack
        • Configuring IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration
        • Starting IPv6 interface
      • IPv6 troubleshooting
    • Planning TCP/IP setup
      • Gathering TCP/IP configuration information
      • TCP/IP security considerations
    • Installing TCP/IP
    • Configuring TCP/IP
      • Configuring TCP/IP for the first time
        • Step 1: Configuring a line description (Ethernet)
        • Step 2: Turning on IP datagram forwarding
        • Step 3: Configuring an interface
        • Step 4: Configuring a default route
        • Step 5: Defining TCP/IP domain
        • Step 6: Defining a host table
        • Step 7: Starting TCP/IP
        • Step 8: Testing TCP/IP connection
      • Configuring IPv4 DHCP clients
      • Configuring IPv6
        • Planning IPv6 configuration
        • Configuring IPv6 address autoconfiguration
        • Manually creating an IPv6 interface
      • Configuring TCP/IP when the operating system is in restricted state
        • Starting TCP/IP using special parameters
        • Starting a specific TCP/IP interface
        • Verifying the interface
      • Saving and Restoring TCP/IP configuration information
      • IPCONFIG command
    • Customizing TCP/IP
      • Changing TCP/IP general settings
        • Changing TCP/IP domain
        • Customizing host table entries
        • Changing TCP/IP (IPv4 and IPv6) attributes
        • Changing other TCP/IP attributes
      • Customizing IPv4 interfaces
        • Adding IPv4 interfaces
        • Starting IPv4 interfaces
        • Changing IPv4 interfaces
        • Ending IPv4 interfaces
        • Removing IPv4 interfaces
      • Customizing IPv6 interfaces
        • Adding IPv6 interfaces
        • Starting IPv6 interfaces
        • Changing IPv6 interfaces
        • Ending IPv6 interfaces
        • Removing IPv6 interfaces
      • Customizing IPv4 routes
        • Adding IPv4 routes
        • Changing IPv4 routes
        • Removing IPv4 routes
      • Customizing IPv6 routes
        • Adding IPv6 routes
        • Changing IPv6 routes
        • Removing IPv6 routes
    • Ending TCP/IP connections
    • TCP/IP techniques to connect virtual Ethernet to external LANs
      • Proxy Address Resolution Protocol method
        • Step 1: Enabling virtual Ethernet
        • Step 2: Creating Ethernet line descriptions
          • Creating Ethernet line descriptions on models 8xx
          • Creating Ethernet line descriptions on models other than 8xx
        • Step 3: Turning on IP datagram forwarding
        • Step 4: Creating the interface to enable proxy ARP
        • Step 5: Creating virtual TCP/IP interfaces
        • Step 6: Creating a preferred interface list
        • Step 7: Creating the default route
        • Step 8: Verifying network communications
      • Network address translation method
        • Step 1: Enabling virtual Ethernet
        • Step 2: Creating Ethernet line descriptions
          • Creating Ethernet line descriptions on models 8xx
          • Creating Ethernet line descriptions on models other than 8xx
        • Step 3: Turning on IP datagram forwarding
        • Step 4: Creating the interfaces
        • Step 5: Creating packet rules
        • Step 6: Verifying network communications
      • TCP/IP routing method
        • Step 1: Enabling virtual Ethernet
        • Step 2: Creating Ethernet line descriptions
          • Creating Ethernet line descriptions on models 8xx
          • Creating Ethernet line descriptions on models other than 8xx
        • Step 3: Turning on IP datagram forwarding
        • Step 4: Creating the interfaces
      • Advantages of using virtual Ethernet
    • Related information for TCP/IP setup
  • TCP/IP 애플리케이션, 프로토콜 및 서비스
    • BOOTP
      • PDF file for Bootstrap Protocol
      • Configuring the BOOTP server
      • Changing BOOTP attributes
      • Working with the BOOTP table
    • Connecting to the Internet
    • Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
      • PDF file for DHCP
      • DHCP concepts
        • DHCP client/server interaction
        • Leases
        • Relay agents and routers
        • DHCP client support
        • BOOTP
        • Dynamic updates
        • DHCP options lookup
      • Scenarios: DHCP
        • Scenario: Simple DHCP subnet
        • Scenario: Multiple TCP/IP subnets
        • Scenario: DHCP and multihoming
        • Scenario: DNS and DHCP on the same IBM i
        • Scenario: DNS and DHCP on different IBM i models
        • Scenario: PPP and DHCP on a single IBM i
        • Scenario: DHCP and PPP profile on different IBM i models
      • Planning for DHCP
        • Security considerations
        • Network topology considerations
      • Configuring DHCP
        • Configuring the Native DHCP server and BOOTP/DHCP relay agent
          • Configuring or viewing the DHCP server
          • Starting or stopping the DHCP server
          • Configuring the DHCP server to be started automatically
          • Accessing the DHCP server monitor
          • Configuring the BOOTP/DHCP relay agent
          • Starting or stopping the BOOTP/DHCP relay agent
          • Configuring the BOOTP/DHCP relay agent to be started automatically
        • Configuring the DHCP server to use ISC's DHCP 4
          • Using ISC's DHCP 4
          • Considerations for using the ISC DHCP server
          • DHCP failover
        • Configuring clients to use DHCP
          • Enabling DHCP for Windows Me clients
            • Checking the DHCP lease for Windows Me clients
          • Enabling DHCP for Windows 2000 clients
            • Checking the MAC address and DHCP lease
            • Updating DNS A records
          • Enabling DHCP for Windows XP clients
            • Checking the MAC address and DHCP lease
            • Updating DNS A records
        • Configuring DHCP to send dynamic updates to DNS
          • Disabling DNS dynamic updates
      • Managing leased IP addresses
      • Troubleshooting DHCP
        • Gathering detailed DHCP error information
          • Tracing the DHCP server
        • Problem: Clients are not receiving an IP address or their configuration information
        • Problem: Duplicate IP address assignments on the same network
        • Problem: DNS records are not being updated by DHCP
        • Problem: DHCP job log has DNS030B messages with error code 3447
      • Related information for DHCP
    • IBM Tivoli Directory Server for IBM i (LDAP)
      • PDF file for IBM Tivoli Directory Server for IBM i (LDAP)
      • Directory Server concepts
        • Directories
        • Distributed directories
          • Global administration group
        • Distinguished names (DNs)
        • Suffix (naming context)
        • Schema
          • Directory Server schema
          • Common schema support
          • Object classes
          • Attributes
            • Common subschema elements
            • The objectclass attribute
            • The attributetypes attribute
            • The IBMAttributeTypes attribute
            • Matching rules
            • Indexing rules
              • Indexing rules specifications for attributes
            • Attribute syntax
          • Object identifier (OID)
          • The subschema entries
          • The IBMsubschema object class
          • Schema queries
          • Dynamic schema
          • Disallowed schema changes
          • Schema checking
          • iPlanet compatibility
          • Generalized and UTC time
        • Recommended practices for directory structure
        • Publishing
        • Replication
          • Replication overview
          • Replication terminology
          • Multi-threaded replication
          • Replication error table
          • Replication agreements
          • How replication information is stored in the server
          • Security considerations for replication information
          • Replication in a high availability environment
        • Realms and user templates
        • Search parameters
        • National language support (NLS) considerations
        • Language tags
        • LDAP directory referrals
        • Transactions
        • Directory Server security
          • Auditing
          • Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and Transport Layer Security (TLS) with the Directory Server
          • Kerberos authentication with the Directory Server
          • Password encryption
          • Groups and roles
            • Static groups
            • Dynamic groups
            • Nested groups
            • Hybrid groups
            • Determining group membership
            • Group object classes for nested and dynamic groups
            • Group attribute types
            • Roles
          • Administrative access
          • Administrative Roles
          • Proxy authorization
          • Access control lists
            • Filtered access control lists
            • The access control attribute syntax
            • EntryOwner
            • Propagation
            • Access evaluation
            • Subtree replication considerations
            • Example of defining the ACIs and entry owners
            • Example of changing the ACI and entry owner values
            • Example of deleting the ACI and entry owner values
            • Example of retrieving the ACI and entry owner values
          • Ownership of LDAP directory objects
          • Password policy
          • Password policy tips
          • Authentication
          • Denial of service
        • Operating system projected backend
          • User projected directory information tree
          • LDAP operations
          • Administrator and replica bind DNs
          • User projected schema
          • Read access to projected users
        • Directory Server and IBM i journaling support
        • Directory Server and IBM i IASP support
        • Unique attributes
        • Operational attributes
        • Server caches
          • Attribute cache
          • Filter cache
          • Entry cache
          • ACL cache
        • Controls and extended operations
        • Save and restore considerations
      • Getting started with Directory Server
        • Migration considerations
          • Migrating to i 7.2 from 5.4, 6.1 or 7.1
          • Migrating a network of replicating servers
        • Planning your Directory Server
        • Configuring the Directory Server
        • Populating the directory
        • Web administration
          • Setting up Web administration for the first time
          • Web administration tool
        • Directory Server and IBM i Navigator
      • Scenarios
        • Scenario: Setting up a Directory Server
          • Scenario details: Set up the Directory Server
          • Scenario details: Create the directory database
          • Scenario details: Publish the IBM i data to the directory database
          • Scenario details: Enter information into the directory database
          • Scenario details: Test the directory database
        • Scenario: Copying users from an HTTP server validation list to the Directory Server
      • Administering Directory Server
        • General administration tasks
          • Starting the Directory Server
          • Stopping the Directory Server
          • Checking the status of the Directory Server
          • Checking jobs on the Directory Server
          • Managing server connections
          • Managing connection properties
          • Persistent search
          • Enabling event notification
          • Specifying transaction settings
          • Changing the port or IP address
          • Specifying a server for directory referrals
          • Adding and removing Directory Server suffixes
          • Granting administrator access to projected users
          • Enabling language tags
          • Tracking access and changes to the LDAP directory
          • Enabling object auditing for the Directory Server
          • Adjusting search settings
          • Enabling or disabling read access to projected users
          • Publishing information to the Directory Server
          • Importing an LDIF file
          • Exporting an LDIF file
          • Copying users from an HTTP server validation list to the Directory Server
          • Managing instances
        • Administrative group tasks
          • Enabling the administrative group
          • Adding, editing, and removing administrative group members
        • Back-end servers setup tasks
          • Creating a user entry for membership in the global administration group
          • Adding the user entry to the global administration group
        • Search limit group tasks
          • Creating a search limit group
          • Changing a search limit group
          • Copying a search limit group
          • Removing a search limit group
        • Proxy authorization group tasks
          • Creating a proxy authorization group
          • Changing a proxy authorization group
          • Copying a proxy authorization group
          • Removing a proxy authorization group
        • Unique attribute tasks
          • Determining if an attribute can be specified as unique
          • Creating a unique attributes list
          • Removing an entry from the unique attributes list
        • Performance tasks
          • Setting database connections and cache settings
          • Configuring attribute cache
          • Configure group members' cache
          • Configuring transaction settings
        • Replication tasks
          • Creating a master-replica topology
          • Creating a master-forwarder-replica topology
          • Creating a master server (replicated subtree)
          • Creating a new replica server
          • Creating replication credentials
          • Creating a replica server
          • Copying data to the replica
          • Adding supplier information to the new replica
          • Creating a simple topology with peer replication
          • Creating a complex replication topology
          • Creating a complex topology with peer replication
          • Promoting a server to be a peer
          • Setting up a gateway topology
          • Setting up a Partial Replication
          • Changing replication properties
          • Adding supplier information
          • Editing supplier information
          • Removing supplier information
          • Creating replication schedules
          • Creating a daily replication schedule
          • Managing replication queues
          • Modifying lost and found log settings
          • Viewing the lost and found log file
          • Setting up replication over a secure connection
        • Replication topology tasks
          • Viewing the topology
          • Adding a replica
          • Adding a peer-master or gateway server
          • Managing gateway servers
          • Viewing server information
          • Viewing replication schedule
          • Editing an agreement
          • Moving or promoting a server
          • Demoting a master
          • Replicating a subtree
          • Editing a subtree
          • Removing a subtree
          • Quiescing the subtree
          • Editing access control lists
        • Security property tasks
          • Password tasks
            • Setting password policy properties
            • Setting the administration password and lockout policy
            • Setting password lockout properties
            • Setting password validation properties
            • Viewing password policy attributes
            • Overriding password policy attributes
          • Enabling SSL and Transport Layer Security on the Directory Server
          • Enabling Kerberos authentication on the Directory Server
          • Configuring DIGEST-MD5 authentication on the Directory Server
          • Configuring Pass-through authentication on the Directory Server
        • Schema tasks
          • Viewing object classes
          • Adding an object class
          • Editing an object class
          • Copying an object class
          • Deleting an object class
          • Viewing attributes
          • Adding an attribute
          • Editing an attribute
          • Copying an attribute
          • Deleting an attribute
          • Encrypting an Attributes
          • Copying the schema to other servers
        • Directory entry tasks
          • Browsing the directory tree
          • Adding an entry
          • Adding an entry containing attributes with language tags
          • Deleteing an entry
          • Editing an entry
          • Copying an entry
          • Editing access control lists
          • Adding an auxiliary object class
          • Deleting an auxiliary class
          • Changing group membership
          • Searching the directory entries
          • Changing binary attributes
        • User and group tasks
          • User tasks
            • Adding users
            • Finding users within the realm
            • Editing a user's information
            • Copying a user
            • Removing a user
          • Group tasks
            • Adding groups
            • Finding groups within the realm
            • Editing a group's information
            • Copying a group
            • Removing a group
        • Realm and user template tasks
          • Creating a realm
          • Creating a realm administrator
          • Creating a template
          • Adding the template to a realm
          • Creating groups
          • Adding a user to the realm
          • Realm tasks
            • Adding a realm
            • Editing a realm
            • Removing a realm
            • Editing ACLs on the realm
          • Template tasks
            • Adding a user template
            • Editing a template
            • Removing a template
            • Editing ACLs on the template
        • Access control list (ACL) tasks
          • Viewing access rights for a specific effective ACL
          • Viewing effective owners
          • Adding , editing. and removing nonfiltered ACLs
          • Adding , editing. and removing filtered ACLs
          • Adding or removing owners
        • Tombstone - Record deleted entries
          • Enabling Tombstone by command line
          • Enabling Tombstone by WebAdmin
      • Reference
        • Command line utilities
          • ldapmodify and ldapadd
          • ldapdelete
          • ldapexop
          • ldapmodrdn
          • ldapsearch
          • ldapchangepwd
          • ldapcompare
          • ldapdiff
          • Using SSL with the LDAP command line utilities
        • LDAP data interchange format (LDIF)
          • RFC 2849 LDIF input
            • LDIF style examples
          • Modify style LDIF Input
            • Modify style examples
        • Directory Server configuration schema
          • Directory information tree
          • Attributes
        • Object identifiers (OIDs)
        • IBM Tivoli Directory Server equivalence
        • Default configuration for Directory Server
      • Troubleshooting Directory Server
        • Monitoring errors and access with the Directory Server job log
        • Using TRCTCPAPP to help find problems
        • Using the LDAP_OPT_DEBUG option to trace errors
        • GLEnnnn message identifiers
        • Common LDAP client errors
          • ldap_bind: Inappropriate authentication
          • ldap_bind: No such object
          • ldap_search: Timelimit exceeded
          • [Failing LDAP operation]: Cannot contact LDAP server
          • [Failing LDAP operation]: Failed to connect to SSL server
          • [Failing LDAP operation]: Insufficient access
          • [Failing LDAP operation]: Operations error
        • Password policy-related errors
        • Troubleshooting the QGLDCPYVL API
      • Related information
    • Domain Name System
      • What's new for IBM i 7.2
      • PDF file for Domain Name System
      • DNS concepts
        • Understanding zones
        • Understanding DNS queries
        • DNS domain setup
        • Dynamic updates
        • BIND 9 features
        • DNS resource records
        • Mail and MX records
        • DNS Security Extensions (DNSSEC) Introduction
      • Examples: DNS
        • Example: Single DNS server for an intranet
        • Example: Single DNS server with Internet access
        • Example: DNS and DHCP on the same IBM i
        • Example: Splitting DNS over firewall by setting up two DNS servers on the same System i
        • Example: Splitting DNS over firewall by using view
      • Planning for DNS
        • Determining DNS authorities
        • Determining domain structure
        • Planning security measures
      • DNS requirements
        • Determining if DNS is installed
        • Installing DNS
      • Configuring DNS
        • Accessing DNS in IBM Navigator for i
        • Configuring name servers
          • Creating a name server instance
          • Editing DNS server properties
          • Configuring zones on a name server
          • Configuring views on a name server
        • Configuring DNS to receive dynamic updates
        • Configuring DNSSEC
          • Configuring Trusted-keys/Managed-keys
          • Configuring DNSSEC options
          • Signing a primary zone
          • Re-signing a primary zone
          • Un-signing a primary zone
          • Configuring DNSSEC
            • Configuring the allow-update option
            • Configuring the update-policy option
            • Configuring the auto-dnssec option
        • Importing DNS files
          • Record validation
        • Accessing external DNS data
      • Managing DNS
        • Verifying the DNS function is working
        • Managing security keys
          • Managing DNS keys
          • Managing dynamic update keys
        • Making manual updates to a dynamic zone
        • Managing DNSSEC
          • Verifying the DNSSEC function is working
          • Re-signing a zone
          • Key rollover consideration
          • Managing DNSSEC for a dynamic zone
        • Accessing DNS server statistics
          • Accessing server statistics
          • Accessing an active server database
        • Maintaining DNS configuration files
        • Advanced DNS features
          • Starting or stopping DNS servers
          • Changing debug values
      • Troubleshooting DNS
        • Logging DNS server messages
        • Changing DNS debug settings
      • Related information for DNS
    • E-mail
      • What's new for V7R4
      • PDF file for E-mail
      • E-mail concepts
        • SMTP on IBM i
        • POP on IBM i
      • Scenarios: E-mail
        • Scenario: Sending and receiving e-mail locally
        • Scenario: Configuring the QtmsCreateSendEmail API to use S/MIME
      • Planning for e-mail
        • Controlling e-mail access
          • Controlling SMTP access
          • Controlling POP access
        • Preventing e-mail access
          • Preventing SMTP access
            • Preventing SMTP from starting when TCP/IP starts
            • Preventing access to SMTP ports
            • Holding SNADS queues
          • Preventing POP access
            • Preventing POP from starting when TCP/IP starts
            • Preventing access to POP ports
      • Configuring e-mail
        • Accessing e-mail servers with IBM Navigator for i
        • Configuring TCP/IP for e-mail
        • Configuring SMTP and POP servers for e-mail
          • Configuring the SMTP server
            • Enabling SSL between the SMTP server and client on the receiver system
            • Enabling SSL between the SMTP server and client on the sender system
            • Installing the receiver certificate authority on the sender system
          • Configuring the POP server
            • Associating a certificate with the Post Office Protocol server
        • Enrolling e-mail users
        • Starting and stopping e-mail servers
          • Starting the e-mail servers
          • Stopping the e-mail servers
        • Configuring a dial-up mail connection profile
        • Configuring the ISP Dial-up Connection wizard
        • Scheduling batch ISP e-mail jobs
        • Configuring the SMTP server for dial-up mail retrieval
        • Supporting multiple domains
      • Securing e-mail
        • Sending e-mail through a router or firewall or hub
          • Prerequisites for an e-mail router
        • Authenticating e-mail for local and relay
          • Tracking the e-mail sender
        • Restricting the relay of messages
          • Accepting relay messages from POP clients
          • Using relay restriction and connection restriction functions together
        • Restricting connections
        • Filtering e-mail to prevent virus proliferation
      • Sending and receiving e-mail
        • JavaMail
        • Sending spooled files as PDF files
        • Using SNADS to send e-mail
          • Setting up headers to differentiate between recipients
          • Supporting Internet addressing for the SNDDST command
          • Attaching files
        • Using SNADS to receive e-mail
      • Managing e-mail
        • Checking e-mail servers
        • Removing POP e-mail users
        • Preventing large e-mail messages from splitting
        • Receiving delivery status of e-mail
        • Hosting a Domino and SMTP server on the same system
        • Hosting Domino LDAP and Directory Server on the same system
        • Managing SMTP server performance
          • Changing values for the SMTP server
          • Changing values for the SMTP client
          • Selecting a new subsystem for SMTP server jobs
      • Reference information
        • Mail server journal entries
        • SMTP
        • POP
      • Troubleshooting e-mail
        • Determining problems with e-mail
        • Checking component journals
        • Tracking undelivered e-mail
        • Solving problems with the QtmmSendMail API
          • Checking the API call
          • Checking the MIME file
          • Checking mail server framework jobs
      • Related information for E-mail
    • FTP on IBM i
      • What's new for IBM i 7.4
      • PDF file for File Transfer Protocol
      • Scenarios: FTP
        • Scenario: Transferring a file from a remote host
        • Scenario: Securing FTP with SSL
          • Configuration details
            • Creating and operating a local CA on the MyCo system
            • IBM i FTP: Enabling SSL for MyCo's FTP server
            • Exporting a copy of MyCo's local CA certificate to a file
            • Creating an *SYSTEM certificate store on TheirCo's system
            • Importing MyCo's local CA certificate into TheirCo's *SYSTEM certificate store
            • Specifying MyCo's local CA as a trusted CA for TheirCo's FTP client
      • Configuring the FTP server on IBM i
        • Configuring FTP server in System i Navigator
        • Configuring FTP servers for graphical FTP clients and Web tools
          • File and directory entries in IBM i format
          • File and directory entries in UNIX-style format
        • Configuring anonymous FTP
          • Preparing for anonymous FTP
          • Writing exit programs for anonymous FTP
          • Creating an IBM i user profile: ANONYMOUS
          • Creating a public library or directory
          • Installing and registering exit programs
            • Installing exit programs
            • Registering exit programs
      • Securing FTP on IBM i
        • Preventing FTP server access on IBM i
          • Preventing the FTP server from starting automatically on IBM i
          • Preventing access to FTP ports on IBM i
        • Controlling FTP access on IBM i
        • Using SSL to secure the FTP server on IBM i
          • Creating a local CA on IBM i
          • Associating a certificate with the FTP server on IBM i
          • Requiring client authentication for the FTP server
          • Enabling SSL on the FTP server
        • Securing FTP clients with TLS or SSL
        • Securing FTP with Kerberos authentication
        • Managing access using FTP exit programs
        • Managing access using System i Navigator
        • Monitoring incoming FTP users
      • Managing the FTP server
        • Starting and stopping the FTP server
        • Setting the number of available FTP servers
        • Improving FTP server performance with configurable subsystem support
      • Using the FTP client on the IBM i platform
        • Starting and stopping a client session
        • Server timeout considerations
        • Transferring files with FTP
        • Running FTP in unattended mode using a batch job on IBM i
          • Simple example: Batch FTP
          • Complex example: Batch FTP
            • Example: Creating a CL program to start FTP
            • Example: Creating the FTP input file (FTCPDMS)
            • Example: CL program for submitting the FTPBATCH job
            • Example: Checking the FTP output file for errors
          • Example: Network description for batch FTP
      • FTP reference information
        • FTP server subcommands on i5/OS
        • FTP client subcommands on IBM i
        • FTP exit programs
          • Request validation exit point: client and server
            • Example: FTP client or server Request Validation exit program in CL code
            • Example: FTP Server Request Validation exit program in ILE RPG code
            • VLRQ0100 exit point format
              • VLRQ0100 exit point format usage notes
          • FTP server logon exit point
            • Example: FTP Server Logon exit program in CL code
            • Example: FTP Server Logon exit program in C code
            • Example: FTP Server Logon exit program in ILE RPG code
            • TCPL0100 exit point format
              • TCPL0100 format usage notes
            • TCPL0200 exit point format
            • TCPL0300 exit point format
          • Removing exit programs
        • Data transfer methods
          • Transferring files that contain packed decimal data between IBM i platforms
          • Transferring *SAVF files
          • Transferring QDLS documents
          • Transferring root, QOpenSys, QDLS, and QOPT files
          • Transferring files using QfileSvr.400
          • Transferring QSYS.LIB files
            • Receiving text files to QSYS.LIB
          • Considerations for creating files before transferring them into QSYS.LIB
          • CCSID conversions
            • Specifying mapping tables
            • CCSID code page tagging for IBM i files
            • NLS considerations for FTP
        • File systems and naming conventions
        • IBM i file systems that are supported by FTP
        • Status messages from the FTP server
        • FTP server syntax conventions
        • FTP client syntax conventions
          • Enclosing subcommand parameters
          • File names for client-transfer subcommands
          • Naming files for transfer
      • Troubleshooting File Transfer Protocol
        • Determining problems with FTP
        • Materials required for reporting FTP problems
        • Tracing the FTP server
        • Tracing the FTP client
        • Working with FTP server jobs and job log
    • IP 필터링 및 네트워크 주소 변환
    • IBM i NetServer
      • PDF file for IBM i NetServer
      • IBM i NetServer versus IBM i Access for Windows
      • Accessing IBM i NetServer with Linux and Samba client support
      • Getting started
        • Requirements
        • Configuring IBM i NetServer
        • Configuring and connecting your PC client
          • IBM i NetServer User Datagram Protocol broadcasts
          • IBM i NetServer and Domain Name System management
            • Connecting your PC client with DNS
            • Configuring your PC client with DNS
          • IBM i NetServer and Windows Internet Naming Service management
            • Connecting your PC client with WINS
            • Configuring your PC client with WINS
              • Configuring your PC client with WINS on Windows 7
              • Configuring your PC client with WINS on Windows 10
            • Configuring IBM i NetServer with the address of the network WINS server
          • PC client LMHOSTS static configuration files
        • Finding IBM i NetServer on the network
      • Administering IBM i NetServer
        • Viewing and configuring IBM i NetServer properties
        • Enabling IBM i NetServer support for Kerberos V5 authentication
          • Starting IBM i NetServer Configuration wizard
          • Additional configuration requirements for Kerberos V5 authentication enablement
        • Changing the IBM i NetServer server name
        • Disabled user profiles
          • Displaying disabled user profiles
          • Enabling a disabled user profile
        • Starting and stopping IBM i NetServer
        • Administering subsystems for IBM i NetServer
        • Setting the guest user profile for IBM i NetServer
        • Viewing IBM i NetServer status
        • Viewing a list of IBM i NetServer shared objects
          • Viewing a list of IBM i NetServer shared objects using System i Navigator
          • Viewing a list of IBM i NetServer shared objects using Windows clients
        • Viewing and configuring IBM i NetServer shared object properties
        • Viewing shared object status
        • Viewing a list of IBM i NetServer sessions
        • Viewing IBM i NetServer session properties
        • Viewing IBM i NetServer session connection status
        • Stopping an IBM i NetServer session
      • File shares
        • Creating IBM i NetServer file shares
        • Controlling access to IBM i NetServer file shares
        • Stopping IBM i NetServer file sharing
        • Accessing file shares from a Windows client
      • Print shares
        • Creating a print share
        • PC client print device drivers for use with print shares
        • Stopping print sharing
        • Using print shares with Windows client
      • IBM i NetServer security
        • User profile authority requirements
        • Guest user profiles
        • Hiding IBM i NetServer from the network
        • Requiring clients to sign requests
      • Using Windows messenger service with IBM i NetServer
        • Configuring the clients
          • Configuring clients on Windows 2000 and Windows XP
          • Configuring clients on Windows Server 2003
          • Configuring clients on Linux
        • Enabling IBM i NetServer for messaging specific to Windows
        • Associated IBM i messages
        • Displaying a log of the message send attempts
        • Sending custom messages through IBM i NetServer
      • Tips and techniques
        • IBM i NetServer does not appear in Windows My Network Places
        • IBM i NetServer fails to start
        • Starting IBM i NetServer at initial program load
        • IBM i NetServer security: Guest versus nonguest
      • API guides
      • Backup and recovery of configuration and share information
      • Troubleshooting IBM i NetServer
        • Troubleshooting user profile connections
        • Troubleshooting file share directory paths
        • Troubleshooting print share problems
        • Troubleshooting print problems when using guest support
        • Troubleshooting PC client connection problems
        • Troubleshooting file share problems
        • Troubleshooting print device driver problems
        • Troubleshooting IBM i NetServer using the QSYSOPR message queue
        • Troubleshooting IBM i NetServer location on the network
        • Troubleshooting IBM i NetServer using Windows messenger service
    • INETD
      • PDF file for INETD
      • Overview of INETD server
      • Configuring the INETD server
    • OMPROUTED RIP and RIPng support
      • What's new for IBM i 7.1
      • PDF file for OMPROUTED RIP and RIPng support
      • OMPROUTED RIP and RIPng concepts
        • RIP interfaces
        • Point-to-point links for RIP
        • Send only
        • Default routes
        • RIP accepted routes
        • RIP filters
        • Ignored RIP neighbors
      • OMPROUTED RIP and RIPng support tasks
        • Enabling TCP/IP for RIP and RIPng on IBM i
        • Configuring IBM i for RIP and RIPng networking
      • OMPROUTED RIP and RIPng commands
    • Open Shortest Path First support
      • What's new for IBM i 7.1
      • PDF file for Open Shortest Path First support
      • Open Shortest Path First support concepts
        • OSPF routing domain and areas
        • OSPF area aggregation
        • Link-state advertisements
        • Aging of link-state records
        • Packet types for OSPF
        • OSPF for IPv6
        • OSPF interfaces
        • Point-to-point links for OSPF
        • i5/OS OSPF Authentication
        • Enabling of i5/OS OSPF job tracing
      • Open Shortest Path First support tasks
        • Configuring i5/OS for OSPF networking
        • Enabling TCP/IP for OSPF on i5/OS
      • Open Shortest Path First support reference
        • Open Shortest Path First API and commands
        • Scenarios: Configuring OSPF
          • Scenario: Configuring OSPF interfaces and neighbors
          • Scenario: OSPF multipath routes
          • Scenario: Retrieve OSPF State Information API
    • i용 IBM HTTP Server
    • 서비스 품질
      • IBM i 7.3의 새로운 사항
      • 서비스 품질의 PDF 파일
      • 개념
        • 차별화된 서비스
          • 우선순위가　지정된 클래스: 네트워크 트래픽을 분류하는 방법
          • 우선순위 설정: 클래스를 처리하는 방법
          • 트래픽 조절기
        • 통합 서비스
          • 트래픽 제어 기능
          • 통합 서비스 유형
          • 토큰 버킷 및 대역폭 한계
          • 차별화된 서비스 마크를 사용하는 통합 서비스
        • 인바운드 승인 정책
        • 서비스 클래스
          • 홉당 작동을 할당하기 위해 코드점 사용
          • 평균 연결 속도 및 버스트 한계
        • 서비스 품질 API
          • QoS API 연결 지향 기능 흐름
          • QoS API 연결 없음 기능 흐름
          • QoS sendmsg() API 부가 제품
        • 디렉토리 서버
          • 키워드
          • 식별명
      • 시나리오: 서비스 품질 정책
        • 시나리오: 브라우저 트래픽 제한
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 차별화된 서비스 정책 작성
          • 시나리오 세부사항: QoS 서버 시작 또는 갱신
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 정책이 작동하고 있는지 확인
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 등록정보 변경
        • 시나리오: 안전하고 예측할 수 있는 결과(VPN 및 QoS)
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 호스트 간의 VPN 연결 설정
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 차별화된 서비스 정책 작성
          • 시나리오 세부사항: QoS 서버 시작 또는 갱신
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 정책이 작동하고 있는지 확인
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 등록정보 변경
        • 시나리오: 인바운드 연결 제한
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 인바운드 승인 정책 작성
          • 시나리오 세부사항: QoS 서버 시작 또는 갱신
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 사용자의 정책이 작동하고 있는지 확인
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 등록정보 변경
        • 시나리오: 예측할 수 있는 B2B 트래픽
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 통합 서비스 정책 작성
          • 시나리오 세부사항: QoS 서버 시작 또는 갱신
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 정책이 작동하고 있는지 확인
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 등록정보 변경
        • 시나리오: 전용 전달(IP 텔레포니)
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 통합 서비스 정책 작성
          • 시나리오 세부사항: QoS 서버 시작 또는 갱신
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 정책이 작동하고 있는지 확인
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 등록정보 변경
        • 시나리오: 현재 네트워크 통계 모니터링
          • 시나리오 세부사항: i용 IBM Navigator에서 QoS 열기
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 차별화된 서비스 정책 작성
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 새 서비스 클래스 완료
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 정책 모니터링
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 값 변경
          • 시나리오 세부사항: 정책 다시 모니터링
      • 서비스 품질 계획
        • 권한 요구사항
        • 시스템 요구사항
        • 서비스 레벨 계약
        • 네트워크 하드웨어 및 소프트웨어
      • 서비스 품질 구성
        • 마법사로 QoS 구성
        • 디렉토리 서버 구성
        • QoS 정책 순서
      • 서비스 품질 관리
        • i용 IBM Navigator에서 QoS 도움말 액세스
        • QoS 정책 백업
        • 기존 정책 복사
        • QoS 정책 편집
        • QoS 모니터링
      • 서비스 품질 문제해결
        • QoS 정책 저널링
          • 모니터의 저널 항목 보기
          • 출력 파일을 통해 저널 항목 보기
        • QoS 서버 작업 로깅
        • 시스템 트랜잭션 모니터링
        • TCP 애플리케이션 추적
          • 예: 추적 출력 읽기
      • 서비스 품질 관련 정보
    • Remote Access Services
      • PDF file for Remote Access Services
      • PPP concepts
        • What is PPP
        • Connection profiles
        • Group policy support
      • Scenarios: Remote access using PPP connections
        • Scenario: PPP and DHCP on a single System i
        • Scenario: DHCP and PPP profile on different System i models
        • Scenario: Protecting an L2TP voluntary tunnel with IPSec
        • Scenario: Protecting an L2TP voluntary tunnel with IPSec
          • Configuring VPN on System A
          • Configuring a PPP connection profile and virtual line on System A
          • Applying the l2tptocorp dynamic-key group to the toCorp PPP profile
          • Configuring VPN on System B
          • Configuring a PPP connection profile and virtual line on System B
          • Activating packet rules
        • Scenario: Connecting your system to a PPPoE access concentrator
        • Scenario: Connecting remote dial-in clients to your system
        • Scenario: Connecting your office LAN to the Internet with a modem
        • Scenario: Connecting your corporate and remote networks with a modem
        • Scenario: Authenticating dial-up connections with RADIUS NAS
        • Scenario: Managing remote user access to resources using group policies and IP filtering
        • Scenario: Sharing a modem between logical partitions using L2TP
          • Scenario details: Sharing a modem between logical partitions using L2TP
            • Step 1: Configuring the L2TP terminator profile for any interface on the partition that owns the modems
            • Step 2: Configuring an L2TP originator profile on 10.1.1.74
            • Step 3: Configuring an L2TP remote dial profile for 192.168.1.2
            • Step 4: Testing the connection
        • Scenario: Establishing a dial-up connection with an Ethernet device server
      • Planning PPP
        • Software and hardware requirements
        • Connection alternatives
          • Analog telephone lines
          • L2TP (tunneling) support for PPP connections
            • Voluntary tunnel
            • Compulsory tunnel model - incoming call
            • Compulsory tunnel model - remote dial
            • L2TP multi-hop connection
          • PPPoE (DSL) support for PPP connections
        • Connection equipment
          • Modems
          • Ethernet device servers
        • IP address handling
          • IP packet filtering
          • IP address management strategy
        • System authentication
          • Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol with MD5
          • Extensible Authentication Protocol
          • Password Authentication Protocol
          • Remote Authentication Dial In User Service overview
          • Validation list
        • Bandwidth considerations for multilink
      • Configuring PPP
        • Creating a connection profile
          • Protocol type: PPP or Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP)
          • Mode selections
            • Switched line
            • Leased line
            • L2TP (virtual line)
            • PPPoE line
          • Link configuration
            • Single line
            • Line pool
            • Multiple-connection profile support
              • Remote IP address pools
        • Configuring your modem for PPP
          • Configuring a new modem
          • Setting modem command strings
          • Associating a modem with a line description
        • Configuring a remote PC
        • Configuring Internet access through the AT&T Global Network
        • Connection wizards
        • Configuring a group access policy
        • Applying IP packet filtering rules to a PPP connection
        • Enabling RADIUS and DHCP services for connection profiles
      • Managing PPP
        • Setting properties for PPP connection profiles
        • Monitoring PPP activity
      • Troubleshooting PPP
      • Related information for Remote Access Services
    • REXEC
      • PDF file for REXEC
      • Changing attributes
      • REXEC command considerations
      • Selecting a command processor
      • REXEC connection usage
        • For IBM i CL command processing
        • For Qshell and spawned path command processing
      • Spooled output considerations
      • Client considerations
      • REXEC server jobs and job names
      • Creating REXEC server spooled job logs
      • Exit points for controlling REXEC server
        • Request validation exit point
          • VLRQ0100 exit point format
        • Server logon exit point
          • TCPL0100 exit point format
          • TCPL0300 exit point format
        • Server command processing selection exit point
          • RXCS0100 exit point format
      • Determining problems with REXEC
        • Materials required for reporting REXEC problems
        • Getting a copy of a REXEC server job log
        • Tracing the REXEC server
    • RouteD
      • PDF file for RouteD
      • RouteD configuration commands
      • RouteD attribute commands
      • Work with RouteD Configuration command
      • Scenario: RouteD configuration
      • RIP_INTERFACE statement
        • Supply values
        • DIST_ROUTES_IN
        • Metric
        • Community
        • Additional parameters
          • BLOCK
          • FORWARD
          • Introducing FORWARD.COND
          • NOFORWARD
    • Simple Network Time Protocol
      • What's new for IBM i 7.3
      • PDF file for Simple Network Time Protocol
      • SNTP and NTP concepts
        • SNTP client
        • SNTP server
        • NTP client
      • Scenario: Synchronizing clocks with IBM i
        • Configuring System A as an SNTP or NTP client and an SNTP server
        • Configuring your firewall to allow SNTP and NTP traffic
        • Configuring the SNTP client on other systems in the network
        • Specifying SNTP as your time maintenance application
        • Starting SNTP application manually
      • Configuring SNTP application
      • Troubleshooting SNTP application
        • Logging activity
        • Connection status for NTP client
    • TCP/IP 라우팅 및 작업부하 균형 조절
      • TCP/IP 라우팅 및 작업부하 균형 조절에 대한 PDF 파일
      • 릴리스별 TCP/IP 라우팅 기능
      • 패킷 처리
      • 일반 라우팅 규칙
      • 라우팅 연결 방법
        • 지점간 연결을 사용한 라우팅
        • 프록시 ARP(Address Resolution Protocol) 라우팅
          • 투명한 서브네트
        • 동적 라우팅
          • RIP(Routing Information Protocol)
          • OSPF(Open Shortest Path First)
        • 작동불능 게이트웨이 감지
        • 라우트 바인딩
        • CIDR(Classless Inter-Domain Routing)
        • 가상 IP를 사용한 라우팅
        • 결함 허용
        • 네트워크 주소 변환을 사용한 라우팅
          • 위장(masquerade) NAT
            • 인바운드 위장 NAT 처리(응답 및 기타)
            • 아웃바운드 위장 NAT 처리
          • 동적 NAT
          • 정적 NAT
        • OptiConnect 및 논리 파티션을 사용한 라우팅
          • TCP/IP 및 OptiConnect
          • 가상 OptiConnect 및 논리 파티션을 사용한 라우팅
      • TCP/IP 작업부하 균형 조절 방법
        • DNS 기반 로드 균형 조절
        • 중복 라우트 기반 로드 균형 조절
        • 가상 IP를 사용한 로드 균형 조절
      • 시나리오: 가상 IP 및 프록시 ARP를 사용하는 어댑터 페일오버(failover)
        • 자동 인터페이스 선택을 사용하는 페일오버(failover)
        • 선호하는 인터페이스 목록을 사용하는 페일오버(failover)
        • 기본 라우트를 사용하는 페일오버(failover)
      • TCP/IP 라우팅 및 작업부하 균형 조절 관련 정보
    • Telnet
      • PDF file for Telnet
      • Telnet scenarios
        • Telnet scenario: Telnet server configuration
        • Telnet scenario: Cascaded Telnet sessions
          • System request processing scenarios
          • Using a group job
        • Telnet scenario: Securing Telnet with SSL
          • Configuration details for securing Telnet with SSL
      • Planning for the Telnet server
        • Virtual device descriptions
        • Telnet security
          • Preventing Telnet access
          • Controlling Telnet access
      • Configuring the Telnet server
        • Starting the Telnet server
        • Setting the number of virtual devices
          • Automatically configuring virtual devices
          • Creating your own virtual devices
        • Restricting privileged users to specific devices and limiting sign-on attempts
        • Setting the session keep-alive parameter
        • Setting inactive job timeout used by Telnet
        • Assigning devices to subsystems
        • Activating the QSYSWRK subsystem
        • Creating user profiles
        • IBM i supported emulation types
          • Configuring Telnet server for 5250 full-screen mode
          • Configuring Telnet server for 3270 full-screen mode
            • Supported 3270 terminal types
          • Configuring Telnet server for VTxxx full-screen mode
        • Securing Telnet with SSL
          • Configuring SSL on the Telnet server
            • Removing port restrictions
            • Assigning a certificate to the Telnet server
            • Enabling client authentication for the Telnet server
              • Example: Enabling client authentication for a PC5250 session
            • Enabling SSL on the Telnet server
          • SSL initialization and handshake
      • Managing the Telnet server
        • Configuring Telnet printer sessions
          • Requirements for Telnet printer sessions
            • Telnet server print support to IBM i Access for Windows Telnet client
        • Ending the Telnet server session
        • Ending device manager jobs
        • Using Telnet exit point programs
          • Device initialization exit program
            • Telnet exit point format INIT0100: Required parameter group
            • INIT0100: Format of user description information
            • INIT0100: Format of device description information
            • INIT0100: Format of connection description information
          • Device termination exit program
          • Examples: Telnet exit programs
      • Managing the Telnet client
        • Controlling Telnet server functions from the client
        • 5250 Telnet client sessions
          • Starting a Telnet client session
        • 3270 Telnet client sessions
          • Starting a 3270 Telnet client session
          • 3270 full-screen considerations
          • Using a display station
          • 3270 keyboard mapping for Telnet servers
        • VTxxx Telnet client sessions
          • Starting a VTxxx Telnet client session
          • VTxxx full screen considerations
          • VTxxx emulation options
          • VTxxx key values
            • VTxxx national language support
            • VTxxx national mode
            • Numeric keypad
            • Editing keypad
            • VTxxx key values by 5250 function
            • VT220 workstation operating modes
            • VT220 top-row function keys
            • VT100 and VT220 control character keywords
        • Establishing a cascaded Telnet session
          • Moving between cascaded Telnet sessions
        • Ending a Telnet client session
        • Obtain or renew ticket-granting tickets when Remote user (RMTUSER) *KERBEROS is used
      • Auditing Telnet server connections
      • Troubleshooting the Telnet problems
        • Determining problems with Telnet
          • Pinging your host server
        • Troubleshooting emulation types
        • Troubleshooting your Telnet SSL server
          • Checking system status
          • Checking for an active SSL listener
          • Checking the Telnet job log
        • TRCTCPAPP service program outputs
        • Materials needed to report Telnet problems
        • Automatically generated diagnostic information
      • Related information for Telnet
    • Trivial File Transfer Protocol
      • PDF file for Trivial File Transfer Protocol
      • Configuring TFTP for clients
      • Changing TFTP attributes
      • Server ports and client ports
      • TFTP Transfer Size option
      • TFTP Subnet Broadcast option
        • Client-to-server TFTP Read Request options
        • Server-to-client TFTP option acknowledgment
        • Server-to-client broadcast data packets
      • Exit points for controlling TFTP server
    • User-defined servers
    • VPN(가상 사설망)
    • 관련 정보
  • TCP/IP troubleshooting
    • What's new for IBM i 7.4
    • PDF file for TCP/IP troubleshooting
    • Troubleshooting tools and techniques
      • Tools to verify your network structure
        • Netstat
          • Using Netstat from a character-based interface
            • Using Netstat from a character-based interface: Interfaces
            • Using Netstat from a character-based interface: Routes
            • Using Netstat from a character-based interface: Connections
            • Using Netstat from a character-based interface: TCP/IP Stack Status
          • Using Netstat from IBM Navigator for i
            • Using Netstat from IBM Navigator for i: Interfaces
            • Using Netstat from IBM Navigator for i: Routes
            • Using Netstat from IBM Navigator for i: Connections
        • Ping
          • Using Ping from a character-based interface
            • Pinging the loopback interface on your system
            • Pinging your own system
            • Pinging the interface on a network not directly attached to your local network
          • Using Ping from IBM Navigator for i
            • Pinging the loopback interface on your system
            • Pinging your own system
            • Pinging the interface on a network not directly attached to your local network
          • Common error messages
          • PING parameters
        • Trace route
          • Using trace route from a character-based interface
          • Using trace route from IBM Navigator for i
        • ARP ping
        • ND ping
      • Tools for tracing data and jobs
        • Communications trace
          • Planning a communications trace
          • Performing a communications trace
            • Starting a communications trace
            • Ending a communications trace
            • Dumping a communications trace
            • Printing a communications trace
            • Viewing the contents of a communications trace
            • Reading a communications trace
            • Deleting a communications trace
          • Additional communications trace functions
            • Checking a communications trace
            • Programmatically checking storage space
        • Trace connection
        • Trace TCP/IP application
        • Job trace
          • Starting a job trace
          • Re-creating the problem
          • Ending a job trace
          • Printing a job trace
          • Deleting a job trace
          • Advanced job trace functions
            • Multiple generic traces
            • Trace type information is cumulative
        • Advanced trace function: Watch support
          • Scenarios: Using watch support with traces
            • Scenario: Using watch support with a communications trace
            • Scenario: Using watch support with a job trace
          • Watch parameters
          • Using watch exit programs
            • Example: Watch exit program
            • Example: Modifying the exit program
          • Traces that use watch support
      • Troubleshooting tips
        • Server table
        • Checking jobs, job logs, and message logs
          • Verifying that necessary jobs exist
            • Verifying jobs from a character-based interface
            • Verifying jobs from IBM Navigator for i
          • Checking the job logs for error messages and other indication of problems
            • Checking job logs using the character-based interface
            • Checking job logs using IBM Navigator for i
          • Changing the message logging level on job descriptions and active jobs
            • Changing the message logging level from the character-based interface
            • Changing the message logging level from IBM Navigator for i
          • Other job considerations
        • Checking for active filter rules
        • Verifying system startup considerations for networking
          • Starting subsystems
          • Starting TCP/IP
            • Starting TCP/IP using the character-based interface
            • Ending TCP/IP using IBM Navigator for i
          • Starting interfaces
          • Starting servers
            • Starting servers from a character-based interface
            • Starting servers from IBM Navigator for i
          • Timing considerations
        • Varying on lines, controllers, and devices
        • Verifying the logical partition configuration
          • Verifying the LPAR configuration from a character-based interface
          • Verifying the LPAR configuration from System i Navigator
        • Troubleshooting IPv6–related problems
      • Advanced troubleshooting tools
        • Licensed Internal Code logs
        • Trace Internal (TRCINT) command
        • Product activity log
        • IOP dump
        • Process dump
          • Call stack dump
          • Full job dump
    • Troubleshooting problems related to specific applications
• Performance
  • What's new in IBM i 7.4
  • PDF file for Performance
  • Managing system performance
    • Selecting a Performance Management Strategy
    • Determining when and how to expand your system
    • Comparing performance metrics before and after system changes
    • Tracking performance
    • Researching a performance problem
      • Identifying a performance problem
      • Identifying and resolving common performance problems
      • Collecting system performance data
      • Collecting information about system resource utilization
      • Collecting information about an application's performance
        • Dumping trace data
        • Dumping memory
      • The basics of IBM i Wait Accounting
      • Scenario: Improving system performance after an upgrade or migration
    • Displaying performance data
    • Tuning performance
      • Performing basic system tuning
      • Adjusting performance automatically
      • Determining when to use simultaneous multithreading
    • Electronic business performance
      • Client performance
      • Network performance
      • Java performance in IBM i
      • IBM HTTP Server performance
      • WebSphere performance
  • Applications for performance management
    • Performance data collectors
      • Collection Services
        • How Collection Services works
        • Creating database files from Collection Services data
        • Customizing data collections
          • Collection Services collection profiles
        • Collection Services support for system monitoring
        • Collection Services support for historical data
        • Implementing user-defined categories in Collection Services
          • Collection program recommendations and requirements
          • Example: Implementing user-defined categories
            • Example: Data collection program
            • Example: Program to register the data collection program
            • Example: Program to query the collection object
        • Managing collection objects
        • User-defined transactions
          • C++ example: Integrating user-defined transactions into Collection Services
          • Java example: Integrating user-defined transactions into Collection Services
        • Finding wait statistics for a job, task, or thread
        • Understanding disk consumption by Collection Services
        • Collecting and displaying CPU utilization for all partitions
        • Collecting ARM performance data
        • Short lifespan threads and tasks
      • IBM i Job Watcher
      • IBM i Disk Watcher
      • Performance Explorer
        • Performance Explorer concepts
          • Performance Explorer definitions
          • Performance Explorer database files
          • Performance Explorer reports
        • Configuring Performance Explorer
          • Ending Performance Explorer
    • Viewing and analyzing data
      • IBM Navigator for i
        • IBM Navigator for i Performance interface
          • Performance Data Investigator
            • Investigate Data
              • Working with a Perspective
                • Save Perspective
                • Options
                  • Enable Design Mode
                    • Refresh Perspectives
                • Chart Features
                • Table Features
                • Table and Chart Actions
                  • Export
                  • Modify SQL
                  • Size Next Upgrade
                  • Change Context
                  • Creating and Editing a View
              • Searching for a Perspective: Metric Finder
              • Creating a Custom Package
                • Creating a Folder
                • Creating a Perspective
                  • Data Series
                  • Thresholds
          • Graph History
            • Graph History concepts
            • Configuring historical data for Graph History
            • Creating historical data for Graph History
            • Viewing historical data with Graph History
          • Performance Data Reports
            • Performance report definitions
              • Viewing report definitions
              • Adding a report definition
              • Deleting a report definition
            • Creating a performance data report
          • Manage collections
            • Viewing a collection
            • Copying a collection
            • Deleting a collection
            • Saving a collection
            • Restoring a collection
            • Converting a collection
            • Viewing collection properties
            • Rebuilding the collection table
          • Managing Collection Services
            • Starting Collection Services
            • Stopping Collection Services
            • Configuring Collection Services
              • Creating a Collection Services custom profile
            • Cycling Collection Services
            • Creating database files
            • Displaying Collection Services status
          • Managing IBM i Disk Watcher
            • Starting Disk Watcher
            • Stopping Disk Watcher
            • Adding a Disk Watcher definition
            • Deleting a Disk Watcher definition
            • Displaying the properties of a Disk Watcher definition
          • Managing IBM i Job Watcher
            • Starting Job Watcher
            • Stopping Job Watcher
            • Adding a Job Watcher definition
            • Deleting a Job Watcher definition
            • Displaying the properties of a Job Watcher definition
          • Batch Model
            • Creating a batch model
            • Investigating Batch Model results
            • Changing the calibration of a batch model
            • Calibrating a batch model
            • Changing a batch model
            • Analyzing a batch model
            • Merging batch models
            • Resetting a batch model
        • IBM Navigator for i Monitors
          • Monitor concepts
          • Creating a system monitor
            • Monitor metrics
          • Investigate system monitor data
          • Creating a message monitor
          • Scenarios: IBM Navigator for i monitors
            • Scenario: System monitor
            • Scenario: Message monitor
      • IBM Performance Management for Power Systems (PM for Power Systems) - support for IBM i
        • PM Agent concepts
        • Configuring PM Agent
          • Activating PM Agent
          • Setting up PM Agent transmission of data
            • Sending PM Agent data with Electronic Service Agent
            • Configuring PM Agent network for a single server
            • Configuring PM Agent network for a host server
            • Configuring PM Agent network for a remote server
            • Working with remote servers
            • Working with remote servers in an APPC network
            • Creating a device description for PM Agent
          • Customizing PM Agent
        • Managing PM Agent
          • Start PM Performance Data Transmission
          • Deactivating PM Agent
          • Changing PM Agent contact information
          • Scheduling jobs with PM Agent
          • Omitting items from IBM Performance Management for Power Systems (PM for Power Systems) analysis
          • Stopping PM Agent momentarily
          • Verify Service Agent Connection
          • Viewing PM Agent status
          • Viewing IBM Performance Management for Power Systems (PM for Power Systems) reports
      • IBM Systems Workload Estimator
      • IBM Performance Tools for i
        • Performance Tools concepts
          • Functions provided in IBM Performance Tools for i
          • Manager and Agent feature comparison
          • Reporting CPU utilization
          • Reporting configured capacity
          • 5250 online transaction processing (OLTP)
        • Installing and configuring Performance Tools
        • Performance Tools reports
          • Overview of Performance Tools reports
            • Sample System Report - Workload
            • Sample Component Report - Job Workload Activity
          • Printing the performance reports
          • Performance Report columns
          • Performance Report header
  • Scenarios: Performance
    • Scenario: Improving system performance after an upgrade or migration
    • Scenario: System monitor
    • Scenario: Message monitor
  • Reference information for Performance
    • Collection Services data files
      • Collection Services data files containing time interval data
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMAPPN
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMARMTRT
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMASYN
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMBSC
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMBUS
        • Collection services data files: QAPMBUSINT
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMCIOP
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMDDI
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMDIOP
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMDISK
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMDISKRB
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMDOMINO
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMDPS
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMECL
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMETH
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMETHP
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMFRLY
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMHDLC
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMHTTPB
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMHTTPD
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMIDLC
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMIOPD
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMISUM
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMJOBMI
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMJOBOS
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMJOBS and QAPMJOBL
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMJOBSR
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMJOBWT
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMJOBWTD
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMJOBWTG
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMJSUM
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMJVM
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMLAPD
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMLINK
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMLIOP
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMLPARH
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMMIOP
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMNRG
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMNRGL
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMPOOL and QAPMPOOLL
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMPOOLB
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMPOOLT
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMPPP
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMRESP
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSAP
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSHRMP
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSMCMN
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSMDSK
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSMHTP
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSMJMI
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSMJOS
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSMPOL
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSMSYS
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSNA
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSNADS
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSQLPC
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSTND
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSTNE
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSTNL
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSTNY
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSYS and QAPMSYSL
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSYSCPU
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSYSPRC
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSYSTEM
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSYSVP
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMSYSWLC
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMTAPE
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMTCP
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMTCPIFC
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMUSRTNS
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMWASAPP
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMWASCFG
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMWASEJB
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMWASRSC
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMWASSVR
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMX25
      • Collection Services data files: Field data for configuration database files
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMCONF
        • Collection Services data files: QAPMHDWR
      • Collection Services database files: Field data for trace database files
      • Collection Services data files: System category and file relationships
      • Collection Services data files: Task type extender
    • Historical data files
      • Historical data configuration database files
        • Historical data files: QAPMHCONF
        • Historical data files: QAPMHBKTD
      • Historical data summary database files
        • Historical data files: QAPMHMCMN
        • Historical data files: QAPMHMDSK
        • Historical data files: QAPMHMISUM
        • Historical data files: QAPMHMJMI
        • Historical data files: QAPMHMJOS
        • Historical data files: QAPMHMPOL
        • Historical data files: QAPMHMSQLP
        • Historical data files: QAPMHMSYS
        • Historical data files: QAPMHMSYST
      • Historical data detailed database files
        • Historical data files: QAPMHDCOMM
        • Historical data files: QAPMHDDISK
        • Historical data files: QAPMHDJOBM
        • Historical data files: QAPMHDJOBO
        • Historical data files: QAPMHDPOOL
    • Disk Watcher data files
      • Disk Watcher data files: QAPYDWINTI
      • Disk Watcher data files: QAPYDWOBJR
      • Disk Watcher data files: QAPYDWPGMR
      • Disk Watcher data files: QAPYDWRUNI
      • Disk Watcher data files: QAPYDWSTAT
      • Disk Watcher data files: QAPYDWTDER
      • Disk Watcher data files: QAPYDWTRC
    • Data files: File abbreviations
    • CL commands for performance
    • Performance Management APIs
  • Related information for Performance
• 인쇄
  • Basic printing
    • What's new for IBM i 7.2
    • PDF file for Basic printing
    • Printing concepts
      • Overview
      • Printer file
        • Printer file overview
        • Printer file overrides
      • Spooled files and output queues
        • Spooling overview
        • Spooled file
        • Output queue
        • Multiple output queues
        • Output queue recovery
        • Spooled file cleanup
        • Default output queues
        • Order of spooled files on an output queue
        • Data queue support
          • Record type 01 data queue entry format
          • Record type 02 data queue entry format
          • Record type 03 data queue entry format
        • Spooled file names
        • Spooled file security
        • Output queue security
        • QPRTJOB job
        • Spooled file subsystem
        • Spooled file library
        • Spooled files in independent ASPs
        • Controlling the method of sending spooled files from list panels
      • Printer writer program
      • Printer data streams
        • SNA character string
        • Advanced Function Presentation data stream
        • Intelligent Printer Data Stream
        • American National Standard Code for Information Interchange
      • Printer device description
      • Job description
      • Workstation description
      • User profile
      • System values
      • Controlling printing to output queue or printer
        • Routing process order
        • Routing examples
          • Example 1: Determining your output queue
          • Example 2: Determining your output queue
          • Example 3: Determining your output queue
          • Example 4: Determining your output queue
          • Example 5: Determining your output queue
          • Example 6: Determining your output queue
          • Example 7: Determining your output queue
          • Example 8: Determining your printer name
          • Example 9: Determining your printer name
          • Example 10: Determining your printer name when using batch
          • Example 11: Determining your printer name when using batch
          • Example 12: Determining your printer name when using batch
          • Self-test: Determining output queue and printer device
          • Self-test answers
      • Printer attachment methods
        • TCP/IP-network-attached printers
          • Intelligent Printer Data Stream with Print Services Facility
          • Simple Network Management Protocol
          • Printer Job Language
          • Internet Printing Protocol
          • Line printer requester/line printer daemon
        • PC-attached printers
        • Twinaxial-workstation-controller-attached printers
        • ASCII-workstation-controller-attached printers
        • Lexlink-network-attached printers
        • Printers attached to IBM InfoWindow 3477, 3486, 3487, and 3488 display stations
      • Remote system printing
        • Benefits
        • How remote system printing works
        • User print information
        • Send and defer status
      • Fonts
        • TrueType and OpenType fonts
        • AFP compatibility fonts
          • Font character sets
          • Font global identifiers
          • Code pages
          • Stand-alone code pages
          • Character set and code page combinations
          • Coded fonts
      • Double-byte character set support
        • Special DBCS printer functions
          • Character rotation
          • Character expansion
          • Condensed printing
          • Horizontal and vertical lines
          • Shift-control character printing
        • Double-byte character printing considerations
          • Extended character printing
          • Condensed printing
          • Page width
          • Unprintable double-byte characters
          • Double-byte data in an alphanumeric field
          • Spanned lines
          • Spanned pages
          • Print key use
          • 5553 printer end-of-forms
          • Double-byte data printed on alphanumeric printers
        • DBCS spooled support
        • 3130 printer resident font support
      • Internet Printing Protocol server
      • Network print server
        • Network print server objects
        • How the network print server is accessed
        • Exit points and the network print server
          • Exit point QIBM_QNPS_ENTRY
          • Exit point QIBM_QNPS_SPLF
        • Use of network print server exit points
      • Communications network printing functions
        • 3270 printer emulation
        • Remote job entry printing
        • 3x74-attached printers
        • Distributed data management printing
        • Object distribution printing
      • Host print transform
        • Host print transform advantages
        • How the host print transform function works
        • AFP-to-ASCII transform function
        • Host print transform in raster mode
        • Host print transform and emulator products
      • Image print transform
        • Image print transform overview
        • Image print transform advantages
        • Image configuration objects
        • Convert Image API
        • Conversion of PostScript data streams with image print transform
        • Page size
      • Additional printing considerations
        • Direct print considerations
        • Open considerations
        • Output considerations
        • Close considerations
        • First-character forms-control data considerations
        • Printer font considerations
        • Alternative character sets and code pages for printer output considerations
        • Output field considerations
        • Externally described printer-file record-format considerations
        • Redirecting output considerations
        • 3812 and 3816 SCS printer considerations
        • 3835 printer considerations
        • 3912, 3916, and 4028 printer considerations
        • Special printer file considerations for AFP data stream
        • Special data description specifications considerations for AFP data stream
        • Performance considerations
    • Planning printing
    • Configuring printing
      • Automatically creating printer device descriptions
      • Adding a printer with IBM Navigator for i
      • Configuring virtual printers
      • Configuring PJL printers
      • Configuring SNMP printers
      • Configuring LPR/LPD
      • Configuring IPP printers
        • Setting up validation lists for the IPP print driver
      • Setting up the IPP server
        • Verifying IPP server prerequisite programs
        • Configuring your Web browser
        • Starting the administrator interface
        • Configuring an IPP server
        • Configuring an IPP printer
        • Configuring an IPP client
      • Configuring Lexlink printers
      • Configuring remote system printing
        • IBM i to IBM i for remote system printing
        • IBM i to VM/MVS for remote system printing
      • Configuring host print transform
        • Customizing ASCII printers that use the host print transform function
          • Preparing to customize an ASCII printer
            • Gathering source materials
            • Completing printer setup
            • Planning the customization schedule
            • Customizing unsupported ASCII printers
          • Retrieving the workstation customization source
            • Understanding the transform table
            • Choosing the customizing source
          • Customizing WSCST object of *TRANSFORM transform type
            • Changing the source
              • Transform Table (TRNSFRMTBL) tag
              • Using the tags
              • Programming considerations
            • Customizing printer information
              • Printer Data Stream (PRTDTASTRM) tag
              • Raster Mode (RASTERMODE) tag
              • No-print Border (NOPRTBDR) tag
              • Drawer Page Size
                • Drawer Page Size (DWRPAGSIZ) tag
                • Drawer Page Size Entry (DWRPAGSIZE) tag
                • End Drawer Page Size (EDWRPAGSIZ) tag
            • Customizing printer controls
              • Bell (BELL) tag
              • Carrier Return (CARRTN) tag
              • Initialize Printer (INITPRT) tag
              • Reset Printer (RESETPRT) tag
              • Raster Graphics End (RASEND) tag
              • Print All Characters (PRTALLCHR) tag
              • Print Next Character (PRTNXTCHR) tag
            • Customizing print media size
              • Envelope size
              • Paper size
              • Page length
                • Page Length in Inches (PAGLENI) tag
                • Page Length in Lines (PAGLENL) tag
              • Printable area
                • Text Length in Lines (TEXTLENL) tag
                • Top Margin in Inches (TOPMARGINI) tag
            • Customizing highlighting
              • Bold
              • Underscore
            • Customizing horizontal movement
              • Backspace (BSP) tag
              • Characters per inch
                • Characters per Inch in Normal Print Mode (CPI) tag
                • Characters per Inch in COR Mode (CPICOR) tag
              • Horizontal Absolute Movement (HORAMOV) tag
              • Horizontal Relative Movement (HORRMOV) tag
              • Proportional spacing
              • Space (SPACE) tag
            • Customizing vertical movement
              • Form Feed (FORMFEED) tag
              • Half-Line Feed (HLFLINEFEED) tag
              • Line Feed (LINEFEED) tag
              • Vertical Absolute Movement (VERAMOV) tag
              • Vertical Relative Movement (VERRMOV) tag
              • Reverse Half-Line Feed (RVSHLFLINEFEED) tag
              • Reverse Line Feed (RVSLINEFEED) tag
              • Vertical line spacing
                • Lines per Inch (LPI) tag
                • Variable Line Spacing (VARLSPC) tag
            • Customizing indexing
              • Subscript
              • Superscript
            • Customizing color
            • Customizing paper input
              • Paper Drawer Selection (DWRSLT) tag
              • Selecting Paper Drawer Number (DWRNBR) tag
              • Additional paper drawer selection
                • Additional Drawer Selection (ADDDRWTBL) tag
                • Additional Paper Drawer Selection Entry (ADDDRWTBLE) tag
                • End Additional Paper Drawer Selection (EADDDRWTBL) tag
            • Customizing paper output
              • Output bin selection
                • Output Bin Selection (OUTBINTBL) tag
                • Output Bin Selection Entry (OUTBINTBLE) tag
                • End Output Bin Selection (EOUTBINTBL) tag
              • Jog Output Tray (JOGOUTTRAY) tag
              • Duplex
                • Set Duplex Printing (DUPXPRT) tag
                • Select Next Side Printing in Duplex (NXTDUPXPRT) tag
                • Set Tumble Duplex Printing (TUMDUPXPRT) tag
              • Simplex
            • Customizing print orientation
              • Print Angle (PRTANGLE) tag
              • Paper Orientation (PRTORIENT) tag
            • Customizing print quality
            • Customizing fonts
              • Font groups
                • Font Group (FNTGRP) tag
                • Font Group Entry (FNTGRPE) tag
                • End Font Group (EFNTGRP) tag
              • Individual fonts
                • Individual Font (INDFNT) tag
                • Individual Font Entry (INDFNTE) tag
                • End Individual Font (EINDFNT) tag
              • Font mapping
                • Font Mapping (FNTMAPTBL) tag
                • Font Mapping Entry (FNTMAPE) tag
                • End Font Mapping (EFNTMAPTBL) tag
            • Customizing code page support
              • Customizing EBCDIC-to-ASCII code page mapping
                • EBCDIC-to-ASCII Mapping Table (EBCASCTBL) tag
                • EBCDIC-to-ASCII Mapping Table Entry (EBCASCTBLE) tag
                • End EBCDIC-to-ASCII Mapping Table (EEBCASCTBL) tag
              • Additional ASCII code pages
                • ASCII Code Page Information (ASCCPINFO) tag
                • Code Page (CODEPAGE) tag
                • ASCII Control Code Mapping (ASCIICTL) tag
                • End ASCII Code Page Information (EASCCPINFO) tag
              • Default ASCII Code Page (DFTASCCP) Tag
            • Customizing fax support
              • Fax Size for Transform (FAXSIZXFM) tag
              • Fax Size Entry (FAXSIZE) tag
              • End Fax Size for Transform (EFAXSIZXFM) tag
            • Customizing Double-Byte Character Set (DBCS) support
              • CCSID mapping
                • EBCDIC-to-ASCII CSSID mapping (EBCASCCSID) tag
                • EBCDIC-to-ASCII CSSID mapping entry (EBCASCCSIDE) tag
                • End EBCDIC-to-ASCII CSSID mapping table entry (EEBCASCCSID) tag
              • Shift In (SI) tag
              • Shift Out (SO) tag
              • DBCS Space (DBSPACE) tag
              • Character Orientation (CHRORIENT) tag
              • Set Character Pitch (SCPITCH) tag
              • Set Line Pitch (SLPITCH) tag
              • Set Font Size Scaling (FONTSCALING) tag
              • Set Font Size Scale (FONTSCALE) tag
              • Set Characters per Inch (CPI) tag
              • Set Grid Type (GLTYPE) tag
              • Set Grid Line Width (GLWIDTH) tag
              • Draw Grid Line (DRAWLINE) tag
              • Printer Data Stream (PRTDTASTRM) tag
            • Customizing file extension
            • Customizing Image Output Resolution
          • Customizing WSCST object of *CTXFORM transform type
            • CTT Transform (CTXFRMTBL) tag
            • Output Data Format (OUTDTAFMT) tag
            • File Extension (FILEEXT) Tag
            • Font Mapping by FGID
              • Font Mapping by FGID (FGIDMAPTBL) tag
              • Font Mapping Entry (FGIDMAPE) tag
              • End Font Mapping (EFGIDMAPTBL) tag
            • TrueType font mapping
              • TrueType Font Mapping (TTFMAPTBL) tag
              • TrueType Font Mapping Entry (TTFMAPE) tag
              • End TrueType Font Mapping (ETTFMAPTBL) tag
            • Font directory
            • AFP Font Substitution (AFPFNTSUB) tag
        • Changing an existing printer device description
        • Displaying the printer device description
        • IBM i Access for Windows PC5250 configuration recommendations
        • 3486, 3487, and 3488 InfoWindow display station configuration recommendations
        • 3477 InfoWindow display station configuration recommendations
        • 3197 display station configuration recommendations
        • ASCII workstation controller configuration recommendations
        • IBM remote 5250 emulation program configuration recommendations
      • Configuring image print transform
        • Printing to an ASCII printer with image print transform
        • Printing to an IPDS printer with image print transform
        • Printing with remote output queues and image print transform
    • Managing printing
      • Managing spooled files
        • Displaying a list of spooled files
        • Displaying the contents of a spooled file
        • Displaying messages associated with a spooled file
        • Holding a spooled file
        • Releasing a spooled file
        • Moving a spooled file
        • Deleting spooled files
        • Converting a spooled file to PDF
        • Exporting a spooled file to your PC
        • Copying a spooled file to a physical file
        • Sending a spooled file to another user or system
        • Changing attributes of a spooled file
        • Restarting the printing of a spooled file
        • Suspending one spooled file and printing another
        • Enabling spooled file notification message
        • Controlling the number of spooled files
        • Deleting expired spooled files
        • Reclaiming spooled file storage
        • Saving and restoring spooled files
        • Controlling printing by spooled file size
        • Repairing output queues and spooled files
      • Printer-file-related tasks
        • Changing printer files
        • Overriding printer files
          • Overriding file attributes
          • Overriding file names or types
          • Overriding file names or types and file attributes of the new file
          • Generic override for printer files
        • Deleting printer file overrides
        • Displaying printer file overrides
      • Managing printers
        • Checking the status of a printer
        • Making a printer available
        • Making a printer unavailable
      • Managing virtual printers
        • Display a list of virtual printers
        • Open a virtual printer
        • Start a virtual printer
        • Stop a virtual printer
        • Delete a virtual printer
        • View the properties of a virtual printer
      • Managing printer writers
        • Starting a printer writer
        • Stopping a printer writer
        • Checking the status of a printer writer
      • Managing remote writers
        • Displaying remote writer status
        • Starting a remote writer
        • Stopping a remote writer
      • Managing IPP server
        • Starting the IPP server
        • Stopping the IPP server
        • Changing an IPP printer configuration
        • Displaying an IPP printer configuration
        • Deleting an IPP printer configuration
      • Miscellaneous printing tasks
        • Allowing direct printing
        • Specifying separator pages
        • Specifying print text
        • Replacing unprintable characters
        • Printing a graphic with other output
        • Displaying graphic symbol sets
        • Changing remote output queue description
    • Examples: Using DDS and printer files
      • Examples: Using DDS with RPG or COBOL
        • Example: DDS row and column positioning source code
        • Example: DDS absolute positioning source code
        • Example: COBOL positioning source code
        • Example: RPG positioning source code
      • Example: Print font samples
        • DDS source code
        • C source code
        • COBOL source code
        • RPG source code
      • Example: Using a program-described printer file with an application program
      • Example: Using an externally described printer file with an application program
    • Troubleshooting printing
      • Troubleshooting the IPP server
      • Troubleshooting the image print transform
    • Reference information
      • CL commands
        • Jobs
        • Output queues
        • Printer devices
        • Printer files
        • Printer writers
        • Spooled files
        • User profiles
      • Printer file parameter considerations
        • Align (ALIGN) parameter
        • Coded font (CDEFNT) parameter
        • Corner staple (CORNERSTPL) parameter
        • DBCS coded font (IGCCDEFNT) parameter
        • Device type (DEVTYPE) parameter
        • Edge stitch (EDGESTITCH) parameter
        • Fidelity (FIDELITY) parameter
        • Font character set (FNTCHRSET) parameter
        • Margin (FRONTMGN and BACKMGN) parameters
        • MULTIUP(1, 2, 3, or 4) and REDUCE(*NONE) parameters
        • MULTIUP(1, 2, 3, or 4) and REDUCE(*TEXT) parameters
          • MULTIUP support
          • MULTIUP support for the 4224, 4230, 4234, 4247 printers
          • Restrictions for MULTIUP with REDUCE(*TEXT)
        • Output priority (OUTPTY) parameter
        • Overlay (FRONTOVL and BACKOVL) parameters
        • Page rotation (PAGRTT) parameter
          • PAGRTT = *AUTO
          • PAGRTT = *DEVD
          • PAGRTT = 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees
          • PAGRTT = *COR
          • Page rotation on the 3831, 3835, 3900, InfoPrint 3000, and InfoPrint 4000 printers
          • Page rotation and duplex printing
        • Saddle stitch (SADLSTITCH) parameter
        • Spooled output schedule (SCHEDULE) parameter
        • To stream file (TOSTMF) parameter
        • Workstation customizing object (WSCST) parameter
      • Printer file return codes
        • Major code 00 (00xx)
        • Major code 80 (80xx)
        • Major code 81 (81xx)
        • Major code 82 (82xx)
        • Major code 83 (83xx)
      • Printer file feedback areas
        • Open feedback area for printer
          • Device definition list
          • Open feedback extensions list
          • Stream file name open feedback extension
        • I/O feedback area
      • AFP compatibility fonts and font substitution
        • Font-related examples
        • Font information
        • Font attributes and font types
        • Printer font support
        • Font substitution by font ID range
        • Mapping host-resident to printer-resident font character sets
        • Mapping host-resident to printer-resident code pages
        • Mapping printer-resident to host-resident font character sets
        • Mapping printer-resident to host-resident code pages
        • CHRID values supported
        • LPI values supported
        • CPI values supported
        • 4019 printer information
        • 4234 compressed font substitution by lines-per-inch value
      • QWP4019 program
        • QWP4019 parameter names and functions
        • QWP4019 program use
      • QPQCHGCF program
        • QPQCHGCF parameter names and functions
        • QPQCHGCF program use
        • Restrictions on using the QPQCHGCF program
        • Coded fonts whose font character sets reside in the 3130
        • QPQCHGCF instructions for marking coded fonts
    • Related information for Basic printing
  • Advanced Function Presentation (AFP)
    • What's new for IBM i 7.2
    • PDF files for AFP
    • AFP concepts
      • Overview of AFP printing
      • Data streams
        • Line data
        • Mixed data
        • zSeries and z/OS data
      • AFP resources
        • AFP fonts
        • Form definitions
        • Object containers
        • Overlays
        • Page definitions
        • Page segments
        • Resources in the integrated file system
        • Color and grayscale printing using AFP
          • AFP color and grayscale solutions
          • Color printing concepts
            • Color spaces and ICC profiles
            • Gamut and rendering intent
            • Color mixing and calibration
            • Halftones and tone transfer curves
            • File size
          • Grayscale printing concepts
          • Color Management
            • ICC Profiles
            • Rendering intents
            • Paper characteristics
          • AFP Color Management
            • Color management resources
              • Color management resource types
                • Color conversion CMR
                • Link color conversion CMR
                • Halftone CMR
                • Generic halftone CMRs
                • Indexed CMR
                • Tone transfer curve CMR
              • CMR processing modes
                • Audit processing mode
                • Instruction processing mode
                • Link processing mode
              • CMR creation and installation
            • Data objects
              • Types of data objects
              • Data object creation and installation
                • Data object creation
                • Data object installation
            • Resource directory management
            • Tips and best practices
              • Tips for images
              • Tips for resources
          • AFP Resource Installer
      • TrueType and OpenType fonts
        • Resource access tables
        • How TrueType and OpenType fonts differ from AFP fonts
      • Resource libraries
        • Resource library lists
        • AFP font libraries
      • PSF configuration options
        • PSF configuration objects
          • IPDS pass-through
        • How page definitions, form definitions, and printer files interact
    • Planning for AFP
      • Determining whether PSF is required
      • Installing PSF
      • Ensuring that you have the necessary AFP resources
    • Getting started with AFP
      • Obtaining AFP resources
        • Fonts provided by IBM i
        • Purchasing fonts
        • Creating AFP resources
        • Receiving AFP resources from another system
          • Receiving fonts from zSeries
          • Receiving AFP resources inline in the data stream
          • Receiving resources and AFPDS data sent to network files
      • Specifying AFP resources
        • Specifying a form definition
        • Specifying a page definition
        • Specifying a PSF configuration object
        • Specifying an overlay
        • Specifying an AFP font
        • Specifying a TrueType or OpenType font
        • Example: Specifying a font
        • Specifying a page segment
        • Specifying an object container
        • Search order of library list
      • Creating AFP data
      • Printing AFP data with PSF
        • Printing AFP data generated on IBM i
        • Printing data sent to IBM i from zSeries
      • Transforming IPDS data to PDF
        • Transforming spooled files to PDF without manual setup
        • Transforming spooled files to PDF with manual setup
          • Setting up your PSF configuration object
          • Changing the input file to create multiple output files or an indexed file
          • Configuring a device for PDF conversion
        • Sending the PDF file as email
        • Encrypting the PDF file
        • Suppress message text in an email
        • Variable data taken from spooled file attributes
        • Generic support for PDF map object selection criteria
    • Configuring PSF
    • Managing PSF
      • Enabling IPDS pass-through support
      • Sharing print sessions
      • Automatic session recovery
      • Disabling offset stacking and edge marking
      • Specifying public data authority for directories created by PSF
      • Preventing the copying of spooled file attribute USRDFNOPT when respooling AFP
    • Line and mixed data stream support
      • Special characters used with line data
      • Printer file parameters used with line and mixed data
      • Considerations and restrictions when using line data or mixed data
    • Sending data from zSeries to IBM i
      • Sending print data from VM to the output queue of a user ID
      • Sending print data from z/OS to an IBM i output queue
      • Sending data from zSeries to IBM i network files
    • AFP reference information
      • Form definitions included with the operating system
      • Page definitions included with the operating system
      • CL commands for PSF configuration objects
      • CL commands for device descriptions
      • zSeries parameters and corresponding IBM i printer file parameters
      • American National Standard carriage control characters
      • Machine code carriage control characters
    • Troubleshooting mapping problems
      • Error message reason codes
      • The diagnostic spool file (PSFTRACE)
        • Requesting the diagnostic spool file
        • Format of the diagnostic spool file
        • Automatically generated PSFTRACE file
        • User-requested PSFTRACE file
    • Related information for AFP
• 프로그래밍
  • Application programming interfaces
    • APIs overview
    • What's new for IBM i 7.4
    • PDF file for APIs
    • API finder
    • Alphabetic list of APIs
    • API concepts
      • API terminology
      • Generic library names
      • API naming conventions
      • Language selection considerations
      • Types of APIs
        • APIs for the program-based environment
        • APIs for the service-program-based environment
        • APIs for the ILE Common Execution Environment
        • Differences between program-based APIs and service-program-based APIs
          • Example in ILE C: Logging software errors (program API without pointers)
          • Example in OPM COBOL: Logging software errors (program API without pointers)
          • Example in OPM RPG: Logging software errors (program API without pointers)
          • Example in ILE RPG: Logging software error (program API without pointers)
          • Example in ILE C: Reporting software errors (bindable API with pointers)
          • Example in ILE COBOL: Reporting software errors (bindable API with pointers)
          • Example in ILE RPG: Reporting software errors (bindable API with pointers)
        • APIs for the UNIX-type environment
          • Examples: UNIX-type APIs
      • API information format
        • API description
        • API format
        • API field descriptions
        • API error messages
        • Extracting a field from the format
        • Processing lists that contain data structures
      • API parameters
        • Passing parameters
        • Input and output parameters
        • Offset values and lengths
        • Offset versus displacement considerations for structures
        • Error code parameter
          • Error code parameter format
          • Examples: Receiving error conditions
          • Using the job log to diagnose API errors
      • Include files and the QSYSINC library
      • Internal object types
      • Data types and APIs
      • Internal identifiers
      • User spaces and receiver variables
        • User spaces
          • General data structure
          • Common data structure formats
          • Example: User space format
          • List sections
        • Receiver variables
          • Bytes available and bytes returned fields
          • Keyed interface
          • User space alternative
      • Continuation handle
      • List APIs overview
        • General data structure for list APIs
        • User spaces for list APIs
          • Logic flow of processing a list of entries
          • Manipulating a user space with pointers
          • Manipulating a user space without pointers
          • Examples: Changing a user space
            • Example: User space before and after change
            • Example in ILE RPG: Changing a user space
            • Example in OPM RPG: Changing a user space
          • Additional information about list APIs and user spaces
          • Example in CL: Listing database file members
        • Example in OPM RPG: List APIs
        • Example in ILE CL: List APIs
        • Example in ILE C: List APIs
        • Example in ILE RPG: List APIs
        • Example in COBOL (OPM and ILE): List APIs
      • Domains
      • Exit programs
      • User index considerations
      • Performance considerations
      • APIs and system objects
      • Open list information format
      • Path name format
    • Using APIs
      • Examples: Program-based APIs
        • Example in OPM RPG: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (exception message)
        • Example in COBOL (OPM and ILE): Retrieving the HOLD parameter (exception message)
        • Example in ILE C: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (exception message)
        • Example in ILE RPG: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (exception message)
        • Example in OPM RPG: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (error code structure)
        • Example in COBOL (OPM and ILE): Retrieving the HOLD parameter (error code structure)
        • Example in ILE C: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (error code structure)
        • Example in ILE RPG: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (error code structure)
        • Example in OPM RPG: Printing the HOLD value
        • Example in COBOL (OPM and ILE): Printing the HOLD value
        • Example in ILE C: Printing the HOLD value
        • Example in ILE RPG: Printing the HOLD value
        • Example in OPM RPG: Accessing a field value (initial library list)
        • Example in COBOL (OPM and ILE): Accessing a field value (initial library list)
        • Example in ILE C: Accessing a field value (initial library list)
        • Example in ILE RPG: Accessing a field value (initial library list)
        • Example in OPM RPG: Using keys with the List Spooled Files (QUSLSPL) API
        • Example in COBOL (OPM and ILE): Using keys with the List Spooled Files (QUSLSPL) API
        • Example in ILE C: Using keys with the List Spooled Files (QUSLSPL) API
        • Example in ILE RPG: Using keys with the List Spooled Files (QUSLSPL) API
      • Examples: Service-program-based APIs
        • Example in ILE C: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
        • Example in OPM COBOL: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
        • Example in ILE COBOL: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
        • Example in OPM RPG: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
        • Example in ILE RPG: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
        • Example in ILE C: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
        • Example in OPM COBOL: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
        • Example in ILE COBOL: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
        • Example in OPM RPG: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
        • Example in ILE RPG: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
        • Example in ILE C: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
        • Example in OPM COBOL: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
        • Example in ILE COBOL: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
        • Example in OPM RPG: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
        • Example in ILE RPG: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
      • Performing tasks using APIs
        • Examples: Packaging your own software products
          • Creating the example product
          • Example in CL: Creating objects for packaging a product
          • Example in OPM RPG: Packaging a product
          • Example in ILE C: Packaging a product
          • Example in COBOL (OPM and ILE): Packaging a product
          • Example in ILE RPG: Packaging a product
        • Examples: Retrieving a file description to a user space
          • Example in ILE C: Retrieving a file description to a user space
          • Example in COBOL (OPM and ILE): Retrieving a file description to a user space
          • Example in ILE RPG: Retrieving a file description to a user space
        • Examples: Using data queues or user queues
          • Considerations for using data queues and user queues
          • Example in ILE C: Using data queues
          • Example in COBOL (OPM and ILE): Using data queues
          • Example in OPM RPG: Using data queues
          • Example in ILE RPG: Using data queues
          • Example in ILE C: Using user queues
    • Examples: APIs and exit programs
      • Example: Changing an active job
      • Example: Changing a job schedule entry
      • Example: Creating a batch machine
      • Example: Creating and manipulating a user index
      • Example: Creating your own telephone directory
      • Example: Defining queries
      • Example: Deleting old spooled files
      • Example: Diagnostic reporting
      • Example: Generating and sending an alert
      • Example: Listing directories
      • Example: Listing subdirectories
      • Example: Saving to multiple devices
      • Example: Saving and restoring system-level environment variables
      • Examples: Scanning string patterns
      • Example: Using a COBOL/400 program to call APIs
      • Examples: Using the Control Device (QTACTLDV) API
      • Examples: Processing data queue entries
      • Example: Using environment variables
      • Examples: Using ILE Common Execution Environment APIs
      • Example: Using generic terminal APIs
      • Example: Using profile handles
      • Example: Using registration facility APIs
      • Example: Using semaphore set and shared memory functions
      • Example: Using SNA/Management Services Transport APIs
      • Example: Using source debugger APIs
      • Example: Using process-related APIs
      • Example: Using the user-defined communications programs for file transfer
      • Example: Working with stream files
      • Example: Creating a program temporary fix exit program
      • Example: Creating an exit program for Operational Assistant backup
    • IBM i Machine Interface
      • Machine Interface Introduction
      • Machine interface programming
        • Machine interface instructions
        • Example: Writing an MI program
        • Compiling an MI program
        • Creating an MI version of the CLCRTPG program
        • Enhanced version of the MICRTPG program
          • Writing the MICRTPG2 program (by sections of code)
          • Beginning the instruction stream
          • Using static storage to your advantage
          • MI code example: MICRTPG2 complete program
          • Updated CL06 program
        • Creating the MICRTPG2 program
        • Example: Common MI programming techniques
        • Program storage
      • Machine Interface Concepts
        • Arithmetic Operations
        • Array Index Operations
        • Boolean Operations
        • Date, Time, and Timestamps
        • Program Object Specification
        • Storage Synchronization Concepts
      • Machine Interface Instructions
        • Activate Bound Program (ACTBPGM)
        • Activate Program (ACTPG)
        • Add Logical Character (ADDLC)
        • Add Numeric (ADDN)
        • Add Space Pointer (ADDSPP)
        • Allocate Activation Group-Based Heap Space Storage (ALCHSS)
        • And (AND)
        • And Complemented String (ANDCSTR)
        • AND String (ANDSTR)
        • Arc Cosine (ACOS)
        • Arc Sine (ASIN)
        • Arc Tangent (ATAN)
        • Arc Tangent Hyperbolic (ATANH)
        • Atomic Add (ATMCADD)
        • Atomic And (ATMCAND)
        • Atomic Or (ATMCOR)
        • Bit Permute (BITPERM)
        • Branch (B)
        • Call External (CALLX)
        • Call Internal (CALLI)
        • Call Program With Variable Length Argument List (CALLPGMV)
        • Check Lock Value (CHKLKVAL)
        • Cipher (CIPHER)
        • Clear Bit in String (CLRBTS)
        • Clear Invocation Exit (CLRIEXIT)
        • Clear Invocation Flags (CLRINVF)
        • Clear Lock Value (CLRLKVAL)
        • Complement String (COMSTR)
        • Compute Array Index (CAI)
        • Compute Date Duration (CDD)
        • Compute Math Function Using One Input Value (CMF1)
        • Compute Math Function Using Two Input Values (CMF2)
        • Compare Bytes Left-Adjusted (CMPBLA)
        • Compare Bytes Left-Adjusted with Pad (CMPBLAP)
        • Compare Bytes Right-Adjusted (CMPBRA)
        • Compare Bytes Right-Adjusted with Pad (CMPBRAP)
        • Compare Numeric Value (CMPNV)
        • Compare Pointer for Space Addressability (CMPPSPAD)
        • Compare Pointer for Object Addressability (CMPPTRA)
        • Compare Pointers for Equality (CMPPTRE)
        • Compare Pointer Type (CMPPTRT)
        • Compare Space Addressability (CMPSPAD)
        • Compare and Swap (CMPSW)
        • Compare To Pad (CMPTOPAD)
        • Concatenate (CAT)
        • Compress Data (CPRDATA)
        • Copy Bits Arithmetic (CPYBTA)
        • Copy Bits Logical (CPYBTL)
        • Copy Bits with Left Logical Shift (CPYBTLLS)
        • Copy Bits with Right Arithmetic Shift (CPYBTRAS)
        • Copy Bits with Right Logical Shift (CPYBTRLS)
        • Copy Bytes (CPYBYTES)
        • Copy Bytes to Bits Arithmetic (CPYBBTA)
        • Copy Bytes to Bits Logical (CPYBBTL)
        • Copy Bytes Left-Adjusted (CPYBLA)
        • Copy Bytes Left-Adjusted with Pad (CPYBLAP)
        • Copy Bytes Overlap Left-Adjusted (CPYBOLA)
        • Copy Bytes Overlap Left-Adjusted with Pad (CPYBOLAP)
        • Copy Bytes Overlapping (CPYBO)
        • Copy Bytes Repeatedly (CPYBREP)
        • Copy Bytes Right-Adjusted (CPYBRA)
        • Copy Bytes Right-Adjusted with Pad (CPYBRAP)
        • Copy Bytes with Pointers (CPYBWP)
        • Copy Extended Characters Left-Adjusted With Pad (CPYECLAP)
        • Copy Hex Digit Numeric to Numeric (CPYHEXNN)
        • Copy Hex Digit Numeric to Zone (CPYHEXNZ)
        • Copy Hex Digit Zone To Numeric (CPYHEXZN)
        • Copy Hex Digit Zone To Zone (CPYHEXZZ)
        • Copy Numeric Value (CPYNV)
        • Copy Numeric Value (CPYNV)
        • Copy Numeric Value (CPYNV)
        • Cosine (COS)
        • Cosine Hyperbolic (COSH)
        • Cotangent (COT)
        • Count Leading Zeros 4 Bytes (CNTLZ4)
        • Count Leading Zeros 8 Bytes (CNTLZ8)
        • Create Activation Group-Based Heap Space (CRTHS)
        • Create Independent Index (CRTINX)
        • Create Pointer-Based Mutex (CRTMTX)
        • Create Space (CRTS)
        • Compute Time Duration (CTD)
        • Compute Timestamp Duration (CTSD)
        • Convert BSC to Character (CVTBC)
        • Convert Character to BSC (CVTCB)
        • Convert Character to Hex (CVTCH)
        • Convert Character to MRJE (CVTCM)
        • Convert Character to Numeric (CVTCN)
        • Convert Character to SNA (CVTCS)
        • Convert Date (CVTD)
        • Convert Decimal Form to Floating-Point (CVTDFFP)
        • Convert External Form to Numeric Value (CVTEFN)
        • Convert Floating-Point to Decimal Form (CVTFPDF)
        • Convert Hex to Character (CVTHC)
        • Convert MRJE to Character (CVTMC)
        • Convert Numeric to Character (CVTNC)
        • Convert SNA to Character (CVTSC)
        • Convert Time (CVTT)
        • Convert Timestamp (CVTTS)
        • Deactivate Program (DEACTPG)
        • Decompress Data (DCPDATA)
        • Decrement Date (DECD)
        • Decrement Time (DECT)
        • Decrement Timestamp (DECTS)
        • Dequeue (DEQ)
        • Dequeue (DEQ)
        • Destroy Activation Group-Based Heap Space (DESHS)
        • Destroy Independent Index (DESINX)
        • Destroy Pointer-Based Mutex (DESMTX)
        • Destroy Space (DESS)
        • Divide (DIV)
        • Divide with Remainder (DIVREM)
        • Edit (EDIT)
        • Edit (EDIT)
        • Edit (EDIT)
        • End (END)
        • Enqueue (ENQ)
        • Ensure Object (ENSOBJ)
        • Exchange Bytes (EXCHBY)
        • Exponential Function of E (EEXP)
        • Extended Character Scan (ECSCAN)
        • Extract Exponent (EXTREXP)
        • Extract Magnitude (EXTRMAG)
        • Find Byte (FINDBYTE)
        • Find Character Constrained (MEMCHR)
        • Find Character in Null-Terminated String (STRCHRNULL)
        • Find Independent Index Entry (FNDINXEN)
        • Find Relative Invocation Number (FNDRINVN)
        • Free Activation Group-Based Heap Space Storage (FREHSS)
        • Free Activation Group-Based Heap Space Storage From Mark (FREHSSMK)
        • Generate Universal Unique Identifier (GENUUID)
        • Increment Date (INCD)
        • Increment Time (INCT)
        • Increment Timestamp (INCTS)
        • Initialize Exception Handler Control Actions (INITEHCA)
        • Insert Independent Index Entry (INSINXEN)
        • Invocation Pointer (INVP)
        • Lock Object (LOCK)
        • Lock Pointer-Based Mutex (LOCKMTX)
        • Lock Space Location (LOCKSL)
        • Lock Teraspace Storage Location (LOCKTSL)
        • Logarithm Base E (Natural Logarithm) (LN)
        • Materialize Access Group Attributes (MATAGAT)
        • Materialize Activation Attributes (MATACTAT)
        • Materialize Activation Export (MATACTEX)
        • Materialize Activation Group Attributes (MATAGPAT)
        • Materialize Activation Group-Based Heap Space Attributes (MATHSAT)
        • Materialize Allocated Object Locks (MATAOL)
        • Materialize Authority (MATAU)
        • Materialize Authority List (MATAL)
        • Materialize Authorized Objects (MATAUOBJ)
        • Materialize Authorized Users (MATAUU)
        • Materialize Bound Program (MATBPGM)
        • Materialize Context (MATCTX)
        • Materialize Data Space Record Locks (MATDRECL)
        • Materialize Dump Space (MATDMPS)
        • Materialize Exception Description (MATEXCPD)
        • Materialize Independent Index Attributes (MATINXAT)
        • Materialize Instruction Attributes (MATINAT)
        • Materialize Invocation (MATINV)
        • Materialize Invocation Attributes (MATINVAT)
        • Materialize Invocation Entry (MATINVE)
        • Materialize Invocation Stack (MATINVS)
        • Materialize Journaled Object Attributes (MATJOAT)
        • Materialize Journaled Objects (MATJOBJ)
        • Materialize Journal Port Attributes (MATJPAT)
        • Materialize Journal Space Attributes (MATJSAT)
        • Materialize Machine Attributes (MATMATR)
        • Materialize Machine Attributes (MATMATR)
        • Materialize Machine Data (MATMDATA)
        • Materialize Machine Information (MATMIF)
        • Materialize Mutex (MATMTX)
        • Materialize Object Locks (MATOBJLK)
        • Materialize Pointer (MATPTR)
        • Materialize Pointer Information (MATPTRIF)
        • Materialize Pointer Locations (MATPTRL)
        • Materialize Process Activation Groups (MATPRAGP)
        • Materialize Process Attributes (MATPRATR)
        • Materialize Process Record Locks (MATPRECL)
        • Materialize Process Locks (MATPRLK)
        • Materialize Process Message (MATPRMSG)
        • Materialize Process Mutex (MATPRMTX)
        • Materialize or Verify Licensed Internal Code Options (MVLICOPT)
        • Materialize Program (MATPG)
        • Materialize Program Name (MATPGMNM)
        • Materialize Queue Attributes (MATQAT)
        • Materialize Queue Messages (MATQMSG)
        • Materialize Resource Management Data (MATRMD)
        • Materialize Selected Locks (MATSELLK)
        • Materialize Space Attributes (MATS)
        • Materialize System Object (MATSOBJ)
        • Materialize Time of Day Clock Attributes (MATTODAT)
        • Materialize User Profile (MATUP)
        • Materialize User Profile Pointers from ID (MATUPID)
        • Memory Compare (MEMCMP)
        • Memory Copy (MEMCPY)
        • Memory Move (MEMMOVE)
        • Memory Use Hint (MEMUSEHINT)
        • Modify Automatic Storage Allocation (MODASA)
        • Modify Exception Description (MODEXCPD)
        • Modify Independent Index (MODINX)
        • Modify Invocation Authority Attributes (MODINVAU)
        • Modify Space Attributes (MODS)
        • Modify Space Attributes (MODS)
        • Modify Space Attributes (MODS)
        • Multiply (MULT)
        • Multiply-Add (MPYADD)
        • Multiply-Subtract (MPYSUB)
        • Negate (NEG)
        • No Operation (NOOP)
        • No Operation and Skip (NOOPS)
        • Not (NOT)
        • NPM Procedure Parameter List Address (NPM_PARMLIST_ADDR)
        • OPM Parameter Address (OPM_PARM_ADDR)
        • OPM Parameter Count (OPM_PARM_CNT)
        • Or (OR)
        • OR String (ORSTR)
        • Override Program Attributes (OVRPGATR)
        • PCO Pointer (PCOPTR)
        • Return PCO Pointer (PCOPTR2)
        • Population Count 4 Bytes (POPCNT4)
        • Population Count 8 Bytes (POPCNT8)
        • Population Count Bytes (POPCNTB)
        • Population Parity 4 Bytes (POPPAR4)
        • Population Parity 8 Bytes (POPPAR8)
        • X To The Y Power (POWER)
        • Propagate Byte (PROPB)
        • Quantize Decimal Floating-Point by Example (QUANTIZEBE)
        • Quantize Decimal Floating-point By Value (QUANTIZEBV)
        • Reallocate Activation Group-Based Heap Space Storage (REALCHSS)
        • Remainder (REM)
        • Retrieve Computational Attributes (RETCA)
        • Retrieve Exception Data (RETEXCPD)
        • Retrieve Invocation Flags (RETINVF)
        • Retrieve Thread Count (RETTHCNT)
        • Retrieve Thread Identifier (RETTHID)
        • Retrieve Teraspace Address From Space Pointer (RETTSADR)
        • Reinitialize Static Storage (RINZSTAT)
        • Remove Independent Index Entry (RMVINXEN)
        • Resolve Data Pointer (RSLVDP)
        • Resolve System Pointer (RSLVSP)
        • Return From Exception (RTNEXCP)
        • Return External (RTX)
        • Scale (SCALE)
        • Scan (SCAN)
        • Scan with Control (SCANWC)
        • Scan Extended (SCANX)
        • Compare Null-Terminated Strings (STRCMPNULL)
        • Copy Null-Terminated String (STRCPYNULL)
        • Search (SEARCH)
        • Set Access State (SETACST)
        • Set Argument List Length (SETALLEN)
        • Set Bit in String (SETBTS)
        • Set Computational Attributes (SETCA)
        • Set Data Pointer (SETDP)
        • Set Data Pointer Addressability (SETDPADR)
        • Set Data Pointer Attributes (SETDPAT)
        • Set Activation Group-Based Heap Space Storage Mark (SETHSSMK)
        • Set Invocation Exit (SETIEXIT)
        • Set Invocation Flags (SETINVF)
        • Set Instruction Pointer (SETIP)
        • Set System Pointer from Pointer (SETSPFP)
        • Set Space Pointer (SETSPP)
        • Set Space Pointer with Displacement (SETSPPD)
        • Set Space Pointer From Pointer (SETSPPFP)
        • Set Space Pointer Offset (SETSPPO)
        • Signal Exception (SIGEXCP)
        • Sine (SIN)
        • Sine Hyperbolic (SINH)
        • Compute Length of Null-Terminated String (STRLENNULL)
        • Compare Null-Terminated Strings Constrained (STRNCMPNULL)
        • Copy Null-Terminated String Constrained (STRNCPYNULL)
        • Copy Null-Terminated String Constrained, Null Padded (STRNCPYNULLPAD)
        • Sense Exception Description (SNSEXCPD)
        • Store and Set Computational Attributes (SSCA)
        • Store Parameter List Length (STPLLEN)
        • Store Space Pointer Offset (STSPPO)
        • Subtract Logical Character (SUBLC)
        • Subtract Numeric (SUBN)
        • Subtract Space Pointer Offset (SUBSPP)
        • Subtract Space Pointers For Offset (SUBSPPFO)
        • Synchronize Shared Storage Accesses (SYNCSTG)
        • Tangent (TAN)
        • Tangent Hyperbolic (TANH)
        • Test Authority (TESTAU)
        • Test Extended Authorities (TESTEAU)
        • Test Exception (TESTEXCP)
        • Test Pending Interrupts (TESTINTR)
        • Test Performance Data Collection (TESTPDC)
        • Test Pointer (TESTPTR)
        • Test and Replace Bytes (TESTRPL)
        • Test Subset (TESTSUBSET)
        • Test Temporary Object (TESTTOBJ)
        • Test User List Authority (TESTULA)
        • Trim Length (TRIML)
        • Test Bit in String (TSTBTS)
        • Test Bits Under Mask (TSTBUM)
        • Test Initial Thread (TSTINLTH)
        • Test and Replace Characters (TSTRPLC)
        • Unlock Teraspace Storage Location (UNLCKTSL)
        • Unlock Pointer-Based Mutex (UNLKMTX)
        • Unlock Object (UNLOCK)
        • Unlock Space Location (UNLOCKSL)
        • Verify (VERIFY)
        • Wait On Time (WAITTIME)
        • Transfer Control (XCTL)
        • Transfer Object Lock (XFRLOCK)
        • Translate (XLATE)
        • Translate Bytes (XLATEB)
        • Translate Bytes One Byte at a Time (XLATEB1)
        • Translate Multiple Bytes (XLATEMB)
        • Translate with Table (XLATEWT)
        • Translate with Table and DBCS Skip (XLATWTDS)
        • Exclusive Or (XOR)
        • XOR (Exclusive Or) String (XORSTR)
        • Yield (YIELD)
      • Machine Interface Instructions Sorted by Topic
        • Add Logical Character (ADDLC)
        • Add Numeric (ADDN)
        • And (AND)
        • Branch (B)
        • Cipher (CIPHER)
        • Clear Bit in String (CLRBTS)
        • Compare Bytes Left-Adjusted (CMPBLA)
        • Compare Bytes Left-Adjusted with Pad (CMPBLAP)
        • Compare Bytes Right-Adjusted (CMPBRA)
        • Compare Bytes Right-Adjusted with Pad (CMPBRAP)
        • Compare Null-Terminated Strings (STRCMPNULL)
        • Compare Numeric Value (CMPNV)
        • Compare and Swap (CMPSW)
        • Compare and Swap (CMPSW)
        • Compress Data (CPRDATA)
        • Compute Array Index (CAI)
        • Compute Math Function Using One Input Value (CMF1)
        • Compute Math Function Using Two Input Values (CMF2)
        • Concatenate (CAT)
        • Convert BSC to Character (CVTBC)
        • Convert Character to BSC (CVTCB)
        • Convert Character to Hex (CVTCH)
        • Convert Character to MRJE (CVTCM)
        • Convert Character to Numeric (CVTCN)
        • Convert Character to SNA (CVTCS)
        • Convert Decimal Form to Floating-Point (CVTDFFP)
        • Convert External Form to Numeric Value (CVTEFN)
        • Convert Floating-Point to Decimal Form (CVTFPDF)
        • Convert Hex to Character (CVTHC)
        • Convert MRJE to Character (CVTMC)
        • Convert Numeric to Character (CVTNC)
        • Convert SNA to Character (CVTSC)
        • Copy Bits Arithmetic (CPYBTA)
        • Copy Bits Logical (CPYBTL)
        • Copy Bits with Left Logical Shift (CPYBTLLS)
        • Copy Bits with Right Arithmetic Shift (CPYBTRAS)
        • Copy Bits with Right Logical Shift (CPYBTRLS)
        • Copy Bytes Left-Adjusted (CPYBLA)
        • Copy Bytes Left-Adjusted with Pad (CPYBLAP)
        • Copy Bytes Overlap Left-Adjusted (CPYBOLA)
        • Copy Bytes Overlap Left-Adjusted with Pad (CPYBOLAP)
        • Copy Bytes Repeatedly (CPYBREP)
        • Copy Bytes Right-Adjusted (CPYBRA)
        • Copy Bytes Right-Adjusted with Pad (CPYBRAP)
        • Copy Bytes to Bits Arithmetic (CPYBBTA)
        • Copy Bytes to Bits Logical (CPYBBTL)
        • Copy Extended Characters Left-Adjusted With Pad (CPYECLAP)
        • Copy Hex Digit Numeric to Numeric (CPYHEXNN)
        • Copy Hex Digit Numeric to Zone (CPYHEXNZ)
        • Copy Hex Digit Zone To Numeric (CPYHEXZN)
        • Copy Hex Digit Zone To Zone (CPYHEXZZ)
        • Copy Null-Terminated String (STRCPYNULL)
        • Copy Numeric Value (CPYNV)
        • Decompress Data (DCPDATA)
        • Divide (DIV)
        • Divide with Remainder (DIVREM)
        • Edit (EDIT)
        • Exchange Bytes (EXCHBY)
        • Exclusive Or (XOR)
        • Extended Character Scan (ECSCAN)
        • Extract Exponent (EXTREXP)
        • Extract Magnitude (EXTRMAG)
        • Multiply (MULT)
        • Negate (NEG)
        • Not (NOT)
        • Or (OR)
        • Remainder (REM)
        • Scale (SCALE)
        • Scan (SCAN)
        • Scan with Control (SCANWC)
        • Search (SEARCH)
        • Set Bit in String (SETBTS)
        • Set Instruction Pointer (SETIP)
        • Store and Set Computational Attributes (SSCA)
        • Subtract Logical Character (SUBLC)
        • Subtract Numeric (SUBN)
        • Test and Replace Characters (TSTRPLC)
        • Test Bit in String (TSTBTS)
        • Test Bits Under Mask (TSTBUM)
        • Translate (XLATE)
        • Translate Multiple Bytes (XLATEMB)
        • Translate with Table (XLATEWT)
        • Translate with Table and DBCS Skip (XLATWTDS)
        • Trim Length (TRIML)
        • Verify (VERIFY)
        • And Complemented String (ANDCSTR)
        • AND String (ANDSTR)
        • Arc Cosine (ACOS)
        • Arc Sine (ASIN)
        • Arc Tangent (ATAN)
        • Arc Tangent Hyperbolic (ATANH)
        • Compute Length of Null-Terminated String (STRLENNULL)
        • Compare Null-Terminated Strings Constrained (STRNCMPNULL)
        • Compare To Pad (CMPTOPAD)
        • Cosine (COS)
        • Cosine Hyperbolic (COSH)
        • Cotangent (COT)
        • Copy Bytes (CPYBYTES)
        • Copy Bytes Overlapping (CPYBO)
        • Copy Null-Terminated String Constrained (STRNCPYNULL)
        • Copy Null-Terminated String Constrained, Null Padded (STRNCPYNULLPAD)
        • Exponential Function of E (EEXP)
        • Find Byte (FINDBYTE)
        • Find Character Constrained (MEMCHR)
        • Logarithm Base E (Natural Logarithm) (LN)
        • Memory Compare (MEMCMP)
        • Memory Copy (MEMCPY)
        • Memory Move (MEMMOVE)
        • Multiply-Add (MPYADD)
        • Multiply-Subtract (MPYSUB)
        • OR String (ORSTR)
        • Propagate Byte (PROPB)
        • Retrieve Computational Attributes (RETCA)
        • Scan Extended (SCANX)
        • Set Computational Attributes (SETCA)
        • Sine (SIN)
        • Sine Hyperbolic (SINH)
        • Tangent (TAN)
        • Tangent Hyperbolic (TANH)
        • Test and Replace Bytes (TESTRPL)
        • Test Subset (TESTSUBSET)
        • Translate Bytes (XLATEB)
        • Translate Bytes One Byte at a Time (XLATEB1)
        • XOR (Exclusive Or) String (XORSTR)
        • X To The Y Power (POWER)
        • Compute Date Duration (CDD)
        • Compute Time Duration (CTD)
        • Compute Timestamp Duration (CTSD)
        • Convert Date (CVTD)
        • Convert Time (CVTT)
        • Convert Timestamp (CVTTS)
        • Decrement Date (DECD)
        • Decrement Time (DECT)
        • Decrement Timestamp (DECTS)
        • Increment Date (INCD)
        • Increment Time (INCT)
        • Increment Timestamp (INCTS)
        • Materialize Time of Day Clock Attributes (MATTODAT)
        • Compare Pointer for Object Addressability (CMPPTRA)
        • Compare Pointer for Space Addressability (CMPPSPAD)
        • Compare Pointers for Equality (CMPPTRE)
        • Compare Pointer Type (CMPPTRT)
        • Copy Bytes with Pointers (CPYBWP)
        • Materialize Pointer (MATPTR)
        • Materialize Pointer Information (MATPTRIF)
        • Materialize Pointer Locations (MATPTRL)
        • Resolve Data Pointer (RSLVDP)
        • Resolve System Pointer (RSLVSP)
        • Retrieve Teraspace Address From Space Pointer (RETTSADR)
        • Set Space Pointer From Pointer (SETSPPFP)
        • Set System Pointer from Pointer (SETSPFP)
        • Test Pointer (TESTPTR)
        • Add Space Pointer (ADDSPP)
        • Compare Space Addressability (CMPSPAD)
        • Set Data Pointer (SETDP)
        • Set Data Pointer Addressability (SETDPADR)
        • Set Data Pointer Attributes (SETDPAT)
        • Set Space Pointer (SETSPP)
        • Set Space Pointer Offset (SETSPPO)
        • Set Space Pointer with Displacement (SETSPPD)
        • Store Space Pointer Offset (STSPPO)
        • Subtract Space Pointer Offset (SUBSPP)
        • Subtract Space Pointers For Offset (SUBSPPFO)
        • Create Space (CRTS)
        • Destroy Space (DESS)
        • Materialize Space Attributes (MATS)
        • Modify Space Attributes (MODS)
        • Allocate Activation Group-Based Heap Space Storage (ALCHSS)
        • Create Activation Group-Based Heap Space (CRTHS)
        • Destroy Activation Group-Based Heap Space (DESHS)
        • Free Activation Group-Based Heap Space Storage (FREHSS)
        • Free Activation Group-Based Heap Space Storage From Mark (FREHSSMK)
        • Materialize Activation Group-Based Heap Space Attributes (MATHSAT)
        • Reallocate Activation Group-Based Heap Space Storage (REALCHSS)
        • Set Activation Group-Based Heap Space Storage Mark (SETHSSMK)
        • Materialize Bound Program (MATBPGM)
        • Materialize or Verify Licensed Internal Code Options (MVLICOPT)
        • Materialize Program (MATPG)
        • Materialize Program Name (MATPGMNM)
        • Activate Bound Program (ACTBPGM)
        • Activate Program (ACTPG)
        • Call External (CALLX)
        • Call Internal (CALLI)
        • Call Program With Variable Length Argument List (CALLPGMV)
        • Clear Invocation Exit (CLRIEXIT)
        • Clear Invocation Flags (CLRINVF)
        • Deactivate Program (DEACTPG)
        • End (END)
        • Find Relative Invocation Number (FNDRINVN)
        • Invocation Pointer (INVP)
        • Materialize Activation Attributes (MATACTAT)
        • Materialize Activation Export (MATACTEX)
        • Materialize Activation Group Attributes (MATAGPAT)
        • Materialize Invocation (MATINV)
        • Materialize Invocation Attributes (MATINVAT)
        • Materialize Invocation Entry (MATINVE)
        • Materialize Invocation Stack (MATINVS)
        • Modify Automatic Storage Allocation (MODASA)
        • NPM Procedure Parameter List Address (NPM_PARMLIST_ADDR)
        • OPM Parameter Address (OPM_PARM_ADDR)
        • OPM Parameter Count (OPM_PARM_CNT)
        • Reinitialize Static Storage (RINZSTAT)
        • Retrieve Invocation Flags (RETINVF)
        • Return External (RTX)
        • Set Argument List Length (SETALLEN)
        • Set Invocation Exit (SETIEXIT)
        • Set Invocation Flags (SETINVF)
        • Store Parameter List Length (STPLLEN)
        • Transfer Control (XCTL)
        • No Operation (NOOP)
        • No Operation and Skip (NOOPS)
        • Override Program Attributes (OVRPGATR)
        • Create Independent Index (CRTINX)
        • Destroy Independent Index (DESINX)
        • Find Independent Index Entry (FNDINXEN)
        • Insert Independent Index Entry (INSINXEN)
        • Materialize Independent Index Attributes (MATINXAT)
        • Modify Independent Index (MODINX)
        • Remove Independent Index Entry (RMVINXEN)
        • Dequeue (DEQ)
        • Enqueue (ENQ)
        • Materialize Queue Attributes (MATQAT)
        • Materialize Queue Messages (MATQMSG)
        • Lock Object (LOCK)
        • Lock Space Location (LOCKSL)
        • Lock Teraspace Storage Location (LOCKTSL)
        • Materialize Allocated Object Locks (MATAOL)
        • Materialize Data Space Record Locks (MATDRECL)
        • Materialize Object Locks (MATOBJLK)
        • Materialize Process Locks (MATPRLK)
        • Materialize Process Record Locks (MATPRECL)
        • Materialize Selected Locks (MATSELLK)
        • Transfer Object Lock (XFRLOCK)
        • Unlock Object (UNLOCK)
        • Unlock Space Location (UNLOCKSL)
        • Unlock Teraspace Storage Location (UNLCKTSL)
        • Create Pointer-Based Mutex (CRTMTX)
        • Destroy Pointer-Based Mutex (DESMTX)
        • Lock Pointer-Based Mutex (LOCKMTX)
        • Materialize Mutex (MATMTX)
        • Materialize Process Mutex (MATPRMTX)
        • Unlock Pointer-Based Mutex (UNLKMTX)
        • Atomic Add (ATMCADD)
        • Atomic And (ATMCAND)
        • Atomic Or (ATMCOR)
        • Check Lock Value (CHKLKVAL)
        • Clear Lock Value (CLRLKVAL)
        • Synchronize Shared Storage Accesses (SYNCSTG)
        • Initialize Exception Handler Control Actions (INITEHCA)
        • Materialize Exception Description (MATEXCPD)
        • Modify Exception Description (MODEXCPD)
        • Retrieve Exception Data (RETEXCPD)
        • Return From Exception (RTNEXCP)
        • Sense Exception Description (SNSEXCPD)
        • Signal Exception (SIGEXCP)
        • Test Exception (TESTEXCP)
        • Materialize Process Message (MATPRMSG)
        • Materialize Context (MATCTX)
        • Materialize Authority (MATAU)
        • Materialize Authority List (MATAL)
        • Materialize Authorized Objects (MATAUOBJ)
        • Materialize Authorized Users (MATAUU)
        • Materialize User Profile (MATUP)
        • Materialize User Profile Pointers from ID (MATUPID)
        • Modify Invocation Authority Attributes (MODINVAU)
        • Test Authority (TESTAU)
        • Test Extended Authorities (TESTEAU)
        • Test User List Authority (TESTULA)
        • Materialize Process Activation Groups (MATPRAGP)
        • Materialize Process Attributes (MATPRATR)
        • PCO Pointer (PCOPTR)
        • Retrieve Thread Count (RETTHCNT)
        • Retrieve Thread Identifier (RETTHID)
        • Return PCO Pointer (PCOPTR2)
        • Test Initial Thread (TSTINLTH)
        • Test Pending Interrupts (TESTINTR)
        • Wait On Time (WAITTIME)
        • Ensure Object (ENSOBJ)
        • Materialize Access Group Attributes (MATAGAT)
        • Materialize Resource Management Data (MATRMD)
        • Set Access State (SETACST)
        • Yield (YIELD)
        • Materialize Dump Space (MATDMPS)
        • Materialize Journal Port Attributes (MATJPAT)
        • Materialize Journal Space Attributes (MATJSAT)
        • Materialize Journaled Object Attributes (MATJOAT)
        • Materialize Journaled Objects (MATJOBJ)
        • Materialize Instruction Attributes (MATINAT)
        • Materialize System Object (MATSOBJ)
        • Test Performance Data Collection (TESTPDC)
        • Test Temporary Object (TESTTOBJ)
        • Generate Universal Unique Identifier (GENUUID)
        • Materialize Machine Attributes (MATMATR)
        • Materialize Machine Data (MATMDATA)
        • Materialize Machine Information (MATMIF)
      • Machine Interface Exceptions
        • Exception Specifications
        • Error Conditions
        • 0201 Object Ineligible for Access Group
        • 0401 Access State Specification Invalid
        • 0601 Space Addressing Violation
        • 0602 Boundary Alignment
        • 0603 Range
        • 0604 External Data Object Not Found
        • 0605 Invalid Space Reference
        • 0607 Unsupported Space Use
        • 0609 Space Address Is Not A Teraspace Storage Address
        • 0801 Parameter Reference Violation
        • 0802 Argument List Length Violation
        • 0803 Argument List Length Modification Violation
        • 0A01 Unauthorized for Operation
        • 0A02 Privileged Instruction
        • 0A03 Attempt to Grant/Retract Authority State to an Object That Is Not Authorized
        • 0A04 Special Authorization Required
        • 0A05 Create/Modify User Profile Beyond Level of Authorization
        • 0A06 Grant/Retract Authority Invalid
        • 0A08 Unable to Generate UID/GID
        • 0A09 Duplicate UID/GID Specified
        • 0A0A ID Index Not Available
        • 0A0B Cannot Transfer to New Owner or Primary Group
        • 0C01 Conversion
        • 0C02 Decimal Data
        • 0C03 Decimal Point Alignment
        • 0C04 Edit Digit Count
        • 0C05 Edit Mask Syntax
        • 0C06 Floating-Point Overflow
        • 0C07 Floating-Point Underflow
        • 0C08 Length Conformance
        • 0C09 Floating-Point Invalid Operand
        • 0C0A Size
        • 0C0B Zero Divide
        • 0C0C Invalid Floating-Point Conversion
        • 0C0D Floating-Point Inexact Result
        • 0C0E Floating-Point Zero Divide
        • 0C0F Master Key Not Defined
        • 0C10 Weak Key Not Valid
        • 0C11 Key Parity Invalid
        • 0C12 Invalid Extended Character Data
        • 0C13 Invalid Extended Character Operation
        • 0C14 Invalid Compressed Data
        • 0C15 Date Boundary Overflow
        • 0C16 Data Format Error
        • 0C17 Data Value Error
        • 0C18 Date Boundary Underflow
        • 0C19 Space Pointer Operands Do Not Point to the Same Space Object
        • 0C20 Substitution Character Used
        • 0C21 Source Verification Error
        • 0C22 Unpaired Shift Control
        • 0C23 Source Information Error
        • 0C24 Receiver Buffer Length Exceeded
        • 0E01 Duplicate Object Identification
        • 0E02 Object Ineligible for Context
        • 1002 Machine Context Damage State
        • 1004 System Object Damage State
        • 1005 Authority Verification Terminated Due to Damaged Object
        • 1044 Partial System Object Damage
        • 1201 Conversion Mapping Error
        • 1202 Key Mapping Error
        • 1203 Cursor Not Set
        • 1204 Data Space Entry Limit Exceeded
        • 1205 Data Space Entry Already Locked
        • 1206 Data Space Entry Not Found
        • 1207 Data Space Index Invalid
        • 1208 Incomplete Key Description
        • 1209 Duplicate Key Value in Existing Data Space Entry
        • 120A End of Path
        • 120B Duplicate Key Value Detected
        • 120D No Entries Locked, or Entries Locked to a Different Thread
        • 120F Duplicate Key Value in Uncommitted Data Space Entry
        • 1211 Compare Key Mapping Error
        • 1212 Incomplete Compare Key Description
        • 1213 Invalid Mapping Template
        • 1214 Invalid Selection Template
        • 1215 Data Space Not Addressed by Index
        • 1216 Data Space Not Addressed by Cursor
        • 1217 Key Value Changed Since Set Cursor
        • 1218 Invalid Key Value Modification
        • 1219 Invalid Rule Option
        • 121A Data Space Entry Size Exceeded
        • 121B Logical Data Space Entry Size Limit Exceeded
        • 121C Key Size Limit Exceeded
        • 121D Logical Key Size Limit Exceeded
        • 1221 Unable to Maintain a Unique Key Data Space Index
        • 1225 Invalid Database Operation
        • 1226 Data Space Index with Invalid Floating-Point Field Build Termination
        • 1227 Data Space Index Key with Invalid Floating-Point Field
        • 1230 Specified Data Space Entry Rejected
        • 1231 New Data Space Entry Image Rejected
        • 1232 Join Value Changed
        • 1233 Data Space Index with Non-User Exit Selection Routine Build Termination
        • 1234 Non-User Exit Selection Routine Failure
        • 1236 No Mapping Code Specified
        • 1237 Operation Not Valid with Join Cursor
        • 1238 Derived Field Operation Error
        • 1239 Derived Field Operation Error During Build Index
        • 1240 Invalid Entry Definition Table
        • 1241 ISV Parameter Value in Runtime Data Pointer Array Not Correct
        • 1242 Non-Unique Fanout on Unique Join
        • 1243 Invalid Data Definitional Attributes Template (DDAT)
        • 1245 Invalid Frogger Array Template
        • 1246 Invalid Global Literal List
        • 1247 Invalid Per-Data Space Selection Template
        • 1248 Recreate/Replace Cursor
        • 1249 No Control Block for Shared Derivation
        • 1250 Referential Constraint Violation
        • 1251 Object Unavailable for Referential Constraint Enforcement
        • 1252 Invalid Constraint State
        • 1253 Invalid Journal for Referential Constraint Enforcement
        • 1254 Cursor must be Activated Under Secondary Commit Cycle
        • 1255 Operation Conflict with Data Space Constraints
        • 1256 Constraint Structure Damage
        • 1257 Check Constraint Violation
        • 1263 Data Space Index Templates are Invalid
        • 1264 Data Space Index Templates/Keys are Invalid
        • 1265 Copy Index Not Temporary (Invalid - Nonenforcing)
        • 1266 Data Spaces for Copy Index and Permanent Index do Not Match
        • 129D Maximum Number of Unique Encoded Vector Index Values Exceeded
        • 1401 Duplicate Event Monitor
        • 1402 Event Monitor Not Present
        • 1403 Machine Event Requires Specification of a Compare Value
        • 1404 Wait On Event Attempted While Masked
        • 1405 Disable Timer Event Monitor Invalid
        • 1406 Signal Timer Event Monitor Invalid
        • 1407 Wait on Event Not Allowed in Kernel Mode
        • 1601 Exception Description Status Invalid
        • 1602 Exception State of Thread Invalid
        • 1603 Invalid Invocation Address
        • 1604 Retry/Resume Invalid
        • 1605 No Inquiry Message Found for Reply Message
        • 1606 Invalid Control Action Specified
        • 1801 Duplicate Key Argument in Index
        • 1A01 Invalid Lock State
        • 1A02 Lock Request Not Grantable
        • 1A03 Invalid Unlock Request
        • 1A04 Invalid Object Lock Transfer Request
        • 1A05 Invalid Space Location Unlocked
        • 1C01 Machine-Dependent Request Invalid
        • 1C02 Program Limitation Exceeded
        • 1C03 Machine Storage Limit Exceeded
        • 1C04 Object Storage Limit Exceeded
        • 1C05 System Address Range Limit Exceeded
        • 1C06 Machine Lock Limit Exceeded
        • 1C07 Modify Main Storage Pool Controls Invalid
        • 1C08 Requested Function Not Valid
        • 1C09 Auxiliary Storage Pool Number Invalid
        • 1C0A Service Processor Unable to Process Request
        • 1C0B Program Not Valid for Machine
        • 1C0C Attribute Cannot be Modified from Current Partition
        • 1C0D Requested Data Collection Function Not Valid
        • 1C0E IASP Resources Exceeded
        • 1C0F Software License Management Function Failed
        • 1C10 Failure Due to Logical Partitioning Action
        • 1C11 Independent ASP Varied Off
        • 1C12 Requested function not performed
        • 1E01 Program Not Observable
        • 1E02 Invocation Not Found
        • 1E03 Invalid D-Code Instruction
        • 1E04 DBGINT Error
        • 1E05 DBGINT Error on Operation
        • 2001 Diagnose
        • 2002 Machine Check
        • 2003 Function Check
        • 2004 Invalid IBM i PASE System Call
        • 2201 Object Not Found
        • 2202 Object Destroyed
        • 2203 Object Suspended
        • 2204 Object Not Eligible for Operation
        • 2205 Object Not Available to Process
        • 2206 Object Not Eligible for Destruction
        • 2207 Authority Verification Terminated Due to Destroyed Object
        • 2208 Object Compressed
        • 220A Program Not Eligible for Operation
        • 220B Object Not Available
        • 220D Object has Partial Transactions
        • 2401 Pointer Does Not Exist
        • 2402 Pointer Type Invalid
        • 2403 Pointer Addressing Invalid Object Type
        • 2404 Pointer Not Resolved
        • 2602 Queue Full
        • 2801 Process Ineligible for Operation
        • 2802 Process Control Space Not Associated with a Process
        • 2803 User Profile UID/GID Invalid
        • 2804 Thread Handle Not Associated with an Active Thread
        • 280A Process Attribute Modification Invalid
        • 2A01 Program Header Invalid
        • 2A02 ODT Syntax Error
        • 2A03 ODT Relational Error
        • 2A04 Operation Code Invalid
        • 2A05 Invalid Op Code Extender Field
        • 2A06 Invalid Operand Type
        • 2A07 Invalid Operand Attribute
        • 2A08 Invalid Operand Value Range
        • 2A09 Invalid Branch Target Operand
        • 2A0A Invalid Operand Length
        • 2A0B Invalid Number of Operands
        • 2A0C Invalid Operand ODT Reference
        • 2A0D Reserved Bits are Not Zero
        • 2A10 Automatic Storage for Procedure Exceeds Maximum
        • 2A11 Machine Automatic Storage Exceeds Maximum
        • 2A12 Data Type or Length of Initial Value Not Valid
        • 2A13 Exceeded Internal Limit on Number of Temporary Segments
        • 2A14 Static Data Initialized to Address of Automatic Data
        • 2A15 Initial Value for Static Data Not Valid
        • 2A16 Number of Procedures Exceeds Maximum Allowed
        • 2A17 Type Table Entry Not Valid
        • 2A18 Alias Table Entry Not Valid
        • 2A19 Size of Constants Exceeds Maximum
        • 2A1A Procedure Size Exceeds Maximum
        • 2A1B Instruction Stream Not Valid
        • 2A1C Size of Literals Exceeds Maximum
        • 2A1D Dictionary Entry Not Valid
        • 2A1E Level of Machine Interface Not Supported on Target Release
        • 2A1F Size of Dictionary Exceeds Maximum
        • 2A20 Internal Machine Operation Not Valid
        • 2A21 Size of Internal Binding Table Exceeds Maximum
        • 2A22 Size of Internal Label Table Exceeds Maximum
        • 2A23 Size of Internal Symbolic Register Table Exceeds Maximum
        • 2A24 Size of Internal Computation Table Exceeds Maximum
        • 2A28 Size of Internal Basic Block Table Exceeds Maximum
        • 2A29 Size of Internal Successor Arc Table Exceeds Maximum
        • 2A2A Size of Internal Register Table Exceeds Maximum
        • 2A2B Size of Internal Late Bound Offset Table Exceeds Maximum
        • 2A2C Invalid Function Prototype Component Entry
        • 2A5E An Error was Detected in a Static Storage Definition or Initialization
        • 2A5F Overlapping Initializations Not Valid
        • 2A60 Dictionary ID is Not Valid
        • 2A61 Binding Specification Value Not Valid
        • 2A62 Copyright Component Value Not Valid
        • 2A63 Module Limitation Exceeded
        • 2AA0 Attempt to Delete Part that May Not be Deleted
        • 2AB0 Object List Referential Extension Not Valid
        • 2AB1 Symbol Resolution List Referential Extension Not Valid
        • 2AB2 Service Program Export List Referential Extension Not Valid
        • 2AB3 Secondary Associated Spaces List Referential Extension Not Valid
        • 2AB4 Program Limitation Exceeded
        • 2AB5 Observable Information Necessary For Retranslation Not Encapsulated
        • 2AB6 Procedure Order List Referential Extension Not Valid
        • 2AC0 Attempt to Delete Part that May Not be Deleted
        • 2AC1 An Attempt was Made to Delete a Required Module Part
        • 2C01 Return Instruction Invalid
        • 2C02 Return Point Invalid
        • 2C04 Branch Target Invalid
        • 2C05 Activation in Use by Invocation
        • 2C06 Instruction Cancellation
        • 2C07 Instruction Termination
        • 2C08 Branch Target Defined by Label Pointer Not Valid
        • 2C10 Process Object Destroyed
        • 2C11 Process Object Access Invalid
        • 2C12 Activation Group Access Violation
        • 2C13 Activation Group Not Found
        • 2C14 Activation Group in Use
        • 2C15 Invalid Operation for Program
        • 2C16 Program Activation Not Found
        • 2C17 Default Activation Group Not Destroyed
        • 2C18 Invalid Source Invocation
        • 2C19 Invalid Origin Invocation
        • 2C1A Invocation Offset Outside Range of Current Stack
        • 2C1B Invocation Not Eligible for Operation
        • 2C1C Instruction Not Valid for Invocation Type
        • 2C1D Automatic Storage Overflow
        • 2C1E Activation Access Violation
        • 2C1F Program Signature Violation
        • 2C20 Static Storage Overflow
        • 2C21 Program Import Invalid
        • 2C22 Data Reference Invalid
        • 2C23 Imported Object Invalid
        • 2C24 Activation Group Export Conflict
        • 2C25 Import Not Found
        • 2C26 Invalid Activation Group
        • 2C27 Unresolved Import
        • 2C28 Activation Group Directory Error
        • 2C2A Argument Optimization Interface Error
        • 2E01 User Profile Storage Limit Exceeded
        • 2E02 Security Audit Journal Failure
        • 3001 Apply Journal Changes Failure
        • 3002 Entry Not Journaled
        • 3003 Maximum Objects Through a Journal Port Limit Exceeded
        • 3004 Invalid Journal Space
        • 3006 Journal Space not at a Recoverable Boundary
        • 3007 Journal ID Not Unique
        • 3008 Object Already Being Journaled
        • 300A Data Space Index Currently Journaled
        • 300B Data Space Index Currently in Force Mode
        • 300C Underlying Data Space Not Journaled to Same Journal
        • 300E File ID Not Available
        • 3010 Unrecoverable System Managed Access Path Protection Failure
        • 3011 Journal Violation
        • 3012 Object Entry Invalid
        • 3020 Remote Journal Operation Error
        • 3201 Scalar Type Invalid
        • 3202 Scalar Attributes Invalid
        • 3203 Scalar Value Invalid
        • 3401 Source/Sink Configuration Invalid
        • 3402 Source/Sink Physical Address Invalid
        • 3403 Source/Sink Object State Invalid
        • 3404 Source/Sink Resource Not Available
        • 3441 Invalid Starting Verb Index was Specified
        • 3442 System Pointer Area was Tagged and Non-Zero
        • 3443 Invalid Open in List of Operations
        • 3444 Unsupported Stream Operation
        • 3445 Incorrect Length Specified
        • 3601 Space Extension/Truncation
        • 3602 Invalid Space Modification
        • 3801 Template Value Invalid
        • 3802 Template Size Invalid
        • 3803 Materialization Length Invalid
        • 3804 Invalid Mutex
        • 3A01 Dequeue Time-Out
        • 3A02 Lock Time-Out
        • 3A03 Event Time-Out
        • 3A04 Space Location Lock Wait Time-Out
        • 3C01 Invalid Service Session State
        • 3C02 Unable to Start Service Session
        • 3E01 Invalid Commit Block Status Change
        • 3E02 Commit Block must be Decommitted
        • 3E03 Commit Block is Attached to Process or Transaction Control Structure
        • 3E04 Commit Blocks Control Uncommitted Changes
        • 3E05 Operation Not Valid on Commit Block in Prepared State
        • 3E06 Commitment Control Resource Limit Exceeded
        • 3E07 Operation Not Valid on Commit Block in Decommit Only State
        • 3E08 Object Under Commitment Control Being Journaled Incorrectly
        • 3E09 Reconstruct of Commit Block Environment Failure
        • 3E10 Operation Not Valid Under Commitment Control
        • 3E11 Process or transaction control space has attempted to attach too many commit blocks
        • 3E12 Objects Under Commitment Control
        • 3E13 Commit Block Not Journaled
        • 3E14 Errors During Decommit
        • 3E15 Object Ineligible for Commitment Control
        • 3E16 Object Ineligible for Removal from Commitment Control
        • 4001 Dump Data Space Size Limit Exceeded
        • 4002 Invalid Dump Data Insertion
        • 4003 Invalid Dump Space Modification
        • 4004 Invalid Dump Data Retrieval
        • 4401 Object Domain or Hardware Storage Protection Violation
        • 4402 Literal Values Cannot Be Changed
        • 4403 Cannot Change Contents of Protected Context
        • 4501 Invalid Heap Identifier
        • 4502 Invalid Request
        • 4503 Heap Space Full
        • 4504 Invalid Size Request
        • 4505 Heap Space Destroyed
        • 4506 Invalid Heap Space Condition
        • 4507 Invalid Mark Identifier
        • 4601 Queue Space Not Associated with the Process
        • 4602 Queue Space Cannot be Modified
        • 4603 Message Reference Index Does Not Identify a Valid Message
        • 4604 Queue Space Not Eligible for Destruction
        • 4801 Function Code Out of Range
        • 4802 Kernel Environment Already Active
        • 4803 Kernel Environment Not Initialized
        • 4804 Kernel Environment Not Active
        • 4805 MI Wait in Kernel Mode Terminated
        • 4AA0 Generic Java Exception
        • 4AA1 Java Class Format Error
        • 4AA2 Java Verify Error
        • 4AA3 Java Archive File Error
        • 4AA4 Java Invalid Native Method Return
        • 4AA5 Java Virtual Machine Terminated
        • 4AA6 Java Native Interface Unattached Caller
        • 4AA7 Java Stand-Alone Program Creation Error
        • 4C01 Asynchronous Signal Terminated MI Wait
        • 4C02 Signal Controls not Initialized
        • 4C03 Asynchronous Signal Received
        • 4E01 Invalid Handle
        • 4E02 Invalid Handle Type
        • 4E03 Handle-Based Primitive Exists
    • Common API programming errors
      • Using the error code parameter
      • Defining data structures
      • Defining receiver variables
      • Defining list-entry format lengths
      • Using null pointers with program-based APIs
      • Defining byte alignment
      • Using offsets in a user space
      • Coding for new functions
  • CICS
  • Control language
    • Control language overview
    • What's new for IBM i 7.4
    • PDF files for Control language
    • CL command finder
    • Alphabetic list of CL commands by command name
    • CL commands by product
      • IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities commands
      • IBM Advanced Job Scheduler for i commands
      • IBM Application Management Toolset commands
      • IBM Backup, Recovery and Media Services for i commands
      • IBM Business Graphics Utility commands
      • IBM CICS Transaction Server for i commands
      • IBM Communications Utilities commands
      • IBM Content Manager OnDemand for i commands
      • IBM DB2 DataPropagator commands
      • IBM DB2 Query Manager and SQL Development Kit for i commands
      • IBM Developer Kit for Java commands
      • IBM HTTP Server for i commands
      • IBM Infoprint Server commands
      • IBM i commands
      • IBM i Access for Web commands
      • IBM Managed System Services for i commands
      • IBM Performance Tools for i commands
      • IBM PowerHA SystemMirror for i commands
      • IBM Query for i commands
      • IBM Rational Development Studio for i commands
      • IBM System Manager for i commands
      • IBM TCP/IP Connectivity Utilities for i commands
    • CL concepts
      • System operation control
        • Control language
        • Menus
        • Messages
          • Message descriptions
          • Message queues
      • CL commands
        • CL command names
          • Abbreviations used in CL commands and keywords
            • CL command verb abbreviations
            • CL command abbreviations
            • CL command keyword abbreviations
        • CL command parts
          • CL command syntax
          • CL command label
          • CL command parameters
          • CL command delimiter characters
          • CL command continuation
          • CL command comments
        • CL command definition
        • CL command coding rules
        • CL command information and documentation
          • CL command documentation format
            • CL environment classification
            • CL threadsafe classification
            • CL command description
            • CL parameters
            • CL command coding examples
            • CL error messages
          • CL command help
          • Printing CL command descriptions on the system
          • CL command prompters
        • CL commands that operate on IBM i objects
        • CL commands that operate on multiple objects
      • CL programs and procedures
        • CL procedure
        • CL module
        • CL program
        • Service program
      • CL parameters
        • Parameter values
          • Constant values
            • Character strings
            • Hexadecimal values
            • Date values
            • Decimal values
            • Logical values
            • Floating-point constants
          • Variable name
          • Expressions
          • List of values
        • Parameters in keyword and positional form
        • Required, optional, and key parameters
        • Commonly used parameters
          • AUT parameter
          • CLS parameter
          • COUNTRY parameter
          • FILETYPE parameter
          • FRCRATIO parameter
          • IGCFEAT parameter
          • JOB parameter
          • LABEL parameter
          • LICOPT parameter
          • MAXACT parameter
          • OBJ parameter
          • OBJTYPE parameter
          • OUTPUT parameter
          • PRTTXT parameter
          • REPLACE parameter
          • JOBPTY, OUTPTY, and PTYLMT scheduling priority parameters
          • SEV parameter
          • SPLNBR parameter
          • TEXT parameter
          • VOL parameter
          • WAITFILE parameter
        • Parameter values used for testing and debugging
          • Program-variable description
          • Basing-pointer description
          • Subscript description
          • Qualified-name description
      • Control language elements
        • CL character sets and values
          • Character sets
            • Double-byte character text in CL commands
          • Special character use
          • Symbolic operators
          • Predefined values
        • Expressions in CL commands
          • Arithmetic expressions
          • Character string expressions
            • Example: Character string expressions
            • Example: Using character strings and variables
          • Relational expressions
          • Logical expressions
          • Operators in expressions
          • Priority of operators when evaluating expressions
        • Built-in functions for CL
        • Naming within commands
          • Folder and document names
      • IBM i objects
        • Library objects
        • External object types
        • Simple and qualified object names
        • Generic object names
        • Object naming rules
          • Communication names (*CNAME)
          • Generic names (*GENERIC)
          • Names (*NAME)
          • Path names (*PNAME)
          • Simple names (*SNAME)
          • Additional rules for unique names
      • Database files and device files used by CL commands
    • CL programming
      • Process for creating a CL program or CL procedure
        • Interactive entry
        • Batch entry
        • Parts of a CL source program
        • Example: Simple CL program
      • Commands used in CL programs or procedures
        • Common commands used in CL programs and procedures
      • Operations performed by CL programs or procedures
      • Variables in CL commands
        • Declaring variables to a CL program or procedure
        • Uses for based variables
        • Uses for defined variables
        • Variables to use for specifying a list or qualified name
        • Cases of characters in variables
        • Variables that replace reserved or numeric parameter values
        • Changing the value of a variable
        • Trailing blanks on command parameters
        • Writing comments in CL programs or procedures
      • Controlling processing within a CL program or CL procedure
        • GOTO command and command labels in a CL program or procedure
        • IF command in a CL program or procedure
        • ELSE command in a CL program or procedure
        • Embedded IF commands in a CL program or procedure
        • DO command and DO groups in a CL program or procedure
        • Showing DO and SELECT nesting levels
        • DOUNTIL command in a CL program or procedure
        • DOWHILE command in a CL program or procedure
        • DOFOR command in a CL program or procedure
        • ITERATE command in a CL program or procedure
        • LEAVE command in a CL program or procedure
        • CALLSUBR command in a CL program or procedure
        • SELECT command and SELECT groups in a CL program or procedure
        • SUBR command and subroutines in a CL program or procedure
        • *AND, *OR, and *NOT operators
        • %ADDRESS built-in function
        • %BINARY built-in function
        • %CHAR built-in function
        • %CHECK built-in function
        • %CHECKR built-in function
        • %DEC built-in function
        • %INT built-in function
        • %LEN built-in function
        • %LOWER built-in function
        • %OFFSET built-in function
        • %PARMS built-in function
        • %SCAN built-in function
        • %SIZE built-in function
        • %SUBSTRING built-in function
        • %SWITCH built-in function
          • %SWITCH with the IF command
          • %SWITCH with the Change Variable command
        • %TRIM built-in function
        • %TRIML built-in function
        • %TRIMR built-in function
        • %UINT built-in function
        • %UPPER built-in function
        • Monitor Message command
      • Retrieving values that can be used as variables
        • Retrieving system values
          • Example: Retrieving QTIME system value
          • Retrieving the QDATE system value into a CL variable
        • Retrieving configuration source
        • Retrieving configuration status
        • Retrieving network attributes
          • Example: Using the Retrieve Network Attributes command
        • Retrieving job attributes
          • Example: Using the Retrieve Job Attributes command
        • Retrieving user profile attributes
          • Example: Using the Retrieve User Profile command
        • Retrieving member description information
          • Example: Using the Retrieve Member Description command
      • Compiling CL source program
        • Setting create options in the CL source program
        • Embedding CL commands from another source member
        • Logging CL program or procedure commands
        • Retrieving CL source code
        • CL module compiler listings
        • Common compilation errors
        • Obtaining a CL dump
        • Displaying module attributes
        • Displaying program attributes
        • Return code summary
      • Compiling source programs for a previous release
        • Previous-release (*PRV) libraries
        • Installing CL compiler support for a previous release
      • Controlling flow and communicating between programs and procedures
        • Passing control to another program or procedure
          • Using the Call Program command to pass control
          • Using the Call Bound Procedure command to pass control
          • Using the Return command to pass control
        • Passing parameters
          • Using the Call Program command to pass control to a called program
          • Common errors when calling programs and procedures
            • Data type errors using the CALL command
            • Data type errors when passing parameters
            • Decimal length and precision errors
            • Character length errors
      • Communicating between programs and procedures
        • Using data queues
          • Remote data queues
          • Comparisons with using database files as queues
          • Similarities to message queues
          • Prerequisites for using data queues
          • Managing the storage used by a data queue
          • Allocating data queues
          • Examples: Using a data queue
            • Example: Waiting up to two hours to receive data from data queue
            • Example: Waiting for input from a display file and an ICF file
            • Example: Waiting for input from a display file and a data queue
          • Creating data queues associated with an output queue
          • Creating data queues associated with jobs
        • Using data areas
          • Local data area
          • Group data area
          • Program Initialization Parameter data area
          • Remote data areas
          • Creating a data area
          • Data area locking and allocation
          • Displaying a data area
          • Changing a data area
          • Retrieving a data area
          • Examples: Retrieving a data area
            • Example: Retrieving data area ORDINFO
            • Example: Retrieving data area DA1
            • Example: Retrieving data area DA2
          • Example: Changing and retrieving a data area
      • Defining and documenting CL commands
        • Defining CL commands
          • CL command definition statements
            • Creating user-defined CL commands
          • CL command definition process
            • Create Command command
            • Command definition object
            • CL command validity checking
            • CL command prompt override program
            • Command processing program
            • CL command exit programs and independent ASPs
            • Authority needed for defining CL commands
            • Example: Creating a CL command
          • Defining a CL command
            • Using the CMD statement
            • Create options in command definition source
            • Defining CL command parameters
              • Naming the keyword for the CL command parameter
              • CL command parameter types
              • Length of CL command parameter value
              • Default CL command parameter values
              • Example: Defining a CL command parameter
          • Data type and parameter restrictions
          • Defining a CL command list parameter
            • Defining a simple list command parameter
              • Using CL or other HLLs for simple list CL command parameters
              • Using REXX for simple list CL command parameters
            • Defining a mixed list CL command parameter
              • Using CL or other HLLs for mixed list CL command parameters
              • Using REXX for mixed list CL command parameters
            • Defining lists within lists for a CL command parameter
              • Using CL or other HLLs for lists within lists
              • Using REXX for lists within lists
            • Defining a qualified name CL command parameter
              • Using CL or other HLLs for a qualified name CL command parameter
              • Using REXX for a qualified name CL command parameter
            • Defining a dependent relationship between CL command parameters
            • Possible choices and values for a CL command parameter
          • Specifying prompt control for a CL command parameter
            • Specifying conditional prompting for a CL command parameter
            • Hiding additional or advanced parameters when prompting a CL command
          • Key parameters and prompt override programs for a CL command
            • Using a prompt override program for a CL command
              • Identifying key parameters for a CL command
              • Prompt override program for a CL command
                • Parameters passed to the prompt override program
                • Information returned from the prompt override program
                • Allowing for errors in a prompt override program
              • Specifying a prompt override program when creating or changing a CL command
            • Example: Using a prompt override program
          • Creating a CL command
            • CL command definition source listing
            • Common errors when processing CL command definition statements
          • Displaying a CL command definition
          • Effect of changing the command definition of a CL command in a procedure or program
            • Changing CL command defaults
            • Examples: Changing CL command defaults
          • Command processing program for a CL command
            • CL or HLL command processing program
            • REXX command processing procedure for a CL command
          • Validity checking program for a CL command
          • Examples: Defining and creating CL commands
            • Example: Calling application programs
            • Example: Substituting a default value
            • Example: Displaying an output queue
            • Example: Displaying messages from IBM-supplied commands
            • Example: Creating abbreviated change job CL command
            • Example: Creating abbreviated printer writer CL command
            • Example: CL command for deleting files and source members
            • Example: CL command for deleting program objects
        • Documenting a CL command
          • CL commands and command online help
          • Writing CL command help
            • Generating UIM source for CL command help
            • Common help sharing between CL commands
            • Organizing CL online help text into help modules
          • Generating HTML source for CL command documentation
        • Proxy CL commands
      • Command-related APIs
        • QCAPCMD program
        • QCMDEXC program
          • QCMDEXC program with DBCS data
        • QCMDCHK program
      • Prompting for user input at run time
        • Using the IBM i prompter within a CL procedure or program
        • Using selective prompting for CL commands
        • Using QCMDEXC with prompting in CL procedures and programs
      • Entering program source
        • Using the Start Programmer Menu command
          • Using the EXITPGM parameter of the Start Programmer Menu command
      • Command analyzer exit points
      • Designing application programs for DBCS data
        • Designing DBCS application programs
        • Converting alphanumeric programs to process DBCS data
        • Using DBCS data in a CL program
      • Unicode support in control language
        • Unicode overview
        • Design of Unicode in control language
        • Example: Passing the EBCDIC and Unicode value
        • Calling Unicode-enabled commands
      • Loading and running an application from tape or optical media
        • Example: QINSTAPP program
      • Transferring control to improve performance
        • Example: Using the Transfer Control command
        • Passing parameters using the Transfer Control command
      • Examples: CL programming
        • Example: Initial program for setup (programmer)
        • Example: Saving specific objects in an application (system operator)
        • Example: Recovery from abnormal end (system operator)
        • Example: Timing out while waiting for input from a device display
        • Example: Performing date arithmetic
    • Debugging CL programs and procedures
      • Debugging ILE programs
        • Debug commands
        • Preparing a program object for a debug session
          • Using a root source view to debug ILE programs
          • Using a listing view to debug ILE programs
          • Encrypting the debug listing view
          • Using a statement view to debug ILE programs
        • Starting the ILE source debugger
        • Adding program objects to a debug session
        • Removing program objects from a debug session
        • Viewing the program source
          • Changing a module object
          • Changing the module object view
        • Setting and removing breakpoints
          • Setting and removing unconditional breakpoints
          • Setting and removing conditional breakpoints
          • Using the Work with Breakpoints display
          • Using the BREAK and CLEAR debug commands to set and remove conditional breakpoints
          • National Language Sort Sequence
          • Examples: Conditional breakpoint
          • Removing all breakpoints
        • Using instruction stepping
          • F10 (Step) to step over program objects or F22 (Step into) to step into program objects
          • Using the STEP debug command to step through a program object
        • Displaying variables
          • Example: Displaying logical variable
          • Examples: Displaying character variable
          • Example: Displaying decimal variable
          • Example: Displaying variables as hexadecimal values
        • Changing the value of variables
          • Example: Changing logical variable
          • Examples: Changing character variable
          • Examples: Changing decimal variable
        • Displaying variable attributes
        • Equating a name with a variable, an expression, or a command
        • Source debug and IBM i globalization
          • Working with *SOURCE view
        • Operations that temporarily remove steps
      • Debugging original program model programs
        • Starting debug mode
          • Adding programs to debug mode
          • Preventing updates to database files in production libraries
        • Displaying the call stack
          • Program activations
        • Handling unmonitored messages
        • Breakpoints
          • Adding breakpoints to programs
          • Adding conditional breakpoints
          • Removing breakpoints from programs
        • Traces
          • Adding traces to programs
          • Using instruction stepping
          • Using breakpoints within traces
          • Removing trace information from the system
          • Removing traces from programs
        • Displaying testing information
        • Displaying the values of variables
        • Changing the values of variables
        • Reasons for using a job to debug another job
          • Debugging batch jobs that are submitted to a job queue
          • Debugging batch jobs that are not started from job queues
          • Debugging a job that is running
          • Debugging another interactive job
          • Considerations when debugging one job from another job
        • Debugging at the machine interface level
        • Security considerations
        • Operations that temporarily remove breakpoints
    • Objects and libraries
      • Objects
        • Object types and common attributes
        • Functions performed on objects
          • Functions the system performs automatically
          • Functions you can perform using commands
      • Libraries
        • Library lists
          • Functions of using a library list
          • A job's library list
          • Changing the library list
          • Considerations for using a library list
          • Displaying a library list
          • Using library lists to search for objects
            • Generic object names searching
            • Searching for multiple objects or a single object
      • Using libraries
        • Creating a library
        • Authority for libraries specification
          • Object authority
          • Data authority
          • Combined authority
        • Security considerations for objects
          • The Display Audit Journal Entries command to generate security journal audit reports
        • Setting default public authority
        • Setting default auditing attribute
        • Placing objects in libraries
        • Deleting and clearing libraries
        • Displaying library names and contents
        • Displaying and retrieving library descriptions
      • Changing national language versions
        • Static prompt message for control language
        • Dynamic prompt message for control language
      • Describing objects
      • Displaying object descriptions
      • Retrieving object descriptions
        • Example: Using the Retrieve Object Description command
      • Creation information for objects
      • Detecting unused objects on the system
      • Moving objects from one library to another
      • Creating duplicate objects
      • Renaming objects
      • Object compression or decompression
        • Restrictions for compression of objects
        • Temporarily decompressed objects
        • Automatic decompression of objects
      • Deleting objects
      • Allocating resources
        • Lock states for objects
        • Displaying the lock states for objects
      • Accessing objects in CL programs
        • Accessing command definitions, files, and procedures
          • Accessing command definitions
          • Accessing files
          • Accessing procedures
        • Checking for the existence of an object
      • Working with files in CL programs or procedures
        • Data manipulation commands
        • Files in a CL program or procedure
        • Opening and closing files in a CL program or procedure
        • Declaring a file
        • Sending and receiving data with a display file
        • Example: Writing a CL program or procedure to control a menu
        • Overriding display files in a CL procedure or program (OVRDSPF command)
        • Working with multiple device display files
        • Receiving data from a database file (RCVF command)
        • Reading a file multiple times (CLOSE command)
        • Overriding database files in a CL procedure or program (OVRDBF command)
        • Output files from display commands
    • Messages
      • Defining message descriptions
        • Creating a message file
          • Message files in independent ASPs
          • Determining the size of a message file
        • Adding messages to a file
          • Assigning a message identifier
          • Defining messages and message help
          • Defining substitution variables
          • Assigning a severity code
          • Specifying validity checking for replies
          • Example: Sending an immediate message and handling a reply
            • Sending immediate messages with double-byte characters
          • Defining default values for replies
          • Specifying default message handling for escape messages
            • Example: Sending the last diagnostic message as an escape message
            • Specifying the alert option
          • Example: Describing a message
          • Defining double-byte messages
        • Viewing messages
        • Message file searching
          • System message file searches
          • Overriding message files
            • Example: Overriding a message file
      • Message queues
        • Types of message queues
        • Creating or changing a message queue
          • Message queues in independent ASPs
          • Message queues in break mode
          • Placing a message queue in break mode automatically
        • Job message queues
          • External message queue
          • Call message queue
      • Commands used to send messages to a system user
      • Commands used to send messages from a CL program
        • Inquiry and informational messages
        • Completion and diagnostic messages
        • Status messages
        • Escape and notify messages
        • Examples: Sending messages
        • Identifying a call stack entry
          • Using the Send Program Message command as the base
          • Identifying the base entry by name
          • Using the program boundary as a base (*PGMBDY)
          • Using the most recently called procedure as a base (*PGMNAME)
          • Using a control boundary as a base (*CTLBDY)
          • Considerations for service programs
      • Receiving messages into a CL procedure or program
        • Receiving request messages
        • Writing request-processor procedures and programs
        • Determining if a request processor exists
      • Retrieving message descriptions from a message file
      • Removing messages from a message queue
      • Monitoring for messages in a CL program or procedure
        • Watching for messages
        • CL handling for unmonitored messages
        • Monitoring for notify messages
        • Monitoring for status messages
        • Preventing the display of status messages
      • Receiving a message from a program or procedure that has ended
      • Break-handling programs
      • Ways of handling replies to inquiry messages
        • Using a sender copy message to obtain a reply
        • Finding the job that sent the reply
        • Using the system reply list
        • Using the reply handling exit program
      • Message subfiles in a CL program or procedure
      • Log messages
        • Job log
          • Writing a job log to a file
          • Controlling information written in a job log
          • Job log message filtering
          • Example: Controlling information written in a job log
          • Job log sender or receiver information
          • Displaying a job log
          • Preventing the production of job logs
          • Job log considerations
          • Interactive job log considerations
          • Batch job log considerations
          • Message filtering through the Control Job Log Output API
          • Job log output files
            • Job log direction
            • Primary job log model
        • QHST history log
          • Format of the history log
          • QHST file processing
          • QHST job start and completion messages
          • QHST files deletion
      • QSYSMSG message queue
        • Messages sent to QSYSMSG message queue
        • Example: Receiving messages from QSYSMSG
  • 통신
    • Socket programming
      • PDF files for Socket programming
      • Prerequisites for socket programming
      • How sockets work
      • Socket characteristics
        • Socket address structure
        • Socket address family
          • AF_INET address family
          • AF_INET6 address family
          • AF_UNIX address family
          • AF_UNIX_CCSID address family
        • Socket type
        • Socket protocols
      • Basic socket design
        • Creating a connection-oriented socket
          • Example: A connection-oriented server
          • Example: A connection-oriented client
        • Creating a connectionless socket
          • Example: A connectionless server
          • Example: A connectionless client
        • Designing applications with address families
          • Using AF_INET address family
          • Using AF_INET6 address family
          • Using AF_UNIX address family
            • Example: Server application that uses AF_UNIX address family
            • Example: Client application that uses AF_UNIX address family
          • Using AF_UNIX_CCSID address family
            • Example: Server application that uses AF_UNIX_CCSID address family
            • Example: Client application that uses AF_UNIX_CCSID address family
      • Advanced socket concepts
        • Asynchronous I/O
        • Secure sockets
          • Global Security Kit (GSKit) APIs
          • Secure socket API error code messages
        • Client SOCKS support
        • Thread safety
        • Nonblocking I/O
        • Signals
        • IP multicasting
        • File data transfer—send_file() and accept_and_recv()
        • Out-of-band data
        • I/O multiplexing—select()
        • Socket network functions
        • Domain Name System support
          • Environment variables
          • Data caching
          • Domain Name System Security Extensions (DNSSEC)
        • Berkeley Software Distribution compatibility
        • UNIX 98 compatibility
        • Descriptor passing between processes: sendmsg() and recvmsg()
        • Sockets-related User Exit Points
          • Example: User Exit Program for QIBM_QSO_ACCEPT
      • Socket scenario: Creating an application to accept IPv4 and IPv6 clients
        • Example: Accepting connections from both IPv6 and IPv4 clients
        • Example: IPv4 or IPv6 client
      • Socket application design recommendations
      • Examples: Socket application designs
        • Examples: Connection-oriented designs
          • Example: Writing an iterative server program
          • Example: Using the spawn() API to create child processes
            • Example: Creating a server that uses spawn()
            • Example: Enabling the worker job to receive a data buffer
          • Example: Passing descriptors between processes
            • Example: Server program used for sendmsg() and recvmsg()
            • Example: Worker program used for sendmsg() and recvmsg()
          • Examples: Using multiple accept() APIs to handle incoming requests
            • Example: Server program to create a pool of multiple accept() worker jobs
            • Example: Worker jobs for multiple accept()
          • Example: Generic client
        • Example: Using asynchronous I/O
        • Examples: Establishing secure connections
          • Example: GSKit secure server with asynchronous data receive
          • Example: GSKit secure server with asynchronous handshake
          • Example: Establishing a secure client with Global Security Kit APIs
        • Example: Using gethostbyaddr_r() for threadsafe network routines
        • Example: Nonblocking I/O and select()
        • Using poll() instead of select()
        • Example: Using signals with blocking socket APIs
        • Examples: Using multicasting with AF_INET
          • Example: Sending multicast datagrams
          • Example: Receiving multicast datagrams
        • Example: Updating and querying DNS
        • Examples: Transferring file data using send_file() and accept_and_recv() APIs
          • Example: Using accept_and_recv() and send_file() APIs to send contents of a file
          • Example: Client request for a file
      • Xsockets tool
        • Configuring Xsockets
          • What is created by integrated Xsocket setup
        • Configuring Xsockets to use a Web browser
          • Configuring an Integrated Web Application Server
          • Updating configuration files
          • Configuring Xsockets Web application
          • Testing Xsockets tool in a Web browser
        • Using Xsockets
          • Using integrated Xsockets
          • Using Xsockets in a Web browser
        • Deleting objects created by the Xsockets tool
        • Customizing Xsockets
      • Socket connection auditing
        • TCP and UDP auditing
        • Secure socket connection auditing
        • Enable socket connection auditing
        • Analyze socket connection auditing records
      • Serviceability tools
    • Using Sun TI-RPC to develop distributed applications
      • PDF file for Using Sun TI-RPC to develop distributed applications
      • Using the rpcbind daemon
        • Ensuring that the rpcbind daemon is running on i5/OS
        • Starting and ending the rpcbind daemon on i5/OS
      • Using the rpcgen compiler
      • Using the network selection mechanism
      • Using data conversion support
      • Examples: Developing service applications based on TI-RPC code
        • Example: TI-RPC simplified-level service API
        • Example: TI-RPC top-level service API
        • Example: TI-RPC intermediate-level service API
        • Example: TI-RPC expert-level service API
        • Example: Adding authentication to the TI-RPC service
      • Examples: Developing client applications based on TI-RPC code
        • Example: TI-RPC simplified-level client API
        • Example: TI-RPC top-level client API
        • Example: TI-RPC intermediate-level client API
        • Example: TI-RPC expert-level client API
        • Example: Adding authentication to the TI-RPC client
  • DDS
    • DDS keyword finder
    • DDS concepts
      • PDF file for DDS concepts
      • Creating a file using DDS
        • Completing the DDS form
        • Entering the DDS source statements
        • Creating the DDS file
      • DDS coding rules, conventions, and terms
        • Conventions and terminology used in the DDS information
        • Rules for DDS keywords and parameter values
        • DDS naming conventions
        • DDS keywords and parameters
      • General considerations for using DBCS text with DDS files
        • Positional entries for files that use DBCS data
          • Length (positions 30 through 34)
          • Data type (position 35)
        • Keyword entries for files that use DBCS (positions 45 through 80)
        • DBCS character strings
          • Entering bracketed-DBCS character strings
          • Entering DBCS-graphic character strings
        • DDS computer printouts with DBCS output
      • Examples: DDS
        • Examples: DDS syntax
          • DDS syntax for a physical file
          • DDS syntax for a simple logical file
          • DDS syntax for a join logical file
          • DDS syntax for a display file
          • DDS syntax for a printer file
          • DDS syntax for an intersystem communications function file
        • Examples: DDS for each file type
          • Example: A field reference file
          • Example: A physical file with a new record format
          • Example: A logical file specifying multiple formats and new keys
          • Example: A logical file specifying a new record format
          • Example: A join logical file
          • Example: An inquiry display with two record formats in DDS
          • Example: A subfile with SFLPAG value equal to SFLSIZ value
          • Example: A subfile with paging by IBM i and high-level language program
          • Example: A horizontal subfile displayable on two display sizes
          • Example: A message subfile using DDS
          • Example: A printer file using DDS
          • Example: An intersystem communications function file using DDS
        • Example: Program that uses a physical file, display file, and printer file
        • Example: DDS compiler listing
        • DDS debugging template
      • When to specify REF and REFFLD keywords for DDS files
      • Related information for DDS concepts
    • DDS for physical and logical files
      • PDF file for DDS for Physical and Logical files
      • Defining physical and logical files using DDS
        • Defining a physical file using DDS
        • Defining a logical file using DDS
          • Simple- and multiple-format logical files in DDS
          • Join logical files in DDS
          • Specifying record formats in a logical file in DDS
        • Positional entries for physical and logical files (positions 1 through 44)
          • Sequence number for physical and logical files (positions 1 through 5)
          • Form type for physical and logical files (position 6)
          • Comment for physical and logical files (position 7)
          • Condition for physical and logical files (positions 8 through 16)
          • Type of name or specification for physical and logical files (position 17)
          • Reserved for physical and logical files (position 18)
          • Name for physical and logical files (positions 19 through 28)
            • Record format
            • Field name
            • Key field name
              • DDS access path keywords
              • DDS logical files with more than one record format
              • Using *NONE in the key field when creating a DDS file
              • Example 1: Specifying the key field
              • Example 2: Specifying the key field
              • Example 3: Specifying the key field
              • Example 4: Specifying the key field
            • Select/omit field name
          • Reference for physical and logical files (position 29)
          • Length for physical and logical files (positions 30 through 34)
          • Data type for physical and logical files (position 35)
            • Conversion of one numeric data type to another in a DDS file
            • Conversion between zoned decimal and character or hexadecimal in a DDS file
            • Conversion of a field from floating point to packed decimal, zoned decimal, or binary in DDS
            • Conversion of data types when concatenating fields in DDS
            • Conversion of data types when substringing fields in DDS
          • Decimal positions for physical and logical files (positions 36 and 37)
          • Usage for physical and logical files (position 38)
          • Location for physical and logical files (positions 39 through 44)
      • Keyword entries for physical and logical files (positions 45 through 80)
        • ABSVAL (Absolute Value) keyword for physical and logical files
        • ALIAS (Alternative Name) keyword for physical and logical files
        • ALL (All) keyword—logical files only
        • ALTSEQ (Alternative Collating Sequence) keyword for physical and logical files
        • ALWNULL (Allow Null Value) keyword—physical files only
        • CCSID (Coded Character Set Identifier) keyword for physical and logical files
        • CHECK (Check) keyword for physical and logical files
        • CHKMSGID (Check Message Identifier) keyword for physical and logical files
        • CMP (Comparison) keyword for physical and logical files
        • COLHDG (Column Heading) keyword for physical and logical files
        • COMP (Comparison) keyword for physical and logical files
          • Specifying COMP at the field level
          • Specifying COMP at the select/omit-field level
        • CONCAT (Concatenate) keyword—logical files only
        • DATFMT (Date Format) keyword for physical and logical files
        • DATSEP (Date Separator) keyword for physical and logical files
        • DESCEND (Descend) keyword for physical and logical files
        • DFT (Default) keyword—physical files only
        • DIGIT (Digit) keyword for physical and logical files
        • DYNSLT (Dynamic Select) keyword—logical files only
        • EDTCDE (Edit Code) and EDTWRD (Edit Word) keywords for physical and logical files
        • FCFO (First-Changed First-Out) keyword for physical and logical files
        • FIFO (First-In First-Out) keyword for physical and logical files
        • FLTPCN (Floating-Point Precision) keyword for physical and logical files
        • FORMAT (Format) keyword for physical and logical files
        • JDFTVAL (Join Default Values) keyword—join logical files only
        • JDUPSEQ (Join Duplicate Sequence) keyword—join logical files only
        • JFILE (Joined Files) keyword—join logical files only
        • JFLD (Joined Fields) keyword—join logical files only
        • JOIN (Join) keyword—join logical files only
        • JREF (Join Reference) keyword—join logical files only
        • LIFO (Last-In First-Out) keyword for physical and logical files
        • NOALTSEQ (No Alternative Collating Sequence) keyword for physical and logical files
        • PFILE (Physical File) keyword—logical files only
        • RANGE (Range) keyword for physical and logical files
          • Specifying RANGE at the field level
          • Specifying RANGE at the select/omit-field level
        • REF (Reference) keyword—physical files only
        • REFACCPTH (Reference Access Path Definition) keyword—logical files only
        • REFFLD (Referenced Field) keyword—physical files only
        • REFSHIFT (Reference Shift) keyword for physical and logical files
        • RENAME (Rename) keyword—logical files only
        • SIGNED (Signed) keyword for physical and logical files
        • SST (Substring) keyword—logical files only
        • TEXT (Text) keyword for physical and logical files
        • TIMFMT (Time Format) keyword for physical and logical files
        • TIMSEP (Time Separator) keyword for physical and logical files
        • TRNTBL (Translation Table) keyword—logical files only
        • UNIQUE (Unique) keyword for physical and logical files
        • UNSIGNED (Unsigned) keyword for physical and logical files
        • VALUES (Values) keyword for physical and logical files
          • Specifying VALUES at the field level
          • Specifying VALUES at the select/omit-field level
        • VARLEN (Variable-Length Field) keyword for physical and logical files
        • ZONE (Zone) keyword for physical and logical files
      • Unicode considerations for database files
        • Unicode considerations for database files: Length (positions 30 through 34)
        • Unicode considerations for database files: Data type (position 35)
        • Unicode considerations for database files: Decimal positions (positions 36 and 37)
        • Unicode considerations for database files: Keyword considerations (positions 45 through 80)
      • DBCS considerations for database files
        • Positional entry considerations for database files that use DBCS
          • Length (positions 30 through 34)
          • Data type (position 35)
          • Decimal (positions 36 and 37)
        • Keyword considerations for database files that use DBCS
          • CONCAT (Concatenate) keyword
        • Additional considerations for describing database files that contain DBCS data
    • DDS for display files
      • PDF file for DDS for display files
      • Defining a display file for DDS
        • Conventions and terminology used in the DDS information
        • Positional entries for display files (positions 1 through 44)
          • Positional entries for display files (positions 1 through 7)
          • Condition for display files (positions 7 through 16)
            • Specifying a condition for a field or for more than one keyword
            • Display size condition names
          • Type of name or specification for display files (position 17)
          • Reserved for display files (position 18)
          • Name for display files (positions 19 through 28)
          • Reference for display files (position 29)
          • Length for display files (positions 30 through 34)
          • Data type and keyboard shift for display files (position 35)
            • Keyboard types
              • Typewriter-like keyboard
              • Data-entry keyboard
            • Valid entries for display files
              • Default (blank)
              • Alphabetic only (X)
              • Alphanumeric shift (A)
              • Numeric shift (N)
              • Signed numeric (S)
              • Numeric only (Y)
              • Katakana (W)
              • Inhibit keyboard entry (I)
              • Digits only (D)
              • Numeric only character (M)
              • Floating point (F)
              • Date (L), Time (T), and Timestamp (Z)
          • Decimal positions for display files (positions 36 and 37)
          • Usage for display files (position 38)
          • Location for display files (positions 39 through 44)
            • Line (positions 39 through 41)
            • Position (positions 42 through 44)
            • Beginning attribute character
            • Ending attribute character
            • Overlapping fields
            • Display length
      • DDS keyword entries for display files (positions 45 through 80)
        • ALARM (Audible Alarm) keyword for display files
        • ALIAS (Alternative Name) keyword for display files
        • ALTHELP (Alternative Help Key) keyword for display files
        • ALTNAME (Alternative Record Name) keyword for display files
        • ALTPAGEDWN/ALTPAGEUP (Alternative Page Down/Alternative Page Up) keyword for display files
        • ALWGPH (Allow Graphics) keyword for display files
        • ALWROL (Allow Roll) keyword for display files
        • ASSUME (Assume) keyword for display files
        • AUTO (Auto) keyword for display files
        • BLANKS (Blanks) keyword for display files
        • BLINK (Blink) keyword for display files
        • BLKFOLD (Blank Fold) keyword for display files
        • CAnn (Command Attention) keyword for display files
        • CFnn (Command Function) keyword for display files
        • CHANGE (Change) keyword for display files
        • CHCACCEL (Choice Accelerator Text) keyword for display files
        • CHCAVAIL (Choice Color/Display Attribute when Available) keyword for display files
        • CHCCTL (Choice Control) keyword for display files
        • CHCSLT (Choice Color/Display Attribute when Selected) keyword for display files
        • CHCUNAVAIL (Choice Color/Display Attribute when Unavailable) keyword for display files
        • CHECK (Check) keyword for display files
        • CHGINPDFT (Change Input Default) keyword for display files
        • CHKMSGID (Check Message Identifier) keyword for display files
        • CHOICE (Selection Field Choice) keyword for display files
        • CHRID (Character Identifier) keyword for display files
        • CLEAR (Clear) keyword for display files
        • CLRL (Clear Line) keyword for display files
        • CMP (Comparison) keyword for display files
        • CNTFLD (Continued-Entry Field) keyword for display files
        • COLOR (Color) keyword for display files
        • COMP (Comparison) keyword for display files
        • CSRINPONLY (Cursor Movement to Input-Capable Positions Only) keyword for display files
        • CSRLOC (Cursor Location) keyword for display files
        • DATE (Date) keyword for display files
        • DATFMT (Date Format) keyword for display files
        • DATSEP (Date Separator) keyword for display files
        • DFT (Default) keyword for display files
        • DFTVAL (Default Value) keyword for display files
        • DLTCHK (Delete Check) keyword for display files
        • DLTEDT (Delete Edit) keyword for display files
        • DSPATR (Display Attribute) keyword for display files
        • DSPMOD (Display Mode) keyword for display files
        • DSPRL (Display Right to Left) keyword for display files
        • DSPSIZ (Display Size) keyword for display files
        • DUP (Duplication) keyword for display files
          • Programming for the Dup key
        • EDTCDE (Edit Code) keyword for display files
        • EDTMSK (Edit Mask) keyword for display files
        • EDTWRD (Edit Word) keyword for display files
        • ENTFLDATR (Entry Field Attribute) keyword for display files
        • ERASE (Erase) keyword for display files
        • ERASEINP (Erase Input) keyword for display files
        • ERRMSG (Error Message) and ERRMSGID (Error Message Identifier) keywords for display files
        • ERRSFL (Error Subfile) keyword for display files
        • FLDCSRPRG (Cursor Progression Field) keyword for display files
        • FLTFIXDEC (Floating-Point to Fixed Decimal) keyword for display files
        • FLTPCN (Floating-Point Precision) Keyword for Display Files
        • FRCDTA (Force Data) keyword for display files
        • GETRETAIN (Get Retain) keyword for display files
        • HELP (Help) keyword for display files
        • HLPARA (Help Area) keyword for display files
        • HLPBDY (Help Boundary) keyword for display files
        • HLPCLR (Help Cleared) keyword for display files
        • HLPCMDKEY (Help Command Key) keyword for display files
        • HLPDOC (Help Document) keyword for display files
        • HLPEXCLD (Help Excluded) keyword for display files
        • HLPFULL (Help Full) keyword for display files
        • HLPID (Help Identifier) keyword for display files
        • HLPPNLGRP (Help Panel Group) keyword for display files
        • HLPRCD (Help Record) keyword for display files
        • HLPRTN (Help Return) keyword for display files
        • HLPSCHIDX (Help Search Index) keyword for display files
        • HLPSEQ (Help Sequencing) keyword for display files
        • HLPTITLE (Help Title) keyword for display files
        • HOME (Home) keyword for display files
        • HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) keyword for display files
        • INDARA (Indicator Area) keyword for display files
        • INDTXT (Indicator Text) keyword for display files
        • INVITE (Invite) keyword for display files
        • INZINP (Initialize Input) keyword for display files
          • ERASEINP(*ALL) keyword
        • INZRCD (Initialize Record) keyword for display files
        • KEEP (Keep) keyword for display files
        • LOCK (Lock) keyword for display files
        • LOGINP (Log Input) keyword for display files
        • LOGOUT (Log Output) keyword for display files
        • LOWER (Lower) keyword for display files
        • MAPVAL (Map Values) keyword for display files
        • MDTOFF (Modified Data Tag Off) keyword for display files
        • MLTCHCFLD (Multiple-Choice Selection Field) keyword for display files
        • MNUBAR (Menu Bar) keyword for display files
        • MNUBARCHC (Menu-Bar Choice) keyword for display files
        • MNUBARDSP (Menu-Bar Display) keyword for display files
        • MNUBARSEP (Menu-Bar Separator) keyword for display files
        • MNUBARSW (Menu-Bar Switch Key) keyword for display files
        • MNUCNL (Menu-Cancel Key) keyword for display files
        • MOUBTN (Mouse Buttons) keyword for display files
        • MSGALARM (Message Alarm) keyword for display files
        • MSGCON (Message Constant) keyword for display files
        • MSGID (Message Identifier) keyword for display files
        • MSGLOC (Message Location) keyword for display files
        • NOCCSID (No Coded Character Set Identifier) keyword for display files
        • OPENPRT (Open Printer File) keyword for display files
        • OVERLAY (Overlay) keyword for display files
        • OVRATR (Override Attribute) keyword for display files
        • OVRDTA (Override Data) keyword for display files
        • PAGEDOWN/PAGEUP (Page Down/Page Up) keywords for display files
        • PASSRCD (Passed Record) keyword for display files
        • PRINT (Print) keyword for display files
        • PROTECT (Protect) keyword for display files
        • PSHBTNCHC (Push Button Field Choice) keyword for display files
        • PSHBTNFLD (Push Button Field) keyword for display files
        • PULLDOWN (Pull-Down Menu) keyword for display files
        • PUTOVR (Put with Explicit Override) keyword for display files
        • PUTRETAIN (Put-Retain) keyword for display files
        • RANGE (Range) keyword for display files
        • REF (Reference) keyword for display files
        • REFFLD (Referenced Field) keyword for display files
        • RETKEY (Retain Function Keys) and RETCMDKEY (Retain Command Keys) keywords for display files
        • RETLCKSTS (Retain Lock Status) keyword for display files
        • RMVWDW (Remove Window) keyword for display files
        • ROLLUP/ROLLDOWN (Roll Up/Roll Down) keywords for display files
        • RTNCSRLOC (Return Cursor Location) keyword for display files
        • RTNDTA (Return Data) keyword for display files
        • SETOF (Set Off) keyword for display files
        • SETOFF (Set Off) keyword for display files
        • SFL (Subfile) keyword for display files
        • SFLCHCCTL (Subfile Choice Control) keyword for display files
        • SFLCLR (Subfile Clear) keyword for display files
        • SFLCSRPRG (Subfile Cursor Progression) keyword for display files
        • SFLCSRRRN (Subfile Cursor Relative Record Number) keyword for display files
        • SFLCTL (Subfile Control) keyword for display files
        • SFLDLT (Subfile Delete) keyword for display files
        • SFLDROP (Subfile Drop) keyword for display files
        • SFLDSP (Subfile Display) keyword for display files
        • SFLDSPCTL (Subfile Display Control) keyword for display files
        • SFLEND (Subfile End) keyword for display files
        • SFLENTER (Subfile Enter) keyword for display files
        • SFLFOLD (Subfile Fold) keyword for display files
        • SFLINZ (Subfile Initialize) keyword for display files
        • SFLLIN (Subfile Line) keyword for display files
        • SFLMLTCHC (Subfile Multiple Choice Selection List) keyword for display files
        • SFLMODE (Subfile Mode) keyword for display files
        • SFLMSG (Subfile Message) and SFLMSGID (Subfile Message Identifier) keywords for display files
        • SFLMSGKEY (Subfile Message Key) keyword for display files
        • SFLMSGRCD (Subfile Message Record) keyword for display files
        • SFLNXTCHG (Subfile Next Changed) keyword for display files
        • SFLPAG (Subfile Page) keyword for display files
        • SFLPGMQ (Subfile Program Message Queue) keyword for display files
        • SFLRCDNBR (Subfile Record Number) keyword for display files
        • SFLRNA (Subfile Records Not Active) keyword for display files
        • SFLROLVAL (Subfile Roll Value) keyword for display files
        • SFLRTNSEL (Subfile Return Selected Choices) keyword for display files
        • SFLSCROLL (Subfile Scroll) keyword for display files
        • SFLSIZ (Subfile Size) keyword for display files
        • SFLSNGCHC (Subfile Single Choice Selection List) keyword for display files
        • SLNO (Starting Line Number) keyword for display files
        • SNGCHCFLD (Single-Choice Selection Field) keyword for display files
        • SYSNAME (System Name) keyword for display files
        • TEXT (Text) keyword for display files
        • TIME (Time) keyword for display files
        • TIMFMT (Time Format) keyword for display files
        • TIMSEP (Time Separator) keyword for display files
        • UNLOCK (Unlock) keyword for display files
        • USER (User) keyword for display files
        • USRDFN (User-Defined) keyword for display files
        • USRDSPMGT (User Display Management) keyword for display files
        • USRRSTDSP (User Restore Display) keyword for display files
        • VALNUM (Validate Numeric) keyword for display files
        • VALUES (Values) keyword for display files
        • VLDCMDKEY (Valid Command Key) keyword for display files
        • WDWBORDER (Window Border) keyword for display files
        • WDWTITLE (Window Title) keyword for display files
        • WINDOW (Window) keyword for display files
        • WRDWRAP (Word Wrap) keyword for display files
      • DDS for 3270 remote attachment
      • System/36 environment considerations for display files
        • Keyword considerations for display files used in the System/36 environment
          • ALTNAME (Alternative Record Name) keyword
          • CHANGE record-level keyword
          • HELP and HLPRTN keyword
          • MSGID keyword
          • PRINT(*PGM) keyword
          • RETKEY (Retain Function Keys) and RETCMDKEY (Retain Command Keys) keywords
            • RETKEY keyword
            • RETCMDKEY keyword
            • Considerations for specifying RETKEY and RETCMDKEY keywords
          • USRDSPMGT (User Display Management) keyword
      • Unicode considerations for display files
        • Positional entry considerations for display files that use Unicode data
        • Keyword considerations for display files that use Unicode data (positions 45 through 80)
          • CCSID (Coded Character Set Identifier) keyword
      • Double-byte character set considerations for DDS
        • Positional entry considerations for display files that use DBCS
          • Length (positions 30 through 34)
          • Data type (position 35)
          • Decimal positions (positions 36 and 37)
        • Keyword considerations for display files that use DBCS
          • CNTFLD (Continued-Entry Field) keyword
          • GRDATR (Grid Attribute) keyword
          • GRDBOX (Grid Box) keyword
          • GRDCLR (Grid Clear) keyword
          • GRDLIN (Grid Line) keyword
          • GRDRCD (Grid Record) keyword
          • IGCALTTYP (Alternative Data Type) keyword
          • IGCCNV (DBCS Conversion) keyword
        • Additional considerations for describing display files that contain DBCS data
    • DDS for printer files
      • What's new for IBM i 7.2
      • PDF file for DDS for printer files
      • Defining a printer file
        • Conventions and terminology for DDS information
        • Positional entries for printer files (positions 1 through 44)
          • Sequence number for printer files (positions 1 through 5)
          • Form type for printer files (position 6)
          • Comment for printer files (position 7)
          • Condition for printer files (positions 7 through 16)
          • Type of name or specification for printer files (position 17)
          • Reserved for printer files (position 18)
          • Name for printer files (positions 19 through 28)
            • Record format name in printer files
            • Field name in printer files
            • Constant fields in printer files
          • Reference for printer files (position 29)
          • Length for printer files (positions 30 through 34)
          • Data type for printer files (position 35)
          • Decimal positions for printer files (positions 36 and 37)
          • Usage for printer files (position 38)
          • Location for printer files (positions 39 through 44)
            • Line (positions 39 through 41)
            • Position (positions 42 through 44)
      • Keyword entries for printer files (positions 45 through 80)
        • Keywords supported for printer file device type of *AFPDS.
        • AFPRSC (AFP Resource) keyword in printer files
        • ALIAS (Alternative Name) keyword in printer files
        • BARCODE (Bar Code) keyword in printer files
        • BLKFOLD (Blank Fold) keyword in printer files
        • BOX (Box) keyword in printer files
        • CDEFNT (Coded Font Name) keyword in printer files
        • CHRID (Character Identifier) keyword in printer files
        • CHRSIZ (Character Size) keyword in printer files
        • COLOR (Color) keyword in printer files
        • CPI (Characters Per Inch) keyword in printer files
        • CVTDTA (Convert Data) keyword in printer files
        • DATE (Date) keyword in printer files
        • DATFMT (Date Format) keyword in printer files
        • DATSEP (Date Separator) keyword in printer files
        • DFNCHR (Define Character) keyword in printer files
          • Selecting which code points to redefine
          • Dot matrix
          • Specifying dots to be printed in the dot matrix
        • DFT (Default) keyword in printer files
        • DLTEDT (Delete Edit) keyword in printer files
        • DOCIDXTAG (Document Index Tag) keyword in printer files
        • DRAWER (Drawer) keyword in printer files
        • DTASTMCMD (Data Stream Command) keyword in printer files
        • DUPLEX (Duplex) keyword in printer files
        • EDTCDE (Edit Code) keyword in printer files
          • IBM i edit codes in printer files
          • User-defined edit codes in printer files
        • EDTWRD (Edit Word) keyword in printer files
          • Parts of an edit word in printer files
          • Forming the body of an edit word in printer files
          • Forming the status of an edit word in printer files
          • Formatting the expansion of an edit word in printer files
        • ENDPAGE (End Page) keyword in printer files
        • ENDPAGGRP (End Page Group) keyword in printer files
        • FLTFIXDEC (Floating-Point to Fixed Decimal) keyword in printer files
        • FLTPCN (Floating-Point Precision) keyword in printer files
        • FNTCHRSET (Font Character Set) keyword in printer files
        • FONT (Font) keyword in printer files
        • FONTNAME (Font name) keyword in printer files
        • FORCE (Force) keyword in printer files
        • GDF (Graphic Data File) keyword in printer files
        • HIGHLIGHT (Highlight) keyword in printer files
        • INDARA (Indicator Area) keyword in printer files
        • INDTXT (Indicator Text) keyword in printer files
        • INVDTAMAP (Invoke Data Map) keyword in printer files
        • INVMMAP (Invoke Medium Map) keyword in printer files
        • LINE (Line) keyword in printer files
        • LPI (Lines Per Inch) keyword in printer files
        • MSGCON (Message Constant) keyword in printer files
        • OUTBIN (Output Bin) keyword in printer files
        • OVERLAY (Overlay) keyword in printer files
        • PAGNBR (Page Number) keyword in printer files
        • PAGRTT (Page Rotation) keyword in printer files
        • PAGSEG (Page Segment) keyword in printer files
        • POSITION (Position) keyword in printer files
        • PRTQLTY (Print Quality) keyword in printer files
        • REF (Reference) keyword in printer files
        • REFFLD (Referenced Field) keyword in printer files
        • RELPOS (Relative Position) keyword in printer files
        • SKIPA (Skip After) keyword in printer files
        • SKIPB (Skip Before) keyword in printer files
        • SPACEA (Space After) keyword in printer files
        • SPACEB (Space Before) keyword in printer files
        • STAPLE (Staple) keyword in printer files
        • STRPAGGRP (Start Page Group) keyword in printer files
        • TEXT (Text) keyword in printer files
        • TIME (Time) keyword in printer files
        • TIMFMT (Time Format) keyword in printer files
        • TIMSEP (Time Separator) keyword in printer files
        • TRNSPY (Transparency) keyword in printer files
        • TXTRTT (Text Rotation) keyword in printer files
        • UNDERLINE (Underline) keyword in printer files
        • UNISCRIPT (Unicode Text Layout) keyword in printer files
        • ZFOLD (Z-fold) keyword in printer files
      • CODE128 character set in DDS
      • Unicode considerations for printer files
        • Positional entry considerations for printer files that use UTF-16 data
        • Keyword considerations for printer files that use UTF-16 data (positions 45 through 80)
          • CCSID (Coded Character Set Identifier) keyword
      • DBCS considerations for printer files
        • Positional entry considerations for printer files that use DBCS
          • Length (positions 30 through 34)
          • Data type or keyboard shift (position 35)
          • Decimal positions (positions 36 and 37)
        • Keyword considerations for printer files that use DBCS
          • CHRSIZ (Character Size) keyword
          • DFNLIN (Define Line) keyword
          • IGCALTTYP (Alternative Data Type) keyword
          • IGCANKCNV (Alphanumeric-to-DBCS Conversion) keyword
          • IGCCDEFNT (DBCS Coded Font) keyword
          • IGCCHRRTT (DBCS Character Rotation) keyword
        • Additional considerations for describing printer files that contain DBCS data
      • Related information for DDS for printer files
    • DDS for ICF files
      • PDF file for DDS for ICF files
      • Defining an ICF file using DDS
        • Sequence number for ICF files (positions 1 through 5)
        • Form type for ICF files (position 6)
        • Comment for ICF files (position 7)
        • Condition for ICF files (positions 7 through 16)
        • Type of name or specification for ICF files (position 17)
        • Reserved for ICF files (position 18)
        • Name for ICF files (positions 19 through 28)
        • Reference for ICF files (position 29)
        • Length for ICF files (positions 30 through 34)
        • Data type for ICF files (position 35)
        • Decimal positions for ICF files (positions 36 and 37)
        • Usage for ICF files (position 38)
        • Location for ICF files (positions 39 through 44)
      • DDS keyword entries for ICF files (positions 45 through 80)
        • ALIAS (Alternative Name) keyword for ICF files
        • ALWWRT (Allow Write) keyword for ICF files
        • CANCEL (Cancel) keyword for ICF files
        • CNLINVITE (Cancel Invite) keyword for ICF files
        • CONFIRM (Confirm) keyword for ICF files
        • CTLDTA (Control Data) keyword for ICF files
        • DETACH (Detach) keyword for ICF files
        • DFREVOKE (Defer Evoke) keyword for ICF files
        • ENDGRP (End of Group) keyword for ICF files
        • EOS (End of Session) keyword for ICF files
        • EVOKE (Evoke) keyword for ICF files
        • FAIL (Fail) keyword for ICF files
        • FLTPCN (Floating-Point Precision) keyword for ICF files
        • FMH (Function Management Header) keyword for ICF files
        • FMTNAME (Format Name) keyword for ICF files
        • FRCDTA (Force Data) keyword for ICF files
        • INDARA (Indicator Area) keyword for ICF files
        • INDTXT (Indicator Text) keyword for ICF files
        • INVITE (Invite) keyword for ICF files
        • NEGRSP (Negative Response) keyword for ICF files
        • PRPCMT (Prepare for Commit) keyword for ICF files
        • RCVCANCEL (Receive Cancel) keyword for ICF files
        • RCVCONFIRM (Receive Confirm) keyword for ICF files
        • RCVCTLDTA (Receive Control Data) keyword for ICF files
        • RCVDETACH (Receive Detach) keyword for ICF files
        • RCVENDGRP (Receive End of Group) keyword for ICF files
        • RCVFAIL (Receive Fail) keyword for ICF files
        • RCVFMH (Receive Function Management Header) keyword for ICF files
        • RCVNEGRSP (Receive Negative Response) keyword for ICF files
        • RCVROLLB (Receive Rollback Response Indicator) keyword for ICF files
        • RCVTKCMT (Receive Take Commit Response Indicator) keyword for ICF files
        • RCVTRNRND (Receive Turnaround) keyword for ICF files
        • RECID (Record Identification) keyword for ICF files
        • REF (Reference) keyword for ICF files
        • REFFLD (Referenced Field) keyword for ICF files
        • RQSWRT (Request Write) keyword for ICF files
        • RSPCONFIRM (Respond Confirm) keyword for ICF files
        • SECURITY (Security) keyword for ICF files
        • SUBDEV (Subdevice) keyword for ICF files
        • SYNLVL (Synchronization Level) keyword for ICF files
        • TEXT (Text) keyword for ICF files
        • TIMER (Timer) keyword for ICF files
        • TNSSYNLVL (Transaction Synchronization Level) keyword for ICF files
        • VARBUFMGT (Variable Buffer Management) keyword for ICF files
        • VARLEN (Variable-Length User Data) keyword for ICF files
      • DBCS considerations for ICF files
        • Positional entry considerations for ICF files that use DBCS
        • Additional considerations for describing ICF files that contain DBCS data
  • 개발 툴
    • ADTS
    • IBM i Debugger
      • PDF file for IBM i Debugger
      • IBM i Debugger components
      • Installing IBM i Debugger
      • Running IBM i Debugger
      • Related information for IBM i Debugger
    • IBM i PASE shells and utilities
    • Qshell
    • Rational Development Studio 지원
  • 장치
    • Application Display Programming
    • ASCII Work Station Reference
    • 기본 인쇄
    • i용 IBM Portable Utilities
    • Optical device programming
      • PDF file for Optical device programming
      • Optical device programming concepts
        • Integrated file system and optical device programming
        • Hierarchical file system and optical device programming
        • Volume, directory, and file considerations
      • Integrated file system programming for IBM i
        • Integrated file system APIs
        • Integrated file system generic commands
        • Examples: Integrated file system
      • Hierarchical file system programming
        • Hierarchical File System APIs
        • Control file system functions
        • Standard attributes
        • Extended attributes
        • Copied file attributes using hierarchical file system
        • Example: Programming Hierarchical File System APIs for the optical file system
      • Tips: Optical device programming
        • Media capacity and volume threshold
        • Media capacity management on a per-file basis
        • Expanding buffer I/O method
        • Forced buffered data APIs
        • Management of held optical files
        • Path names requirements
        • Examples: Moving spooled files to and from optical storage
      • Related information
    • Workstation Customization Programming
  • IBM i globalization
    • PDF file for IBM i globalization
    • Globalization overview
      • Multiple language support
      • National language version
      • IBM i translations
      • National language design in IBM i
        • Character representation
          • Encoding scheme
          • Conversion of character data
          • Coded character set identifier values
          • Character data integrity
        • Character processing
        • Character presentation
        • Globalization hardware support in IBM i
        • Character data translation
        • Locales
      • Linguistic and cultural values
        • User profiles
        • Subsystems
          • Creating a subsystem description
          • Subsystem attributes
          • Workstation entry
          • Starting a subsystem
        • Job attributes
          • Coded character set identifier job attribute
          • Job default coded character set identifier
          • Job library list
        • System values
          • Century (QCENTURY) system value
          • Character identifier (QCHRID) system value
          • Character identifier control (QCHRIDCTL) system value
          • Coded character set identifier (QCCSID) system value
          • Coordinated universal time offset (QUTCOFFSET) system value
          • Country or region identifier (QCNTRYID) system value
          • Currency symbol (QCURSYM) system value
          • System date (QDATE) system value
          • Date format (QDATFMT) system value
          • Date separator (QDATSEP) system value
          • Day of the month (QDAY) system value
          • Day of week (QDAYOFWEEK) system value
          • DBCS system indicator (QIGC) system value
          • DBCS font name (QIGCCDEFNT) system value
          • Decimal format (QDECFMT) system value
          • Language identifier (QLANGID) system value
          • Language indicator for keyboard type (QKBDTYPE) system value
          • Leap year adjustment (QLEAPADJ) system value
          • Locale (QLOCALE) system value
          • Month of the year (QMONTH) system value
          • Set job attributes (QSETJOBATR) system value
          • Sort sequence (QSRTSEQ) system value
          • System library list (QSYSLIBL) system value
          • Time separator (QTIMSEP) system value
          • Year (QYEAR) system value
        • Device descriptions
        • Display and printer files
        • Database files
        • UIM menus and panel groups
    • Setting up IBM i with a national language version
      • How a language is displayed for IBM i functions
      • Installation preparation and national languages
      • Checklist: Globalization planning
      • Hardware installation and national languages
        • Console device
        • Workstation considerations
        • Considerations for changing printers
      • Software installation and national languages
      • Configuring a national language version
        • User profile name considerations
        • Service tools
        • System and user interfaces
          • Automatic device configuration
          • Automatic character set and code page conversion
          • Printer file conversion
        • Configuring the primary language
        • Configuring secondary languages
          • Enabling the secondary language
          • Multilingual support
        • Installing and enabling locales
      • Scenarios: Setting up IBM i with a national language version
        • Scenario: A single system supporting Spanish
        • Scenario: A single system supporting Spanish and an existing EBCDIC database
        • Scenario: A single system supporting English, Japanese, and German
    • Developing globalized applications
      • Goals and processes
        • Globalization development goals
        • Market research process
        • Development process
        • Documentation process
        • Translation process
        • Testing process
        • Packaging and installation process
        • Application maintenance process
      • Designing globalized applications
        • Checklist: Application design
        • Globalization and localization
        • Application arrangement and architecture
          • Program module separation
          • Application part names
          • Specification references
          • Database definitions
        • User interfaces
          • Checklist: User interface design
          • Text translation design
          • Textual data code design
            • Early message binding
            • Late message binding
            • Direct coding as an unnamed output field
            • Text stored in database files
          • User interface manager
            • Online help design
            • Index search tags
            • Index search and double-byte character set
          • Program message design
          • Menu design
          • Command design
          • Cultural-dependent design
            • Database file attributes
            • Job attributes
            • Program attributes
            • Information in message CPX8416
            • Date formats
            • Date separators
            • Edit date presentation
            • Time formats
            • Time separators
            • Edit time presentation
            • Decimal formats
            • Sort sequences
          • Display file design
            • Constant text strings
            • Input and output fields
            • Field editing specifications
            • Cursor positioning specifications
            • Input field default values
            • Field validation specifications
            • Error messages
          • Printer file design and translation
          • Source file design
          • Character data representation architecture design
            • Use of the Send Network File command
            • Scenario: Multilingual single system
            • Scenario: Multilingual network
          • Handling languages with no NLV support
      • Programming considerations in globalized application design
        • Coding globalized applications with high-level languages
          • Language compilers CCSID
          • Session manager
          • ILE C considerations
          • ILE RPG sort sequence
          • ILE COBOL sort sequence
          • DB2 and SQL sort sequence
          • IBM i Access sort sequence
        • Coding globalized applications that use bidirectional data
        • Using message catalogs
          • Source for message catalogs
          • Opening, extracting, and closing message catalogs
      • Delivering globalized applications
    • Handling data in globalized applications
      • Working with Unicode
        • Why use Unicode
        • Different encodings of Unicode
          • UTF-8
          • UTF-16
          • UTF-32
        • UCS-2 and its relationship to Unicode (UTF-16)
        • How Unicode relates to prior standards such as ASCII and EBCDIC
        • International Components for Unicode
        • Mapping of data
          • Example: Displaying data without Unicode
          • Example: Displaying data with Unicode
        • Unicode on IBM i
          • Database files and functions
          • Db2 for i
          • SQL tables
          • Query files and tools
          • Data description specifications
          • Display files and panel groups
          • Unicode variables in user interface manager
      • GB18030: The Chinese standard
      • Working with CCSIDs
        • Recommendations and guidelines for using CCSIDs
        • IBM i function support for CCSIDs
          • Database management
          • Work management
          • Workstation function management
            • Display files
            • Printer files
            • User interface manager menus and panel groups
          • CCSID support for messages
            • Handling messages with a specific object-level CCSID
              • Object-level coded character set identifier 65535
              • Using a specific object-level CCSID for handling messages
            • Message-level support
              • Message-level CCSID with a message queue CCSID of 65535 or 65534
              • Message-level CCSID with a specific message queue CCSID
              • Message-level CCSID when a message queue CCSID conversion error occurs
              • Message-level CCSID when a message is a stored message
            • Message description-level support
              • Message file with a CCSID of 65535 or 65534
              • Message file with a specific CCSID
              • Changing the CCSID of a message description
            • Message queues
            • Job message queues
            • System reply list
            • History log
            • Setting up CCSID support for message handling
            • CCSID support for message catalogs
            • Converted character replacement data type field
            • Retrieving messages
              • CCSID of the text returned (TXTCCSID) return field
              • CCSID conversion status indicator (TXTCCSTA) return field
              • Replacement data CCSID conversion status indicator (MDTACCSTA) return field
            • Receiving messages
              • CCSID of the message text returned (TXTCCSID) return field
              • CCSID of the replacement data returned (DTACCSID) return field
            • Common questions about CCSID support for handling messages
              • When is the job default CCSID used for handling messages?
              • How can I determine if a message description is defined with *CCHAR?
              • Can the length of *CCHAR replacement data change?
              • Can I correct the CCSID of a message queue?
              • Can I correct the CCSID of a message file?
              • Can I correct the CCSID of a message?
              • Can I correct the CCSID of a message description?
        • Changing the CCSID of a physical file
        • Character sorting
          • IBM i sort sequence support
            • Sort sequence tables
              • Sort sequence for Arabic
            • Sort sequence support
              • Sort sequence support in programs
              • Sort sequence support in work management
              • Sort sequence support in database management
              • Sort sequence support in other system components
            • Sort sequence scenarios
            • Sort sequence types
          • ICU-based sort support
            • ICU-based sort sequence types
            • ICU locales and sort tables provided by the system
            • Sort sequence scenarios
            • ICU-based sort sequence support
      • Working with bidirectional data
        • Bidirectional application support
        • Checklist: Bidirectional support guidelines
      • Working with DBCS data
        • Checklist: DBCS application design
        • Developing applications that process DBCS data
          • Use of double-byte data
          • DBCS coding considerations
            • Creating physical files
            • Target physical files
            • Using DBCS CCSIDs
            • Using DDS keywords
            • DBCS file data types
            • The Katakana code page (00290)
            • Unicode support and IBM DBCS displays
          • Processing double-byte characters
          • Display support
          • Making printer files DBCS capable
          • Copying spooled and nonspooled DBCS files
          • Changing alphanumeric programs to DBCS programs
          • Entering DBCS text in CL commands
          • DBCS conversion
            • Conversion dictionaries
            • Working with DBCS conversion dictionaries
            • Japanese DBCS conversion
          • SQL and DBCS
            • SQL graphic strings
            • SQL assignments and comparisons
            • SQL conversion rules
        • DBCS code schemes
        • DBCS font tables
          • Copying a DBCS font table
          • Deleting a DBCS font table
        • DBCS font files
        • DBCS sort tables
          • Saving and restoring a DBCS sort table
          • Deleting a DBCS sort table
        • DBCS field definition
      • Working with locales
        • Locale restrictions
        • Locale categories
          • LC_COLLATE category
          • LC_CTYPE category
          • LC_MESSAGES category
          • LC_MONETARY category
          • LC_NUMERIC category
          • LC_TIME category
          • LC_TOD category
        • Locale symbolic names
        • Examples: Locale programming
          • Example: How locales work
          • Example: Creating and enabling a locale
          • Example: Producing unique monetary formats
          • Example: Locales as part of a multilingual environment
          • Example: POSIX locale
          • Example: EN_US locale
    • Globalization reference information
      • National language version feature codes
      • Country and region identifiers
      • Default system values for national language versions
        • Albanian (Feature 2995)
        • Arabic (Feature 2954)
        • Belgian Dutch MNCS (Feature 2963)
        • Belgium English (Feature 2909)
        • Belgian French MNCS (Feature 2966)
        • Brazilian Portuguese (Feature 2980)
        • Bulgarian (Feature 2974)
        • Canadian French MNCS (Feature 2981)
        • Croatian (Feature 2912)
        • Czech (Feature 2975)
        • Danish (Feature 2926)
        • Dutch Netherlands (Feature 2923)
        • English Uppercase and Lowercase (Feature 2924)
        • English Uppercase DBCS (Feature 2938)
        • English Uppercase and Lowercase DBCS (Feature 2984)
        • Estonian (Feature 2902)
        • Farsi (Feature 2998)
        • Finnish (Feature 2925)
        • French (Feature 2928)
        • French MNCS (Feature 2940)
        • German (Feature 2929)
        • German MNCS (Feature 2939)
        • Greek (Feature 2957)
        • Hebrew (Feature 2961)
        • Hungarian (Feature 2976)
        • Icelandic (Feature 2958)
        • Italian (Feature 2932)
        • Italian MNCS (Feature 2942)
        • Japanese Universal (Feature 2930)
        • Japanese (Katakana) (Feature 2962)
        • Korean (Feature 2986)
        • Laotian (Feature 2906)
        • Latvian (Feature 2904)
        • Lithuanian (Feature 2903)
        • Macedonian (Feature 2913)
        • Norwegian (Feature 2933)
        • Polish (Feature 2978)
        • Portuguese (Feature 2922)
        • Portuguese MNCS (Feature 2996)
        • Romanian (Feature 2992)
        • Russian (Feature 2979)
        • Serbian (Feature 2914)
        • Simplified Chinese (Feature 2989)
        • Slovakian (Feature 2994)
        • Slovenian (Feature 2911)
        • Spanish (Feature 2931)
        • Swedish (Feature 2937)
        • Thai (Feature 2972)
        • Traditional Chinese (Feature 2987)
        • Turkish (Feature 2956)
        • Vietnamese (Feature 2905)
      • System values for other languages with no national language version
      • Keyboard reference information
        • Keyboard layouts
          • Albanian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Arabic IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Austrian German IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Belgian Multinational IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Brazilian Portuguese IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Bulgarian Cyrillic IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Canadian French IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Croatian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Czech IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Danish IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Dutch IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Farsi IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Finnish/Swedish IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • French (AZERTY) IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Greek IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Hebrew IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Hebrew, Latin IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Hungarian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Italian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Japanese IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Korean IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Macedonian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Norwegian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Polish IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Portuguese IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Romanian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Russian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Serbian Cyrillic IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Slovakian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Slovenian IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Spanish-Speaking IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Spanish IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Swiss-Bilingual-French IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Swiss-Bilingual-German IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Traditional Chinese IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • Turkish IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • U.K. English IBM Enhanced Keyboard
          • U.S. English IBM Enhanced Keyboard
        • Special-character keyboard set
        • National language keyboard types and SBCS code pages
      • Code pages
      • Character sets
        • Country extended character set 00697
        • Graphic character conversion tables
        • International DP 94 00103 (ASCII)
        • Character set 01169 (International Alphabet 5)
        • Invariant character set (and its exceptions)
        • Monocase tables
        • Portable character set
        • Syntactic/invariant character set 00640
        • T.61 Character Set 01252
        • T.61 Character Repertoire 01253
        • T.61 graphic character conversions
      • CCSID reference information
        • CCSID values defined on IBM i
        • Bidirectional sensitive CCSIDs
        • Bidirectional Language String Types and Associated Attributes
        • Supported CCSID mappings
        • Associated CCSIDs
        • Encoding schemes for the CCSIDs
        • Language identifiers and associated default CCSIDs
      • Locale reference information
        • System-supplied locales and recommended CCSIDs
        • Mapping of locale symbolic names
      • UCS-2 level-1 mapping tables
        • Unicode uppercase to lowercase conversion mapping table
        • Unicode lowercase to uppercase conversion mapping table
      • Unicode Private Use Area mapping on IBM i
        • Implementing Custom PUA mapping support
          • Copying the sample source
          • Modifying the sample source files
          • Create *TBL objects to modify PUA mappings
          • Activate the system CCSID support changes
          • Reset the system CCSID support to default state
          • Release upgrade considerations for system CCSID support
      • REXX extension characters
        • REXX/400 extension characters: Axxxxxxx GCGIDs
        • REXX/400 extension characters: Bxxxxxxx GCGIDs
        • REXX/400 extension characters: Gxxxxxxx GCGIDs
        • REXX/400 extension characters: Hxxxxxxx GCGIDs
        • REXX/400 extension characters: Jxxxxxxx GCGIDs
        • REXX/400 extension characters: Kxxxxxxx GCGIDs
        • REXX/400 extension characters: Lxxxxxxx GCGIDs
        • REXX/400 extension characters: Nxxxxxxx GCGIDs
        • REXX/400 extension characters: Oxxxxxxx GCGIDs
        • REXX/400 extension characters: Sxxxxxxx GCGIDs
      • Default character data conversion that can use substitution
    • Globalization checklists
    • Related information for IBM i globalization
  • IBM PASE for i
    • What's new for IBM i 7.4
    • PDF file for IBM PASE for i
    • IBM PASE for i overview
      • IBM PASE for i concepts
      • IBM PASE for i as a useful option for application development
    • Installing IBM PASE for i
    • Planning for IBM PASE for i
    • Preparing programs to run in IBM PASE for i
      • Analyzing program compatibility with IBM PASE for i
      • Compiling your AIX source
        • Installing AIX compilers on IBM i
          • Installing the AIX compilers from the installation media
          • PTF update instructions
      • Copying the IBM PASE for i program to your system
        • Case sensitivity
        • Line-terminating characters in integrated file system files
        • Transferring files
      • Customizing IBM PASE for i programs to use IBM i functions
        • Copying header files
        • Copying export files
        • IBM PASE for i APIs for accessing IBM i functions
    • Using IBM PASE for i programs in the IBM i environment
      • Running IBM PASE for i programs and procedures
        • Running an IBM PASE for i program with QP2SHELL()
        • Running an IBM PASE for i program with QP2TERM()
        • Running an IBM PASE for i program from within IBM i programs
          • Examples: Running an IBM PASE for i program from within IBM i programs
        • Calling an IBM PASE for i procedure from within IBM i programs
          • Example 1: Calling an IBM PASE for i procedure from within IBM i programs
          • Example 2: An IBM i ILE program that uses pointer arguments in a call to an IBM PASE for i procedure
        • Using IBM PASE for i native methods from Java
        • Working with environment variables
      • Calling IBM i programs and procedures from your IBM PASE for i programs
        • Calling ILE procedures
          • Examples: Calling ILE procedures
        • Calling IBM i programs from IBM PASE for i
          • Example: Calling IBM i programs from IBM PASE for i
        • Running IBM i commands from IBM PASE for i
          • Example: Running IBM i commands from IBM PASE for i
      • How IBM PASE for i programs interact with IBM i
        • Communications
        • Database
          • Example: Calling Db2 for i CLI functions in an PASE for i program
        • Data encoding
        • File systems
        • Globalization
        • Message services
        • Printing output from IBM PASE for i applications
        • Pseudo-terminal (PTY)
        • Security
        • Work management
    • Debugging your IBM PASE for i programs
    • Optimizing performance
    • IBM PASE for i shells and utilities
      • IBM PASE for i commands
      • IBM PASE for i system utility
      • IBM PASE for i qsh, qsh_inout, and qsh_out commands
    • Examples: IBM PASE for i
    • Related information
  • ILE 언어
    • ILE Concepts
      • What's new for IBM i 7.3
      • PDF file for ILE Concepts
      • Integrated Language Environment Introduction
        • What Is ILE?
        • What Are the Benefits of ILE?
          • Binding
          • Modularity
          • Reusable Components
          • Common Runtime Services
          • Coexistence with Existing Applications
          • Source Debugger
          • Better Control over Resources
            • Shared Open Data Path—Scenario
            • Commitment Control—Scenario
          • Better Control over Language Interactions
            • Mixed Languages—Scenario
          • Better Code Optimization
        • What Is the History of ILE?
          • Original Program Model Description
            • Principal Characteristics of OPM
          • Extended Program Model Description
          • Integrated Language Environment Description
            • Principal Characteristics of Procedure-Based Languages
      • ILE Basic Concepts
        • Structure of an ILE Program
        • Procedure
        • Module Object
        • ILE Program
        • Service Program
        • Binding Directory
          • Binding Directory Processing
        • Binder Functions
        • Calling a Program or a Procedure
          • Dynamic Program Calls
          • Static Procedure Calls
          • Procedure Pointer Calls
        • Activation
        • Error Handling Overview
        • Optimizing Translator
        • Debugger
      • ILE Advanced Concepts
        • Program Activation
          • Program Activation Creation
        • Activation Group
          • Activation Group Creation
          • Default Activation Groups
          • Non-Default Activation Group Deletion
        • Service Program Activation
        • Control Boundaries
          • Control Boundaries for Activation Groups
          • Control Boundaries between OPM and ILE Call Stack Entries
          • Control Boundary Use
        • Error Handling
          • Job Message Queues
          • Exception Messages and How They Are Sent
          • How Exception Messages Are Handled
          • Exception Recovery
          • Default Actions for Unhandled Exceptions
          • Types of Exception Handlers
          • ILE Conditions
        • Data Management Scoping Rules
          • Call-Level Scoping
          • Activation-Group-Level Scoping
          • Job-Level Scoping
      • Teraspace and Single-Level Storage
        • Teraspace Characteristics
        • Using Teraspace for Storage
        • Choosing a Program Storage Model
          • Specifying the Teraspace Storage Model
          • Selecting a Compatible Activation Group
          • How the Storage Models Interact
            • Rules for Binding Modules
            • Rules for Binding to Service Programs
            • Rules for Activating Programs and Service Programs
            • Rules for Program and Procedure Calls
          • Converting Your Program or Service Program to Inherit a Storage Model
          • Updating Your Programs: Teraspace Considerations
        • Taking Advantage of 8-byte Pointers in Your C and C++ Code
          • Pointer Support in C and C++ Compilers
          • Pointer Conversions
        • Using the Teraspace Storage Model
          • Using Teraspace: Best Practices
            • System Controls over Teraspace Programs When They are Created
            • System Controls over Teraspace Programs When They are Activated
          • IBM i Interfaces and Teraspace
          • Potential Problems that Can Arise When You Use Teraspace
        • Teraspace Usage Tips
      • Program Creation Concepts
        • Create Program and Create Service Program Commands
          • Use Adopted Authority (QUSEADPAUT)
          • Using optimization parameters
        • Stored data in modules and programs
        • Symbol Resolution
          • Resolved and Unresolved Imports
          • Binding by Copy
          • Binding by Reference
          • Binding Large Numbers of Modules
          • Duplicate Symbols
          • Importance of the Order of Exports
            • Program Creation Example 1
            • Program Creation Example 2
        • Program Access
          • Program Entry Procedure Module Parameter on the CRTPGM Command
          • Export Parameter on the CRTSRVPGM Command
            • Export Parameter Used with Source File and Source Member Parameters
            • Maximum width of a file for the SRCFILE parameter
        • Import and Export Concepts
        • Binder Language
          • Signature
          • Start Program Export and End Program Export Commands
            • Program Level Parameter on the STRPGMEXP Command
            • Signature Parameter on the STRPGMEXP Command
            • Level Check Parameter on the STRPGMEXP Command
          • Export Symbol Command
            • Wildcard Export Symbol Examples
          • Binder Language Examples
            • Binder Language Example 1
            • Binder Language Example 2
            • Binder Language Example 3
            • Binder Language Example 4
          • Changing Programs
        • Program Updates
          • Parameters on the UPDPGM and UPDSRVPGM Commands
          • Module Replaced by a Module with Fewer Imports
          • Module Replaced by a Module with More Imports
          • Module Replaced by a Module with Fewer Exports
          • Module Replaced by a Module with More Exports
        • Tips for Creating Modules, Programs, and Service Programs
      • Activation Group Management
        • Multiple Applications Running in the Same Job
        • Reclaim Resources Command
          • Reclaim Resources Command for OPM Programs
          • Reclaim Resources Command for ILE Programs
          • Reclaim Activation Group Command
        • Service Programs and Activation Groups
      • Calls to Procedures and Programs
        • Call Stack
          • Call Stack Example
        • Calls to Programs and Calls to Procedures
          • Static Procedure Calls
          • Procedure Pointer Calls
          • Passing Arguments to ILE Procedures
            • Function Results
            • Omitted Arguments
          • Dynamic Program Calls
          • Passing Arguments on a Dynamic Program Call
        • Interlanguage Data Compatibility
          • Syntax for Passing Arguments in Mixed-Language Applications
          • Operational Descriptors
            • Requirements of Operational Descriptors
            • Absence of a Required Descriptor
            • Presence of an Unnecessary Descriptor
            • Bindable APIs for Operational Descriptor Access
        • Support for OPM and ILE APIs
      • Storage Management
        • Single-Level Storage Heap
          • Heap Characteristics
          • Default Heap
          • User-Created Heaps
          • Single-Heap Support
          • Heap Allocation Strategy
          • Single-Level Storage Heap Interfaces
        • Heap Support
        • Thread Local Storage
      • Exception and Condition Management
        • Handle Cursors and Resume Cursors
        • Exception Handler Actions
          • How to Resume Processing
          • How to Percolate a Message
          • How to Promote a Message
        • Default Actions for Unhandled Exceptions
        • Nested Exceptions
        • Condition Handling
          • How Conditions Are Represented
            • Layout of a Condition Token
          • Condition Token Testing
          • Relationship of ILE Conditions to Operating System Messages
          • IBM i Messages and the Bindable API Feedback Code
      • Debugging Considerations
        • Debug Mode
          • Debug Environment
          • Addition of Programs to Debug Mode
        • How Observability and Optimization Affect Debugging
          • Optimization Levels
          • Debug Data Creation and Removal
          • Module Views
          • Debugging across Jobs
          • OPM and ILE Debugger Support
          • Watch Support
        • Unmonitored Exceptions
        • Globalization Restriction for Debugging
      • Data Management Scoping
        • Common Data Management Resources
        • Commitment Control Scoping
          • Commitment Definitions and Activation Groups
          • Ending Commitment Control
          • Commitment Control during Activation Group End
      • ILE Bindable Application Programming Interfaces
        • ILE Bindable APIs Available
        • Dynamic Screen Manager Bindable APIs
      • Advanced Optimization Techniques
        • Program Profiling
          • Types of Profiling
          • How to Profile a Program
            • Enabling the program to collect profiling data
            • Collect Profiling Data
            • Applying the Collected Profiling Data
          • Managing Programs Enabled to Collect Profiling Data
          • Managing Programs with Profiling Data Applied to Them
          • How to Tell if a Program or Module is Profiled or Enabled for Collection
        • Interprocedural analysis (IPA)
          • How to optimize your programs with IPA
          • IPA control file syntax
          • IPA usage notes
          • IPA restrictions and limitations
          • Partitions created by IPA
        • Advanced Argument Optimization
          • How to Use Advanced Argument Optimization
          • Considerations and Restrictions When Using Advanced Argument Optimization
        • Licensed Internal Code Options
          • Currently Defined Options
          • Application
          • Restrictions
          • Syntax
          • Release Compatibility
          • Displaying Module and ILE Program Licensed Internal Code Options
        • Adaptive Code Generation
          • ACG Concepts
          • Normal Operation
          • Restore Options
          • QFRCCVNRST System Value
          • FRCOBJCVN Parameter
          • Create Options
          • The CodeGenTarget LICOPT
          • QIBM_BN_CREATE_WITH_COMMON_CODEGEN Environment Variable
          • Displaying ACG Information
            • Object compatibility
          • Release-to-Release Considerations
          • Optimizing Compatible Programs
          • ACG and Logical Partitions
      • Shared Storage Synchronization
        • Shared Storage
        • Shared Storage Pitfalls
        • Shared Storage Access Ordering
          • Example Problem 1: One Writer, Many Readers
            • Example 1 Solution
        • Storage Synchronizing Actions
          • Example Problem 2: Two Contending Writers or Readers
            • Example 2 Solution
            • Alternate Solution: Using Check Lock Value / Clear Lock Value
      • Output Listing from CRTPGM, CRTSRVPGM, UPDPGM, or UPDSRVPGM Command
        • Binder Listing
          • Basic Listing
          • Extended Listing
          • Full Listing
          • IPA Listing Components
            • Object File Map
            • Compiler Options Map
            • Inline Report
            • Global Symbols Map
            • Partition Map
            • Source File Map
            • Messages
            • Message Summary
          • Listing for Example Service Program
            • Binder Information Listing for Example Service Program
            • Cross-Reference Listing for Example Service Program
            • Binding Statistics for Example Service Program
        • Binder Language Errors
          • Signature Padded
            • Suggested Changes
          • Signature Truncated
            • Suggested Changes
          • Current Export Block Limits Interface
            • Suggested Changes
          • Duplicate Export Block
            • Suggested Changes
          • Duplicate Symbol on Previous Export
            • Suggested Changes
          • Level Checking Cannot Be Disabled More than Once, Ignored
            • Suggested Changes
          • Multiple Current Export Blocks Not Allowed, Previous Assumed
            • Suggested Changes
          • Current Export Block Is Empty
            • Suggested Changes
          • Export Block Not Completed, End-of-File Found before ENDPGMEXP
            • Suggested Changes
          • Export Block Not Started, STRPGMEXP Required
            • Suggested Changes
          • Export Blocks Cannot Be Nested, ENDPGMEXP Missing
            • Suggested Changes
          • Exports Must Exist inside Export Blocks
            • Suggested Changes
          • Identical Signatures for Dissimilar Export Blocks, Must Change Exports
            • Suggested Changes
          • Multiple Wildcard Matches
            • Suggested Changes
          • No Current Export Block
            • Suggested Changes
          • No Wildcard Matches
            • Suggested Changes
          • Previous Export Block Is Empty
            • Suggested Changes
          • Signature Contains Variant Characters
            • Suggested Changes
          • SIGNATURE(*GEN) Required with LVLCHK(*NO)
            • Suggested Changes
          • Signature Syntax Not Valid
            • Suggested Changes
          • Symbol Name Required
            • Suggested Changes
          • Symbol Not Allowed as Service Program Export
            • Suggested Changes
          • Symbol Not Defined
            • Suggested Changes
          • Syntax Not Valid
            • Suggested Changes
      • Exceptions in Optimized Programs
      • CL Commands Used with ILE Objects
        • CL Commands Used with Modules
        • CL Commands Used with Program Objects
        • CL Commands Used with Service Programs
        • CL Commands Used with Binding Directories
        • CL Commands Used with Structured Query Language
        • CL Commands Used with CICS
        • CL Commands Used with Source Debugger
        • CL Commands Used to Edit the Binder Language Source File
      • Related information
    • C 및 C++
      • ILE C/C++ Compiler Reference
        • What is new for IBM i 7.3
        • PDF file for ILE C/C++ Compiler Reference
        • About ILE C/C++ Compiler Reference
          • Prerequisite and Related Information
          • Install Licensed Program Information
          • A Note About Examples
          • Control Language Commands
          • How to Read the Syntax Diagrams
          • Industry Standards
        • Predefined Macros
          • ANSI/ISO Standard Predefined Macros
          • ILE C/C++ Predefined Macros
        • ILE C/C++ Pragmas
          • Pragma directive syntax
          • Scope of Pragma directives
          • Summary of Pragma Directives
          • Individual Pragma Descriptions
            • argopt
            • argument
            • cancel_handler
            • chars
            • checkout
            • comment
            • convert
            • datamodel
            • define
            • descriptor
            • disable_handler
            • disjoint
            • do_not_instantiate
            • enum
            • exception_handler
            • hashome
            • implementation
            • info
            • inline
            • ishome
            • isolated_call
            • linkage
            • map
            • mapinc
            • margins
            • namemangling
            • namemanglingrule
            • noargv0
            • noinline (function)
            • nomargins
            • nosequence
            • nosigtrunc
            • pack
              • Related Operators and Specifiers
                • __align Specifier
                • _Packed Specifier
                • __alignof Operator
              • Examples
            • page
            • pagesize
            • pointer
            • priority
            • sequence
            • strings
            • weak
        • Control Language Commands
          • Control Language Command Syntax
          • Control Language Command Options
            • MODULE
            • PGM
            • SRCFILE
            • SRCMBR
            • SRCSTMF
            • TEXT
            • OUTPUT
            • OPTION
            • CHECKOUT
            • OPTIMIZE
            • INLINE
            • MODCRTOPT
            • DBGVIEW
            • DBGENCKEY
            • DEFINE
            • LANGLVL
            • ALIAS
            • SYSIFCOPT
            • LOCALETYPE
            • FLAG
            • MSGLMT
            • REPLACE
            • USRPRF
            • AUT
            • TGTRLS
            • ENBPFRCOL
            • PFROPT
            • PRFDTA
            • TERASPACE
            • STGMDL
            • DTAMDL
            • RTBND
            • PACKSTRUCT
            • ENUM
            • MAKEDEP
            • PPGENOPT
            • PPSRCFILE
            • PPSRCMBR
            • PPSRCSTMF
            • INCDIR
            • CSOPT
            • LICOPT
            • DFTCHAR
            • TGTCCSID
            • TEMPLATE
            • TMPLREG
            • WEAKTMPL
            • DECFLTRND
        • Using the ixlc Command to Invoke the C/C++ Compiler
          • Using ixlc in Qshell
          • ixlc Command and Options Syntax
          • ixlc Command Options
        • I/O Considerations
          • Data Management Operations on Record Files
          • Data Management Operations on Stream Files
          • C Streams and File Types
          • DDS-to-C/C++ Data Type Mapping
        • Control Characters
        • Related information
      • ILE C/C++ Language Reference
        • What's new for IBM i 7.3
        • PDF file for ILE C/C++ Language Reference
        • About ILE C/C++ Language Reference
          • Highlighting Conventions
          • Industry Standards
          • How to Read the Syntax Diagrams
          • Prerequisite and related information
        • Scope and linkage
          • Scope
            • Block/local scope
            • Function scope
            • Function prototype scope
            • File/global scope
            • Examples of scope in C
            • Class scope (C++ only)
            • Namespaces of identifiers
            • Name hiding (C++ only)
          • Program linkage
            • Internal linkage
            • External linkage
            • No linkage
            • Language linkage
              • Name mangling (C++ only)
        • Lexical elements
          • Tokens
            • Keywords
              • Keywords for language extensions
            • Identifiers
              • Characters in identifiers
              • Reserved identifiers
              • The __func__ predefined identifier
            • Literals
              • Integer literals
                • Decimal integer literals
                • Hexadecimal integer literals
                • Octal integer literals
              • Boolean literals
              • Floating-point literals
                • Binary floating-point literals
                • Hexadecimal floating-point literals
                • Decimal floating-point literals
              • Packed Decimal Literals
              • Character literals
              • String literals
                • String concatenation
              • Pointer literals (C++11)
            • Punctuators and operators
              • Alternative tokens
          • Source program character set
            • Multibyte characters
            • Escape sequences
            • The Unicode standard (C++ only)
            • Digraph characters
            • Trigraph sequences
          • Comments
        • Data objects and declarations
          • Overview of data objects and declarations
            • Overview of data objects
              • Incomplete types
              • Compatible and composite types
            • Overview of data declarations and definitions
              • Tentative definitions
          • static_assert declaration (C++11)
          • Storage class specifiers
            • The auto storage class specifier
              • Storage duration of automatic variables
              • Linkage of automatic variables
            • The static storage class specifier
              • Linkage of static variables
            • The extern storage class specifier
              • Storage duration of external variables
              • Linkage of external variables
            • The mutable storage class specifier (C++ only)
            • The register storage class specifier
              • Storage duration of register variables
              • Linkage of register variables
            • The __thread storage class specifier
          • Type specifiers
            • Integral types
            • Boolean types
            • Floating-point types
              • Real floating-point types
            • Character types
            • The void type
            • Compatibility of arithmetic types (C only)
            • The auto type specifier (C++11)
            • The decltype(expression) type specifier (C++11)
          • The constexpr specifier (C++11)
          • User-defined types
            • Structures and unions
              • Structure and union type definition
              • Member declarations
                • Flexible array members
                • Zero-extent array members
                • Bit field members
              • Structure and union variable declarations
              • Structure and union type and variable definitions in a single statement
              • Access to structure and union members
              • Anonymous unions
            • Enumerations
              • Enumeration type definition
                • Enumeration members
              • Enumeration variable declarations
              • Enumeration type and variable definitions in a single statement
            • Compatibility of structures, unions, and enumerations (C only)
              • Compatibility across separate source files
            • typedef definitions
              • Examples of typedef definitions
          • Type qualifiers
            • The __align type qualifier
              • Examples using the __align qualifier
            • The const type qualifier
            • The restrict type qualifier(C++ only)
            • The volatile type qualifier
          • Type attributes
            • The aligned type attribute
            • The packed type attribute
            • The transparent_union type attribute (C only)
        • Declarators
          • Overview of declarators
            • Examples of declarators
          • Type names
          • Pointers
            • Pointer arithmetic
            • Type-based aliasing
            • Compatibility of pointers (C only)
            • Null pointers
          • Arrays
            • Variable length arrays
            • Compatibility of arrays
          • References (C++ only)
          • Initializers
            • Initialization and storage classes
              • Initialization of automatic variables
              • Initialization of static variables
              • Initialization of external variables
              • Initialization of register variables
            • Designated initializers for aggregate types (C only)
            • Initialization of structures and unions
            • Initialization of enumerations
            • Initialization of pointers
            • Initialization of arrays
              • Initialization of character arrays
              • Initialization of multidimensional arrays
            • Initialization of references (C++ only)
              • Reference binding
              • Direct binding
          • Variable attributes
            • The aligned variable attribute
            • The packed variable attribute
            • The mode variable attribute
            • The weak variable attribute
        • Type conversions
          • Arithmetic conversions and promotions
            • Integral conversions
            • Boolean conversions
            • Floating-point conversions
            • Integral and floating-point promotions
          • Lvalue-to-rvalue conversions
          • Pointer conversions
            • Conversion to void*
          • Reference conversions (C++ only)
          • Qualification conversions (C++ only)
          • Function argument conversions
        • Expressions and Operators
          • Lvalues and rvalues
          • Primary expressions
            • Names
            • Literals
            • Integer constant expressions
            • Identifier expressions (C++ only)
            • Parenthesized expressions ( )
            • Scope resolution operator :: (C++ only)
            • Generalized constant expressions (C++11)
          • Function call expressions
          • Member expressions
            • Dot operator .
            • Arrow operator ->
          • Unary expressions
            • Increment operator ++
            • Decrement operator --
            • Unary plus operator +
            • Unary minus operator -
            • Logical negation operator !
            • Bitwise negation operator ~
            • Address operator &
            • Indirection operator *
            • The typeid operator (C++ only)
            • The __alignof__ operator
            • The sizeof operator
            • The __typeof__ operator
          • Binary expressions
            • Assignment operators
              • Simple assignment operator =
              • Compound assignment operators
            • Multiplication operator *
            • Division operator ⁄
            • Remainder operator %
            • Addition operator +
            • Subtraction operator -
            • Bitwise left and right shift operators << >>
            • Relational operators < > <= >=
            • Equality and inequality operators == !=
            • Bitwise AND operator &
            • Bitwise exclusive OR operator ^
            • Bitwise inclusive OR operator |
            • Logical AND operator &&
            • Logical OR operator ||
            • Array subscripting operator [ ]
            • Comma operator ,
            • Pointer to member operators .* ->* (C++ only)
          • Conditional expressions
            • Types in conditional C expressions
            • Types in conditional C++ expressions
            • Examples of conditional expressions
          • Cast expressions
            • Cast operator ()
            • The static_cast operator (C++ only)
            • The reinterpret_cast operator (C++ only)
            • The const_cast operator (C++ only)
            • The dynamic_cast operator (C++ only)
          • Compound literal expressions
          • new expressions (C++ only)
            • Placement syntax
            • Initialization of objects created with the new operator
            • Handling new allocation failure
          • delete expressions (C++ only)
          • throw expressions (C++ only)
          • Operator precedence and associativity
          • Reference collapsing (C++11)
        • Statements
          • Labeled statements
          • Expression statements
            • Resolution of ambiguous statements (C++ only)
          • Block statements
            • Example of blocks
          • Selection statements
            • The if statement
              • Examples of if statements
            • The switch statement
              • Restrictions on switch statements
              • Examples of switch statements
          • Iteration statements
            • The while statement
            • The do statement
            • The for statement
              • Examples of for statements
          • Jump statements
            • The break statement
            • The continue statement
              • Examples of continue statements
            • The return statement
              • Examples of return statements
            • The goto statement
          • Null statement
        • Functions
          • Function declarations and definitions
            • Function declarations
            • Function definitions
              • Explicitly defaulted functions (C++11)
              • Deleted functions (C++11)
            • Examples of function declarations
            • Examples of function definitions
            • Compatible functions (C only)
            • Multiple function declarations (C++ only)
          • Function storage class specifiers
            • The static storage class specifier
            • The extern storage class specifier
          • Function specifiers
            • The inline function specifier
              • Linkage of inline functions
          • Function return type specifiers
            • Function return values
          • Function declarators
            • Parameter declarations
              • Parameter types
              • Parameter names
              • Static array indices in function parameter declarations (C only)
            • Trailing return type (C++11)
          • Function attributes
            • The const function attribute
            • The noinline function attribute
            • The pure function attribute
            • The weak function attribute
          • The main() function
          • Function calls
            • Pass by value
            • Pass by reference
          • Allocation and deallocation functions (C++ only)
          • Default arguments in C++ functions (C++ only)
            • Restrictions on default arguments
            • Evaluation of default arguments
          • Pointers to functions
          • Constexpr functions (C++11)
        • Namespaces (C++ only)
          • Defining namespaces (C++ only)
          • Declaring namespaces (C++ only)
          • Creating a namespace alias (C++ only)
          • Creating an alias for a nested namespace (C++ only)
          • Extending namespaces (C++ only)
          • Namespaces and overloading (C++ only)
          • Unnamed namespaces (C++ only)
          • Namespace member definitions (C++ only)
          • Namespaces and friends (C++ only)
          • The using directive (C++ only)
          • The using declaration and namespaces (C++ only)
          • Explicit access (C++ only)
          • Inline namespace definitions (C++11)
        • Overloading (C++ only)
          • Overloading functions (C++ only)
            • Restrictions on overloaded functions (C++ only)
          • Overloading operators (C++ only)
            • Overloading unary operators (C++ only)
            • Overloading increment and decrement operators (C++ only)
            • Overloading binary operators (C++ only)
            • Overloading assignments (C++ only)
            • Overloading function calls (C++ only)
            • Overloading subscripting (C++ only)
            • Overloading class member access (C++ only)
          • Overload resolution (C++ only)
            • Implicit conversion sequences (C++ only)
              • Standard conversion sequences
              • User-defined conversion sequences
              • Ellipsis conversion sequences
            • Resolving addresses of overloaded functions (C++ only)
        • Classes (C++ only)
          • Declaring class types (C++ only)
            • Using class objects (C++ only)
          • Classes and structures (C++ only)
          • Scope of class names (C++ only)
            • Incomplete class declarations (C++ only)
            • Nested classes (C++ only)
            • Local classes (C++ only)
            • Local type names (C++ only)
        • Class members and friends (C++ only)
          • Class member lists (C++ only)
          • Data members (C++ only)
          • Member functions (C++ only)
            • Inline member functions (C++ only)
            • Constant and volatile member functions (C++ only)
            • Virtual member functions (C++ only)
            • Special member functions (C++ only)
          • Member scope (C++ only)
          • Pointers to members (C++ only)
          • The this pointer (C++ only)
          • Static members (C++ only)
            • Using the class access operators with static members (C++ only)
            • Static data members (C++ only)
            • Static member functions (C++ only)
          • Member access (C++ only)
          • Friends (C++ only)
            • Friend scope (C++ only)
            • Friend access (C++ only)
        • Inheritance (C++ only)
          • Derivation (C++ only)
          • Inherited member access (C++ only)
            • Protected members (C++ only)
            • Access control of base class members (C++ only)
          • The using declaration and class members (C++ only)
            • Overloading member functions from base and derived classes (C++ only)
            • Changing the access of a class member (C++ only)
          • Multiple inheritance (C++ only)
            • Virtual base classes (C++ only)
            • Multiple access (C++ only)
            • Ambiguous base classes (C++ only)
              • Name hiding
              • Ambiguity and using declarations
              • Unambiguous class members
              • Pointer conversions
              • Overload resolution
          • Virtual functions (C++ only)
            • Ambiguous virtual function calls (C++ only)
            • Virtual function access (C++ only)
          • Abstract classes (C++ only)
        • Special member functions (C++ only)
          • Overview of constructors and destructors (C++ only)
          • Constructors (C++ only)
            • Default constructors (C++ only)
            • Delegating constructors (C++11)
            • Constexpr constructors (C++11)
            • Explicit initialization with constructors (C++ only)
            • Initialization of base classes and members (C++ only)
            • Construction order of derived class objects (C++ only)
          • Destructors (C++ only)
            • Pseudo-destructors (C++ only)
          • User-defined conversions (C++ only)
            • Conversion constructors (C++ only)
            • Explicit conversion constructors (C++ only)
            • The explicit specifier (C++ only)
            • Conversion functions (C++ only)
            • Explicit conversion operators (C++11)
          • Copy constructors (C++ only)
          • Copy assignment operators (C++ only)
        • Templates (C++ only)
          • Template parameters (C++ only)
            • Type template parameters (C++ only)
            • Non-type template parameters (C++ only)
            • Template template parameters (C++ only)
            • Default arguments for template parameters (C++ only)
            • Naming template parameters as friends (C++11)
          • Template arguments (C++ only)
            • Template type arguments (C++ only)
            • Template non-type arguments (C++ only)
            • Template template arguments (C++ only)
          • Class templates (C++ only)
            • Class template declarations and definitions (C++ only)
            • Static data members and templates (C++ only)
            • Member functions of class templates (C++ only)
            • Friends and templates (C++ only)
          • Function templates (C++ only)
            • Template argument deduction (C++ only)
              • Deducing type template arguments
              • Deducing non-type template arguments
            • Overloading function templates (C++ only)
            • Partial ordering of function templates (C++ only)
          • Template instantiation (C++ only)
            • Implicit instantiation (C++ only)
            • Explicit instantiation (C++ only)
          • Template specialization (C++ only)
            • Explicit specialization (C++ only)
              • Definition and declaration of explicit specializations
              • Explicit specialization and scope
              • Class members of explicit specializations
              • Explicit specialization of function templates
              • Explicit specialization of members of class templates
            • Partial specialization (C++ only)
              • Template parameter and argument lists of partial specializations
              • Matching of class template partial specializations
          • Variadic templates (C++11)
            • Parameter packs (C++11)
            • Pack expansion (C++11)
            • Partial specialization (C++11)
            • Template argument deduction (C++11)
          • Name binding and dependent names (C++ only)
          • The typename keyword (C++ only)
          • The template keyword as qualifier (C++ only)
        • Exception handling (C++ only)
          • try blocks (C++ only)
            • Nested try blocks (C++ only)
          • catch blocks (C++ only)
            • Function try block handlers (C++ only)
            • Arguments of catch blocks (C++ only)
            • Matching between exceptions thrown and caught (C++ only)
            • Order of catching (C++ only)
          • throw expressions (C++ only)
            • Rethrowing an exception (C++ only)
          • Stack unwinding (C++ only)
          • Exception specifications (C++ only)
          • Special exception handling functions (C++ only)
            • The unexpected() function (C++ only)
            • The terminate() function (C++ only)
            • The set_unexpected() and set_terminate() functions (C++ only)
            • Example using the exception handling functions (C++ only)
        • Preprocessor directives
          • Macro definition directives
            • The #define directive
              • Object-like macros
              • Function-like macros
                • Variadic macro extensions
            • The #undef directive
            • The # operator
            • The ## operator
          • File inclusion directives
            • The #include directive
              • Using the #include Directive when Compiling Source in a Data Management File
              • Using the #include Directive When Compiling Source in an Integrated File System File
            • The #include_next directive
          • Conditional compilation directives
            • The #if and #elif directives
            • The #ifdef directive
            • The #ifndef directive
            • The #else directive
            • The #endif directive
          • Message generation directives
            • The #error directive
            • The #warning directive
            • The #line directive
          • Assertion directives
          • The null directive (#)
          • Pragma directives
            • The _Pragma preprocessing operator
          • C99 preprocessor features adopted in C++11 (C++11)
        • The ILE C language extensions
          • C99 features as extensions to C89
          • Extensions for GNU C compatibility
          • Extensions for decimal floating-point support
        • The ILE C++ language extensions
          • General IBM extensions
          • Extensions for C99 compatibility
          • Extensions for GNU C compatibility
          • Extensions for GNU C++ compatibility
          • Extensions for C++11 compatibility
          • Extensions for decimal floating-point support
      • ILE C/C++ Programmer’s Guide
        • PDF file for ILE C/C++ Programmer’s Guide
        • About ILE C/C++ Programmer's Guide
          • Install Licensed Program Information
          • Notes About Examples
          • Control Language Commands and the Procedures in This Guide
        • Introduction
          • Introduction to the ILE C/C++ Compiler
            • Multi-Language Program Creation
              • Programming Languages Supported by the IBM i Operating System
              • ILE Program Creation
              • Binding Directories
              • Service Programs
            • Program and Resource Management
              • Program Flow
                • Program and Procedure Calls
              • Resource Allocation
              • Bindable APIs
              • Runtime Exceptions
            • Program Debugging
        • Creating and Compiling Programs
          • Creating a Program
            • The Program Development Process
              • Preparing a Program
              • Compiling a Program
              • Binding Modules
              • Running or Calling Objects
              • Debugging a Program
            • Entering Source Statements
              • Example Of Creating a Source File
              • Instructions
              • Source Code Sample
            • Creating a Program in One Step
            • Creating a Program in Two Steps
              • Identifying Program and User Entry Procedures
              • Understanding the Internal Structure of a Program Object
              • Using Static Procedure Calls
              • Working with Binding Directories
              • Creating a Binding Directory
              • Using the Binder to Create a Program
              • Preparing to Create a Program
              • Specifying Parameters for the CRTPGM Command
              • How Import Requests Are Resolved
              • Using a Binder Listing
              • Updating a Module or a Program Object
              • Updating a Program
              • Activating Groups
            • Messaging Support
          • Service Programs
            • Differences Between Programs and Service Programs
            • Public Interface
            • Considerations When Creating a Service Program
            • Using the Binder to Create a Service Program
              • Specifying Parameters for the CRTSRVPGM Command
              • Updating or Changing a Service Program
              • Using Control Language (CL) Commands with Service Programs
            • Creating, Compiling, and Binding a Service Program
              • Creating the Source Files
                • User Header File
                • Source Code Files
              • Compiling and Binding the Service Program
              • Binding the Service Program to a Program
          • Working with Exports from Service Programs
            • Determining Exports from Service Programs
              • Displaying Exported Defined Symbols with the Display Module Command
            • Creating a Binder Language Source File
              • Creating Binder Language Using SEU
              • Creating Binder Language Using the RTVBNDSRC Command
            • Updating a Service Program Export List
            • Using the Demangling Functions
            • Handling Unresolved Import Requests During Program Creation
            • Creating an Export Service Program Using Binder Language
            • Creating a Program with Circular References
              • Creating the Source Files
              • Compiling the Source Files into Modules
              • Generating the Binder Language to Create the Service Program
              • Binding the Modules into the Program
              • Handling Unresolved Import Requests Using the *UNRSLVREF Parameter
              • Handling Unresolved Import Requests by Changing Program Creation Order
            • Binding a Program to a Non-Existent Service Program
              • Instructions
              • Code Samples
              • Running the Program
            • Updating a Service Program Export List
              • Program Description
              • Creating the Source Files
              • Compiling and Binding Programs and Service Programs
              • Running the Program
          • Running a Program
            • The ILE C/C++ Runtime Model
            • Activations and Activation Groups
            • Runtime Library Functions and Activation Groups
            • Calling Programs
              • Using the Call (CALL) Command
                • Passing Parameters to the Called Program
                  • Example1:
                  • Example 2
                • Call (CALL) Command Parameter Conversions
                • Using the Process Commands (QCAPCMD) API
              • Using the Transfer Control (TFRCTL) Command
                • Example: Creating and Running a Program that Uses the TFRCTL Command
                • Code Samples
              • Creating a CL Command to Run a Program
                • Program Description
                • Instructions
                • Code Samples
            • Normal and Abnormal End-of-Program
            • Managing Activation Groups
              • Specifying an Activation Group
                • Running a Program in a Named Activation Group
                • Running a Program in Activation Group *NEW
                • Non-Standard Behavior with Named Activation Groups
                • Running a Program in Activation Group (*CALLER)
              • Presence of a Program on the Call Stack
              • Deleting an Activation Group
              • Reclaiming System Resources
                • Using the Reclaim Resources (RCLRSC) Command
            • Managing Runtime Storage
              • Managing the Default Heap
                • Using Bindable APIs to Manage the Default Heap
                • Dynamically Allocating Storage at Runtime
                • Overriding Replacement Functions
                  • Limitations
                • Overloading the new or delete Operator
          • Improving Runtime Performance
            • Choosing Data Types to Improve Performance
              • Avoiding Use of the Volatile Qualifier
              • Replacing Bit Fields with Other Data Types
              • Minimizing the Use of Static and Global Variables
              • Using the Register Storage Class
            • Creating Classes to Improve Performance
            • Enabling Performance Measurement
              • Using a Compiler Option to Enable Performance Measurement
            • Minimizing Exception Handling
              • Turning on Return Codes during Record I/O
              • Turning Off C2M Messages during Record Input and Output
              • Using a Direct Monitor Handler
              • Minimizing Percolation of Exceptions
                • Example of Exception Percolation for a Sample ILE C Source Code
            • Reducing the Number of Function Calls and Arguments
              • Inlining Function Calls
              • Using Static Class Member Functions or Global Variables
              • Passing Arguments in Registers
              • Using Prototypes to Minimize Function Call Processing
            • Choosing Input and Output Functions to Improve Performance
              • Using Record Input and Output Functions
              • ISO C Record I⁄O
              • ILE C Record I⁄O
              • Using Input and Output Feedback Information
              • Blocking Records
              • Manipulating the System Buffer
              • Opening Files Once for Both Input and Output
              • Minimizing the Use of Shared Files
              • Minimizing the Number of File Opens and Closes
              • Defining Tape Files to Improve Performance
              • Improving Performance when Using Stream Input and Output Functions
              • Using C++ Input and Output Stream Classes
              • Using Physical Files Instead of Source Physical Files
              • Specifying Library Names
            • Using Pointers to Improve Performance
              • Avoiding Use of Open Pointers
              • Avoiding Pointer Comparisons
              • Reducing Indirect Access through Pointers
            • Using Shallow Copy instead of Deep Copy
            • Minimizing Space Requirements
              • Choosing Appropriate Data Types
              • Minimizing Dynamic Memory Allocation Calls
              • Arranging Variables to Reduce Padding
              • Removing Observability
              • Compressing Objects
            • Optimizing Use of Activation Groups
              • Calling Functions in Other Activation Groups
              • Reducing Program Startup Time
            • Minimizing Use of Virtual Functions
            • Choosing Compiler Options to Optimize for Speed or Size
            • Setting Runtime Limits
          • Example: Creating an ILE C Application
            • Process Flow
            • ILE Activation Group
            • Resource Requirements
            • Task Summary
            • Instructions to Create the Sample Application
            • Source Code Samples
              • Source Code for an Audit Log File
              • Source Code Pass Terminal Session Input to an ILE Program
              • Source Code to Define a CL Command to Collect Session Data
              • Source Code for a User Entry Procedure (UEP)
              • Source Code to Calculate Tax and Format Cost for Output
              • Source Code to Write an Audit Trail
              • Source Code to Export Tax Rate Data
              • Binder Language to Export Tax Rate Data
              • Binder Language to Export the write-audit-trail Procedure
        • Debugging Programs
          • The ILE Source Debugger
            • Debug Data Options
            • Debug Language Syntax
            • Limitations of the Debug Language Syntax
            • Debug Commands
            • Examples of Using Debug Expressions in ILE C Programs
              • Examples of Program Definitions and Corresponding Debug Expressions
                • Evaluating Pointers to Find and Correct Errors
                • Evaluating Simple Expression to Find and Correct Errors
                • Evaluating Bit Fields to Find and Correct Errors
                • Evaluating Structures and Unions to Find and Correct Errors
                • Evaluating Enumerations to Find and Correct Errors
              • Examples of Displaying System and Space Pointers in the ILE Source Debugger
          • Preparing a Program for Debugging
            • Setting Up a Test Library
            • Creating a Listing View for Debugging
          • Working with Source Debug Sessions
            • Starting a Source Debug Session
            • Adding and Removing Programs from a Debug Session
            • Setting or Changing Debug Options During a Session
              • Example: Adding an OPM Program to an ILE Debug Session
              • Example: Setting Debug Options during a Debug Session
            • Viewing the Program Source
              • Displaying Other Modules in Your Program
                • Example: Changing the Module Displayed in a Session
              • Displaying a Different View Of a Module
          • Using Breakpoints to Aid Debugging
            • Types Of Breakpoints
              • Job and Thread Breakpoints
              • Conditional and Unconditional Breakpoints
            • Setting Breakpoints
              • Setting Unconditional Breakpoints from the Display Module Source Display
              • Setting Unconditional Breakpoints from the Command Line
              • Setting Conditional Breakpoints for a Macro
              • Setting Conditional Breakpoints for a Statement
            • Setting Conditional Thread Breakpoints
              • Setting a Conditional Thread Breakpoint from the Work with Module Breakpoints Display
              • Setting a Conditional Thread Breakpoint from the Command Line
            • Testing Breakpoints
            • Removing All Breakpoints
          • Using Watches to Aid Debugging
            • Characteristics and Limitations Of Watches
            • Setting and Removing Watch Conditions
              • Setting watch conditions
              • Using the WATCH Debug Command
              • Removing Watch Conditions
              • Automatic Removal Of Watch Conditions
            • Example Of Setting a Watch Condition
            • Displaying Active Watches
          • Stepping Through Programs
            • Stepping Over Programs
              • Using F10 to Step Over Programs
              • Using the STEP OVER Debug Command
            • Stepping into Programs
              • Using F22 to Step into Programs
              • Using the STEP INTO Debug Command
              • Stepping into Called Programs
              • Example of Stepping into a Program Using F22
              • Stepping into an OPM Program
            • Stepping Over Procedures
            • Stepping into Procedures
          • Debugging Variables
            • Displaying the Value Of a Variable
              • Using F11 to Display Variables
            • Changing the Value of a Variable
            • Changing the Value of a Scalar Variable
            • Equating a Name with a Variable, Expression, or Debug Command
              • Displaying a Structure
              • Displaying Variables As Hexadecimal Values
              • Displaying Null-Ended Character Arrays
              • Displaying Character Arrays
              • Sample EVAL Commands for Pointers, Variables, and Bit Fields
              • EVAL Commands for System and Space Pointers
                • Displaying a Class Template and a Function Template
            • Source for Sample EVAL Commands
            • Source for Sample EVAL Commands for Displaying System and Space Pointers
            • Source for Sample EVAL Commands for Displaying C++ Constructs
          • Changing Module Optimization and Observability
            • Changing Optimization Levels
            • Removing Module Observability
        • Performing I/O Operations
          • Using ILE C/C++ Stream and Record I/O Functions with IBM i files
            • ILE C Record I/O Functions
              • Stream Buffering
              • Dynamic Stream File Creation
              • Open Modes for Dynamically Created Stream Files
              • Standard I/O Text Stream Files ()
                • Overriding Standard Output to the Terminal
                • Allowing a Program to Re-Read an Input File with QINLINE Specified
            • IBM i Files
              • IBM i File Types
              • Stream Files and ILE C I/O Operations
                • Avoiding Positioning Problems in the File
                • Using the fopen() Function
                • Using the open() member Function
              • IBM i File Naming Conventions
            • File Control Structure of Text Streams and Binary Streams
            • I/O Processes for Text Stream Files
              • Opening Text Stream Files
              • Writing Text Stream Files
              • Reading Text Stream Files
              • Updating Text Stream Files
            • I/O Process for Binary Stream Files
              • Opening Binary Stream Files (character at a time)
              • Writing Binary Stream Files (character at a time)
              • Reading Binary Stream Files (character at a time)
              • Updating Binary Stream Files (character at a time)
              • Opening Binary Stream Files (record at a time)
              • Writing Binary Stream Files (record at a time)
              • Reading Binary Stream Files (record at a time)
            • Open Feedback Area
            • I/O Feedback Area
            • Using Session Manager
              • Obtaining the Session Handle
              • Using Session Manager APIs
              • Example: Using an ILE Bindable API to Display a DSM Session
                • Instructions
                • Code Samples
          • Using ILE C/C++ Stream Functions with the IBM i Integrated File System
            • The Integrated File System (IFS)
              • root(/) File System
                • User Access
                • Path Names
              • Open Systems (QOpenSys) File System
                • User Access
                • Path Names
              • Library (QSYS.LIB) File System
                • File Handling Restrictions
                • Path Names
              • Document Library Services (QDLS) File System
                • User Access
                • Path Names
              • LAN Server/400 (QLANSrv) File System
                • User Access
                • Path Names
              • Optical Support (QOPT) File System
                • Path Names
              • File Server (QFileSvr.400) File System
                • Path Names
            • Enabling Integrated File System Stream I/O
              • Using Stream I/O with Large Files
            • Stream Files
            • Stream Files Versus Database Files
            • Text Streams
            • Binary Streams
            • Opening Text Stream and Binary Stream Files
            • Storing Data as a Text Stream or as a Binary Stream
            • Using the Integrated File System (IFS)
              • Copying Source Files into the IFS
              • Editing Stream Files
              • The SRCSTMF Parameter
              • Header File Search
                • Include File Links
                • Include Directive Syntax
                  • Integrated File System (IFS) compilations
                  • File System (DM) compilations
                • Include Search Path Rules
                  • INCDIR (Include Directory) Command Parameter
                  • INCLUDE Environment Variable
                  • *STDINC/*NOSTDINC Command Options
                  • *SYSINCPATH/*NOSYSINCPATH Command Options
                • Considerations for Specifying Source Stream Files
                • Restrictions on the Absolute Include Path Name
                • Recommendation for Source and Header Files
              • Preprocessor Output
              • Listing Output
              • Code Pages and CCSIDs
              • Pitfalls to Avoid
              • Examples of Using Integrated File System Source
              • Using Stream I/O
                • Large Files
                • Open Mode
                • Line-End Characters
        • Working with File Systems and Devices
          • Using Externally Described Files in a Program
            • Creating Externally Described Database Files
              • Creating Type Definitions
              • Creating Header Descriptions
              • Specifying the Record Format Name
              • Specifying Record Field Names
              • Including Database Files in the Type Definition
              • Defining the Structure Type (KEY Field)
              • Using Long Names for Files
            • Level Checking to Verify Descriptions
              • Using the GENCSRC Utility for Level Checking
              • Using the #pragma mapinc Directive for Level Checking
            • Avoiding Field Alignment Problems in C/C++ Structures
            • Including External Field Definitions in a Program
              • The INPUT Option
              • The OUTPUT Option
              • The BOTH Option
            • Defining and Using Indicators
              • Creation of Indicators in the File Buffer
              • Creating a Separate Indicator Area
            • Including Physical and Logical Database Files in a Program
            • Including Device Files in a Program
            • Including Externally Described Multiple Record Formats in a Logical File
            • Using Externally Described Packed Decimal Data in a Program
          • Using Database Files and Distributed Files in a Program
            • Database Files and Distributed Files
            • Physical Files and Logical Files
              • Describing Records in Database Files
                • Defining Externally Described Files
            • Data Files and Source Files
            • Access Paths
              • Arranging Key Fields
              • Duplicate Key Values
            • Deleted Records
            • Locking
            • Sharing
            • Null-Capable Fields
            • Opening Database and DDM Files as Record Files
              • Record Functions for Database and DDM Files
              • I/O Considerations for DDM Files
            • Opening Database and DDM Files as Binary Stream Files
              • I/O Considerations for Binary Stream Database and DDM Files
              • Binary Stream Functions for Database and DDM Files
            • Processing a Database Record File in Arrival Sequence
              • Instructions
              • Source Code Sample
            • Processing a Database Record File in Keyed Sequence
            • Processing a Database Record File Using Record Input and Output Functions
            • Synchronizing Database File Changes in a Single Job
            • Blocking Records
          • Using Device Files in a Program
            • Using IBM i Feedback Areas for all Device Files
            • Using Indicators to Transfer Information
              • Types of Indicators
              • Separate Indicator Areas
              • Major and Minor Return Codes
              • Example: Returning Indicators to a Separate Indicator Area
                • Instructions
                • Source Code Samples
              • Example: Returning Indicators to the File Buffer
                • Instructions
                • Code Samples
            • Establishing the Default Program Device
            • Changing the Default Program Device
            • Obtaining Feedback Information
            • Using Display Files and Subfiles
              • Display Files and Subfiles
                • I/O Considerations for Display Files
                • I/O Considerations for Subfiles
              • Using Subfiles to Minimize I/O Operations
              • Opening Display Files and Subfiles as Binary Stream Files
                • I/O Considerations for Binary Stream Subfiles
                • Program Devices for Binary Stream Display Files
                • Binary Stream Functions for Display Files and Subfiles
              • Opening Display Files as Record Files
                • I/O Considerations for Record Display Files
                • I/O Considerations for Record Subfiles
                • Record Functions for Display Files and Subfiles
            • Using Intersystem Communication Function Files
              • I/O Considerations for Intersystem Communication Function Files
              • Opening ICF Files as Binary Stream Files
              • I/O Considerations for Binary Stream ICF Files
                • Program Devices for Binary Stream ICF Files
              • Binary Stream Functions for ICF Files
              • Opening ICF Files as Record Files
              • I/O Considerations for Record ICF Files
                • Program Devices for Record ICF Files
              • Record Functions for ICF Files
            • Using Printer Files
              • I/O Considerations for Printer Files
              • Opening Printer Files as Binary Stream Files
                • Binary Stream Functions for Printer Files
              • Opening Printer Files as Record Files
              • Record Functions for Printer Files
            • Writing to a Tape File
              • I/O Considerations for Tape Files
              • Opening Tape Files as Binary Stream Files
                • I/O Considerations for Binary Stream Tape Files
                  • Blocking Binary Stream Tape Files
              • Binary Stream Functions for Tape Files
              • Opening Tape Files as Record Files
                • I/O Considerations for Record Tape Files
                  • Using _Rfeod
                  • Using _Rfeov
                  • Blocking Record Tape Files
              • Record Functions for Tape Files
            • Writing to a Diskette File
              • I/O Considerations for Diskette Files
              • Opening Diskette Files as Binary Stream Files
                • I/O Considerations for Binary Stream Diskette Files
                  • Blocking Binary Stream Diskette Files
              • Binary Stream Functions for Diskette Files
              • Opening Diskette Files as Record Files
                • I/O Considerations for Record Diskette Files
                  • Read and Write Record Diskette Files
                  • Blocking Record Diskette Files
              • Record Functions for Diskette Files
            • Using Save Files
              • I/O Considerations for Save Files
              • Opening Save Files as Binary Stream Files
              • I/O Considerations for Binary Stream Save Files
              • Binary Stream Functions for Save Files
              • Opening Save Files as Record Files
              • I/O Considerations for Record Save Files
              • Record Functions for Save Files
        • Working with IBM i Features
          • Handling Exceptions in a Program
            • ILE Language-Specific Error Handling
            • Exception Messages
            • How the System Processes Exceptions
              • How the Call Message Queue Handles ILE Procedures and Functions
              • How Control Boundaries Affect Exception Handling in ILE
              • Unmonitored Exceptions and Unhandled Exceptions
                • Example of ILE C Source Code with an Unhandled Exception
              • Nested Exceptions
            • Detecting Stream File and Record File Errors
              • Checking the Return Value of a Function
              • Checking the Errno Value
                • Initializing Errno
                • Viewing and Printing the Errno Value
                • Example: Checking the errno Value for the fopen() Function
              • Checking the Major/Minor Return Code
              • Checking the System Exceptions for Record Files
              • Checking the Global Variable _EXCP_MSGID
            • Using ILE Exception Handlers
              • Types of Exception Handlers
              • Using ILE Direct Monitor Handlers
                • Using the pragma Directives
                • Using Communications Area Variables
                • Scoping Direct Monitor Handles
                • Using Exception Classes
                • Specifying Control Actions
                • Specifying Message Identifiers
                • Example of Source Code that Uses a Direct Monitor Handler
                • Example of Source that Illustrates How to Use Direct Monitor Handlers
                • Example of a Service Program that Provides Direct Monitor Handle
                • Example that Uses Labels instead of Functions as Handlers
              • Using ILE Condition Handlers
                • When to Use an ILE Condition Handler
                • Example of ILE Source that Uses Condition Handlers
                • Example of a Service Program that Provides ILE Condition Handlers
                • Examples of Handling an Exception
                • Example of Handling a Divide-By-Zero Exception
                • Example of Promoting an Exception
            • Using the C/C++ Signal Handler
              • When to Use the Signal Handler
              • Raising Signals
              • Signal Handling Function Prototypes
              • How the ILE C/C++ Runtime Environment Handles Signals
              • Resetting the Signal Action
              • Stacking Signal Handlers
              • Example: Setting Up a Signal Handler
                • Instructions
                • Source Code Sample that Sets Up Signal Handlers
            • Using Both C/C++ Signal and ILE Exception Handlers
              • Order of Priority
              • Example of Using a Direct Monitor Handler and Signal Handler Together
            • Handling Nested Exceptions
            • Using Cancel Handlers
            • Example: Using a Variety of Ways to Detect Errors and Handle Exceptions
              • Instructions
              • Source Code Samples
          • Using pointers in a Program
            • IBM i pointer Types
            • Using Open Pointers
            • Using Pointers Other than Open Pointers
            • Declaring Pointer Variables
              • Declaring IBM i Pointer Variables in C and C++
              • Declaring a Function Pointer to a Bound Procedure in ILE C
              • Declaring a Function Pointer with OS-Linkage in ILE C and ILE C++
            • Casting Pointers
              • Example: Passing IBM i pointers as Arguments on a Dynamic Program Call to Another ILE C Program
              • Instructions
              • Source Code Samples
          • Using ILE C/C++ Call Conventions
            • Program and Procedure Calls
              • Using Dynamic Program Calls
              • How the ILE Call Stack Is Used to Control Program Flow
            • Renaming Programs and Procedures
            • Calling Programs that Have Library Qualification
            • Calling C++ Programs and Procedures from ILE C
              • Specifying the Linkage Convention
              • Example: An ILE C Program that Uses C++ Objects
                • Program Structure
                • Program Flow
                • Program Output
            • Accessing C++ Classes from ILE C
              • Mapping a C++ Class to a C Structure
              • Example: An ILE C Program that Uses C++ Objects
                • Program Files and Structures
                • Program Description
                • Program Output
          • Porting Programs from Another Platform to ILE
            • Limitations to Porting Code to ILE C or C++
              • File Inclusions
              • Platform-Specific Extensions
              • Members of a Union
              • Members of a Structure
              • Decimal Constants
              • Decimal Constants and Case Statements
              • Library QSYS.LIB under IFS
              • Teraspace Considerations
            • Modifying Calls of ILE C++ Objects
              • Differences in Header Files
              • Differences in Linkage Specification
              • Differences in Function Definitions
            • Using BCD Macros to Port Coded Decimal Objects to ILE C++
              • Examples
              • Mapping Class Template Instantiations to ILE C Syntax
              • Handling Extra Precision for Multiplication and Division
              • Determining the Number of Digits in an Object
              • Determining the Number of Digits in an Internal Packed Decimal Data Object
              • Formatting the Value of a Formatted C Input or Output Function
                • Print Function Flags
                • Print Function Field Width
                • Print Function Field Precision
                • Conversion Specifiers
              • Porting Conditional Operators to ILE C or C++
                • Example of an Explicit Cast that Resolves Class Differences between Expression
                • Example of Use of a Consistent Variable Type
              • Porting ILE C Packed Decimal Data Types to the _DecimalT Class Template
              • Differences in Using Packed Structures
              • Differences in Error Checking
                • Invalid Decimal Format
                • Mathematical Operators
            • Header Files that Work with Both C and C++
              • Using Dual Function Prototypes
              • Permitting ILE C Programs to Access C++ Linkage Functions
              • Including QSYSINC Header Files
            • Handling the Stricter C++ Type Checking
              • Resolving Integer Data Type Size Issues
              • Resolving Incompatible Pointer Types
            • Disabling Name Mangling to Avoid Undefined Name Errors
            • Resolving Type Mismatches with the C++ Function Prototype
              • Example of Function Prototype Mismatch
              • Handling the Function Prototype Mismatch
            • Declaring unsigned char Pointers as unsigned char Variables
            • Initializing Character Arrays
            • Specifying Access to String Literals
            • Avoiding Uncaught Exceptions by Scoping to a Single Activation Group
          • Working with Multi-Language Applications
            • Inter-Language Procedure Calls
            • ILE Conventions for Calling Any Program (*PGM)
              • Mixing Recursive and Non-Recursive Calls
              • Passing Arguments from an ILE Program to a Non-EPM Program
              • Passing Arguments from an ILE Program to an EPM Program
              • Using a Linkage Specification in a C++ Dynamic Program Call
                • Valid String Literals
                • Linkage Specification
            • Calling Any ILE Program from ILE C/C++
              • Passing Parameters from ILE C++ to a Different High-Level Language
                • Using Different Linkage Specifications
                  • Specifying that a Function Has ILE Linkage
                  • Specifying ILE, CL, COBOL, and RPG Linkage
                  • Specifying VREF Linkage
                  • Specifying that a Function Has External (OS) Linkage
                  • Specifying that a Function Has C Linkage
                • Using Different Linkage Specifications (C++ Only)
                • Using Default Parameter Passing Styles
                • Using Operational Descriptors to Pass Parameters of Unknown Data Type
                • Example: Calling a Function with Operational Descriptors
              • Type Casting to Override a Function without Overriding Linkage
            • Passing Arguments from a CL Program to an ILE C++ Program
              • How CL Constants Are Passed to an ILE C++ Program
              • How CL Variables Are Passed to an ILE C++ Program
              • CL Example: a Multi-Language ILE Application
                • Program Description
                • Program Structure
                • Program Activation
                • Application Modules and Files
                  • C++ Source File T2123ICB.CPP
                  • C++ Source File T2123ICC
                  • ILE COBOL Program T2123CB2
                  • ILE RPG Module T2123RP2
                • Invoking the ILE Program
              • Example: a User-Defined CL Program that Calls an ILE C++ Program
                • Programming Tasks
                • Source Code
                • Using the CL Command SQUARE to Return the Calculated Value
              • Example: CL Program that Passes Parameters to an ILE C++ Program
            • Accessing ILE C Procedures from Any ILE Program
              • Static Procedure Calls
              • Procedure Pointer Calls
              • Called Procedures and Operational Descriptors
                • Example: Calling an ILE API from ILE C
              • Operational Descriptors and the #pragma descriptor Directive
                • Example: Declaring a Function that Requires Use of Operational Descriptors
                • Example: Generating Operational Descriptors
              • OPM CL Example: Calling OPM, COBOL, and RPG Programs from an ILE C Program
                • Basic Program Structure
                • Program Modules and Activation Groups
                • Programming Tasks
              • ILE CL Example: Calling OPM, COBOL, and RPG Programs from an ILE C Program
                • Program Modules and Activation Groups
                • Programming Tasks
              • ILE-OPM CL Example: Calling OPM, COBOL, and RPG Programs from an ILE C++ Program
                • Program Description
                • Program Structure
                • Program Activation
                • Program Files
                  • Externally Described File T2123DD2
                  • CL Program T2123CL2
                  • CL Command Prompt T2123CM2
                  • C++ Source File T2123IC5
                  • OPM COBOL Program T2123CB1
                  • OPM RPG Program T2123RP1
                • Invoking the ILE-OPM Program
              • Using a Linkage Specification to Call an ILE Procedure
            • Using a Linkage Specification in a C++ Dynamic Program Call
              • Valid String Literals
              • Linkage Specification
          • Using Packed Decimal Data in a C Program
            • Converting from Packed Decimal Data Types
              • Converting from a Packed Decimal Type to a Packed Decimal Type
              • Converting from a Packed Decimal Type to an Integer Type
              • Converting from a Packed Decimal Type to a Floating Point Type
              • Overflow Behavior
            • Passing Packed Decimal Data to a Function
              • Passing a Pointer to a Packed Decimal Variable to a Function
            • Calling Another Program that Contains Packed Decimal Data
            • Using Library Functions with a Packed Decimal Data Type
            • Understanding Packed Decimal Data Type Errors
              • Packed Decimal Warnings and Error Conditions
              • Suppressing a Runtime Overflow Exception
          • Using Packed Decimal Data in a C++ Program
            • The IBM i Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) Header File
            • Using the _DecimalT Class Template
              • Declaring _DecimalT Class Template Objects
              • Using the __D Macro to Simplify Code
              • _DecimalT Class Template Input and Output
              • Using Operators with the _DecimalT Class Template
                • Using Arithmetic Operators with the _DecimalT Class Template
                • Using Relational Operators with the _DecimalT Class Template
                • Using Conditional Expressions with the _DecimalT Class Template
                • Using Equality Operators with the _DecimalT Class Template
                • Using Unary Operators with the _DecimalT Class Template
            • C++ Packed Decimal Data Conversions
              • Converting Values from One _DecimalT Class Template to Another
              • Converting Values from a _DecimalT Class Template to an Integer Data Type
              • Converting Values from a _DecimalT Class Template to a Floating Point Data Type
              • Determining the Size of a _DecimalT Class Template
              • Determining the Number of Digits in a _DecimalT Class Template
              • Determining the Precision of a _DecimalT Class Template
              • How Overflows Are Handled
            • Using C++ Exception Handling with the _DecimalT Template
              • _DecimalT Class Template Runtime Exceptions
                • When Runtime Exceptions Occur
                • Runtime Exceptions Issued by the Compiler for _DecimalT Class Templates
              • Defining a C++ _DecimalT Class Template Exception Handler
              • Using Debug Macros for _DecimalT Class Templates
                • Enabling and Disabling Error Checking for the _DecimalT Class Template
            • Passing a _DecimalT Class Template Object to a Function
            • Passing a Pointer to a _DecimalT Class Template Object
            • Calling Another Program Containing a _DecimalT Class Template
            • File I/O With _DecimalT Class Templates
          • Using Templates in C++ Programs
            • Managing Template Instantiations
            • Template Instantiation Management Options
            • How the ILE C++ Compiler Handles Template Instantiations
              • Generation of Static Member Definitions
              • Internal Linkage
              • External Linkage
            • Example of a Class Template Instantiation
              • Declarations and Definitions
              • Linkage
            • Using the Default Template Instantiation Management Option
              • Manually Structuring Code for Single Instantiations
              • Explicit Instantiations
            • Using the ILE Template Registry Option
              • How the ILE Template Registry Option Works
              • Specifying Values for the TMPLREG Parameter
            • Using the ILE TEMPINC Option
              • How the ILE TEMPINC Option Works
              • Structuring a Program for TEMPINC-Managed Instantiations
                • The Template-Implementation File
                  • Renaming or Relocating the Template-Implementation file
                  • Changing the Template-Implementation file
                • Tempinc Files
          • Using Teraspace in ILE C and C++ Programs
            • Supported Teraspace Environments
              • C/C++ Pointer Support
              • C/C++ Pointer Conversions
              • Bindable APIs for Using Teraspace
            • The 16–Byte Runtime Binding Libraries
            • The 8–Byte Runtime Binding (RTBND) Library Extensions
            • Using RTBND to Optimize Performance of a C++ Program
              • Requirements
              • Error Conditions
              • Limitations
            • Characteristics of Each Teraspace Storage Model
            • Binary Compatibility Considerations When Porting Code in a Teraspace Environment
              • Specifying the Teraspace Environment
              • Determining the Size of a Specific Pointer
              • Maintaining Consistent Argument Declarations
            • Source Code Samples
              • Example: Effect of Forward Declarations on the Data Model
              • Example: Redefining the new or delete Operator
              • Example: How a Template Adopts a Data Model
              • Examples: Overloading Functions
          • Casting with RunTime Type Information
            • The RTTI Language Extension
            • Using C++ Language-Defined RTTI
              • The dynamic_cast Operator
                • Dynamic Casts with Pointers
                • Dynamic Casts with References
              • The typeid Operator
                • Results of typeid Operations
                • Using the typeid Operator in Expressions
                • The type_info Class
            • Using RTTI in Constructors and Destructors
            • ILE C++ Extensions to RTTI
              • The extended_type_info Classes
        • Using International Locales and Coded Character Sets
          • Internationalizing a Program
            • Coded Character Set Identifiers
            • Source File Conversions to CCSID
            • Creating a Source Physical File with a Coded Character Set Identifier
            • Changing the Coded Character Set Identifier (CCSID)
            • Converting String Literals in a Source File
            • Using Unicode Support for Wide-Character Literals
              • Representation of Wide-Character Literals
              • Enabling Unicode Character Set Support
              • Effect of Unicode on #pragma convert() Operations
              • GB18030 Code Page Support
                • Generating Wide Characters and String Literals in UTF-32
                • Considerations
            • Targeting a CCSID
              • How the ILE C/C++ Compiler Converts a Source File to a Target CCSID
              • Literals, Comments, and Identifiers
              • Limitations
          • International Locale Support
            • Elements of a Language Environment
            • Locales
            • ILE C/C++ Support for Locales
            • ILE C/C++ Support for *CLD and *LOCALE Object Types
            • C Locale Migration Table
            • POSIX Locale Definition and *LOCALE Support
            • LOCALETYPE Compiler Option
            • Creating Locales
            • Creating Modules Using LOCALETYPE(*LOCALE)
            • Categories Used in a Locale
              • Setting an Active Locale for an Application
              • Using Environment Variables to Set the Active Locale
            • SAA and POSIX *Locale Definitions
            • Locale-Sensitive Runtime Functions
        • The GENCSRC Utility and the #pragma mapinc Directive
        • Interlanguage Data-Type Compatibilities
        • Ensuring thread safety (C++)
        • Related information
      • ILE C/C++ 런타임 라이브러리 함수
        • 새로운 사항
        • ILE C/C++ 런타임 라이브러리 함수에 대한 PDF 파일
        • 포함 파일
          • MI(Machine Interface) 포함 파일
        • 라이브러리 함수
          • C/C++ 라이브러리
            • 오류 처리
            • 탐색 및 정렬
            • 수리
            • 시간 조작
            • 유형 변환
            • 변환
            • 레코드 입/출력
            • 스트림 입/출력
            • 인수 리스트 처리
            • 의사 난수
            • 동적 메모리 관리
            • 메모리 오브젝트
            • 환경 상호작용
            • 스트링 조작
            • 문자 테스트
            • 멀티바이트 문자 테스트
            • 대소문자 맵핑
            • 멀티바이트 문자 처리
            • 데이터 영역
            • 메세지 카탈로그
            • 정규식
          • abort() — 프로그램 중단
          • abs() — 정수 절대값 연산
          • acos() — 역코사인 계산
          • asctime() — 시간을 문자 스트링으로 변환
          • asctime_r() — 시간을 문자 스트링으로 변환(재시작 가능)
          • asin() — 역사인 계산
          • assert() — 조건 확인
          • atan() – atan2() — 역탄젠트 계산
          • atexit() — 프로그램 종료 함수 레코드
          • atof() — 문자 스트링을 부동 소수점으로 변환
          • atoi() — 문자 스트링을 정수로 변환
          • atol() – atoll() — 문자 스트링을 Long 또는 Long Long 정수로 변환
          • 베셀 함수
          • bsearch() — 배열 탐색
          • btowc() — 1바이트를 와이드 문자로 변환
          • _C_Get_Ssn_Handle() — C 세션에 처리
          • calloc() — 기억장치 예약 및 초기화
          • catclose() — 메세지 카탈로그 닫기
          • catgets() — 메세지 카탈로그에서 메세지 검색
          • catopen() — 메세지 카탈로그 열기
          • ceil() — 정수 >=인수 찾기
          • clearerr() — 오류 인디케이터 재설정
          • clock() — 프로세서 시간 판별
          • cos() — 코사인 계산
          • cosh() — 쌍곡 코사인 계산
          • _C_Quickpool_Debug() — 빠른 풀 메모리 관리자 특성 수정
          • _C_Quickpool_Init() — 빠른 풀 메모리 관리자 초기화
          • _C_Quickpool_Report() — 빠른 풀 메모리 관리자 보고서 생성
          • ctime() — 시간을 문자 스트링으로 변환
          • ctime64() — 시간을 문자 스트링으로 변환
          • ctime_r() — 시간을 문자 스트링으로 변환(재시작 가능)
          • ctime64_r() — 시간을 문자 스트링으로 변환(재시작 가능)
          • _C_TS_malloc_debug() — 사용된 테라스페이스 메모리 양 판별(선택적 덤프 및 확인)
          • _C_TS_malloc_info() — 사용된 테라스페이스 메모리 양 판별
          • difftime() — 시차 계산
          • difftime64() — 시차 계산
          • div() — 몫과 나머지 연산
          • erf() – erfc() — 오차 함수 연산
          • exit() — 프로그램 종료
          • exp() — 지수 함수 연산
          • fabs() — 부동 소수점 절대값 연산
          • fclose() — 스트림 닫기
          • fdopen() — 스트림을 파일 설명자와 연관
          • feof() — 파일의 끝 인디케이터 테스트
          • ferror() — 읽기/쓰기 오류 테스트
          • fflush() — 파일에 버퍼 쓰기
          • fgetc() — 문자 읽기
          • fgetpos() — 파일 위치 가져오기
          • fgets() — 스트링 읽기
          • fgetwc() — 스트림에서 와이드 문자 읽기
          • fgetws() — 스트림에서 와이드 문자 스트링 읽기
          • fileno() — 파일 핸들 판별
          • floor() — 정수 <=인수 찾기
          • fmod() — 부동 소수점 나머지 연산
          • fopen() — 파일 열기
          • fprintf() — 스트림에 형식화된 데이터 쓰기
          • fputc() — 문자 쓰기
          • _fputchar() — 문자 쓰기
          • fputs() — 스트링 쓰기
          • fputwc() — 와이드 문자 쓰기
          • fputws() — 와이드 문자 스트링 쓰기
          • fread() — 항목 읽기
          • free() — 기억장치 블록 해제
          • freopen() — 열린 파일 경로 재지정
          • frexp() — 부동 소수점 값 분리
          • fscanf() — 형식화된 데이터 읽기
          • fseek() – fseeko() — 파일 위치 변경
          • fsetpos() — 파일 위치 설정
          • ftell() – ftello() — 현재 위치 얻기
          • fwide() — 스트림 지향 판별
          • fwprintf() — 데이터의 형식을 와이드 문자로 지정 및 스트림에 쓰기
          • fwrite() — 항목 쓰기
          • fwscanf() — 와이드 문자를 사용하여 스트림에서 데이터 읽기
          • gamma() — 감마 함수
          • _gcvt() — 부동 소수점을 스트링으로 변환
          • getc() – getchar() — 문자 읽기
          • getenv() — 환경 변수 검색
          • _GetExcData() — 예외 데이터 얻기
          • gets() — 행 읽기
          • getwc() — 스트림에서 와이드 문자 읽기
          • getwchar() — stdin에서 와이드 문자 얻기
          • gmtime() — 변환 시간
          • gmtime64() — 변환 시간
          • gmtime_r() — 변환 시간(다시 시작 가능)
          • gmtime64_r() — 변환 시간(다시 시작 가능)
          • hypot() — 빗변 계산
          • isalnum() – isxdigit() — 정수값 테스트
          • isascii() — ASCII 값으로서 표시 가능한 문자에 대한 테스트
          • iswalnum() – iswxdigit() — 와이드 정수 값 테스트
          • iswctype() — 문자 특성에 대한 테스트
          • _itoa() — 정수를 스트링으로 변환
          • labs() – llabs() — Long 및 Long Long 정수의 절대값 계산
          • ldexp() — 2의 거듭제곱으로 곱하기
          • ldiv() – lldiv() — Long 및 Long Long Division 수행
          • localeconv() — 환경에서 정보 검색
          • localtime() — 변환 시간
          • localtime64() — 변환 시간
          • localtime_r() — 변환 시간(다시 시작 가능)
          • localtime64_r() — 변환 시간(다시 시작 가능)
          • log() — 자연 로그 계산
          • log10() — 밑이 10인 로그 계산
          • _ltoa() — Long 정수를 스트링으로 변환
          • longjmp() — 스택 환경 복원
          • malloc() — 기억장치 블록 예약
          • mblen() — 멀티바이트 문자의 길이 판별
          • mbrlen() — 멀티바이트 문자의 길이 판별(다시 시작 가능)
          • mbrtowc() — 멀티바이트 문자를 와이드 문자로 변환(다시 시작 가능)
          • mbsinit() — 초기 상태를 위한 상태 오브젝트 테스트
          • mbsrtowcs() — 멀티바이트 스트링을 와이드 문자 스트링으로 변환(다시 시작 가능)
          • mbstowcs() — 멀티바이트 스트링을 와이드 문자 스트링으로 변환
          • mbtowc() — 멀티바이트 문자를 와이드 문자로 변환
          • memchr() — 버퍼 검색
          • memcmp() — 버퍼 비교
          • memcpy() — 바이트 복사
          • memicmp() — 바이트 비교
          • memmove() — 바이트 복사
          • memset() — 바이트를 값으로 설정
          • mktime() — 로컬 시간 변환
          • mktime64() — 로컬 시간 변환
          • modf() — 부동 소수점 값 분리
          • nextafter() – nextafterl() – nexttoward() – nexttowardl() — 다음 표현 가능한 부동 소수점 값 계산
          • nl_langinfo() — 로케일 정보 검색
          • perror() — 오류 메세지 출력
          • pow() — Compute Power
          • printf() — 형식화된 문자 출력
          • putc() – putchar() — 문자 쓰기
          • putenv() — 환경 변수 변경/추가
          • puts() — 스트링 쓰기
          • putwc() — 와이드 문자 쓰기
          • putwchar() — 와이드 문자를 표준 출력에 쓰기
          • quantexpd32() - quantexpd64() - quantexpd128() — 퀀텀 지수 계산
          • quantized32() - quantized64() - quantized128() — X의 퀀텀 지수를 Y의 퀀텀 지수로 설정
          • qsort() — 배열 정렬
          • QXXCHGDA() — 데이터 영역 변경
          • QXXDTOP() — Double을 팩형 10진수로 변환
          • QXXDTOZ() — Double을 존형 10진수로 변환
          • QXXITOP() — 정수를 팩형 10진수로 변환
          • QXXITOZ() — 정수를 존형 10진수로 변환
          • QXXPTOD() — 팩형 10진수를 Double로 변환
          • QXXPTOI() — 팩형 10진수를 정수로 변환
          • QXXRTVDA() — 데이터 영역 검색
          • QXXZTOD() — 존형 10진수를 Double로 변환
          • QXXZTOI() — 존형 10진수를 정수로 변환
          • raise() — 송신 신호
          • rand() – rand_r() — 난수 생성
          • _Racquire() — 프로그램 장치 확보
          • _Rclose() — 파일 닫기
          • _Rcommit() — 현재 레코드 커미트
          • _Rdelete() — 레코드 삭제
          • _Rdevatr() — 장치 속성 얻기
          • realloc() — 예약 기억장치 블록 크기 변경
          • regcomp() — 정규식 컴파일
          • regerror() — 정규식에 대한 오류 메세지 리턴
          • regexec() — 컴파일된 정규식 실행
          • regfree() — 정규식에 사용 가능한 메모리
          • remove() — 파일 삭제
          • rename() — 파일 이름 변경
          • rewind() — 현재 파일 위치 조정
          • _Rfeod() — 데이터의 끝 강제 실행
          • _Rfeov() — 파일의 끝 강제실행
          • _Rformat() — 레코드 형식 이름 설정
          • _Rindara() — 별도 인디케이터 영역 설정
          • _Riofbk() — I/O 피드백 정보 얻기
          • _Rlocate() — 레코드 배치
          • _Ropen() — I/O 조작을 위한 레코드 파일 열기
          • _Ropnfbk() — 개방형 피드백 정보 얻기
          • _Rpgmdev() — 디폴트 프로그램 장치 설정
          • _Rreadd() — 상대 레코드 번호별 레코드 읽기
          • _Rreadf() — 첫 번째 레코드 읽기
          • _Rreadindv() — 방문된 장치에서 읽기
          • _Rreadk() — 키별 레코드 읽기
          • _Rreadl() — 마지막 레코드 읽기
          • _Rreadn() — 다음 레코드 읽기
          • _Rreadnc() — 서브파일에서 변경된 다음 레코드 읽기
          • _Rreadp() — 이전 레코드 읽기
          • _Rreads() — 같은 레코드 읽기
          • _Rrelease() — 프로그램 장치 해제
          • _Rrlslck() — 레코드 잠금 해제
          • _Rrollbck() — 커미트 제어 변경사항 롤백
          • _Rupdate() — 레코드 갱신
          • _Rupfb() — 마지막 I/O 조작에 대한 정보 제공
          • _Rwrite() — 다음 레코드 쓰기
          • _Rwrited() — 레코드 직접 쓰기
          • _Rwriterd() — 레코드 쓰기 및 읽기
          • _Rwrread() — 레코드 쓰기 및 읽기(별도의 버퍼)
          • samequantumd32() - samequantumd64() - samequantumd128() — 퀀텀 지수 X 및 Y가 동일한지 판별
          • scanf() — 데이터 읽기
          • setbuf() — 버퍼링 제어
          • setjmp() — 환경 유지
          • setlocale() — 로케일 설정
          • setvbuf() — 버퍼링 제어
          • signal() — 인터럽트 신호 처리
          • sin() — 사인(sine) 연산
          • sinh() — 쌍곡 사인 계산
          • snprintf() — 형식화된 데이터를 버퍼로 출력
          • sprintf() — 형식화된 데이터를 버퍼로 출력
          • sqrt() — 제곱근 계산
          • srand() — rand() 함수에 대한 시드 설정
          • sscanf() — 데이터 읽기
          • strcasecmp() — 대소문자를 구분하지 않고 스트링 비교
          • strcat() — 스트링 연결
          • strchr() — 문자 검색
          • strcmp() — 스트링 비교
          • strcmpi() — 대소문자를 구분하지 않고 스트링 비교
          • strcoll() — 스트링 비교
          • strcpy() — 스트링 복사
          • strcspn() — 첫 번째 문자 일치의 오프셋 찾기
          • strdup() — 스트링 복제
          • strerror() — 런타임 오류 메세지에 대한 포인터 설정
          • strfmon() — 통화 값을 스트링으로 변환
          • strftime() — 날짜/시간을 스트링으로 변환
          • stricmp() — 대소문자를 구분하지 않고 스트링 비교
          • strlen() — 스트링 길이 판별
          • strncasecmp() — 대소문자를 구분하지 않고 스트링 비교
          • strncat() — 스트링 연결
          • strncmp() — 스트링 비교
          • strncpy() — 스트링 복사
          • strnicmp() — 대소문자를 구분하지 않고 서브스트링 비교
          • strnset() – strset() — 스트링에서 문자 설정
          • strpbrk() — 스트링에서 문자 찾기
          • strptime() — 문자열을 날짜/시간으로 변환
          • strrchr() — 스트링에서 문자의 마지막 표시 찾기
          • strspn() — 일치하지 않는 첫 번째 문자의 오프셋 찾기
          • strstr() — 서브스트링 찾기
          • strtod() - strtof() - strtold() — 문자 스트링을 Double, Float, Long Double로 변환
          • strtod32() - strtod64() - strtod128() — 문자 스트링을 10진수 부동 소수점으로 변환
          • strtok() — 스트링 토큰화
          • strtok_r() — 스트링 토큰화(재시작 가능)
          • strtol() – strtoll() — Long 및 Long Long Integer로 문자 스트링 변환
          • strtoul() – strtoull() — 부호없는 Long 및 부호없는 Long Long Integer로 문자 스트링 변환
          • strxfrm() — 스트링 변환
          • swprintf() — 와이드 문자 형식화 및 버퍼에 기록
          • swscanf() — 와이드 문자 데이터 읽기
          • system() — 명령 실행
          • tan() — 탄젠트 계산
          • tanh() — 쌍곡 탄젠트 계산
          • time() — 현재 시간 판별
          • time64() — 현재 시간 판별
          • tmpfile() — 임시 파일 작성
          • tmpnam() — 임시 파일명 생성
          • toascii() — 문자를 ASCII에서 표시 가능한 문자로 변환
          • tolower() – toupper() — 대소문자 변환
          • towctrans() — 와이드 문자 변환
          • towlower() – towupper() — 와이드 문자 대소문자 변환
          • _ultoa() — 부호없는 Long Integer를 스트링으로 변환
          • ungetc() — 입력 스트림으로 문자 푸시
          • ungetwc() — 와이드 문자를 입력 스트림으로 푸시
          • va_arg() – va_copy() – va_end() – va_start() — 가변 인수 리스트 처리
          • vfprintf() — 스트림에 인수 데이터 인쇄
          • vfscanf() — 형식화된 데이터 읽기
          • vfwprintf() — 와이드 문자로 인수 데이터 형식화 및 스트림에 기록
          • vfwscanf() — 형식화된 와이드 문자 데이터 읽기
          • vprintf() — 인수 데이터 인쇄
          • vscanf() — 형식화된 데이터 읽기
          • vsnprintf() — 버퍼에 인수 데이터 인쇄
          • vsprintf() — 버퍼에 인수 데이터 인쇄
          • vsscanf() — 형식화된 데이터 읽기
          • vswprintf() — 와이드 문자 형식화 및 버퍼에 기록
          • vswscanf() — 형식화된 와이드 문자 데이터 읽기
          • vwprintf() — 와이드 문자로 인수 데이터 형식화 및 인쇄
          • vwscanf() — 형식화된 와이드 문자 데이터 읽기
          • wcrtomb() — 멀티바이트 문자로 와이드 문자 변환(재시작 가능)
          • wcscat() — 와이드 문자 스트링 연결
          • wcschr() — 와이드 문자 검색
          • wcscmp() — 와이드 문자 스트링 비교
          • wcscoll() — 언어 배열 스트링 비교
          • wcscpy() — 와이드 문자 스트링 복사
          • wcscspn() — 첫 번째 와이드 문자 일치 오프셋 찾기
          • wcsftime() — 형식화된 날짜 및 시간으로 변환
          • __wcsicmp() — 대소문자를 구분하지 않고 와이드 문자 스트링 비교
          • wcslen() — 와이드 문자 스트링 길이 계산
          • wcslocaleconv() — 와이드 로케일 정보 검색
          • wcsncat() — 와이드 문자 스트링 연결
          • wcsncmp() — 와이드 문자 스트링 비교
          • wcsncpy() — 와이드 문자 스트링 복사
          • __wcsnicmp() — 대소문자를 구분하지 않고 와이드 문자 스트링 비교
          • wcspbrk() — 스트링에서 와이드 문자 찾기
          • wcsptime() — 와이드 문자 스트링을 날짜/시간으로 변환
          • wcsrchr() — 스트링에서 와이드 문자의 마지막 표시 찾기
          • wcsrtombs() — 와이드 문자 스트링을 멀티바이트 스트링으로 변환(재시작 가능)
          • wcsspn() — 일치하지 않는 첫 번째 와이드 문자의 오프셋 찾기
          • wcsstr() — 와이드 문자 서브스트링 찾기
          • wcstod() - wcstof() - wcstold() — 와이드 문자 스트링을 Double, Float, Long Double로 변환
          • wcstod32() - wcstod64() - wcstod128() — 와이드 문자 스트링을 10진수 부동 소수점으로 변환
          • wcstok() — 와이드 문자 스트링 토큰화
          • wcstol() – wcstoll() — Long 및 Long Long Integer로 와이드 문자 스트링 변환
          • wcstombs() — 멀티바이트 스트링으로 와이드 문자 스트링 변환
          • wcstoul() – wcstoull() — 부호없는 Long 및 부호없는 Long Long Integer로 와이드 문자 스트링 변환
          • wcswcs() — 와이드 문자 서브스트링 찾기
          • wcswidth() — 와이드 문자 스트링의 표시 너비 판별
          • wcsxfrm() — 와이드 문자 스트링 변환
          • wctob() — 와이드 문자를 바이트로 변환
          • wctomb() — 와이드 문자를 멀티바이트 문자로 변환
          • wctrans() — 문자 맵핑에 대한 핸들 가져오기
          • wctype() — 문자 특성 분류에 대한 핸들 가져오기
          • wcwidth() — 와이드 문자의 표시 너비 판별
          • wfopen() — 파일 열기
          • wmemchr() — 와이드 문자 버퍼에서 와이드 문자 찾기
          • wmemcmp() — 와이드 문자 버퍼 비교
          • wmemcpy() — 와이드 문자 버퍼 복사
          • wmemmove() — 와이드 문자 버퍼 복사
          • wmemset() — 세트 버퍼를 값으로 설정
          • wprintf() — 와이드 문자로 데이터 형식화 및 인쇄
          • wscanf() — 와이드 문자 형식 스트링을 사용하여 데이터 읽기
        • 런타임 고려사항
          • errno 매크로
          • 통합 파일 시스템 작동 C 스트림 I/O의 errno 값
          • 입력 및 출력 오류 매크로를 예외 맵핑에 레코드
          • 신호 처리 조치 정의
            • 예외 맵핑에 대한 신호
          • 핸들러 취소 이유 코드
          • 예외 클래스
          • 데이터 유형 호환성
          • 런타임 문자 세트
          • CCSID 및 로케일 이해
            • 문자 및 문자 스트링의 CCSID
              • 문자 리터럴 CCSID
              • 작업 CCSID
              • 파일 CCSID
              • 로케일 CCSID
            • 와이드 문자
              • 1바이트 또는 멀티바이트 문자에서 와이드 문자 간 변환
                • LOCALETYPE(*CLD) 및 LOCALETYPE(*LOCALE) 작동
                • LOCALETYPE(*LOCALEUCS2) 및 LOCALETYPE(*LOCALEUTF) 작동
              • 와이드 문자 및 파일 I/O
                • 와이드 문자 쓰기 함수
                • 비와이드 문자 쓰기 함수
                • 와이드 문자 읽기 함수
                • 비와이드 문자 읽기 함수
            • 다른 ILE 언어
          • 비동기 신호 모델
          • 유니코드 지원
            • 유니코드 지원 사용 이유
            • 의사-CCSID 중성
            • 다른 ILE 언어에서 유니코드
            • 표준 파일
            • 고려사항
            • 디폴트 파일 CCSID
            • 줄 바꾸기
            • 변환 오류
          • 힙 메모리
            • 힙 메모리 개요
            • 힙 메모리 관리자
            • 디폴트 메모리 관리자
            • 빠른 풀 메모리 관리자
            • 디버그 메모리 관리자
            • 환경 변수
            • C2M1211/C2M1212 메세지 문제점 진단
              • C2M1211 메세지
              • C2M1212 메세지
              • 스택 역추적
        • 라이브러리 함수 및 확장
          • 이름별 표준 C 라이브러리 함수 표
          • ILE C 라이브러리 확장 대 C 라이브러리 함수 표
        • 관련 정보
      • C 및 C++ 관련 정보
    • COBOL
      • ILE COBOL Language Reference
        • PDF file for ILE COBOL Language Reference
        • About ILE COBOL Language Reference
          • Who Should Use this Reference
          • Prerequisite and Related Information
          • How to Send Your Comments
          • What's New
            • What's New in 7.4?
            • Changes to this Guide Since 7.3
            • What's New this Release?
            • What's New in 7.2?
            • What's New in 7.1?
            • What's New in V6R1?
            • What's New in V5R4?
            • What's New in V5R3?
            • What's New in V5R2?
            • What's New in V5R1?
            • What's New in V4R4?
            • What's New in V4R2?
            • What's New in V3R7?
            • What's New in V3R6/V3R2?
            • What's New in V3R1?
          • ILE COBOL Syntax Notation
            • How to Read the Syntax Diagrams
            • IBM Extensions
            • Documentary Syntax
            • Obsolete Language Elements
          • DBCS Notation
          • Industry Standards
          • An Acknowledgment
          • Concepts
          • Supporting Information
        • COBOL Language Structure
          • Characters
            • Character-Strings
              • COBOL Words with DBCS Character
              • COBOL Words
                • User-Defined Words
                  • Constraints for Referencing User-Defined Words
                • System-Names
                • Function-Names
                • Context-Sensitive Words
                • Reserved Words
                  • Keywords
                  • Optional Words
                  • Special Character Words
                  • Figurative Constants
                  • Special Registers
              • Literals
                • Boolean Literals
                • DBCS Literals
                • National Literals
                  • Basic National Literals
                  • National Hexadecimal Literals
                • Nonnumeric Literals
                  • Hexadecimal Literals
                  • Mixed Literals
                • Null-terminated nonnumeric literals
                • Numeric Literals
                  • Floating-Point Literals
              • PICTURE Character-Strings
              • Comment-Entry Text
            • Separators
              • Rules for Separators
          • Sections and Paragraphs
            • SECTION
            • Entries
            • Clauses
            • Sentences
            • Statements
            • Phrases
          • Reference Format
            • Sequence Number Area (Columns 1 through 6)
            • Indicator Area (Column 7)
            • Area A (Columns 8 through 11)
              • Division Header
              • Section Header
              • Paragraph Header or Paragraph Name
              • Level Indicator (FD and SD) or Level-Number (01 and 77)
              • DECLARATIVES and END DECLARATIVES
              • END PROGRAM Header
            • Area B (Columns 12 through 72)
              • Entries, Sentences, Statements, Clauses
              • Continuation Lines
            • Area A or Area B
              • Comment Lines
              • Floating comment indicators (*>)
              • Debugging Lines
              • Blank Lines
              • Pseudo-Text
              • Compiler-Directing Statements
            • Comment Area (Columns 73 through 80)
          • Data Reference and Name Scoping
            • Methods of Data Reference
              • Identifier
                • LINAGE-COUNTER
                • condition-name
              • Qualification
                • References to Data Division Names
                • References to Procedure Division Names
                • References to COPY Libraries
                • Qualification Rules
              • Subscripting
                • Subscripting Using Integers or Data-Names
                • Subscripting Using Index-Names (Indexing)
                • Relative Subscripting
              • Reference Modification
                • Evaluation of Operands
                • Reference Modification Example
                • Range Errors
                • Restrictions on Reference Modification
              • Function-Identifier
                • References to Alphanumeric Items
                • References to Integers
                • References to DBCS Items
                • References to National Items
                • References to Date-Time Items
                • References to Boolean Items
              • User-Defined Data Types
                • TYPEDEF Clause
                • TYPE Clause
            • Scope of Names
              • Types of Names
              • Nested Programs
              • Global and Local Names
              • External and Internal Objects
              • Data Attribute Specification
              • Resolution of Names
              • Conventions for Program-Names
                • Rules Regulating the Scope of Program Names
          • Transfer of Control
            • Next Executable Statement
        • COBOL Program Structure
          • General Structure
            • END PROGRAM Header
        • Identification Division
          • PROGRAM-ID Paragraph
            • program-name
            • literal
            • RECURSIVE Clause
            • COMMON Clause
            • INITIAL Clause
          • Optional Paragraphs
          • comment-entry
        • Environment Division
          • Configuration Section
            • Coding Example
            • Environment Division Clauses
            • SOURCE-COMPUTER Paragraph
              • computer-name
              • WITH DEBUGGING MODE Clause
            • OBJECT-COMPUTER Paragraph
            • SPECIAL-NAMES Paragraph
              • Coding Example
            • ALPHABET Clause
              • Coding Examples
            • CLASS Clause
            • CONSOLE Clause
            • CRT STATUS Clause
              • CRT STATUS Clause Considerations
                • CRT Status Key 1
                • CRT Status Key 2
                • CRT Status Key 3
            • CURRENCY SIGN Clause
            • CURSOR Clause
              • CURSOR Clause Considerations
            • DECIMAL-POINT IS COMMA Clause
            • FORMAT
            • FORMAT Clause
              • SIZE Phrase
              • LOCALE Phrases
              • LOCALE Phrase
            • LINKAGE TYPE Clause
              • LINKAGE TYPE Clause Considerations
            • LOCALE Clause
            • PROGRAM STATUS Clause
          • Input-Output Section
            • File Categories
              • Database Files
                • Distributed Files
              • Device Files
              • DDM Files
              • Save Files
            • Paragraphs
            • FILE-CONTROL Paragraph
              • FILE-CONTROL Paragraph - Format 1 - Sequential Files
              • FILE-CONTROL Paragraph - Format 2 - Relative Files
              • FILE-CONTROL Paragraph - Format 3 - Indexed Files
              • FILE-CONTROL Paragraph - Format 4 - Sort or Merge Files
              • FILE-CONTROL Paragraph - Format 5 - Transaction Files
            • SELECT Clause
            • ASSIGN Clause
              • Device
              • File Name
              • Attribute
            • RESERVE Clause
            • ORGANIZATION Clause
              • ORGANIZATION IS SEQUENTIAL (Format 1)
              • ORGANIZATION IS RELATIVE (Format 2)
              • ORGANIZATION IS INDEXED (Format 3)
              • ORGANIZATION IS TRANSACTION (Format 4)
            • PADDING CHARACTER Clause
            • RECORD DELIMITER Clause
            • ACCESS MODE Clause
              • ACCESS MODE Clause - Format 1 - Sequential Files
              • ACCESS MODE Clause - Format 2 - Relative Files
              • ACCESS MODE Clause - Format 3 - Indexed Files
              • ACCESS MODE Clause - Format 4 - Transaction Files
              • Data Organization and Access Modes
              • Data Organization
                • Sequential Organization
                • Relative Organization
                • Extending the file boundary
                • Indexed Organization
                • TRANSACTION Organization
              • Access Modes
                • Sequential-Access Mode
                • Random-Access Mode
                • Dynamic-Access Mode
              • Relationship Between Data Organizations and Access Modes
                • Sequential Files
                • Relative Files
                • Indexed Files
                • Transaction Files
            • RECORD KEY Clause
              • DUPLICATES Phrase
              • EXTERNALLY-DESCRIBED-KEY
            • ALTERNATE RECORD KEY
              • Usage Considerations
            • RELATIVE KEY Clause
            • FILE STATUS Clause
            • CONTROL-AREA Clause
            • I-O-CONTROL Paragraph
              • I-O-CONTROL Paragraph - Format 1 - Sequential Files
              • I-O-CONTROL Paragraph - Format 2 - Relative and Indexed Files
              • I-O-CONTROL Paragraph - Format 3 - Sort or Merge Files
            • RERUN Clause
            • SAME AREA Clause
            • SAME RECORD AREA Clause
            • SAME SORT AREA Clause
            • SAME SORT-MERGE AREA Clause
            • MULTIPLE FILE TAPE Clause
            • COMMITMENT CONTROL Clause
        • Data Division
          • Data Division Overview
            • Data Division Structure
            • File Section
            • Working-Storage Section
            • Local-Storage Section
            • Linkage Section
              • ADDRESS OF
                • ADDRESS OF Special Register
            • Types of Data
              • File Data
              • Program Data
            • Data Relationships
              • Levels of Data
                • Levels of Data in a Record Description Entry
                • Coding Example
                • Conceptual Example
                • Special Level-Numbers
                • Indentation
              • Classes and Categories of Data
                • Classes and Categories of Data
              • Alignment Rules
                • Numeric
                • Numeric-edited
                • Internal Floating-point
                • External Floating-point
                • Alphanumeric, Alphanumeric-edited, Alphabetic
                • Date, Time, and Timestamp
              • Standard Data Format
              • Character-String and Item Size
              • Signed Data
            • Data Division Clauses
          • Data Division—File and Sort Description Entries
            • File Description Entry - Format 1 - Sequential File
            • File Description Entry - Format 2 - Diskette File
            • File Description Entry - Format 3 - Tapefile
            • File Description Entry - Format 4 - Printer File
            • Sort Description Entry - Format 5 - Sort or Merge Files
            • File Description Entry - Format 6 - Transaction Files
            • File Section
            • EXTERNAL Clause
              • Considerations for External Files
            • GLOBAL Clause
            • BLOCK CONTAINS Clause
            • RECORD Clause
              • RECORD clause - Format 1
              • RECORD clause - Format 2
              • RECORD clause - Format 3
              • For Tape Files
              • For All Other Files
              • General Considerations for all Formats
            • LABEL RECORDS Clause
            • VALUE OF Clause
            • DATA RECORDS Clause
            • LINAGE Clause
              • Illustration of LINAGE clause phrases
              • LINAGE-COUNTER Special Register
            • CODE-SET Clause
          • Data Division—Data Description Entry
            • Format 1
            • Format 2
            • Format 3
            • Format 4
            • Format 5
              • CONSTANT Clause
              • LIKE Clause
              • OCCURS Clause
              • INDICATOR Clause
              • VALUE Clause
            • Level-Numbers
            • BLANK WHEN ZERO Clause
            • EXTERNAL Clause
            • FORMAT Clause
              • SIZE Phrase
              • USAGE For a Class Date-Time Item
              • FORMAT Clause and PICTURE CLAUSE Similarities
                • LOCALE Phrase
                • LOCALE OF Special Register
                • DDS Data Types and FORMAT Literal Equivalent
                • FORMAT OF Special Register
            • GLOBAL Clause
              • Sharing Data
            • JUSTIFIED Clause
            • LIKE Clause
              • Comments Generated Based on Inherited USAGE Characteristics
              • Rules and Restrictions
              • Coding Examples
            • OCCURS Clause
              • Table Handling Concepts
              • Limitations
              • Defining Tables
              • Referencing Table Elements
              • Fixed-Length Tables
              • ASCENDING/DESCENDING KEY Phrase
              • ASCENDING/DESCENDING KEY Phrase Rules
              • ASCENDING/DESCENDING KEY Phrase Coding Example
              • INDEXED BY Phrase
              • Variable-Length Tables
              • Subscripting
              • Restrictions on Subscripting
            • PICTURE Clause
              • LOCALE Phrase
              • Symbols Used in the PICTURE Clause
              • Character-String Representation
              • Data Categories and PICTURE Rules
                • Alphabetic Items
                • Numeric Items
                • Numeric-Edited Items
                  • If the LOCALE Phrase is Specified
                • Alphanumeric Items
                • Alphanumeric-edited Items
                • Boolean Items
                • DBCS Items
                • DBCS-Edited Items
                • National Items
                • National-edited Items
                • External Floating-Point Items
              • PICTURE Clause Editing
                • Simple Insertion Editing
                • Special Insertion Editing
                • Fixed Insertion Editing
                • Floating Insertion Editing
                • Zero Suppression and Replacement Editing
            • REDEFINES Clause
              • Redefinition Process
              • REDEFINES Clause Considerations
              • Coding Examples
              • Undefined Results
            • RENAMES Clause
              • Illustrations of Valid and Invalid RENAMES Clause Specifications
            • SIGN Clause
              • SEPARATE CHARACTER
            • SYNCHRONIZED Clause
              • Benefits of Synchronized Data
                • Synchronization and Offsets
              • Specifying the SYNCHRONIZED Clause with the OCCURS Clause
              • Specifying the SYNCHRONIZED Clause with the REDEFINES Clause
              • FILLER Items
              • Example of Implicit FILLER
            • TYPE Clause
            • TYPEDEF Clause
            • USAGE Clause
              • Computational Items
              • BINARY Phrase
              • PACKED-DECIMAL Phrase
              • COMPUTATIONAL or COMP Phrase
              • COMPUTATIONAL-1 or COMP-1 Phrase
              • COMPUTATIONAL-2 or COMP-2 Phrase
              • COMPUTATIONAL-3 or COMP-3 Phrase (Internal Decimal)
              • COMPUTATIONAL-4 or COMP-4 Phrase (Binary)
              • COMPUTATIONAL-5 or COMP-5 Phrase (Binary)
              • DISPLAY Phrase
                • External Decimal (Numeric)
                • External Floating Point (Numeric)
                • Internal representation of numeric items
              • DISPLAY-1 Phrase
              • INDEX Phrase
              • NATIONAL Phrase
              • POINTER Phrase
                • Pointer Alignment
              • PROCEDURE-POINTER Phrase
                • Usage Rules
            • VALUE Clause
              • VALUE Clause - Format 1 - Literal Value
                • Rules for Literal Values
              • VALUE Clause - Format 2 - Condition-Name Value
                • Rules for Condition-Name Values
              • VALUE Clause - Format 3 - NULL Value
            • VALUE
        • Procedure Division
          • Procedure Division Overview
            • Format 1 - with Sections and Paragraphs
            • Format 2 - with Paragraphs Only
            • The Procedure Division Header
              • The USING Phrase
              • BY REFERENCE
              • BY VALUE
              • GIVING/RETURNING Phrase
                • data-name-2
                • ADDRESS OF special register
            • Declaratives
            • Procedures
              • Section
              • Paragraph
                • Sentence
                • Statement
                • Identifier
              • Sample Procedure Division Statements
            • Arithmetic Expressions
              • Exponential Expressions
              • Arithmetic Operators
            • Conditional Expressions
              • Simple Conditions
                • Class Condition
                • Condition-Name Condition
                • Relation Condition
                  • DBCS Items
                  • Pointer Data Items
                  • Procedure-pointer Data Items
              • Comparison of Numeric and Nonnumeric Operands
                • Comparing Numeric Operands
                • Comparing Nonnumeric Operands
                • Comparing Numeric and Nonnumeric Operands
                • Comparing Boolean Operands
                • Comparing DBCS Operands
                • Comparing National Operands
                • Comparing National and Non-National Operands
                • Comparing Date-Time Operands
                • Comparing Index-Names and Index Data Items
              • Sign Condition
              • Switch-Status Condition
              • Complex Conditions
                • Negated Simple Conditions
                • Combined Conditions
                  • Evaluating Conditional Expressions
                • Abbreviated Combined Relation Conditions
              • Statement Categories
                • Imperative Statements
                • Conditional Statements
                • Delimited Scope Statements
                  • Explicit Scope Terminators
                  • Implicit Scope Terminators
                • Compiler-Directing Statements
              • Statement Operations
                • FROM Phrase
                • TO
                • Common Phrases and Concepts
                  • CORRESPONDING Phrase
                  • GIVING Phrase
                  • ROUNDED Phrase
                  • SIZE ERROR Phrases
                  • NOT ON SIZE ERROR
                  • Overlapping Operands
                • Arithmetic Statements
                  • Arithmetic Statement Operands
                    • Size of Operands
                    • Multiple Results
                • Data Manipulation Statements
                • Input-Output Statements
                  • Common Processing Facilities
                    • Status Key
                    • INVALID KEY Condition
                    • INTO/FROM Identifier Phrase
                    • File Position Indicator
                  • DB-FORMAT-NAME Special Register
                  • Procedure Branching Statements
          • Procedure Division Statements
            • ACCEPT Statement
              • Format 1 - Data Transfer
                • Source of Input Data
                • Coding Example
              • Format 2 - System Information Transfer
                • DATE, DAY, DAY-OF-WEEK, and TIME
              • Format 3 - Feedback
              • Format 4 - Local Data Area
              • Format 5 - Program Initialization Parameters
              • Format 6 - Attribute Data
                • Attribute Data Formats
              • Workstation I/O
                • Considerations for Floating-Point Data Items
                • Data Categories
                • AT Phrase
                • FROM CRT Phrase
                • MODE IS BLOCK Phrase
                • ON EXCEPTION Phrases
                • END-ACCEPT Phrase
                • WITH Phrase
                • AUTO (AUTO-SKIP) Phrase
                • BELL (BEEP) Phrase
                • BLINK Phrase
                • FULL (LENGTH-CHECK) Phrase
                • HIGHLIGHT Phrase
                • REQUIRED (EMPTY-CHECK) Phrase
                • REVERSE-VIDEO Phrase
                • SECURE (NO-ECHO) Phrase
                • UNDERLINE Phrase
                • RIGHT-JUSTIFY Phrase
                • SIZE Phrase
                • SPACE-FILL Phrase
                • TRAILING-SIGN Phrase
                • UPDATE Phrase
                  • Predisplaying by Data Type
                • ZERO-FILL Phrase
                • Phrases Syntax Checked Only
                • Format 7 Considerations
                • Extended ACCEPT and Extended DISPLAY Considerations
                  • Screen Format
                  • Subscripting and Reference Modification
                  • Performance
                  • DBCS Processing
                  • Combinations of Phrases
                  • TRANSACTION Files
                  • Remote Workstations
                  • Differences from COBOL/2* Processing
              • Format 8 - Session I/O
              • Format 9 - Data Area
                • identifier-1
                • FROM Phrase
                • FOR Phrase
                • LIBRARY Phrase
                • AT Phrase
                • WITH LOCK Phrase
                • (NOT) ON EXCEPTION Phrase
                • END-ACCEPT Phrase
            • ACQUIRE Statement
            • ADD Statement
              • ROUNDED Phrase
              • SIZE ERROR Phrases
              • CORRESPONDING Phrase (Format 3)
              • END-ADD Phrase
            • ALLOCATE statement
              • Example: ALLOCATE and FREE statements
            • ALTER Statement
              • Coding Example
            • CALL Statement
              • LINKAGE TYPE Phrase
              • IN LIBRARY Phrase
              • USING Phrase
              • BY REFERENCE Phrase
              • BY CONTENT Phrase
              • BY VALUE Phrase
              • LENGTH OF Special Register
              • GIVING/RETURNING phrase
              • ON EXCEPTION Phrase
              • NOT ON EXCEPTION Phrase
              • ON OVERFLOW Phrase
              • END-CALL Phrase
              • CALL Statement Considerations
                • Call identifier
                • CALL procedure-pointer
                • Length of Parameters
              • Program Termination Statements
              • IBM i Graphics Support
            • CANCEL Statement
              • IN LIBRARY Phrase
              • LINKAGE TYPE Phrase
            • CLOSE Statement
              • CLOSE Statement - Format 1
              • CLOSE Statement - Format 2 - Tape Files
              • CLOSE Statement Considerations
                • WITH LOCK Phrase
              • Special Considerations for Device Type TAPEFILE Only
                • Sequential Single Volume
                • Sequential Multivolume
              • NO REWIND Phrase
              • REEL or UNIT Phrase
              • FOR REMOVAL Phrase
            • COMMIT Statement
            • COMPUTE Statement
              • ROUNDED Phrase
              • SIZE ERROR Phrases
              • END-COMPUTE Phrase
            • CONTINUE Statement
            • DELETE Statement
              • DELETE Statement Considerations
              • Sequential Access Mode
              • Random or Dynamic Access Mode
                • Duplicates Phrase
              • FORMAT Phrase
              • NULL-KEY-MAP IS Phrase
              • INVALID KEY Phrase
              • NOT INVALID KEY Phrase
              • END-DELETE Phrase
            • DISPLAY Statement
              • Format 1 - Data Transfer
              • DISPLAY Statement Behavior
              • Format 2 – Local Data Area
              • Format 3 – Extended DISPLAY Statement
                • AT Phrase
                • Line and Column Combinations
                • UPON CRT/CRT-UNDER Phrase
                • MODE IS BLOCK Phrase
                • WITH Phrase
                • BELL (BEEP) Phrase
                • The BLANK Phrase
                • BLINK Phrase
                • HIGHLIGHT Phrase
                • REVERSE-VIDEO Phrase
                • SIZE Phrase
                • SIZE Phrase Example
                • UNDERLINE Phrase
                • Format 3 Considerations
              • Format 4 – Session I/O
              • Format 5 – Data Area
                • UPON
                • FOR Phrase
                • IN LIBRARY Phrase
                • AT Phrase
                • WITH LOCK Phrase
                • (NOT) ON EXCEPTION
                • END-DISPLAY Phrase
            • DIVIDE Statement
              • ROUNDED Phrase
              • REMAINDER Phrase
              • SIZE ERROR Phrases
              • END-DIVIDE Phrase
            • DROP Statement
            • ENTER Statement
            • EVALUATE Statement
              • Coding Examples
              • Interpreting Selection Subjects and Selection Objects
              • END-EVALUATE Phrase
              • Determining Values
              • Comparing Selection Subjects and Objects
              • Executing the EVALUATE Statement
            • EXIT Statement
              • Format 1 (simple)
              • Format 2 (program)
                • AND CONTINUE RUN UNIT Phrase
              • Format 5 (inline-perform)
              • Format 6 (procedure)
            • FREE statement
            • GOBACK Statement
            • GO TO Statement
              • Unconditional GO TO
              • Conditional GO TO
              • Altered GO TO
            • IF Statement
              • END-IF Phrase
              • Transferring Control
              • Nested IF Statements
            • INITIALIZE Statement
              • FILLER Phrase
              • VALUE Phrase
              • REPLACING Phrase
              • INITIALIZE Statement Rules
            • INSPECT Statement
              • INSPECT Statement - Format 1
              • INSPECT Statement - Format 2
              • INSPECT Statement - Format 3
              • INSPECT Statement - Format 4
              • INSPECT Statement Considerations
              • Comparison Rules
              • INSPECT Example
              • TALLYING Phrase (Formats 1 and 3)
              • REPLACING Phrase (Formats 2 and 3)
              • BEFORE and AFTER Phrases (All Formats)
              • CONVERTING Phrase (Format 4)
              • INSPECT Statement Examples
            • MERGE Statement
              • ASCENDING/DESCENDING KEY Phrase
              • COLLATING SEQUENCE Phrase
              • USING Phrase
              • GIVING Phrase
              • OUTPUT PROCEDURE Phrase
              • SORT-RETURN Special Register
            • MOVE Statement
              • MOVE Statement - Format 1
              • MOVE Statement - Format 2
              • MOVE Statement Rules
              • Elementary Moves
                • Alphabetic
                • Alphanumeric or Alphanumeric-Edited
                • Numeric or Numeric-Edited
                • Floating-Point
                • Date-Time
                • Boolean
                • DBCS or DBCS-Edited
                • National or national-edited
                • Valid Elementary Moves
              • Group Moves
              • WHEN-COMPILED Special Register
            • MULTIPLY Statement
              • ROUNDED Phrase
              • SIZE ERROR Phrases
              • END-MULTIPLY Phrase
            • OPEN Statement
              • OPEN Statement - Format 1 - Sequential
              • OPEN Statement - Format 2 - Indexed and Relative
              • OPEN Statement - Format 3 - TRANSACTION
              • OPEN Statement Considerations
                • Dynamic File Creation
                • Special Considerations for Device Type DATABASE
              • INPUT Phrase (Sequential Files)
                • Special Considerations for Device Types DATABASE, TAPEFILE, and DISKETTE
                • Special Considerations for Device Types DISK and DATABASE
              • OUTPUT Phrase (Sequential Files)
                • Special Considerations for Device Type DISK
                • Special Considerations for Device Types DISK, DATABASE, and FORMATFILE
              • I-O Phrase (Sequential Files)
                • Special Considerations for Device Type DISK
              • NO REWIND Phrase (Sequential Files)
              • REVERSED Phrase (Sequential Files)
              • EXTEND Phrase (Sequential Files)
                • Special Considerations for Device Type DISK
              • INPUT Phrase (Indexed and Relative Files)
                • Special Considerations for Sequential Access Mode
                • Special Considerations for Dynamic Access Mode
              • OUTPUT Phrase (Indexed and Relative Files)
                • Special Considerations for Relative Files—Device Type DISK
                • Special Considerations for Indexed Files—Sequential Access
                • Special Considerations for Indexed Files—Dynamic Access
              • I-O Phrase (Indexed and Relative Files)
                • Special Considerations for Relative Files—Device Type DISK
                • Special Considerations for Sequential or Dynamic Access Modes
              • OPEN Statement Programming Notes
            • PERFORM Statement
              • Basic PERFORM Statement
                • In-line PERFORM Statement
                • Out-of-line PERFORM Statement
                • Nested PERFORM Statements
              • PERFORM with TIMES Phrase
              • PERFORM with UNTIL Phrase
              • PERFORM with VARYING Phrase
                • Varying Identifiers
                • Varying One Identifier
                  • Example
                • Varying Two Identifiers
                  • Example
                • Varying Three Identifiers
                  • Example
                • Varying More Than Three Identifiers
                • Varying Phrase Rules
            • READ Statement
              • Special Considerations for Device Types DISK and DATABASE
              • Sequential Access Mode
              • Dynamic Access Mode
              • Random Access Mode
              • READ Statement - Format 1 - Sequential Retrieval/Sequential Access
              • READ Statement - Format 2 - Sequential Retrieval/Dynamic Access
              • READ Statement - Format 3 - Random Retrieval
              • Sequential Files
                • Special Considerations for Device Types TAPEFILE and DISKETTE
              • Relative Files
              • Indexed Files
              • Multiple Record Processing
              • Multivolume Files
              • Transaction Files
                • READ Statement - Format 4 - Transaction (Nonsubfile)
                • READ Statement - Format 5 - Transaction (Subfile)
            • RELEASE Statement
            • RETURN Statement
              • AT END Phrases
              • END-RETURN Phrase
            • REWRITE Statement
              • REWRITE Statement - Format 1
              • REWRITE Statement Considerations
                • Sequential Files
                • Indexed Files
                • Relative Files
                • Record Locking
              • Transaction (Subfile) Format
            • ROLLBACK Statement
            • SEARCH Statement
              • SEARCH Statement - Format 1 - Serial Search
              • SEARCH Statement - Format 2 - Binary Search
              • AT END/WHEN Phrases
              • Condition-1
              • NEXT SENTENCE Phrase
              • END-SEARCH Phrase
              • Serial Search
              • VARYING Phrase
              • Binary Search
              • WHEN Phrase
              • Search Statement Considerations
              • SEARCH Example
            • SET Statement
              • Format 1 - Initializing Index-names, Identifiers
              • Format 2 - Adjusting Index Values
              • Format 3 - Setting External Switches
              • Format 4 - Condition-names
              • Format 5 - Pointer Data Item
              • Format 6 - Procedure-Pointer Data Item
                • LINKAGE TYPE Phrase
                • IN LIBRARY Phrase
              • Format 7 - Adjusting Pointers
              • Format 8 - Locale
                • IN LIBRARY Phrase
            • SORT Statement
              • ASCENDING/DESCENDING KEY Phrase (format 1)
              • ASCENDING/DESCENDING KEY Phrase (format 2)
              • DUPLICATES Phrase (format 1)
              • DUPLICATES Phrase (format 2)
              • COLLATING SEQUENCE Phrase (both formats)
              • USING Phrase
              • INPUT PROCEDURE Phrase
              • GIVING Phrase
              • OUTPUT PROCEDURE Phrase
            • START Statement
              • NO LOCK Phrase
              • KEY Phrase
              • FORMAT Phrase
              • NULL-KEY-MAP IS Phrase
                • Example of NULL-KEY-MAP IS Phrase
              • INVALID KEY Phrase
              • NOT INVALID KEY Phrase
              • END-START Phrase
              • Indexed Files
              • Relative Files
            • STOP Statement
              • RETURN-CODE Special Register
            • STRING Statement
              • DELIMITED BY Phrase
              • INTO Phrase
              • POINTER Phrase
              • ON OVERFLOW Phrases
              • END-STRING Phrase
              • Data Flow
              • STRING Statement Example
            • SUBTRACT Statement
              • ROUNDED Phrase
              • SIZE ERROR Phrases
              • CORRESPONDING Phrase (Format 3)
              • END-SUBTRACT Phrase
            • UNSTRING Statement
              • DELIMITED BY Phrase
              • INTO Phrase
              • POINTER Phrase
              • TALLYING IN Phrase
              • ON OVERFLOW Phrases
              • END-UNSTRING Phrase
              • Data Flow
              • UNSTRING Statement Example
            • WRITE Statement
              • Sequential Files
                • ADVANCING Phrase
                • NULL-MAP IS Phrase
                • END-OF-PAGE Phrase
                  • Special Considerations for Printer Files
                  • Special Considerations for FORMATFILEs
                • END-WRITE Phrase
                • Multivolume Files
              • Indexed and Relative Files
                • Considerations When Writing Indexed Files
                • Considerations When Writing Relative Files
                • FORMAT Phrase
                • NULL-KEY-MAP IS Phrase
                • NULL-MAP IS Phrase
                • INVALID KEY Phrase
                • NOT INVALID KEY Phrase
                • END-WRITE Phrase
                • FORMATFILE
                  • FORMAT Phrase
                  • INDICATORS Phrase
                • TRANSACTION (Nonsubfile)
                  • FORMAT Phrase
                  • TERMINAL Phrase
                  • STARTING Phrase
                  • ROLLING Phrase
                  • INDICATORS Phrase
                • TRANSACTION (Subfile)
                  • INDICATORS Phrase
                  • TERMINAL Phrase
                  • INVALID KEY Phrase
                  • NOT INVALID KEY Phrase
                  • END-WRITE Phrase
            • XML GENERATE Statement
              • Nested XML GENERATE or XML PARSE statements
              • Operation of XML GENERATE
                • Format conversion of elementary data
                • Trimming of generated XML data
              • XML element name formation
            • XML PARSE Statement
              • Control flow
              • Processing procedures
              • Coded character sets for XML documents
              • Special Registers
                • XML-CODE Special Register
                • XML-EVENT Special Register
                • XML-NTEXT Special Register
                • XML-TEXT Special Register
          • Intrinsic Functions
            • Function Definition and Evaluation
            • Specifying a Function
            • Types of Functions
            • Rules for Usage
            • Arguments
              • Order of Precedence for the Evaluation of Function Arguments
            • ALL Subscripting
            • Function Definitions
            • ACOS
            • ADD-DURATION
              • Examples
            • ANNUITY
            • ASIN
            • ATAN
            • CHAR
            • CONVERT-DATE-TIME
              • Examples
            • COS
            • CURRENT-DATE
            • DATE-OF-INTEGER
            • DAY-OF-INTEGER
            • DATE-TO-YYYYMMDD
              • Examples
            • DAY-TO-YYYYDDD
              • Examples
            • DISPLAY-OF
            • EXTRACT-DATE-TIME
              • Examples
            • FACTORIAL
            • FIND-DURATION
              • Examples
            • INTEGER
            • INTEGER-OF-DATE
            • INTEGER-OF-DAY
            • INTEGER-PART
            • LENGTH
            • LOCALE-DATE
              • Returned Values
            • LOCALE-TIME
              • Returned Values
            • LOG
            • LOG10
            • LOWER-CASE
            • MAX
            • MEAN
            • MEDIAN
            • MIDRANGE
            • MIN
            • MOD
            • NATIONAL-OF
            • NUMVAL
            • NUMVAL-C
            • ORD
            • ORD-MAX
            • ORD-MIN
            • PARMS
            • PRESENT-VALUE
            • RANDOM
            • RANGE
            • REM
            • REVERSE
            • SIN
            • SQRT
            • STANDARD-DEVIATION
            • SUBTRACT-DURATION
              • Examples
            • SUM
            • TAN
            • TEST-DATE-TIME
              • Examples
            • TRIM
              • Returned Values
              • Examples:
            • TRIML
            • TRIMR
            • UPPER-CASE
            • UTF8STRING
            • VARIANCE
            • WHEN-COMPILED
            • YEAR-TO-YYYY
              • Examples
        • Compiler-Directing Statements
          • *CONTROL (*CBL) Statement
            • *CONTROL (*CBL) and the COPY Statement
          • COPY Statement
            • COPY Statement - Format 1 - Basic
            • SUPPRESS Phrase
            • REPLACING Phrase
            • Replacement and Comparison Rules
            • Coding Examples
            • COPY Statement - Format 2 - DDS Translate
              • Format 2 Considerations
                • The DD and ALIAS Options
                • The DDR Option
                • The DDS Option
                • The DDSR Option
                • The Format-Name and ALL-FORMATS options
                • The VLR Option
                • The PREFIX Options
              • I-O
              • SUBSTITUTE Phrase
              • REPLACING Phrase
              • Using Null-Capable Fields in DDS Files
              • Considerations for Using Null-Capable Fields
              • Using COPY DDS with Date Data Types
              • General Notes
              • Data Structures Generated
                • Format (Record) Level Structures
                • Data Field Structures
                • Indicator Structures
                • INDICATOR Attribute of the Format 2 COPY Statement
                • Generation of I-O Formats
                • Fields and Formats
                • Redefinition of Formats
                • Additional Notes on Field and Format Names
                • Floating-Point Fields
                • Date, Time, and Timestamp Fields
                  • Class Date-Time
                  • Class Alphanumeric
                  • Example of Date, Time, and Timestamp DDS
                • Variable-Length Fields
                • Considerations Regarding Use of REPLACING in Format 2 COPY Statement
              • Key Generation Examples
              • Example Using CONCAT Keyword
              • Example Using RENAME Keyword
              • Example Using SST Keyword
            • COPY Statement - Format 3 - Basic IFS
          • EJECT Statement
          • REPLACE Statement
            • Replacing Algorithm
            • Programming Notes
          • SKIP1/2/3 Statements
          • TITLE Statement
          • USE Statement
            • USE Statement - Format 1 - EXCEPTION/ERROR
            • USE Statement Programming Notes
            • Precedence Rules for Nested Programs
            • USE FOR DEBUGGING
        • Compiler directives
          • Conditional compilation
            • DEFINE
            • EVALUATE
            • IF
            • Examples of conditional compilation
            • Constant conditional expressions
              • Defined conditions
              • Boolean conditions
            • Compile-time arithmetic expressions
            • Predefined compilation variables
        • Appendixes
          • Appendix A. ILE COBOL Compiler Limits
          • Appendix B. Intermediate Results and Arithmetic Precision
            • Calculating Precision of Intermediate Results
            • Compiler Calculation of Intermediate Results
              • Integer Functions
              • Mixed Functions
                • MAX
                • MIN
                • RANGE
                • REM
                • SUM
              • Floating-Point Data and Intermediate Results
          • Appendix C. EBCDIC and ASCII Collating Sequences
            • EBCDIC Collating Sequence
            • ASCII Collating Sequence
          • Appendix D. ILE COBOL Function-Name and Context-Sensitive Word List
            • Visual Key
            • Function-Names
            • Context-Sensitive Words
          • Appendix E. ILE COBOL Reserved Word List
            • Visual Key
            • Reserved Words
          • Appendix F. File Structure Support Summary and Status Key Values
            • File Structure Support Tables
            • File Status Key Values and Meanings
            • Attribute Data Formats
          • Appendix G. PROCESS Statement
            • Corresponding Create Command Options
            • option-1
              • PROCESS Statement Rules
              • OUTPUT / NOOUTPUT
              • GENLVL(nn)
              • GEN / NOGEN
              • NOMAP / MAP
              • NONUMBER / NUMBER / LINENUMBER
              • NOSECLVL / SECLVL
              • NOOPTIONS / OPTIONS
              • QUOTE / APOST
              • NOSEQUENCE / SEQUENCE
              • NOVBSUM / VBSUM
              • NOXREF / XREF
              • PRTCORR / NOPRTCORR
              • NOINZDLT / INZDLT
              • NODDSFILLER / DDSFILLER
              • NOSYNC / SYNC
              • NOCRTF / CRTF
              • NODUPKEYCHK / DUPKEYCHK
              • NOBLK / BLK
              • STDINZ / NOSTDINZ / STDINZHEX00
              • RANGE / NORANGE
              • NOUNREF / UNREF
              • MONOPRC / NOMONOPRC
              • NOVARCHAR / VARCHAR
              • NODATETIME / DATETIME
              • NOCVTPICXGRAPHIC / CVTPICXGRAPHIC
              • NOCVTPICGGRAPHIC / CVTPICGGRAPHIC
              • NOCVTPICNGRAPHIC / CVTPICNGRAPHIC
              • NOOPTIMIZE / BASICOPT / FULLOPT
              • NOFIPS / MINIMUM / INTERMEDIATE / HIGH
              • NOOBSOLETE / OBSOLETE
              • EXTDSPOPT(a b c)
              • FLAG(nn)
              • LINKPGM / LINKPRC
              • SRTSEQ(a)
              • LANGID(a)
              • SOURCE / SRC / NOSOURCE / NOSRC
              • STDTRUNC / NOSTDTRUNC
              • NOCHGPOSSGN / CHGPOSSGN
              • NOFLOAT / FLOAT
              • NODATE / DATE
              • NOTIME / TIME
              • NOTIMESTAMP / TIMESTAMP
              • NOCVTTODATE / CVTTODATE
              • ENBPFRCOL(a)
              • CCSID(a b c d)
              • DATTIM(a b)
              • NTLCCSID(a)
              • NOGRAPHIC / GRAPHIC
              • ARITHMETIC(a)
              • NOLSPTRALIGN / LSPTRALIGN
              • NOCOMPASBIN / COMPASBIN
              • NOADJFILLER / ADJFILLER
              • PRFDTA(a)
              • LICOPT(a)
              • OPTVALUE(a)
              • NONATIONAL / NATIONAL
              • THREAD(a)
              • NTLPADCHAR(a b c)
              • NOCOMPRESSDBG/COMPRESSDBG
              • NOCRTARKIDX/CRTARKIDX
              • PGMINFO(a b)
          • Appendix H. Complex OCCURS DEPENDING ON
            • Effects of a Change in ODO Value
            • Preventing Errors when Changing the ODO Object Value
            • Preventing Overlay When Adding Elements to a Variable Table
          • Appendix I. ACCEPT/DISPLAY and COBOL/2 Considerations
        • Bibliography
        • Acknowledgments
      • ILE COBOL Programmer's Guide
        • PDF file for ILE COBOL Programmer's Guide
        • About ILE COBOL Programmer's Guide
          • Who Should Use This Guide
          • Prerequisite and Related Information
          • How to Send Your Comments
          • What's New
            • What's New in 7.4?
            • Changes to this Guide Since 7.3
            • What's New this Release?
            • What's New in 7.2?
            • What's New in 7.1?
            • What's New in V6R1?
            • What's New in V5R4?
            • What's New in V5R3?
            • What's New in V5R2?
            • What's New in V5R1?
            • What's New in V4R4?
            • What's New in V4R2?
            • What's New in V3R7?
            • What's New in V3R6/V3R2?
            • What's New in V3R1?
          • Industry Standards
          • An Acknowledgment
          • ILE COBOL Syntax Notation
            • Reading Syntax Diagrams
            • Identifying Documentary Syntax
            • Interpreting Control Language (CL) Entry Codes
        • Compiling, Running, and Debugging ILE COBOL Programs
          • Introduction
            • Integrated Language Environment
            • Major Steps in Creating a Runnable ILE COBOL Program Object
              • Designing Your ILE COBOL Source Program
              • Entering Source Statements into a Source Member
              • Compiling a Source Program into Module Objects
              • Creating a Program Object
              • Running a Program Object
              • Debugging a Program
            • Other Application Development Tools
              • IBM Rational Development Studio for i
          • Entering Source Statements into a Source Member
            • Creating a Library and Source Physical File
            • Entering Source Statements Using the Source Entry Utility
              • COBOL Source File Format
              • Starting SEU
              • Using the COBOL Syntax Checker in SEU
            • Example of Entering Source Statements into a Source Member
            • Using Coded Character Set Identifiers
              • Assigning a CCSID to a Source Physical File
              • Including Copy Members with Different CCSIDs in Your Source File
              • Setting the CCSID for the COBOL Syntax Checker in SEU
              • Assigning a CCSID to a Locale
              • Runtime CCSID Considerations
                • For Locales and Files
                • For Date-Time Data Items and Numeric-Edited Items
              • Handling Different CCSIDs with the ILE Source Debugger
          • Compiling Source Programs into Module Objects
            • Definition of a Module Object
            • Using the Create COBOL Module (CRTCBLMOD) Command
              • Using Prompt Displays with the CRTCBLMOD Command
              • Syntax for the CRTCBLMOD Command
              • Parameters of the CRTCBLMOD Command
            • Example of Compiling a Source Program into a Module Object
            • Specifying a Different Target Release
            • Specifying National Language Sort Sequence in CRTCBLMOD
            • Collecting Profiling Data
            • Specifying Date, Time, and Timestamp Data Types
            • Using the PROCESS Statement to Specify Compiler Options
              • PROCESS Statement Options
              • Compiling Multiple Source Programs
              • Using COPY within the PROCESS Statement
            • Understanding Compiler Output
              • Specifying the Format of Your Listing
                • Time-Separation Characters
              • Browsing Your Compiler Listing Using SEU
              • A Sample Program and Listing
                • Command Summary
                • Identifying the Compiler Options in Effect
                • Source Listing
                • Verb Usage by Count Listing
                • Data Division Map
                • FIPS Messages
                • Cross-Reference Listing
                • Messages
          • Creating a Program Object
            • Definition of a Program Object
              • The Binding Process
            • Using the Create Program (CRTPGM) Command
            • Example of Binding Multiple Modules to Create a Program Object
            • Using the Create Bound COBOL (CRTBNDCBL) Command
              • Using Prompt Displays with the CRTBNDCBL Command
              • Syntax for the CRTBNDCBL Command
              • Parameters of the CRTBNDCBL Command
              • Invoking CRTPGM Implicitly from CRTBNDCBL
            • Example of Binding One Module Object to Create a Program Object
            • Specifying National Language Sort Sequence in CRTBNDCBL
            • Reading a Binder Listing
              • A Sample Binder Listing
                • Command Option Summary
                • Extended Summary Table
                • Brief Summary Table
                • Binding Information Listing
                • Cross Reference Listing
                • Binding Statistics
            • Modifying a Module Object and Binding the Program Object Again
              • Changing the ILE COBOL Source Program
              • Changing the Optimization Levels
            • Removing Module Observability
            • Enabling Performance Collection
              • Collection Levels
              • Procedures
          • Creating a Service Program
            • Definition of a Service Program
            • Using Service Programs
            • Writing the Binder Language Commands for an ILE COBOL Service Program
            • Using the Create Service Program (CRTSRVPGM) Command
              • Example of Creating a Service Program
            • Using the Retrieve Binder Source (RTVBNDSRC) Command as Input
            • Calling Exported ILE Procedures in Service Programs
            • Sharing Data with Service Programs
            • Canceling an ILE COBOL Program in a Service Program
          • Running an ILE COBOL Program
            • Running a COBOL Program Using the CL CALL Command
              • Passing Parameters to an ILE COBOL Program Through the CL CALL Command
            • Running an ILE COBOL Program Using a HLL CALL Statement
            • Running an ILE COBOL Program From a Menu-Driven Application
            • Running an ILE COBOL Program Using a User Created Command
            • Ending an ILE COBOL Program
            • Replying to Run Time Inquiry Messages
          • Debugging a Program
            • The ILE Source Debugger
              • Debug Commands
                • Attributes of Variables
            • Preparing a Program Object for a Debug Session
              • Using a Listing View
              • Using a Source View
              • Using a Statement View
            • Starting the ILE Source Debugger
              • STRDBG Example
            • Setting Debug Options
            • Running a Program Object in a Debug Session
              • Adding Program Objects and Service Programs to a Debug Session
              • Removing Program Objects or Service Programs from a Debug Session
            • Viewing the Program Source
              • Changing the Module Object that is Shown
              • Changing the View of the Module Object that is Shown
            • Setting and Removing Breakpoints
              • Setting and Removing Unconditional Job Breakpoints
              • Setting and Removing Unconditional Thread Breakpoints
                • Setting
                  • Using the Work with Module Breakpoints Display
                  • Using the TBREAK Command
                • Removing
              • Setting and Removing Conditional Job Breakpoints
                • Setting
                  • Example
                • Removing
              • Setting and Removing Conditional Thread Breakpoints
                • Using the Work with Module Breakpoints Display
                • Using the TBREAK or CLEAR Debug Commands
              • Removing All Breakpoints
            • Setting and Removing Watch Conditions
              • Characteristics of Watches
              • Setting Watch Conditions
                • Using the WATCH Command
              • Displaying Active Watches
              • Removing Watch Conditions
            • Example of Setting a Watch Condition
            • Running a Program Object or ILE Procedure After a Breakpoint
              • Resuming a Program Object or ILE Procedure
              • Stepping Through the Program Object or ILE Procedure
                • Stepping Over Program Objects or ILE Procedures
                • Stepping Into Program Objects or ILE Procedures
            • Displaying Variables, Constant-names, Expressions, Records, Group Items, and Arrays
              • Displaying Variables and Expressions
                • Displaying Variables as Hexadecimal Values
                • Displaying a Substring of a Character String Variable
                • Displaying the address of a level-01 or level-77 data item
              • Displaying Records, Group Items, and Arrays
            • Changing the Value of Variables
            • Equating a Name with a Variable, Expression, or Command
            • National Language Support for the ILE Source Debugger
            • Changing and Displaying Locale-Based Variables
            • Support for User-Defined Data Types
        • ILE COBOL Programming Considerations
          • Working with Data Items
            • General ILE COBOL View of Numbers (PICTURE Clause)
              • Defining Numeric Items
              • Separate Sign Position (For Portability)
              • Extra Positions for Displayable Symbols (Numeric Editing)
                • How to Use Numeric-Edited Items as Numbers
            • Computational Data Representation (USAGE Clause)
              • External Decimal (USAGE DISPLAY) Items
                • What USAGE DISPLAY Items Are For
                • Should You Use Them for Arithmetic
              • Internal Decimal (USAGE PACKED-DECIMAL or COMP-3)
                • Why Use Packed Decimal
              • Binary (USAGE BINARY or COMP-4) Items
                • How Much Storage BINARY Occupies
                • Truncation of Binary Data (*STDTRUNC Compiler Option)
              • Native Binary (USAGE COMP-5) Items
              • Internal Floating-Point (USAGE COMP-1 and COMP-2) Items
              • External Floating-Point (USAGE DISPLAY) Items
            • Creating User-Defined Data Types
            • Data Format Conversions
              • What Conversion Means
              • Conversion Takes Time
              • Conversions and Precision
                • Conversions Where Loss of Data is Possible
                  • Conversions that Preserve Precision
                  • Conversions that Result In Rounding
            • Sign Representation and Processing
              • With the *CHGPOSSN Compiler Option
            • Checking for Incompatible Data (Numeric Class Test)
              • How to Do a Numeric Class Test
            • Performing Arithmetic
              • COMPUTE and Other Arithmetic Statements
                • When to Use Other Arithmetic Statements
              • Arithmetic Expressions
              • Numeric Intrinsic Functions
                • Types of Numeric Functions
                • Nesting Functions and Arithmetic Expressions
                • All Subscripting and Special Registers
                • Intrinsic Function Examples
                  • General Number-Handling
                  • Date and Time
                  • Finance
                  • Mathematics
                  • Statistics
              • Converting Data Items (Intrinsic Functions)
                • Converting to Uppercase or Lowercase (UPPER-CASE, LOWER-CASE)
                • Converting to Reverse Order (REVERSE)
                • Converting to Numbers (NUMVAL, NUMVAL-C)
                  • Why Use NUMVAL and NUMVAL-C?
                • Converting to Date-Time Data Items (CONVERT-DATE-TIME)
                • Converting to UTF-8 (UTF8STRING)
                • Converting alphanumeric or DBCS to national data (NATIONAL-OF)
                • Converting national to alphanumeric or DBCS data (DISPLAY-OF)
                • Removing leading and/or trailing characters (TRIM, TRIML, TRIMR)
              • Evaluating Data Items (Intrinsic Functions)
                • Evaluating Single Characters for Collating Sequence (CHAR, ORD)
                • Returning Variable-Length Results with Alphanumeric Functions
                • Finding the Largest or Smallest Data Item (MAX, MIN, ORD-MAX, ORD-MIN)
                  • MAX and MIN
                  • ORD-MAX and ORD-MIN
                  • Returning Variable-Length Results with Alphanumeric Functions
                • Finding the Length of Data Items (LENGTH)
                  • LENGTH OF Special Register
                • Finding the Date of Compilation (WHEN-COMPILED)
                  • WHEN-COMPILED Special Register
                • Testing for Date-Time Data Items (TEST-DATE-TIME)
                • Working with Date and Time Durations (ADD-DURATION, FIND-DURATION, SUBTRACT-DURATION)
                  • Example of Finding the Duration Between Two Dates
                  • Example of Calculating a Due Date
                  • Example of Calculating a Stale Date
              • Formatting Dates and Times Based On Locales (LOCALE-DATE, LOCALE-TIME)
            • Fixed-Point versus Floating-Point Arithmetic
              • Floating-Point Evaluations
              • Fixed-Point Evaluations
              • Arithmetic Comparisons (Relation Conditions)
              • Examples of Fixed-Point and Floating-Point Evaluations
            • Processing Table Items
              • Processing Multiple Table Items (ALL Subscript)
                • Example 1:
                • Example 2:
                • Example 3:
            • What is the Year 2000 Problem?
              • Long-Term Solution
              • Short-Term Solution
                • Advantage of Short-Term Solution
                • Disadvantages of the Short-Term Solution
            • Working with Date-Time Data Types
              • MOVE Considerations for Date-Time Data Items
                • Translation of @p to Uppercase
                • Conversion of 2-Digit Years to 4-Digit Years or Centuries
                  • Overriding the Default Date Window Using the DATTIM PROCESS Statement Option
                  • Performance Considerations for Date-Time Relational Conditions
                  • Performance Considerations for Date-Time MOVEs
                • Conversion of Times to Microseconds
                  • Time Zones
            • Working With Locales
              • Creating Locales on the IBM i
              • Setting a Current Locale for Your Application
              • Identification and Scope of Locales
              • LC_MONETARY Locale Category
                • Producing Unique Monetary Formats—Example
                • LC_MONETARY—Example
              • LC_TIME Category
                • Escape Sequences
                • LC_TIME Example
              • LC_TOD Category
                • LC_TOD Example
            • Manipulating null-terminated strings
              • Example: null-terminated strings
          • Calling and Sharing Data Between ILE COBOL Programs
            • Run Time Concepts
              • Activation and Activation Groups
              • COBOL Run Unit
              • Control Boundaries
              • Main Programs and Subprograms
              • Initialization of Storage
            • Transferring Control to Another Program
            • Calling an ILE COBOL Program
              • Identifying the Linkage Type of Called Programs and Procedures
              • Calling Nested Programs
                • Structure of Nested Programs
                • Conventions for Using Nested Program Structure
                • Calling Hierarchy for Nested Programs
                • Scope of Names within a Nested Structure
                  • Local Names
                  • Global Names
                  • Searching for Name Declarations
              • Using Static Procedure Calls and Dynamic Program Calls
                • Performing Static Procedure Calls using CALL literal
                • Performing Dynamic Program Calls using CALL literal
              • Using CALL identifier
              • Using CALL procedure-pointer
              • Using Recursive Calls
            • Returning from an ILE COBOL Program
              • Returning from a Main Program
                • Returning from a *NEW Activation Group
                • Returning from a Named Activation Group
                • Returning from the Default (*DFTACTGRP) Activation Group
              • Returning from a Subprogram
              • Maintaining OPM COBOL/400 Run Unit Defined STOP RUN Semantics
              • Examples of Returning from an ILE COBOL Program
              • Passing Return Code Information (RETURN-CODE Special Register)
            • Passing and Sharing Data Between Programs
              • Comparing Local and Global Data
              • Passing Data Using CALL…BY REFERENCE, BY VALUE, or BY CONTENT
                • Describing Arguments in the Calling Program
                • Describing Parameters in the Called Program
                  • Writing the Linkage Section in the Called Program
                • Grouping Data to be Passed
              • Sharing EXTERNAL Data
              • Sharing EXTERNAL Files
              • Passing Data Using Pointers
              • Passing Data Using Data Areas
                • Using Local Data Area
                • Using Data Areas You Create
                • Using Program Initialization Parameters (PIP) Data Area
            • Effect of EXIT PROGRAM, STOP RUN, GOBACK, and CANCEL on Internal Files
            • Canceling an ILE COBOL Program
              • Canceling from Another ILE COBOL Program
              • Canceling from Another Language
          • COBOL and the eBusiness World
            • COBOL and XML
            • COBOL and MQSeries
            • COBOL and Java Programs
              • System Requirements
              • COBOL and PCML
                • Example:
              • COBOL and JNI
                • Calling a COBOL Program from a Java Program
                  • Code the COBOL Program
                  • Create the COBOL Module
                  • Create a Service Program
                  • Code the Java Program
                  • Compile the Java Program
                  • Invoke theJava program
                • Calling Java Methods from a COBOL Program
                  • Code the COBOL Program
                  • Create the COBOL Program
                  • Code the Java Program
                  • Compile the Java Program
              • COBOL and Java Data Types
              • JNI Copy Members for COBOL
                • Member JNI
                • Member JDK11INIT
          • Processing XML Input
            • XML parser in COBOL
            • Accessing XML documents
            • Parsing XML documents
              • Processing XML events
              • Writing procedures to process XML
                • Understanding the contents of XML-CODE
                • Using XML-TEXT and XML-NTEXT
                • Transforming XML text to COBOL data items
                • Restrictions on your processing procedure
                • Ending your processing procedure
                • Examples: parsing XML
                  • Output from parse example
            • Understanding XML document encoding
              • Specifying the code page
              • Parsing documents in other code pages
            • Handling errors in XML documents
              • Unhandled exceptions
              • Handling exceptions
              • Terminating the parse
              • CCSID conflict exception
              • Document size exception
          • Producing XML output
            • Generating XML output
              • Example: generating XML
                • Program XGFX
                • Program Pretty
                • Output from program XGFX
            • Enhancing XML output
              • Example: enhancing XML output
              • Example: converting hyphens in element names to underscores
            • Controlling the encoding of generated XML output
            • Handling errors in generating XML output
          • Calling and Sharing Data with Other Languages
            • Calling ILE C/C++ Programs and Procedures
              • Passing Data to an ILE C Program or Procedure
                • Data Type Compatibility between ILE C and ILE COBOL
              • Sharing External Data with an ILE C Program or Procedure
              • Returning Control from an ILE C Program or Procedure
            • Examples of an ILE C Procedure Call from an ILE COBOL Program
              • Sample Code for ILE C Procedure Call Example 1
              • Sample Code for ILE C Procedure Call Example 2
              • Creating and Running the ILE C Procedure Call Examples
            • Example of an ILE C Program Call from an ILE COBOL Program
              • Sample Code for ILE C Program Call Example
              • Creating and Running the ILE C Program Call Example
            • Calling ILE RPG Programs and Procedures
              • Passing Data to an ILE RPG Program or Procedure
                • Data Type Compatibility between ILE RPG and ILE COBOL
              • Returning Control from an ILE RPG Program or Procedure
            • Calling ILE CL Programs and Procedures
              • Passing Data to an ILE CL Program or Procedure
                • Data Type Compatibility between ILE CL and ILE COBOL
              • Returning Control from an ILE CL Program or Procedure
            • Calling OPM Languages
              • Calling OPM COBOL/400 Programs
            • Calling EPM Languages
            • Issuing a CL Command from an ILE COBOL Program
            • Including Structured Query Language (SQL) Statements in Your ILE COBOL Program
            • Calling an ILE API to Retrieve Current Century
            • Using Intrinsic Functions or the ACCEPT Statement to Retrieve Current Century
            • Calling IFS API
          • Using Pointers in an ILE COBOL Program
            • Defining Pointers
            • Pointer Alignment
              • Writing the File Section and Working-Storage Section for Pointer Alignment
            • Redefining Pointers
            • Initializing Pointers Using the NULL Figurative Constant
            • Reading and Writing Pointers
            • Using the LENGTH OF Special Register with Pointers
            • Setting the Address of Linkage Section Items
              • Using ADDRESS OF and the ADDRESS OF Special Register
            • Using Pointers in a MOVE Statement
            • Using Pointers in a CALL Statement
            • Adjusting the Value of Pointers
            • Accessing User Spaces Using Pointers and APIs
            • Processing a Chained List Using Pointers
              • Passing Pointers between Programs and Procedures
              • Check for the End of the Chained List
              • Processing the Next Record
              • Incrementing Addresses Received from Another Program
            • Passing Entry Point Addresses with Procedure-Pointers
          • Preparing ILE COBOL Programs for Multithreading
            • How Language Elements Are Interpreted in a Multithreaded Environment
              • Working with Run-Unit Scoped Elements
              • Working with Program Invocation Instance Scoped Elements
            • Choosing THREAD for Multithreading Support
              • Language Restrictions under THREAD
            • Control Transfer within a Multithreaded Environment
            • Limitations on ILE COBOL in a Multithreaded Environment
            • Example of Using ILE COBOL in a Multithreaded Environment
              • Sample Code for the Multithreading Example
              • Creating and Running the Multithreading Example
          • ILE COBOL Error and Exception Handling
            • ILE Condition Handling
            • Ending an ILE COBOL Program
            • Using Error Handling Bindable Application Programming Interfaces (APIs)
            • Initiating Deliberate Dumps
            • Program Status Structure
            • Handling Errors in String Operations
            • Handling Errors in Arithmetic Operations
              • The ON SIZE ERROR Phrase
              • Handling Errors in Floating-Point Computations
            • Handling Errors in Input-Output Operations
              • Processing of Input-Output Verbs
              • Detecting End-of-File Conditions (AT END Phrase)
              • Detecting Invalid Key Conditions (INVALID KEY Phrase)
              • Using EXCEPTION/ERROR Declarative Procedures (USE Statement)
              • Determining the Type of Error Through the File Status Key
                • Interpreting Major and Minor Return Codes
                • Handling Messages through Condition Handlers
            • Handling Errors in Sort/Merge Operations
            • Handling Exceptions on the CALL Statement
            • User-Written Error Handling Routines
            • Common Exceptions and Some of Their Causes
            • Recovery After a Failure
              • Recovery of Files with Commitment Control
              • TRANSACTION File Recovery
            • Handling Errors in Operations Using Null-Capable Fields
            • Handling Errors in Locale Operations
        • ILE COBOL Input-Output Considerations
          • Defining Files
            • Types of File Descriptions
            • Defining Program-Described Files
            • Defining Externally Described Files
              • Describing Files Using Data Description Specifications (DDS)
                • Using Externally Described Files in an ILE COBOL Program
                • Specifying Nonkeyed and Keyed Record Retrieval
                • Level Checking the Externally Described Files
          • Processing Files
            • Associating Files with Input-Output Devices
            • Specifying Input and Output Spooling
              • Input Spooling
              • Output Spooling
            • Overriding File Attributes
            • Redirecting File Input and Output
            • Locking and Releasing Files
              • Locking and Releasing Records
              • Sharing an Open Data Path to Access a File
            • Unblocking Input Records and Blocking Output Records
            • Using File Status and Feedback Areas
              • FILE STATUS
              • OPEN-FEEDBACK Area
              • I-O-FEEDBACK Area
            • Using Commitment Control
              • Commitment Control Scoping
              • Example of Using Commitment Control
            • Sorting and Merging Files
              • Describing the Files
              • Sorting Files
              • Merging Files
              • Specifying the Sort Criteria
                • Restrictions on Sort Key Length
                • Floating-Point Considerations
                • Date-Time Data Type Considerations
                • Null-Value Considerations
                • Alternate Collating Sequences
              • Writing the Input Procedure
              • Writing the Output Procedure
              • Restrictions on the Input Procedures and Output Procedures
              • Determining Whether the Sort or Merge Was Successful
              • Premature Ending of a Sort or Merge Operation
              • Sorting Variable Length Records
              • Example of Sorting and Merging Files
            • Declaring Data Items Using SAA Data Types
              • Variable-length Fields
              • Date, Time, and Timestamp Fields
                • Class Date-Time
                • Class Alphanumeric
                • Examples of How the *DATETIME Compiler Option Works with *DATE
                  • Example 1
                  • Example 2
                  • Example 3
                  • Example 4
              • Null-Capable Fields
                • Using Null Maps and Null Key Maps in Input and Output Operations
                • Positioning to a Null-Capable Record in a Database File
                • Deleting a Null-Capable Record in a Database File
                • Example of Using Null Maps and Null Key Maps
              • DBCS-Graphic Fields
              • Variable-length DBCS-graphic Fields
                • Examples of Using Variable-length DBCS-graphic Fields
              • Floating-point Fields
          • Accessing Externally Attached Devices
            • Types of Device Files
            • Accessing Printer Devices
              • Naming Printer Files
              • Describing Printer Files
                • Describing Program-Described Printer Files
                  • Using the LINAGE Clause to Handle Spacing and Paging Controls
                • Describing Externally Described Printer Files (FORMATFILE)
              • Writing to Printer Files
              • Example of Using FORMATFILE Files in an ILE COBOL Program
            • Accessing Files Stored on Tape Devices
              • Naming Files Stored on Tape Devices
              • Describing Files Stored on Tape Devices
                • Describing Tape Files with Variable Length Records
              • Reading and Writing Files Stored on Tape Devices
                • Reading and Writing Tape Files with Variable Length Records
            • Accessing Files Stored on Diskette Devices
              • Naming Files Stored on Diskette Devices
              • Describing Files Stored on Diskette Devices
              • Reading and Writing Files Stored on Diskette Devices
            • Accessing Display Devices and ICF Files
          • Using DISK and DATABASE Files
            • Differences between DISK and DATABASE Files
            • File Organization and IBM i File Access Paths
            • File Processing Methods for DISK and DATABASE Files
              • Processing Sequential Files
              • Processing Relative Files
              • Processing Indexed Files
                • Valid RECORD KEYs
                • Referring to a Partial Key
                • Alternate Record Keys
                • Processing Logical File as Indexed Files
              • Processing Files with Descending Key Sequences
              • Processing Files with Variable Length Records
                • Describing DISK Files with Variable Length Records
                • Opening DISK Files with Variable Length Records
                • Reading and Writing DISK Files with Variable Length Records
            • Examples of Processing DISK and DATABASE Files
              • Sequential File Creation
              • Sequential File Updating and Extension
              • Relative File Creation
              • Relative File Updating
              • Relative File Retrieval
              • Indexed File Creation
              • Indexed File Updating
            • IBM i System Files
            • Distributed Data Management (DDM) Files
            • Using DDM Files with Non-IBM i Systems
            • DDM Programming Considerations
            • DDM Direct (Relative) File Support
            • Distributed Files
            • Open Considerations for Data Processing
              • When Distributed Data Processing is Overridden
              • When Distributed Data Processing is NOT Overridden
              • Input/Output Considerations for Distributed Files
                • Example of How Records are Retrieved for Insert, Update, and Delete
              • SQL Statement Additions for Distributed Data Files
              • Examples of Processing Distributed Files
            • Processing Files with Constraints
              • Restrictions
              • Adding, Modifying and Removing Constraints
              • Checking that Constraints Have Been Successfully Added or Removed
              • Order of Operations
              • Handling Null Fields with Check Constraints
              • Handling Constraint Violations
              • Database Features that Support Referential or Check Constraints
                • Journaling
                • Commitment Control
                • Distributed Data Management (DDM)
                • Distributed Files
          • Using Transaction Files
            • Defining Transaction Files Using Data Description Specifications
            • Processing an Externally Described Transaction File
            • Writing Programs That Use Transaction Files
              • Naming a Transaction File
              • Describing a Transaction File
              • Processing a Transaction File
                • Opening a Transaction File
                • Acquiring Program Devices
                • Writing to a Transaction File
                • Reading from a Transaction File
                • Dropping Program Devices
                • Closing a TRANSACTION File
              • Example of a Basic Inquiry Program Using Transaction Files
            • Using Indicators with Transaction Files
              • Passing Indicators in a Separate Indicator Area
              • Passing Indicators in the Record Area
              • Examples of Using Indicators in ILE COBOL Programs
            • Using Subfile Transaction Files
              • Defining a Subfile Using Data Description Specifications
              • Using Subfiles for a Display File
              • Accessing Single Device Files and Multiple Device Files
            • Writing Programs That Use Subfile Transaction Files
              • Naming a Subfile Transaction File
              • Describing a Subfile Transaction File
              • Processing a Subfile Transaction File
                • Opening a Subfile Transaction File
                • Acquiring Program Devices
                • Writing to a Subfile Transaction File
                • Reading from a Subfile Transaction File
                • Replacing (Rewriting) a Subfile Record
                • Dropping Program Devices
                • Closing a Subfile Transaction File
              • Example of Using WRITE SUBFILE in an Order Inquiry Program
              • Example of Using READ SUBFILE…NEXT MODIFIED and REWRITE SUBFILE in a Payment Update Program
        • Appendixes
          • Appendix A. Level of Language Support
            • COBOL Standard
            • ILE COBOL Level of Language Support
            • System Application Architecture (SAA) Common Programming Interface (CPI) Support
          • Appendix B. The Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) Flagger
          • Appendix C. ILE COBOL Messages
            • COBOL Message Descriptions
              • Severity Levels
                • CAUTION
            • Compilation Messages
              • Program Listings
            • Interactive Messages
            • Responding to Messages
          • Appendix D. Supporting International Languages with Double-Byte Character Sets
            • Using DBCS Characters in Literals
              • How to Specify Literals Containing DBCS Characters
                • Other Considerations
                  • Quotation Marks
                  • Shift Characters
              • How the COBOL Compiler Checks DBCS Characters
              • How to Continue Mixed Literals on a New Line
              • Syntax-Checker Considerations
              • Where You Can Use DBCS Characters in a COBOL Program
              • How to Write Comments
            • Identification Division
            • Environment Division
              • Configuration Section
              • Input-Output Section
              • File Control Paragraph
                • ASSIGN Clause
            • Data Division
              • File Section
              • Working-Storage Section
                • REDEFINES Clause
                • OCCURS Clause
                • JUSTIFIED RIGHT Clause
                • VALUE Clause
                • PICTURE Clause
                • RENAMES Clause
            • Procedure Division
              • Intrinsic Functions
              • Conditional Expressions
              • Input/Output Statements
                • ACCEPT Statement
                • DISPLAY Statement
                • READ Statement
                  • INTO Phrase
                • REWRITE Statement
                • START Statement
                • WRITE Statement
              • Data Manipulation Statements
                • Arithmetic Statements
                • INSPECT Statement
                • MOVE Statement
                • SET Statement (Condition-Name Format)
                • STRING Statement
                • UNSTRING Statement
              • Procedure Branching Statements
              • Table Handling—SEARCH Statement
            • SORT/MERGE
            • Compiler-Directing Statements
              • COPY Statement
              • REPLACE Statement
              • TITLE Statement
            • Communications between Programs
            • FIPS Flagger
            • COBOL Program Listings
            • Intrinsic Functions with Collating Sequence Sensitivity
          • Appendix E. Example of a COBOL Formatted Dump
          • Appendix F. XML reference material
            • XML exceptions that allow continuation
            • XML exceptions that do not allow continuation
            • XML conformance
            • XML generate exceptions
          • Appendix G. Migration and Compatibility Considerations between OPM COBOL/400 and ILE COBOL
            • Migration Strategy
            • Compatibility Considerations
              • General Considerations
                • Area Checking
                • Attributes Field in the Data Division Map Section of the Compiler Listing
                • MIXED, COMMUNICATIONS, and BSC files
                • Reserved Words
                • Source files for SAA CPI Data Structures
              • CL Commands
                • CRTCBLPGM Command Replaced By CRTCBLMOD and CRTBNDCBL Commands
                • Coded Character Set Identifiers (CCSID)
                • Default Source Member Type
                • Error Messages
                • GENLVL Parameter
                • SAA Flagging
                • STRCBLDBG and ENDCBLDBG CL Commands
              • Compiler-Directing Statements
                • COPY Statement
                  • Comment after Variable Length Field
                  • Default Source File Name
                • PROCESS Statement
                  • *CBL/*CONTROL Statement
                  • INTERMEDIATE and MINIMUM Options (FIPS Flagging)
                  • NOSOURCE Option
                • USE FOR DEBUGGING
              • Environment Division
                • Order of DATA DIVISION and ENVIRONMENT DIVISION
                • FILE-CONTROL and I-O-CONTROL Paragraphs
                • SELECT Clause
              • Data Division
                • Order of DATA DIVISION and ENVIRONMENT DIVISION
                • FD or SD Entries
                • WORKING-STORAGE SECTION
                • LIKE Clause
                • LINAGE Clause
                • PICTURE Clause
                • REDEFINES Clause
                • VALUE Clause
              • Procedure Division
                • General Considerations
                  • Binary Data Items
                  • 8-Byte Binary Data Alignment
                  • Duplicate Paragraph Names
                  • Number of Subscript
                  • Segmentation
                • Common Phrases
                  • (NOT) ON EXCEPTION Phrase
                  • INVALID KEY Phrase
                  • ON SIZE ERROR Phrase
                • DECLARATIVE Procedures
                  • Declarative Implemented as an ILE Procedure
                  • Invoking a Declarative from Another Declarative
                • Expressions
                  • Class Condition Expressions
                  • Abbreviated Conditional Expressions
                  • Comparing Figurative Constants with Figurative Constants
                  • Comparison of Zoned and Non-numeric Items
                  • NOT in a Relational Expression
                  • NOT LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO
                • Special Registers
                  • DEBUG-ITEM Special Register
                  • LINAGE-COUNTER Special Register
                  • WHEN-COMPILED Special Register
                • Extended ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements
                  • Compile Time Considerations
                  • Run Time Considerations
                • CALL Statement
                  • Lower Case Characters in CALL/CANCEL Literal or Identifier
                  • Passing a File-Name on the USING Phrase
                  • Recursive Calls
                • CANCEL Statement
                • COMPUTE Statement
                • DELETE Statement
                • EVALUATE Statement
                • IF Statement
                • INSPECT Statement
                • MOVE Statement
                  • Alphanumeric Literals and Index Names
                  • Alphanumeric Values and Numeric-Edited Literals
                  • Boolean Values
                  • CORRESPONDING Phrase
                  • Overlapping Source and Target Strings
                • OPEN Statement
                  • Dynamic File Creation
                  • Opening FORMATFILEs
                  • OPEN OUTPUT or OPEN I-O for OPTIONAL Files
                • PERFORM Statement
                • READ Statement
                  • AT END Not Allowed for Random Reads of Relative Files
                  • Error Messages
                • REWRITE Statement
                • SET Statement
                • SORT/MERGE Statements
                  • GIVING Phrase and the SAME AREA/SAME RECORD AREA Clauses
                • STOP RUN Statement
                • STRING/UNSTRING Statements
              • Application Programming Interfaces (APIs)
                • ILE COBOL Bindable APIs
                • Calling OPM COBOL/400 APIs
              • Run Time
                • Preserving the OPM-compatible Run Unit Semantics
                  • Preserving OPM-compatible Run Unit Semantics in an ILE COBOL Application
                  • Preserving OPM-compatible Run Unit Semantics in a Mixed OPM COBOL/400 and ILE COBOL Application
                • Error Messages
                • File Status 9A changed to 0A
                • File Status 9M changed to 0M
          • Appendix H. Glossary of Abbreviations
        • Bibliography
        • Acknowledgments
      • COBOL 관련 정보
    • RPG
      • ILE RPG Reference
        • PDF file for ILE RPG Reference
        • About ILE RPG Reference
          • Who Should Use This Reference
          • Prerequisite and Related Information
          • How to Send Your Comments
        • What's New
          • What's New since 7.4?
          • What's New in 7.4?
          • What's New in 7.3?
          • What's New in 7.2?
          • What's New in 7.1?
          • What's New in 6.1?
          • What's New in V5R4?
          • What's New in V5R3?
          • What's New in V5R2?
          • What's New in V5R1?
          • What's New in V4R4?
          • What's New in V4R2?
          • What's New in V3R7?
          • What's New in V3R6/V3R2?
        • RPG IV Concepts
          • Symbolic Names and Reserved Words
            • Symbolic Names
              • Array Names
              • Conditional Compile Names
              • Data Structure Names
              • EXCEPT Names
              • Field Names
              • KLIST Names
              • Labels
              • Named Constants
              • PLIST Names
              • Prototype Names
              • Record Names
              • Subroutine Names
              • Table Names
            • RPG IV Words with Special Functions/Reserved Words
            • User Date Special Words
              • Rules for User Date
            • PAGE, PAGE1-PAGE7
              • Rules for PAGE, PAGE1-PAGE7
          • Compiler Directives
            • /FREE... /END-FREE
            • /TITLE
            • /EJECT
            • /SPACE
            • /SET
            • /RESTORE
            • /OVERLOAD DETAIL | NODETAIL
            • /CHARCOUNT NATURAL | STDCHARSIZE
            • /COPY or /INCLUDE
              • Results of the /COPY or /INCLUDE during Compile
              • Nested /COPY or /INCLUDE
              • Using /COPY, /INCLUDE in Source Files with Embedded SQL
            • Conditional Compilation Directives
              • Defining Conditions
                • /DEFINE
                • /UNDEFINE
              • Predefined Conditions
                • Conditions Relating to the Environment
                • Conditions Relating to the Command Being Used
                • Conditions Relating to the Target Release
                • Conditions Relating to Control Specification Keywords
              • Condition Expressions
              • Testing Conditions
                • /IF Condition-Expression
                • /ELSEIF Condition-Expression
                • /ELSE
                • /ENDIF
                • Rules for Testing Conditions
              • The /EOF Directive
                • /EOF
              • Handling of Directives by the RPG Preprocessor
          • Procedures and the Program Logic Cycle
            • Subprocedure Definition
              • Procedure Interface Definition
              • Return Values
              • Scope of Definitions
              • Subprocedures and Subroutines
            • Program Flow in RPG Modules: Cycle Versus Linear
              • Cycle Module
                • Use Caution Exporting Subprocedures in Cycle Modules
                  • Potential Problem Situations
                  • Recommendations
              • Linear Module
                • Linear Main Module
                • NOMAIN Module
              • Module Initialization
                • Initialization of Global Data
            • RPG Cycle and other implicit Logic
              • Program Cycle
                • General RPG IV Program Cycle
                • Detailed RPG IV Program Cycle
                  • Detailed RPG IV Object Program Cycle
                  • Initialization Subroutine
                    • Match Fields Routine
                    • Overflow Routine
                    • Lookahead Routine
                  • Ending a Program without a Primary File
                  • Program Control of File Processing
                    • RPG IV Exception/Error Handling Routine
              • Subprocedure Calculations
              • Implicit Opening of Files and Locking of Data Areas
              • Implicit Closing of Files and Unlocking of Data Areas
          • RPG IV Indicators
            • Indicators Defined on RPG IV Specifications
              • Overflow Indicators
              • Record Identifying Indicators
                • Rules for Assigning Record Identifying Indicators
              • Control Level Indicators (L1-L9)
                • Rules for Control Level Indicators
                • Split Control Field
              • Field Indicators
                • Rules for Assigning Field Indicators
              • Resulting Indicators
                • Rules for Assigning Resulting Indicators
            • Indicators Not Defined on the RPG IV Specifications
              • External Indicators
              • Internal Indicators
                • First Page Indicator (1P)
                • Last Record Indicator (LR)
                • Matching Record Indicator (MR)
              • Return Indicator (RT)
            • Using Indicators
              • File Conditioning
                • Rules for File Conditioning
              • Field Record Relation Indicators
                • Assigning Field Record Relation Indicators
              • Function Key Indicators
              • Halt Indicators (H1-H9)
              • Indicators Conditioning Calculations
                • Positions 7 and 8
                • Positions 9-11
              • Indicators Used in Expressions
              • Indicators Conditioning Output
            • Indicators Referred to As Data
              • *IN
              • *INxx
              • Additional Rules
            • Summary of Indicators
          • File and Program Exception/Errors
            • File Exception/Errors
              • File Information Data Structure
                • File Feedback Information
                  • INFDS File Feedback Example
                • Open Feedback Information
                  • INFDS Open Feedback Example
                • Input/Output Feedback Information
                  • INFDS Input/Output Feedback Example
                • Device Specific Feedback Information
                  • INFDS Device Specific Feedback Examples
                • Get Attributes Feedback Information
                  • INFDS Get Attributes Feedback Example
                • Blocking Considerations
                • File Status Codes
              • File Exception/Error Subroutine (INFSR)
            • Program Exception/Errors
              • Program Status Data Structure
                • Program Status Codes
                • PSDS Example
              • Program Exception/Error Subroutine
          • General File Considerations
            • Rules for File Names
            • File devices
              • File device types
            • Global and Local Files
            • Open Access Files
              • Locating an Open Access Handler
              • Open Access Handlers
                • Example of an Open Access Handler
            • File Parameters
            • Variables Associated with Files
              • Example of passing a file and passing a data structure with the associated variables.
            • Full Procedural Files
            • Primary/Secondary Multi-file Processing
              • Multi-file Processing with No Match Fields
              • Multi-file Processing with Match Fields
                • Assigning Match Field Values (M1-M9)
                • Processing Matching Records
            • File Translation
              • Specifying File Translation
              • Translating One File or All Files
              • Translating More Than One File
                • Specifying the Files
                • Specifying the Table
            • How character data is processed for file I/O
        • Definitions
          • Defining Data and Prototypes
            • General Considerations
              • Scope of Definitions
              • Storage of Definitions
            • Standalone Fields
              • Variable Initialization
            • Constants
              • Literals
                • CCSID of literals and compile-time data
                • Example of Defining Literals
                • Example of Using Literals with Zero Length
              • Named Constants
              • Figurative Constants
                • Rules for Figurative Constants
            • Data Structures
              • Qualifying Data Structure Names
              • Array Data Structures
              • Defining Data Structure Parameters in a Prototype or Procedure Interface
              • Defining Data Structure Subfields
                • Specifying Subfield Length
                • Aligning Data Structure Subfields
                • Initialization of Nested Data Structures
              • Special Data Structures
                • Data Area Data Structure
                  • Local Data Area (*LDA)
                • File Information Data Structure
                • Program-Status Data Structure
                • Indicator Data Structure
              • Data Structure Examples
            • Prototypes and Parameters
              • Prototypes
              • Prototyped Parameters
              • Procedure Interface
          • Using Arrays and Tables
            • Arrays
              • Array Name and Index
              • The Essential Array Specifications
              • Coding a Run-Time Array
              • Loading a Run-Time Array
                • Loading a Run-Time Array by Reading One Record from a File
                • Loading a Run-Time Array by Reading Several Records from A File
                • Loading an Array from Identical Externally-Described Fields
                • Sequencing Run-Time Arrays
              • Coding a Compile-Time Array
              • Loading a Compile-Time Array
                • Rules for Array Source Records
              • Coding a Prerun-Time Array
              • Example of Coding Arrays
              • Loading a Prerun-Time Array
              • Sequence Checking for Character Arrays
            • Initializing Arrays
              • Run-Time Arrays
              • Compile-Time and Prerun-Time Arrays
            • Defining Related Arrays
            • Searching Arrays
              • Searching an Array Without an Index
              • Searching an Array Data Structure
              • Searching an Array with an Index
            • Using Arrays
              • Specifying an Array in Calculations
            • Sorting Arrays
              • Sorting using part of the array as a key
              • Sorting an Array Data Structure
            • Array Output
              • Editing Entire Arrays
            • Using Dynamically-Sized Arrays
            • Tables
              • LOOKUP with One Table
              • LOOKUP with Two Tables
              • Specifying the Table Element Found in a LOOKUP Operation
          • Data Types and Data Formats
            • Internal and External Formats
              • Internal Format
              • External Format
                • Specifying an External Format for a Numeric Field
                • Specifying an External Format for a Character, Graphic, or UCS-2 Field
                • Specifying an External Format for a Date-Time Field
            • Character Data Type
              • Character Format
              • Indicator Format
              • Graphic Format
              • UCS-2 Format
              • Variable-Length Character, Graphic and UCS-2 Formats
                • Size of the Length-Prefix for a Varying Length Item
                • Rules for Variable-Length Character, Graphic, and UCS-2 Formats
                • Using Variable-Length Fields
                  • How the Length of the Field is Set
                  • How the Length of the Field is Used
                  • Why You Should Use Variable-Length Fields
                • CVTOPT(*VARCHAR) and CVTOPT(*VARGRAPHIC)
              • Conversion between Character, Graphic and UCS-2 Data
                • CCSIDs of Data
                • Conversions
              • CCSID conversions during input and output operations
              • Processing string data by the natural size of each character
              • Alternate Collating Sequence
                • Changing the Collating Sequence
                • Using an External Collating Sequence
                • Specifying an Alternate Collating Sequence in Your Source
                • Formatting the Alternate Collating Sequence Records
            • Numeric Data Type
              • Binary-Decimal Format
                • Processing of a Program-Described Binary Input Field
                • Processing of an Externally Described Binary Input Field
              • Float Format
                • External Display Representation of a Floating-Point Field
                  • Output
                  • Input
              • Integer Format
              • Packed-Decimal Format
                • Determining the Digit Length of a Packed-Decimal Field
              • Unsigned Format
              • Zoned-Decimal Format
              • Considerations for Using Numeric Formats
                • Guidelines for Choosing the Numeric Format for a Field
              • Representation of Numeric Formats
            • Date Data Type
              • Separators
              • Initialization
            • Time Data Type
              • Separators
              • Initialization
              • *JOBRUN
            • Timestamp Data Type
              • Separators
              • Initialization
            • Object Data Type
              • Where You Can Specify an Object Field
            • Basing Pointer Data Type
              • Setting a Basing Pointer
              • Examples
            • Procedure Pointer Data Type
            • Database Null Value Support
              • User Controlled Support for Null-Capable Fields and Key Fields
                • Null-capable fields in externally-described data structures
                • Input of Null-Capable Fields
                • Output of Null-Capable Fields
                • Keyed Operations
              • Input-Only Support for Null-Capable Fields
              • ALWNULL(*NO)
            • Error Handling for Database Data Mapping Errors
          • Editing Numeric Fields
            • Edit Codes
              • Simple Edit Codes
              • Combination Edit Codes
              • User-Defined Edit Codes
              • Editing Considerations
              • Summary of Edit Codes
            • Edit Words
              • How to Code an Edit Word
              • Parts of an Edit Word
                • Forming the Body of an Edit Word
                  • Blank
                  • Decimals and Commas
                  • Zeros
                  • Asterisk
                  • Currency Symbol
                  • Ampersand
                  • Constants
                • Forming the Status of an Edit Word
                  • Ampersand
                  • CR or minus symbol
                • Formatting the Expansion of an Edit Word
              • Summary of Coding Rules for Edit Words
            • Editing Externally Described Files
        • Specifications
          • About Specifications
            • RPG IV Specification Types
              • Main Source Section Specifications
              • Subprocedure Specifications
              • Program Data
            • Free-Form Statements
              • Fully free-form statements
              • Conditional Directives Within a Free-Form Statement
              • Differences between fixed-form and free-form to be aware of
            • Common Entries
              • Syntax of Keywords
              • Continuation Rules
                • Control Specification Keyword Field
                • File Description Specification Keyword Field
                • Definition Specification Keyword Field
                • Calculation Specification Extended Factor-2
                • Free-Form Specification
                • Output Specification Constant/Editword Field
                • Definition and Procedure Specification Name Field
            • Specification Type Not Known
          • Control Specifications
            • Using a Data Area as a Control Specification
            • Free-Form Control Statement
            • Traditional Control-Specification Statement
              • Position 6 (Form Type)
              • Positions 7-80 (Keywords)
            • Control-Specification Keywords
              • ACTGRP(*STGMDL | *NEW | *CALLER | 'activation-group-name')
              • ALLOC(*STGMDL | *TERASPACE | *SNGLVL)
              • ALTSEQ{(*NONE | *SRC | *EXT)}
              • ALWNULL(*NO | *INPUTONLY | *USRCTL)
              • AUT(*LIBRCRTAUT | *ALL | *CHANGE | *USE | *EXCLUDE | 'authorization-list-name')
              • BNDDIR('binding-directory-name' {:'binding-directory-name'…})
              • CCSID control keyword
                • CCSID(*EXACT)
                • CCSID(*CHAR : *JOBRUN | *JOBRUNMIX | *UTF8 | *HEX | number)
                • CCSID(*GRAPH : *JOBRUN | *SRC | *HEX | *IGNORE | number)
                • CCSID(*UCS2 : *UTF16 | number)
              • CCSIDCVT(*EXCP | *LIST)
              • CHARCOUNT(*NATURAL | *STDCHARSIZE)
              • CHARCOUNTTYPES(*UTF8 *UTF16 *JOBRUN *MIXEDEBCDIC *MIXEDASCII)
              • COPYNEST(number)
              • COPYRIGHT('copyright string')
              • CURSYM('sym')
              • CVTOPT(*{NO}DATETIME *{NO}GRAPHIC *{NO}VARCHAR *{NO}VARGRAPHIC)
              • DATEDIT(fmt{separator})
              • DATFMT(fmt{separator})
              • DCLOPT(*NOCHGDSLEN)
              • DEBUG{(*DUMP | *INPUT | *RETVAL | *XMLSAX | *NO | *YES)}
              • DECEDIT(*JOBRUN | 'value')
              • DECPREC(30|31|63)
              • DFTACTGRP(*YES | *NO)
              • DFTNAME(rpg_name)
              • ENBPFRCOL(*PEP | *ENTRYEXIT | *FULL)
              • EXPROPTS(*MAXDIGITS | *RESDECPOS | *ALWBLANKNUM | *USEDECEDIT)
              • EXTBININT{(*NO | *YES)}
              • FIXNBR(*{NO}ZONED *{NO}INPUTPACKED)
              • FLTDIV{(*NO | *YES)}
              • FORMSALIGN{(*NO | *YES)}
              • FTRANS{(*NONE | *SRC)}
              • GENLVL(number)
              • INDENT(*NONE | 'character-value')
              • INTPREC(10 | 20)
              • LANGID(*JOBRUN | *JOB | 'language-identifier')
              • MAIN(main_procedure_name)
              • NOMAIN
              • OPENOPT (*{NO}INZOFL *{NO}CVTDATA)
              • OPTIMIZE(*NONE | *BASIC | *FULL)
              • OPTION(*{NO}XREF *{NO}GEN *{NO}SECLVL *{NO}SHOWCPY *{NO}EXPDDS *{NO}EXT *{NO}SHOWSKP) *{NO}SRCSTMT) *{NO}DEBUGIO) *{NO}UNREF
              • PGMINFO(*PCML | *NO | *DCLCASE { : *MODULE | *V6 | *V7 ... } )
                • Examples
              • PRFDTA(*NOCOL | *COL)
              • REQPREXP(*NO | *WARN | *REQUIRE)
              • SRTSEQ(*HEX | *JOB | *JOBRUN | *LANGIDUNQ | *LANGIDSHR | 'sort-table-name')
              • STGMDL(*INHERIT | *SNGLVL | *TERASPACE)
              • TEXT(*SRCMBRTXT | *BLANK | 'description')
              • THREAD(*CONCURRENT | *SERIALIZE)
                • THREAD(*CONCURRENT)
                • THREAD(*SERIALIZE)
                • General thread considerations
              • TIMFMT(fmt{separator})
              • TRUNCNBR(*YES | *NO)
              • USRPRF(*USER | *OWNER)
              • VALIDATE(*NODATETIME)
            • Control Specifications Help
            • Control Specifications
            • Control-Specification Keywords
            • Control-Specification Compile-Option Keywords
          • File Description Specifications
            • Free-Form File Definition Statement
              • Equivalent Free-form Coding for Fixed-Form File Entries
              • Device-type Keywords
              • Defining the File Usage in Free-Form
            • Traditional File Description Specification Statement
              • File-Description Keyword Continuation Line
              • Position 6 (Form Type)
              • Positions 7-16 (File Name)
                • Program-Described File
                • Externally-Described File
              • Position 17 (File Type)
                • Input Files
                • Output Files
                • Update Files
                • Combined Files
              • Position 18 (File Designation)
                • Primary File
                • Secondary File
                • Record Address File (RAF)
                • Array or Table File
                • Full Procedural File
              • Position 19 (End of File)
              • Position 20 (File Addition)
              • Position 21 (Sequence)
              • Position 22 (File Format)
              • Positions 23-27 (Record Length)
              • Position 28 (Limits Processing)
              • Positions 29-33 (Length of Key or Record Address)
              • Position 34 (Record Address Type)
                • Blank=Non-keyed Processing
                • A=Character Keys
                • P=Packed Keys
                • G=Graphic Keys
                • K=Key
                • D=Date Keys
                • T=Time Keys
                • Z=Timestamp Keys
                • F=Float Keys
              • Position 35 (File Organization)
                • Blank=Non-keyed Program-Described File
                • I=Indexed File
                • T=Record Address File
              • Positions 36-42 (Device)
                • File device types
              • Position 43 (Reserved)
              • Positions 44-80 (Keywords)
            • File-Description Keywords
              • ALIAS
              • BLOCK(*YES |*NO)
              • COMMIT{(rpg_name)}
              • CHARCOUNT(*NATURAL | *STDCHARSIZE)
              • DATA(*CVT | *NOCVT)
                • Examples of the DATA keyword
              • DATFMT(format{separator})
              • DEVID(fieldname)
              • DISK{(*EXT | record-length)}
              • EXTDESC(external-filename)
              • EXTFILE(filename | *EXTDESC)
              • EXTIND(*INUx)
              • EXTMBR(membername)
              • FORMLEN(number)
              • FORMOFL(number)
              • HANDLER(program-or-procedure { : communication-area)})
              • IGNORE(recformat{:recformat...})
              • INCLUDE(recformat{:recformat...})
              • INDDS(data_structure_name)
              • INFDS(DSname)
              • INFSR(SUBRname)
              • KEYED{(*CHAR : key-length)}
              • KEYLOC(number)
              • LIKEFILE(parent-filename)
                • Rules for the LIKEFILE keyword:
              • MAXDEV(*ONLY | *FILE)
              • OFLIND(indicator)
              • PASS(*NOIND)
              • PGMNAME(program_name)
              • PLIST(Plist_name)
              • PREFIX(prefix{:nbr_of_char_replaced})
              • PRINTER{(*EXT | record-length)}
              • PRTCTL(data_struct{:*COMPAT})
                • Extended Length PRTCTL Data Structure
                • *COMPAT PRTCTL Data Structure
              • QUALIFIED
                • Rules for the QUALIFIED keyword:
              • RAFDATA(filename)
              • RECNO(fieldname)
              • RENAME(Ext_format:Int_format)
              • SAVEDS(DSname)
              • SAVEIND(number)
              • SEQ{(*EXT | record-length)}
              • SFILE(recformat:rrnfield)
              • SLN(number)
              • SPECIAL{(*EXT | record-length)}
              • STATIC
                • Rules for the STATIC keyword:
              • TEMPLATE
                • Rules for the TEMPLATE keyword:
              • TIMFMT(format{separator})
              • USAGE(*INPUT *OUTPUT *UPDATE *DELETE)
              • USROPN
              • WORKSTN{(*EXT | record-length)}
            • File Types and Processing Methods
            • File Description Specifications Help
            • File Description Specifications Program-Described
            • Keywords Program Described
            • File Description Specifications Externally Described
            • Keywords Externally Described
            • File-Description Keywords
          • Definition Specifications
            • Free-Form Definition Statement
              • Data-type Keywords
              • Keyword differences between fixed form and free form definitions
              • Free-Form Named Constant Definition
              • Free-Form Standalone Field Definition
                • Equivalent Free-form Coding for Standalone Field Entries
              • Free-Form Data Structure Definition
                • Equivalent Free-form Coding for Data Structure Entries
              • Free-Form Subfield Definition
                • Equivalent Free-form Coding for Subfield Entries
              • Free-Form Prototype Definition
                • Equivalent Free-form Coding for Prototype Entries
              • Free-Form Procedure Interface Definition
                • Equivalent Free-form Coding for Procedure Interface Entries
              • Free-Form Parameter Definition
                • Equivalent Free-form Coding for Parameter Entries
            • Traditional Definition Specification Statement
              • Definition Specification Keyword Continuation Line
              • Definition Specification Continued Name Line
              • Position 6 (Form Type)
              • Positions 7-21 (Name)
              • Position 22 (External Description)
              • Position 23 (Type of Data Structure)
              • Positions 24-25 (Definition Type)
              • Positions 26-32 (From Position)
              • Positions 33-39 (To Position / Length)
              • Position 40 (Internal Data Type)
              • Positions 41-42 (Decimal Positions)
              • Position 43 (Reserved)
              • Positions 44-80 (Keywords)
            • Definition-Specification Keywords
              • ALIAS
              • ALIGN{(*FULL)}
              • ALT(array_name)
              • ALTSEQ(*NONE)
              • ASCEND
              • BASED(basing_pointer_name)
              • BINDEC(digits {: decimal-positions})
              • CCSID definition keyword
                • CCSID(*EXACT | *NOEXACT)
              • CHAR(length)
              • CLASS(*JAVA:class-name)
              • CONST{(constant)}
              • CTDATA
              • DATE{(format{separator})}
              • DATFMT(format{separator})
              • DESCEND
              • DIM({*AUTO:|*CTDATA|*VAR:}numeric_constant)
                • Varying-dimension arrays
              • DTAARA keyword
                • Free-form DTAARA keyword for a field or subfield
                • Free-form DTAARA keyword for a data structure
                • Fixed-form DTAARA keyword
              • EXPORT{(external_name)}
              • EXT
              • EXTFLD{(field_name)}
              • EXTFMT(code)
              • EXTNAME(file-name{:format-name}{:*ALL| *INPUT|*OUTPUT|*KEY|*NULL})
              • EXTPGM{(name)}
              • EXTPROC{({*CL|*CWIDEN|*CNOWIDEN|*JAVA:class-name:}name|*DCLCASE)}
                • Specifying *DCLCASE as the External Name
              • FLOAT(bytes)
              • FROMFILE(file_name)
              • GRAPH(length)
              • IMPORT{(external_name)}
              • INT(digits)
              • IND
              • INZ{(initial value)}
              • LEN(length)
                • Rules for the LEN keyword:
              • LIKE(name {: length-adjustment})
                • LIKE(object-name)
              • LIKEDS(data_structure_name)
              • LIKEFILE(filename)
                • Rules for the LIKEFILE keyword for prototyped parameters:
                  • Rules for passing and using file parameters
              • LIKEREC(intrecname{:extract-types})
              • NOOPT
              • NULLIND{(null-indicator)}
              • OBJECT{(*JAVA:class-name)}
              • OCCURS(numeric_constant)
              • OPDESC
              • OPTIONS(*NOPASS *OMIT *VARSIZE *EXACT *STRING *TRIM *RIGHTADJ *NULLIND *CONVERT)
              • OVERLAY(name{:start_pos | *NEXT})
              • OVERLOAD(prototype1 { : prototype2 ...})
              • PACKED(digits {: decimal-positions})
              • PACKEVEN
              • PERRCD(numeric_constant)
              • POINTER{(*PROC)}
              • POS(starting-position)
              • PREFIX(prefix{:nbr_of_char_replaced})
              • PROCPTR
              • PSDS
              • QUALIFIED
              • REQPROTO(*NO)
              • RTNPARM
              • SAMEPOS(subfield)
              • STATIC{(*ALLTHREAD)}
                • Additional Considerations for STATIC(*ALLTHREAD)
              • TEMPLATE
                • Rules for the TEMPLATE keyword for Definition specifications:
              • TIME{(format{separator})}
              • TIMESTAMP{(fractional-seconds)}
              • TIMFMT(format{separator})
              • TOFILE(file_name)
              • UCS2(length)
              • UNS(digits)
              • VALUE
              • VARCHAR(length {:2 | 4})
              • VARGRAPH(length {:2 | 4})
              • VARUCS2(length {:2 | 4})
              • VARYING{(2 | 4)}
              • ZONED(digits {: decimal-positions})
            • Summary According to Definition Specification Type
            • Definition Specification Help
            • Definition Specifications
            • Definition of Externally Described Data Structure
            • Externally Described Data Structure Keywords
            • Definition of Program-Described Data Structure
            • Program-Described Data Structure Keywords
            • Definition of Externally Described Data Structure Subfield
            • Externally Described Data Structure Subfield Keywords
            • Definition of Program-Described Data Structure Subfield
            • Program-Described Data Structure Subfield Keywords
            • Definition of Named Constant
            • Named Constant Keyword
            • Definition of Standalone Field
            • Standalone Field Keywords
            • Definition of Prototype or Procedure Interface
            • Prototype and Procedure Interface Keywords
            • Definition of Prototyped Parameter
            • Prototyped Parameter Keywords
            • Definition-Specification Keywords
          • Input Specifications
            • Input Specification Statement
              • Program Described
              • Externally Described
            • Program Described Files
              • Position 6 (Form Type)
            • Record Identification Entries
              • Positions 7-16 (File Name)
              • Positions 16-18 (Logical Relationship)
              • Positions 17-18 (Sequence)
                • Alphabetic Entries
                • Numeric Entries
              • Position 19 (Number)
              • Position 20 (Option)
              • Positions 21-22 (Record Identifying Indicator, or **)
                • Indicators
                • Lookahead Fields
              • Positions 23-46 (Record Identification Codes)
                • Positions 23-27, 31-35, and 39-43 (Position)
                • Positions 28, 36, and 44 (Not)
                • Positions 29, 37, and 45 (Code Part)
                  • Character (C)
                  • Zone (Z)
                  • Digit (D)
                • Positions 30, 38, and 46 (Character)
                • AND Relationship
                • OR Relationship
            • Field Description Entries
              • Position 6 (Form Type)
              • Positions 7-30 (Reserved)
              • Positions 31-34 (Data Attributes - External)
              • Position 35 (Date/Time Separator)
              • Position 36 (Data Format)
              • Positions 37-46 (Field Location)
              • Positions 47-48 (Decimal Positions)
              • Positions 49-62 (Field Name)
              • Positions 63-64 (Control Level)
              • Positions 65-66 (Matching Fields)
              • Positions 67-68 (Field Record Relation)
              • Positions 69-74 (Field Indicators - Program Described)
            • Externally Described Files
              • Position 6 (Form Type)
            • Record Identification Entries
              • Positions 7-16 (Record Name)
              • Positions 17-20 (Reserved)
              • Positions 21-22 (Record Identifying Indicator)
              • Positions 23-80 (Reserved)
            • Field Description Entries
              • Positions 7-20 (Reserved)
              • Positions 21-30 (External Field Name)
              • Positions 31-48 (Reserved)
              • Positions 49-62 (Field Name)
              • Positions 63-64 (Control Level)
              • Positions 65-66 (Matching Fields)
              • Positions 67-68 (Reserved)
              • Positions 69-74 (Field Indicators - Externally Described)
              • Positions 75-80 (Reserved)
            • Input Specifications Help
            • Input Specifications Record Layout
            • Input Specifications Field Layout
            • Input Specification Logical Relationship
          • Calculation Specifications
            • Traditional Syntax
              • Calculation Specification Extended Factor-2 Continuation Line
              • Position 6 (Form Type)
              • Positions 7-8 (Control Level)
                • Control Level Indicators
                • Last Record Indicator
                • Subroutine Identifier
                • AND/OR Lines Identifier
              • Positions 9-11 (Indicators)
              • Positions 12-25 (Factor 1)
              • Positions 26-35 (Operation and Extender)
                • Operation Extender
              • Positions 36-49 (Factor 2)
              • Positions 50-63 (Result Field)
              • Positions 64-68 (Field Length)
              • Positions 69-70 (Decimal Positions)
              • Positions 71-76 (Resulting Indicators)
            • Extended Factor 2 Syntax
              • Positions 7-8 (Control Level)
              • Positions 9-11 (Indicators)
              • Positions 12-25 (Factor 1)
              • Positions 26-35 (Operation and Extender)
                • Operation Extender
              • Positions 36-80 (Extended Factor 2)
            • Free-Form Calculation Statement
              • Free-form Operations
          • Output Specifications
            • Output Specification Statement
              • Program Described
              • Externally Described
            • Program Described Files
              • Position 6 (Form Type)
            • Record Identification and Control Entries
              • Positions 7-16 (File Name)
              • Positions 16-18 (Program-described Logical Relationship)
              • Position 17 (Type – Program-Described File)
              • Positions 18-20 (Record Addition/Deletion)
              • Position 18 (Fetch Overflow/Release)
                • Fetch Overflow
                • Release
              • Positions 21-29 (File Record ID Indicators)
              • Positions 30-39 (EXCEPT Name)
              • Positions 40-51 (Space and Skip)
              • Positions 40-42 (Space Before)
              • Positions 43-45 (Space After)
              • Positions 46-48 (Skip Before)
              • Positions 49-51 (Skip After)
            • Field Description and Control Entries
              • Positions 7-20 (Reserved)
              • Positions 21-29 (File Field Description Indicators)
              • Positions 30-43 (Field Name)
                • Field Names, Blanks, Tables and Arrays
                • PAGE, PAGE1-PAGE7
                • *PLACE
                • User Date Reserved Words
                • *IN, *INxx, *IN(xx)
              • Position 44 (Edit Codes)
              • Edit Code Summary
              • Position 45 (Blank After)
              • Positions 47-51 (End Position)
              • Position 52 (Data Format)
              • Positions 53-80 (Constant, Edit Word, Data Attributes, Format Name)
                • Constants
                • Edit Words
                • Data Attributes
                • Record Format Name
            • Externally Described Files
              • Position 6 (Form Type)
            • Record Identification and Control Entries
              • Positions 7-16 (Record Name)
              • Positions 16-18 (External Logical Relationship)
              • Position 17 (Type – Externally Described File)
              • Position 18 (Release)
              • Positions 18-20 (Record Addition)
              • Positions 21-29 (External File Record ID Indicators)
              • Positions 30-39 (EXCEPT Name)
            • Field Description and Control Entries
              • Positions 21-29 (External Field Description Indicators)
              • Positions 30-43 (Field Name)
              • Position 45 (Blank After)
            • Output Specifications Help
            • Output Specification Record Layout
            • Output Specification Field Layout
            • Output Logical Relationship
          • Procedure Specifications
            • Free-Form Procedure Statement
            • Traditional Procedure Specification Statement
              • Procedure Specification Keyword Continuation Line
              • Procedure Specification Continued Name Line
              • Position 6 (Form Type)
              • Positions 7-21 (Name)
              • Position 24 (Begin/End Procedure)
              • Positions 44-80 (Keywords)
            • Procedure-Specification Keywords
              • EXPORT
              • PGMINFO(*YES | *NO)
              • REQPROTO(*NO)
              • SERIALIZE
            • Procedure Specification Help
            • Procedure Specifications
            • Procedure-Specification Keywords
        • Operations, Expressions, and Functions
          • Operations
            • Operation Codes
            • Built-in Functions
            • Arithmetic Operations
              • Ensuring Accuracy
              • Performance Considerations
              • Integer and Unsigned Arithmetic
              • Arithmetic Operations Examples
            • Array Operations
            • Bit Operations
            • Branching Operations
            • Call Operations
              • Prototyped Calls
              • Operational Descriptors
              • Parsing Program Names on a Call
                • Program CALL Example
              • Parsing System Built-In Names
              • Value of *ROUTINE
            • Compare Operations
            • Conversion Operations
            • Rules for converting character values to numeric values using built-in functions
            • Data-Area Operations
            • Date Operations
              • Unexpected Results
            • Declarative Operations
            • Error-Handling Operations
            • File Operations
              • Keys for File Operations
            • Indicator-Setting Operations
            • Information Operations
            • Initialization Operations
            • Memory Management Operations
            • Message Operation
            • Move Operations
              • Moving Character, Graphic, UCS-2, and Numeric Data
              • Moving Date-Time Data
                • Examples of Converting a Character Field to a Date Field
            • Move Zone Operations
            • Result Operations
            • Size Operations
            • String Operations
            • Structured Programming Operations
            • Subroutine Operations
              • Coding Subroutines
                • Subroutine Coding Examples
            • Test Operations
            • XML Operations
            • Operation Codes
          • Expressions
            • General Expression Rules
            • Expression Operands
            • Expression Operators
              • IN operator
            • Operation Precedence
            • Data Types
              • Data Types Supported by Expression Operands
              • Format of Numeric Intermediate Results
                • For the operators +, -, and *:
                • For the / operator:
                • For the ** operator:
            • Precision Rules for Numeric Operations
              • Using the Default Precision Rules
              • Precision of Intermediate Results
              • Example of Default Precision Rules
              • Using the "Result Decimal Position" Precision Rules
              • Example of "Result Decimal Position" Precision Rules
            • Short Circuit Evaluation
            • Order of Evaluation
          • Built-in Functions
            • %ABS (Absolute Value of Expression)
            • %ADDR (Get Address of Variable)
            • %ALLOC (Allocate Storage)
            • %BITAND (Bitwise AND Operation)
            • %BITNOT (Invert Bits)
            • %BITOR (Bitwise OR Operation)
            • %BITXOR (Bitwise Exclusive-OR Operation)
              • Examples of Bit Operations
            • %CHAR (Convert to Character Data)
              • %CHAR(date|time|timestamp {: format})
              • %CHAR(numeric)
              • %CHAR(character | graphic | UCS2 {: ccsid})
            • %CHARCOUNT (Return the Number of Characters)
            • %CHECK (Check Characters)
            • %CHECKR (Check Reverse)
            • %CONCAT (Concatenate with Separator)
            • %CONCATARR (Concatenate Array Elements with Separator)
            • %DATA (document {:options})
            • %DATE (Convert to Date)
            • %DAYS (Number of Days)
            • %DEC (Convert to Packed Decimal Format)
              • Numeric or character expression
              • Date, time or timestamp expression
            • %DECH (Convert to Packed Decimal Format with Half Adjust)
              • %DECH Examples
            • %DECPOS (Get Number of Decimal Positions)
            • %DIFF (Difference Between Two Date, Time, or Timestamp Values)
            • %DIV (Return Integer Portion of Quotient)
            • %EDITC (Edit Value Using an Editcode)
            • %EDITFLT (Convert to Float External Representation)
            • %EDITW (Edit Value Using an Editword)
            • %ELEM (Get Number of Elements)
            • %EOF (Return End or Beginning of File Condition)
            • %EQUAL (Return Exact Match Condition)
            • %ERROR (Return Error Condition)
            • %FIELDS
              • %FIELDS (Fields to update)
              • %FIELDS (Subfields for sorting)
            • %FLOAT (Convert to Floating Format)
            • %FOUND (Return Found Condition)
            • %GEN (generator {: options})
            • %GRAPH (Convert to Graphic Value)
            • %HANDLER (handlingProcedure : communicationArea )
            • %HOURS (Number of Hours)
            • %INT (Convert to Integer Format)
              • %INTH (Convert to Integer Format with Half Adjust)
            • %KDS (Search Arguments in Data Structure)
            • %LEN (Get or Set Length)
              • %LEN Used for its Value
              • %LEN Used to Set the Length of Variable-Length Fields
              • %LEN Used to Get the Maximum Length of Varying-Length Expressions
            • %LIST (item { : item { : item ... } } )
            • %LOOKUPxx (Look Up an Array Element)
              • Sequenced arrays that are not in the correct sequence
            • %LOWER (Convert to Lower Case)
            • %LOWER and %UPPER (Convert to Lower or Upper Case)
            • %MAX (Maximum Value)
            • %MAXARR (Maximum Element in an Array)
            • %MIN (Minimum Value)
            • %MINARR (Minimum Element in an Array)
            • %MAX and %MIN (Maximum or Minimum Value)
            • %MAXARR and %MINARR (Maximum or Minimum Element in an Array)
            • Determining the Common Type of Multiple Operands
            • %MINUTES (Number of Minutes)
            • %MONTHS (Number of Months)
            • %MSECONDS (Number of Microseconds)
            • %MSG (message-id : message-file { : replacement-text } )
            • %NULLIND (Query or Set Null Indicator)
            • %OCCUR (Set/Get Occurrence of a Data Structure)
            • %OPEN (Return File Open Condition)
            • %PADDR (Get Procedure Address)
              • %PADDR Used with a Prototype
            • %PARMS (Return Number of Parameters)
            • %PARMNUM (Return Parameter Number)
            • %PARSER (parser {: options})
            • %PROC (Return Name of Current Procedure)
            • %RANGE (lower-limit : upper-limit)
            • %REALLOC (Reallocate Storage)
            • %REM (Return Integer Remainder)
            • %REPLACE (Replace Character String)
            • %SCAN (Scan for Characters)
            • %SCANR (Scan Reverse for Characters)
            • %SCANRPL (Scan and Replace Characters)
            • %SECONDS (Number of Seconds)
            • %SHTDN (Shut Down)
            • %SIZE (Get Size in Bytes)
            • %SPLIT (Split String into Substrings)
            • %SQRT (Square Root of Expression)
            • %STATUS (Return File or Program Status)
            • %STR (Get or Store Null-Terminated String)
              • %STR Used to Get Null-Terminated String
              • %STR Used to Store Null-Terminated String
            • %SUBARR (Set/Get Portion of an Array)
            • %SUBDT (Extract a Portion of a Date, Time, or Timestamp)
            • %SUBST (Get Substring)
              • %SUBST Used for its Value
              • %SUBST Used as the Result of an Assignment
            • %TARGET (program-or-procedure { : offset } )
            • %THIS (Return Class Instance for Native Method)
            • %TIME (Convert to Time)
            • %TIMESTAMP (Convert to Timestamp)
            • %TLOOKUPxx (Look Up a Table Element)
            • %TRIM (Trim Characters at Edges)
            • %TRIML (Trim Leading Characters)
            • %TRIMR (Trim Trailing Characters)
            • %UCS2 (Convert to UCS-2 Value)
            • %UNS (Convert to Unsigned Format)
              • %UNSH (Convert to Unsigned Format with Half Adjust)
            • %UPPER (Convert to Upper Case)
            • %XFOOT (Sum Array Expression Elements)
            • %XLATE (Translate)
            • %XML (xmlDocument {:options})
            • %YEARS (Number of Years)
          • Operation Codes
            • ACQ (Acquire)
            • ADD (Add)
            • ADDDUR (Add Duration)
            • ALLOC (Allocate Storage)
            • ANDxx (And)
            • BEGSR (Beginning of Subroutine)
            • BITOFF (Set Bits Off)
            • BITON (Set Bits On)
            • CABxx (Compare and Branch)
            • CALL (Call a Program)
            • CALLB (Call a Bound Procedure)
            • CALLP (Call a Prototyped Procedure or Program)
            • CASxx (Conditionally Invoke Subroutine)
            • CAT (Concatenate Two Strings)
            • CHAIN (Random Retrieval from a File)
            • CHECK (Check Characters)
            • CHECKR (Check Reverse)
            • CLEAR (Clear)
              • Clearing Variables
              • Clearing Record Formats
              • CLEAR Examples
            • CLOSE (Close Files)
            • COMMIT (Commit)
            • COMP (Compare)
            • DATA-GEN (Generate a Document from a Variable)
              • %DATA options for the DATA-GEN operation code
              • Examples of DATA-GEN generators
            • DATA-INTO (Parse a Document into a Variable)
              • %DATA options for the DATA-INTO operation code
              • Expected format of data for DATA-INTO
              • Examples of DATA-INTO parsers
            • DEALLOC (Free Storage)
            • DEFINE (Field Definition)
              • *LIKE DEFINE
              • *DTAARA DEFINE
            • DELETE (Delete Record)
            • DIV (Divide)
            • DO (Do)
            • DOU (Do Until)
            • DOUxx (Do Until)
            • DOW (Do While)
            • DOWxx (Do While)
            • DSPLY (Display Message)
            • DUMP (Program Dump)
            • ELSE (Else)
            • ELSEIF (Else If)
            • ENDyy (End a Structured Group)
            • ENDSR (End of Subroutine)
            • EVAL (Evaluate expression)
            • EVALR (Evaluate expression, right adjust)
            • EVAL-CORR (Assign corresponding subfields)
              • Examples of the EVAL-CORR operation
            • EXCEPT (Calculation Time Output)
            • EXFMT (Write/Then Read Format)
            • EXSR (Invoke Subroutine)
            • EXTRCT (Extract Date/Time/Timestamp)
            • FEOD (Force End of Data)
            • FOR (For)
            • FOR-EACH (For Each)
            • FORCE (Force a Certain File to Be Read Next Cycle)
            • GOTO (Go To)
            • IF (If)
            • IFxx (If)
            • IN (Retrieve a Data Area)
            • ITER (Iterate)
            • KFLD (Define Parts of a Key)
            • KLIST (Define a Composite Key)
            • LEAVE (Leave a Do/For Group)
            • LEAVESR (Leave a Subroutine)
            • LOOKUP (Look Up a Table or Array Element)
            • MHHZO (Move High to High Zone)
            • MHLZO (Move High to Low Zone)
            • MLHZO (Move Low to High Zone)
            • MLLZO (Move Low to Low Zone)
            • MONITOR (Begin a Monitor Group)
            • MOVE (Move)
            • MOVEA (Move Array)
              • Character, graphic, and UCS-2 MOVEA Operations
              • Numeric MOVEA Operations
              • General MOVEA Operations
            • MOVEL (Move Left)
            • MULT (Multiply)
            • MVR (Move Remainder)
            • NEXT (Next)
            • OCCUR (Set/Get Occurrence of a Data Structure)
            • ON-ERROR (On Error)
            • ON-EXCP (On Exception)
            • ON-EXIT (On Exit)
            • OPEN (Open File for Processing)
            • ORxx (Or)
            • OTHER (Otherwise Select)
            • OUT (Write a Data Area)
            • PARM (Identify Parameters)
            • PLIST (Identify a Parameter List)
            • POST (Post)
            • READ (Read a Record)
            • READC (Read Next Changed Record)
            • READE (Read Equal Key)
            • READP (Read Prior Record)
            • READPE (Read Prior Equal)
            • REALLOC (Reallocate Storage with New Length)
            • REL (Release)
            • RESET (Reset)
              • Resetting Variables
              • Resetting Record Formats
              • Additional Considerations
              • RESET Examples
            • RETURN (Return to Caller)
            • ROLBK (Roll Back)
            • SCAN (Scan String)
            • SELECT (Begin a Select Group)
            • SETGT (Set Greater Than)
            • SETLL (Set Lower Limit)
            • SETOFF (Set Indicator Off)
            • SETON (Set Indicator On)
            • SHTDN (Shut Down)
            • SND-MSG (Send a Message to the Joblog)
            • SORTA (Sort an Array)
            • SQRT (Square Root)
            • SUB (Subtract)
            • SUBDUR (Subtract Duration)
              • Subtract a duration
              • Calculate a duration
              • Possible error situations
              • SUBDUR Examples
            • SUBST (Substring)
            • TAG (Tag)
            • TEST (Test Date/Time/Timestamp)
            • TESTB (Test Bit)
            • TESTN (Test Numeric)
            • TESTZ (Test Zone)
            • TIME (Retrieve Time and Date)
            • UNLOCK (Unlock a Data Area or Release a Record)
              • Unlocking data areas
              • Releasing record locks
            • UPDATE (Modify Existing Record)
            • WHEN (When True Then Select)
            • WHENxx (When True Then Select)
            • WRITE (Create New Records)
            • XFOOT (Summing the Elements of an Array)
            • XLATE (Translate)
            • XML-INTO (Parse an XML Document into a Variable)
              • Expected format of XML data
              • Rules for transferring data to RPG variables for XML-INTO and DATA-INTO
              • Examples of the XML-INTO operation
              • %DATA and %XML options for DATA-GEN, DATA-INTO, and XML-INTO
                • allowextra (default no)
                  • Examples of the allowextra option with extra elements for a subfield array
                  • Examples of the allowextra option with XML data not corresponding to RPG subfields
                  • Examples of the allowextra option with unexpected non-text content for a scalar variable or subfield
                • allowmissing (default no)
                  • Examples of the allowmissing option with insufficient data for subfield arrays
                  • Examples of the allowmissing option with insufficient data for all subfields
                • case (default lower)
                  • Examples of the case option with values upper, lower and any
                  • Examples of the case=convert option
                • ccsid (default best)
                • countprefix
                  • Examples of the countprefix option
                • datasubf
                  • Examples of the datasubf option
                • doc (default string)
                  • Examples of the doc option
                • fileccsid (default utf8)
                • name (no default)
                • ns (default keep)
                  • Examples of the ns option
                • nsprefix
                  • Example of the nsprefix option
                • output (the default depends on the context)
                • path
                  • Examples of the path option with non-array variables
                  • Examples of the path option with array variables
                • renameprefix
                  • Examples of the renameprefix option
                • trim (default all)
                  • Examples of the trim option
            • XML-SAX (Parse an XML Document)
              • %XML options for the XML-SAX operation code
              • XML-SAX event-handling procedure
              • XML events
              • Examples of the XML-SAX operation
            • Z-ADD (Zero and Add)
            • Z-SUB (Zero and Subtract)
            • Operation Codes
            • Operation Codes
            • Extended-Factor 2 Operation Codes
          • The Structured Query Language
            • Db2 UDB for iSeries Syntax
            • Client Help
            • Positions 81-100 (Comments)
            • Reserved
            • Prompt window
            • Push buttons
            • Push buttons
            • Full Line
            • Status Line
        • Appendixes
          • Appendix A. RPG IV Restrictions
          • Appendix B. EBCDIC Collating Sequence
        • Bibliography
      • ILE RPG Programmer's Guide
        • PDF file for ILE RPG Programmer's Guide
        • About ILE RPG Programmer's Guide
          • Who Should Use This Guide
          • Prerequisite and Related Information
          • How to Send Your Comments
        • What's New
          • What's New since 7.4?
          • What's New in 7.4?
          • What's New in 7.3?
          • What's New in 7.2?
          • What's New in 7.1?
          • What's New in 6.1?
          • What's New in V5R4?
          • What's New in V5R3?
          • What's New in V5R2?
          • What's New in V5R1?
          • What's New in V4R4?
          • What's New in V4R2?
          • What's New in V3R7?
          • What's New in V3R6/V3R2?
        • ILE RPG Introduction
          • Overview of the RPG IV Programming Language
            • RPG IV Specifications
            • Cycle Programming
              • Subprocedure logic
            • Indicators
            • Operation Codes
            • Example of an ILE RPG Program
            • Using IBM i
              • Interacting with the System
            • Rational Development Studio for i
          • RPG Programming in ILE
            • Program Creation
            • Program Management
            • Program Call
            • Source Debugging
            • Bindable APIs
            • Multithreaded Applications
          • Program Creation Strategies
            • Strategy 1: OPM-Compatible Application
              • Method
              • Example of OPM-Compatible Program
                • Effect of ILE
              • Related Information
            • Strategy 2: ILE Program Using CRTBNDRPG
              • Method
              • Example of ILE Program Using CRTBNDRPG
                • Effect of ILE
              • Related Information
            • Strategy 3: ILE Application Using CRTRPGMOD
              • Method
              • Single-Language ILE Application Scenario
              • Mixed-Language ILE Application Scenario
              • Advanced Application Scenario
              • Related Information
            • A Strategy to Avoid
          • Creating an Application Using Multiple Procedures
            • A Multiple Procedures Module — Overview
              • Main Procedures and Subprocedures
              • Prototyped Calls
            • Example of Module with Multiple Procedures
              • The Entire ARRSRPT Program
            • Coding Considerations
              • General Considerations
              • Program Creation
              • Main Procedure Considerations
              • Subprocedure Considerations
            • For Further Information
              • Main Procedures
              • Subprocedures
              • Prototyped Call
        • Creating and Running an ILE RPG Application
          • Using Source Files
            • Using Source Physical Files
              • Creating a Library and Source Physical File
              • Using the Source Entry Utility (SEU)
              • Using SQL Statements
            • Using IFS Source Files
              • Include files
                • Search Path Within The IFS
          • Creating a Program with the CRTBNDRPG Command
            • Using the CRTBNDRPG Command
              • Creating a Program for Source Debugging
              • Creating a Program with Static Binding
              • Creating an OPM-Compatible Program Object
            • Using a Compiler Listing
              • Obtaining a Compiler Listing
              • Customizing a Compiler Listing
                • Customizing a Page Heading
                • Customizing the Spacing
                • Indenting Structured Operations
              • Correcting Compilation Errors
                • Using In-Line Diagnostic Messages
                • Using Additional-Diagnostic Messages
                • Browsing a Compiler Listing Using SEU
              • Correcting Run-time Errors
                • Coordinating Listing Options with Debug View Options
              • Using a Compiler Listing for Maintenance
            • Accessing the RETURNCODE Data Area
          • Creating a Program with the CRTRPGMOD and CRTPGM Commands
            • Creating a Module Object
              • Using the CRTRPGMOD Command
                • Creating a NOMAIN Module
              • Creating a Module for Source Debugging
              • Additional Examples
              • Behavior of Bound ILE RPG Modules
              • Related CL Commands
            • Binding Modules into a Program
              • Using the CRTPGM Command
                • Binding Multiple Modules
              • Additional Examples
              • Related CL Commands
            • Using a Binder Listing
            • Changing a Module or Program
              • Using the UPDPGM Command
              • Changing the Optimization Level
              • Removing Observability
              • Reducing an Object's Size
          • Creating a Service Program
            • Service Program Overview
            • Strategies for Creating Service Programs
            • Creating a Service Program Using CRTSRVPGM
              • Changing A Service Program
              • Related CL commands
            • Sample Service Program
              • Creating the Service Program
              • Binding to a Program
              • Updating the Service Program
              • Sample Binder Listing
          • Running a Program
            • Running a Program Using the CL CALL Command
              • Passing Parameters using the CL CALL Command
            • Running a Program From a Menu-Driven Application
            • Running a Program Using a User-Created Command
            • Replying to Run-Time Inquiry Messages
            • Ending an ILE Program
            • Managing Activation Groups
              • Specifying an Activation Group
              • Running in the OPM Default Activation Group
              • Maintaining OPM RPG/400 and ILE RPG Program Compatibility
              • Deleting an Activation Group
              • Reclaim Resources Command
            • Managing Dynamically-Allocated Storage
              • Managing the Default Heap Using RPG Operations
              • Heap Storage Problems
              • Managing Your Own Heap Using ILE Bindable APIs
          • Calling Programs and Procedures
            • Program/Procedure Call Overview
              • Calling Programs
              • Calling Procedures
              • The Call Stack
              • Recursive Calls
              • Parameter-Passing Considerations
            • Using a Prototyped Call
              • Using the CALLP Operation
              • Calling within an Expression
              • Examples of Free-Form Call
            • Passing Prototyped Parameters
              • Parameter Passing Styles
                • Passing by Reference
                • Passing by Value
                • Passing by Read-Only Reference
                • Advantages of passing by value or read-only reference
                • Choosing between parameter passing styles
              • Using Operational Descriptors
              • Omitting Parameters
                • Passing *OMIT
                • Leaving Out Parameters
              • Checking for the Number of Passed Parameters
                • Using %PARMS
              • Passing Less Data Than Required
              • Passing File Parameters
              • Order of Evaluation
              • Interlanguage Calls
            • Interlanguage Calling Considerations
            • Using the Fixed-Form Call Operations
              • Examples of CALL and CALLB
              • Passing Parameters Using PARM and PLIST
                • Using the PARM operation
                • Using the PLIST Operation
            • Returning from a Called Program or Procedure
              • Returning from a Main Procedure
                • Normal End for a Cycle-Main Procedure
                • Abnormal End for a Cycle-Main Procedure
                • Returning without Ending for a Cycle-Main Procedure
              • Returning from a Subprocedure
              • Returning using ILE Bindable APIs
            • Using Bindable APIs
              • Examples of Using Bindable APIs
            • Calling a Graphics Routine
            • Calling Special Routines
            • Storage Model
              • Considerations for the single-level storage model
              • Considerations for the teraspace storage model
              • Considerations for the inherit storage model
              • Recommendations for the storage model of programs and service programs
            • Multithreading Considerations
              • Running Concurrently in Multiple Threads
              • Running Serialized in Multiple Threads
              • Activation Group Considerations for the THREAD keyword
              • Storage that is Shared Among Multiple Threads
              • How to Avoid Deadlock Between Modules
              • All-Thread Static Variables
              • When to use a serialized procedure
              • When a serialized procedure does not provide sufficient protection
              • Difficulty of manually synchronizing access to shared resources
              • Using thread-related APIs
                • How to build the examples
                • How to run the examples
          • RPG and the eBusiness World
            • RPG and XML
              • Processing XML Documents
                • XML Parser Error Codes
                • Limitations of the XML Parser
            • RPG and other data formats such as JSON
            • RPG and MQSeries
            • RPG and Java
              • Introduction to Java and RPG
                • The Object Data Type and CLASS Keyword
                • Prototyping Java Methods
                  • Java and RPG Definitions and Data Types
                  • Examples of Prototyping Java Methods
                    • Example 1
                    • Example 2
                    • Example 3
                    • Example 4
              • Calling Java Methods from ILE RPG
                • Creating Objects
              • Calling methods in your own classes
              • Controlling how the Java Virtual Machine is set up
              • RPG Native Methods
                • Getting the Instance Parameter in Non-Static Native Methods
                • Passing Character Parameters from Java to Native Methods
                  • Using String Objects in RPG
              • Coding Errors when calling Java from RPG
                • Incorrectly specifying the method parameters in the RPG prototype
                • Failure to free Java resources
                • Using objects that no longer exist
              • Additional RPG Coding for Using Java
                • Telling Java to free several objects at once
                • Telling Java you are finished with a temporary object
                • Telling Java you want an object to be permanent
                • Telling Java you are finished with a permanent object
                • Creating the Java Virtual Machine (JVM)
                • Obtaining the JNI environment pointer
                • Handling JNI Exceptions
              • Additional Considerations
                • Common Runtime Errors
                • Debugging Hints
                • Creating String objects in RPG
                • Getting information about exceptions thrown by called Java methods
              • Advanced JNI Coding
                • Setting an Object Reference in the jvalue Structure
                • Converting Java Character Data
                • Accessing Fields in Java Classes
                • Calling Java Methods Using the JNI Rather than RPG *JAVA Prototypes
              • Calling RPG programs from Java using PCML
                • PCML Restrictions
        • Debugging and Exception Handling
          • Debugging Programs
            • The ILE Source
              • Debug Commands
            • Preparing a Program for Debugging
              • Creating a Root Source View
              • Creating a COPY Source View
              • Creating a Listing View
              • Creating a Statement View
            • Starting the ILE Source
              • STRDBG Example
              • Setting Debug Options
            • Adding/Removing Programs from a Debug Session
              • Example of Adding a Service Program to a Debug Session
              • Example of Removing ILE Programs from a Debug Session
            • Viewing the Program Source
              • Viewing a Different Module
              • Changing the View of a Module
            • Setting and Removing Breakpoints
              • Setting and Removing Unconditional Job Breakpoints
                • Example of Setting an Unconditional Job Breakpoint
              • Setting and Removing Unconditional Thread Breakpoints
              • Setting and Removing Conditional Job Breakpoints
                • Example of Setting a Conditional Job Breakpoint Using F13
                • Example of Setting a Conditional Job Breakpoint Using the BREAK Command
              • National Language Sort Sequence (NLSS)
              • Setting and Removing Job Breakpoints Using Statement Numbers
              • Setting and Removing Conditional Thread Breakpoints
                • Using the Work with Module Breakpoints Display
                • Using the TBREAK or CLEAR Debug Commands
              • Removing All Job and Thread Breakpoints
            • Setting and Removing Watch Conditions
              • Characteristics of Watches
              • Setting Watch Conditions
                • Using the WATCH Command
              • Displaying Active Watches
              • Removing Watch Conditions
            • Example of Setting a Watch Condition
            • Stepping Through the Program Object
              • Stepping Over Call Statements
              • Stepping Into Call Statements
                • Example of Stepping Into an OPM Program Using F22
                • Example of Stepping Into a Subprocedure
            • Displaying Data and Expressions
              • Special names for debugging
              • Unexpected Results when Evaluating Variables
              • Displaying the Contents of an Array
              • Displaying the Contents of a Table
              • Displaying Data Structures
              • Displaying Indicators
              • Displaying Fields as Hexadecimal Values
              • Displaying Fields in Character Format
              • Displaying UCS-2 Data
              • Displaying Variable-Length Fields
              • Displaying Data Addressed by Pointers
              • Evaluating Based Variables
              • Displaying Null-Capable Fields
              • Displaying the Return Value from a Procedure
              • Using Debug Built-In Functions
              • Debugging an XML-SAX Handling Procedure
            • Changing the Value of Fields
            • Displaying Attributes of a Field
            • Equating a Name with a Field, Expression, or Command
            • Source Debug National Language Support for ILE RPG
            • Sample Source for Debug Examples
          • Handling Exceptions
            • Exception Handling Overview
              • ILE RPG Exception Handling
                • Exception Handling within a Cycle-Main Procedure
                • Exception Handling within Subprocedures
                • Differences between OPM and ILE RPG Exception Handling
            • Using Exception Handlers
              • Exception Handler Priority
              • Nested Exceptions
              • Unhandled Exceptions
                • Example of Unhandled Escape Message
                • Example of Unhandled Function Check
              • Optimization Considerations
            • Using RPG-Specific Handlers
              • Specifying Error Indicators or the 'E' Operation Code Extender
              • Using a MONITOR Group
              • Using an Error Subroutine
                • Using a File Error (INFSR) Subroutine
                • Using a Program Error Subroutine
                • Avoiding a Loop in an Error Subroutine
              • Specifying a Return Point in the ENDSR Operation
            • ILE Condition Handlers
              • Using a Condition Handler
            • Using Cancel Handlers
            • Problems when ILE CL Monitors for Notify and Status Messages
          • Obtaining a Dump
            • Obtaining an ILE RPG Formatted Dump
            • Using the DUMP Operation Code
            • Example of a Formatted Dump
        • Working with Files and Devices
          • Defining Files
            • Associating Files with Input/Output Devices
            • Naming Files
            • Types of File Descriptions
              • Using Files with External-Description as Program-Described
              • Example of Some Typical Relationships between Programs and Files
            • Defining Externally Described Files
              • Renaming Record-Format Names
              • Renaming Field Names
              • Ignoring Record Formats
              • Using Input Specifications to Modify an External Description
              • Using Output Specifications
              • Level Checking
            • Defining Program-Described Files
            • Data Management Operations and ILE RPG I/O Operations
          • General File Considerations
            • Overriding and Redirecting File Input and Output
              • Example of Redirecting File Input and Output
            • File Locking
            • Record Locking
            • Sharing an Open Data Path
            • Spooling
              • Output Spooling
            • SRTSEQ/ALTSEQ in an RPG Program versus a DDS File
          • Accessing Database Files
            • Database Files
              • Physical Files and Logical Files
              • Data Files and Source Files
            • Using Externally Described Disk Files
              • Record Format Specifications
              • Access Path
              • Valid Keys for a Record or File
                • Valid Search Arguments
                • Referring to a Partial Key
              • Record Blocking and Unblocking
            • Using Program-Described Disk Files
              • Indexed File
                • Valid Search Arguments
              • Sequential File
              • Record Address File
                • Limits Records
                • Relative Record Numbers
            • Methods for Processing Disk Files
              • Consecutive Processing
              • Sequential-by-Key Processing
                • Examples of Sequential-by-Key Processing
                  • DATA DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS (DDS)
                  • EXAMPLE PROGRAM 1 (Sequential-by-Key Using Primary File)
                  • EXAMPLE PROGRAM 2 (Sequential-by-Key Using READ)
                  • EXAMPLE PROGRAM 3 (Matching-Record Technique)
              • Random-by-Key Processing
                • Example of Random-by-Key Processing
                  • EXAMPLE PROGRAM
              • Sequential-within-Limits Processing
                • Examples of Sequential-within-Limits Processing
                  • EXAMPLE PROGRAM 1 (Sequential-within-Limits Processing)
                  • EXAMPLE PROGRAM 2 (Sequential-within-Limits Processing)
              • Relative-Record-Number Processing
            • Valid File Operations
            • Using Commitment Control
              • Starting and Ending Commitment Control
                • Commitment Control Locks
                • Commitment Control Scoping
              • Specifying Files for Commitment Control
              • Using the COMMIT Operation
                • Example of Using Commitment Control
              • Specifying Conditional Commitment Control
              • Commitment Control in the Program Cycle
            • Unexpected Results Using Keyed Files
            • DDM Files
              • Using Pre-V3R1 DDM Files
          • Accessing Externally Attached Devices
            • Types of Device Files
            • Accessing Printer Devices
              • Specifying PRINTER Files
              • Handling Page Overflow
                • Using Overflow Indicators in Program-Described Files
                • Example of Printing Headings on Every Page
                • Example of Printing a Field on Every Page
              • Using the Fetch-Overflow Routine in Program-Described Files
                • Specifying Fetch Overflow
                • Example of Specifying Fetch Overflow
              • Changing Forms Control Information in a Program-Described File
                • Example of Changing Forms Control Information
            • Accessing Tape Devices
            • Accessing Display Devices
            • Using Sequential Files
              • Specifying a Sequential File
                • Example of Specifying a Sequential File
            • Using SPECIAL Files
              • Example of Using a Special File
          • Using WORKSTN Files
            • Intersystem Communications Function
            • Using Externally Described WORKSTN Files
              • Specifying Function Key Indicators on Display Device Files
              • Specifying Command Keys on Display Device Files
              • Processing an Externally Described WORKSTN File
              • Using Subfiles
                • Use of Subfiles
            • Using Program-Described WORKSTN Files
              • Using a Program-Described WORKSTN File with a Format Name
                • Output Specifications
                • Input Specifications
                • Calculation Specifications
                • Additional Considerations
              • Using a Program-Described WORKSTN File without a Format Name
                • Input File
                • Output File
                • Combined File
            • Valid WORKSTN File Operations
              • EXFMT Operation
              • READ Operation
              • WRITE Operation
            • Multiple-Device Files
          • Example of an Interactive Application
            • Database Physical File
            • Main Menu Inquiry
              • MAINMENU: DDS for a Display Device File
              • CUSMAIN: RPG Source
            • File Maintenance
              • CUSMSTL1: DDS for a Logical File
              • MNTMENU: DDS for a Display Device File
              • CUSMNT: RPG Source
            • Search by Zip Code
              • CUSMSTL2: DDS for a Logical File
              • SCHZIPD: DDS for a Display Device File
              • SCHZIP: RPG Source
            • Search and Inquiry by Name
              • CUSMSTL3: DDS for a Logical File
              • SCHNAMD: DDS for a Display Device File
              • SCHNAM: RPG Source
        • Appendixes
          • Appendix A. Behavioral Differences Between OPM RPG/400 and ILE RPG for AS/400
            • Compiling
            • Running
            • Debugging and Exception Handling
            • I/O
            • DBCS Data in Character Fields
          • Appendix B. Using the RPG III to RPG IV Conversion Aid
            • Conversion Overview
              • File Considerations
                • Source Member Types
                • File Record Length
                • File and Member Names
              • The Log File
              • Conversion Aid Tool Requirements
              • What the Conversion Aid Won't Do
            • Converting Your Source
              • The CVTRPGSRC Command
              • Converting a Member Using the Defaults
              • Converting All Members in a File
              • Converting Some Members in a File
              • Performing a Trial Conversion
              • Obtaining Conversion Reports
              • Converting Auto Report Source Members
              • Converting Source Members with Embedded SQL
              • Inserting Specification Templates
              • Converting Source from a Data File
            • Example of Source Conversion
            • Analyzing Your Conversion
              • Using the Conversion Report
              • Using the Log File
            • Resolving Conversion Problems
              • Compilation Errors in Existing RPG III Code
              • Unsupported RPG III Features
                • Converting the FREE operation code
              • Use of the /COPY Compiler Directive
                • Merging Problems
                • Context-Sensitive Problems
              • Use of Externally Described Data Structures
                • Merging an Array with an Externally Described DS Subfield
                • Renaming and Initializing an Externally Described DS Subfield
              • Run-time Differences
          • Appendix C. The Create Commands
            • Using CL Commands
              • How to Interpret Syntax Diagrams
            • CRTBNDRPG Command
              • Description of the CRTBNDRPG Command
            • CRTRPGMOD Command
              • Description of the CRTRPGMOD command
          • Appendix D. Compiler Listings
            • Reading a Compiler Listing
              • Prologue
              • Source Section
              • Additional Diagnostic Messages
              • Output Buffer Positions
              • /COPY Member Table
              • Compile-Time Data
              • Key Field Information
              • Cross-Reference Table
              • EVAL-CORR Summary
              • External References List
              • Message Summary
              • Final Summary
              • Code Generation and Binding Errors
          • Appendix E. Information for Preprocessor Providers
        • Bibliography
      • Rational Open Access: RPG Edition
        • PDF file for Rational Open Access: RPG Edition
        • What's New
          • What's New since 7.3?
          • What's New in this Release?
        • Rational Open Access: RPG Edition
          • RPG coding to use Open Access
          • Coding the Open Access handler
            • Two modes for I/O data
            • Handling input data
            • Handling output data
            • Using search arguments
            • Errors detected by the handler
            • Setting the feedback areas in the INFDS
          • The RPG operations to be handled
            • When the Open-Access file is closed
          • Handler parameter
            • The subfields of the main parameter structure
            • The subfields of the names-values structure
              • The subfields of the name-value structure describing one field
              • Data types used in name-value information
              • Constants QrnDtzFormat_* defining date, time, and timestamp formats
            • System object structure, QrnObject_T
            • Print-control structure, QrnPrtctl_T
            • Record-levels structure, QrnRecordLevels_T
              • Record-level structure for one level, QrnRecordLevel_T
            • Data types used in the handler parameter
            • Constants QrnRpgDevice_* defining the RPG device types
            • Constants QrnCcsids_*
            • Constants QrnFunctionKey_* defining the values for the functionKey subfield
          • Restrictions for an Open-Access file
        • Writing a parser for the RPG DATA-INTO operation code
          • Parameter passed to a DATA-INTO parser
          • Callback procedures for DATA-INTO parsers
          • Tracing a DATA-INTO parser
          • Example of a DATA-INTO parser
            • A DATA-INTO parser that uses a data structure as a communication area
        • Writing a generator for the RPG DATA-GEN operation code
          • Sequences of DATA-GEN operations
          • Parameter passed to a DATA-GEN generator
            • Types of the user-parameter passed to the DATA-GEN generator
          • Callback procedures for DATA-GEN generators
          • Events for DATA-GEN generators
          • Tracing a DATA-GEN operation
          • Example of a DATA-GEN generator
      • RPG 관련 정보
  • Java
    • IBM Developer Kit for Java
      • PDF file for IBM Developer Kit for Java
      • Installing and configuring Java
        • Installing Java on your IBM i server
          • Considerations for using IBM Technology for Java Virtual Machine
          • Installing a licensed program with the Restore Licensed Program command
          • Support for multiple Java Development Kits (JDKs)
          • Installing Java extensions
          • Downloading and installing Java packages
        • Running your first Hello World Java program
        • Creating, compiling, and running a HelloWorld Java program
        • Mapping a network drive to your server
        • Creating and editing Java source files
      • Customizing your IBM i server for Java usage
        • Java classpath
        • Java system properties
          • SystemDefault.properties file
          • List of Java system properties
        • Internationalization
          • Time zone configuration
          • Java character encodings
            • File.encoding values and IBM i CCSID
            • Default file.encoding values
          • Examples: Creating an internationalized Java program
      • Release-to-release compatibility
      • Database access from Java programs
        • Accessing your IBM i database with the Java JDBC driver
          • Getting started with JDBC
            • Types of JDBC drivers
            • JDBC requirements
            • JDBC tutorial
              • Example: JDBC
            • Setting up JNDI for the Java examples
          • Connections
            • Java DriverManager class
            • JDBC driver connection properties
            • Using DataSources with UDBDataSource
              • Example: Creating a UDBDataSource and binding it with JNDI
              • Example: Obtaining an initial context before binding UDBDataSource
            • DataSource properties
          • JVM properties for JDBC
          • DatabaseMetaData interface
            • Example: Returning a list of tables using the DatabaseMetaData interface
            • Example: Using metadata ResultSets that have more than one column
          • Java exceptions
            • Java SQLException class
              • Example: SQLException
            • SQLWarning
            • DataTruncation and silent truncation
          • JDBC transactions
            • JDBC auto-commit mode
            • Transaction isolation levels
            • Savepoints
          • JDBC distributed transactions
            • Example: Using JTA to handle a transaction
            • Example: Multiple connections that work on a transaction
            • Example: Using a connection with multiple transactions
            • Example: Suspended ResultSets
            • Example: Ending a transaction
            • Example: Suspending and resuming a transaction
          • Statement types
            • Statement objects
              • Example: Using the Statement object's executeUpdate method
            • PreparedStatements
              • Creating and using PreparedStatements
                • Example: ParameterMetaData
              • Processing PreparedStatements
              • Example: Using PreparedStatement to obtain a ResultSet
            • CallableStatements
              • Processing CallableStatements
              • Example: Creating a procedure with multiple ResultSets
              • Example: Creating a procedure with input and output parameters
              • Example: Creating a procedure with return values
          • ResultSets
            • ResultSet characteristics
              • Example: Sensitive and insensitive ResultSets
              • Example: ResultSet sensitivity
            • Cursor movement
            • Retrieving ResultSet data
              • Example: ResultSetMetaData interface
            • Changing ResultSets
              • Example: Removing values from a table through another statement's cursor
              • Example: Changing values with a statement through another statement's cursor
            • Creating ResultSets
            • Example: ResultSet interface
          • JDBC object pooling
            • Using DataSource support for object pooling
              • Example: Setting up connection pooling with UDBDataSource and UDBConnectionPoolDataSource
              • Example: Testing the performance of connection pooling
            • ConnectionPoolDataSource properties
            • DataSource-based statement pooling
              • Example: Testing the performance of two DataSources
            • Building your own connection pooling
          • Batch updates
            • Statement batch update
            • PreparedStatement batch update
            • JDBC BatchUpdateException
            • Blocked inserts with JDBC
          • Advanced data types
            • Writing code that uses BLOBs
              • Example: BLOB
              • Example: Updating BLOBs
              • Example: Using BLOBs
            • Writing code that uses CLOBs
              • Example: CLOB
              • Example: Updating CLOBs
              • Example: Using CLOBs
            • Writing code that uses Datalinks
              • Example: Datalink
            • Example: Distinct types
          • JDBC RowSets
            • RowSet characteristics
            • DB2CachedRowSet
              • Using DB2CachedRowSet
              • Creating and populating a DB2CachedRowSet
              • Accessing DB2CachedRowSet data and cursor manipulation
              • Changing DB2CachedRowSet data and reflecting changes back to the data source
              • DB2CachedRowSet features
            • DB2JdbcRowSet
              • DB2JdbcRowSet events
          • Performance tips for the native JDBC driver
        • Accessing databases using DB2 SQLJ support
          • Structured Query Language for Java profiles
          • The structured query language for Java (SQLJ) translator (sqlj)
          • Precompiling SQL statements in a profile using the DB2 SQLJ profile customizer, db2profc
          • Printing the contents of DB2 SQLJ profiles (db2profp and profp)
          • SQLJ profile auditor installer (profdb)
          • Converting a serialized profile instance to Java class format using the SQLJ profile conversion tool (profconv)
          • Embedding SQL statements in your Java application
            • Host variables in Structured Query Language for Java
            • Example: Embedding SQL Statements in your Java application
          • Compiling and running SQLJ programs
        • Java SQL routines
          • Using Java SQL routines
            • Setting up your system to use SQLJ
          • Java stored procedures
            • JAVA parameter style
            • DB2GENERAL parameter style
            • Restrictions on Java stored procedures
          • Java user-defined scalar functions
            • Restrictions on Java user-defined functions
            • Java user-defined table functions
          • SQLJ procedures that manipulate JAR files
            • SQLJ.INSTALL_JAR
            • SQLJ.REMOVE_JAR
            • SQLJ.REPLACE_JAR
            • SQLJ.UPDATEJARINFO
            • SQLJ.RECOVERJAR
            • SQLJ.REFRESH_CLASSES
          • Parameter passing conventions for Java stored procedures and UDFs
      • Java with other programming languages
        • Native methods and the Java Native Interface
          • Getting started with Java native methods
          • ILE native methods for Java
            • Teraspace storage model native methods for Java
            • Strings in ILE native methods
            • Example: ILE native method for Java
          • PASE for i native methods for Java
            • Example: IBM PASE for i native method for Java
          • Managing native method libraries
          • Java native methods and threads considerations
        • Java Invocation API
          • Invocation API functions
          • Support for multiple Java virtual machines
          • Example: Java Invocation API
        • Using java.lang.Runtime.exec()
          • Example: Calling another Java program with java.lang.Runtime.exec()
          • Example: Calling a CL program with java.lang.Runtime.exec()
          • Example: Calling a CL command with java.lang.Runtime.exec()
        • Interprocess communications
          • Using sockets for interprocess communication
            • Example: Using sockets for interprocess communication
          • Using input and output streams for interprocess communication
            • Example: Using input and output streams for interprocess communication
          • Example: Calling Java from ILE C
          • Example: Calling Java from RPG
      • Java platform
        • Java applets and applications
        • Java virtual machine
        • Java JAR and class files
        • Java threads
        • Java Development Kit
      • Advanced topics
        • Java classes, packages, and directories
        • Java-related files in the IFS
        • Java file authorities in the integrated file system
        • Running Java in a batch job
      • Running your Java application on a host that does not have a GUI
        • Native Abstract Windowing Toolkit
          • Selecting an AWT mode
            • Using AWT in normal mode with full GUI support
              • Creating a VNC password file
              • Starting the VNC Server
                • Configuring NAWT environment variables
              • Configuring the iceWM window manager
              • Using a VNCviewer or Web browser
              • Tips on using VNC
              • Tips for using AWT with WebSphere Application Server
            • Verifying your AWT configuration
      • Java security
        • Changes to adopted authority in IBM i 7.4
          • Examples: Adopted authority alternatives
        • Java security model
        • Java Cryptography Extension
          • Using hardware cryptography
            • Key pairs and hardware utilization
        • Java Secure Socket Extension
          • Preparing your system for transport layer security support
          • Changing your Java code to use socket factories
            • Examples: Changing your Java code to use server socket factories
            • Examples: Changing your Java code to use client socket factories
          • Changing your Java code to use transport layer security
            • Examples: Changing your Java server to use transport layer security
            • Examples: Changing your Java client to use transport layer security
          • Selecting a digital certificate
          • Using the digital certificate when running your Java application
          • Using Java Secure Socket Extension
            • Configuring your server to support JSSE
              • JSSE providers
              • JSSE security properties
              • JSSE for Java system properties
            • Using the native IBM i JSSE provider
              • i5OSLoadStoreParameter class Javadoc information
              • i5OSSystemCertificateStoreFile class Javadoc information
              • SSLConfiguration Javadoc information
            • Examples: IBM Java Secure Sockets Extension
              • Example: SSL client using an SSLContext object
              • Example: SSL server using an SSLContext object
        • Java Authentication and Authorization Service
          • Java Authentication and Authorization Service (JAAS) 1.0
        • IBM Java Generic Security Service (JGSS)
          • JGSS concepts
            • JGSS principals and credentials
              • com.ibm.security.krb5.internal.tools Class Klist
              • com.ibm.security.krb5.internal.tools Class Kinit
              • com.ibm.security.krb5.internal.tools Class Ktab
            • JGSS context establishment
            • JGSS message protection and exchange
            • Resource cleanup and release
            • Security mechanisms
          • Configuring your server to use IBM JGSS
            • Configuring your IBM i to use JGSS
            • JGSS providers
            • Using a security manager
              • JVM permissions
              • JAAS permission checks
          • Running IBM JGSS applications
            • Obtaining Kerberos credentials and creating secret keys
            • The kinit and ktab tools
            • JAAS Kerberos login interface
            • Configuration and policy files
          • Developing IBM JGSS applications
            • IBM JGSS application programming steps
              • Creating a GSSManager
              • Creating a GSSName
              • Creating a GSSCredential
              • Creating GSSContext
              • Requesting optional JGSS security services
              • Establishing JGSS context
              • Using JGSS per-message services
              • Deleting JGSS context
            • Using JAAS with your JGSS application
          • JGSS debugging
          • Samples: IBM Java Generic Security Service (JGSS)
            • Viewing the IBM JGSS samples
              • Sample: Kerberos configuration file
              • Sample: JAAS login configuration file
              • Sample: JAAS policy file
              • Sample: Java policy file
            • Samples: Downloading and viewing Javadoc information for the IBM JGSS samples
            • Samples: Downloading and running the sample JGSS programs
              • Samples: Downloading the IBM JGSS samples
              • Samples: Preparing to run the JGSS sample programs
              • Samples: Running the JGSS sample programs
              • Example: Running the non-JAAS sample
          • IBM JGSS Javadoc reference information
      • Tuning Java program performance
        • Java garbage collection
        • Java Native Method Invocation performance considerations
        • Java exception performance considerations
        • Java profiling performance tools
          • Java Virtual Machine Tool Interface
        • Collecting Java performance data
      • Java commands and tools
        • Java tools and utilities
          • Standard Java tools and utilities
          • IBM Java tools and utilities
            • Java hwkeytool
          • Additional Java tools and utilities
        • CL commands that are supported by Java
      • Debugging Java programs on IBM i
        • Debugging Java programs using IBM i Debugger
          • System debugging for IBM Technology for Java
          • Debug operations
            • Initial debugging displays for Java programs
            • Setting breakpoints
            • Stepping through Java programs
            • Evaluating variables in Java programs
            • Debugging Java and native method programs
          • Using the QIBM_CHILD_JOB_SNDINQMSG environment variable for debug
          • Debugging Java classes loaded through a custom class loader
          • Debugging servlets
        • Java Platform Debugger Architecture
        • Finding memory leaks
        • Using the Generate JVM Dump command
      • Java Code examples
      • Troubleshooting Java programs
        • Limitations
        • Finding job logs for Java problem analysis
        • Collecting data for Java problem analysis
        • Applying program temporary fixes
        • Getting support for Java on IBM i
      • Related information
        • Java Naming and Directory Interface
        • JavaMail
        • Java Print Service
    • IBM Toolbox for Java
      • What's new for IBM Toolbox for Java
      • PDF file for IBM Toolbox for Java
      • Class finder
      • Installing and managing IBM Toolbox for Java
        • Managing your IBM Toolbox for Java installation
        • Installing IBM Toolbox for Java
          • IBM i requirements for IBM Toolbox for Java
            • Required IBM i options
            • Determining if IBM Toolbox for Java is installed on your system
            • Checking the QUSER profile
            • Changing the QUSER user profile
            • Dependencies on other licensed programs
            • Compatibility with different levels of IBM i
            • Native optimizations when running on the IBM i JVM
          • Workstation requirements for IBM Toolbox for Java
            • Workstation requirements for running IBM Toolbox for Java applications
            • Workstation requirements for running IBM Toolbox for Java applets
          • Installing IBM Toolbox for Java on your system
          • Installing IBM Toolbox for Java on your workstation
            • JAR files
        • System properties
        • Simple programming examples
      • JTOpenLite
      • IBM Toolbox for Java classes
        • Access classes
          • Server access points
          • AS400 class
            • Managing default user IDs
            • Using a password cache
            • Prompting for user IDs and passwords
            • Prompting, default user ID, and password caching summary
          • SecureAS400 class
          • AS400JPing class
          • BidiTransform class
          • BidiConversionProperties class
          • CallStackEntry class
          • ClusteredHashTable classes
          • CommandCall class
          • Connection pooling
          • Data area
          • Data conversion and description
            • Conversion classes for numeric data
            • Text conversion
            • Conversion classes for composite types
            • FieldDescription classes
            • RecordFormat class
            • Record class
            • Retrieving the contents of a field
            • Setting the contents of a field
            • LineDataRecordWriter class
          • Data queues
            • Sequential data queues
            • Keyed data queues
          • Digital certificates
          • EnvironmentVariable class
          • Event log
          • Exceptions
          • FileAttributes class
          • FTP class
          • Integrated file system classes
            • IFSFile class
            • IFSJavaFile class
            • IFSFileInputStream
            • IFSTextFileInputStream class
            • IFSFileReader
            • IFSFileOutputStream class
            • IFSTextFileOutputStream class
            • IFSFileWriter
            • IFSRandomAccessFile
            • IFSKey class
            • File sharing mode
            • IFSSystemView
          • ISeriesNetServer class
          • JavaApplicationCall class
          • JDBC classes
            • AS400JDBCBlob class
            • CallableStatement interface
            • AS400JDBCClob class
            • AS400JDBCConnection class
            • AS400JDBCConnectionPool
            • AS400JDBCManagedConnectionPoolDataSource class
              • Examples: Using AS400JDBCManagedConnectionPoolDataSource class
            • DatabaseMetaData interface
            • AS400JDBCDataSource class
            • Registering the JDBC driver
            • AS400JDBCParameterMetaData class
            • PreparedStatement interface
            • ResultSet class
            • AS400JDBCRowSet class
            • AS400JDBCSavepoint class
            • Running SQL statements with Statement objects
            • JDBC XA Distributed Transaction Management
          • Jobs classes
            • Job class
            • JobList class
            • JobLog class
          • Message classes
          • NetServer class
          • ObjectReferences class
          • Permission classes
            • DLOPermission class
            • QSYSPermission
            • RootPermission
          • Print classes
            • Listing Print objects
            • Working with Print objects
            • Retrieving PrintObject attributes
            • AFP Resource Attributes
            • Output queue attributes
            • Printer Attributes
            • Printer file attributes
            • Spooled file attributes
            • Writer Job Attributes
            • Print Object Attributes
            • Copying spooled files
            • Creating new spooled files
            • Generating an SCS data stream
            • Reading spooled files and AFP resources
            • Reading spooled files using PrintObjectPageInputStream and PrintObjectTransformedInputStream
          • ProductLicense class
          • ProgramCall class
          • QSYSObjectPathName class
          • Record-level access
            • AS400File
            • KeyedFile
            • SequentialFile
            • AS400FileRecordDescription
            • Creating and deleting files and members
            • Reading and writing records
            • Locking files
            • Using record blocking
            • Setting the cursor position
            • Commitment control
          • SaveFile class
          • ServiceProgramCall class
          • Subsystem class
          • SystemStatus classes
            • SystemPool class
          • System values
          • Trace class
          • User and group classes
          • UserSpace class
        • Commtrace classes
          • Commtrace model
          • Format and FormatProperties classes
            • Running Format as a standalone program
          • Prolog class
          • Frame class
          • LanHeader class
          • IPPacket class
          • Header class
          • Example: Using the commtrace classes
        • HTML Classes
          • BidiOrdering class
          • HTMLAlign class
          • HTMLDocument class
            • Using HTMLDocument to create HTML data
            • Using HTMLDocument to create XSL FO data
              • XSL FO-enabled classes
            • Examples: Using HTMLDocument
          • HTML form classes
            • FormInput classes
              • ButtonFormInput class
              • FileFormInput class
              • HiddenFormInput class
              • ImageFormInput class
              • ResetFormInput class
              • SubmitFormInput class
              • TextFormInput class
              • PasswordFormInput class
              • RadioFormInput class
              • CheckboxFormInput class
            • LayoutFormPanel class
              • GridLayoutFormPanel
              • LineLayoutFormPanel class
            • TextAreaFormElement class
            • LabelFormElement class
            • SelectFormElement class
            • SelectOption class
            • RadioFormInputGroup class
          • HTMLHead class
          • HTMLHeading class
          • HTMLHyperlink class
          • HTMLImage class
          • HTMLList classes
          • HTMLMeta class
          • HTMLParameter class
          • HTMLServlet class
          • HTML Table classes
            • HTMLTableCell class
            • HTMLTableRow class
            • HTMLTableHeader class
            • HTMLTableCaption class
          • HTML Text class
          • HTMLTree classes
            • HTMLTreeElement class
            • FileTreeElement class
            • FileListElement class
            • FileListRenderer class
        • ReportWriter classes
          • Context classes
          • JSPReportProcessor class
          • XSLReportProcessor class
        • Security classes
          • Secure Sockets Layer
            • Using SSL to encrypt data between IBM Toolbox for Java and IBM i servers
              • Setting up IBM i to use SSL
          • Authentication services
        • Servlet classes
          • Authentication classes
          • RowData class
            • ListRowData class
            • RecordListRowData class
            • ResourceListRowData class
            • SQLResultSetRowData class
          • RowMetaData classes
            • ListMetaData class
            • RecordFormatMetaData class
            • SQLResultSetMetaData class
          • Converter classes
            • StringConverter class
            • HTMLFormConverter class
            • HTMLTableConverter class
        • Utility classes
          • Client installation and update classes
          • AS400ToolboxJarMaker
            • Components supported by IBM Toolbox for Java
            • CCSID and encoding values supported by IBM Toolbox for Java
          • CommandHelpRetriever class
          • CommandPrompter class
          • RunJavaApplication
          • JPing
      • Javadocs
      • IBM Toolbox for Java beans
      • JDBC
        • Enhancements to IBM Toolbox for Java JDBC support for IBM i 7.2
        • Enhancements to IBM Toolbox for Java JDBC support for IBM i 7.1
        • Enhancements to IBM Toolbox for Java JDBC support for IBM i 6.1
        • Enhancements to IBM Toolbox for Java JDBC support for IBM i 5.4
        • IBM Toolbox for Java JDBC properties
          • JDBC Librarylist property
        • JDBC SQL Types
      • Proxy Support
      • Secure Sockets Layer and Java Secure Socket Extension
      • Extensible Markup Language components
        • Program Call Markup Language
          • Requirements for using PCML
          • Building IBM i program calls with PCML
          • PCML syntax
            • PCML program tag
            • PCML struct tag
            • PCML data tag
              • Values for length and precision
          • Examples: Program Call Markup Language (PCML)
        • Record Format Markup Language
          • Requirements for using RFML
          • Example: Using RFML compared to using IBM Toolbox for Java Record classes
          • RecordFormatDocument class
          • Record format documents and RFML syntax
            • RFML document type definition (DTD)
            • The RFML data tag
            • The RFML rfml tag
            • The RFML recordformat tag
            • The RFML struct tag
        • XML parser and XSLT processor
        • Extensible Program Call Markup Language
          • Advantages of XPCML over PCML
          • Requirements for using XPCML
          • XPCML schema and syntax
            • Comparison of XPCML source to PCML source
            • Schema xpcml.xsd file
            • XPCML syntax
            • XPCML tag attributes
          • Using XPCML
            • Converting existing PCML to XPCML
            • Using XPCML to call a program on your server
            • Obtaining program call results as XPCML
            • Passing in parameter values as XPCML
            • Using condensed XPCML
            • Identifying parse errors in XPCML
      • Frequently asked questions (FAQ)
      • Tips for programming
        • Shutting down your Java program
        • Integrated file system path names for server objects
        • Managing connections in Java programs
        • IBM i Java virtual machine
          • Comparing the IBM i Java virtual machine and the IBM Toolbox for Java classes
          • Running IBM Toolbox for Java classes on the IBM i Java virtual machine
          • Setting system name, user ID, and password with an AS400 object in the IBM i Java virtual machine
        • Independent auxiliary storage pool (ASP)
        • Exceptions
        • Trace class
        • IBM i optimization
        • Performance improvements
        • Client installation and update classes
        • AS400ToolboxJarMaker
        • Java national language support
        • Service and support for the IBM Toolbox for Java
      • Code examples
        • Examples: Access classes
        • Examples: JavaBeans
        • Examples: Commtrace classes
        • Examples from the HTML classes
        • Examples: Program Call Markup Language (PCML)
        • Examples: ReportWriter classes
        • Examples: RFML
        • Example: Using a profile token credential to swap the IBM i thread identity
        • Examples from the servlet classes
        • Simple programming examples
        • Examples: Tips for programming
        • Examples: Utility classes
        • Examples: XPCML
      • Related information for IBM Toolbox for Java
    • JSP 및 Java 서브릿 프로그램
  • 메시징
  • Multithreaded applications
    • PDF file for Multithreaded applications
    • Threads on IBM i
      • Thread models
      • Thread program models
      • Jobs and job resources
      • Thread-private data, thread-specific data, and thread local storage
      • Multithreaded program startup commands
      • Activation groups and threads
      • Communications considerations for multithreaded programming
      • Database considerations for multithreaded programming
        • Example: Working with local SQL databases in multithreaded Pthread programs
      • Data management considerations for multithreaded programming
      • File system considerations for multithreaded programming
      • Printer file considerations for multithreaded programming
    • IBM i thread management
      • Thread attributes
        • Example: Setting a thread attribute in a Pthread program
        • Example: Setting a thread attribute in a Java program
      • Starting a thread
        • Example: Starting a thread in a Pthread program
        • Example: Starting a thread using a Java program
      • Ending a thread
        • Example: Ending a thread in a Pthread program
        • Example: Ending a thread using a Java program
      • Canceling a thread
        • Example: Canceling a thread in a Pthread program
        • Example: Canceling a thread using a Java program
      • Suspending a thread
        • Example: Suspending a thread using a Java program
      • Resuming a thread
      • Waiting for a thread to end
        • Example: Waiting for threads in a Pthread program
        • Example: Waiting for threads using a Java program
      • Yielding the processor to another thread
    • Thread safety
      • Storage usage and threaded applications
      • Job-scoped resources and thread safety
      • API thread safety classifications
      • CL commands and thread safety
      • Denied access functions and thread safety
      • Exit points
    • Multithreaded programming techniques
      • Existing application evaluation
      • Synchronization techniques among threads
        • The Compare and Swap instruction
        • Mutexes and threads
          • Example: Using mutexes in Pthread programs
          • Example: Using mutexes in a Java program
        • Semaphores and threads
          • Example: Using semaphores in Pthread programs to protect shared data
        • Condition variables and threads
          • Example: Using condition variables in Pthread programs
          • Example: Using condition variables in Java programs
        • Threads as synchronization primitives
        • Space location locks
          • Example: Space location locks in Pthread programs
        • Object locks
      • One-time initialization and thread safety
        • Example: One-time initialization in Pthread programs
      • Data that is private to a thread
        • Example: Thread local storage in a Pthread program
        • Example: Thread-specific data in a Pthread program
        • Example: Thread-specific data in a Java program
      • Function calls that are not threadsafe
        • Using global mutexes to run functions that are not threadsafe
        • Using separate jobs to run functions that are not threadsafe
      • Common multithreaded programming errors
        • Calling functions that are not threadsafe
        • Thread creation not allowed failure
        • Ending of activation group
        • Mixing thread models
        • Commit operations in multithreaded programs
        • Database record I/O and thread safety
    • Language access and threads
      • Threads considerations for Java language
      • Threads considerations for ILE C and ILE C++ languages
      • Threads considerations for ILE COBOL language
      • Threads considerations for ILE RPG language
      • Threads considerations for OPM language
    • Debugging and servicing of multithreaded jobs
      • Commands that report thread-related data
      • Flight recorders
        • Example: Sample flight recorder output from a Pthread program
      • Options to view thread information
      • Multithreaded job debugging
      • Areas to test for multithreaded applications
    • Performance considerations in multithreaded applications
      • Multithreaded server recommendations
      • Job and thread priorities
      • Contention among threads
      • Effects of storage pool sizes on threaded applications
      • Activity levels of storage pools
      • Performance and threaded applications
    • Examples: Threads
    • Related information for Multithreaded applications
  • SQL
  • 스크립팅 언어
    • IBM i PASE shells and utilities
    • Qshell
      • Qshell의 PDF 파일
      • 학습서
        • Qshell 명령 언어 피처
        • Qshell 유틸리티 피처
        • 스크립트에 함께 모으기
      • 명령 언어
        • 인용
        • 매개변수
        • 쉘 변수
        • 단어 확장
          • 물결 기호 확장
          • 매개변수 확장
          • 명령 대체
          • 산술 확장
          • 필드 분할
          • 패턴
        • 재지정
        • 단순 명령
        • 파이프라인
        • 리스트
        • Shell 함수
          • 명령 그룹화
          • If 명령
          • 조건 명령
          • 케이스 명령
          • select 명령
          • while 명령
          • until 명령
          • For 명령
          • 함수
      • Qshell 사용
        • Qshell 대화식 세션 사용
        • CL에서 Qshell 명령 실행
        • PASE에서 Qshell 명령 실행
        • Qshell 환경 사용자 정의
        • 자국어 지원(NLS) 고려사항
        • 성능 고려사항
        • 사용자 고유의 유틸리티 개발
        • Qshell 인터프리터로 파일 편집
        • 다른 인터프리터와의 차이점
      • 유틸리티
        • 별명 정의
          • alias
          • unalias
        • 명령 실행
          • builtin
          • command
          • dot
          • env
          • eval
          • exec
          • exit
          • help
          • nohup
          • qsh
          • rexec
          • rexx
          • source
          • system
          • type
          • whence
          • xargs
        • 데이터 관리
          • cmp
          • cut
          • egrep
          • fgrep
          • grep
          • iconv
          • sed
          • sort
          • split
          • tr
          • uniq
          • wc
        • DB2에 대한 작업
          • Qshell db2 유틸리티
          • Perl 유틸리티
        • 파일 및 디렉토리에 대한 작업
          • attr
          • basename
          • cat
          • catsplf
          • cd
          • chgrp
          • chmod
          • chown
          • compress
          • cp
          • dirname
          • file
          • find
          • gencat
          • getconf
          • head
          • ln
          • ls
          • mkdir
          • mkfifo
          • mv
          • od
          • pax
          • pr
          • pwd
          • pwdx
          • Rfile
          • rm
          • rmdir
          • setccsid
          • tail
          • tar
          • touch
          • umask
          • uncompress
          • zcat
        • 입력 및 출력의 읽기 및 쓰기
          • dspmsg
          • echo
          • print
          • printf
          • read
        • Java 프로그램 개발
          • ajar
          • appletviewer
          • extcheck
          • jar
          • jarsigner
          • java
          • javac
          • javadoc
          • javah
          • javap
          • keytool
          • native2ascii
          • policytool
          • rmic
          • rmid
          • rmiregistry
          • serialver
          • tnameserv
        • 작업 관리
          • getjobid
          • hash
          • jobs
          • kill
          • liblist
          • ps
          • sleep
          • trap
          • wait
        • Kerberos 신임 정보에 대한 작업
        • LDAP 디렉토리 서버에 대한 작업
        • 매개변수 및 변수에 대한 작업
          • declare
          • export
          • local
          • printenv
          • readonly
          • set
          • shift
          • typeset
          • unset
        • 스크립트 작성
          • break
          • colon
          • continue
          • false
          • getopts
          • let
          • return
          • test
          • true
        • 기타 유틸리티
          • clrtmp
          • dataq
          • datarea
          • date
          • expr
          • hostname
          • id
          • ipcrm
          • ipcs
          • locale
          • logger
          • logname
          • sysval
          • tee
          • ulimit
          • uname
      • Qshell API
        • QzshSystem() - QSH 명령 실행
        • QzshCheckShellCommand() - QSH 명령 찾기
      • 리모트 클라이언트 예제
        • 예: 서버 프로그램
        • 예: 클라이언트 프로그램
        • 예: 서버 프로그램 작성 및 실행
        • 예: 클라이언트 프로그램 작성 및 실행
      • Qshell에 대한 관련 정보
    • Net.Data
    • Node.js
    • PHP
    • Python
    • REXX
  • IBM i Access
  • XML Toolkit
    • PDF file for XML Toolkit
    • XML introduction
      • Advantages of XML
      • Uses of XML
      • XML standards and extensions
    • XML Toolkit introduction
      • Available XML Toolkit components
      • Installing XML Toolkit
      • API documentation
      • Samples
    • XSL introduction
      • Uses of XSL
    • XML Scripting for IBM i introduction
    • Getting support
    • Related information for XML Toolkit
  • 관련 정보
• 보안
  • Planning and setting up system security
    • What's new for IBM i 7.4
    • PDF file for Planning and setting up system security
    • Frequently asked questions
      • Questions customers often ask
      • Questions customers should ask themselves
    • Concepts
      • Basic terminology
      • Security levels
      • Lockable security system values
      • Global settings
      • User profiles
      • Group profiles
      • Authorization lists
      • Comparison of group files and authorization lists
      • Validation list objects
      • Menu security
      • User security
      • Resource security
      • System security tools
      • Security audits
      • Types of authority
        • System-defined authorities
        • Understanding how object authority and library authority work together
        • Special authorities
      • Intrusion detection
    • Planning your security strategy
      • Developing a security policy
        • Changing a security policy
      • Planning physical security
        • Planning physical security for the system unit
        • Planning physical security for system documentation and storage media
        • Planning physical workstation security
        • Planning physical security for printers and printer output
        • Physical security planning worksheet
      • Planning system security
        • System values selection worksheet
      • Planning user security
        • Planning user groups
          • Identifying user groups
          • Planning group profiles
            • Creating a group profile plan
            • Preparing a user description worksheet
            • Naming group profiles
            • Drawing an application diagram
            • Determining the applications and libraries a user group needs
            • Defining the job description
            • User group identification worksheet
            • User group description worksheet
        • Planning user profiles
          • System responsibilities worksheet
          • User profile worksheet
      • Planning resource security
        • Planning library security
          • Determining library owner
          • Library description worksheet
          • Naming conventions worksheet
        • Planning application security
          • Planning object authority
          • Determining object ownership
            • Group ownership of objects
          • Application description worksheet
          • Planning application installation
        • Planning authorization lists
          • Adding users to an authorization list
          • Authorization lists worksheet
        • Planning database file security
        • Planning integrated file system security
          • Root, QOpenSys, and user-defined file systems
            • Security commands for the root, QOpenSys, and user-defined file systems
            • Public authority to the root directory
          • Restrict access to the QSYS.LIB file system
          • Securing directories
          • Security for new objects
            • Using the Create Directory command
            • Creating a directory with an API
            • Creating a stream file with the open() or creat() API
            • Creating an object by using a PC interface
          • QFileSvr.400 file system
          • Network file system (NFS)
        • Planning security for logical partitions
        • Planning operations console security
        • Planning printer and printer output queue security
          • Printer output queue security worksheet
        • Planning workstation resource security
          • Workstation security worksheet
        • Planning security for programmers
      • Planning network security
        • Planning network attributes
      • Planning Advanced Program-to-Program Communication security
        • Example: A basic APPC session
        • Basic elements of APPC
        • APPC user access to the target system
          • Architected security values
        • Options for dividing network security responsibility
      • Security considerations for Internet browsers
        • Risk: Workstation damage
        • Risk: Trust signed applets
      • Planning TCP/IP security
        • TCP/IP security components
          • Using packet rules to secure TCP/IP traffic
          • HTTP proxy server
          • Virtual private networking
          • Secure sockets layer
        • Securing your TCP/IP environment
          • Controlling which TCP/IP servers start automatically
          • Monitoring TCP/IP processing
        • Using the Secure Shell (SSH) to secure your applications
      • Planning backup and recovery of security information
    • Implementing your security strategy
      • Setting up your user environment
        • Avoiding default passwords
        • Changing known passwords
        • Changing sign-on error messages
      • Setting up system-level security
        • Implementing system security recommendations
        • Applying security system values
        • Locking down system values
      • Setting up user security
        • Installing application libraries
          • Creating an owner profile
          • Loading applications
        • Setting up user groups
          • Creating a library for a group
          • Creating a job description for a group
          • Creating a group profile
          • Creating profiles for users in the group
            • Creating a personal library for each member of a group
            • Copying the group profile
            • Setting the group profile password to expire
        • Creating profiles for users not in a group
        • Limiting access to program functions
      • Implementing resource security
        • Setting up ownership and public authority
          • Creating an owner profile
          • Changing library ownership
          • Setting up ownership of application objects
          • Setting up public access to a library
          • Setting up public authority for objects in a library
          • Setting up public authority for new objects
          • Working with group and personal libraries
        • Setting up specific authority for objects and libraries
          • Setting up authority for a library
          • Setting up authority for an object
          • Setting up authority for multiple objects
          • Enforcing object authority
        • Setting up menu security
          • Limitations of menu access control
          • Enhancing menu access control with object security
          • Example: Changing the menu control environment
          • Using library security to complement menu security
        • Securing the integrated file system
        • Securing your printer output queue
        • Securing your workstations
          • Object authority with workstation access
          • Application administration
          • Preventing ODBC access
          • Security considerations for workstation session passwords
          • Protecting the IBM i platform from remote commands and procedures
          • Gateway servers
          • Wireless LAN communications
      • Setting up network security
        • Setting up APPC security
          • Restricting APPC sessions
          • Target system assignment of user profiles for jobs
          • Display station pass-through options
          • Avoiding unexpected device assignments
          • Controlling remote commands and batch jobs
          • Evaluating your APPC configuration
            • Relevant parameters for APPC devices
            • Parameters for APPC controllers
            • Parameters for line descriptions
      • Setting up TCP/IP security
        • Security considerations for using SLIP
          • Securing dial-in SLIP connections
          • Preventing dial-in users from accessing other systems
          • Controlling dial-out sessions
          • Securing dial-out sessions
        • Security considerations for using Point-to-Point Protocol
        • Security considerations for using Bootstrap Protocol server
          • Preventing BOOTP access
          • Securing the BOOTP server
        • Security considerations for using DHCP server
          • Preventing DHCP access
          • Securing the DHCP server
        • Security considerations for using TFTP server
          • Preventing TFTP access
          • Securing the TFTP server
        • Security considerations for using REXEC server
          • Preventing REXEC access
          • Securing the REXEC server
        • Security considerations for using DNS server
          • Preventing DNS access
          • Securing the DNS server
        • Security considerations for using IBM HTTP server
          • Preventing HTTP access
          • Controlling access to the HTTP server
            • Administration considerations
            • Protecting resources
        • Security considerations for using SSL with HTTP server
        • Security considerations for LDAP
        • Security considerations for LPD
          • Preventing LPD access
          • Controlling LPD access
        • Security considerations for SNMP
          • Preventing SNMP access
          • Controlling SNMP access
        • Security considerations for INETD server
        • Security considerations for limiting TCP/IP roaming
        • Security considerations for using RouteD
    • Managing security
      • Restricting save and restore capability
      • Saving security information
        • Save system values
        • Saving group and user profiles
        • Saving job descriptions
        • Saving resource security information
        • Saving the default owner profile (QDFTOWN)
      • Restoring security information
      • Managing security information
        • Working with security commands
        • Adding a new user to the system
        • Adding a new application
        • Adding a new workstation
        • Changing a user group
        • Changing a user profile
        • Disabling user profiles automatically
        • Enabling a disabled user profile
        • Renaming a user profile
        • Scheduling availability of user profiles
        • Removing a user from the system
        • Removing user profiles automatically
      • Configuring the system to use security tools
        • Saving security tools
        • Commands and menus for security commands
        • Values set by the Configure System Security command
        • Functions of the Revoke Public Authority command
      • Using security exit programs
      • Managing service tools user ID
      • Protecting against computer viruses
      • Checking for objects that do not have public authority of *EXCLUDE
      • Checking for different sources of authority to objects
      • Checking the settings for security-related system values and network attributes
    • Monitoring security
      • Planning security auditing
        • Checklists for security auditing
      • Preventing and detecting security exposures
        • Evaluating registered exit programs
        • Checking scheduled programs
        • Checking for user objects in protected libraries
        • Limiting the use of adopted authority
        • Monitoring abnormal deletions
        • Monitoring abnormal system use and access attempts
        • Monitoring user profiles and authorities
        • Monitoring the use of trigger programs
        • Preventing new programs from using adopted authority
        • Mitigating Spectre and Meltdown vulnerabilities in new and existing programs
        • Using digital signatures to protect software integrity
        • Modifying architected transaction program names
          • Architecture TPN requests
      • Monitoring access to output and job queues
      • Monitoring subsystem descriptions
        • Reviewing autostart job entries
        • Reviewing workstation names and types
        • Reviewing job queue entries
        • Reviewing routing entries
        • Reviewing communications entries and remote location names
        • Reviewing prestart job entries
        • Reviewing job descriptions
      • Monitoring authority
        • Monitoring authorization lists
        • Monitoring private authority to objects
        • Monitoring public authority to objects
        • Monitoring user environments
        • Monitoring special authorities
        • Monitoring sign-on and password activity
        • Monitoring user profile activity
      • Monitoring security messages
      • Preventing loss of auditing information
      • Managing the audit journal and journal receivers
      • Stopping the audit function
      • Using the history log
    • Related information for Planning and setting up system security
  • Cryptography
    • What's new for IBM i 7.4
    • PDF file for Cryptography
    • Cryptography concepts
    • Cryptographic services key management
      • Managing master keys
        • Loading and setting master keys
        • Loading and setting auxiliary storage pool master key
        • Loading and setting save/restore master key
        • Testing master keys
        • Clearing master keys
        • Saving and restoring master keys
      • Managing cryptographic keystore files
        • Creating a new keystore file
        • Adding an existing keystore file
        • Translating keystore files
        • Viewing translation status of keystore files
        • Distributing keys
        • Managing key records
          • Adding a new key record
          • Exporting a key record
          • Extracting a public key
          • Viewing a key record's attributes
          • Deleting a key record
    • 4769 Cryptographic Coprocessors
      • Cryptographic hardware concepts
      • Features
      • Scenarios: Cryptographic Coprocessor
        • Scenario: Protecting private keys with cryptographic hardware
        • Scenario: Writing an IBM i application to use the Cryptographic Coprocessor
        • Scenario: Enhancing system TLS performance by using the 4769 Cryptographic Coprocessor
      • Planning for the Cryptographic Coprocessor
        • Requirements
        • Secure access
          • Object authorities that are required for SAPI
      • Configuring the Cryptographic Coprocessor
        • Creating a device description
        • Naming files to keystore file
        • Creating and defining roles and profiles
          • Example: ILE C program for creating roles and profiles for your Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE C program for enabling all access control points in the default role for your Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE RPG program for creating roles or profiles for your Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE RPG program for enabling all access control points in the default role for your Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE C program for changing an existing profile for your Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE RPG program for changing an existing profile for your Coprocessor
        • Setting the environment ID and clock
          • Example: ILE C program for setting the environment ID on your Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE RPG program for setting the environment ID on your Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE C program for setting the clock on your Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE RPG program for setting the clock on your Coprocessor
        • Loading a function control vector
          • Example: ILE C program for loading a function control vector for your Cryptographic Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE RPG program for loading a function control vector for your Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE C program for loading a function control vector for your 4767 Cryptographic Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE RPG program for loading a function control vector for your 4767 Cryptographic Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE C program for clearing a function control vector from your Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE RPG program for clearing a function control vector from your Coprocessor
        • Loading and setting a master key
          • Example: ILE C program for loading a master key into your Cryptographic Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE RPG program for loading a master key into your Cryptographic Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE C program for re-encrypting keys for your Cryptographic Coprocessor
        • Configuring the Cryptographic Coprocessor for use with DCM and TLS
        • Configuring the Cryptographic Coprocessor for use with IBM i applications
      • Migrating to the Cryptographic Coprocessor
      • Managing the Cryptographic Coprocessor
        • Logging on or off of the Cryptographic Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE C program for logging on to your Cryptographic Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE RPG program for logging on to your Cryptographic Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE C program for logging off of your Cryptographic Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE RPG program for logging off of your Cryptographic Coprocessor
        • Query status or request information
          • Example: Querying the status of your Cryptographic Coprocessor
          • Example: Requesting information from your Cryptographic Coprocessor
        • Initializing a keystore file
          • Example: ILE C program for initializing a keystore for your Cryptographic Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE RPG program for initializing a keystore for your Cryptographic Coprocessor
        • Creating AES, DES, and PKA keys
          • Example: Creating a DES key with your Cryptographic Coprocessor
          • Example: Creating a PKA key with your Cryptographic Coprocessor
        • Encrypting or decrypting a file
          • Example: Encrypting data with your Cryptographic Coprocessor
        • Working with PINs
          • Example: Working with PINs on your Cryptographic Coprocessor
        • Generating and verifying a digital signature
          • Example: Signing a file with your Cryptographic Coprocessor
          • Example: Verifying a digital signature with your Cryptographic Coprocessor
        • Managing multiple Cryptographic Coprocessors
          • Example: ILE C program for allocating a Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE RPG program for allocating a Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE C program for deallocating a Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE RPG program for deallocating a Coprocessor
        • Cloning master keys
          • Example: ILE C program for setting the min and max values for master key shares in your Cryptographic Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE RPG program for setting the min and max values for master key shares in your Cryptographic Coprocessor
          • Example: ILE C program for generating a retained key pair for cloning master keys
          • Example: ILE RPG program for generating a retained key pair for cloning master keys
          • Example: ILE C program for registering a public key hash
          • Example: ILE RPG program for registering a public key hash
          • Example: ILE C program for registering a public key certificate
          • Example: ILE RPG program for registering a public key certificate
          • Example: ILE C program for certifying a public key token
          • Example: ILE RPG program for certifying a public key token
          • Example: ILE C program for obtaining a master key share
          • Example: ILE RPG program for obtaining a master key share
          • Example: ILE C program for installing a master key share
          • Example: ILE RPG program for installing a master key share
          • Example: ILE C program for listing retained keys
          • Example: ILE RPG program for listing retained keys
          • Example: ILE C program for deleting retained keys
          • Example: ILE RPG program for deleting retained keys
    • Troubleshooting the Cryptographic Coprocessor
      • Reinitializing the Cryptographic Coprocessor
        • Example: ILE C program for reinitializing the Cryptographic Coprocessor
        • Example: ILE RPG program for reinitializing your Cryptographic Coprocessor
      • Using the Hardware Service Manager
    • Related information for Cryptography
  • Secure Perspective
    • PDF file for Secure Perspective
    • Secure Perspective concepts
      • Policy-based security
      • Importing and exporting objects
      • Dictionary term creation
      • Domain configuration
      • Policy creation
      • Term mapping
      • Policy actions
      • Prediction of potential problems
    • Systems controlled by policy considerations
    • Prerequisites for installing Secure Perspective
    • Installing Secure Perspective
      • Installing Secure Perspective on i5/OS V5R4, or later
      • Installing Secure Perspective on i5/OS V5R3
      • Installing Secure Perspective for Windows
      • Installing Secure Perspective agents
        • Prerequisites for installing Secure Perspective agents
    • Writing effective security policies
      • Defining the policy
      • Implementing the policy
      • Managing the policy
    • Related information
  • Digital Certificate Manager
    • PDF file for DCM
    • Concepts
      • Certificate extensions
      • Certificate renewal
      • Distinguished name
      • Digital signatures
      • Public-private key pair
      • Certificate algorithms
      • Certificate Authority
      • Certificate Revocation List locations
      • Online Certificate Status Protocol
      • Certificate stores
      • Cryptography
      • IBM Cryptographic Coprocessors for IBM i
      • Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security
      • Application definitions
      • Validation
    • Scenarios
      • Scenario: Using certificates for external authentication
        • Completing planning work sheets
        • Creating a server or client certificate request
        • Configuring applications to use TLS
        • Importing and assigning the signed public certificate
        • Starting applications in TLS mode
        • (Optional): Defining a CA trust list for an application that requires
      • Scenario: Using certificates for internal authentication
        • Completing planning work sheets
        • Configuring the human resources HTTP Server to use TLS
        • Creating and operating a local CA
        • Configuring client authentication for human resources Web server
        • Starting the human resources Web server in TLS mode
        • Installing a copy of the local CA certificate in a browser
        • Requesting a certificate from the local CA
      • Scenario: Setting up certificate authority with Digital Certificate Manager
        • Completing planning worksheets for DCM
        • Starting IBM HTTP Server for i on System A
        • Configuring System A as a certificate authority
        • Creating digital certificate for System B
        • Renaming .KDB and .RDB files on System B
        • Changing certificate store password on System B
        • Defining CA trust for IBM i VPN key manager on System B
    • Planning for DCM
      • DCM set up requirements
      • Backup and recovery considerations for DCM data
      • Types of digital certificates
      • Public certificates versus private certificates
      • Digital certificates for TLS secure communications
      • Digital certificates for user authentication
      • Digital certificates and Enterprise Identity Mapping
      • Digital certificates for VPN connections
      • Digital certificates for signing objects
      • Digital certificates for verifying object signatures
    • Configuring DCM
      • Starting Digital Certificate Manager
      • Setting up certificates for the first time
        • Creating and operating a local CA
          • Managing user certificates
            • Creating a user certificate
            • Assigning a user certificate
            • Managing user certificates by expiration
          • Using APIs to programmatically issue certificates to users other than IBM i users
          • Obtaining a copy of the private CA certificate
        • Managing certificates from a public Internet CA
          • Managing public Internet certificates for TLS communications sessions
          • Managing public Internet certificates for signing objects
          • Managing certificates for verifying object signatures
      • Renewing an existing certificate
        • Renewing a certificate from the local CA
        • Renewing a certificate from an Internet CA
      • Importing a certificate
    • Managing DCM
      • Using a local CA to issue certificates for other IBM i models
        • Using a private certificate for TLS
        • Using a private certificate for signing objects on a target system
      • Managing applications in DCM
        • Creating an application definition
        • Managing the certificate assignment for an application
        • Defining a CA trust list for an application
      • Managing certificates by expiration
      • Validating certificates and applications
      • Assigning a certificate to applications
      • Managing CRL locations
      • Storing certificate keys on an IBM Cryptographic Coprocessor
        • Using the coprocessor master key to encrypt the certificate private key
      • Managing the request location for a PKIX CA
      • Managing LDAP location for user certificates
      • Signing objects
      • Verifying object signatures
    • Troubleshooting DCM
      • Troubleshooting passwords and general problems
      • Troubleshooting certificate store and key database problems
      • Troubleshooting browser problems
      • Troubleshooting HTTP Server for IBM i problems
      • Troubleshooting assigning a user certificate
    • Related information
  • Enterprise Identity Mapping
    • PDF file for Enterprise Identity Mapping
    • Enterprise Identity Mapping overview
    • Concepts
      • EIM domain controller
      • EIM domain
      • EIM identifier
      • EIM registry definitions
        • System registry definitions
        • Application registry definitions
        • Group registry definitions
      • EIM associations
        • Lookup information
        • Identifier associations
        • Policy associations
          • Default domain policy associations
          • Default registry policy associations
          • Certificate filter policy associations
            • Certificate filters
      • EIM lookup operations
        • Lookup operation examples: Example 1
        • Lookup operation examples: Example 2
        • Lookup operation examples: Example 3
        • Lookup operation examples: Example 4
        • Lookup operation examples: Example 5
      • EIM mapping policy support and enablement
      • EIM access control
        • EIM access control group: API authority
        • EIM access control group: EIM task authority
      • LDAP concepts for EIM
        • Distinguished name
        • Parent distinguished name
        • LDAP schema and other considerations for EIM
      • Enterprise Identity Mapping concepts for IBM i
        • IBM i user profile considerations for EIM
        • IBM i auditing for EIM
        • EIM enabled applications for IBM i
    • Scenarios
    • Planning for Enterprise Identity Mapping
      • Planning Enterprise Identity Mapping for eServer
        • Enterprise Identity Mapping setup requirements for eServer
        • Identifying needed skills and roles
        • Planning an Enterprise Identity Mapping domain
        • Planning an Enterprise Identity Mapping domain controller
        • Developing an Enterprise Identity Mapping registry definition naming plan
        • Developing an identity mapping plan
          • Planning Enterprise Identity Mapping associations
          • Developing an EIM identifier naming plan
        • Enterprise Identity Mapping implementation planning worksheets
        • Planning for Enterprise Identity mapping application development
      • Planning Enterprise Identity Mapping for IBM i
        • EIM installation prerequisites for IBM i
        • Backup and recovery considerations for EIM
    • Configuring Enterprise Identity Mapping
      • Creating and joining a new local domain
      • Creating and joining a new remote domain
      • Joining an existing domain
      • Configuring a secure connection to the EIM domain controller
    • Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping
      • Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping domains
        • Connecting to an EIM domain
        • Enabling policy associations for a domain
        • Testing EIM mappings
        • Deleting an EIM domain and all configuration objects
      • Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping registry definitions
        • Adding a system registry definition
        • Adding an application registry definition
        • Adding a group registry definition
        • Adding an alias to a registry definition
        • Defining a private user registry type in EIM
        • Enabling mapping lookup support and the use of policy associations for a target registry
        • Deleting a registry definition
        • Removing an alias from a registry definition
        • Adding a member to a group registry definition
      • Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping identifiers
        • Creating an EIM identifier
        • Adding an alias to an EIM identifier
        • Removing an alias from an EIM identifier
        • Deleting an EIM identifier
      • Managing EIM associations
        • Creating EIM associations
          • Creating EIM identifier association
          • Creating a policy association
            • Creating a default domain policy association
            • Creating a default registry policy association
            • Creating a certificate filter policy association
        • Adding lookup information to a target user identity
        • Removing lookup information from a target user identity
        • Displaying all identifier associations for an EIM identifier
        • Displaying all policy associations for a domain
        • Displaying all policy associations for a registry definition
        • Deleting an identifier association
        • Deleting a policy association
      • Managing EIM user access control
      • Managing EIM configuration properties
    • Enterprise Identity Mapping APIs
    • Using Enterprise Identity Mapping Java classes
    • Troubleshooting Enterprise Identity Mapping
      • Troubleshooting domain controller connection problems
      • Troubleshooting general EIM configuration and domain problems
      • Troubleshooting EIM mapping problems
    • Related information
  • 침입 감지
    • IBM i 7.3의 새로운 사항
    • 침입 감지에 대한 PDF 파일
    • 침입 감지 개념
      • 침입 감지 시스템 초기화
      • 침입 감지 시스템 운영
      • 침입 감지와 방지
      • 실시간 침입과 압출 감지 알림
      • 침입과 압출 유형
        • 공격 이벤트
        • 압출 이벤트
        • 스캔 이벤트
        • 트래픽 규정 이벤트
        • 가변 동적 스로틀링
    • 침입 감지 시스템 GUI 사용
    • 침입 감지 시스템 등록정보 설정
      • 전자 우편과 메세지 알림 설정
      • 침입 감지 시스템 시작
      • 침입 감지 시스템 중단
    • 침입 감지 정책 작성
      • 일련의 디폴트 침입 감지 정책 작성
      • 공격 정책 작성
      • 스캔 정책 작성
      • 트래픽 규정 정책 작성
      • 다른 정책을 기반으로 침입 감지 정책 작성
    • 침입 감지 정책 관리
      • 침입 감지 정책 변경
      • 침입 감지 정책 삭제
      • 침입 감지 정책을 사용으로 설정
      • 침입 감지 정책을 사용 안함으로 설정
      • 침입 감지 정책 파일 백업
      • 침입 감지 프로그램 쓰기
    • 침입 감지 이벤트 표시
      • 침입 감지 이벤트 필터링
      • 침입 모니터 감사 레코드 항목
        • IM(침입 모니터) 저널 항목
    • 예: 침입 감지
      • 예: 트래픽 규정 정책
      • 예: 제한된 IP 옵션 정책
      • 예: 빈번한 에코 정책
      • 예: 전자 우편 알림
      • 예: 침입 감지 스캔 정책
      • 예: 스캔 이벤트를 위한 가변 동적 스로틀링
      • 예: 트래픽 규정 이벤트를 위한 가변 동적 스로틀링
    • 침입 감지에 대한 관련 정보
  • IP filtering and network address translation
    • PDF file for IP filtering and network address translation
    • Scenarios: Packet rules
      • Scenario: Mapping IP addresses using NAT
      • Scenario: Creating filter rules to allow HTTP, Telnet, and FTP traffic
      • Scenario: Combining NAT and IP filtering
      • Scenario: Hiding IP addresses using masquerade NAT
    • Packet rules concepts
      • Packet rules terminology
      • Packet rules versus other IBM i security solutions
      • Network address translation
        • Static (map) NAT
        • Masquerade (hide) NAT
        • Masquerade (port-mapped) NAT
      • IP filtering
        • Sample filter statements
        • IP packet header
      • Organizing NAT rules with IP filter rules
      • Organizing multiple IP filter rules
      • Spoof protection
    • Planning for packet rules
      • Packet rules: User authority requirements
      • Packet rules: System requirements
      • Packet rules: Planning worksheet
    • Configuring packet rules
      • Accessing the packet rules editor
      • Defining addresses and services
      • Creating NAT rules
      • Creating IP filter rules
      • Defining IP filter interfaces
      • Including files in packet rules
      • Adding comments in the packet rules
      • Verifying packet rules
      • Activating packet rules
    • Managing packet rules
      • Deactivating packet rules
      • Viewing packet rules
      • Editing packet rules
      • Backing up packet rules
      • Journaling and auditing packet rules actions by packet rules
    • Troubleshooting packet rules
    • Related information for IP filtering and network address translation
  • Network authentication service
    • PDF file for Network authentication service
    • Concepts
      • Kerberos concepts
      • How network authentication service works
      • Network authentication service protocols
      • Network authentication service environment variables
    • Scenarios
      • Scenario: Setting up a Kerberos server in PASE for i
        • Completing the planning work sheets
        • Configuring Kerberos server in IBM i PASE
        • Changing encryption values on IBM i PASE Kerberos server
        • Stopping and restarting Kerberos server in PASE for i
        • Creating host principals for Windows workstations
        • Creating user principals on the Kerberos server
        • Adding System A service principal to the Kerberos server
        • Configuring Windows workstations
        • Configuring network authentication service
        • Creating a home directory for users on System A
        • Testing network authentication service
      • Scenario: Configuring network authentication service
        • Completing the planning work sheets
        • Configuring network authentication service on System A
        • Adding System A principal to the Kerberos server
        • Creating a home directory for users on System A
        • Testing network authentication service on System A
      • Scenario: Setting up cross-realm trust
        • Completing the planning work sheets
        • Ensuring that the Kerberos server in IBM i PASE on System B has started
        • Creating a cross-realm trust principal on the IBM i PASE Kerberos server
        • Changing encryption values on IBM i PASE Kerberos server
        • Configuring the Windows server to trust SHIPDEPT.MYCO.COM
        • Adding the SHIPDEPT.MYCO.COM realm to System A
      • Scenario: Enabling single sign-on for IBM i
        • Completing the planning work sheets
        • Creating a basic single sign-on configuration for System A
        • Configuring System B to participate in the EIM domain and configuring System B for network authentication service
        • Adding both IBM i service principals to the Kerberos server
        • Creating user profiles on Systems A and B
        • Creating home directories on Systems A and B
        • Testing network authentication service on Systems A and B
        • Creating EIM identifiers for two administrators, John Day and Sharon Jones
        • Creating identifier associations for John Day
        • Creating identifier associations for Sharon Jones
        • Creating default registry policy associations
        • Enabling registries to participate in lookup operations and to use policy associations
        • Testing EIM identity mappings
        • Configuring IBM i Access Client Solutions applications to use Kerberos authentication
        • Verifying network authentication service and EIM configuration
        • Postconfiguration considerations
    • Planning network authentication service
      • Planning a Kerberos server
      • Planning realms
      • Planning principal names
      • Host name resolution considerations
        • Resolving your host names
      • Network authentication service planning work sheets
    • Configuring network authentication service
      • Configuring a Kerberos server in PASE for i
        • Changing encryption values on Kerberos server
        • Stopping and restarting the Kerberos server
        • Creating host, user, and service principals
        • Configuring Windows workstations
        • Configuring a secondary Kerberos server
      • Configuring network authentication service
        • Adding IBM i principals to the Kerberos server
        • Creating a home directory
        • Testing network authentication service configuration
    • Managing network authentication service
      • Synchronizing system times
      • Adding realms
      • Deleting realms
      • Adding a Kerberos server to a realm
      • Adding a password server
      • Creating a trust relationship between realms
      • Changing host resolution
      • Adding encryption settings
      • Obtaining or renewing ticket-granting tickets
        • kinit
      • Displaying credentials cache
        • klist
      • Managing keytab files
        • keytab
      • Changing Kerberos passwords
        • kpasswd
      • Deleting expired credentials cache files
        • kdestroy
      • Managing Kerberos service entries in LDAP directories
        • ksetup
      • Defining realms in the DNS database
      • Defining realms in the LDAP server
        • Defining schema on an LDAP server
    • Troubleshooting
      • Network authentication service errors and recovery
      • Application connection problems and recovery
      • API trace tool
        • Setting up the API trace tool
        • Accessing the API trace log file
      • Troubleshooting Kerberos server in IBM i PASE
    • Network authentication service commands
    • Related information
  • Object signing and signature verification
    • PDF file for Object signing and signature verification
    • Object signing concepts
      • Digital signatures
      • Signable objects
      • Object signing processing
      • Signature verification processing
      • Code checker integrity verification function
    • Object signing scenarios
      • Scenario: Using DCM to sign objects and verify signatures
        • Scenario details: Using DCM to sign objects and verify signatures
      • Scenario: Using APIs to sign objects and verify object signatures
        • Scenario details: Using APIs to sign objects and verify object signatures
    • Object signing and signature verification prerequisites
    • Managing signed objects
      • System values and commands that affect signed objects
      • Save and restore considerations for signed objects
      • Code checker commands to ensure signature integrity
      • Verifying code checker function integrity
    • Troubleshooting signed objects
      • Troubleshooting object signing errors
      • Troubleshooting signature verification errors
      • Interpreting code checker verification error messages
    • Related information for object signing and signature verification
  • TLS(Transport Layer Security)
    • IBM i 7.4의 새로운 사항
    • TLS의 PDF 파일
    • TLS 구현
    • 보안 게시판
    • 시스템 TLS
      • 시스템 TLS를 사용하도록 코딩하는 방법
      • 시스템 TLS 시스템 레벨 설정
        • 프로토콜 구성
        • Cipher suite 구성
        • 서명 알고리즘
          • 인증서 선택
          • 메세지 서명
        • 최소 RSA 키 크기
        • 지원되는 그룹
        • 미들박스 호환 모드
        • 재협상
        • 키 갱신
      • 온라인 인증 상태 프로토콜
        • OCSP 구성
        • OCSP 폐기 상태
      • 인증서 폐기
      • 복수 인증서 선택
      • DCM 애플리케이션 정의
        • TLS 프로토콜
        • TLS 암호 스펙 옵션
        • 확장 재협상 중요 모드
        • 서버명 표시
        • 온라인 인증 상태 프로토콜 속성
          • OCSP URL
          • OCSP AIA 처리
        • 키 교환을 위한 TLS 서명 알고리즘
        • 인증서를 위한 TLS 서명 알고리즘
        • TLS 보안 세션 캐시 TTL(Time To Live)
      • TLSCONFIG 명령
      • TLS 속성 검색
      • 시스템에서 사용되는 시스템 TLS 프로토콜 및 Cipher suite 판별 방법
        • 감사 저널
        • LIC 추적
        • 시스템 TLS 프로토콜 버전 카운터
    • TLS 문제해결
    • TLS 요구사항
    • TLS로 애플리케이션 보안
    • 관련 정보
  • 시나리오: SSL을 사용하여 중앙 관리 서버에 대한 모든 연결 보안
  • Security reference
    • What's new for IBM i 7.4
    • PDF file for Security reference
    • Introduction to IBM i security
      • Physical security
      • Security level
      • System values
      • Signing
      • Single sign-on enablement
      • User profiles
      • Group profiles
      • Resource security
      • Security audit journal
      • Independent disk pool
    • Using System Security (QSecurity) system value
      • Security level 10
      • Security level 20
        • Changing to level 20 from level 10
        • Changing to level 20 from a higher level
      • Security level 30
        • Changing to level 30 from a lower level
      • Security level 40
        • Preventing the use of unsupported interfaces
        • Protecting job descriptions
        • Signing on without a user ID and password
        • Enhanced hardware storage protection
        • Protecting a program’s associated space
        • Protecting a job’s address space
        • Validating parameters
        • Validation of programs being restored
        • Changing to security level 40
        • Disabling security level 40
      • Security level 50
        • Restricting user domain objects
        • Restricting message handling
        • Preventing modification of internal control blocks
        • Changing to security level 50
        • Disabling security level 50
    • Security system values
      • General security system values
        • Allow User Domain Objects (QALWUSRDMN)
        • Authority for New Objects (QCRTAUT)
        • Display Sign-On Information (QDSPSGNINF)
        • Inactive Job Time-Out Interval (QINACTITV)
        • Inactive Job Time-Out Message Queue (QINACTMSGQ)
        • Limit Device Sessions (QLMTDEVSSN)
        • Limit Security Officer (QLMTSECOFR)
        • Maximum Sign-On Attempts (QMAXSIGN)
        • Action When Sign-On Attempts Reached (QMAXSGNACN)
        • Retain Server Security (QRETSVRSEC)
        • Remote power-on and restart (QRMTIPL)
        • Remote Sign-On Control (QRMTSIGN)
        • Scan File Systems (QSCANFS)
        • Scan File Systems Control (QSCANFSCTL)
        • Share Memory Control (QSHRMEMCTL)
        • Use Adopted Authority (QUSEADPAUT)
      • Security-related system values
        • Automatic Device Configuration (QAUTOCFG)
        • Automatic Configuration of Virtual Devices (QAUTOVRT)
        • Device Recovery Action (QDEVRCYACN)
        • Disconnected Job Time-Out Interval (QDSCJOBITV)
        • Remote Service Attribute (QRMTSRVATR)
        • Transport Layer Security (TLS) cipher specification list (QSSLCSL)
        • Transport Layer Security (TLS) cipher control (QSSLCSLCTL)
        • Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocols (QSSLPCL)
      • Security-related restore system values
        • Verify Object on Restore (QVFYOBJRST)
        • Force Conversion on Restore (QFRCCVNRST)
        • Allow Restoring of Security-Sensitive Objects (QALWOBJRST)
      • System values that apply to passwords
        • Block Password Change (QPWDCHGBLK)
        • Password Expiration Interval (QPWDEXPITV)
        • Password Expiration Warning (QPWDEXPWRN)
        • Password Level (QPWDLVL)
        • Minimum Length of Passwords (QPWDMINLEN)
        • Maximum Length of Passwords (QPWDMAXLEN)
        • Required Difference in Passwords (QPWDRQDDIF)
        • Restricted Characters for Passwords (QPWDLMTCHR)
        • Restriction of Consecutive Digits for Passwords (QPWDLMTAJC)
        • Restriction of Repeated Characters for Passwords (QPWDLMTREP)
        • Character Position Difference for Passwords (QPWDPOSDIF)
        • Requirement for Numeric Character in Passwords (QPWDRQDDGT)
        • Password Rules (QPWDRULES)
        • Password Approval Program (QPWDVLDPGM)
          • Using a password approval program
      • System values that control auditing
        • Auditing Control (QAUDCTL)
        • Auditing End Action (QAUDENDACN)
        • Auditing Force Level (QAUDFRCLVL)
        • Auditing Level (QAUDLVL)
        • Auditing Level Extension (QAUDLVL2)
        • Auditing for New Objects (QCRTOBJAUD)
    • User profiles
      • Roles of the user profile
      • Group profiles
      • User-profile parameter fields
        • User profile name
        • Password
        • Set password to expired
        • Status
        • User class
        • Assistance level
        • Current library
        • Initial program
        • Initial menu
        • Limit capabilities
        • Text
        • Special authority
          • *ALLOBJ special authority
          • *SECADM special authority
          • *JOBCTL special authority
          • *SPLCTL special authority
          • *SAVSYS special authority
          • *SERVICE special authority
            • Granting access to traces
          • *AUDIT special authority
          • *IOSYSCFG special authority
        • Special environment
        • Display sign-on information
        • Password expiration interval
        • Block Password Change
        • Local password management
        • Limit device sessions
        • Keyboard buffering
        • Maximum storage
        • Priority limit
        • Job description
        • Group profile
        • Owner
        • Group authority
        • Group authority type
        • Supplemental groups
        • Accounting code
        • Document password
        • Message queue
        • Delivery
        • Severity
        • Print device
        • Output queue
        • Attention-Key-Handling program
        • Sort Sequence
        • Language identifier
        • Country or region identifier
        • Coded character set identifier
        • Character identifier control
        • Job attributes
        • Locale
        • User Options
        • User identification number
        • Group identification number
        • Home directory
        • EIM association
        • User expiration date
        • User expiration interval
        • Authority
      • Object auditing
      • Action auditing
      • Additional information associated with a user profile
        • Private authorities
        • Primary group authorities
        • Owned object information
      • Digital ID authentication
      • Working with user profiles
        • Creating user profiles
          • Using the Work with User Profiles command
          • Using the Create User Profile command
          • Using the Work with User Enrollment option
        • Copying user profiles
          • Copying from the Work with User Profiles display
          • Copying from the Work with User Enrollment display
          • Copying private authorities
        • Changing user profiles
        • Deleting user profiles
          • Using the Delete User Profile command
          • Using the Remove User option
        • Working with Objects by Private Authorities
        • Working with Objects by Primary Group
        • Enabling a user profile
        • Listing user profiles
          • Displaying an individual profile
          • Listing all profiles
          • Types of user profile displays
          • Types of user profile reports
        • Renaming a user profile
        • Working with user auditing
        • Working with profiles in CL programs
        • User profile exit points
        • IBM-supplied user profiles
          • Changing passwords for IBM-supplied user profiles
          • Working with service tools user IDs
          • System password
    • Resource security
      • Defining who can access information
      • Defining how information can be accessed
        • Commonly used authorities
      • Defining what information can be accessed
        • Library security
          • Library security and library lists
        • Field authorities
        • Security and the System/38 Environment
          • Recommendation for System/38 Environment
        • Directory security
        • Authorization list security
          • Authorization list management
          • Using authorization lists to secure IBM-supplied objects
      • Authority for new objects in a library
        • Create Authority (CRTAUT) risks
      • Authority for new objects in a directory
      • Object ownership
        • Group ownership of objects
        • Primary group for an object
        • Default Owner (QDFTOWN) user profile
        • Assigning authority and ownership to new objects
      • Objects that adopt the owner's authority
        • Adopted authority risks and recommendations
      • Programs that ignore adopted authority
      • Authority holders
        • Authority holders and System/36 Migration
        • Authority holder risks
      • Working with authority
        • Authority displays
        • Authority reports
        • Working with libraries
        • Creating objects
        • Working with individual object authority
          • Specifying user-defined authority
          • Giving authority to new users
          • Removing a user's authority
        • Working with authority for multiple objects
        • Working with object ownership
        • Working with primary group authority
        • Using a referenced object
        • Copying authority from a user
        • Working with authorization lists
          • Advantages of using an authorization list
          • Creating an authorization list
          • Giving users authority to an authorization list
          • Securing objects with an authorization list
          • Setting up an authorization list
          • Deleting an authorization list
      • How the system checks authority
        • Authority checking flowcharts
          • Flowchart 1: Main authority checking process
          • Flowchart 2: Fast path for object authority checking
          • Flowchart 3: How user authority to an object is checked
          • Flowchart 4: How owner authority is checked
          • Flowchart 5: Fast path for user authority checking
          • Flowchart 6: How group authority is checked
          • Flowchart 7: How public authority is checked
          • Flowchart 8: How adopted authority is checked
        • Authority checking examples
          • Case 1: Using private group authority
          • Case 2: Using primary group authority
          • Case 3: Using public authority
          • Case 4: Using public authority without searching private authority
          • Case 5: Using adopted authority
          • Case 6: User and group authority
          • Case 7: Public authority without private authority
          • Case 8: Adopted authority without private authority
          • Case 9: Using an authorization list
          • Case 10: Using multiple groups
          • Case 11: Combining authorization methods
      • Authority cache
    • Work management security
      • Job initiation
        • Starting an interactive job
        • Starting a batch job
        • Adopted authority and batch jobs
      • Workstations
        • Ownership of device descriptions
      • Signon screen display file
        • Changing the signon screen display
          • Display file source for the signon screen
          • Changing the signon display file
      • Subsystem descriptions
        • Controlling how jobs enter the system
      • Job descriptions
      • System operator message queue
      • Library lists
        • Security risks of library lists
          • Change in function
          • Unauthorized access to information
        • Recommendations for system portion of library list
        • Recommendations for product library
        • Recommendations for the current library
        • Recommendations for the user portion of the library list
      • Printing
        • Securing spooled files
          • Display Data (DSPDTA) parameter of output queue
          • Authority to Check (AUTCHK) parameter of output queue
          • Operator Control (OPRCTL) parameter of output queue
        • Output queue and parameter authorities required for printing
        • Examples: Output queue
      • Network attributes
        • Job Action (JOBACN) network attribute
        • Client Request Access (PCSACC) network attribute
          • Risks and recommendations
        • DDM Request Access (DDMACC) network attribute
      • Save and restore operations
        • Restricting save and restore operations
        • Example: Restricting save and restore commands
      • Performance tuning
        • Restricting jobs to batch
    • Designing security
      • Overall recommendations for security design
      • Planning password level changes
        • Considerations for changing QPWDLVL from 0 to 1
        • Considerations for changing QPWDLVL from 0 or 1 to 2
        • Considerations for changing QPWDLVL from 2 to 3
        • Changing QPWDLVL to a lower password level
      • Planning libraries
        • Planning applications to prevent large profiles
        • Library lists
          • Controlling the user library list
          • Changing the system library list
        • Describing library security
      • Planning menus
        • Describing menu security
        • Using adopted authority in menu design
          • Ignoring adopted authority
        • System request menu
      • Planning command security
      • Planning file security
        • Securing logical files
        • Overriding files
        • File security and SQL
      • Planning group profiles
        • Considerations for primary groups for objects
        • Considerations for multiple group profiles
          • Accumulating special authorities for group profile members
        • Using an individual profile as a group profile
      • Comparison of group profiles and authorization lists
      • Planning security for programmers
        • Managing source files
        • Protecting Java class files and jar files in the integrated file system
        • Planning security for system programmers or managers
      • Mitigating Spectre and Meltdown vulnerabilities in new and existing programs
      • Using validation lists
      • Limit access to program function
      • Separation of duties
    • Backup and recovery of security information
      • How security information is stored
      • Saving security information
      • Recovering security information
        • Restoring user profiles
        • Restoring objects
        • Restoring authority
        • Restoring programs
        • Restoring licensed programs
        • Restoring authorization lists
          • Recovering the authorization list
          • Recovering the association of objects to the authorization list
        • Restoring the operating system
      • *SAVSYS special authority
      • Auditing save and restore operations
    • Auditing security on IBM i
      • Checklist for security officers and auditors
        • Physical security
        • System values
        • IBM-supplied user profiles
        • Password control
        • User and group profiles
        • Authorization control
        • Unauthorized access
        • Unauthorized programs
        • Communications
      • Using the security audit journal
        • Planning security auditing
          • Planning the auditing of actions
            • Action auditing values
            • Security auditing journal entries
          • Planning the auditing of object access
            • Displaying object auditing
            • Setting default auditing for objects
          • Preventing loss of auditing information
          • Choosing not to audit QTEMP objects
        • Using CHGSECAUD to set up security auditing
        • Setting up security auditing
        • Managing the audit journal and journal receivers
          • Saving and deleting audit journal receivers
            • System-managed journal receivers
            • User-managed journal receivers
        • Stopping the audit function
        • Analyzing audit journal entries
          • Viewing audit journal entries
          • Analyzing audit journal entries with query or a program
      • Relationship of object Change Date/Time to audit records
      • Other techniques for monitoring security
        • Monitoring security messages
        • Using the history log
        • Using journals to monitor object activity
        • Analyzing user profiles
          • Printing selected user profiles
          • Examining large user profiles
        • Analyzing object and library authorities
        • Analyzing programs that adopt authority
        • Checking for objects that have been altered
        • Checking the operating system
        • Auditing the security officer’s actions
    • Authority collection
      • Authority collection interfaces
      • Start authority collection
      • Change an object's authority collection value
      • Authority collection repository damage
      • Save and restore considerations
      • Special considerations for authority collection
      • End authority collection
      • Delete authority collection repository
      • Display authority collection data
      • Analyze authority collection data
      • Authority collection views
    • Security commands
      • Authority holders commands
      • Authority lists commands
      • Object authority and auditing commands
      • Passwords commands
      • User profiles commands
      • Related user profile commands
      • Auditing commands
      • Document library objects commands
      • Server authentication entries commands
      • System distribution directory commands
      • Validation lists commands
      • Function usage information commands
      • Auditing security tools commands
      • Authority security tools commands
      • System security tools commands
    • IBM-supplied user profiles
      • Default values for user profiles
      • IBM-supplied user profiles
    • Commands shipped with public authority *EXCLUDE
    • Authority required for objects used by commands
      • Command usage assumptions
      • General rules for object authorities on commands
      • Common commands for most objects
      • Access path recovery commands
      • IBM i Access for Web commands
      • Advanced Function Presentation (AFP) commands
      • Alerts commands
      • Application development commands
      • Authority collection commands
      • Authority holder commands
      • Authorization list commands
      • Binding directory commands
      • Change request description commands
      • Chart commands
      • Class commands
      • Class-of-service commands
      • Command (*CMD) commands
      • Commitment control commands
      • Communications side information commands
      • Configuration commands
      • Configuration list commands
      • Connection list commands
      • Controller description commands
      • Cryptography commands
      • Data area commands
      • Data queue commands
      • Device description commands
      • Device emulation commands
      • Directory and directory shadowing commands
      • Directory server commands
      • Disk commands
      • Display station pass-through commands
      • Distribution commands
      • Distribution list commands
      • Document library object commands
      • Domain Name System commands
      • Double-byte character set commands
      • Edit description commands
      • Environment variable commands
      • Extended wireless LAN configuration commands
      • File commands
      • Filter commands
      • Finance commands
      • Function usage commands
      • IBM i graphical operations commands
      • Graphics symbol set commands
      • High availability commands
      • Host server commands
      • Image catalog commands
      • Integrated file system commands
      • Interactive data definition commands
      • Internetwork Packet Exchange (IPX) commands
      • Information search index commands
      • IPL attribute commands
      • Java commands
      • Job commands
      • Job description commands
      • Job queue commands
      • Job schedule commands
      • Journal commands
      • Journal receiver commands
      • Kerberos commands
      • Language commands
      • Library commands
      • License key commands
      • Licensed program commands
      • Line description commands
      • Local Area Network (LAN) commands
      • Locale commands
      • Mail server framework commands
      • Media commands
      • Menu and panel group commands
      • Message commands
      • Message description commands
      • Message file commands
      • Message queue commands
      • Mode description commands
      • Module commands
      • NetBIOS description commands
      • Network commands
      • Network file system commands
      • Network interface description commands
      • Network server commands
      • Network server configuration commands
      • Network server description commands
      • Node list commands
      • Office services commands
      • Online education commands
      • Operational assistant commands
      • Optical commands
      • Output queue commands
      • Package commands
      • Performance commands
      • Print descriptor group commands
      • Print Services Facility configuration commands
      • Problem commands
      • Program commands
      • QSH shell interpreter commands
      • Query commands
      • Question and answer commands
      • Reader commands
      • Registration facility commands
      • Relational database commands
      • Resource commands
      • Remote Job Entry (RJE) commands
      • Security attributes commands
      • Server authentication entry commands
      • Service commands
      • Service tools commands
      • Spelling aid dictionary commands
      • Sphere of control commands
      • Spooled file commands
      • Subsystem description commands
      • System commands
      • System reply list commands
      • System value commands
      • System/36 environment commands
      • Table commands
      • TCP/IP commands
      • Time zone description commands
      • User index, user queue, and user space commands
      • User-defined file system commands
      • User profile commands
      • Validation list commands
      • Workload capping group commands
      • Workstation customization commands
      • Writer commands
    • Object operations and auditing
      • Operations common to all object types
      • Operations for Access Path Recovery Times
      • Operations for Alert Table (*ALRTBL)
      • Operations for Authorization List (*AUTL)
      • Operations for Authority Holder (*AUTHLR)
      • Operations for Binding Directory (*BNDDIR)
      • Operations for Configuration List (*CFGL)
      • Operations for Special Files (*CHRSF)
      • Operations for Chart Format (*CHTFMT)
      • Operations for C Locale Description (*CLD)
      • Operations for Change Request Description (*CRQD)
      • Operations for Class (*CLS)
      • Operations for Command (*CMD)
      • Operations for Connection List (*CNNL)
      • Operations for Class-of-Service Description (*COSD)
      • Operations for Communications Side Information (*CSI)
      • Operations for Cross System Product Map (*CSPMAP)
      • Operations for Cross System Product Table (*CSPTBL)
      • Operations for Controller Description (*CTLD)
      • Operations for Device Description (*DEVD)
      • Operations for Directory (*DIR)
      • Operations for Directory Server
      • Operations for Document Library Object (*DOC or *FLR)
      • Operations for Data Area (*DTAARA)
      • Operations for Interactive Data Definition Utility (*DTADCT)
      • Operations for Data Queue (*DTAQ)
      • Operations for Edit Description (*EDTD)
      • Operations for Exit Registration (*EXITRG)
      • Operations for Forms Control Table (*FCT)
      • Operations for File (*FILE)
      • Operations for First-in First-out Files (*FIFO)
      • Operations for Folder (*FLR)
      • Operations for Font Resource (*FNTRSC)
      • Operations for Form Definition (*FORMDF)
      • Operations for Filter Object (*FTR)
      • Operations for Graphics Symbols Set (*GSS)
      • Operations for Double-byte Character Set Dictionary (*IGCDCT)
      • Operations for Double-byte Character Set Sort (*IGCSRT)
      • Operations for Double-byte Character Set Table (*IGCTBL)
      • Operations for Job Description (*JOBD)
      • Operations for Job Queue (*JOBQ)
      • Operations for Job Scheduler Object (*JOBSCD)
      • Operations for Journal (*JRN)
      • Operations for Journal Receiver (*JRNRCV)
      • Operations for Library (*LIB)
      • Operations for Line Description (*LIND)
      • Operations for Mail Services
      • Operations for Menu (*MENU)
      • Operations for Mode Description (*MODD)
      • Operations for Module Object (*MODULE)
      • Operations for Message File (*MSGF)
      • Operations for Message Queue (*MSGQ)
      • Operations for Node Group (*NODGRP)
      • Operations for Node List (*NODL)
      • Operations for NetBIOS Description (*NTBD)
      • Operations for Network Interface (*NWID)
      • Operations for Network Server Description (*NWSD)
      • Operations for Output Queue (*OUTQ)
      • Operations for Overlay (*OVL)
      • Operations for Page Definition (*PAGDFN)
      • Operations for Page Segment (*PAGSEG)
      • Operations for Print Descriptor Group (*PDG)
      • Operations for Program (*PGM)
      • Operations for Panel Group (*PNLGRP)
      • Operations for Product Availability (*PRDAVL)
      • Operations for Product Definition (*PRDDFN)
      • Operations for Product Load (*PRDLOD)
      • Operations for Query Manager Form (*QMFORM)
      • Operations for Query Manager Query (*QMQRY)
      • Operations for Query Definition (*QRYDFN)
      • Operations for Reference Code Translate Table (*RCT)
      • Operations for Reply List
      • Operations for Subsystem Description (*SBSD)
      • Operations for Information Search Index (*SCHIDX)
      • Operations for Local Socket (*SOCKET)
      • Operations for Spelling Aid Dictionary (*SPADCT)
      • Operations for Spooled Files
      • Operations for SQL Package (*SQLPKG)
      • Operations for Service Program (*SRVPGM)
      • Operations for Session Description (*SSND)
      • Operations for Server Storage Space (*SVRSTG)
      • Operations for Stream File (*STMF)
      • Operations for Symbolic Link (*SYMLNK)
      • Operations for S/36 Machine Description (*S36)
      • Operations for Table (*TBL)
      • Operations for User Index (*USRIDX)
      • Operations for User Profile (*USRPRF)
      • Operations for User Queue (*USRQ)
      • Operations for User Space (*USRSPC)
      • Operations for Validation List (*VLDL)
      • Operations for Workstation Customizing Object (*WSCST)
    • Layout of audit journal entries
      • Standard heading fields for audit journal entries QJORDJE5 Record Format (*TYPE5)
      • Standard heading fields for audit journal entries QJORDJE4 Record Format (*TYPE4)
      • Standard heading fields for audit journal entries QJORDJE2 Record Format (*TYPE2)
      • Audit Journal (QAUDJRN) entry types
      • AD (Auditing Change) journal entries
      • AF (Authority Failure) journal entries
      • AP (Adopted Authority) journal entries
      • AU (Attribute Changes) journal entries
      • AX (Row and Column Access Control) journal entries
      • CA (Authority Changes) journal entries
      • CD (Command String) journal entries
      • CO (Create Object) journal entries
      • CP (User Profile Changes) journal entries
      • CQ (*CRQD Changes) journal entries
      • CU (Cluster Operations) journal entries
      • CV (Connection Verification) journal entries
      • CY (Cryptographic Configuration) journal entries
      • DI (Directory Server) journal entries
      • DO (Delete Operation) journal entries
      • DS (Service Tools User ID and Attribute Changes) journal entries
      • EV (Environment Variable) journal entries
      • GR (Generic Record) journal entries
      • GS (Give Descriptor) journal entries
      • IM (Intrusion Monitor) journal entries
      • IP (Interprocess Communication) journal entries
      • IR (IP Rules Actions) journal entries
      • IS (Internet Security Management) journal entries
      • JD (Job Description Change) journal entries
      • JS (Job Change) journal entries
      • KF (Key Ring File) journal entries
      • LD (Link, Unlink, Search Directory) journal entries
      • ML (Mail Actions) journal entries
      • M0 (Db2 Mirror Setup Tools) journal entries
      • M6 (Db2 Mirror Communication Services) journal entries
      • M7 (Db2 Mirror Replication Services) journal entries
      • M8 (Db2 Mirror Product Services) journal entries
      • M9 (Db2 Mirror Replication State) journal entries
      • NA (Attribute Change) journal entries
      • ND (APPN Directory Search Filter) journal entries
      • NE (APPN End Point Filter) journal entries
      • OM (Object Management Change) journal entries
      • OR (Object Restore) journal entries
      • OW (Ownership Change) journal entries
      • O1 (Optical Access) journal entries
      • O2 (Optical Access) journal entries
      • O3 (Optical Access) journal entries
      • PA (Program Adopt) journal entries
      • PF (PTF Operations) journal entries
      • PG (Primary Group Change) journal entries
      • PO (Printer Output) journal entries
      • PS (Profile Swap) journal entries
      • PU (PTF Object Change) journal entries
      • PW (Password) journal entries
      • RA (Authority Change for Restored Object) journal entries
      • RJ (Restoring Job Description) journal entries
      • RO (Ownership Change for Restored Object) journal entries
      • RP (Restoring Programs that Adopt Authority) journal entries
      • RQ (Restoring Change Request Descriptor Object) journal entries
      • RU (Restore Authority for User Profile) journal entries
      • RZ (Primary Group Change for Restored Object) journal entries
      • SD (Change System Distribution Directory) journal entries
      • SE (Change of Subsystem Routing Entry) journal entries
      • SF (Action to Spooled File) journal entries
      • SG (Asynchronous Signals) journal entries
      • SK (Sockets Connections) journal entries
      • SM (Systems Management Change) journal entries
      • SO (Server Security User Information Actions) journal entries
      • ST (Service Tools Action) journal entries
      • SV (Action to System Value) journal entries
      • VA (Change of Access Control List) journal entries
      • VC (Connection Start and End) journal entries
      • VF (Close of Server Files) journal entries
      • VL (Account Limit Exceeded) journal entries
      • VN (Network Log On and Off) journal entries
      • VO (Validation List) journal entries
      • VP (Network Password Error) journal entries
      • VR (Network Resource Access) journal entries
      • VS (Server Session) journal entries
      • VU (Network Profile Change) journal entries
      • VV (Service Status Change) journal entries
      • X0 (Network Authentication) journal entries
      • X1 (Identity Token) journal entries
      • X2 (Query Manager Profile Changes) journal entries
      • XD (Directory Server Extension) journal entries
      • YC (Change to DLO Object) journal entries
      • YR (Read of DLO Object) journal entries
      • ZC (Change to Object) journal entries
      • ZR (Read of Object) journal entries
      • Numeric codes for access types
    • Commands and menus for security commands
      • Options on the Security Tools menu
      • How to use the Security Batch menu
        • Options on the security batch menu
      • Commands for customizing security
      • Values that are set by the Configure System Security command
        • Changing the program
      • What the Revoke Public Authority command does
        • Changing the program
    • Related information for IBM i security reference
  • Security terminology
  • Service tools
    • What's new for IBM i 7.4
    • PDF file for Service tools
    • Service tools concepts
      • Service tools functions
      • Service tools language versions
      • Service tools server
      • Service tools user IDs
      • Password policies for service tools user IDs
        • Encryption for service tools user ID passwords
        • Password rules for service tools user ID passwords
        • Password expiration interval for service tools user ID passwords
    • Managing service tools
      • Accessing service tools
        • Accessing service tools using SST
        • Accessing service tools using DST
        • Accessing service tools using IBM Navigator for i
      • Configuring the service tools server
        • Configuring the service tools server for DST
        • Configuring the service tools server for IBM i
        • Assigning a certificate used by service tools (including LAN console)
          • Associating a certificate with IBM i service tools
          • Changing the TLS properties for IBM i service tools
      • Changing the service tools language of your system or logical partition
      • Managing service tools user IDs
        • Recommendations for managing service tools user IDs
        • Linking service tools user IDs to user profiles
        • Creating a service tools user ID
        • Changing the functional privileges for a service tools user ID
        • Changing the description for a service tools user ID
        • Displaying a service tools user ID
        • Enabling a service tools user ID
        • Disabling a service tools user ID
        • Deleting a service tools user ID
        • Changing the password expiration interval for a service tools user ID
        • Changing passwords for service tools user IDs
          • Changing the passwords for service tools user IDs using DST
          • Changing the passwords for service tools user IDs using SST
          • Changing service tools user IDs and passwords using the QSYCHGDS API
          • Changing the password for service tools user IDs using the CHGSSTUSR command
        • Recovering or resetting QSECOFR passwords
          • Resetting the QSECOFR user profile password
          • Resetting the QSECOFR service tools user ID and password
        • Saving and restoring service tools security data
          • Saving service tools security data
          • Restoring service tools security data
      • Changing service tools security policies
        • Changing to allow default and expired passwords to be used from SST
        • Changing the service tools system password expiration interval
        • Changing the maximum failed sign-on attempts
        • Changing the duplicate password control
        • Changing the service tools password rules
      • Troubleshooting service tools user IDs and passwords
      • Monitoring service function use
        • Monitoring service function use through SST or DST
        • Monitoring service tools use through IBM i security audit log
    • Related information for Service tools
  • Single sign-on
    • What's new for IBM i 7.4
    • PDF file for Single sign-on
    • Concepts
      • Single sign-on overview
      • Authentication
      • Authorization
      • Domains
      • Identity mapping
      • IBM i enablement
      • ISV enablement
    • Scenarios
      • Scenario: Creating a single sign-on test environment
        • Completing the planning work sheets
        • Creating a basic single sign-on configuration for System A
        • Adding System A service principal to the Kerberos server
        • Creating home directory for John Day on System A
        • Testing network authentication service configuration on System A
        • Creating an EIM identifier for John Day
        • Testing EIM identity mappings
        • Configuring IBM i Access Client Solutions applications to use Kerberos authentication
        • Verifying network authentication service and EIM configuration
        • (Optional) Postconfiguration considerations
      • Scenario: Enabling single sign-on for IBM i
        • Completing the planning work sheets
        • Creating a basic single sign-on configuration for System A
        • Configuring System B to participate in the EIM domain
        • Adding both IBM i service principals to the Kerberos server
        • Creating user profiles on System A and System B
        • Creating home directories on System A and System B
        • Testing network authentication service on System A and System B
        • Creating EIM identifiers for two administrators, John Day and Sharon Jones
        • Creating identifier associations for John Day
        • Creating identifier associations for Sharon Jones
        • Creating default registry policy associations
        • Enabling registries to participate in lookup operations and to use policy associations
        • Testing EIM identity mappings
        • Configuring IBM i Access Client Solutions applications to use Kerberos authentication
        • Verifying network authentication service and EIM configuration
        • (Optional) Postconfiguration considerations
      • Scenario: Enabling single sign-on for ISV applications
        • Completing the planning prerequisite worksheet
        • Writing a new application or change an existing application
        • Creating a single sign-on test environment
        • Testing your application
        • Example: ISV code
    • Planning for single sign-on
      • Requirements for configuring a single sign-on environment
      • Single sign-on planning worksheets
    • Configuring single sign-on
    • Managing single sign-on
    • Troubleshooting single sign-on
    • Related information
  • System i and Internet security
    • PDF file for IBM i and Internet security
    • IBM i and Internet security considerations
    • Planning Internet security
      • The layered defense approach to security
      • Security policy and objectives
      • Scenario: JKL Toy Company e-business plans
    • Security levels for basic Internet readiness
    • Network security options
      • Firewalls
      • i5/OS packet rules
      • Choosing i5/OS network security options
    • Application security options
      • Web serving security
      • Java Internet security
      • E-mail security
      • FTP security
    • Transmission security options
      • Using digital certificates for SSL
        • SSL for secure Telnet access
        • SSL for secure System i Access for Windows
      • Virtual private network for secure private communications
  • Virtual Private Networking
    • PDF file for Virtual private network
    • Concepts
      • IP Security protocols
        • Authentication Header
        • Encapsulating Security Payload
        • AH and ESP combined
        • Enhanced Cryptographic Algorithms
      • Key management
      • IKE version 2
        • IKE_SA rekey
        • URL lookup of certificates
      • Layer 2 Tunnel Protocol
      • Network address translation for VPN
      • NAT compatible IPSec with UDP
      • IP Compression
      • VPN and IP filtering
        • VPN connections with no policy filters
        • Implicit IKE
    • Scenarios
      • Scenario: Basic branch office connection
        • Completing the planning worksheets
        • Configuring VPN on System A
        • Configuring VPN on System C
        • Starting VPN
        • Testing a connection
      • Scenario: Basic business to business connection
        • Completing the planning worksheets
        • Configuring VPN on System A
        • Configuring VPN on System C
        • Activating packet rules
        • Starting a connection
        • Testing a connection
      • Scenario: Protecting an L2TP voluntary tunnel with IPSec
        • Configuring VPN on System A
        • Configuring a PPP connection profile and virtual line on System A
        • Applying the l2tptocorp dynamic-key group to the toCorp PPP profile
        • Configuring VPN on System B
        • Configuring a PPP connection profile and virtual line on System B
        • Activating packet rules
      • Scenario: Firewall friendly VPN
        • Completing the planning worksheets
        • Configuring VPN on Gateway B
        • Configuring VPN on System E
        • Starting Connection
        • Testing the connection
      • Scenario: VPN connection to remote users
        • Completing planning worksheets for VPN connection from the branch office to remote sales people
        • Configuring L2TP terminator profile for System A
        • Starting receiver connection profile
        • Configuring a VPN connection on System A for remote clients
        • Activating filter rules
        • Configuring VPN on Windows client
        • Testing VPN connection between endpoints
      • Scenario: Using network address translation for VPN
    • Planning for VPN
      • VPN setup requirements
      • Determining what type of VPN to create
      • Completing VPN planning work sheets
        • Planning work sheet for dynamic connections
        • Planning work sheet for manual connections
    • Configuring VPN
      • Configuring VPN connections with the New Connection wizard
      • Configuring VPN security policies
        • Configuring an Internet Key Exchange policy
        • Configuring a data policy
      • Configuring a secure VPN connection
      • Configuring a manual connection
      • Configuring a dynamic connection
      • Configuring VPN packet rules
        • Configuring the pre-IPSec filter rule
        • Configuring a policy filter rule
        • Defining an interface for the VPN filter rules
        • Activating VPN packet rules
      • Configure traffic flow confidentiality
      • Configuring extended sequence number
      • Configuring populate from packet
      • Configuring NPF VPN for VIPA
      • Configuration Differences for IKEv2
      • Starting a VPN connection
    • Managing VPN
      • Setting default attributes for your connections
      • Resetting connections in error state
      • Viewing error information
      • Viewing attributes of active connections
      • Viewing VPN server job logs
      • Viewing attributes of Security Associations
      • Stopping a VPN connection
      • Deleting VPN configuration objects
    • Troubleshooting VPN
      • Getting started with VPN troubleshooting
      • Common VPN configuration errors and how to fix them
        • VPN error message: TCP5B28
        • VPN error message: Item not found
        • VPN error message: PARAMETER PINBUF IS NOT VALID
        • VPN error message: Item not found, Remote key server...
        • VPN error message: Unable to update the object
        • VPN error message: Unable to encrypt key...
        • VPN error message: CPF9821
        • VPN error: All keys are blank
        • VPN error: Connection has enabled status after you stop it
        • VPN error: Active filter rules fail to deactivate
        • VPN error: The key connection group for a connection changes
      • Troubleshooting VPN with the QIPFILTER journal
        • Enabling the QIPFILTER journal
        • Using the QIPFILTER journal
        • QIPFILTER journal fields
      • Troubleshooting VPN with the QVPN journal
        • Enabling the QVPN journal
        • Using the QVPN journal
        • QVPN journal fields
      • Troubleshooting VPN with the VPN job logs
        • Common VPN Connection Manager error messages
      • Troubleshooting VPN with the communications trace
    • Related information
• Service and support
  • PDF file for Service and support
  • Service and support overview
    • Electronic Service Agent overview
    • Connectivity
    • Universal Connection
      • Universal Connection concepts
        • Application proxies
        • IP packet filter firewall
        • Transport Layer Security
        • Network address translation
        • SOCKS
        • Virtual private network
    • Problem reporting
    • Fixes
    • Remote support
  • Electronic Customer Support
    • Electronic Customer Support: Command authority
    • Enabling Electronic Customer Support to your system
  • Electronic Service Agent
    • Where to install and activate IBM Electronic Service Agent
    • Pre-activation checklist
    • Activating Electronic Service Agent
    • Configuring Electronic Service Agent
      • Configuring contact information
      • Configuring connectivity to IBM
      • Configuring Electronic Service Agent operational settings
    • Managing Electronic Service Agent
    • Using Electronic Service Agent
    • Troubleshooting Electronic Service Agent
    • Modem and resource requirements
    • Batch activation
  • Setting up a connection to IBM
    • Planning for Universal Connection
    • Configuring Universal Connection
      • Configuring a direct Internet connection
      • Configuring a PPP connection through an ISP
      • Configuring a multi-hop connection
      • Additional Universal Connection configuration procedures
        • Configuring service provider information
        • Testing your connection to Electronic Customer Support
        • Ensuring compatibility with SOCKS
        • Determining the IBM VPN gateway addresses
        • Determining the IBM service destination addresses
    • Scenarios: Universal Connection
      • Direct Internet connection
        • Completing the planning work sheet
        • Starting the Universal Connection Wizard
        • Entering the service, address, and country (or region) information
        • Selecting a direct connection to the Internet as a connection type
        • Configuring a proxy destination
        • Indicating that this system does not provide connectivity for other systems or partitions
        • Reviewing the Summary window
        • Testing the connection
        • Configuring a backup configuration
      • Direct Internet connection from a system that provides connectivity for other systems or partitions
        • Completing the planning work sheet
        • Starting the Universal Connection Wizard
        • Entering the service, address, and country (or region) information
        • Selecting a direct connection to the Internet as a connection type
        • Configuring a proxy destination
        • Specifying that the system provides connectivity for other systems or partitions
        • Selecting an interface the other systems use
        • Creating or selecting L2TP terminator profiles
        • Configuring a service and support proxy server
        • Reviewing the Summary window
        • Testing the connection
        • Configuring a backup configuration
      • PPP connection through an ISP
        • Completing the planning work sheet
        • Starting the Universal Connection Wizard
        • Entering the service, address, and country (or region) information
        • Selecting a connection using an ISP as your connection type
        • Selecting a connection profile for your ISP
        • Indicating that this system does not provide connectivity for other systems or partitions
        • Configuring a proxy destination
        • Reviewing the Summary window
        • Testing the connection
        • Configuring a backup configuration
      • PPP connection from a system that provides connectivity for other systems through an ISP
        • Completing the planning work sheet
        • Starting the Universal Connection Wizard
        • Entering the service, address, and county information
        • Selecting the ISP as a connection type
        • Selecting a connection profile for your ISP
        • Specifying that this system provides connectivity for other systems or partitions connect
        • Selecting an interface the other systems use
        • Creating or selecting an L2TP terminator profile
        • Configuring a service and support proxy server
        • Reviewing the Summary window
        • Testing the connection
        • Configuring a backup configuration
      • Multi-hop connection through a remote system
        • Completing the planning work sheet
        • Starting the Universal Connection Wizard
        • Entering the service, address, and country (or region) information
        • Selecting a multi-hop VPN connection to the Internet
        • Entering a VPN gateway address or host name
        • Configuring a proxy destination
        • Indicating that this system does not provide connectivity for other systems or partitions
        • Reviewing the Summary window
        • Testing the connection
        • Configuring a backup configuration
      • Troubleshooting the Universal Connection wizard
    • Connecting to IBM using CL commands
  • Sending service requests
    • Sending a service request immediately
    • Sending a service request later
  • Related information for Service and support
• Storage solutions
  • What's new for IBM i 7.4
  • PDF file for Storage solutions
  • How storage is viewed
  • Disk
  • Tape
    • Types of tape solutions
      • Automatic cartridge loaders
      • Tape libraries
        • Tape library types and major components
        • Tape library operating modes
        • Common configuration types for tape libraries
        • Cartridge concepts for tape libraries
          • Cartridge status
          • Cartridge categories
          • Cartridge identifiers and volume identifiers
    • Comparing offline storage
    • Planning for a tape solution
      • Tape resource management with BRMS
      • Comparing tape solutions
      • DAT cartridge and tape unit compatibility
      • Eight-millimeter cartridge and tape unit compatibility
      • Quarter-inch cartridge and tape unit compatibility
      • Half-inch and Magstar MP cartridges and tape unit compatibility
      • LTO cartridges and tape unit compatibility
      • Multiple IBM i products sharing a tape library
      • Multiple tape libraries to a partition
      • Multiple tape drives in a Tape Library
      • Configuring of different platforms with the 3494 Enterprise Tape Library
    • Installing stand-alone tape devices
      • Sharing tape drives between partitions
      • Configuring the SCSI address for half-inch and Magstar MP tape units
    • Installing tape libraries
    • Configuring tape libraries
      • Sharing tape library resources
    • Using tape and tape library devices
      • Using tape cartridges
        • Duplicating tape cartridges
        • Formatting tape cartridges
      • Using stand-alone devices
        • Viewing the capabilities of a stand-alone device
      • Using tape libraries
        • Tape library use without a media management application
        • Reassigning cartridges when the system name changes
        • Setting up a tape library as a stand-alone device
        • Setting up a tape library as an alternate IPL device
        • Controlling tape library resources using tape library attributes
          • Controlling tape library resources with APIs
        • Making cartridges available to the tape library inventory
        • Ejecting cartridges from the tape library inventory
        • Using the mounted category to load groups of tapes into a tape device
        • Sharing cartridges
        • End of volume
        • Avoiding deadlocked files during save and restore operations with tape libraries
        • Optimizing tape library performance
        • Viewing the capabilities of a tape library
    • Tape Multipath
      • Managing tape multipath
      • Recover from tape multipath errors
    • Maintaining tape resources
      • Storage and handling of tape cartridges
        • Tape environment
        • Tape handling and storage
        • Protecting data on tape cartridges
        • Ensuring tapes are in good condition
      • Cleaning your tape drives
        • Cleaning quarter-inch tape drives
        • Cleaning DAT tape drives
        • Cleaning eight-millimeter tape drives
        • Cleaning half-inch tape drives
        • Cleaning LTO Ultrium tape drives
      • Licensed Internal Code updates
      • Running retention operations for tape cartridges
      • Example: Managing tape resources
    • Tape encryption
      • Software tape encryption
      • Hardware tape encryption
      • Decrypting your data
    • Troubleshooting tape resources
      • Verifying that your tape unit works correctly
      • Collecting library information for problem analysis
      • Problem handling for tape libraries
  • Removable Mass Storage (RMS)
  • Optical storage
    • Supported hardware for optical storage
    • Optical devices
      • Optical media types
        • Directly attached optical media libraries
        • Optical system configurations
    • Concepts for optical storage
      • Optical volumes
      • Optical directories and files
      • Volume identifiers
    • Optical media formats
      • ISO 9660
        • Volume, directory, and file names
        • Programming interfaces for ISO 9660
      • High performance optical file system
        • Volume, directory, and file names for HPOFS
        • Space reclamation
        • Programming interfaces (HPOFS)
        • Directory structure and performance (HPOFS)
        • Media interchange between LAN and directly attached libraries
      • Universal Disk Format
        • Volume, directory, and file names
        • Programming interfaces (UDF)
        • Directory and file security
        • Media interchange
        • Directory structure and performance (UDF)
      • CL command support for media formats
    • Configuring optical devices
      • Configuring your optical drive
      • Configuring directly attached optical media libraries
      • Labeling optical cartridges
        • Labeling a new optical cartridge with uninitialized volumes
        • Labeling an optical cartridge with an initialized volume
      • Getting started with optical cartridges and volumes
        • Example: Adding optical cartridges to an optical media library
        • Example: Initializing optical volumes
        • Example: Removing an optical disk cartridge
    • Using optical devices
      • Loading, unloading, and varying on optical devices
      • Allocating the device description
      • Allocating and deallocating an optical drive
    • Using optical volumes
      • Displaying optical volumes
      • Initializing optical volumes
      • Renaming optical volumes
      • Adding optical disk cartridges
      • Copying optical volume data
      • Output file support structures
      • Changing optical volume attributes
      • Displaying and printing optical volume attributes
      • Duplicating optical volumes
      • Viewing directory and file information
      • Removing and deleting optical volumes
      • Checking optical volume
      • Changing optical environment parameters
      • Setting write protection
      • Creating a master CD-ROM
    • Optical volume backup
      • Defining a backup strategy
      • Using the Duplicate Optical (DUPOPT) command
        • Enhancements
      • Copy Optical (CPYOPT) command
        • Key parameters of the Copy Optical (CPYOPT) command
        • Using the Copy Optical (CPYOPT) command to back up a volume
        • Volume type *BACKUP
          • Completing backup range
          • Completing backup range: Starting date and time
          • Completing backup range: Ending date and time
          • Completing Backup Range: Last changed date and time
          • Example: Copying to optical type *BACKUP volue
          • Converting an optical type *BACKUP Volume
        • Copy Optical (CPYOPT) command performance
      • Save and restore commands
        • Save (SAV) command support
        • Restore (RST) command support
    • Managing performance in optical media libraries
      • Performance considerations for directly attached optical media libraries
        • Expanding buffer I/O with the HFS API
        • Performance consideration for copying and duplicating optical volumes
        • Volume mounting and dismounting schedule timers
    • Managing optical security and auditing
      • Using authorities required for optical functions
      • Specifying an authorization list
      • Changing the authorization list to secure an optical volume
      • Retaining the authorization list when removing optical volumes
      • Mapping the authorization list to an optical volume
      • Managing directory- and file-level security
      • Optical auditing
    • Reclaiming the optical index database
      • Reclaiming the optical index for a stand-alone optical device
      • Reclaiming types
        • Synchronizing volume index with internal library index (*SYNC)
        • Updating volume index from an optical volume (*UPDATE)
        • Resetting internal library index and reclaim volume index (*RESET)
        • Time required to complete reclaiming the optical index
      • Optical index information
        • Optical index database files
        • Internal library index
      • Choosing the reclaim type to use
    • Recovering held optical files
      • How optical files are used
        • Held optical files
          • Recovering a held optical file
          • Saving a held optical file
          • Releasing a held optical file
          • Implementing held optical file functions
          • Disabling held optical file support
    • Saving and restoring using optical media
      • Concepts for saving and restoring optical media
        • Optical media formats with saving and restoring operations
        • Organizing save and restore data on optical devices
        • Displaying save and restore file information about optical storage
        • Volume list contents
        • Volume lists with HPOFS format media
        • Volume lists with UDF media
      • Saving optical files to optical storage
        • Specifying optical file path names
        • Clearing media
        • Saving to multiple volumes
      • Operating guidelines by optical device type
    • Troubleshooting optical storage
      • Optical support FAQ
      • Collecting information
  • Virtual storage
    • Concepts for IBM i virtual storage
      • Benefits of virtual storage
      • Catalog shadowing
    • IBM i virtual tape
      • Image catalog entry for virtual tape storage
      • Volume spanning for virtual tape storage
      • Planning for virtual tape storage
      • Setting up virtual tape storage
      • Managing virtual tape
        • Formatting of virtual tape images
        • Transporting virtual images to another system
        • Changing the write protection for image catalog entries for virtual tape
        • Using virtual images in an image catalog
        • Adding virtual tape volumes
      • Virtual tape storage error messages
    • IBM i virtual optical storage
      • Image catalog mode
      • Image catalog entry for virtual optical storage
      • Access
      • Volume spanning for virtual optical storage
      • Limitations of virtual optical storage
      • Formatting of virtual optical images
      • Preparing for virtual optical storage
      • Setting up virtual optical storage
      • Managing virtual optical storage
      • Changing the write protection for image catalog entries for virtual optical media
      • Creating actual media from a virtual image
      • Transporting virtual images to another system
      • Virtual optical storage error messages
      • Virtual optical storage using the Network File System
        • Requirements for virtual optical storage within a Network File System network
        • Setting up a virtual optical device within a Network File System network
          • Setting up the server to share virtual optical image files with the client system
          • Setting up the server to share virtual optical image files with the client system for installation and upgrade
          • Setting up the virtual optical device on the client system
        • Using images on the client system
    • Client virtual devices (optical and tape)
  • Storage area networks
  • IBM Cloud Storage Solutions for i for i V1.1.0 사용자 안내서
    • IBM Cloud Storage Solutions for i V1.1.0 사용자 안내서 PDF 파일
    • IBM Cloud Storage Solutions for i
    • Cloud Storage Solutions의 자원에 대한 작업
      • SoftLayer 자원 작성
      • SoftLayer 자원 변경
      • SoftLayer 자원 표시
      • FTP 자원 작성
      • FTP 자원 변경
      • FTP 자원 표시
      • 자원 삭제
      • 자원에 대한 작업
      • 상태에 대한 작업
    • Cloud Storage Solutions의 파일에 대한 작업
      • 클라우드에 파일 복사
      • 클라우드에서 파일 복사
      • 클라우드에서 파일 삭제
    • Cloud Storage Solutions API
      • Cloud Storage Solutions 구성 API
        • SoftLayer 자원 작성 API
        • SoftLayer 자원 변경 API
        • SoftLayer 자원 정보 얻기 API
        • FTP 자원 작성 API
        • FTP 자원 변경 API
        • 자원 삭제 API
        • 자원 목록 얻기 API
      • Cloud Storage Solutions API
        • 클라우드 API에 파일 복사
        • 파일에 클라우드 복사 API
        • 클라우드에서 파일 삭제 API
        • 복원 명령 얻기 API
        • 클라우드의 파일 나열 API
        • 클라우드 전송 상태 얻기 API
      • Cloud Storage Solutions 종료점 구조
        • Qicc 종료 설명 구조
        • Qicc 종료 조작 구조
        • Qicc 종료 제어 값 구조
      • Cloud Storage Solutions 자원 구조
        • Qicc 기본 자원 정보 구조
        • Qicc SoftLayer 자원 정보 구조
        • Qicc FTP 자원 정보 구조
  • Related information for Storage solutions
• 시스템 관리
  • 백업 및 복구
    • Planning a backup and recovery strategy
      • PDF file for Planning a backup and recovery strategy
      • Backup and recovery timeline
      • Knowing what to save and how often to save it
      • Finding your save window
        • Simple save strategy
        • Medium save strategy
          • Saving changed objects
          • Journaling objects and saving journal receivers
        • Complex save strategy
      • Choosing availability options
      • Testing your strategy
      • Planning disaster recovery
        • Disaster recovery plan
    • Backup, Recovery, and Media Services (BRMS)
      • What's new for IBM i 7.4
      • PDF file for BRMS
      • Getting started with BRMS
        • Introduction to IBM Backup, Recovery and Media Services for i (BRMS)
          • Advantages of using BRMS
          • BRMS Standard
          • BRMS Network Feature
          • BRMS Advanced Functions Feature
          • Overview of standard BRMS product functionality
          • BRMS policies
          • BRMS control groups
          • How policies and control groups work together
          • BRMS media management components
          • How the BRMS functional components work together
        • Installing and initializing BRMS
          • Hardware considerations
          • Software considerations
            • Installing Media and Storage Extensions (MSE)
          • Planning for the installation
          • Installing BRMS
          • After the installation
            • Updating license information
          • Removing BRMS from your system
        • Backing up your entire system
          • Enrolling media
            • Determining media classes
            • Enrolling media for use by a stand-alone device
            • Enrolling media for use by a media library
          • Performing the backups
            • Using the *SYSTEM control group
            • Using the *SYSGRP control group
            • Using the *BKUGRP control group
          • Backup and Recovery Log
            • Removing log messages
            • Excluding log messages
            • Sending log messages
          • Printing a backup statistics report
          • Printing your recovery reports
        • Recovering your entire system
          • An overview of the recovery reports
            • Printing the recovery reports
          • Priority sequencing your recovery report
          • Customized recovery step information
          • Using the STRRCYBRM command
          • Resuming a recovery
          • Concurrent recovery
          • Using the Recovering Your Entire System Report
            • Prolog
            • Encryption on the recovery report
            • STEP 001 : Recover Licensed Internal Code
            • STEP 002 : Recover operating system
            • STEP 003 : Set up stand-alone or media library devices for recovery
            • STEP 004 : Recover the BRMS product and associated libraries
            • STEP 005 : Recover BRMS related media information
            • STEP 006 : Initialize BRMS functional authority information
            • STEP 007 : Update system name in BRMS media information
            • STEP 008 : Initialize BRMS device and media library information
            • STEP 009 : Recover user profiles
            • STEP 010 : Change QSECOFR user profile password
            • STEP 011 : Recover configuration data
            • STEP 012 : Recover required system libraries
            • STEP 013 : Reset BRMS device and media library information
            • STEP 014 : Recover all remaining system and user data
            • STEP 015 : Recover IBM product libraries
            • STEP 016 : Recover user libraries
            • STEP 017 : Recover document library objects
            • STEP 018 : Recover directories and files
            • STEP 019 : Recover spooled files for all ASPs
            • STEP 020 : Special recovery processing — Integrated Server Support for IBM i
            • STEP 021 : Special recovery processing — recovering Linux servers in a logical partition
            • STEP 022 : Special recovery processing — IBM DB2 Content Manager OnDemand for IBM i
            • STEP 023 : Update Program Temporary Fix information
            • STEP 024 : Apply journal changes
            • STEP 025 : Recover additional saved system information
            • STEP 026 : Recover authorization information
            • STEP 027 : Verify system information
            • STEP 028 : Apply PTFs
            • STEP 029 : Print job log
            • STEP 030 : Perform IPL
          • Recovery tips
      • Tailoring your BRMS operations
        • Working with devices in BRMS
          • Adding new devices
            • Adding a new device automatically
            • Adding a new device manually
          • Changing an existing device
            • Changing device information for tape stand-alone devices
              • Changing device information for optical stand-alone devices
              • Changing the device name
              • Changing device configuration information
            • Changing device information for media library devices
              • Using the WRKMLBBRM command
              • Setting up an MLB as a shared device
            • Changing device information for virtual tape devices
          • Working with third party tape media libraries
          • Last active device
        • Setting up your media management operation
          • Preparing your media
            • Working with media classes
            • Enrolling media
              • Enrolling multiple volumes for use by stand-alone devices
              • Enrolling multiple volumes for use by media libraries
              • Enrolling volumes for a media library using WRKMLMBRM
              • Enrolling existing volumes
              • Enrolling virtual volumes
              • Adding media contents to the history file from an enrolled volume
            • Initializing volumes
              • How many volumes to initialize
            • Setting up your media inventory system
              • Media set rotation
              • The media scratch pool method
              • Setting up the next volume message prompt
          • Storing your media
            • Media policies
              • Specifying retention periods in the media policy
            • Storage locations
              • The uses of storage locations in BRMS
              • Using the Work with Storage Locations display
            • Containers and container classes
              • Creating a container class
              • Working with containers
              • Managing container movement
            • Media slotting
          • Moving your media
            • Move policies
              • Movement by file groups
              • Movement by control group
              • Working with the move management calendars
            • Initiating movement
              • Initiating movement with the MOVMEDBRM command
              • Initiating movement with the STRMNTBRM command
            • Verifying movement
              • Exempting volumes from movement
              • Printing movement-related reports
          • Tracking your media
            • Working with the BRMS media inventory
            • Printing media status reports
          • Duplicating media
            • Copying volumes with DUPMEDBRM
            • Saving media information for duplicate volumes
            • Remote duplication of media
          • Duplicating saved items
          • Resuming duplication
          • Automatic duplication
          • Reclaiming media
            • Expiring media set volumes
            • Reclaiming fragmented media
          • External label printing
            • How to specify label printing
            • Customizing label printing
        • Tailoring your backup
          • Planning considerations
          • The BRMS system policy
            • Understanding the system policy
              • Changing the presentation controls
          • The BRMS backup policy
            • Changing the backup policy
          • Backup control groups
            • Content of control groups
            • Using the *SAVSYS special value
              • Special considerations for using *SAVSYS as a backup item
              • Scheduling a backup with *SAVSYS
              • Ending and starting subsystems with *SAVSYS
              • Using console monitoring to schedule an *SAVSYS
            • Contents of the default control groups
            • How to work with backup control groups
              • Creating a control group
              • Editing a control group
              • Changing control group attributes
              • Special considerations when saving selected libraries in a control group
                • Omitting libraries from backup
              • Using the Subsystems to Process display
              • Using the Job Queues to Process display
            • Control group processing order
            • Creating backup lists in a control group
              • Creating a folder list
              • Creating an object list
              • Using an object list as a library list
              • Creating a spooled file list
              • Expiring saved spooled files
              • Creating a link list
            • Processing user exits in a control group
            • Backing up your control group
              • How to automatically retry a backup that fails abnormally
              • How to resume a backup
          • Additional options for processing control groups
            • Using the save-while-active feature
              • Activating save-while-active in BRMS
              • Using the Monitor Save While Active for BRM (MONSWABRM) command
              • Working with the save-while-active message queue
              • Using multiple save synchronization
            • Console monitoring
              • Starting the console monitor
              • Interrupting the BRMS console monitor
              • Monitoring the console monitor
              • Canceling the console monitor
            • Submitting a backup to the controlling subsystem
          • Using missed object policies
          • Journaling report object list
          • Software encryption using BRMS
          • Performing serial, concurrent, and parallel backups
            • Concurrent backups
            • Parallel backups
            • Parallel support restrictions
            • When to use parallel and concurrent saves
            • How to set up a parallel backup
          • Sample backup scenarios: Working with multiple control groups and shared devices
            • Scenario 1: Using multiple control groups in a serial backup
            • Scenario 2: Using multiple control groups in parallel and concurrent backups
            • Scenario 3: Performing a backup across a network with shared devices
          • Additional BRMS save commands
        • Performing selected recoveries
          • Recovery policy
          • Working with the STRRCYBRM command
            • Understanding the STRRCYBRM parameters
            • Recovering control groups with STRRCYBRM
            • Recovering multiple control groups
            • Recovering libraries with STRRCYBRM
            • Recovery of individual integrated file system objects
              • Restoring a storage space with BRMS
            • Recovering user profiles
          • Additional restore options in BRMS
            • Recovering objects with object detail
            • Recovering objects without object detail
            • Recovery with apply journal changes
              • System recovery
              • Journaled file and member recovery
            • Recovering individual folders
            • Recovering spooled files saved with output queues
            • Recovering individual spooled files
          • How to perform parallel and concurrent recoveries
            • Recovering multiple control groups with concurrent support
            • Performing parallel recoveries
          • Performing a recovery without the Recovery Analysis Report
            • Identifying the tapes you need
            • Generating a Recovery Analysis Report after a failure
          • Using the recovery planning and activity displays
            • Creating a recovery contact list
            • Creating a recovery activities list
          • Additional BRMS restore commands
        • Daily maintenance in BRMS
          • What the STRMNTBRM command does
          • Scheduling the STRMNTBRM command
          • Processing the STRMNTBRM command in a backup control group
          • Notification of failure to process STRMNTBRM
        • Scheduling backup and recovery jobs
          • Scheduling backup and recovery jobs
            • Scheduling control group backups
              • Precautions when scheduling customized weekly activity
              • Scheduling backups of BRMS save commands
            • Scheduling selected recovery items
          • Working with scheduled jobs
            • Keeping job log information
          • Changing the job scheduler
            • Some notes on substitution variables
      • Advanced topics in BRMS
        • Using the BRMS graphical interface
          • BRMS interface differences
          • Setting up the BRMS plug-in
          • Navigating to the BRMS graphical interface
          • Scenarios: How one company uses BRMS
            • Scenario: System policy properties
            • Scenario: Backup using BRMS
              • JKLDEV backup strategy
              • JKLPROD backup strategy
              • JKLINT backup strategy
            • Scenario: Archiving data
              • Preparing media
              • Adding media
              • Creating archive control group for older data
              • Viewing archive control group report
              • Scheduling archive control group
            • Scenario: Moving media
            • Scenario: Reclaiming media
            • Scenario: Performing recovery operations
              • Recovering a system after a natural disaster using BRMS
              • Restoring an accidentally deleted item using BRMS
          • Specifying system policy properties
          • Backing up your system
            • Backup control groups included with BRMS
            • Creating a backup control group
            • Changing backup control group properties
            • Copying a backup control group to a remote system
            • Performing a fully automated backup
            • Scheduling a backup control group
            • Online backups of Lotus servers
          • Using archives
            • Creating an archive control group
            • Changing archive control group properties
            • Copying an archive control group to a remote system
            • Managing dynamic retrieval
          • Restoring items on your system
            • Restoring individual saved items
            • Printing a recovery report
          • Managing devices
          • Managing disk pools
          • Managing your media
            • Adding media
            • Working with media
            • Creating a media policy
            • Changing media policy properties
            • Reclaiming your media
            • Balancing your media
            • Creating a move policy
            • Verifying media movement
            • Managing containers
            • Managing locations
          • Running BRMS maintenance
          • Viewing or printing BRMS reports
        • BRMS Enterprise
          • BRMS Enterprise concepts
          • Using BRMS Enterprise
            • Navigating to the Enterprise Hub Center panel
            • Changing hub administration options
            • Creating a node
            • Creating a node policy
            • Creating a report definition
            • Creating a report policy
            • Running a report definition
            • Sending reports to contacts
            • Viewing all reports for a node
            • Viewing reports for a report definition
          • BRMS Enterprise considerations and requirements
        • The functional usage model and BRMS security considerations
          • How the functional usage model works
            • Backup function
            • Recovery function
            • Media management components
            • System-related functions
          • Implementing the functional usage model
            • Registering new BRMS activities with the functional usage model
          • Working with the SETUSRBRM command
          • Securing the console monitor
          • Working with IBM i security controls
            • BRMS media security
        • Saving to save files
          • Specifying use of save files in the media policy
          • Specifying use of save files in control groups
          • Managing save files using BRMS
          • Working with save files
          • Libraries containing BRMS save files
        • Networking with BRMS
          • An overview of BRMS network functionality
            • How shared media inventory synchronization works
            • How BRMS networks communicate
          • How to set up a BRMS network
            • Setting up your BRMS network
            • Verifying the systems in a BRMS network
            • Managing your BRMS network with the BRMS graphical interface
            • Changing the system name
              • How the networked systems receive media information
            • Joining two BRMS networks
            • Copying control groups between networked IBM i platforms
            • Checking BRMS network synchronization
          • Removing a system from a network
          • Removing the Network feature from a previously networked system
          • Media balancing across systems
          • BRMS FlashCopy support
          • Seasonal time changes of BRMS
            • Setting clocks back
            • Setting clocks ahead
        • Advanced Functions feature
          • Hierarchical Storage Management (HSM)
          • Media library management
          • BRMS user-defined system name support
          • Tape library status tool
          • Software encryption
          • High availability support for I-ASPs in a BRMS network
        • Online Lotus server backups
          • How Lotus server online backup works
          • Initializing BRMS for Lotus server backups
          • Performing an online Lotus server backup
            • Determining the device and media class to use
            • Adding media to the media class scratch pool
            • Starting the backup
            • Recommendations
            • Restrictions
            • Lotus server backup performance tuning
            • Preprocessing and postprocessing *EXITs in control groups
            • Copying Lotus server control groups
            • BRMS incremental online Lotus server backup
            • Viewing the catalog of Lotus server saved items
          • Lotus server recovery
            • Recovering a single Lotus server database using the command interface
            • Recovering a single Lotus server database using the BRMS System i Navigator client
            • Restrictions
            • Restoring online backups
            • Incremental recovery to a different Lotus server or different directory
              • Choosing a database recovery method
              • Recovering a database by restoring to a different Domino server
              • Recovering a database by restoring to a different directory under the data directory of an active server
            • Restore missing Domino DAOS objects
        • Backup and recovery of auxiliary storage pool devices
          • Backup of auxiliary storage pool devices
            • Backing up user libraries on auxiliary storage pool devices
            • Backing up the system and basic user auxiliary storage pools
            • Backing up multiple switched auxiliary storage pool devices
            • Using *SETASPGRP to back up auxiliary storage pool devices
            • Backing up spooled files on auxiliary storage pool devices
          • Recovery of auxiliary storage pool devices
        • Using BRMS with Cloud Storage Solutions for i
          • BRMS with Cloud Storage Solutions for i considerations and requirements
          • BRMS with Cloud Storage Solutions for i concepts
          • BRMS-created objects for cloud backup and recovery
            • Cloud storage locations
            • Control groups
              • Using encryption or compression with cloud connector control groups
              • Creating control groups for automatic transfers to the cloud
            • Media class and media policy
            • Move policy
            • Virtual devices
            • Image catalogs
            • Virtual media
          • Data backup and recovery using BRMS and IBM Cloud Storage Solutions for i
            • Backup data to the cloud
            • Restoring data from the cloud
            • User initiated data transfers
            • User initiated backups to the cloud
            • User initiated recoveries from the cloud
          • System backup and recovery using BRMS and IBM Cloud Storage Solutions for i
            • Backing up your entire system to the cloud
            • Recovering your entire system from the cloud
            • Customizing a backup of your entire system to the cloud
            • Recovering your customized backup of an entire system from the cloud
          • Archiving with BRMS and IBM Cloud Storage Solutions for i
        • Using tape automation with BRMS
          • Setting up tape automation with BRMS
          • Save and restore Tasks
          • Recovery process using tape automation
          • Tasks for archiving
          • Moving volumes with BRMS
        • Tape I/O from a program
          • Using BRMS for tape file processing
          • Using BRMS for input processing
          • Input/Output processing with multiple devices
            • 1. Creating tape file objects
            • 2. Compiling the program
            • 3. Using OVRTAPF to indicate which tape drives to use
            • 4. Using SETMEDBRM to involve BRMS in managing the tape
            • Calling the program
            • Results
          • Other processing techniques
          • Messages
      • Merging BRMS data and consolidating systems
        • Merge consolidation planning
        • Merging BRMS data to target system with no BRMS
        • Merging BRMS data to target system with existing BRMS
      • A summary of BRMS reports
        • ASP Information Report (QP1AASP, QP1AXS)
        • Backup Folder List Report (QP1AFL)
        • Backup Link List Report (QP1AFS)
        • Backup Object List Report (QP1AOB)
        • Backup Plan Report (QP1ABP)
        • Backup Policy Report (QP1ABX)
        • Backup Statistic Report (QP1ABS)
        • Backup Spooled File List Report (QP1ALQ)
        • Calendar Report (QP1ACA)
        • Centralized Media Audit Report (QP1ASYN)
        • Container Report (QP1ACN)
        • Container Class Report (QP1ACT)
        • Device Report (QP1ADV)
        • Journal Receiver Chain Report (QP1AJR)
        • Journal Receiver Chain Exception Report (QP1AJREXC)
        • Library Backup Analysis Report (QP1ALA)
        • Link Information Report (QP1ADI)
        • Location Analysis Report (QP1A2SL)
        • Log Report (QP1ALG)
        • Media Balancing Report (QP1AMBL)
        • Media Report (QP1AMM)
        • Media Class Report (QP1AMT)
        • Media Expiration Report (QP1AEP)
        • Media Information Report (QP1AHS)
        • Media Library Report (QP1AMD)
        • Media Library Media Report (QP1A1MD)
        • Media Merge Report (QP1AEN)
        • Media Movement Report (QP1APVMS)
        • Media Policy Report (QP1AME)
        • Media Volume Statistics Report (QP1AVU)
        • Media Volume Threshold Report (QP1AVOL)
        • Move Policy Report (QP1AMP)
        • Recovery Activities Report (QP1ARW)
        • Recovery Analysis Report (QP1ARCY)
        • Recovery Policy Report (QP1ARX)
        • Recovery Volume Summary Report (QP1A2RCY)
        • Save Files Report (QP1ASF)
        • Save Strategy Exceptions Report (QP1ALE)
        • Saved Folders Report (QP1AFD)
        • Saved Objects Report (QP1AOD)
        • Objects Not Journaled Report (QP1AOD)
        • Saved Spooled Files by Date Report (QP1AOQ)
        • Storage Location Report (QP1ASL)
        • System Policy Report (QP1ASP)
        • Version Control Report (QP1AVER)
        • Volume Movement Report (QP1AVMS)
      • APIs and exit Programs
        • Control Group Exit Program
        • Tape Information Exit Program
        • Tape Movement Exit Program
        • BRMS Object Retrieval Exit Program
        • Media Missing from Tape Media Library 3494
        • BRMS Control Group APIs
          • Create Control Group (Q1ACRTCG) API
          • Create Control Group Based On (Q1ACRTCGBO) API
          • Delete Control Group (Q1ADLTCG) API
          • List Control Group Entries (Q1ALSTCGE) API
          • Add Control Group Entry (Q1AADDCGE) API
          • Remove Control Group Entry (Q1ARMVCGE) API
          • Add Control Group Entry Object Omit (Q1AADDCGEO) API
          • Remove Control Group Entry Object Omit (Q1ARMVCGEO) API
        • BRMS List APIs
          • Create List (Q1ACRTLST) API
          • Delete List (Q1ADLTLST) API
          • Add List Entry (Q1AADDLSTE) API
          • Remove List Entry (Q1ARMVLSTE) API
        • BRMS Retrieve Media Information (Q1ARTVMED) API
        • BRMS Select Device (Q1ASLTDEV) API
      • Related information for BRMS
    • Backing up your system
      • What's new for IBM i 7.4
      • PDF file for Backing up your system
      • Before you save any data
        • Using the precheck option
        • Choosing compression type
        • Freeing storage when saving
        • How object locking affects save operations
        • Size limitations when saving objects
          • Size limits for save files
        • Verifying what the system saved
          • Determining objects that the system saved (save messages)
          • Determining objects that are not saved
          • Determining when an object was last saved
        • How the system handles damaged objects during a save operation
      • Preparing your media to save your system
        • Choosing your save media
          • Save files
            • Copying save files to media
            • Working with save files
            • About save file security
            • I/O operations on a save file
            • Damage to a save file
            • Sending network files
          • Optical media
          • Virtual optical media
          • Tape media
          • Virtual tape media
        • Rotating tapes and other media
        • Preparing media and tape drives
        • Naming and labeling media
        • Selecting the encryption media
          • Encrypting tape drive
          • Software encryption using BRMS
          • Considerations for encrypting backup data
        • Verifying your media
        • Storing your media
        • Handling tape media errors
      • Overview of the GO SAVE command
        • GO SAVE command menu options
          • GO SAVE: Option 20 (changing the menu defaults)
          • GO SAVE: Option 21 (saving the entire system)
          • GO SAVE: Option 22 (saving system data)
          • GO SAVE: Option 23 (saving user data)
          • GO SAVE: Options 40, 41, 42, 43 (saving parts of your system)
          • Performing a complete save using the GO SAVE checklist
            • Optional features that affect your backup
            • Printing system information
      • Manually saving parts of your system
        • Commands for saving parts of your system
        • Commands for saving specific object types
        • Saving system data
          • Methods for saving Licensed Internal Code
          • Methods for saving system information
          • Methods for saving operating system objects
        • Saving system data and related user data
          • Saving libraries with the SAVLIB command
            • Special values for the SAVLIB command
            • Selecting objects with the SAVLIB command
            • Tips and restrictions for the SAVLIB command
            • Recovering from a media error during a SAVLIB operation
          • Saving independent ASPs
          • Saving security data
          • Saving configuration information
          • Saving system information
            • System values that are not saved
          • Saving licensed programs
          • Methods for saving system data and related user data
            • Methods for saving security data
            • Methods for saving configuration objects in QSYS
            • Methods for saving IBM i optional libraries (QHLPSYS, QUSRTOOL)
            • Methods for saving licensed program libraries (QRPG, QCBL, Qxxxx)
        • Saving user data in your system
          • Saving objects with the SAVOBJ command
            • Saving multiple objects with the SAVOBJ command
            • QSRSAVO API
            • Objects whose contents are not saved
          • Saving only changed objects
            • Saving Changed Objects (SAVCHGOBJ) command
            • Saving changed objects in directories
            • Saving changed document library objects
            • Additional considerations for SAVCHGOBJ
            • How the system updates changed object information with the SAVCHGOBJ command
          • Saving database files
            • Saving access paths
              • EXAMPLE - Saving files in a network
            • Saving files with referential constraints
            • Saving physical files that are temporal
          • Saving journaled objects and libraries
            • Saving changed objects when you use journaling
            • Saving journals and journal receivers
          • Saving file systems
            • Using the Save (SAV) command
            • Specifying the device name
            • Saving objects that have more than one name
            • Saving across different types of file systems
            • When saving objects from the QSYS.LIB file system
            • When saving objects from the QDLS file system
            • Backing up the integrated file system
          • Saving user-defined file systems
            • How the system stores user-defined file systems
            • Saving an unmounted UDFS
            • Saving a mounted UDFS
          • Saving document library objects
            • How the system stores and uses document library objects
            • Methods for saving multiple documents
            • Methods for reducing disk space that is used by documents
            • Output from the SAVDLO command
          • Saving and restoring spooled files
          • Methods for saving user data
            • Methods for saving user libraries
            • Methods for saving Q libraries that contain user data
            • Methods for saving distribution objects
            • Methods for saving network server storage spaces
            • Methods for saving user-defined file systems
            • Methods for saving directories in the Root and the QOpenSys file systems
            • Methods for saving IBM-supplied document library objects and folders
            • Methods for saving user document library objects and folders
            • Methods for saving IBM-supplied directories without user data
        • Saving logical partitions and system applications
          • Backup considerations with logical partitions
          • Backing up a logical partition
          • Saving configuration data on a logical partition
        • Saving data for integrated servers
          • Saving Linux data on a logical partition
      • Save-while-active function
        • Save-while-active concepts
          • Checkpoint processing with save-while-active
          • Timestamp processing with save-while-active
          • Commitment control with save-while-active
        • Using save-while-active to synchronize the saved data
        • Using save-while-active with network server storage spaces
        • Considerations and restrictions for the save-while-active function
          • Performance considerations for save-while-active
            • Central processing unit (CPU) and save-while-active
            • Auxiliary storage activity and save-while-active
            • Main storage (memory) and save-while active
            • DLO activity and save-while-active
          • Storage considerations for save-while-active
          • Save-while-active restrictions
          • Save-while-active object locking rules
            • Object locking: During save-while-active checkpoint processing
            • Object locking: After save-while-active checkpoint processing
          • Restrictions for commitment control with save-while-active
        • Parameters for the save-while-active function
          • Synchronization-level values for Save Active (SAVACT) parameter
            • Full synchronization
            • Library synchronization
            • System-defined synchronization
          • The wait time (SAVACTWAIT) parameter
          • The checkpoint notification (SAVACTMSGQ) parameter
          • Additional save-while-active option (SAVACTOPT) parameter
        • Save-while-active and your backup and recovery strategy
          • Reducing save-outage time: Overview
          • Eliminating save-outage time: Overview
        • Reducing your save-outage time
          • Recommended procedure for reducing your save-outage time
          • Example: Reducing save-outage time for two libraries
          • Example: Reducing save-outage time for a directory
          • Example: Restoring libraries after reducing save-outage time
          • Example: Restoring a directory after reducing save-outage time
        • Eliminating your save-outage time
          • Recommended procedure for eliminating save-outage time
          • Monitoring your save-while-active operation
          • Considerations for recovery procedures after eliminating save-outage time
          • Recommended recovery procedures after eliminating save-outage time
          • Example: Eliminating save-outage time for libraries
          • Example: Saving objects with partial transactions
          • Example: Eliminate save-outage time for a directory
          • Example: Restoring libraries after eliminating save-outage time
          • Example: Restoring objects with partial transactions
          • Example: Restoring a directory after eliminating save-outage time
      • Saving to multiple devices to reduce your save window
        • Saving libraries to multiple devices for a single save operation
        • Saving the integrated file system using multiple devices for a single save operation
        • Dynamic device allocation
        • Restrictions for saving to multiple devices
      • Encrypted backups
        • Loading and setting save/restore master key
        • Saving and restoring master keys
        • Backing up encrypted auxiliary storage pools
      • Backup programming techniques
        • Considerations for job recovery
        • Information in output files
        • Interpreting output from save (SAV) and restore (RST)
          • Entry header information
          • Command information entries
          • Directory information entries
          • Object link information entries
          • Trailer information entry
          • Output sequence
          • Field descriptions
        • Interpreting output from save commands
          • Save operation output file information
          • Field descriptions
        • Retrieving the device name from save completion messages
        • Displaying status messages when saving
    • Backup and recovery FAQ
    • Controlling system shutdown using a power-handling program
      • PDF file for Controlling system shutdown
      • Controlled shutdown concepts
        • Battery backup unit
        • Handling uninterruptible power supply conditions when no power-handling program exists
        • IPL considerations for uninterruptible power supply
        • Power-loss controlled shutdown
        • Power restore IPL system value (QPWRRSTIPL)
        • Uninterruptible power supply
        • Uninterruptible power supply delay time system value (QUPSDLYTIM)
        • Uninterruptible power supply message queue system value (QUPSMSGQ)
        • Uninterruptible power supply messages
        • Weak battery condition signal from uninterruptible power supply
      • Enabling a power-handling program to control system activity during a power interruption
        • Implementing a power-handling program
        • Writing a power-handling program
          • Example: Power-handling CL program
          • Example: Testing a power-handling CL program
    • Recovering your system
      • What's new for IBM i 7.4
      • PDF file for Recovering your system
      • Saving the system
        • Overview of the GO SAVE command
        • GO SAVE command menu options
        • GO SAVE: Option 21 (saving the entire system)
        • Performing a complete save using the GO SAVE checklist
        • Optional features that affect your backup
        • Printing system information
        • Save considerations when checking out objects
        • Tape write error recovery
        • ObjectConnect function
          • Components of ObjectConnect
          • Setting up your system to use ObjectConnect
          • How the system runs an ObjectConnect command
          • Using the ObjectConnect commands
            • SAVRST command
            • SAVRSTOBJ command
            • SAVRSTCHG command
            • SAVRSTLIB command
            • SAVRSTDLO command
            • SAVRSTCFG command
          • Investigating ObjectConnect problems
          • CPFAD84 error codes
            • Source system-specific error codes from CPFAD84 message
            • Target system-specific error codes from CPFAD84 message
            • Source or target system error codes from CPFAD84 message
      • Restoring the system: Introduction
        • The relationship between save and restore commands
        • What happens when you restore objects
        • Sequence for restoring related objects
        • Deferring the restore of dependent objects
        • Putting your system in a restricted state
        • RCLSTG command
          • Reclaiming storage
        • Reclaiming object links
        • Controlling restoration of security-sensitive objects
          • QALWOBJRST system value
          • Setting the QALWOBJRST system value to allow complete recovery
          • Setting the QALWOBJRST system value to restrict restore operations
          • QVFYOBJRST system value
          • Setting the QVFYOBJRST system value to allow complete recovery
          • Setting the QVFYOBJRST system value to restrict restore operations
        • Minimizing object scans after restore operations
        • Setting the QPFRADJ system value for a different processor or memory
        • Locked objects while restoring
        • Verifying whether objects are restored successfully
        • Recovery from an unsuccessful restore operation
          • Recovering from an error while restoring libraries
          • Recovering from an error while restoring document library objects
            • Recovering documents and folders
            • Recovering from unsuccessful system signon
        • Performing a normal initial program load
        • Parallel restore operations
        • Restore operation output file information
        • Field descriptions for restore output file
      • Selecting the appropriate recovery strategy
        • Some common recovery terminology
        • Recovery procedure for a power failure
        • Recovery procedure for a system failure
        • Recovery procedure for a program failure or human error
        • Recovering the vital product data information if the partition does not IPL in A-mode or B-mode
        • Choosing the recovery procedure for a disk failure or disk errors
          • Checklist 1: Actions for load-source disk unit failure
          • Checklist 2: Actions for load-source disk unit failure
          • Checklist 3: Actions for load-source disk unit failure
          • Checklist 4: Actions for load-source disk unit failure
          • Checklist 5: Actions for load-source disk unit failure
          • Actions for non-load source disk unit failure or disk units in basic user ASP disk failure–Checklist 6
          • Checklist 7: Actions for non-load source disk unit failure
          • Checklist 8: Actions for non-load source disk unit failure
          • Checklist 9: Actions for non-load source disk unit failure
          • Checklist 10: Actions for non-load source disk unit failure
          • Checklist 11: Actions for a failure in a basic auxiliary storage pool disk unit
          • Checklist 12: Actions for a failure in a basic auxiliary storage pool disk unit
          • Checklist 13: Actions for a failure in a basic auxiliary storage pool disk unit
          • Checklist 14: Actions for non-load source disk unit failure
          • Checklist 15: Actions for non-load source disk unit failure
          • Checklist 16: Actions for non-load source disk unit failure
          • Checklist 17: Actions for independent auxiliary storage pool disk failure
          • Checklist 18: Actions for a failure in an independent auxiliary storage pool disk unit
          • Checklist 19: Actions for a failure in an independent auxiliary storage pool disk unit
          • Checklist 20: Recovering your entire system after a complete system loss
          • Checklist 21: Recovering your entire system after a complete system loss including independent auxiliary storage pools
          • Checklist 22: Restoring a logical partition to another logical partition
          • Checklist 23: Actions for a failed cache card
        • Choosing the procedure to recover user information
          • Checklist 24: Recovering user information using commands
          • Checklist 25: Using option 21 from the restore menu
          • Checklist 26: Using options 22 and 23 from the restore menu
          • Checklist 27: Recovering user information using tapes from Operational Assistant backup
      • Recovering the Licensed Internal Code
        • Preparing for loading the Licensed Internal Code
          • Task 1: Getting ready to load the Licensed Internal Code
          • Task 2: Powering down the system
          • Task 3: Preparing to start the system from an alternate IPL device
          • Task 4: Loading the Licensed Internal Code from media
        • Loading the Licensed Internal Code
        • Recovering the vital product data information if the partition does not IPL in A-mode or B-mode
        • Setting up your disk configuration after installing the Licensed Internal Code and initializing the system
        • Using System i Navigator to set up your disk configuration after installing Licensed Internal Code
        • Recovering your disk configuration
        • Starting your system after restoring the Licensed Internal Code
      • Restoring the operating system
        • Choosing the right procedure for restoring the operating system
        • Loading the operating system using a manual initial program load (IPL)
        • Tasks to restoring the operating system
          • Task 1: Starting to restore the operating system
          • Task 2: Selecting the installation options
          • Task 3: Selecting initial program load options
          • Task 4: Setting major system options
          • Task 5: Defining or changing the system at initial program load (IPL)
          • Task 6: Completing the initial program load
        • Recovering from SRC A900 2000
          • Creating a configuration for other tape units
      • Starting the system after it ends abnormally
        • What happens when your system stops
          • Using the Disk Configuration Error Report display
          • Using the Main Storage Dump Occurred display
        • Restarting your system
          • Task 1: Performing an attended initial program load
          • Task 2: Editing the rebuilding of access paths
          • Task 3: Editing check pending constraints
          • Task 4: Recovering from damaged objects and unreadable sectors
            • Recovering a damaged journal
            • Recovering a damaged journal receiver
            • Recovering a journaled object that is damaged or not synchronized
            • Recovering damaged objects in the integrated file system
            • Recovering other types of damaged objects
      • Recovering information in a user ASP
        • Describing the contents of your user ASP
        • Choosing the procedure to recover user ASPs
        • Recovering a basic user ASP after recovering the system ASP
          • Task 1: Reclaiming storage
          • Task 2: Restoring user profiles
          • Task 3: Restoring the configuration
          • Task 4: Recovering journals and journal receivers in the QRCL library
          • Task 5: Restoring libraries to the system auxiliary storage pool
          • Task 6: Restoring document library objects to the system auxiliary storage pool
          • Task 7: Restoring user-defined file systems to the user auxiliary storage pool
            • Recovery steps for unmounted user-defined file systems in a user ASP
            • Recovery steps for a mounted UDFS if data is not restored
            • Recovery steps for a mounted UDFS if data is restored
          • Task 8: Reclaiming document library objects
          • Task 9: Recovering save files from the QRCL library
          • Task 10: Associating journal receivers with journals
          • Task 11: Restoring object ownership
        • Recovering an overflowed user ASP
          • Resetting an overflowed user ASP without an initial program load IPL
          • Resetting an overflowed user ASP during an IPL
        • Deleting overflowed objects during recovery
        • Recovering a damaged basic ASP
          • Task 1: Restoring user profiles
          • Task 2: Determining the contents of the lost auxiliary storage pool
          • Task 3: Determining tasks to restore objects
          • Task 4: Restoring libraries to a basic auxiliary storage pool
          • Task 5: Restoring journals to a basic auxiliary storage pool
          • Task 6: Restoring documents to a basic auxiliary storage pool
          • Task 7: Restoring user-defined file systems to a basic auxiliary storage pool
            • Recovery steps for unmounted user-defined file systems in a basic ASP
            • Recovery steps for a mounted UDFS if data is not restored
            • Recovery steps for a mounted UDFS if data is restored
          • Task 8: Restoring journal receivers to a basic auxiliary storage pool
          • Task 9: Restoring save files to a basic auxiliary storage pool
        • Recovering an independent ASP
          • Task 1: Restoring user profiles
          • Task 2: Determining tasks to restore objects to an independent auxiliary storage pool
          • Task 3: Restoring libraries to the independent auxiliary storage pool
          • Task 4: Restoring user-defined file systems to the independent auxiliary storage pool
            • Recovery steps for unmounted user-defined file systems in an independent ASP
            • Recovery steps for a mounted UDFS if data is not restored
            • Recovery steps for a mounted UDFS if data is restored
          • Task 5: Restoring authority for an independent auxiliary storage pool
        • Removing a failed disk unit from the system ASP
          • Task 1: Accessing dedicated service tools
          • Task 2: Deleting the auxiliary storage pool data
          • Task 3: Removing the disk unit from the auxiliary storage pool configuration
      • The restore menu
        • What the restore menu options do
        • Using restore menu options 21, 22, and 23
      • Restoring specific types of information
        • Recovering system information
        • Recovering TCP configuration information
        • Sequence for restoring security information
        • Restoring user profiles
          • What happens when you restore user profiles
          • What you should know about restoring user profiles
          • How the system establishes ownership for restored objects
          • How the system establishes the authorization list for a restored object
          • How the system establishes the primary group for restored objects
        • Restoring object authorities
          • Overview of restoring authorities
          • Restoring private authorities in a full-system recovery
          • Restoring private authorities for selected objects
          • Restoring authority on a system in a nonrestricted state
            • What you should know before running the RSTAUT command
            • Job log considerations
          • Restoring authority on a system in a restricted state
          • Examples: How the system restores authority
        • Restoring authorities for independent ASP data
        • Restoring configuration objects
          • Correcting problems with the SRM information
            • Recovering devices that will not vary on
          • Recovering when you change the console type
          • Recovering the System/36 environment configuration
        • Restoring logical partitions
        • Restoring libraries
          • Restoring a library from a previous release
          • Restoring multiple libraries
          • Considerations and restrictions of the Restore Library command
          • Restoring all libraries from a single save operation
          • Restoring all libraries from multiple save operations
        • Restoring objects
          • Restoring journaled objects
            • What happens when you restore journaled objects to a different library or directory
        • Restoring UDFSs
          • Restoring an unmounted UDFS
            • Restrictions while you restore an unmounted UDFS
          • Restoring an individual object from an unmounted UDFS
          • Restoring a mounted UDFS
          • Restore actions for mounted UDFS
        • Restoring database files
          • Comparing file attributes during a restore operation
          • How the system matches file members during a restore operation
          • Restoring members to a file
            • Restrictions on the FILEMBR parameter
          • Restoring logical files
          • How the system restores access paths
            • Examples: Restoring a file network
            • Preventing the system from rebuilding a large access path
          • How the system restores files with shared formats
          • How the system restores files with referential constraints
            • Example: Referential constraint network
          • How the system restores files with triggers
          • Restoring SQL materialized query tables
          • Deleting a physical file
          • Restoring physical files that are temporal
        • Restoring journals and journal receivers
          • Restoring journals
          • Deleting a journal
          • Restoring journal receivers
            • Resolving name conflicts when restoring journal receivers
            • Correcting the journal receiver directory
          • Deleting a journal receiver
        • How the system restores programs
          • Restoring programs to a different release
        • Restoring save file data
        • Saving and restoring spooled files
        • Restoring licensed programs
        • Restoring documents and folders
          • RSTDLO command options
          • Using multiple concurrent DLO commands
          • Output from the RSTDLO Command
          • Considerations and restrictions
            • Moving documents
            • Searching tape files
            • Selecting files from DVD-RAM optical media
            • Searching index database errors
            • Authority required to restore DLOs
            • How the system restores new DLOs
            • How the system restores existing DLOs
            • Size limitations when restoring DLOs
          • Restoring folders
          • Renaming documents when restoring
          • How the system restores descriptive information for DLOs
          • How the system restores authority and ownership for DLOs
          • When to run the RNMDIRE command
          • When to Run the RNMDLO command
        • Restoring objects in directories
        • Completing recovery for integrated servers
          • Recovery for save operation of network server storage spaces
          • Recovery for save operation of data in QNTC file system
          • Recovering AIX, IBM i, or Linux in a logical partition
        • Recovering a Domino server
          • Recovering an entire Domino server
          • Recovering Domino mail
          • Recovering specific Domino databases
          • Restoring changed objects to a Domino server
            • Example: Restoring changed Domino objects from a cumulative backup
            • Example: Restoring changed Domino objects from a nightly backup
            • Example: Restoring Domino databases from an incremental backup
            • Example: Restoring changed objects from a specific Domino subdirectory
        • Restrictions when using the RST command
        • Restoring PTFs
        • Restoring system information
      • Restoring changed objects and apply journaled changes
        • Task 1: Restoring changed objects
          • Restoring changed objects by library
          • Restoring changed objects individually
        • Task 2: Restoring changed objects in directories
        • Task 3: Determining whether you need to apply journaled changes
        • Task 4: Determining what journal receivers to use
        • Task 5: Applying journaled changes for user journals
        • Task 6: Applying journaled changes for the QAOSDIAJRN journal
        • Task 7: Replaying journaled changes in a disaster recovery
        • Task 8: Restoring changed documents and folders
      • Mirrored protection recovery actions
        • System actions for permanent errors
        • Suspending mirrored units
        • Resuming mirrored units
        • Replacing a mirrored unit
          • Using spare nonconfigured units for replacement
          • Mirrored protection recovery actions performed by the service representative
            • Actions when concurrent maintenance is possible
            • Actions when concurrent maintenance is not possible
          • Other recovery considerations for mirrored protection
          • Mirrored protection disk-error handling
          • Missing disk units
          • Saving a unit
          • Restoring a unit
          • Active mirrored load source failure
            • System cannot find active mirrored load source for IPL
            • Active mirrored load source being used for IPL fails
            • Active mirrored load source fails late in the IPL or at run time
            • Cannot read system configuration data from active mirrored load source
          • Unknown unit 1 status
            • Recovering the state of the unknown load source
          • Displaying incorrect Licensed Internal Code installation
        • Recovering remote load source mirroring
          • Recovering after the remote load source has failed
          • Recovering after the local load source has failed on the system
            • Dedicated recovery of local load source – Local system is still functional
            • Dedicated recovery from remote disk units – After a local site disaster
          • Using the recover mirrored load source function
      • Restoring your system using Operational Assistant tapes
        • Restoring your libraries
        • Restoring libraries that you saved by using a backup list
        • Restoring changed objects that you saved by using Operational Assistant
      • Restoring encrypted backups and encrypted ASPs
        • Recovering from an encrypted backup using software encryption
        • Recovering from an encrypted backup using an encrypted tape
        • Backing up the Encryption Key Manager
        • Restoring encrypted auxiliary storage pools
      • Release-to-release support
        • Current release to previous release support
          • Creating the object for the previous release
          • Saving the object for the previous release
          • Testing the object on the current release
          • Restoring and using the object on the previous release
          • Restrictions for current release to previous release support
        • Previous release to current release support
          • Considerations when moving system customization information
          • Restoring previous release user data to a new system
            • Prerequisites for the recovery
            • Restoring previous release user data to a new system
            • Saving spooled files
          • Restrictions when going from previous release to current release
      • System synchronization: Planning and procedures
        • Synchronization methods: Overview
        • Moving changed objects
          • Saving changed objects
          • Restoring changed objects
          • Problems when restoring changed objects
            • Problems restoring journal receivers
            • Problems restoring database file members
            • Problems with object authority or ownership
        • Moving entire libraries
          • Considerations for moving entire libraries
        • Moving individual objects
        • Applying journaled changes
        • Refreshing your new system
        • Additional synchronization tips
      • Tips for merging two systems into a single system
        • Guidelines for restoring information from the development system
      • Using an alternate installation device
        • Alternate installation device: Overview
        • Setting up an alternate installation device
        • Disabling an alternate installation device
        • Verifying and selecting an alternate installation device during a manual installation
      • Configuring disks and disk protection
        • Choosing the right procedure for configuring disks
          • Checklist 1: Configuring disks on a new system
          • Checklist 2: Adding disk units without device parity protection
          • Checklist 3: Adding disk units to an existing input/output adapter
          • Checklist 4: Adding a new input/output adapter
          • Checklist 5: Moving disk units between non mirrored auxiliary storage pools
          • Checklist 6: Moving disk units between mirrored auxiliary storage pools
          • Checklist 7: Deleting an auxiliary storage pool
          • Checklist 8: Removing disk units without device parity protection
          • Checklist 9: Removing disk units that have device parity protection from an auxiliary storage pools without mirrored protection
          • Checklist 10: Removing disk units that have device parity protection from an auxiliary storage pool with mirrored protection
          • Using SST and DST
            • Starting DST
            • Stopping DST
            • Starting SST
            • Stopping SST
          • Displaying your disk configuration
            • Displaying your disk configuration (hardware view)
              • Displaying disk hardware configuration (command method)
              • Displaying disk hardware configuration (service tools method)
            • Displaying your disk configuration (software view)
            • Disk configuration and status displays
      • Working with auxiliary storage pools
        • Initializing and formatting disk units
        • Adding disk units to an existing ASP
        • Creating an unencrypted ASP
        • Creating an encrypted ASP
        • Changing the storage threshold for an ASP
        • Changing the storage threshold for the system ASP
        • Moving a disk unit to a different ASP
        • Removing a disk unit from an ASP
        • Deleting an ASP
        • Calculating space requirements for an auxiliary storage pool
        • Displaying the objects in a user ASP
        • Balancing an ASP
          • Capacity balancing
          • Usage balancing
          • HSM balancing
          • Media preference balancing
        • Transferring objects between ASPs
          • Transferring a library to a different ASP
          • Transferring a folder to a different auxiliary storage pool
          • Transferring journals and objects to a different ASP
          • Creating objects in a library user ASP
            • Placing a document in a basic ASP–Example
            • Example: Placing an object in a user auxiliary storage pool
            • Example: Creating a user-defined file system in user auxiliary storage pool
          • Placing journal receivers in a user ASP
            • Placing journal receivers in a user ASP
          • Moving journal receivers from an overflowed basic user auxiliary storage pool
          • Resetting a journal with a status of overflowed
        • Working with nonlibrary user ASPs
          • Creating objects in a nonlibrary user ASP
          • Transferring an object to a nonlibrary ASP
          • Transferring a journal to a nonlibrary user ASP
            • Placing journal receivers in a nonlibrary basic ASP
      • Working with device parity protection
        • Starting device parity protection
          • Starting device parity protection for an input/output adapter
        • Stopping device parity protection
          • Stopping device parity protection on an input/output adapter
        • Removing disk units that have device parity protection for System i while powered on
        • Removing disk units that have device parity protection for System i while powered off
        • Removing disk units that have device parity protection for a IBM i
        • Including a disk unit in device parity protection
        • Excluding a disk unit from device parity protection
        • Displaying device parity status
      • Working with mirrored protection
        • Mirrored protection: Configuration rules
        • Starting mirrored protection
          • What the system does when you start mirrored protection
        • Mirrored protection configuration errors
        • Stopping mirrored protection
      • Working with disk compression
        • Introduction to disk compression
          • Restrictions and considerations
          • Disk compression and capacity
          • Disk unit full considerations
          • How the system responds to disk unit full 448 reference code A6xx 0277
        • SRC code A6xx 0277
          • User action 1
          • User action 2
          • User action 3
          • User action 4
          • Examples of A6xx 0277
        • Starting disk compression
        • Stopping disk compression
        • Procedural sequences for configuring disks and protection
          • Checklist: Adding a new I/O compression-capable storage controller
          • Checklist: Adding disk units to an existing compression-capable storage controller
          • Checklist: Moving disk units from the system ASP to a user ASP
        • Recovering from error codes
          • Recovering from SRC 6xxx 7051
          • Recovering from SRC 6xxx 7052
      • Managing auxiliary storage pools
        • Working with ASP trace and ASP balance
          • Capacity balance
          • HSM balance
          • Usage balance
          • Media preference balancing
          • Auxiliary storage pool trace
        • Determining adequate disk storage
      • Examples: Techniques and programming for backup and recovery
        • Examples: Backup and recovery
          • Using the RTVJRNE command in a program
          • CL program to handle escape conditions
          • Writing output to save media using the Receive Journal Entry command
            • Considerations when writing to tape
            • Journal entries written to an ICF file
      • Licensed Internal Code installation error displays
      • Example: Disaster recovery plan
        • Section 1. Example: Major goals of a disaster recovery plan
        • Section 2. Example: Personnel
        • Section 3. Example: Application profile
        • Section 4. Example: Inventory profile
        • Section 5. Information services backup procedures
        • Section 6. Disaster recovery procedures
          • Disaster action checklist
          • Recovery startup procedures for use after actual disaster
        • Section 7. Recovery plan for mobile site
          • Mobile site setup plan
          • Communication disaster plan
          • Electrical service
        • Section 8. Recovery plan for hot site
          • Alternate-site system configuration
        • Section 9. Restoring the entire system
        • Section 10. Rebuilding process
        • Section 11. Testing the disaster recovery plan
        • Section 12. Disaster site rebuilding
          • Vendors
          • Floor plan
        • Section 13. Record of plan changes
      • Recovering your system
      • Recovering your system to a different system
    • IBM Cloud Storage Solutions for i for i V1.1.0 사용자 안내서
      • IBM Cloud Storage Solutions for i V1.1.0 사용자 안내서 PDF 파일
      • IBM Cloud Storage Solutions for i
      • Cloud Storage Solutions의 자원에 대한 작업
        • SoftLayer 자원 작성
        • SoftLayer 자원 변경
        • SoftLayer 자원 표시
        • FTP 자원 작성
        • FTP 자원 변경
        • FTP 자원 표시
        • 자원 삭제
        • 자원에 대한 작업
        • 상태에 대한 작업
      • Cloud Storage Solutions의 파일에 대한 작업
        • 클라우드에 파일 복사
        • 클라우드에서 파일 복사
        • 클라우드에서 파일 삭제
      • Cloud Storage Solutions API
        • Cloud Storage Solutions 구성 API
          • SoftLayer 자원 작성 API
          • SoftLayer 자원 변경 API
          • SoftLayer 자원 정보 얻기 API
          • FTP 자원 작성 API
          • FTP 자원 변경 API
          • 자원 삭제 API
          • 자원 목록 얻기 API
        • Cloud Storage Solutions API
          • 클라우드 API에 파일 복사
          • 파일에 클라우드 복사 API
          • 클라우드에서 파일 삭제 API
          • 복원 명령 얻기 API
          • 클라우드의 파일 나열 API
          • 클라우드 전송 상태 얻기 API
        • Cloud Storage Solutions 종료점 구조
          • Qicc 종료 설명 구조
          • Qicc 종료 조작 구조
          • Qicc 종료 제어 값 구조
        • Cloud Storage Solutions 자원 구조
          • Qicc 기본 자원 정보 구조
          • Qicc SoftLayer 자원 정보 구조
          • Qicc FTP 자원 정보 구조
    • 관련 정보
  • Common Information Model
    • PDF file for Common Information Model
    • CIM upgrade considerations
    • Preparing to use CIMOM
      • Ensuring that the operating system has the required installation requirements
      • Setting the configuration properties
        • Basic startup properties for CIMOM
        • Advanced startup properties for CIMOM
      • Starting and stopping CIMOM
    • CIMOM security
      • Authentication on CIMOM
      • Authorization on CIMOM
        • User authorization on CIMOM
          • Working with authorization for CIM operations
          • Working with authorization for CIM metrics classes
        • Command authorization
        • Object authorities
    • Backup and recovery considerations for CIMOM
    • CIMOM command-line utilities
      • cimconfig usage information
      • cimcrl usage information
      • cimmof usage information
      • cimprovider usage information
      • cimsub usage information
      • cimtrust usage information
      • cimcli usage information
      • cimreparchive usage information
    • Dependency Considerations
    • Reference information for CIM
      • Compatibility to V5R3 and V5R4 operating system CIM providers
      • Considerations for providers on IBM i client partitions
      • Providers that are inherited from the operating system
        • IBMPSG_ComputerSystem
        • IBMPSG_BaseBoard
        • IBMPSG_Chassis
        • IBMPSG_FRU
        • IBMPSG_PhysicalDisk
        • IBMPSG_PhysicalMemory
        • IBMPSG_PhysicalNetworkAdapter
        • IBMPSG_Port
        • IBMPSG_Processor
        • IBMPSG_SerialNumberInformation
      • Providers that are required by Director and eServer for Management Central Inventory equivalence
        • Software inventory providers
        • User and group inventory providers
        • System inventory providers
      • Hardware inventory and network management providers
        • IBM_AdminDomain
        • IBM_AssociatedMemory
        • IBM_BindsToLANEndpoint
        • IBMi_BIOSElement
        • IBMi_BusController
        • IBM_CardOnCard
        • IBM_Card
        • IBMi_CDROMDrive
        • IBMi_CentralEnclosure
        • IBM_Chassis
        • IBMi_Chassis
        • IBM_Chip
        • IBMi_CommIOP
        • IBMi_CommPort
        • IBMi_CommPortImplementsLANEndpoint
        • IBM_ComputerSystemPackage
        • IBM_ControlledBy
        • IBMi_ControlPanel
        • IBMi_CryptController
        • IBMi_CryptDevice
        • IBMi_CryptIOP
        • IBM_DeviceSAPImplementation
        • IBMi_DiskDrive
        • IBMi_Display
        • IBMi_DisplayController
        • IBM_DNSGeneralSettingData
        • IBM_DNSSettingData
        • IBMi_DVDDrive
        • IBM_ElementFRU
        • IBM_ElementSettingData
        • IBM_EthernetPort
        • IBMi_FileServer
        • IBM_HostedAccessPoint
        • IBM_InstalledOS
        • IBM_IPProtocolEndpoint
        • IBM_LANEndpoint
        • IBMi_LinkAggregatorPartnerConnection
        • IBMi_Memory
        • IBM_PackagedComponent
        • IBM_PackageInChassis
        • IBMi_PCIBridge
        • IBMi_PCIController
        • IBM_PCIDevice
        • IBM_PhysicalMedia
        • IBM_PhysicalMemory
        • IBMi_PortController
        • IBM_PortImplementsEndpoint
        • IBMi_Printer
        • IBMi_Processor
        • IBMi_ProcessorCapacity
        • IBM_ProductPhysicalComponent
        • IBM_Product
        • IBM_Realizes
        • IBM_ReplacementFRU
        • IBMi_SANBus
        • IBMi_ServiceProcessor
        • IBMi_SESDevice
        • IBM_SNMPCommunityString
        • IBM_SNMPTrapTarget
        • IBMi_SOCIOP
        • IBMi_SPDBus
        • IBM_StaticIPAssignmentSettingData
        • IBMi_StorageController
        • IBMi_StorageIOP
        • IBM_StoragePool
        • IBM_SystemDevice
        • IBM_SystemPackaging
        • IBMOS400_TapeDrive
        • IBMi_TapeLibrary
        • IBM_TCPProtocolEndpoint
        • IBM_TimeZoneSettingData
        • IBM_TokenRingPort
        • IBM_WirelessLANEndpoint
        • IBM_WirelessPort
      • Supported CIM SMI-S HBA and HDR providers
        • SMI-S HBA CIM providers
          • IBM_Card
          • IBM_ComputerSystem
          • IBM_FCPort
          • IBM_FCControlledBy
          • IBM_FCDeviceSAPImplementation
          • IBM_FCElementSoftwareIdentity
          • IBM_FCElementStatisticalData
          • IBM_FCPortStatistics
          • IBM_FCProductPhysicalComponent
          • IBM_FCRealizes
          • IBM_FCSystemDevice
          • IBM_FCHostedAccessPoint
          • IBM_PortController
          • IBM_Product
          • IBM_SCSIProtocolEndPoint
          • IBM_SoftwareIdentity
        • SMI-S HDR CIM classes
          • IBM_ASPSystemDevice
          • IBM_CompositeExtent
          • IBM_CompositeExtentBasedOn
          • IBM_SCSIInitiatorTargetLogicalUnitPath
          • IBM_SCSIProtocolEndPoint
          • IBM_StorageExtent
          • IBM_StorageSynchronized
        • SMI-S Registered Profile CIM classes
          • IBM_ElementConformsToProfile
          • IBM_RegisteredProfile
          • IBM_RegisteredSubProfile
          • IBM_SubProfileRequiresProfile
      • IBM i Base Metrics Providers
        • IBM i File Metrics Providers
        • IBM i Spooled File Metrics Providers
        • IBM i System Metrics Providers
        • IBM i Real Time Metrics Providers
        • IBM i Metrics Value Modification Indication Providers
      • IBM i File Monitor Providers
      • Host Hardware RAID providers
        • Block services package providers
        • DAPort subprofile providers
        • Generic Initiator Ports providers
      • Storage HBA profile providers
      • IOA Cache Battery providers
      • Message queue provider
    • Troubleshooting the CIM server
    • Related information for Common Information Model
  • Disk management
    • What's new for IBM i 7.4
    • PDF file for Disk Management
    • Getting started with disk management
      • Components of disk storage
        • Finding the logical address for a disk storage component
      • Planning for disk management
        • Requirements for disk management
          • Enabling and accessing disk units
          • Setting up communication
          • Evaluating the current configuration
          • Printing your disk configuration
          • Calculating disk space requirements
            • Scenario: Calculating disk space when moving a disk unit
        • Setting up your disks
          • Configuring disks on a new system
          • Replacing a disk unit
          • Renaming a disk unit
          • Formatting a disk unit
          • Scanning a disk unit
          • Retrieving disk unit logs
    • Disk protection
      • Comparing disk protection options
      • Disk protection types
        • Device parity protection
          • Device parity protection concepts
            • RAID 5 concepts
              • How RAID 5 works
              • Elements of RAID 5 protection
              • How RAID 5 affects performance
              • Benefits of RAID 5 protection
              • Costs and limitations of RAID 5 protection
              • Parity set optimization for RAID 5 protection
              • Read operations on a failed disk unit
              • IOA migration
            • RAID 6 concepts
              • How RAID 6 protection works
              • Elements of RAID 6 protection
              • How RAID 6 affects performance
              • Benefits of RAID 6 protection
              • Costs and limitations of RAID 6 protection
              • Parity set optimization for RAID 6 protection
              • Read operations on a failed disk unit
              • IOA migration
            • RAID 10 concepts
              • How RAID 10 protection works
              • Elements of RAID 10 protection
              • How RAID 10 affects performance
              • Benefits of RAID 10 protection
              • Costs and limitations of RAID 10 protection
              • Parity set optimization for RAID 10 protection
              • Read operations on a failed RAID 10 disk unit
              • RAID 10 IOA migration
          • Starting device parity protection
          • Starting device parity protection with hot spare protection
          • Managing device parity protection
            • Stopping device parity protection
            • Including disk units in a parity set
            • Excluding disk units from a parity set
            • Changing parity set optimization for device parity protection
            • Determining what disks are in a parity set using the DST menu
            • Determining what disks are in a parity set using the SST menu
            • Determining what disks are in a parity set using IBM Navigator for i
          • Device parity protection examples
            • Example: Writing operations on a failed disk unit
            • Example: Writing to a failed disk unit
            • Example: Writing data to a disk unit when its corresponding parity data is on a failed disk unit
        • Write cache and auxiliary write cache IOA
        • Mirrored protection
          • Mirrored protection concepts
            • How mirrored protection works
            • Mirrored protection and performance
            • Mirrored protection benefits
            • Mirrored protection costs and limitations
            • Concurrent maintenance
            • Advantages of remote disk unit mirroring
            • Disadvantages of remote load source disk unit mirroring for primary partitions
          • Planning for mirrored protection
            • Planning for mirrored protection
            • Deciding which disk pools to protect
            • Determining the disk units that are needed for mirrored protection
            • Planning for storage capacity
            • Planning for spare disk units
            • Planning for total storage capacity
            • Determining the level of mirrored protection that you want
              • Details: Levels of protection
              • Disk-unit level protection
              • Input/output bus level protection
              • IOA level protection
              • IOP-level protection
              • Bus-level protection
              • Expansion-unit level protection
              • Ring-level protection
              • Remote disk unit mirroring support
            • Comparing standard mirroring and remote mirroring
            • Determining the hardware that is needed for mirroring
              • Planning the minimum hardware needed to function
              • Planning additional hardware to achieve the level of protection
            • Determining the extra hardware needed for performance
            • Ordering and installing the new hardware
          • Setting up mirrored protection
            • Preparing your system for remote mirroring
            • Starting mirrored protection
            • Starting remote Load Source mirroring
          • Managing mirrored protection
            • Stopping mirrored protection
            • Suspending mirrored protection
            • Enabling remote load source mirroring
            • Finding remote buses
            • Changing remote bus resource names
        • Hot spare protection
          • Hot spare protection concepts
            • Costs and limitations of hot spare protection
          • Planning for hot spare protection
          • Starting hot spare protection
          • Managing hot spare protection
            • Stopping hot spare protection
            • Determining which parity sets are hot spare protected
            • Determining which disk units are hot spare protected
            • Displaying hot spare status
          • Troubleshooting hot spare protection
        • Multipath disk units
          • Considerations for multipath disk units
      • Disk protection checklists
        • Adding a new IOA
        • Adding disk units to an existing IOA
        • Removing disk units that have device parity protection from a disk pool without mirrored protection
        • Removing disk units that have device parity protection from a disk pool with mirrored protection
        • Upgrading the load source disk unit with device parity protection
        • Adding disk units without disk protection
        • Moving disk units between mirrored disk pools
        • Upgrading the load source disk unit with local mirroring using non-configured disk units
        • Upgrading the load source disk unit with local mirroring using newly installed disk units
        • NVMe failure with disk units mirror protected
    • Disk pools
      • Using disk pool
      • Types of disk pools
        • System disk pool
        • User disk pools
        • Basic disk pools
        • Independent disk pools
        • Primary, Secondary, UDFS disk pools
        • Disk pool groups
      • Disk pool concepts
        • Contrasting basic and independent disk pools
        • Disk pool benefits
          • Benefits of independent disk pools
        • Disk pool costs and limitations
      • Planning for disk pools
        • Using disk pools for improved performance
        • Library user disk pools
        • Nonlibrary user disk pools
        • System disk pool
          • Balancing a disk pool
          • Protecting your system disk pool
          • Capacity of the system disk pool
        • Planning for single system independent disk pools
          • Software requirements for single system independent disk pools
          • Application considerations for independent disk pools
          • Storing and printing spooled files
          • Object identification
          • Multiple system libraries
          • Supported and unsupported object types
          • Recommended structure for independent disk pools
      • Configuring disk pools
        • Creating a disk pool
        • Adding a disk unit or disk pool
        • Configuring independent disk pools
          • Converting UDFS disk pools
            • Converting a UDFS disk pool to primary
            • Converting a UDFS disk pool to secondary
          • Creating an independent disk pool
          • Creating a new disk pool group
      • Managing disk pools
        • Deleting a disk pool
        • Removing a disk unit from a disk pool
        • Moving a disk unit from a disk pool
        • Clearing data from a disk pool
        • Setting the threshold of a disk pool
        • Tracing disk pool data
        • Balancing disk pool data
        • Enabling automatic overflow recovery for a basic disk pool
        • Using disk pools with extensive journaling
        • Managing independent disk pools
          • Making a disk pool available
          • Making a disk pool unavailable
          • Attach Independent Disk pool
          • Backing up and recovering independent disk pools
            • Recovering an independent disk pool
            • Recovering a disk pool group
          • Releasing job reservations on an independent disk pool
      • Independent disk pool examples
        • Examples: Independent disk pool configurations
          • Examples: Dedicated independent disk pools
        • Example: Making independent disk pool available at startup
        • Independent disk pools with distinct databases
      • Disk pool checklists
        • Moving disk units between nonmirrored disk pools
        • Removing disk units without disk protection
        • Deleting a disk pool
    • Disk encryption
    • External load source disk unit
    • NVMe
      • NVMe concepts
      • Managing NVMe
        • Display NVM namespaces
        • Display NVM devices
        • Create NVM namespaces
        • Create NVM namespaces to match another NVM device
        • Create NVM namespaces to pair with Active mirror protected NVM units
        • Delete existing NVM namespaces
        • Sanitize/Erase NVM device
        • Format NVM device to prepare device for IBM i
        • NVMe password protection
          • Display the NVMe password protection policy and NVMe device attributes
          • Create the NVMe password protection policy
          • Change the password on the NVMe password protection policy
          • Delete the NVMe password protection policy
          • Add an NVMe to the existing NVMe password protection policy
          • Remove an NVMe from the existing NVMe password protection policy
          • Unlock an NVMe
          • Factory Reset an NVMe
    • Disk management checklist
      • Configuring disks on a new system
      • Adding disk units without disk protection
      • Adding disk units to an existing IOA
      • Adding a new IOA
      • Moving disk units between nonmirrored disk pools
      • Moving disk units between mirrored disk pools
      • Deleting a disk pool
      • Removing disk units without disk protection
      • Removing disk units that have device parity protection from a disk pool without mirrored protection
      • Removing disk units that have device parity protection from a disk pool with mirrored protection
      • Upgrading the load source disk unit with device parity protection
      • Upgrading the load source disk unit with local mirroring using non-configured disk units
      • Upgrading the load source disk unit with local mirroring using newly installed disk units
      • Upgrading the load source disk unit without disk protection
      • Installing a new partition using a NVMe as the load source disk unit
      • Removing an operational NVMe device from a partition
      • Upgrading the system ASP to NVMe - mirror protected
      • Upgrading the system ASP to NVMe - not mirror protected
      • Upgrading a user ASP to NVMe
      • Secure Data Erase for the IBM i
    • Frequently asked questions
    • Related information for Disk management
  • Journal management
    • What's new for 7.4
    • PDF file for Journal management
    • System-managed access-path protection
      • Benefits of SMAPP
      • How SMAPP works
      • How the system chooses access paths to protect
      • Effects of SMAPP on performance and storage
      • How SMAPP handles changes in disk pool configuration
      • SMAPP and access path journaling
      • SMAPP and independent disk pools
      • Starting SMAPP or changing SMAPP values
      • Displaying SMAPP status
    • Local journal management
      • Journal management concepts
        • Benefits of journal management
        • How journal management works
        • Journal entries
        • Journal management and system performance
        • Journal management with the save-while-active function
      • Planning for journal management
        • IBM Navigator for i versus the character-based interface for journaling objects
        • Planning which objects to journal
          • Reasons to journal access paths
          • Reasons to journal before-images
        • Planning for journal use of auxiliary storage
          • Frequently asked questions about journaling and disk arm usage
          • Functions that increase the journal receiver size
          • Methods to estimate the size of a journal receiver
          • Journal sizing and planning tool
          • Estimating the size of the journal receiver manually
          • Methods to reduce the storage that journal receivers use
          • Determining the type of disk pool in which to place journal receivers
          • Journal management and independent disk pools
        • Planning setup for journal receivers
          • Disk pool assignment for journal receivers
          • Library assignment for journal receivers
          • Naming conventions for journal receivers
          • Threshold (disk space) for journal receivers
            • Basing the size on your available auxiliary storage
            • Basing the size on how often you want to change journal receivers
          • Security for journal receivers
        • Planning setup for journals
          • Disk pool assignment for journals
          • Library assignment for journals
          • Naming conventions for journals
          • Journal and journal receiver association
          • Journal message queue
          • Manual versus system journal-receiver management
          • Automatic deletion of journal receivers
          • Receiver size options for journals
          • Journal object limit
          • Minimized entry-specific data for journal entries
            • Example: MINENTDTA (*FLDBDY)
          • Customization of the journal recovery count
          • Fixed-length options for journal entries
          • Journal cache
          • Object assignment to journals
      • Setting up journaling
        • Example: Setting up journaling
      • Starting and ending journaling and changing journaling attributes
        • Why you must save objects after you start journaling
        • Starting journaling
          • Journaling libraries
          • Journaling database physical files (tables)
          • Journal DB2 Multisystem files
          • Logical file journaling
          • Journaling integrated file system objects
          • Journal access paths
          • Journaling data areas and data queues
          • Automatically starting journaling
        • Changing journaling attributes of journaled objects without ending journaling
        • Ending journaling
      • Managing journals
        • Swapping, deleting, saving and restoring journals and receivers
          • Swapping journal receivers
          • Journal receiver chains
          • Resetting the sequence number of journal entries
          • Deleting journal receivers
          • Deleting journals
          • Saving and restoring journals and journal receivers
            • Using SAVCHGOBJ to save journal receivers
            • Methods to save journal receivers
            • Correct order for restoration of journaled objects
            • Deferring object journaling during restore
        • Evaluation of how system changes affect journal management
        • Keeping records of journaled objects
        • Security management for journals
        • Displaying information for journaled objects, journals, and receivers
        • Working with inoperable journal receivers
        • Comparing journal images
        • Working with IBM-supplied journals
        • Sending your own journal entries
        • Changing the state of local journals
        • Work with messages on the journal message queue
      • Scenario: Journal management
        • JKLPROD
        • JKLINT
        • JKLDEV
      • Recovery operations for journal management
        • Determining recovery needs using journal status
        • Recovery for journal management after abnormal system end
        • Recovering from a damaged journal receiver
        • Recovering a damaged journal
          • Associating receivers with journals
          • Recovering a damaged journal with the WRKJRN command
        • Recovery of journaled objects
          • Applying journaled changes
            • Integrated file system considerations for applying journaled changes
            • Applying journaled changes with the WRKJRN command
          • Removing journaled changes
            • Removing journaled changes with the WRKJRN command
          • Use of the QAJRNCHG file
          • Journaled changes with trigger programs
          • Journaled changes with referential constraints
          • Actions of applying or removing journaled changes by journal code
          • When the system ends applying or removing journaled changes
          • Example: Applying journaled changes
          • Example: Removing journaled changes
          • Example: Recovering objects with partial transactions
      • Journal entry information
        • Journal entry information finder
        • Journal code descriptions
        • All journal entries by code and type
        • Fixed-length portion of the journal entry
        • Layouts for the fixed-length portion of journal entries
        • Variable-length portion of the journal entry
        • Layouts for variable-length portion of journal entries
        • Working with journal entry information
          • Displaying and printing journal entries
            • Output for journal entries directed to a workstation
            • Output for journal entries directed to a database output file
            • Format of database output files
          • Displaying journal information for a table using IBM Navigator for i
          • Displaying journal entry information using the Display_Journal table function
          • Receiving journal entries in an exit program
            • Exit program to receive journal entries
            • Requesting block mode
          • Retrieving journal entries in a program
          • Working with pointers in journal entries
          • Replaying a database operation from a single journal entry
          • Replaying a non-database operation from a single journal entry
          • Considerations for entries which contain minimized entry-specific data
    • Remote journal management
      • Remote journal concepts
        • Network configurations for remote journals
        • Types of remote journals
        • Filtered remote journals
        • Journal state and delivery mode
        • Journal receivers associated with a remote journal
        • Process of adding remote journal
          • Library redirection with remote journals
          • Remote journal attributes
        • Supported communications protocols for remote journals
        • Release-to-release considerations for remote journals
      • Planning for remote journals
        • Candidates for remote journal management
        • Synchronous and asynchronous delivery mode for remote journals
        • Communications protocol and delivery mode for remote journals
        • Where the replication of journal entries start
        • Factors that affect remote journal performance
        • Remote journals and auxiliary storage
        • Journal receiver disk pool considerations
        • Remote journals and main storage
      • Setting up remote journals
        • Preparing to use remote journals
        • Adding remote journals
      • Removing remote journals
      • Activating and inactivating remote journals
        • Activating the replication of journal entries to a remote journal
          • Catch-up phase for remote journals
        • Relational database considerations for remote journal state
        • Automatically restarting remote journal
        • Inactivating the replication of journal entries to a remote journal
      • Managing remote journals
        • Keeping records of your remote journal network
        • Displaying remote journal function information
        • Evaluating how system changes affect your remote journal network
        • Getting information about remote journal entries
          • File identifier considerations for working with integrated file system entries
          • Confirmed and unconfirmed journal entries
          • Journal entries from a remote journal with library redirection
          • Retrieving journal entries from a remote journal during the catch-up phase
          • Remote journal considerations for retrieving journal entries when using commitment control
          • Remote journal considerations for retrieving journal entries when using journal caching
        • Journal receiver management with remote journals
        • Swapping journal receiver operations with remote journals
        • Considerations for save and restore operations with remote journals
          • Rules for saving and restoring journals
          • Rules for saving and restoring journal receivers
          • Considerations for restoring journaled objects
          • Considerations for restoring objects saved with SAVSTG
        • Remote journal considerations when restarting the server
        • Working with remote journal error messages
      • Scenarios: Remote journal management and recovery
        • Scenario: Data replication environment for remote journals
        • Scenario: Hot-backup environment
        • Scenario: Recovery for remote journaling
        • Details: Recovery for remote journaling scenario
    • Related information for journal management
  • Logical partitions
    • PDF file for Logical partitions
    • Partitioning with a IBM i
      • Logical partition concepts
      • Scenarios: Logical and guest partition
        • Scenario: Linux applications on a IBM i
      • Virtual Partition Manager
      • Creating logical partitions
      • Managing logical partitions
        • Managing logical partitions by using VPM, IVM, and HMC
          • Logical partition authority
        • Restarting and powering down a system with logical partitions
          • Powering down a system with logical partitions
          • Restarting a system with logical partitions
          • Changing the operating mode for a logical partition
          • Changing the IPL source for a logical partition
      • Troubleshooting logical partitions
    • Related information for Logical partitions
  • 중앙 관리
  • System values
    • PDF file for System values
    • What's new for IBM i 7.4
    • System value finder
    • System value categories
      • System values: Auditing overview
        • Auditing system values: Activate action auditing
        • Auditing system values: Do not audit objects in QTEMP
        • Auditing system values: Activate object auditing
        • Auditing system values: Audit journal error action
        • Auditing system values: Maximum journal entries before writing to auxiliary storage
        • Auditing system values: Default auditing for newly created objects
      • System values: Date and time overview
        • Date and time system values: System date
        • Date and time system values: Leap-year adjustment
        • Date and time system values: Time of day
        • Date and time system values: Offset from Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
        • Date and time system values: Time zone
        • Date and time system values: Time adjustment
      • System values: Devices overview
        • Devices system values: Local controllers and devices
        • Devices system values: Device naming convention
        • Devices system values: Remote controllers and devices
        • Devices system values: Pass-through devices and Telnet
        • Devices system values: Action to take when a device error occurs on the workstation
      • System values: International overview
        • International system values: Date and time
        • International system values: Decimal format
        • International system values: Currency symbol
        • International system values: Language
        • International system values: Country/Region
        • International system values: Default system keyboard
        • International system values: Coded character set ID
        • International system values: Graphic character set/Code page
        • International system values: Character identifier control
        • International system values: Sort sequence
        • International system values: Coded font name
        • International system values: Coded font point size
        • International system values: Locale
        • International system values: Set job attributes based on locale
        • International system values: Double-byte capable
      • System values: Jobs overview
        • Jobs system values: Allow jobs to be interrupted to run user-defined exit programs
        • Jobs system values: Allocate storage at restart
        • Jobs system values: Allocate additional storage as needed
        • Jobs system values: Maximum jobs
        • Jobs system values: Initial printer output block size
        • Jobs system values: Maximum printer output files
        • Jobs system values: Maximum job log size
        • Jobs system values: When maximum size is reached
        • Jobs system values: Time-out interval for inactive jobs
        • Jobs system values: When a job reaches time-out
        • Jobs system values: Time-out interval for disconnected jobs
        • Jobs system values: Produce printer output for job log
        • Jobs system values: When a function in a multithreaded job is not threadsafe
        • Jobs system values: Detach printer output after jobs have ended
        • Jobs system values: Maximum time for immediate end
      • System values: Library lists overview
        • Library lists system values: System library list
        • Library lists system values: User library list
      • System values: Messages and service overview
        • Messages and service system values: History log file size
        • Messages and service system values: Display status messages
        • Messages and service system values: Message queue for lines, controllers, and devices
        • Messages and service system values: Journal accounting information
        • Messages and service system values: Problem log filter
        • Messages and service system values: Minimum retention
        • Messages and service system values: Log software problems detected by the system
        • Messages and service system values: Service log for unmonitored escape messages
        • Messages and service system values: Allow remote service of system
      • System values: Password overview
        • Password system values: Password level
          • Verifying passwords when changing password levels
        • Password system values: Minimum password length
        • Password system values: Maximum password length
        • Password system values: Require at least one digit
        • Password system values: Restrict consecutive digits
        • Password system values: Restricted characters
        • Password system values: Restrict repeating characters
        • Password system values: Require a new character in each position
        • Password system values: Password reuse cycle
        • Password system values: Password expiration
        • Password system values: Password expiration warning interval
        • Password system values: Minimum time between password changes
        • Password system values: Password validation program
        • Password system values: Password rules
      • System values: Performance overview
        • Performance system values: Dynamically adjust job priorities of interactive jobs
        • Performance system values: Dynamically adjust job priorities within priority bands
        • Performance system values: Automatically adjust memory pools and activity levels
        • Performance system values: Machine memory pool size
        • Performance system values: Base memory pool minimum size
        • Performance system values: Base memory pool maximum eligible threads
        • Performance system values: Move interactive jobs to base pool at end of time slice
        • Performance system values: Communications configuration recovery
        • Performance system values: Communications arbiter jobs at restart
        • Performance system values: Available display station pass-through server jobs
        • Performance system values: Parallel processing for queries and indexes
        • Performance system values: Database query time limit
        • Performance system values: Lock libraries in a user job's library search list
        • Performance system values: Allow background database statistics collection
        • Performance system values: Automatically adjust thread resources
        • Performance system values: Thread affinity
      • System values: Power control overview
        • Power control system values: When power failure occurs
        • Power control system values: Message queue and library
      • System values: Printing overview
        • Printing system values: Default printer
        • Printing system values: Format when using Print key
        • Printing system values: Printed page footer
      • System values: Restart overview
        • Restart system values: Type of restart
        • Restart system values: Automatically restart after power failure
        • Restart system values: Allow remote power-on and restart
        • Restart system values: Allow scheduled restart
        • Restart system values: Maximum time for immediate shutdown
        • Restart system values: Startup program to set up system
        • Restart system values: Controlling subsystem/library
        • Restart system values: If console problem occurs
        • Restart system values: Wait for database recovery before completing restart
        • Restart system values: Previous system ending status
        • Restart system values: Previous restart type
        • Restart system values: Previous restart - printers started
      • System values: Save and restore overview
        • Save and restore system values: Convert objects during restore
        • Save and restore system values: Allow restore of security sensitive objects
        • Save and restore system values: Verify object signatures during restore
        • Save and restore system values: Save access paths
      • System values: Security overview
        • Security system values: Security level
        • Security system values: Allow server security information to be retained
        • Security system values: Users who can cause programs to use adopted authority from calling programs
        • Security system values: Default authority for newly created objects in QSYS.LIB file system
        • Security system values: Allow use of shared or mapped memory with write capability
        • Security system values: Allow these objects in
        • Security system values: Use registered exit programs to scan the root (/), QOpenSys, and user-defined file systems
        • Security system values: Scan control
        • Security system values: Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocols
        • Security system values: Transport Layer Security cipher control
        • Security system values: Transport Layer Security cipher specification list
      • System values: Sign-on overview
        • Sign-on system values: Incorrect sign-on attempts
        • Sign-on system values: When maximum is reached
        • Sign-on system values: Display sign-on information
        • Sign-on system values: Maximum number of device sessions a user can have
        • Sign-on system values: Restrict privileged users to specific device sessions
        • Sign-on system values: Remote sign-on
      • System values: Storage overview
        • Storage system values: Automatically clean up unused printer output storage
        • Storage system values: Maximum system disk pool usage
        • Storage system values: When maximum usage is reached
      • System values: System and user defaults overview
        • System and user defaults system values: Model number
        • System and user defaults system values: Serial number
        • System and user defaults system values: Processor feature code
        • System and user defaults system values: Console name
        • System and user defaults system values: Assistance level
        • System and user defaults system values: Attention program
        • System and user defaults system values: Default user environment
        • System and user defaults system values: Use type-ahead feature
        • System and user defaults system values: Processor multitasking
      • Network attributes
    • Obsolete system values
    • Character-based categories versus IBM Navigator for i categories
    • System value concepts
      • Lock function of security-related system values
      • Effects of system value settings on restore operations
    • System value parameters
    • Managing system values
      • Comparing and updating system values
      • Completing the security wizard
      • Locking and unlocking security-related system values
      • Preparing system values for a restore operation
        • Planning system values for a restore operation
        • Configuring system values for a restore operation
        • Running a restore command
      • Saving system values
      • Securing system access levels
      • Working with system values inventory
  • 시간 관리
    • 시간 관리에 대한 PDF 파일
    • 시간 관리 개념
      • 시간
      • 협정 세계시(UTC)
      • 시간 유지보수 애플리케이션
      • 시간 조정
      • 시간대
        • 초기 시간대 설정
      • 일광 절약시
    • 시나리오: 시간대와 시간 조정에 대해 작업
      • 시나리오: 축약 이름 및 전체 이름에 대해 메세지 파일을 사용하여 시간대 작성
        • 표준시와 DST 이름을 지정하는 메세지 파일 작성
        • 사용할 메세지 파일을 지정하는 새 시간대 작성
      • 시나리오: 시간 민감성 프로그램으로 인해 DST 시간 또는 종료 변경
        • 방법 1: 현재 시간대에서 일광 절약시(DST) 지연
        • 방법 2: 적절한 DST 값으로 새 시간대 작성
      • 시나리오: 시스템 시간을 3분까지 조정
    • 시간 관리 설정
      • 시스템의 네트워크 검사
      • 시간대(QTIMZON) 시스템 값 설정
        • IBM i V5R3 이상으로 업그레이드하기 전 시간대 설정
        • 오퍼레이팅 시스템을 업그레이드하기 전에 연도 오프셋 값 설정
        • 유인 IPL 동안 시간대 설정
        • IPL 후에 시간대 설정
      • 시간 유지보수 설정
        • 시간 유지보수 애플리케이션 프로그래밍 추가 정보
        • 사용자의 시스템을 위한 시간 유지보수 애플리케이션으로서 SNTP
    • 시스템 시간 관리
      • 시스템 시간 갱신
        • 시간 조정 기능 사용
        • 하루 중 시간 값을 수동으로 변경
      • 작업 시간 보기
      • 시간과 관련된 시스템 값 확인
    • 시간대 관리
      • 시간대 작성
      • 시간대 편집
      • 시간대 삭제
      • 시간대 등록정보 확인
      • 시간대 메세지 등록정보 확인
    • 시간 관리 문제해결
      • IBM i 설치 동안 UTC로부터 오프셋이 올바르지 않게 설정됨
      • 시스템 시간이 올바르지 않고 작업이 적절한 시간으로 실행되지 않음
      • 시스템 시간이 2시간 넘게 차이남
      • DST에 대해 1 시간이 아닌 2 시간을 조정한 시스템 시간
      • 시간 조정이 올바르지 않음
      • 내 시간대를 편집할 수 없습니다
      • 내 시간대가 표준시와 DST 이름을 올바르게 표시하지 않음
      • SNTP(Simple Network Time Protocol)를 중단하려고 함
        • 방법 1: 현재 SNTP 세션 중단
        • 방법 2: SNTP 중단
        • 추가 복구 단계
  • Work management
    • PDF file for Work management
    • Introduction to work management
      • Your system as a business
      • A job's life
        • Submitting a job
        • The job enters the job queue
        • The job enters the subsystem
        • The subsystem uses memory from the memory pool to run the job
        • The job finishes and moves to the output queue
      • How work gets done
        • What work is
        • What happens before work enters the system
        • How work enters the system
        • How work gets processed
        • How work leaves the system
    • Concepts
      • The structure of your system
        • Subsystems shipped with the system
        • Start-up programs
        • Types of start-ups
        • Powering down your system
        • IBM Navigator for i
      • Subsystems
        • The controlling subsystem
        • Why consider multiple subsystems
        • Subsystem description
          • Subsystem description attributes
          • Work entries
            • Autostart job entries
            • Communications entries
            • Job queue entries
            • Prestart job entries
            • Prestart jobs for servers
            • Workstation entries
          • Routing entries
            • Class
            • Comparison data
            • Maximum active routing steps
            • Memory pool ID
        • How a subsystem starts
          • How workstation devices are allocated
          • Scenario: Workstation allocation
      • Memory pools
        • Types of memory pools
        • Pool numbering schemes
        • Memory pool allocation
        • Memory pool activity level
      • Jobs
        • Proper authority
        • Job characteristics
          • Job name syntax
          • Job Attributes
          • Job description
          • Job descriptions and security
          • Call stacks
          • Class object
          • Job user identity
          • Job user identity examples
          • Threads
            • Proper thread authority
            • Thread status
          • Locked objects
        • Job types
          • Autostart jobs
          • Batch jobs
            • How a batch job starts
            • Spawn batch jobs
          • Communication jobs
          • Interactive jobs
            • How an interactive job starts
            • Disconnecting interactive jobs
            • I/O error for job requester device
            • Interactive jobs and routing steps
            • Programs that control the routing step
            • Workstation versus user based routing
            • When jobs end at the same time
          • Prestart jobs
            • Prestart job name
            • How prestart jobs work
            • Prestart job entries
            • Prestart job handling program start requests
            • Prestart jobs for batch applications
            • Performance tips for prestart jobs
            • Spooled file and the prestart job entry
          • Reader and writer jobs
          • Server jobs
          • System jobs
            • System startup jobs
            • System arbiters
            • System communication jobs
            • Database jobs
            • Other system jobs
      • Job scheduling options
        • Management Central scheduler
        • Advanced Job Scheduler
        • Job schedule entries
          • Examples: job schedule entry
        • The submit job command
        • Job scheduler considerations
        • Job scheduling and system availability
      • Job queues
        • Ordered list
        • How a job queue works
        • How jobs are taken from a job queue
        • Job queue entry
        • How job queues are allocated to a subsystem
        • Multiple job queues
        • How jobs are taken from multiple job queues
        • Job queue security
      • Output queues
        • Attributes of an output queue
        • Order of files
        • Spooled files
          • Output spooling
          • Output queues and spooled files
          • Default system output queues
          • Spooling writers
          • Spooling writer commands
          • Input spooling
          • Job input commands
          • Inline data files
          • Considerations for opening inline data files
      • Job logs
        • How job logs are created
        • Job log pending
        • Job log server
        • Job log display characteristics
          • Job log headings
          • Messages
        • Interactive job logs
        • QHST History Log
          • Format of the History Log
          • Performance information and QHST
        • Spooled files
      • Job accounting
        • How job accounting works
          • Job Accounting operating characteristics
          • Accounting Journal Processing
        • When to use job accounting
        • Security and job accounting
        • About the accounting code
        • Resource accounting
        • Resource accounting data
        • Prestart communications jobs and job accounting
        • System job processing for job accounting
        • Batch processing and job accounting
        • Interactive processing and job accounting
        • Printer file accounting
        • Journal entries for job accounting
          • Job accounting journal entry field information
          • Printer file accounting data for direct print and spooled print
            • DP accounting journal information
            • SP accounting journal information
    • Managing work
      • Calling a special IPL recovery program
      • Monitoring system activity
        • Checking memory pool usage
        • Controlling levels of system activity
          • Examples: activity control relationships
        • Determining the status of a job
        • Monitoring a subsystem
        • Determining the number of subsystems using a memory pool
        • Viewing job performance statistics
        • Viewing overall system status
          • Checking disk status
      • Managing jobs
        • Common job tasks
          • Starting a job
            • Starting a batch job that is waiting in the job queue
            • Starting a prestart job
          • Ending a job
            • Ending a job: controlled
            • Ending a job: immediate
          • Finding jobs
          • Viewing jobs on the job queue
          • Viewing jobs in the subsystem
          • Viewing job attributes
          • Viewing call stacks
          • Placing a job on the job queue
          • Moving a job to a different job queue
          • Moving a job up in priority
          • Tips for setting job priorities
          • Submitting a job once
          • Viewing job affinity information
        • Managing job descriptions
          • Creating a job description
          • Changing a job description
          • Using a job description
          • Controlling the job attribute source
          • Deleting a job description
        • Manage batch jobs
          • Submitting a batch job
            • Inline data files
            • Considerations for opening inline data files
          • Starting a batch job that is waiting in the job queue
        • Managing interactive jobs
          • Controlling inactive jobs and workstations
          • Ending interactive jobs
          • Disconnecting all jobs from a device
          • Job disconnection considerations
          • Avoiding a long-running function from a workstation
        • Managing prestart jobs
          • Starting a prestart job
          • Queueing or rejecting program start requests
          • Tuning prestart job entries
          • Changing job attributes for prestart jobs
          • Ending a prestart job
        • Managing job class objects
          • Creating a class object
          • Changing a class object
        • Managing threads
          • Viewing threads running under a specific job
          • What you can do with threads
          • Viewing thread properties
          • Ending or deleting threads
      • Managing job scheduling
        • Scheduling a batch job using IBM Navigator for i
        • Scheduling a job using Management Central Scheduler
        • Advanced Job Scheduler
          • PDF file for Advanced Job Scheduler
          • Advanced Job Scheduler on the web
            • Advanced Job Scheduler properties
              • General Properties
              • Schedules
              • Job Controls/Applications
              • Library Lists
              • Command Variables
              • Permissions
              • Data libraries
              • Setting up systems and groups
              • Users
              • Calendars
            • Scheduled jobs
              • Scheduled job list
              • Creating a scheduled job
              • Scheduled Job Properties
            • Job groups
              • Job group job list
              • Creating a job group
            • Notification
            • Scheduled job activity
              • Scheduled job activity list
              • Scheduled job activity properties
            • Activity log
              • Activity log list
              • Activity log properties
          • Advanced Job Scheduler for Wireless
          • Scheduling jobs with Advanced Job Scheduler
            • Setting up the Advanced Job Scheduler
              • Assigning the general properties
              • Specifying permission levels
              • Setting up a scheduling calendar
              • Setting up a holiday calendar
              • Setting up a fiscal calendar
              • Specifying a mail server to use for notification
              • Setting up multiple scheduling environments
              • Setting up Job Controls/Applications
              • Setting up Library Lists
              • Setting up Command Variables
              • Assigning data libraries to users
              • Setting up systems and groups
                • Adding a system or system group
                  • Communication type
            • Managing the Advanced Job Scheduler
              • Creating and scheduling a job
              • Creating and scheduling a job group
              • Predefined schedules
                • Setting up a predefined schedule
                • Adding a schedule to a scheduled job
                • Adding a schedule to a holiday calendar
              • Creating a temporary scheduled job
              • Scheduling job dependencies
              • The Work Flow Manager
                • Creating a work flow
                • Starting a work flow
                • Working with work flows
              • Monitoring job activity for the Advanced Job Scheduler
                • Scheduled job activity
                • Specifying the activity retention
                • Viewing the scheduled job activity details
                • Viewing the scheduled job activity for a specific job
                • Viewing the activity log details
                • Viewing the activity log for a specific job
              • Monitoring for messages with Advanced Job Scheduler
              • Creating and working with local data area
              • Creating and working with application controls and job controls
              • Working with notification
              • Working with library lists
              • Working with command variables
            • Working with Advanced Job Scheduler for Wireless
              • Hardware and software requirements
              • Selecting a device
              • Configuring your wireless environment
                • Configuring your Web application server
                • Selecting a language
              • Connecting to your IBM i operating system
              • Customizing your connection
              • Managing Advanced Job Scheduler for Wireless
            • Troubleshooting the Advanced Job Scheduler
        • Working with job schedule entries
          • Adding a job schedule entry
          • Changing a job schedule entry
          • Holding a job schedule entry
          • Printing a list of job scheduled entries
          • Releasing a job schedule entry
          • Removing a job schedule entry
      • Managing subsystems
        • Common subsystem tasks
          • Viewing subsystem attributes
          • Stopping a subsystem
          • Starting a subsystem
        • Creating a subsystem description
          • Adding autostart job entries
          • Adding communications entries
          • Adding job queue entries
          • Adding prestart job entries
          • Adding routing entries
          • Adding workstation entries
          • Creating a sign-on display file
          • Specifying the new sign-on display
        • Changing a subsystem description
          • Changing autostart job entries
          • Changing communication entries
          • Changing job queue entries
          • Changing prestart entries
          • Changing routing entries
          • Changing workstation entries
          • Changing the sign-on display
        • Deleting a subsystem description
          • Removing autostart job entries
          • Removing communication entries
          • Removing job queue entries
          • Removing prestart job entries
          • Removing routing entries
          • Removing workstation entries
        • Configuring an interactive subsystem
          • Creating a library
          • Creating a class
          • Creating the subsystem description
          • Creating a job queue
          • Adding a routing entry
          • Adding workstation entries
          • Customizing QINTER
          • Configuring the console
          • Assigning users to a specific subsystem
            • Telnet device initialization and terminal exit points
            • Device selection exit point
            • PC5250 (System i Access) workstation ID support
            • OS/400 Telnet Client
            • Manually creating virtual controllers and devices
        • Configuring a server subsystem
          • Creating a user-defined server subsystem
          • Routing server jobs based on client IP address
          • Routing server jobs by user
        • Creating a controlling subsystem
        • Placing the system in restricted state
      • Managing memory pools
        • Viewing memory pool information
        • Determining the number of subsystems using a memory pool
        • Determining the number of jobs in a memory pool
        • Determining in which pool a single job is running
        • Managing tuning parameters for shared pools
        • Managing a pool's configuration
        • Changing memory pool size
        • Creating a private memory pool
      • Managing job queues
        • Assigning the job queue to the subsystem
          • How a subsystem handles several job queues
        • Changing the number of jobs running simultaneously in a job queue
        • Clearing a job queue
        • Creating job queues
        • Deleting a job queue
        • Determining which subsystem has a job queue allocated
        • Holding a job queue
        • Releasing a job queue
        • Moving a job to a different job queue
        • Placing a job on the job queue
        • Searching all job queues for a specific job
        • Specifying the priority for the job queue
      • Managing output queues
        • Creating an output queue
        • Assigning the output queue to a job or job queue
        • Accessing printer output
        • Clearing output queues
        • Deleting an output queue
        • Viewing output queues on the system
      • Managing job logs
        • Managing the job log server
          • Reconfiguring the job log server
          • Ending the job log server
        • Starting the job log server
        • How to display job logs
        • What to do when the job log does not display
        • Specifying the output queue for a job log
        • Stopping production of a specific job log
        • Preventing the production of a job log
        • Controlling information in a job log
          • Changing the log level of a job
          • Controlling batch job log information
        • Deleting job log output files
        • Producing printer output from job log pending
        • Cleaning up job log pending
      • Managing job accounting
        • Setting up job accounting
        • Controlling the assignment of accounting codes
        • Displaying the data collected
        • Converting job accounting journal entries
        • Recovering and job accounting
          • Damaged job accounting journal or journal receiver
          • Accessing the CPF1303 Message
      • Managing workload groups
        • Setting up workload groups
        • Displaying workload groups
        • Auditing workload groups
    • Reference
      • Group jobs
        • Attention key handling program
        • Group job performance tips
    • Troubleshooting for work management
      • My job is hung
      • My job is experiencing poor performance
      • Prestart job investigation
    • Related information for Work management
• Troubleshooting
  • PDF file for Troubleshooting
  • How your system manages problems
  • Detecting problems
    • System reference codes
    • IPL SRC finder
    • Messages
    • Message queues
    • Logs
    • Watch for event function
      • Commands and APIs about watch for event function
      • Scenario: Using the watch for event function with an exit program
        • Starting a watch session
        • Ending a watch session
        • Displaying details of watch sessions
      • Scenario: Exit program for Watch for Event
  • Analyzing and handling problems
    • Problem analysis procedures
      • Starting problem analysis
      • Collecting system reference codes
      • Symptom and recovery actions
      • Recovering from a system power problem
      • Recovering when the Operations Console remote control panel feature is not working correctly
      • Recovering when the control panel push buttons or lights are not working correctly
      • Recovering from IPL or system failures
      • Recovering from a workstation failure
      • Recovering from a tape or optical device problem
      • Recovering from a disk or disk drive problem
      • Recovering from a communications problem
      • Recovering from system hang or loop condition
      • Recovering from an intermittent problem
      • Recovering when the console does not vary on
    • System reference code list
    • Performing a main storage dump
      • Performing an automatic main storage dump
      • Performing a manual main storage dump
      • Performing a manual main storage dump on a logical partition
      • Copying a current main storage dump
      • Reporting a main storage dump
      • Deleting a main storage dump
    • CL commands for problem analysis
    • Problem-handling menus
    • Using authorized program analysis reports
  • Reporting problems overview
    • Gathering information with the problem summary form
      • Problem summary form for single partition (model 270 and 8xx)
      • Problem summary form for single partition (on models other than 270 and 8xx)
      • Problem summary form for multiple partitions (model 8xx)
      • Problem summary form for multiple partitions (on models other than 8xx)
    • Contacting IBM support
    • Reporting problems detected by the system
    • Tracking problems
      • Querying problem status
        • Querying problem status using the QRYPRBSTS command
        • Querying problem status using the WRKPRB command
      • Finding a previously reported problem
      • Adding notes to a problem record
  • Reference information
    • Details: Messages
      • Types of messages
        • Error messages
          • Using error messages
            • Examples: Using error messages
          • Messages in a message queue
        • Alerts
          • Displaying alerts
      • Managing messages
        • Displaying messages
          • Displaying message properties
          • Displaying messages in the QSYSMSG message queue
        • Sending messages
        • Responding to messages
        • Removing messages
        • Printing messages
    • Details: Message queues
      • Types of message queues
      • Managing message queues
        • Creating message queues
        • Creating message queue QSYSMSG for severe messages
        • Changing the attributes of message queues
        • Changing the message queue for a printer
        • Printing all messages in the message queue
    • Details: Logs
      • Job logs
        • Controlling the content of the job log
          • Details: Controlling the content of the job log using the message level value
          • Details: Controlling the content of the job log using the message severity value
          • Details: Controlling the content of the job log using the message-text-level value
        • Displaying job logs
      • History logs
        • Displaying the list of history log files
        • Displaying the contents of the QHST history log
      • Problem logs
        • Printing error logs
        • Displaying error logs
    • Details: CL commands for problem handling
      • Using the Analyze Problem command
        • Analyzing a problem with OPENED status
        • Additional method to analyze a problem with OPENED status
        • Examples: The Analyze Problem command
      • Using the Verify Communications command
        • Examples: The Verify Communications command
      • Using the Verify Tape command
      • Using the Work with Alerts command
        • Example: The Work with Alerts command
      • Using the Work with Problems command
        • Examples: The Work with Problems command
      • Running the Work with Problems command
      • Using the Display Problems command
      • Using the Change Problem command
      • Using the Change Contact Information command
    • Details: Problem-handling menus
      • Using the NETPRB menu
      • Using the NETWORK menu
      • Using the PROBLEM menu
      • Using the PROBLEM2 menu
      • Using the TECHHELP menu
      • Using the USERHELP menu
    • Details: Authorized program analysis report
    • Determining the primary or alternative consoles
    • Replacing the battery power unit on models 5xx and expansion units FC 507x and FC 508x
  • Related information for Troubleshooting
• 관련 링크
  • Experience reports
    • Database Migration
    • Job Accounting
    • Reclaim spooled file storage
    • Reducing System IPL Time
    • Restricted State
    • Tuning prestart job entries
  • 웹 페이지
• IBM i glossary
  • A
  • B
  • C
  • D
  • E
  • F
  • G
  • H
  • I
  • J
  • K
  • L
  • M
  • N
  • O
  • P
  • Q
  • R
  • S
  • T
  • U
  • V
  • W
  • X
  • Z
  • Symbols and Numerics